RESTRICTED

1
CONTENTS

SECTION SUBJECT PAGE

CHAPTER I - FIRE DISCIPLINE 5- 63

1 GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND DEFINITIONS 5

2 FORM IN WHICH ORDERS ARE GIVEN 7
3 OUTLINE PROCEDURES FOR THE CONDUCT OF A SHOOT 12
4 INITIAL ORDERS 13
5 NATURE OF TARGET 15
6 AMMUNITION 18
7 INDICATION OF TARGET AND OT BEARING 22
8 LINE AND CONCENTRATION 22
9 CLINOMETER LAYING 24
10 ANGLE OF SIGHT 25
11 POSN CORRESCTION AND GUN CORRECTION 26
12 FIRE BY ORDER 27
13 METHODS OF RANGING 28
14 RULES FOR LOADING THE GUNS 29
15 CORRECTOR OR FUZE SETTING 30
16 ELEVATION 31
17 METHODS OF FIRE FOR EFFECT 33
18 INTERVAL, TARGET DESCRIPTION AND FIRE 38
19 SUMMARY OF RULES FOR FIRING DURING A SHOOT 38
20 SUMMARY OF RULES FOR APPLICATION OF ORDERS DURING A 38
SHOOT
21 METHOD OF CORRECTING FIRE AND USE OF ORDER REPEAT 39
22 USE OF THE ORDERS "SWEEP" AND "SEARCH" 40
23 USE OF THE ORDERS ENGAGE', "TOT" AND "BOMBARD" 41
24 SUSPENSION OF A SHOOT 42
25 TERMINATION OF A SHOOT 43
26 CORRECTING MISTAKES IN ORDERS 44
27 CORRECTING MISTAKES IN LAYING 45
28 REPORTS FROM THE GPO TO THE OP 45
29 AVOIDANCE OF DELAY 49
30 PASSAGE AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ORDERS 50
31 SPECIAL ORDERS AND CONVENTION FOR USE OF STAR SHELL 51
32 ORDERS CONCERNING A MOVE 52
33 ENGAGEMENT OF TANKS BY DIRECT FIRE 53
34 ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS OTHER THAN TANKS BY DIRECT FIRE 55

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
2
SECTION SUBJECT PAGE

35 CHANGES APPLICABLE TO 155 MM FH 77B02 56

CHAPTER II - DUTIES IN ACTION AND GUN-END PROCEDURES 64-139

36 DUTIES AT REGIMENT AND BATTERY LEVEL 64

37 PREPARATION AND OCCUPATION OF A BATTERY POSITION 71
38 SURVEY AT BATTERY LEVEL 108
39 LAYING THE GUNS IN THE C OF A 110
40 DIRECTING THE GUNS AT THE TARGET AND TRANSFERRING 114
TARGET DATA TO GUNS
41 LAYOUT OF REGIMENTAL HEADQUARTERS AND BATTERY 122
COMMAND POST
42 HIGH ANGLE FIRE 126
43 CREST CLEARANCE 127
44 BASIC DRILLS AND CHECKS IN COMMAND POST 135
45 DETECTION OF ERRORS AT GUN POSITION 137

CHAPTER III - PROCEDURE FOR OBSERVATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE 140- 160

46 GENERAL 140
47 INDICATION OF TARGET 142
48 ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE 145
49 OBSERVATION OF FIRE 149
50 OBSERVER'S BASIC DRILLS 156
CHAPTER IV - ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS 161- 221

51 PLANNING THE SHOOT 161

52 IMMEDIATE NEUTRALISATION SHOOT 171
53 HE AIRBURST SHOOTS 174
54 REGISTRATION SHOOTS 184
55 STANDARD LINEAR CONCENTRATION 191
56 REGIMENTAL AND HIGHER TARGETS 194
57 PLANNING THE USE OF SMOKE 201
58 NEUTRALISATION WITH SMOKE 211

CHAPTER V - MISCELLANEOUS SHOOTS AND PROCEDURES 222-296

59 ILLUMINATION SHOOTS 222

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
3
SECTION SUBJECT PAGE

60 AIR OBSERVATION POST SHOOTS 233

61 RANGING BY LADDER (AIR OP) 234
62 LADDER RANGING FOR ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS BY 236
GROUND OP
63 LOCATION AND ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS BY STOP WATCH 241
64 ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS BY INSTRUMENT CROSS 248
OBSERVATION
65 DISTRIBUTION OF MASSED ARTILLERY FIRE 254
66 FIRST SALVO EFFECTIVENESS (FSE) 269
67 PRECISION SHOOT 274
68 INDICATION SHOOT 277
69 INDICATION OF TARGETS AND CONTROL OF ARTILLERY FIRE 278
BY OTHER ARMS
70 PROCEDURE OF ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS USING 282
KRASNOPOL AMN
71 ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS USING INTEGRATED 287
OBSERVATION EQUIPMENT (TI - IOE)
72 DOOAF PROCEDURE 294

CHAPTER VI - TARGET RECORD AND CHANGE OF GRID 297-328

73 TARGET RECORD - GENERAL AND NUMBERING 297

74 TARGET RECORD WITHIN THE BATTERY - GENERAL 304
75 RECORDING A TARGET 308
76 QE LAYING AND HIGH ANGLE TARGET RECORD 311
77 THE ADJUTANT'S TARGET RECORD 314
78 CHANGE OF GRID 314
79 CHANGE OF GRID DUTIES IN THE COMMAND POST 317
80 TARGET RECORD EXAMPLES 320

CHAPTER VII - ESTIMATION OF MET CORRECTIONS 329-347

81 DATUM POINT 329

82 WITNESS POINT 339
83 MET TELEGRAM 341
84 CORRECTION OF THE MOMENT IN MOUNTAINS 345

SECTION SUBJECT PAGE

CHAPTER VIII - REDUCTION AND PREDICTION 348-365

85 PREDICTION 348
86 PREDICTED FIRE WITH TIME AND VT FUZES 353
87 CHOICE OF AMMUNITION FOR PREDICTED FIRE 358
88 REDUCTION OF GUN DATA 360

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
4
CHAPTER IX - FIRE PLANNING 366-413

89 INTRODUCTION TO FIRE PLANNING 366

90 MAKING THE FIRE PLAN 368
91 REGISTRATION IN A FIRE PLAN 375
92 FIRE PLAN ORDERS 380
93 BRIEFING OF ANCHOR OBSERVATION POST OFFICERS 385
FORWARD OBSERVATION OFFICERS AND COMMAND POSTS
94 DF PLANNING 387
95 DUTIES AT REGIMENTAL HEADQUARTER 389
96 DUTIES AT BATTERY COMMAND POST 390
97 DUTIES AT GUN PLATFORM 394
98 CONCENTRATIONS AND STANDARD LINEAR 395
CONCENTRATIONS
99 PROGRAMME SHOOT FORM AND GUN PROGRAMMES 397
100 MODIFICATIONS TO FIRE PLAN 403
101 ALLOWANCES FOR ERRORS IN PREDICTION 405

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
5
CHAPTER-1

FIRE DISCIPLINE

SECTION 1

GENERAL PRINCIPLES AND DEFINITIONS

General Principles

1. Fire discipline fire per control karne ki ek bhasha hain jiska sambhand OP officer,
GPO aur guns ke sath hota hain. Is mein kuch words, phrases, rules aur conventions
istemal hote hain jinka khas matalab hota hain aur gun par definite action hota hain.
Sabhi ranks jinka sambhand fire control ke sath hain unke liye is bhasha aur usse hone
wale actions ke bare me janakari hona nihayat hi jaruri hain.

2. Fire discipline me un orders ki sabhi details shamil hain jis se ki ek gun, troop,
battery ya ek se jyada batteries/ regiments ke fire par control kiya jasake.

3. Aim. Fire discipline ka aim yah yakeen karna hain ki jab fire order diya jaye to
bilkul originator ke irade ke mutabik, guns par, kam se kam deri me sahi action liya
jasake.

4. Sabhi fire order ka matalab acchi tarah se define kiya hua hona chahiye aur sabhi
ranks jinka is ke sath sambhand hain woh is ke bare me acchi tarah janate ho. Fire
discipline ke rules ke upar amal karne se hi accha fire produce kar sakte hain.

5. Users ko chahiye ki wah fire discipline ke rules aur principle ko samajdari se

apply kare. Yadi kisi order ka matalb clear hain to turant amal kiya jayega. Fire ko sirf is
liye delay nahi kiya jayega ki wah order is pamphlet me diye gaye example ke mutabik
nahi hain.

6. “Stand fast” ke alawa baki sabhi fire order fresh sequence of initial order se
cancel ho jate hain. “Stand fast” ke alawa baki sabhi individual fire order “Cancel
_____________” ke istemal se cancel hote hain. GPO cumulative order ke sath word
“Cancel” ka istemal nahi karega.

7. Sequence of Orders. Drill me teji lane ke liye aur koi galti ya chuta hua order
jaldi pata karne ke liye sabhi orders ek standard sequence me hi diye jate hain aur bina
kisi khas karan ke inko badali nahi kiya jata.

8. Responsibility of the GPO. Battery position me GPO fire discipline ka

jimmewar hota hain. Uski jimewari me nimanlikhit shamil hain :-

(a) Mile huye sabhi orders ka sampadan(editing) karna.

(b) Sabhi orders ko gun par is prakar se pass karna taki sabhi use acchi tarah
samaj sake aur yah yakeen karna ki un orders par sahi action ho raha hain.

(c) Deri se bachane ke liye sabhi zaruri action lena.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
6
(d) Sabhi zaruri report OP aur/ya adjutant ko dena .

9. Method of Passing Orders to the Guns. Simple shoot mein guns ko normally
order verbally pass kiya jata hain. Jab guns lambe samay tak fire kar rahi hain to
verbally order pass karna mushakil hain aur galati hone ki sambhavana hain. Is liye
simple fire plan ko chodkar baki sabhi fire plan ke liye gun programs issue karne
chahiye. No 1 gun program me diye gaye details ke mutabik gun ke fire par control
karata hain lekin koi bhi verbal order GPO se milne par turant amal karega.

10. Tactical Information. OP ko chahiye ki jo target engage kiya jaraha hain

uski ek short tactical information guns ko pass kare. Is ko pass karne ka sahi time,
“Fire” ke order se ekdam pahale hain, lekin yadi time kam hain to “Fire” ke order ke bad
bhi pass kar sakate hain. Shoot ka result shoot ke ant mein bhejna chahiye.

Definitions

11. Shoot. Ek ya ek se jyada targets ka engagement jo ki series of initial orders se

shuru hokar dusare shoot ke initial order ya “Cease Firing”, “Stand Easy” ya “Tank Alert”
se khatam hota hain.

12. Battery Target. Battery dwara engage kiya gaya target.

13. Regimental aur Usse Bare Concentrations. Ek artillery formation ya unit ke

under command ke sabhi unit ya sub unit ya wah jinko hissa lene ke liye aadesh mila
ho, ke fire ko concentration kahate hain. Concentration ke level is prakar hain :-

Regiment …… Mike Target

Division …… Uniform Target

Independent Artillery Brigade …… Yankee Target

Corps …… Victor Target

Command …… Whisky Target

14. Target Grid Corrections. Woh corrections jo OP officer dwara meters ya

degrees aur minutes/mils me onto ya along the line observer target(OT) order kiye jate
hain, jinse GPO fresh line aur/ya range aur/ya height workout karta hain. Height
correction ko bhi ek target grid correction mana jata hain.

15. Ranging. Yah procedure us samay istamal kiya jata hain jab round ko
observation dwara adjust kiya ja raha ho aur jarurat ho ki diye gaye har ek grid
correction par ek single round (ya salvo) fire kiya jay.

16. Fire for Effect. Yah procedure us samay istamal kiya jata hain jab sambandh
rakhane wali sabhi guns ek nirdharit sankhya me round fire karti hain. Normally yah
procedure us samay istamal kiya jata hain jab target par kuch effect ya damage karne ki
jarurat ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
7
17. Precision shoot. Kisi pin point target ko barbad karne ke uddesh se is shoot
ko liya jata hain jisme mean point of impact (MPI) ko adjust karne ke liye special
procedure ka istemal kiya jata hain.

18. Observation. Point of impact/burst ko target aur/ya line OT/BT ke relation me

dekhane ko observation kahate hain.

19. AMTAB Allowance. Target ko nischit matra me nukshan pahuchane ke liye us

par dale gaye ammunition ki matra.

20. Fire Assault. AMTAB allowance ki delivery ko hi fire assault kahate hain. Ek
AMTAB allowance ko ek, do ya jyada fire assault dwara deliver kiya ja sakata hain.

21. First Salvo Effectiveness (FSE). Ek artillery engagement ke shuru ke

(opening) fire assault ki wah kabiliyat jiske dwara target ke stithi (posture) badali karne
se pahale aavashyak matra me target ka suppression, neutralisation ya destruction
hasil ho sake.

22. Massed Fire Distribution Technique (MFDT). Yah fire ko distribution karne ki
ek technique hain. Isme ek suitable gridded template ka istemal karke, individual fire
units ko target area me respective points per direct kiya jata hain taki target per kam se
kam fire unit ke sath complete aur uniform coverage hasil kar sake.

SECTION 2

JIS RUP (FORM) ME ORDERS DIYE JATE HAIN

1. Fire Order. Galati aur deri se bachane ke liye yah jaruri ho jata hain ki orders
ko hamesha ek standard form me diya jay. OP se operator dwara radio par gun position
ko jo transmission ka tarika hota hain use Table I me dikhaya gaya hain. Fire order ke
transmission ke signal ki puri jankari S/A 6/69 mein diya gaya hain.

2. Grid Referance (GR), OT Bearing and Time. Fire order ke sath jab grid
reference (height ke sath), OT bearing aur time ka istamal kiya jata hain, use Table II me
dikhaya gaya hain, joki standard signal procedure ke anusar hain sivay word “figures”
ke, jo ki sabhi fire orders me omit kiya jata hain.

3. Other Arms ki Observation se Liye Gaye Shoots. Jab shoot other arms ki
observation se conduct kiya jaraha ho, tab orders Table I ya Table II me diye gaye
rupo(forms) se alag rupo(forms) me mil sakte hain. Jab in orders ka vapis uttar(reply)
diya jana ho to unka uttar usi tarah vapis bheja jayega jaise woh mile teh, lekin in orders
ko guns ko pass normal artillery form me kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
8
TABLE 1 – DIYE JANE WALE ORDERS KA RUP (FORM)

Ser Order Given As

Aiming Point se Angles

1. Aiming point, 40 Degrees 5 Minutes - “Aiming Point, Four Zero Degrees Five
Minutes”
2. Aiming Point Director, Number 1, 135 - “Aiming Point Director, Number One,
Degrees One Three Five Degrees”
3. Aiming Point Director, Number 2, 6215 - “ Aiming Point Director, Number Two,
Mils Six Two One Five Mils”
Nature of Target

4. Battery Target Airburst - “Battery Target Airburst”

Ammunition

5. HE 117, Charge 3 - “HE One One Seven, Charge Three”

6. Charge 4 - “Charge Four”
7. Super Charge - “Charge Super”
8. HE B 429, Full Charge - “HE B 429 Charge Full”
OT Bearing

9. OT 52 Degrees - “Oscar Five Two”

10. OT 2520 Mils - “ Oscar Two Five Two Zero”
11. OT 250 Mils - Oscar Two Five Zero Mils”
12. OT 20 Mils - “Oscar Two Zero Mils”
13. OT 6 Mils - “Oscar Six Mils”
14. OT – BT - Oscar Bravo”
Initial Line

15. Bearing 25 Degrees 5 Minutes - “Bearing Two Five Degrees Five

Minutes”
16. Bearing 350 Degrees - “Bearing Three Five Zero Degrees”
17. Bearing Centre 0328 Mils - “Bearing Centre Zero Three Two Eight
Mils”
Alteration to Line

18. Less 3 Degrees 5 Minutes - “Less Three Degrees Five Minutes”

19. Number 2, More 5 Minutes - “Number Two, More Five minutes”
20. Number 3 Less 12 Mils - “Number Three, Less One Two Mils”
Target Grid Corrections
21. RIGHT 400 - “RIGHT Four hundred”
22. LEFT 150 - “LEFT One Fifty”
23. ADD 800 - “ADD Eight hundred”
24. More 20 Minutes - More Two Zero Minutes”
25. Less 50 Mils - “Less Five Zero Mils” **
26. Up 50 Meters - “Up Five Zero”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
9

Ser Order Given As

Distribution of Fire

27. Concentrate on Number 2 - “Concentrate on Two”

28. Bearing 245 Degrees 300 Meters - “Bearing Two Four Five, Three
Hundred”
29. Bearing 3000 Mils, 6 Points, 150 - “Bearing Three Zero Zero Zero, Six
Meters Points One Five Zero”
30. Bearing 0300 Mils, 6 Points, 150 - “Bearing Three Zero Zero Mils, Six
Meters Points One Five Zero”
31. Bearing 30 Degrees, 6 Points, 150 - “Bearing Three Zero, Six Points, One
Meters Five Zero”
32. Bearing 0003 Mils, 6 Points, 150 - Bearing Three Mils, Six Points, One
Meters Five Zero”
Angle of Sight

33. Angle of Sight Zero (Degrees or Mils) - “Angle of Sight Zero”

34. Angle of Sight 15 Minutes Elevation - “Angle of Sight One Five Minutes
Elevation”
35. Angle of Sight 7 Mils Depression - “Angle of Sight Seven Mils
Depression”
36. Angle of Sight 3010 mils - Angle Of Sight Three Zero One Zero”
37. Raise Angle Of Sight - Raise Angle Of Sight”
Note :- *Jab bhi bearing 360 mils ya usse kam ho to word mils ka istemal
kiya jayega.

** Target grid corrections mils mein hain to word “mils” istemal

kiya jayega.

Position Corrections

38. Position Corrections - “Position Corrections”

(a) Number 2 Plus 50 - “Number Two Plus Fifty”
(b) Number 3 Minus 125 - “Number Three Minus One Twenty
Five”
(c) Number 4 Plus 100 - “Number Four Plus One Hundred”
Interval
39. 30 Seconds - “Three Zero”
40. 1 Minute 30 Seconds - “Nine Zero”.
41. 1 Minute 40 Seconds - “One Zero Zero”
Corrector

42. Corrector 90 - “Corrector Nine Zero”

43. Corrector 100 - “Corrector One Hundred”
44. Corrector 106 - “Corrector One Zero Six”
45. Corrector 125 - “Corrector One Two Five”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
10
Ser Order Given As
Fuze Settings

46. Fuze 1.9 - “Fuze One Point Nine”

47. Fuze 10.0 - “Fuze One Zero”
48. Fuze 14.2 - “Fuze One Four Point Two”
49. Lengthen Fuze 0.4 - “Lengthen Point Four” (OP to GPO)
“Lengthen Fuze Point Four” (GPO to
Guns)
Fuze Corrections

50. Number 1 Shorten 0.2 - “Number 1 Shorten Point Two”

Elevation In Meters

51. 400 - “Four Hundred”

52. 825 - “Eight Twenty Five”
53. 1000 - “One Thousand”
54. 1600 - “One Six Hundred”
55. 1850 - “One Eight Fifty”
56. 6050 - “Six Zero Fifty”
57. 7875 - “Seven Eight Seventy Five”
58. 10,000 - “One Zero Thousand”
59. 10,050 - “One Zero Zero Fifty”
60. 14,675 - “One Four Six Seventy Five”
61. 20,625 - “Two Zero Six Twenty Five”
Elevation (QE/TE Laying)

62. Elevation 25 Degrees 30 Minutes - ”Elevation Two Five Degrees, Three

Zero Minutes”
63. Elevation 542 Mils - “Elevation Five Four Two Mils”
Number of Rounds and Method of Fire for Effect

64 10 Rounds Gun Fire - “One Zero Rounds Gun Fire”

Reporting Time of Flight

65. Ready Time of Flight 15 Seconds - “Ready, Flight One Five”

66. Shot 1 Time Of Flight 25 Seconds - “Shot One, Flight Two Five”
67. Shot One Time of Flight 25 Seconds, - “Shot One ,One Five, Flight Two
Delay of 15 Seconds in Reporting Five”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
11
TABLE II – FIRE ORDER KE SATH ISTEMAL KARTE SAMAY GRID REFERENCE,
OT BEARING AUR TIME IS FORM MEIN DIYE JATE HAIN
Ser Order Given As
1. Grid reference 123405 - “One two three four zero five, height
height120 meters OT 53 one two zero. Oscar five three
degrees
2. Up 25 meters - “Up Two five”
3. Down 50 meters - “Down five zero”
4. Engage at 1100 hours - “Engage at One One hundred”
General Application of Orders

5. Sabhi orders jinke pahale kisi gun / guns ka number nahi lagaya gaya ho woh us
shoot me hissa lene wali sabhi guns par lagu honge. Nimn likhit orders darshate hain ki
fire for effect ke dauran kaise ek order ya pura order ek gun par lagu hota hain:-
Ser Order Action
OP
1. “Right 50, 1 Round Gun Fire - Sabhi guns ke liye
(RGF)”
2. “4, Right 50, 1 RGF” - Right 50 sirf No 4 ke liye. Sabhi gun
fire karenge
3. “3, Right 100, 3 ADD 50, - Number 3 Right 100 aur Add 50 ka
1 RGF” correction lagayegi. Sabhi guns 1
Round fire karegi.
GPO
4. “More 3 degrees, 6200, - Sabhi guns more ka correction
1 RGF” lagayegi aur 6200 par fire karangi.
5. “Number 1 more 2 degrees, - More 2 degree sirf No 1 lagayegi
6200, Number 1, 1RGF” sabhi guns 6200 par lay hogi aur sirf
No 1 Fire karegi

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
12
INDIRECT FIRE

SECTION 3

EK SHOOT CONDUCT KARNE KA MOTA THARIAKA

1. Shoot ko aam taur par is prakar se liya jata hain :-

(a) Arambhik orders (initial orders) diye jaate hain (Sec 4).

(b) Yadi zarurat hain to ranging kisi khas degree tak ki jati hain jo ki target ke
nature aur situation ki urgency par nirbar karti hain.

(c) Zarurat padne par mean point of impact ko adujust kiya jayega.

(d) Fire for effect khola jata hain, aur yadi zarurat hain to correct kiya jatha
hain, aur jab tak halat ki jarurat hain tab tak chalu rakha jata hain.

(e) Jarurat padne par tgt ko record kiya jata hain.

(f) Shoot ko suspended ya terminated kiya jata hain.

Shoot ke Dauran ke Orders

2. Shoot ke dauran sabhi orders tab tak lagu rahte hain, Jab tak subsequent orders
ke dwara cancel nahi kiya jata.

3. Ek shoot ke dauran orders ki tartib wohi hoti hain jo ki shuru ke orders main
istemal karte hain. Kyon ki tamam orders tab tak lagu rahte hain, Jab tak ki woh cancel
na kiya jaye, is liye kewal aise orders dene ki zarurat hain jo ki chahane wale effect ko
produce karte hain.

4. Sec 5 to 35 mein ase sabhi orders ko laagu karane ke liye vistar me varnan kiya
gaya hain jinki arambhik orders (intial orders) me aur shoot ke dauran zururat ho sakti
hain.

Ranging aur Fire for Effect

5. Fire discipline ke lihaj se ranging aur fire for effect ka antar sirf guns ke loading
aur firing ke rules main hi hain.

6. Shoot ke kisi bhi stage par OP officer, method of ranging, ranging gun ya troop ko
badli kar saktha hain. OP officer fire for effect ke bad bi ranging dubara kar saktha hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
13
SECTION 4

INITIAL ORDERS

1. Initial order woh order hain jo shoot ke opening round ke liye diye jate hain. Yeh
zahir karte hain ki shoot main kaun si guns hissa legi, yeh guns ko ready karne ke liye
zaruri data dete hain. Intial orders ‘Fire’ ke order se khatam hote hain.

Initial Order OP Officer

2. In orders mein wah tamam orders shamil honge jo ki GPO ko apne initial orders
banane ke liye chahiye. FFE ke dauran koi special ammunition agar chahiye to wah
intial orders mein zarur shamil kiya jayega.

3. Tamam orders jo ki OP ke dwara diye jate hain woh table III aur jo GPO istemal
karta hain woh table IV mein sahi tartib (sequence) se diye gaye hain. In orders ki form
wahi rahegi chahe kisi type ya level ka shoot ho.

4. Har order aur niyam ki detailed form agle jin sections main di gai hain unka cross
reference, tables mein diya gaya hain.

5. Initial orders mein kuch details aisi hain jo ki hamesha OP officer aur GPO istemal
kartein hain. Yah GPO aur No 1 ki duty hain ki koi order miss ho jata hain to word
“Check” us order ke naam ke sath istemal karke, uski taraf dhyan akarshit kare, jaise ki
“Check bearing”. In orders ki detail table III aur IV main di gayi hain.
TABLE III – OP OFFICER’S KE ORDERS KI SEQUENCE

Ser Shoots Which Example Shoots Which Example Ref

Begin With Begin With Sec
Ranging Fire for Effect
1. “Nature of Battery “Nature of Battery 5
Target” Target Target” Target
2. High Angle, (If High Angle (If
Required) Required
3. Ammunition Charge 3 Ammunition Airburst 6

4. “Indication of 123456 “Indication of Target P 7

Target” Height 120 Target” 4142
5. “OT Bearing” Oscar 315 “OT Bearing” Oscar 3420 7

6. Correction RIGHT 100 Correction LEFT 300, 21

ADD 400 ADD 50
7. Concentration Concentrate Concentration Concentrate 8

8. Clinometer Laying Clinometer Clinometer Laying Clinometer 9

Laying Laying
9. Raise/Lower Angle Raise/Lower Raise/Lower Angle Raise/Lower 10
of Sight Angle of of Sigh Angle of
Sight Sight

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
14
10. Fire by Order Fire by Fire by Order Fire by 12
Order Order
11. Method of Salvo 13
Ranging Ranging
12. Corrector or Corrector Corrector or Corrector of 15
Correction to Fuze 120 Correction to Fuze the Moment
Setting Setting
13. Stand By Report Stand By 28
Stand By
14. “Number of 3 Rounds 17
Rounds” Gun Fire
15. “Method Of Fire”
Interval 20 18
Sweep …….. Sweep 100 22
Search…….. Search 200 22
16. Target Description MMG Post Target Description MMG Post
17. “Fire” Fire “Fire” TOT 1108
All Gone Report All 28
Gone

TABLE IV-GPO KE ORDERS KI SEQUENCE

Ser Ranging Se Shuru Hone Wale Fire For Effect( FFE)se shuru Ref
Shoot Hone Wale Shoot
1. “Nature of Target” “Nature Of Target” 5
2. High Angle (If Required) High Angle (If Required)
3. “Ammunition” “Ammunition” 6
4. “Line” “Line” 8
5. Concentration Concentration 8
6. Clinometer Laying Clinomenter Laying 9
7. “Angle of Sight” “Angle of Sight” 10
8. Position Corrections/Gun Position Corrections/Gun 11
Correction Correction
9. Fire by Order Fire by Order 12
10. “Method Of Ranging”
11. Fuze Corrections Fuze Corrections 15
12. Corrector or Fuze Setting Corrector or Fuze Setting 15
13. “Elevation” “Elevation” 16
14. “Number of Rounds” 17
15. “Method of Fire For Effect” 17
16. Interval 18
17. Sweep……..(and/or)
Search……..
18. Target Description Target Description 18
19. “Fire” “Fire” 18
20. All Gone

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
15
SECTION 5

NATURE OF TGT

1. Niman likhit aims ke mutabik nature of tgt initial orders ke shuruat mein diya jata
hain :-

(a) Yeh darshane ke liye ki ek fresh tgt ka engagement ho raha hain aur
pahle wale shoot se sambandit sabhi orders samapt hote hain.

(b) Yeh darshata hain ki kitni guns shoot mein hissa lengi (Table V).

(c) Shoot ke dauran kisi special procedure ke istemal ya FFE mein kisi special
ammunition ke istemal ko darshane ke liye (Table VI).

2. Kitni Guns ki Zarurat. Amn ke wastage aur det ki fatigue ko bachane ke liye
OP offr ko sahi matra mein fire hasil karne ke liye, zarurat se adhik guns ka fire nahin
mangana chahiye. Iske liye jo orders istemal hote hain unhe Table V mein darshaya
gaya hain.

3. Gun Detachments ke Dwara Action. Jab nimnalikhit orders me koi ek order

milta hain to hissa lene wali sabhi guns ko jaldi se jaldi take post hona chahiye:-

TABLE V – SHOOT MEIN HISSA LENE WALI GUNS KE LIYE ORDER

Ser Order Fire Power Remarks

Required
1. “Single Gun Ek gun Guns ki choice GPO par
Target”
2. “Number … Ek gun Vishesh gun ki Zarurat hone par OP
Gun Target” officer istemal karta hain.
OP officer se chahe ser 1 ya 2, koi bhi
order mile, GPO hamesha isi order ka
istemal karega.
3. “Troop Target” Teen guns Tp ki choise GPO par.
4. “Right/Left Teen guns Vishesh troop ki Zarurat hone par OP
TroopTarget” officer istemal karta hain.
OP officer se chahe ser 3 ya 4, koi bhi
order mile, GPO hamesha isi order ka
istemal karega.
5. “Troop Target Teen guns Ek battery ki teen guns hamesha hissa
Registration” hissa lengi langi, Chahe battery mein kitni bhi gun
ho.
6. “Battery Ek Battery
Target”
7. “Mike Target” Ek Regiment
8. “Uniform Div Artillery
Target” Bde

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
16
9. “Yankee Independent
Target” Artillery Bde
10. “Victor Target” Corps Artillery
11. “Whisky Command
Target” Artillery

4. Procedure aur Ammunition Sambhandi Visheh Nirdesh. Jab ek shoot mein

koi special procedure apnaya jata hain to, Table V mein diye gaye ochit order ke sath
table VI mein diye kisi ek order ko jode diya jata hain.

TABLE VI - SPECIAL ORDER FOR NATURE OF TGT

Ser Order Meaning
1. “Target Registration” OP offr ek point ko register karna chahta hain. Sabhi
guns concentrate ki jayengi.
2. “Target Precision” Precision adjustment dwara MPI adjust kiya jayega.
Ranging gun concentrate ki jayegi.
3. “Target Fire Plan” Ek pre arranged plan ke mutabik engage karne ke
liye OP target(s) ko register karna chahta hain. Yeh
task command post ko shoot conduct karne se pahle
diya jata hain.
4. “Target Linear” Ranging gun(s) concentrate ki jayegi. Fire ko
“Target Smoke Screen” distribute karne ke liye ek special procedure use kiya
jayega. Target Smoke screen mein yeh fire for effect
(FFE) mein istemal kiye jane wale ammunition ke
bare mein ek warning order hota hain. Lekin ranging
ke dauran HE fuzed DA istemal kiya jayega.
5. “Target High angle” Guns high angle mein fire karengi.
6. “Smoke/Smoke___’ Fire for effect (FFE) mein istemal kiye jane wale
(Sahi Colour) ammunition ke bare mein ek warning order hota
hain. Ranging ke dauran HE fuzed DA istemal kiya
jayega.
7. “Chemical” -do-
8. “Flare” -do-
9. “Propaganda” -do-
10. “Air burst” -do-
11. “VT” -do-
12. “Star” Supported arms ko lagatar illumination dene ke liye
OP offr star shell fire karna chahta hain.
13. “Target Observation OPoffr target area ko illuminate karke fire ko adjust
by Star” karna chahta hain.
14. “Target Ladder__” e.g. OP offr Air OP method ladder ka istemal karke target
“Battery Target par ranging karna chahta hain. GPO kisi bhi do guns
Ladder 400” ko ranging ke liye nominate karega.
15. “____Target Ladder” eg OP offr ground OP ladder ka istemal karna chata
“Battery Target Ladder” hain ranging ke dauran sabhi guns conc ki jayengi.
16. “Troop Target Op offr tgt area ko illuminate karakar rat ko ek pt ko
Registration, Observation register karna chahta hain. GPO registration ke liye
by Star” teen guns ko HE ammunition aur ek gun ko star
ammunition fire karne ke liye nominate karta hain.
HE fire karne wali guns concentrate ki jayegi.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
17
17. “___Target Airburst Jab OP offr ranging gun(s) ko target par adjust karta
Square__” hain tab usi waqt GPO gun end se bataye huye
square me fire karke corrector of moment ko
establish karta hain.

5. Jab kabhi yeh vishesh order diye jate hain, tab in orders ko guns ki sankhya
(numbers of guns) ke sath laga kar nimnalikhit examples ke mutabik diya jata hain :-

“Single gun target precision”

“Mike target fire plan”

“Battery target Airburst”

“Mike target ladder 400”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
18
SECTION 6

AMMUNITION

OP Offr ke Aadesh

1. OP offr se aaye hue ammunition adesho par niche likhe convention lagu hain :-

(a) Agar OP offr projectile ka order nahi karta hain to order “HE” samjha
jayega jab tak nature of target se yeh jahir ho ki koi aur ammunition hain, jaise
“Smoke screen”.

(b) Agar projectile ko ek se jyada fuze se fire kar sakte hain to fuze ka order
jaroor karna chahiye. Agar HE ka order bina fuze ke diya hain to HE fuze
instantaneous mein fire kiya jayega. Fuze ka order bina projectile ke bhi diya ja
sakta hain, jaise direct action (DA). OP offr niche diye hue terms ka istenmal fuze
ki kisam ke order dene ke liye karta hain :-

(i) Airburst. Time and percussion fuze mein time ko set kiya
jayega. Shoot ke dauran agar fuze indicator ka istemal hoga to airburst
mein badli karne ke liye “Corrector…….” ka istemal kiya jayega. e.g., Fuze
213

(ii) Percussion. Time and percussion fuze percussion per set kiya
jayega. e.g., Fuze 213.

(iii) Ground Burst. DA fuze par vapis laye e.g, Fuze 117.

(iv) VT. VT fuze.

(v) Delay. DA aur delay fuze ko delay per set kiya jayega e.g, Fuze
V429.

(vi) Super Quick. DA aur delay fuze ko direct action per set kiya
jayega e.g., Fuze PDM 572.

(vii) Cap on. DA aur graze fuze, cap on e.g, Fuze V429.

(viii) Cap off. Cap off par vapis laye e.g, Fuze V429.

(ix) Closed. PEPA-LP mortor bomb ko bina rocket assistance ke

istemal kiya jayega.

(x) Direct Action. Jab Fuze V429 ka istemal ricochet/ penetration

ke liye ho raha ho tab DA par vapis laye.

(c) Fuze V 429 / B 429 aise fuze hain jinko thori delay de sakte hain aur Cap
on bhi fire kar sakte hain. OP aur GPO order mein niche likhi vibhin settings ki ja
sakti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
19

Effect Required OPs Order GPO Order Setting

DA Koi ref nahi HE V 429 / B 429 Cap Off. Selector

“O” par.
Graze Action Target Cap On HE V 429 / B 429 Cap On. Selector
“O” par
Ricochet Airburst Target Rico HE V 429 / B 429 Cap Off . Selector
Delay Charge….. “Z / 3” par.

Penetration Target Delay HE V 429 / B 429 Cap On . Selector

Delay Cap On “Z / 3” par.
Charge…..

(d) Yadi OP offr, HE fuzed DA ke allawa kisi bhi prakar ke ammunition

sambandhi order, nature of target ke sath samil karta hain aur agar shoot FFE se
liya ja raha hain to woh ammunition jo order kiya hain (ya samaja gaya hain)
istemal kiya jayega. Agar shoot ranging se suru ho raha hain to nature of target
ke sath order kiya hua ammunition tayar kiya jayega, lekin HE fuze DA ya DA aur
graze fuze cap on (ya delay) agar nature of target ke sath order kiya hain to
istemal kiya jayega jab tak ki OP offr ammunition order ko badli nahi karta hain.
Yeh convention jab star shell se shoot liya ja raha ho to lagu nahi hoga.
(e) Agar shoot ke dauran OP offr naya ammunition order karta hain to sari
guns jo kisi dusre ammunition se loaded hain woh guns clear karne ke liye fire ki
jayegi. Naye ammunition ke fire kiye jaane ke liye OP Offr dwara diya gaya koi bhi
order GPO ke liye naya ammunition fire karne ke liye executive order hota hain.
Naya diya hua amn tab tak lagu rahega jab tak OP offr naya order nahi deta.

(f) Para (d) & (e) ke conventions ke example niche diye gaye hain.

OP Remarks
Example 1
”Battery Target Airburst” Shoot fire for effect se shuru ho raha hain
“123478 Height 600“ ishliye airburst amn istemal hoga.
“Oscar128“
“Raise A of S”
“1 RGF, Pl in tranches”
“Fire”
Example 2
”Battery Target Airburst, Airburst ammunition tayar kiya jayega.
Prepare 10 RPG” Ranging HE fuze DA se ki jayegi.
“123456 Height 700“
“Oscar305“
“ Pl Loc”
“Fire”
………….
“Airburst ADD 50” Ranging gun last line aur elevation par
khali kiya jayega.
………….
”Raise A of S 1 RGF”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
20
Example 3
‘”Battery Target Airburst, Airburst ammunition tayar kiya jayega.
Prepare 10 RPG” Ranging time aur percussion fuze ko
“Percussion” percussion par set karke ki jayegi.
“234567 Height 780“
“Oscar120“
“Pl Loc”
“Fire”
…………..
“Corrector 100/Air Burst/VT GPO ranging gun ko khali karega aur
“Shot……Ground burst” ki report dega aur
dusre airburst round ko diye hue fuze
setting par lagakar, agar jarurat hain to,
ranging gun se fire kiya jayaega.
………….
“Corrector 108” Very low airburst.

“Raise A of S, 1RGF” Sabhi gun sahi fuze setting lagakar

airburst fire karengi .
Example 4
‘”Battery Target Airburst, Airburst ammunition tayar kiya jayega
Airburst” aur fire for effect par fire kiya jayega.
“123486 Height 800” Ranging time aur percussion fuze ko
“Oscar 15” time par laga kar ki jayegi.
“Troops in Trenches”
“Fire”

Example 5
“Single Gun Target Smoke FFE ke liye Red smoke, time aur
Red, Percussion” percussion fuze ko percussion par
“Percussion” laga kar fire kiya jayega. Ranging HE
“123846 Height 800” ke sath time aur percussion fuze ko
“Oscar 15” percussion par laga kar ki jayegi.
“Troops Concentration”
“Fire”

(g) Aam taur par OP Offr charge ka order nahi karta. GPO sabse jyada
suitable charge chunta hain. Agar OP Offr ne charge ka order kiya hain to GPO
crest clearance ko dekhate hue amal karta hain. Agar OP officer ne order kiya
hua charge crest ko clear nahin karta to GPO, OP officer ko ‘Charge Crested’ ka
report dekar OP ke agale hokum ka intezar karta hain.

GPO ke Orders

2. Jis ammunition ka prayog kiya jana ho uske order nature of target ke ekdam bad
diya jata hain taki ammunition ki tayari shuru ki ja sake.

3. GPO ke jin ammunition orders ki jarurat ho sakti hain un sab orders ki headings
Table VII mein tarteeb war ek order ke istemal karne ke niyam ke sath diye gaye hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
21
TABLE VII - GPO KE AMMUNITION ORDERS

Ser Order Prayog ke liye Niyam istemal honge

No
1. Shell Nature of shell hamesha order kiya jayega jaise ki HE
2. Fuze Agar shell ke sath ek se jyada kism ke fuze istemal
hota hain to fuze ka order hamesha kiya jayega, jaise
ki HE 117 ya(ya VT fuze) HE VT 7A. Agar HE shell
ke sath time and percussion fuze istemal karna hain
to order airburst ya percussion jarur diya jayega. Agar
fuze 119 Cap Off fire karna hain to order hoga”HE
119”. Agar Cap On fire karna hain to order hoga “HE
119”, “Cap On”.
3. Weight of shell Agar gun posn mein ek se jyada weight group ke
shell hain to GPO jis weight ka istemal karna chahata
hain uska order karega, jaise ki, “HE 117 plus two” ya
"HE M 107 four square”.
4. Propellant nature Agar gun posn mein ek se jyada tarah ka propellant
hain to propellant ka nature batayenge.
5. Charge Charge ka order hamesha kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
22
SECTION 7

TARGET KA INDICATION AUR OT BEARING

Target ka Indication

1. OP Offr target ko nimnalikhit tariko se indicate karta hain :-

(a) Target ka grid reference aur height dekar.

(b) Pahle se recorded target ke letter aur number dekar.
(c) Pahle se recorded target ke OT bearing ke relation mein correction dekar.
(d) Polar method dwara.

2. GPO target ka initial bearing, angle of sight aur range nikalta hain. Wah sabhi
non-standard conditions, jinke liye data available hain, ke liye jaruri allowances lagata
hain.

OT Bearing

3. Jab bhi OP Offr target per fire ko correct karna chahta hain to use target ka OT
Bg order karna chahiye. Yeh normally observer se target ka grid bearing hota hain. Yadi
mobile observer ho to yeh kisi prominent land mark se target ka bearing ho sakta hain.
Agar gun se target ke bearing ko OT bearing ke rup mein prayog kiya jaye to ise “Oscar
Bravo” order kiya jata hain. Yadi OP offr yeh manta hain ki kai OT bearings ke madhyam
se enemy OP ke location ko pata kar sakta hain to OT bearing ko code mein bhejna
chahiye.

SECTION 8

LINE AND CONCENTRATION

Line

1. Line ko nimnlikhit form mein order kiya ja sakta hain :-

(a) Dial sight par sahi order ke mutabhik set kiya jaane wala bearing e.g,
“Bearing ……Degrees…….Minutes” ya “Bearing ……..Mils” ya “Bearing centre
…….. Mils”.

(b) Jis line per gun lay hain usse switch, i.e., Dial sight ki current reading mein
yeh cumulative correction apply kiya jata hain, e.g., “More (or less) two Degrees
three zero minutes” or “More ( or less) two five mils”.

2. Initial order ke liye para 1(a) me diya hua tarika hamesha use kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
23
3. Ek Shoot ke Dauran Orders. Jis line per gun lay hain, GPO sadharan taur se
us se switch order karta hain lekin jab bearing ka order dena adhik suvidhajanak ho ya
switch panch (5) degrees/100 mils se jyada ho to bearing ka order deta hain.

4. Shoot ke dauran gun hamesha last ordered line per lay rakhi jati hain.

Concentration

5. Parallelism sambandhit conventions. Battery ki sabhi guns jab tak unhe iske
virudh order nahi milta parallel lines rakhate hue fire karegi.

6. Concentration order karne ka matlab. Agar battery ka fire se battery ke

frontage se chhote frontage ke target ko cover karna hain to kisi nishchit degree ke
concentration ki jarurat padti hain. Agar target ka frontage battery ke frontage se bada
hain to standard linear concentration ya fire ki line ko parallel rakhkar aur sweep ya
target grid correction dekar cover kiya ja sakta hain.

Concentration ke Liye OP Offr ke Order

7. Agar sabhi guns ke fire ko ek single point per lana hain to “Concentrate on No
……..” ka order diya jayega. Named gun ki line pahle se hi us point se pass hoti hain.
Agar kisi gun ka number nahi liya jaye to GPO battery centre per gun ko concentrate
karta hain. GPO us line aur range per line correction nikal kar baki guns ko bhi usi point
per lane ya direct karne ka jimmewar hain.

8. OP Offr pahle ke conc ko cancel karna chata hain to order karta hain “Parallel line
to No…….(Jis bhi gun ko dena hain)” ya “Cancel Concentrate”.

GPO ke Concentration ke Order

9. Lines of fire ko concentrate karne ke liye actual line corrns ka order har ek gun ko
diya jata hain ki ;-

“Number 1 less one five minutes” ya “Number 1 less one zero mils”
“Number 2 less one zero minutes” “Number 2 less five mils”

“Number 3 less five minutes” “Number 3 less three mils”

“Number 4 more one five minutes” “Number 4 more four mils”

“Number 5 more one zero minutes” “Number 5 more seven mils”

“Number 6 more two five minutes” “Number 6 more one two mils”

10. GPO conc cancel karne ke liye, ek bearing ya “Parallel line to ……….(Named
gun) order karta hain.

11. Ranging Conventions. Niche likhe order per GPO bina OP ke order ke
ranging gun(s) ko battery centre per conc karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
24
(a) “………………Target Linear”

(b) “……………….Target Smoke Screen”

(c) “………………Target Precision”

(d) “………………Target Registration”

(e) “………………Target Ladder”

(f) “………………Target Ladder ……….”

12. Agar “…….Target Registration” hain to sabhi guns jo shoot mein hissa le rahi hain
conc ki jayengi.

SECTION 9

CLINOMETER LAYING

General

1. Clinometer laying yeh darshata hain:-

(a) Guns field clinometer ka istemal karke QE ke liye lay ki jaati hain.

(b) GPO elevation ka order meters ki bajay degrees aur minutes ya mils me
pass karega.

2. Kuch equipment mein yeh laying karne ka normal tariqa hain. Lekin jyadatar
equipment mein elevation ke liye sight clinometer aur range (ya tangent elevation) scale
se lay kiya jata hain.

3. In karano se clinometer laying ko un equipment ke liye bhi order kiya ja sakta

hain jo aamtor par elevation ke liye kisi aur tarike se lay kiye jate hain:-

(a) Jab elevation ke liye jyada accuracy ki jarurat hain jaise precission shoot.

(b) Jab range scale damage ho gaya ho.

4. “Cancel Clinometer Laying” ke order se clinometer laying cancel hota hain.

OP Offr se Order

5. Jab OP Offr clinometer laying ka istemal karna chahta hain to woh “Clinometer
Laying” order deta hain. (Jab tak yeh laying ka normal tariqa na ho).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
25
GPO se Order

6. Jis eqipment mein clinometer laying ka normal tariqa hain unko chodkar baki
eqipment mein GPO intial orders me “Clinometer Laying” ka order jarur kare. Agar yeh
us eqipment me laying ka normal method hain to aisa order nahi deta hain.

7. Jis QE (quardant elevation) per gun lay hota hain uska order do hisson mein diya
jata hain:-

(a) Gun correction jo ki har ek gun ke liye individual correction hain (Section
11).

(b) Elevation jo sabhi guns ke liye common hain (Section 16).

8. Agar shoot ke dauran clinometer laying per badli karna hain jaise ki precision
shoot mein to GPO order dega:-

“Clinometer laying - Report QE”

SECTION 10

ANGLE OF SIGHT

OP Offr se Order

1. OP Offr shoot ke dauran angle of sight ko change karne ke liye “Raise (ya lower)
angle of sight” ya nayi height ya tgt ki height ki corrn order kar sakta hain (Table II).

GPO se Order

2. GPO initial order mein actual angle of sight jo ki sight clinometer per lagate hain
order is form me karega:-

“Angle of sight ……..degrees………minutes elevation (ya depression)”

3. Shoot ke dauran angle of sight ko nayi angle of sight ko order karke badli kar
sakte hain.

4. Shoot ke dauran GPO angle of sight ko bina OP Offr ke orders ke badli nahi
karega, jaise ki, GPO shuru ki angle of sight ko kewal is liye badli nahi karega ki OP ne
jo target grid correction diya hain usse jahir hota hain ki target ka height badli ho gaya
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
26
SECTION 11

POSITION CORRECTION AUR GUN CORRECTION

General

1. Position correction jab gun irregular lagi hain to range me allowance ko pura
karne ke liye diya jata hain. Position corrn nikalne ke tarike DUAI 5/75 ke chapter II mein
diya gaya hain.

2. Gun correction niche likhe mouke per diya jata hain:-

(a) Jab gun per gun rule ya calibrating sight na ho.

(b) Jab clinometer laying order mila ho (Section 9).

(c) Jab Palmtop/Laptop command post mein use ho raha ho.

3. Position correction aur gun correction order karne ka zimmewar GPO hain.
Programme shoots ke dauran gun programme me diye gaye elevation mein position
correction aur gun correction ka allowance samil hota hain.

Position Correction

4. GPO position correction niche likhe halat ko chodkar hamesha gun ko order karta
hain:-

(a) Jab gun corrections gun ko pass ki hain kyonki gun correction mein
position correction shamil rahta hain.

(b) Jab target GF order hua ho.

(c) Jab gun programmes diye ho.

(d) Jab target star order hua ho.

5. GPO posn correction kam se kam 25 meter mein pass karta hain, jaise ki :-

“Position correction Number 1 plus 25, Number 3 minus 25, Number 6 plus 75”.

6. Gun correction ko No 1 shoot ke dauran sabhi elevation mein lagata hain.

Position correction fresh individual position correction ya order “Cancel Position
Correction” dwara cancel hoti hain.

Gun Correction

7. GPO un sabhi shoots mein gun correction pass karta hain, jo ki upper diye gaye
para 2 ke mutabik liye ja rahe hain:-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
27
“Gun correction Number 1 plus 1 degree 25 minutes, Number 2 plus 40 minutes,
Number 3 minus 1 degree 25 minutes, Number 4 minus 55 minutes, Number 5
plus 30 minutes, Number 6 plus 45 minutes”.

8. Shoot ke dauran order kiye gaye harek elevation mein Number 1 gun correction
ko shamil karta hain. Gun correction fresh individual gun corrections ya order “Cancel
Gun Correction” dwara cancel hoti hain.

9. Note :- 130 mm gun aur Russian eqpt mein gun corrections sight par lagai
jati hain. Is ko is tarah se order kiya jata hain:-

“Angle of Sight Number……….Degree………minutes/Mils elevation ya

depression. Jaise ki “Angle of Sight Number 1, 3017, Number 2, 3001…”.

SECTION 12

FIRE BY ORDER

1. Yah order shoot ke kisi bhi stage per is uddesh ko sunischit karne ke liye diya ja
sakata hain ki baki bache hue shoot ka har burst of fire diye hue waqt per fire ho.

2. Jab “Fire by Order” gun ko diya jata hain to gun ko fire order ke mutabik tayar kiya
jata hain aur ready ki report di jati hain.

3. Fire ke liye kisi bhi ek order ke uttar mein first round exuctive order “Fire” ke bina
fire nahi kiya jayega. Ek fire order mil jane ke bad ke rounds (Yadi koi hain) bina agale
order ke diye hue interval per fire kiye jate hain.

4. In rules ka prayog Table VIII mein udaharan ke saat diya gaya hain.

TABLE VIII-FIRE BY ORDER PASS KARANE KA UDHARAN

Ser GPO se Order Action

No
1. “Fire by Order, Guns load ki jayegi, lay ki jayegi aur ready report di
6200, 2 RGF” jayegi.
2. “Fire” Sabhi guns do(2) bar fire karengi, pahle round ek
dam aur dubara jaise hi gun ready ho jati hain fire
karenge
3. “6200, 1 Round Gun load ki jayegi, lay ki jayegi aur ready report di
Bty Fire” jayegi.
4. “Fire” NO 1 gun usi samay fire karegi aur baki guns apne
turn per diye gaye interval per fire karengi

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
28
5. Agar “Fire by Order” lagu hain to chahe ranging ho ya fire for effect, guns tab tak
fire nahi karegi jab tak fire ka order nahi diya jata. Lekin jab “Fire by Order” lagu hain to
bhi guns in nimnlikhit executive orders per fire karti hain:-

(a) “Empty guns”.

(b) “Engage at………../ forthwith”.

(c) “Bombard at……./ forthwith”.

(d) “TOT………”.

(e) “Change of Amn (Shuru ke order mein fire diya hain to)”.

(f) “Task table ke timing ke annusar”.

SECTION 13

METHOD OF RANGING

1. Ranging ek single gun, do guns ya salvo ranging dwara target per fire ko adjust
karne ka ek tarika hain. Yeh order is prakar diye jate hain:-

(a) Single gun ranging. OP se order hota hain “Number……. Ranging”

ya “Single gun ranging”. GPO hamesha “Number……. Ranging” ka order karta
hain.

(b) Ranging by Air OP. GPO ranging ke liye do guns ko nominate karta
hain.

(c) Salvo Ranging.

(i) Six Gun Battery. Order hota hain “Salvo ranging” ya “…… troop
salvo ranging. GPO troop ki nomination ke liye bad wali form use karta
hain. Troop ki sabhi guns hissa leti hain.

(ii) Ranging by Air OP (Ladder). Order hota hain “Salvo ranging”.

Dono troops hissa lete hain. GPO ka order hoga “Right and Left troop
salvo ranging”.

2. Jab order kiye gaye elevation par guns “Ready” ki report di jati hain to GPO guns
ko “Fire” ka order dete hue salvo control karta hain.

3. Yadi OP Officer apne shuru(initial) ke order mein fire ke tarike ko nominate nahi
karta hain to “Ranging By Air OP” jisme do guns hissa lati hain, ke siwai yahi samjha
jayega ki ek gun se ranging ki jani hain. GPO aam taur se ranging ke liye centre guns
mein se kisi ek gun ko nominate karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
29
4. GPO deri se bachane ke liye ranging gun ya troop ko change kar sakta hain, siwai
us samay ke jab wah OP se nominate na ho. OP ko misleading se bachane ke liye jo
badlav kiya jata hain woh lagatar jari rahta hain.

SECTION 14 - RULES FOR LOADING THE GUNS

Jab Percussion ya VT Fuze Ka Order Mila Hain Uske Liye Yeh Rules Lagu Honge

1. Kisi bhi shoot mein method of ranging ya fire for effect milne per gun initially load
ki jayegi jaise ki :-

(a) Agar single gun ranging ka adesh mila hain to sirf ranging gun load ki
jayegi.

(b) Agar salvo ranging ka order kiya jata hain to gun Para 1(c) sec 13 ke
anusar load ki jati hain.

(c) Agar aisa fire for effect order kiya jata hain jo ki puri bty ke liye lagu hain to
bty ki sabhi guns load ki jati hain.

(d) 130 mm gun ke sath jab tak us gun ke liye method of ranging ya method of
fire for effect aur elevation ka order nahi milta hain tab tak gun load nahi ki jati
hain.

2. Iske bad gun niche Para 3 aur 4 mein bataye gaye tarike se dubara load ke jayegi.

3. Ranging . Nimnlikhit niyam lagu hote hain :-

(a) Ranging ke dauran jaise hi ranging gun ya guns fire ki jati hain jitni jaldi ho
sake utna jaldi load ki jayegi lekin 130 mm guns mein jab tak elevation order nahi
kiya jata hain tab tak ranging gun ya guns dubara load nahi ki jayegi

(b) FFE khatam hone ke bad agar method of ranging ka order milta hain to
upper Para 1 mein digai hidayaten lagu hongi.

4. Fire For Effect. Niche likhi hidayaten lagu hogi:-

(a) Rate of fire ko maintain karne ke liye jitni jaldi karna jaruri hain usse jaldi
gun reload nahi ki jayengi.

(b) Ek method of FFE khatam hone ke bad guns dubara tab tak load nahi ki
jati hain jab tak GPO method of ranging ya fire for effect ka fresh order nahi deta
hain.

Time and Percussion Fuzes Order Karne Ke Bad Lagu Hone Wale Rules.

5. Jab percussion ka order diya jata hain to wah rules jo percussion fuze ke liye lagu
hain (Uper Para 1 to 4) follow kiye jayenge aur fuze setting percussion per ki jayegi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
30
6. Agar airburst ya corrector ka hukum mila hain to aane wale paragraph ke order
follow kiye jayenge aur fuze ko air mein burst karne ke liye set kiya jayega.

7. Shuru mein jab tak method of ranging ya fire for effect ka order nahi mila hain tab
tak koi gun load nahi ki jayegi aur jab tak fuze setting malum nahi hota hain yani ki nichi
likhe information mein koi ek information nahi milta hain :-

(a) The fuze length.

(b) The corrector and the elevation.

8. Ranging ke dauran guns ko jab tak fresh fuze setting ya corrector aur elevation ka
order nahi milta hain tab tak gun reload nahi ki jayengi aur fire for effect ke dauran jab
tak fresh method of fire for effect ka order aur fuze setting malum nahi hota hain tab tak
guns reload nahi ki jayengi.

Mike aur Higher Tgts Mein Jab Obsn Ke Liye Star Ka Prayog Kiya Jata Hain Uske
Liye Rules Lagu Hote Hain.

9. Agar OP Offr hukam karta hain Mike/uniform tgt obsn by star sabhi btys HE aur
star dono ke liye data tayar karengi. Jab tak ranging bty specified nahi hoti hain tab tak
star shuru mein load nahi kiya jayega.

SECTION 15 - CORRECTOR OR FUZE SETTING

1. Jab time aur percussion fuze ke sath airburst fire kiya jata hain tab har gun ke liye
niche di gai tarike se fuze setting nikala jata hain :-

(a) Gpo Corrector Setting Ka Order Karta Hain. Har gun per fuze
indicator per corrector set karte hain aur elevation ke samne (Posn corrn ko samil
karke) us gun ke liye fuze setting read karta hain. Kam ya jyada MV jo ki us gun ki
hain us per set karta hain. Non std met condition ka allowance corrector setting jo
diya gaya hain usmein shamil hote hain.

(b) Gpo Fuze Setting Ka Order Karte Hain. Yeh tarika tab istemal karte
hain jab ki fuze indicator na ho. GPO ki yeh jimmewari hain ki range ke liye fuze
setting malum kare. Non std MV ka allowance aur range mein posn corrn ki wajah
se jo farak hain uske liye fuze corrn order karte hain jaise ki ;-
“Fuze corrn No 1 lengthen pt 4.
NO 2 shorten pt 2.

(c) Yeh fuze corrn shoot ke dauran diye hue fuze setting mein No 1 apply
karta hain. Yeh fresh indl fuze corrn ke order se cancel hongi.

Corrector Setting ka Order Karne ke Liye Rules

2. Actual corrector setting jo jaruri hain woh GPO hamesha order karta hain jaise ki
Corr 95.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
31
3. OP offr actual corrector setting jo ki jaruri hain uska order karta hain ya agar pahle
corrector of moment establish kiya hain aur record kiya hain to woh order kar sakta hain,
Corrector of moment GPO shot ki report ke sath actual corrector ka report dega.

4. Order kiya hua corrector setting tab tak lagu rahega jab tak ki fresh corrector ya
percussion ya fresh amn ka order nahi milta, cumulative corrn ka order nahi diya jata.

Fuze Setting Ka Order Karne Ke Liye Rules

5. GPO fuze setting sec 2 table 1 mein dikhain form ke anusar order karta hain. Fuze
setting tab tak cancel nahi hota jab tak ki fresh fuze setting, corrn to fuze setting,
percussion ya fresh amn ka order nahi milta hain.

6. GPO aam taur per actual fuze setting ka order karta hain, agar alag alag guns ko
alag fuze setting ka order kiya hain aur sab guns ke liye ek hi correction dena jaruri hain
to us samay GPO cumulative corrn ki tarah order kar sakta hain jaise ki :- “Lengthen or
shorten fz------“.

7. OP offr fuze setting ka order nahi karta hain lekin woh corrn to fuze setting ka
order kar sakta hain, jaise ki lengthen ya shorten. Yeh corrn commulative corrn hain aur
GPO range table fz setting mein total accumulated corrn ko apply karta hain jo ki non std
conditions ke liye apply kiye gaye corrn ke alawa hota hain.

SECTION 16 – ELEVATION

General

1. Niche likhe situation ke alawa GPO, guns ko hamesha elevation meter mein pass
karega :-

(a) Jab clinometer laying ka order ho.

(b) Jab gun per calibrating sight ya gun rule available na ho.

(c) Jab palmtop/Laptop cmptr command post mein use kiya ja raha ho.

2. Uper batai hui halaton mein GPO hamesha niche diye hue tarike se elevation ka
order karta hain :-

“Elevation three zero deg two six minutes”

“Elevation three one six mils”

Initial Order

3. GPO initial orders mein actual elevation hamesha upper Para 2 mein diye hue
tarike se order karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
32
Ranging ke Dauran Order

4. Ranging ke dauran gun ko her round jo ki fire kiya jayega ke liye elevation milna
chahiye.

5. GPO hamesha guns ko actual elevation order karega woh kabhi bhi Add/Drop ya
repeat ka order nahi kar sakta hain.

Fire For Effect ke Dauran Orders

6. Fire for effect ke pahle round ke liye GPO ko actual elevation ka order karna
chahiye. Jab bhi elevation badli hota hain to GPO guns ko actual elevation pass karega,
lekin guns jab alag-alag elevation per fire kar rahi hain to GPO Add ya Drop ka order kar
sakta hain, agar use yakin hain ki is wajah se koi galti nahi hogi.

7. Fire for effect ke dauran order kiya hua elevation tab tak lagu rahta hain jab tak ki
fresh elevation ya corrn to elevation ka order nahi milta hain. Method of fire for effect ke
liye agar koi naya order bina elevation ke milta hain is ka matlab hain ki jitne rounds fire
karna hain woh pahle diye hue elevation par fire ki jayengi.

Range Corrections

8. GPO ne corrn Add/Drop mein diya hain to use us elevation mein apply karenge jo
sight per ya gun rule per hain aur fresh elevation order milne se ye cancel hote hain.

Examples

9. Uper diye gaye rules ke application table IX mein diye gaye hain.

TABLE IX- ELEVATION KE SATH TALUK RAKHNE WALA ORDERS

Ser OP Officer se Order GPO se Order Remarks

‘’
1 ADD 100,1 RGF ‘’ ‘’
More 30 minutes 4800,1 RGF’’ 4800 Per sare guns fire
karenge.
‘’
2 1Right 50’1RGF ‘’ ‘’
Number 1 More 15 Minutes Sare guns fire karenge.
Number 1 4775, 1RGF” Number 1, 4775 par
firekarega. Baaki guns
4800 per fire karega.
3 “ADD 100 , 1 RGF‘’ “More 30 minutes,ADD 50, 1 Sare guns fire karenge.
RGF” Number 1, 4825 par
fire karega baaki 4850
per fire karega.
4 “5 round gun fire” “5 round gun fire” Sare guns fire karenge.
Number 1, 4825 par
baaki 4850 par fire
karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
33
10. Elevation jis Per Gun Lay ki Jati Hain. Shoot ki dauran guns hamesha last
elevation ordered per lay hogi.

SECTION 17 - METHODS OF FIRE FOR EFFECT

1. FFE ko lagu karne ke liye niche likhe traikon mein se koi bhi tarika istemal kar
sakte hain :-

(a) Gun fire

(b) Bty fire

(c) Scale

Hissa Lene Wali Guns

2. FFE ka koi bhi order un tamam guns ke liye lagu hota hain jin ko initial order mein
nominated kiya gaya hain. Agar kam Nos of guns ki jarurat padti hain to jis unit ya gun
se fire karwana hain use number of rounds se pahile specify karna chahiye. Niche diye
gaye examples se pata chalta hain ki regimental Tgts ke liye is rule ko kaise apply kiya
jata hain :-

“1 round gun fire” har bty ki ek gun ek round fire karegi.

“23 1RGF” ‘P’ Bty ki har ek gun ek round fire karegi.

“23 No 1 1RGF” P Bty ki No 1 gun ek round fire karegi.

3. Koi bhi method of fire ordered kiya hain to us mein se kuch guns ko nikalne ke
liye No----(ya tp) stop loading (ya stop) ka order diya ja sakta hain. Stop se stop loading
ka order jyada achha rahega, jis se yeh yakin kiya jata hain ki guns empty rahein.

Number of Rounds

4. Har ek gun dwara number of rounds fire kiye jane ka order each fire order ke sath
dena chahiye. Lekin shoot mein gun fire ka order bagair kisi No of rounds ke diya ja
sakta hain. Kuch halaton mein fire kiye jane wale rounds ke scale ke taur per diya ja
sakte hain.

Fire For Effect Ke Dauran Gun ko Fire Karne ke Liye Rules

5. Shoot ka pahla round fire karne ke liye ya jab fire by order lagu hain tab tak ke
liye rules section 12,18,19 mein diye hue hain, unke alawa baki time per gun ko niche
bataye hue rules ke anusar fire kiya jata hain.

6. Gun fire

(a) Fire ko lagu karne ke liye yeh ek bahut suvidha janak tarika hain yeh is
prakar diya jata hain. Jaise ki “--------rounds gun fire”.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
34
(b) Har ek gun apne time se order kiye hue Nos of rds fire karti hain. Har gun
apna pahla round jaise hi gun tayar ho jati hain fire karti hain aur bad wala rd
interval ke mutabik fire kiye jate hain (sec 18) ke anusar ya jaise hi gun ready hoti
hain iske bad fire karti hain.

7. Bty fire

(a) Yeh tarika tab istemal kiya ja sakta hain jab ki OP Offr dekhana chata hain
ki alag-alag guns ke rds kahan gir rahe hain, yeh order is prakar diya jata hain,
jaise ki -----rds bty fire.

(b) Gun ek ke bad ek right ki taraf se fire karti hain us ke bad phir ek ke bad ek
right ki taraf se fire kiya jata hain aur yeh tab tak hota hain jab ki order kie hue
Nos of rds fire nahi hote hain. Right ki taraf se pahle wali gun jaise hi tayar hoti
hain fire karti hain jab ki initial order mein fire ka order mil chukka ho uske bad
baki guns apne turn per interval ko dhyan mein rakhate hue fire ki jati hain,(Sec
18). Yeh interval jaise round of bty fire mein ek round se dusre ka hain waise hi
ek gun doosri gun ke beech hote hain. Agar gun ko ek ke bad ek left side se fire
karna hain to order is prakar hoga, “From the the left -------round bty fire”. Lekin
GPO hamesha order dega “One round bty fire -----seconds ya “from the Left one
round bty fire ----seconds”.

Scale

8. Yah tab istemal kiya jata hain jab fire for effect per har gun se jo ki hissa le rahi
hain utne Nos of rounds fire karne ki jarurat nahi hain lekin us unit mein jitni guns honi
chahiye unke liye utne Nos of rounds fire karna chahiye. Scale-----is karan ko hasil karne
ke liye diya jata hain aur written fire order ke sath istemal kar sakte hain. Jaise task table
mein diye hue ON CALL task per. Yeh OP Offr ko Amn allot karne ke liye istemal karte
hain.

9. Fire order scale 1 ka matlab hain ki har ek fire unit jinko yeh order diya gaya hain
apne apne full strength ke equivalent one round per gun fire karengi. Agar koi gun shoot
mein hissa nahi le rahi hain kyonki kisi higher task per ho ya out of action ho to unke fire
baki guns se poora kiya jayega.

10 HQ jo scale ka order receive karta hain niche wali units ya subunit ko pass karte
waqt next whole no mein uniformly scale up karta hain. Bty CP mein yeh order pass
karne ke lie hamesha rounds of gun fire mein convert karte hain. Agar jaruri hain to iske
sath Fire by order ki jarurat hain to de sakte hain.

11. Baki method of fire ke mutabik scale gun ko fire karne ke lie executive order nahi
hain. Iske sath excutive order bhi dena chahiye. Jaise ki Fire (Jo ki thori der ke bad diya
ja sakta hain jab ki jaldi fire ki jarurat nahi hain). Yeh order fire, Engage at----Bombartd
at------or TOT------ke sath diye jate hain.

12. Jab amn ka allot karne ke liye scale ka istemal karate hain to yeh ek specified
task ke liye, jaise ki ordinary OP Offr regimental ya higher concentration ya unspecified
task ke liye karta hain aur authorized OP Offr ya CB staff officer ko kuch guns aur amn
istemal karne ki authority di gai hain, un tgts ke liye joki wah engage karna chahta hain.
Amn calculation ke samay OP Offr ko dhyan rakhana chahiye ki kitni gun istemal ki

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
35
jayengi, kyonki allotment mein units ki gun ko refer kiya jata hain. Jaise ki field regt mein
23 and 43 available scale 4 yani 4 X 12 = 48 rds fire kiye jayenge.

Shoot ke Dauran Method of Fire For Effect ko Badli Karna

13. Shoot ke dauran method of FFE ko badli karne ke liye fresh method of FFE ka
order de sakte hain, Badli ka shuru mein hi pata chalta hain to niche bataye gaye tarike
se badli kar sakte hain.
“------------rounds gun fire followed by----------rounds bty fire-----“
ya agar interval ko badli karna ho to “------rounds gun fire ----sec followed by-----rounds
gun fire---sec”.

Smk Shoot ke Liye Special Rules

14. OP Offr aur GPO ke beech mein yeh convention hain ki smk shoot tester ya
indication of tgts by smk ke ilava 2 rounds gun fire se shuru hogi aur uske bad required
No of rounds fire kiye jayenge, jo ki OP Offr ne method of FFE mein diya hoga, lekin
GPO guns ko pure order deta hain jaise ki :-

OP Offr “Smk FBO 6RGF 30”

GPO “Smk FBO Fz 11.0 8950 2RGF followed by 6RGF 30 sec”

15. OP offr se sirf ek round ke liye order hain “Smk tester pt---1RGF”

16. Agar FFE ke dauran OP Offr corrn ka order karta hain jo ki line aur range ke liye
hain tab GPO new line aur range ke upper fire karne ke liye two rounds gun fire followed
by remaining rds gun fire jo ki FFE ke bache hue rounds hain unko order karega.

17. Alternate. Jab desired rate of fire ko pane ke liye two gun per pt ki jarurat parti
hain to observer method of FFE ke sath Alternate ka istemal karta hain jaise ki FBO
8RGF 20 alternate. GPO niche die gaye tarike se dono guns ke intitial rounds ke beech
ki interval per control karta hain jo ki ek hi pt per fire kar rahi hain.

OP Offr “FBO 8RGF 20 Alternate:

GPO “FBO 2 RGF followed by 8 RGF 20 sec Alternate”(Gun ke ready report ke

bad)

“NO 1,3&5 fire aur 10 sec bad mein No 2,4 & 6 fire”.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
36
SECTION 18 – INTERVAL, TARGET DESCRIPTION AND FIRE

Interval

1. Interval do lagatar rounds ke beech ka samay jo seconds mein diya jata hain jo is
prakar hain :-

(a) At Gun Fire. Kisi ek gun dwara fire kiye gaye successive round ke
beech ka interval hain. Siwaye burst fire ke interval fire karne wale eqpt ka
intense rate of fire hota hain ya isase kam nahi hota hain. Yadi koi interval ka
order nahi kiya gaya hain tab each No 1 gun ke ready hote hi successive ko fire
karega.

(b) At Bty Fire. Kisi ek gun ke fire karne aur uski agli gun ke fire karne ke
beech ka interval hain, yadi koi interval order nahi kiya gaya hain tab standard
interval 5 sec rakha jata hain.

2. Order kiya gaya interval tab tak lagu rahta hain jab tak usko cancel karne ke liye
fresh interval, ek fresh method of fire for effect ya dubara ranging ka order nahi milta.

3. Upar diye gaye niyam ka application niche diye gaye table mein diya gaya hain.

TABLE X – INTERVAL KE ORDERS KE UDAHARAN

Ser GPO Order Action

No
1. 5650,5 rounds bty Guns ek ke bad ek right se 30 sec ke interval
fire 30 sec. se fire karengi.
2. 10 secs (Do round Bache hue round jinka order serial 1 mein diya
fire hone ke bad) gaya hain ko 10 sec ke interval se fire kiya
jayega
2. 5650,2RGF Each gun independently fire karengi 2 round
ko aur second round gun ready hote hi fire
karegi.
4. 5650,2RGF followed Each gun 3 rounds ko independtly fire karegi
by 10 RGF 20 uske bad 20 sec ke interval se 9 rounds ko fire
second kiya jayega.

Target Description

4. Agar guns ke fire delay nahin hone ka dar ho to hamesha fire karne se pahle,
initial orders mein har ek tgt ka tactical description dena chahiye.

5. Agar Adjt ne koi particular target engage karne ke liye kisi bty ko order dene par
us bty ke GPO ka jimmewari hain ki jaisi hi guns us target ke upar ready hote hi adjt ko
ready report dena hain. Is ready report ke under nature of target, grid reference, aur
target ka description adjt ko pass karta hain. e.g, “23/43/63 engage Bty Target ---(GR)
platoon locality”. GPO ne jis target ko engage karna hain us target ki height adjt ko pass
karne ki jarurat nahi hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
37
Fire

6. OP se gun ko fire ka specific order nimn case mein chahiye:-

(a) Shoot ke opening round ke liye.

(b) Jab fire by order lagu ho.

(c) Scale---order ke sath.

(d) Observed shoot mein Bad ram ki report dene ke bad.

7. Guns fire karne ke liye command post se kuch specific orders chahiye jo ki is
prakar hain :-

(a) Shoot ke opening round ke liye.

(b) Jab salvo ranging ho.

(c) Jab fire by order lagu ho.

(d) Misfire aur bad ram ka report dene ke bad.

(e) Programme shoot ke opening serial ke liye.

8. Koi bhi round kisi bhi gun se fire nahi hoga jab tak No 1 se order Number----fire
nahi mile siway :-

(a) Jab DF(SOS) engage ho raha ho tab sentry ke dwara GPO ke hukum par.

(b) Tanks ke engagement ke dauran GPO ke order Engage ke bad.

9. Jab ek order fire ki jarurat hain wah inmein se kisi bhi form mein mil sakte hain :-

(a) GPO se No 1 ko always “fire” ka order milega.

(b) Jab firing jis samay honi hain use indicate karke jaise “Engage at-----“,
“Bombard at------“ “TOT” or task table ke time ke anusar aur gun pgme se.

(c) Empty Guns :- Gun fire karengi chahe wah shoot ka opening round ho,
Jab FBO lagu ho ya scale ka order kiya gaya ho.

(d) OP ke change of amn ka order (Initial order fire ke bad).

10. Initial Order to Fire. Shoot ka opening round tab tak fire nahi hoga jab tak
upar ke para 9 ki form mein fire ke liye excutive order na diye jaye, jo ki hissa lene wali
unit aur subunit ko diya jata hain. Yeh niyam OP Offr se lekar No 1 tak lagu hain chahe
woh hissa lene wali unit aur subunit ka ranging round ho ya fire for effect ka round ho ya
wrong amn se loaded gun ko clear karne ke sambandh mein ho. Programe shoot mein
opening serial ke liye GPO se FIRE ka order diya jata hain aur wah prateyak serial ke
opening round ke liye de sakte hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
38
11. Firing During a Shoot. Shoot ke opening round ke bad special case ko
chodkar OP Offr se No 1tak koi fire ke liye order ki jarurat nahi hain. Jiska viwaran unse
sambandhit section mein diya gaya hain.

SECTION 19 - SUMMARY OF RULES FOR FIRING DURING A SHOOT

1. Shoot ke opening round ke bad guns niche likhe tarike se fire karegi, sirf para 2 to
4 ke circumstances ke alawa :-

(a) Ranging ke Dauran. OP Offr se tgt grid corrn, order “Repeat”, fresh
indication of tgt, corrector or alternation to fz setting aur change of amn aur GPO
se ranging gun ko fire karne ke liye elevation hi fire ke liye excutive order to fire
hain.
(b) Fire for Effect Mein. OP Offr aur GPO ke dwara number of round jo
fire kiye jane hain aur hissa lene wali guns ke liye method of fire ek executive
order hain,(sec 17).

2. Salvo Ranging. Jab salvo ranging lagu ho to GPO Guns ke ready hone ke
bad fire ka addesh deta hain. (jab tak ki FBO received na kiya ho) aur No1 order dega
to “Number -----fire” (sec 13).

3. Fire by Order. Jab fire by order lagu hain to ranging mein ya fire for effect
mein fire order ke bina guns ko fire nahi karegi (Section 12).

4. Scale. Fire by order lagu ho ya na ho lekin yadi Scale ka order milta hain
tab fire ke liye specific order ki jarurat hain kyonki order scale fire ke liye excutive order
nahin hain (sec17).

5. Misfire and Bad Ram. Gun se misfire ke report dene ke bad tab tak gun fire
nahi karegi jab tak GPO se order number fire nahi milta hain. Bad Ram hone par
observed shoot mein OP se aur pgme shoot mein GPO se fire ka order milna jaruri hain.

SECTION 20-SUMMARY OF RULES FOR APPLICATION OF ORDERS DURING A

SHOOT

1. Har ek order jo ki shoot ke dauran diya gaya hain uske upper jaldi se jaldi action
hota hain, siwai jab star shell fire kar rahi gun ko Star adjusted ka order milta hain (sec
31).

2. Method of ranging ya fire for effect ke order milne par usse pahle ke tamam order
cancel hote hain chahe woh pure hue ya nahi.

3. Order jo line, A/S, Corrector / Fz setting, elevation aur interval se taluk rakhta hain
unse method of fire ya No of round ke jo order diye hue hain un par koi asar nahi hota,
(Sivay jo vivaran sec 17 ke Para 18 mein diya gaya hain).

4. Upar diya gaya rule ka application Table XI mein dikhaya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
39
TABLE XI – THE APPLICATION OF DURING A SHOOT

Ser Orders Remarks

1 “7000, 3 RGF” Sabhi guns fire karega.
2 “More 2 degrees, 5 RGF” Given Ser 1 ke bacha huva rounds ko lapse kurke, har
after the guns have fired one ek gun 5 round ser 2 ke anusar ordere kiya gaya
round. new line ke upper fire karega.
3 “7000, Number 1, 5 RGF 60 Sabhi guns action mein hissa legi, lekin sirf
seconds” Number 1 gun fire karegi.
4 “Number 1 more 10 minutes” Number 1 gun ordered kiya gaya naya line ke
uper next round fire karega.
5 “20 seconds” Given after Number 1 gun naya interval 20 seconds ke
Number 1 has fired two rounds. anusar bacha huva rounds ko fire karega.

5. Pgme shoot mein yadi ek serial ka samay khatam ho gaya hain aur doosra serial
ka samay shuru ho gaya hain tab next serial start ho jayega aur pahle wala laps ho
jayega, chahe pahle wala mein guns ne fire kiya ya nahi kiya ho.

SECTION 21 - FIRE KO CORRECT KARNE KA TARIKA AUR REPEAT ORDER KA

USE

Method of Correcting Fire (Fire ko Correct Karne ke Tarike)

1. OP Offr tgt grid corrn dekar fire ko tgt per adjust karta hain. Corrn in yards/mtr ya
Deg, min/Mils mein deta hain jis prakar se fall of shot move karna hain :-

(a) OT line ke right angle per eg Rt/Lt 100, more/less 20 minutes/mils.

(b) OT line par aage ya piche. e.g, Add/Drop 400.

(c) Height corrn dekar. e.g, UP/Down 50.

2. GPO corrn guns ko pass karne ke liye line ya aur ele mein convert karta hain.

3. Yadi OP Offr line BT par corrn dena chata hain tab wah us par corrn de sakta
hain. e.g, precision shoot ke dauran.

4. A/S ke liye yadi corrn jaruri hain tab uske hisab se corrn dega (vivran in sec10).

5. Yadi time and percussion Fz istemal ho raha hain tab OP Offr corrector setting ya
alternation to Fz setting ka order deta hain tab HOB ko correct kar sakte hain. Jab Fz
indicator moujood hain tab hamesha corrector ka istemal karna chahiye.

Use of Order Repeat.

6. OP Offr and GPO ke beech istemal kiya jata hain taki kam se kam fire order diya
jaye. GPO gun ko normal order pass karega aur repeat ka istemal nahi karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
40
7. During Ranging. Ranging ke dauran repeat ka matlab hain ki dubara usi line
aur ele aur corrector / Fz setting par fire karna hain.

8. Fire For Effect. FFE ke dauran repeat ka matlab hain ki jis fire unit ko
address kiya gaya hain, woh same Nos of round fire karegi woh method of fire wahi
interval ke sath sweep aur search wohi jo pahle order mein kiya gaya tha. Is dauran hum
tgt grid corrn, A/S, corrector, Fz setting aur interval ki corrn de sakte hain.

TABLE XII – THE APPLICATION OF DURING A SHOOT

Ser Orders Remarks

1 2 ranging, Fire Number 2 ranging, 4800, Fire
2 Repeat 4800
3 Add 100, 1 RGF More 35 minutes, 4850, 1 RGF
4 3 repeat Number 3, 1 RGF
5 DROP 50, repeat Less 15 minutes, 4825, 1 RGF
6 Repeat 1 RGF
7 5 rounds gun fire, 30 5 rounds gun fire, 30 seconds
8 Repeat 5 rounds gun fire, 30 seconds

SECTION 22 -SWEEP AND SEARCH KE ORDER KA USE

1. kabhi kabhi line aur range ke beaten zone ko artificially bina increase kiye hue
effective produce karna muskil hota hain. Is ke liye Sweep-----and / or Search-------ko
method of fire for effect ke part ke roop mein use kiya jata hain. Yeh order yadi GPO ya
OP Offr se diye jate hain tab yeh line of fire ke relation mein apply kiye jate hain.

Sweep

2. OP Offr ya bty level se upper wala HQ sweep ka order hamesha yard/mtr mein
deta hain. Jaise ki 3RGF sweep 100. Jab aisa order diya jata hain tab GPO sweep ke
amount ko degree aur min mein convert karta hain aur use traversing hand wheel ke
half turn ke barabar round off karta hain aur gun ko order karta hain, e.g., 3 RGF sweep
1 degree.

3. Pahle laying ke liye round ko right aur bad mein left mein fire kiya jayega. Dial
sight par koi setting nahi kiya jayega. Is mein traversing hand wheel ka kya karwai kiya
jayega yeh gun drill book mein diya gaya hain.

Search

4. Yadi search ka order kiya hain tab yeh nearest 50 mtr mein line of fire ke sath
diya jata hain.

5. Jab yeh order diya jata hain tab round correct elevation par uske bad search ke
amount se jyada ele par aur phir kam ele par fire kiya jata hain pahle wala jo ele hain
wahi sight ke range scale par ya fd clinometer par set karte hain aur gun ko normal
tarike se lay karte hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
41
6. GPO jab ele QE ke taur par pass karta hain tab yeh behtar hain ki GPO har ek ko
apni turn par alag alag pass kare.

7. Yadi search ka order diya hain tab yadi 6000,5RGF 20 search 200 by 100 ke
order per round fire is prakar honge. 6000 par first round uske bad 6200,6100 aur
5800,5900 par round fire honge.Gun dubara 6000 Ele par lay hogi.

Sweep & Search

8. Kabhi kabhi sweep &search ka order ek sath mein hi milta hain. GPO detachment
ke liye drill ko simplify karega aur iske liye alag alag elevation par guns ko sweep ka
order karega.

e.g,
OP offr “9 RGF 20, sweep 100 search 100”
GPO “6000,3RGF 20 seconds sweep 1 deg”
“6100, 3RGF 20 seconds sweep 1 deg”
“5900, 3RGF 20 seconds sweep 1deg”
“6000 par GPO dubara relay ka order karega.

9. Sweep aur search method of fire ka ek hissa hain aur fresh metod of fire se
cancel hota hain

SECTION 23 - ORDER “ENGAGE”, “TOT” AND “BOMBARD” KA USE

1. In order ka istemal future mein tgt ko engage karne ki jarurat ke liye kiya jata hain.
Ya pahle plan kiya hua plan ke upper fire karne ke liye ya yakin karne ke liye ki har ek
gun ka pahla round ek sath tgt par aa raha hain. Yeh hamesha time ke sath diya jata
hain, Jaise ki time in hrs ya ’H’ hour aur agar jaldi se jaldi fire chahiye tab forthwith ke
order end mein lagaya jayega lekin TOT ke sath forthwith ka order nahi diya jayega.

2. Tgt normally record kiye jayenge aur method of fire pahle taiyar kiya jayega . Agar
koi shak hain to avashyak order engagement ke order mein shamil kiye jayenge.

3. Engage at------. Jab “engage at-----“ ka order diya gaya hain tab GPO exact
time par fire ka order dega.

TOT

4. Jab “TOT----“ka order diya hain tab GPO diye hue time se time of flight ko kam
karke jo time aata hain us time par fire ka order dega.

(a) TOT----Time now is----. Is mein GPO/Adjt running time ko darsata hain
aur count down is transmission ke end se start hota hain.

(b) TOT-------minutes from now. Yeh GPO/Adjt ko yeh darshata hain ki

count down now word se start karni hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
42
Bombard at-----

5. Bombard at-------ka order hostile bty ko engage karne ke liye kiya jata hain. Iske
liye GPO Para 3 ke mutabik karwahi karega.

6. Pgme shoot mein Para 3 ke order ka hamesha istemal kiya jayega jab tak TOT ka
order nahi kiya jata hain.

7. In terms ka use niche diya gaya table mein dikhaya gaya hain.

TABLES XII – USE OF THE ORDERS “ENGAGE”, “TOT”, & “ BOMBARDMENT"

Ser Orders Remarks

1 “Scale 3, Engage at 1130”. The engagement begins at 1130h
2 “Target U 4315 TOT 1535”. The number of rds and method of fire have been
pre-arranged. The order “Fire” is given at 1535 h
minus the time of flight.
3 “Bombard U 1321 Scale 3 The no of rds and method of fire may be laid down
Forthwith” in CB task table. Fire commences fourthwith.
4 “Tango oscar tango one Count down commences from the word one.
three zero zero”. “Time now
is one one two one”.
5 “Tango oscar tango two Count down commences from the word now.
minutes from now”

SECTION 24 - SHOOT KA SUSPENSION

1. Fire ki Rukawat. Fire ka order khatam hone se pahle agar thori der fire ko
rokna hain to stop, stop loading aur stand fast ka order karte hain.

2. Stop loading. Yeh order sirf concerned gun ko load ke liye lagu hota hain
baki order ke mutabik jo bhi action hain woh jari rahte hain. Koi gun ko jo pahle se load
hain yeh order milne se fire kiya jayega. “Stop loading”, “GO ON” se cancel hota hain.

3. Stop. Stop ka order milne par yadi gun load hain tab fire nahi karegi, lekin det
mile hue order par amal karegi. Yeh order “GO ON” se cancel hota hain. Modification of
fire plan mein yeh order “restart at---“ se cancel hota hain.

4. Stand Fast. Yeh order normally safety ke lihaj se diye jate hain. stand fast milne
par det jis halat mein hain usi halat mein stand fast ho jati hain. Yeh order “GO ON” se
cancel hota hain.

Importance of Leaving Gun Empty

5. Yadi koi gun lambi firing ke bad bhi loaded hain tab wah high temp ki wajah se
gun me bore ke under explode hone ka dar rahta hain. Iske liye nimn percuations liye
jate hain :-

(a) Lambe firing ke dauran periodically guns ko rest dena hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
43
(b) Guns ko rate of fire ko dhyan mein rakhte hue load Karen “(Section 18).

(c) Yadi fire order mila hain aur dubara gun load nahi karna hain tab apne tps
ke bachav ke liye Stop loading ka istemal Karen (lekin apne troop ko khatra na
ho).

(d) Yadi galati se fire apne Troop ko danger ho raha hain to OP officer stop ka
order pass karke, safe corrn ke sath GO ON order karta hain .

6. Rest. Jab fire ko thori der ke liye rokna hain tab rest ka order diya jata hain.
Yeh order milne par det gun par hi apni-apni jagah par rest karti hain. Is ke bad ke order
par amal nahi kiya jayega yeh order Take post se Cancel hota hain. GPO khud bhi
‘Rest’ order kar sakta hain jab firing ke beech mein jyada anter hain.

7. GPO yakin karta hain ki guns hot hain aur kuch samay tak fire nahi kar sakta hain
to gun ko load aur reload hone se bachane ke liye nimn upay karta hain :-

(a) Firing ke dauran yadi GPO chahta hain tab kisi bhi gun ko jiski jarurat nahi
hain ko No ---- stop loading ka order dega.

(b) Yadi koi hot gun loaded hain tab GPO OP ko “Gun loaded gun hot” ka
report dega tab OP officer para 3 ke mutabik action lega.

8. No 1 hamesha yeh yakin karne ka jimmewar hain ki uski Gun hot hain to kabhi
bhi load na ho. Agar kabhi aisa mauka ata hain to No 1 report deta hain Number ---------
Gun loaded Gun Hot.

Continuation of a suspended shoot

9. Shoot ke dauran mile huve sabhi orders tab tak lagu rahte hain, jab tak ki fresh
sequence of initial order na mile hon. Ek shoot ‘Rest’ se thodi der ke liye rukta hain aur
order take post se continue ho jata hain, jab tak ki fresh sequence of initial order na mile
hon. For Example op officer adesh deta hain . “FBO --------round gun fire”, “Rest” iske
bad fire ko phir suru karne ke liye order hoga “Take post, Fire”.

SECTION 25 - TERMINATION OF A SHOOT

1. Ek shoot ko terminate ke order is prakar hain, jo ki fresh sequence of initial order,

“Cese firing”, “Tank alert” aur “Stand easy”.

2. Stand easy order us samay diya jata hain jab shoot ko khatam karna ho aur gun
se detachment ko withdraw karna ho Stand easy ka order dene se pahle us method of
fire ko pura kiya jayega.

3. Shoot termination hone ke bad guns DF (SOS) per laid hoga. Jaise OP se “stand
easy” ka order milta hain to GPO jaruri orders pass karega. GPO agar guns hot nahi
hain to guns ko “stand easy” order dene se pahile guns ko load karata hain aur make
safe ka order deta hain aur sathi sath OP ko report deta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
44
4. Uper diye gaye circumstances ke anusar GPO ensure karta hain ki koi jaruri kam
hain to usko karvana. Aur guns ko gun drill books ke anusar laid kiya jayega.

5. “Stand Easy” ka order “Take post” se cancel hota hain.

SECTION 26 - CORRECTING MISTAKE IN ORDERS

1. Signal procedure. OP se GPO tak ke order ke bare mein STAA 6/69 mein
likha hain.

2. Use of “Wrong”. OP ke opr report karne se pahle agar kisi galti ka pata chal
jata hain tab OP Offr order karega wrong aur sath hi correct order pass karega. GPO
order ke taur par Wrong ka istemal nahi karega.

3. Use of “Stop”. Jab koi order mein galti pakri gai jiska taluk sthithi ya gun ke
firing ke sath hain tab us halat mein order “stop” diya jayega aur galti door karne ke bad
order “GO ON” diya jayega agar galti ka talukh gun ke fire ke sath nahi hain tab stop
dene ki jarurat nahi hain.

4. Use of “Cancel”. Agar cumulative order mein galti ka pata chal jata hain tab
OP Offr order Cancel ke sath galat order pass karega aur bad mein sahi order pass
karega. Agar non cumulative order mein koi galti hai tab cancel ka istemal nahi kiya
jayega.

Example

5. The application of the above rules is illustrated in the following table :-

TABLE XIV – CORRECTING MISTAKES IN ORDERS

Ser Orders Correction Ref Paras

1 “Drop 200, 1 RGF” “Stop Cancel Drop 200, Add 200 3,4
go on”
2 “Corrector 92” “Corrector 84” 3,4
3 “Angle of Sight 15 “Angle of Sight 20 minutes 3,4
minutes elevation” elevation”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
45
SECTION 27- CORRECTING MISTAKE IN LAYING

1. Agar OP Offr ko pata chal gaya hain ek gun baki gun se alag fire kar rahi hain
tab usko correct karne ke liye sabse achha tarika hain ki us gun ko indl tgt grid corrn
dena hain, agar bahut jyada hain tab OP Offr error at No ---- ka order kar sakta hain.

2. Yeh order milne ke bad GPO kisi Tp Ldr ko jaruri checking karne ke liye order
dega, galti milne par ushe correct kiya jayega aur report is prakar hain ;-

(a) No----now correct aur sath nature of error bhi dega.

(b) Agar gun par koi galti nahi mile tab No----correct ki report dega.

3. Concern gun ko jarurat ki checking ke liye ya error ko dur karne ke liye jarurat se
jyada der tak firing se nahi roka jayega.

4. Agar GPO beech mein amn ya sight setting ki report chahta hain tab order karta
hain “Report----“.e.g.”No-----report Bg” or “No----report Fz setting”.

5. OP officer ya GPO guns ya gun ki firing ko dusre gun ki parallel to the line lane ke
liye order karta hain “Parallel lines to Number -----“. Agar OP officer se ye order milta
hain to line aur range ke liye sare individual corrections cancel ho jata hain. Position
Correction lagu rahega aur baki drills gun drill book mein diya gaya hain.

6. Order “Check laying” koi final order nahi hain aur iska istemal nahi hoga.

SECTION 28 - REPORTS FROM THE GPO TO THE OP

General

1. Guiding principle is prakar hain :-

(a) GPO ki report ke badle Op ke adesh ko prathmikta dena.

(b) GPO OP ko woh tamam information pass karta hain jo ki fall of shot se
sambandh rakhte hain aur kis gun ne kis data par fire kia hain.

(c) Yadi gun per koi galti ho jati hain to GPO uski report turant OP officer ko
dega taki fall of shot mein OP officer uska galat matlab na nikale.

(d) yah jaruri hain ki communication mein bina matlab ki suchna na di jaye.

Ready

2. GPO se OP ko ready report jab jab di jati hain jo ki is prakar hain:-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
46
(a) Gun ko C/A Bg per record hone ke bad agar fire ka order nahi mila ho yadi
kuchh guns kisi karan se C/A per deri se record hoti hain to GPO bty ka jo bhi
part ready hua hain uski report Op ko dega. Jaise

“Bty ready” jab bty ki sabhi guns ready ho.

“Right Tp ready” jab Lt Tp ready na ho.

(b) Jab guns ko sabhi order pass kiya ja chuka ho lekin OP se fire ka order
nahi maila ho ya koi order jo gun ko fire ke liye chahiye to sabi gun jinka
sambandh fire se hain unki ready report di jayegi.

Shot

3. Jab akeli gun fire kar rahi hain ya number se fire kar rahi hain to uski report turant
op ko di jayegi jaise “shot 3” ye niyem ek gun par lagu hota hain. Jab Bty fire ,gun fire or
single gun fire kar rai ho.Jab op ko deri se report di gai ho to GPO time ko bhi report ke
sath deta hain. Jaise “Shot 1,15, flight 27” ya “Shot 1,15”.

4. Jab kuch guns tarteeb mein fire kare rahi ho ya independently fire kar rahi ho to
shot report diya jayega jaise hi pahli gun fire kar jati hain, aur gun ka koi number nahi
batya jayega ye rule gun fire mein lagu hota hain jab ek gun se jayada gun ,salvo
ranging or air op shoot mein do guns fire kar rahi ho.

All Gone

5. Fire for effect ke dauran OP officer report all gone ka order kar sakta hain agar
chahta hain to,GPO last round fire hone ke bad all Gone ki report dega.

6. Guns out of action and casualities. Jab gun ke permanent out of action or
casualties hone par jab iska asar fire power par ho raha hain to GPO iska report OP ya
adjutant ko dega Jaise “---out of action “ “—In action” ka report diya jata hain jab gun
action mein ho jati hain .agar gun me koi temporary rukawat hain to iski report nahi di
Jayegi.

Guns Missing their Turn

7. Jab akeli Gun fire karti hain ya number se fire kar rahi hain aur gun apne number
per fire nahi kar pati to OP offr ko apne aap pata chal jata hain iski koi alag se report
nahi di jati jaise ki bty fire GPO ki report hoti hain “Shot 2” , “Shot 4“ is se OP offr ko pata
chal jata hain ki No 3 gun ne apna turn miss kar diya hain. Agar akhiri gun fire nahi kar
pati hain to OP offr ko isi prakar pata chal jata hain.

8. Jab gun tartib se ya independently fire kar rahi ho to OP offr round ke burst ko
associate nahi kar sakta hain. Is halat mein bhi koi atirikt report OP ko nahi di jayegi jab
gun fire na kar pai ho.

9. Misfire aur Premature. Misfire ki report OP offr ko nahi di jati jab tak ki wah
OP offr ko mislead na karen. Premature ki report OP ko di jayegi kisi bhi halat mein
casualitiy / damage ho ya na ho premature ki report di jayegi.

(a) “Bore Premature”.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
47
(b) “Muzzle Premature” (muzzle se lekar 100m tak).

(c) “Flight Premature”.

Time of Flight

10. Sabhi observe shoot mein GPO Time of flight ki report OP ko second mein initial
mein shot ka report ya ready report ke sath diya jata hain jaise :-

(a) “Ready flight 19”

(b) “Shot 1 flight 17”.

11. GPO time of flight ki report hamesha deta hain jab ki naya tgt mila ho,
charge badli ho gaya ho ya flight 5” se jyada badli ho gaya ho.

12. Stand By. Yeh drill OP officer or OPA ke bich mein hoti hain. OPA target per
round girne se 5 sec pahile cry karta hain. Jisse ki OP officer round ko dekh sake. Agar
OP officer ne order diya hain to GPO target par round girne se 5 sec pahile stand by ka
order karta hain jaise “ Stand By Out”.

13. Change of Grid. Change of grid ki report GPO, OP officer ko hamesha deta
hain jaise “ 23 now on Regt Grid.

14. Change of Trarget on which the Guns are Laid. Agar stand easy ke order
par guns DF SOS ya kisi dusre tgt par lay karta hain to GPO, OP officer ko report dega
“23 laid on ------------ (Nick name of the DF (SOS))”.

15. Change of Charge. Agar OP officer ne GR pass kiya jisko kisi bhi suitable
charge se engage nahi kar sakte to GPO report dega “Target Crested”. Agar target grid
correction se crest per hit hone ka khatra hain to GPO lower charge ko select karega aur
new time of flight ki report dega.

Change of Ammuunition

16. Agar initial order diya hain or gun kisi dusre amn se load hain to GPO report
dega.

17. Agar GPO ki report dene ke bad OP officer ne koi fresh order nahi dia hain to
guns section 6 para 1 ke hisab se clear ki jayegi. Agar guns ne dusre amn se fire kiya
hain to GPO iski report OP ko dega.

18. In niyamo ka udharan is prakar hain :-

(a) OP officer “ ………. Target, air burst ---------- fire”.

GPO “ Shot 2”, jab ranging round ground burst ho.

OP officer “ Air burst”.

“Shot 2, ground burst”, followed by “shot 2”.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
48
(b) OP Officer “Target VT, ------------ one round gun fire”.

GPO “Gun loaded with ground burst”

OP officer “Fire”

GPO “Shot ground burst”. Followed by “Shot”.

Badly Rammed Round

19. Ek badly rammed round sahi range se kai sau meters piche gir sakta hain. Agar
No 1 dekhta hain ki round badly rammed hua hain to No 1 report karega. “ Number
……… bad ram” aur agle order ka wait karega.

20. No 1 ki report ke bad GPO OP officer ko report dega “Number ------ bad ram” Abhi
OP officer dekhega ki jo data gun ko pass kiya hain us par fire karne se safety per koi
problem to nahi hain to gun ko order dega.

(a) “Number ----------- fire” agar current data safe hain.

OR

(b) Ek safe correction gun se follwed karne ke bad order karega “Number ------
-------- fire”

21. Gun se safe data fire hone ke bad GPO ki jimmewari hain ki gun ko dubara
pichhe wale data per lay karna jis per ki gun bad ram hui thi aur method of fire ko pura
karegi aur agar ranging gun hain to ranging round aur fire karegi.

22. Agar bad ram ki report Pgme shoot ke dauran lagi hain to GPO gun ko safe
correction pass karega jaise “ number 2 13000 No 2 fire”. OP ko report Dene ki jarurat
nahi hain. Defaulting gun round fire karne ke bad bina kisi order ke programme shoot
mein hissa legi.

23. Agar round bahut badly rammed hain to ( breech end se dekne par projectile ke
sides ke gap se light nazar aata hain) gun ka No1 GPO ko gun out of action ka report
dega aur GPO ejector projectile se round ko eject karne ka order karega. GPO is order
ko is tarah se deta hain “Number …….Ejector Projectile”. Aur GPO delay se bachne ke
liye jaruri cation lega.

Mistakes in laying

24. Jab OP officer kisi galti ka report GPO se puchta hain to yeh sec 27 me dia hain
aur uske mutabik GPO error ki report dega. Agar OP se koi report nahi magar GPO ne
koi error ka report dena hain to section 28 Para 1 (c) ke mutabik report se pahle GPO ne
“Neglect” aur sath mein error ki report jo ki OT bearing aur line of fire se relation rakti
hain. Niche kuch ek errors diya gaya hain jo ki is prakar hain :-

(a) “Last round fired 1000 meters NORTH” agar target ke GR plot karne me
galti hui hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
49
(b) “Last round fire at ADD 200” agar command Post ke under kisi correction
ke alawa ADD 200 ki correction plot ki gayi ho.

(c) “Number 2 fired at Plus 400 “or” Number 2 fired at RIGHT 2 degrees” agar
kisi gun ne alag data per fire kia ho OP ya GPO ke pass kia hua order se.

(d) Agar angle of sighit me galti hain to use meters mein badli karke upar diye
huve report ke mutabik diya jayega.

(e) Agar corrector / fuze setting mein galti huva hain to report is prakar hogi
“Last round fired at corrector 140” agar galat corrector ya fuze setting par fire
huva hain.

(f) Agar OP officer round ko accept karna chahata hain to order dega “Accept
“followed by “Repeat” ya target grid correction.

(g) OP officer ke accept ke order per GPO last data ko sahi manta hain jis per
gun ne fire kiya hain aur shoot ko mile hua order ke hisab se jari rakhta hain.

SECTION 29 – AVOIDANCE OF DELAY

1. GPO har waqt aur har samay par galti aur deri se bachne ke liye jaruri action lene
ka jimmewar hain. Aur section 28 ke mutabik kuch jaruri reports OP officer ko dena hain.

2. Loading. GPO hamesha gun ko load kar sakta hain agar usse kabhi bhi time
ki bachat ho rahi ho ranging gun aur Tp ko bhi GPO deri se bachne ke lia badli kar sakta
hain sivay iske ki OP ne nominate kiya ho. Jo change GPO OP officer ko report karta
hain woh is prakar hain :-
EXAMPLE OP GPO’S ACTION TO AVOID DELAY

Ser OP’s ORDER GPO’s Action Remarks

1. “OSCAR 52 platoon Orders – No 2 Misfires.
locality” “Fire” “Number 2 Ranging, 6600,Fire”
Orders :-
“Number 3 Ranging” reports No 3 load and fire
“Shot 3 filght 19”
2. “2 ranging, active MMG Orders:- No 2 Misfire
“fire” “Number 2 ranging 6600 “Fire”
report “shot 2, flight 17”
“ADD 400 Orders :-
“More 20 minutes, 6900” reports
“2 misfire”
“3 Ranging” Orders :- No 3 load and fire
“Number 3 Ranging 6900”
reports “Shot 3”

3. Guns missing their turn at Battery fire. Agar Bty fire me koi gun apne
number per misfire ya bad ram hone ki vajah se fire na kar pai hain to GPO agli gun ko
fire ka order deta hain jaise “No--- ---- Fire” aur Bty fire normal tarike se pura hota hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
50
4. Guns Missing their turn at Gunfire. Agar Gun fire ke dauran koi Gun apne
number par kisi karan se fire na kare to No 1 uski report GPO ko deta hain or jab Gun
ready hoti hain tab bhi uski report GPO ko deta hain jaise “Number ----Ready”. Agar is
samay tak gun fire complete nahi hua hain to GPO order karega “Number---- fire”. Agar
gun fire samapt ho chuka hain to woh gun fire nahi karegi.

SECTION 30 - PASSAGE AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ORDERS

1. Order normally tannoy se pass kiye jate hain aur acknowledge kiye jate hain.
Agar tannoy sys fail ho jata hain to order bolker pass kiye jate hain aur is prakar
acknowledge kiye jate hain:-

(a) Jab Command Post se No 1 dekhain de. Hath ko seedha upper ki

taraf sir se upper uthaker.

(b) Jab Command Post se No 1 dekhain na de. Right ki taraf se report

dega “No ---- through”

2. Jab tannoy system ka istemal nahi kar raha hain aur agar koi No 1 order
acknowledge nahi kar pa raha ho to, command post se nazdik wala No1 un orders ko
repeat kar sakta hain. Agar phir bhi us No 1 order ko acknowledge nahi karne par us
order ko troop leader ya GPO us order ko dubara pass karega.

3. Yeh yakin karne ke liye ki jo orders acknowledge na huva hain aur us par sahi
action liya jaye aur jo order acknowledge kiya gaya hain, us par koi error na ho,
niminlikhit rule GPO aur No1 ke dwara follow kiya jayega :-

(a) Cumulative order. Order pass kiye jate hain “Last order was” ka prayog
kerke Jaise :-

(i) “Last order was less 30 minutes”.

(ii) “Last order was No… less 20 minutes”

(b) Non cumulative orders. Order ko ek hi bar repeat kiya jata hain jaise :-

(i) “Bearing 180 degrees”.

4. Kisi bhi order ko agar repetition mein koi shak hota hain to use “Check” word se
check kiya jata hain. Do orders ko bhi ek sath bola ja sakta hain. Jaise “Check
elevation”. “Check last order” siraf tab istemal kiya jata hain jab order ka ek dusre se
sambandh rakh ta ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
51
SECTION 31- SPECIAL ORDERS AND CONVENTIONS FOR THE USE OF STAR
SHELL

1. Star shell ka paryog raat ke samey tactical operation mein artificial light ke liye
kiya jata hain aur arty fire ko target per durust karne ke liye kiya jata hain.

PART-1 : Tactical operation mein sahayata

2. “----Target Star (Single gun/troop/Bty). OP officer se ye order jahir karta hain

ki star shell fire karke supported arms ko lagatar illumination support provide karna.
Ranging, single gun se star shell ka istemal karte hue ki jayegi.

PART- II : TO AID ADJUSTMENT OF ARTILLERY FIRE

3. Observation by star. Yeh order OP officer ke dwara jahir karta hain ki target ko
star shell se indicate kiya jayega. GPO nimnlikhit karwai karta hain :-

(a) OP officer target ko engage karne ke liye star shell ka istemal kar raha
hain.

(b) OP officer ke order dene per ranging bty ki ek gun star shell fire karne ke
liye nominate ki jati hain.

(c) Shoot ko do bhagon mein banta jata hain :-

(i) Star shell ko is tarah adjust kiya jayega taki tgt area mein achi tarah
se roshni ki ja sake.

(ii) Baki gun se ranging aur MPI adjust kiya jata hain.

(d) Yeh order GPO aur gun ke beech istemal nahi kiya jata.

Star Adjusted

4. Yeh order jahir karta hain ki star shell target area mein roshni karne ke liye adjust
ho gaya hain. Baki shoot mein star shell se fire karne wali gun isi data per fire karegi jab
tak uske liye nominated order nahi aata. Is gun ke liye koi bhi amn order, line, angle of
sight, corrector ya fuze setting aur elevation tab tak lagu nahi hoga jab tak ki order “No---
-HE” GPO se na mile. In case of mike target observation by star mein agar order mile
‘Star Adjusted’ to uska matlab hain ki ranging battery ko rest milne par bhi ranging gun
lagatar star shell fire karti rahegi. Doosri bty’s ki ranging check observation ki sahayata
ke liye.

5. GPO dwara gun ko diya gaya order yeh indicate karta hain :-

(a) Star shell fire karne wali gun current data par fire karti rahegi, jab tak yeh
order laghu hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
52
(b) Koi order jaise ammunition, line, angle of sight, corrector or fuze setting aur
elevation ityadi, star fire karne wali gun apply nahi karegi jab tak ki us gun ko
order, ‘No –HE’ na mile.

6. Cancel Observation By Star. Yeh order OP officer ke dwara diya jata hain jo ki
jahir karta hain ki star fire karne wali gun shoot mein hissa nahi legi.

7. “No----HE”. OP se ye order GPO ko jahir karta hain ki tarah hi data lagak ker
diya hua amn fire karegi.

8. “Interval Star and HE”. GPO yeh work out karta hain ki star fire karne wali gun
aur ranging gun ke beech mein interval kya hoga. Iska istemal GPO isliye karta hain ki
jab star shell fire ho usse pahale HE round ground per gire. OP officer is interval ko
jarurat ke anusar badli kar sakta hain.

SECTION 32 – ORDER CONCERNING A MOVE

1. “Prepare to Advance (or withdraw)”. Yeh warning ke taur per order diya jata
hain jab ki kuch der mein move hone wala ho. Gun drill mein di gai detail ke anusar gun
posn ko chodne ki tayari ki jati hain lekin gun tab tak action mein rahegi jab tak “cease
firing” ka order nahi milta hain.

“Empty Guns”

2. Yeh order us officer ko pass karna chahiye jo gun ko move karne ke liye final
order deta hain. Order “Empty gun at ---“ ke taur per diya jata hain. Yeh order safe grid
reference se target grid corrn ya safe tgt number ke sath milna chahiye. Yeh order fire
karne ke liye executive order hain. Jaise hi GPO tamam guns “No----Empty” ki report
hasil kar leta hain to woh report karega “Guns empty”.

3. Move ke order se pahale ager GPO ko “Empty guns” ka order nahi mila hain to
GPO “Report guns empty” se check karta hain ki gun empty hain. Is order per :-

(a) Number1, “No---- Empty” ya “No ---- loaded” ki report karega.

(b) Agar koi gun loaded hain aur round ko jaldi se eject nahi kar sakte to
safety ke karan se GPO, OP officer ko report dega “Check empty Guns, Guns
loaded”.

4. Cease Firing. Yeh order gun posn ke incharge ki taraf se diya jata hain jab usko
move ke liye executive order mil chuka ho aur gun ko out of action karne ke ek dam
pahale yeh us officer ki jimmewari hain ki cease firing dene se pahale empty gun ki drill
puri ho chuki hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
53
SECTION 33 – THE ENGAGEMENT OF TANKS BY DIRECT FIRE

Statement of Preparedness

1. Tank ko engage karne ke taiyari ki teen halat nimnlikhit hain :-

(a) “Normal”.

(b) “Prepare for tanks”.

(c) “Tank Alert”

Normal

2. Yeh taiyari bina kisi special order ke hoti hain. Gun posn ko occupation karte hi
maintain kiya jata hain aur yeh “prepare for tanks”, “Tank alert”, aur “Cease firing” ke
order se cancel hota hain.

3. Gun posn occupation ke dauran GPO ke order is prakar hote hain.

(a) Sector and anti sector arcs.

(b) Special anti tank/Direct firing posn, agar jaruri hain to.

(c) Madad ke nishan.

(d) Jyada se jyada range jis per fire khola ja sake.

(e) Local OP’s ke liye jagah.

4. Gun No 1 range card ko taiyar karta hain us area ko cover karne ke liye jo uski
gun se dekhain de aur detechment ko brief karta hain, jo ki No 3 para mein diya gaya
hain.

“Prepare for Tanks”

5. Yeh order GPO ke dwara diya jata hain jab attack ki sambhavana kam hoti hain.
Sabhi kaam jari rahate hain, lekin kuch action liye jate hain jo is prakar hain :-

(a) Local OPs bheje Jate hain.

(b) Jahan jarurat hain amn prepare kiya jata hain.

(c) GPO yeh consider karta hain ki nominate ki gai gun special anti tank posn
per pahuch gai hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
54
Tank Alert

6. Yeh order us samey diya jata hain jab attack hone wala ho. GPO nominate gun
ko special anti tank posn per jane ka order deta hain, ager pahale nahi gai hain to.
Sabhi kam gun posn per band ho jate hain, camouflage nets GPO ke order per utare
jayege.

7. GPO Sequence of Orders. Sequence of order is prakar hain.

(a) Ammunition. (eg AP, Ch Super/HESH, Charge 4.5)

(b) “Load”

(c) “Direct laying---- (Telescope ya dial sight ya open sight)”.

(d) Target location (jaise “Rt sector”, Ref point pole RIGHT 3 O’ clock 2
degrees")

(e) Target description (jaise “Hull down”, “Moving RIGHT”, “Front Tank” or
“APC”.)

(f) “----Engage” (jaise RIGHT troop ya Number 2 engage).

Control of Fire

8. Vaise to GPO, Tp Ldr ya No 1 ko direct control karne ke-liye order pass karta hain
lekin overall control apne pass rukta hain taki gun ko fresh target per direct ker sake
agar jarurat hain to.

9. “Cancel Tank Alert” order GPO dwara diya jata hain jab engagement samapt ho
gaya ho aur jaldi koi attack na ho raha ho. Gun apne normal task per wapis aa jati hain.
GPO, jo gun anti tank posn occupy kiye hue hain use indirect firing posn per wapis
bulata hain.

10. “Engage” ka order “Stop”se cancel hota hain.

11. No 1 ke order sahi tartib mein table XVI mein diye gaye hain.

Tabel XVI - NUMBER’s 1 SEQUENCE OF ORDER

Ser ORDERS GIVEN AS

1 Indication of target including the “Target Hull down”
phrase “Hull down” if the bulk of the
target is not visible.
2. Range “600”
3. Description of target (if required) “Left tank” or tank moving from left to Right
or “Front Tank”
4. Lead “Zero” or “Zero Right edge” or “Left two”
5. Fire, GPO se “engage ka order “Fire”
milne ke bad ya tgt range me ane
per
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
55
SECTION 34 – ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS OTHER THAN TANKS BY DIRECT
FIRE

1. Jab tank ke alawa koi aur attack gun position me ho raha hain us samay speed
ko mahatva dete huye aur khatro se deri aur galti ko samapt karne ke liye kuch orders is
prakar hain. GPO ka order hota hain “Prepare for direct fire” is order per niminlikhit
action liye jate hain :-

(a) Guns present task per hi rahegi.

(b) Listening posts bheji jayegi.

(c) Sabhi gun detechment se ek – ek sentry diye huye sector me najar

rakhane ke liye bheja jayega.

2. Sabhi order jo jaruri hain unko table XVI mein sahi tartib mein dikhaya gaya hain.
Order hamesha seqence mein diye jate hain.

TABLE XVII – SEQUENCE OF ORDERS FOR DIRECT LAYING

Ser Orders Remarks

1. “Nature of target” Sec.5
2. “Ammunition” Sec.6
3. “Method of laying” Is prakar dene hain “Direct laying dial
sight/Open sight/telescope”
4. “Indication of target” Verticle clock ray method dwara diye gaye
hain jaise “Reference Point ---- Right/Left ----
O’clock ---degrees GPO/Troop leaders har
Gun ko tgt per direct kar sakte hain ya Tgt per
direct hone per “ON” ka order dete hain.
5. Deflection for movement of target Order is prakar dene hain: “More/Less----
degrees ---- minutes” jab dial sight use ho or
“Rt/Lt---jab open sight or telescope use ho
raha ho.
6. Fire by order Sec.12
7. “Method of ranging” Sec.13
8. Correcter or fuze setting Sec.15
9. “Elevation” Sec.16
10. “Fire” Sec.18

3. Jab ek shoot fire for effect se shuru hota hain to order ki tartib is prakar hoti hain :-

(a) Nature of the target.

(b) Ammunition.

(c) Method of laying.

(d) Indication of target.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
56
(e) Deflection for movement of target.

(f) Fire by order.

(g) Corrector or fuze setting.

(h) Elevation.

(j) No of rounds and method of fire for effect.

(k) Interval.

(l) Fire.

4. “Direct laying” ka order “Indirect” se cancel hota hain. Aur indirect ka order milne
ke bad guns normal tarike se target ko engage karti hain.

SECTION 35 – CHANGES APPLICABLE TO 155MM

GENERAL ASPECTS AND KRASNOPOL AMN

PART 1 – CHANGES APPLICABLE FOR 155MM

1. General. ODM se BCM aur BCM se gun mein digitally fire orders ki transmission
me kuch ek khas changes fire discipline mein jaruri hain jinko niche para mein explain
kiya gaya hain.

2. Equivalent Terminology. ODM aur BCM mein fire discipline ki lihaj se kuch
important terms ke matrix diya gaya hain jo ki jin units mein 155mm FH 77B02 available
hain unke liye lagu hain. Yeh niminlikhit hain :-

(a) Nature of target - Fire mission

(b) Ranging - Adjustment

(c) Stand by - Splash

(d) DF(SOS) - Final protective fire

(e) GR and height - Grid ENA

(f) Height - Altitude

(g) OT Bearing - Direction

(h) Concentrate - Converge

(j) Fire By order - At my command

(k) Stop loading - Cease loading

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
57
(l) Stop - Check Fire

(m) Bty fire - Bty right

(n) Datum correction - Registration corrections.

3. Method of passing orders to guns. Bearing, elevation, fuze setting and charge
BCM ke dwara guns ko digitally pass kiya jata hain aur baki fire order communication
system ki line ke dwara pass kiya jata hain.

Initial Orders

4. Jab digitally ODM se BCM ko order pass kiya ja raha hain tab koi verbal orders
pass karne ki jarurat nahi hain. Jab ki target ke bare mein guns ko warning diya jata
hain aur special preparation ke bare mein bhi warning diya jata hain. Pahale nature of
target ko verbly pass kiya jata hain aur bad mein digitally bache huye orders ko pass
kiya jata hain.

5. Agar voice communication ki radio ya line ko istemal karke orders pass karne ki
jarurat ho to niminlikhit orders ko chorker baki orders ko normal sequence mein pass
kiya jata hain.

(a) Clinometer laying.

(b) Corrector.

6. Niminlikhit tartib se ranging ke dauran order ko GPO se guns ko pass kiya jata
hain:-
Ser Orders Method of transmission
(a) Nature of target Voice
(b) Amn (excluding charge) Voice
(c) Fuze setting Digital
(d) Charge Digital
(e) Bearing Digital
(f) Quadrant Elevation (QE) Digital
(g) Fire by order (FBO) Voice
(h) Method of ranging Voice
(j) Target description Voice
(k) Fire Voice

7. Ranging ke dauran niminlikhit orders digitally pass kiya jate hain :-

(a) Fuze setting.

(b) Charge.

(c) Bearing.

(d) Quadrant elevation.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
58
8. Fire for effect mein nimn likhit orders voice mein pass kiye jate hain :-

(a) No of rounds.

(b) Method of fire for effect.

(c) Interval.

9. Nature of Target. Fire ko distribute karne ke liye ek special procedure istemal

kiya jayega. Jab voice comn istemal ho raha hain tab nature of target ke sath linear
bearing aur length ko pass karne ki jarurat nahi hain.

10. Target high angle. OP officer kewal voice comn me istemal karega.

11. Target ladder. (Ground OP). Yeh order OP officer ke dwara OT bg ke sath
voice communication me pass kiya jayega. GPO ranging ke dauran ladder ke point per
fire karne ke liye OP linear matrix square or OT bg select karega.

12. Target VT. GPO zelar fuze istemal karega.

Ammunition

13. Ordes by OP Officer. Niminlikhit conventions apply honge jab OP officer se amn
order pass kiya jayega jab voice comn istemal ho raha hain :-

(a) Agar OP officer koi projectile ka order na kare to GPO BT distance ke

relation mein training ke dauran HE M 107 aur operation ke dauran HE
77B/HEER istemal karega.

(b) HE shell ke sath fuze istemal karne ka order agar OP officer na de to fuze
PDM 572 SQ per set karke istemal kiya jayega.

(c) Percussion (2/3/4). ZELAR fuze ko percussion setting 2,3 aur 4 per set
kiya jayega.

(d) VT (5/6/7). ZELAR fuze setting ko percussion setting se VT(5/6/7) me

set kiya jayega.

(e) Delay. PDM 572 fuze ko delay per set kiya jayega.

(f) Super Quick (SQ). PDM 572 fuze ko SQ per change kiya jayega.

(g) Terms. “Cap on / Cap off” applicable nahi hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
59
14. Table of Effects & Fuze setting

Ser Effect OP GPO Setting

1. Direct action Omits any ref to fuze HE PDM 572 SQ
2. Graze action Target delay HE PDM 572 Delay D
3. Air Brust Target VT 5/6/7 HE ZELAR 5/6/7 5/6/7
4. RICO Target rico HE ZELAR setting1 1
5. Ground Burst Target percussion HE ZELAR 2/3/4/ 2/3/4
2/3/4/
6. Changing from Super quick Super quick SQ
delay to super quick
7. Change from Percussion aur VT ZELAR setting 2/3/4/ ya 2/3/4 ya
percussion ya VT 5/6/7 5/6/7
ya Vice versa

15. Ammunition Convention at Gun End.

(a) Shell. Agar gun position mein ek se jyada amn available hain to
HE/Smoke/ill shell order kiya jayega. Example :- HE 77B, Smk 18 Km, ill 24 Km.

(b) Fuze. Agar ek se jyada fuze available hain to fuze order kiya jyaga.
Example :- HE 107 PDM 572 delay ya HE 77B ZELAR setting 4.

(c) Weight of Shell. Agar shell ka weight ek weight group se jyada hain to
GPO sahi wt group ko pass karega. Example :- HEM107 four square ya HE 77B
Minus two.

(d) Charge. Agar jarurat hain to charge ke order GPO voice ke dwara pass
karega.

(i) Green 3/4/5.

(ii) White 4/5/6/7.

(iii) Charge 8 or 9.

(e) Full Ammunition Order. HE M 107, Fuze PDM 572 Delay 4 Squares
charge White 6.

Indication of Target

16. Additional Methods of target indication.

(a) Pollar Coordinate. Range finder se bg aur distance istemal kiya jata hain.

(b) By Cross observation. Do OP se.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
60
Line and Concentration.

17. Bearing hamesha digitally pass kiya jata hain. Original line ke correction bhi fresh
bg ki tarah pass kiya jata hain. Fresh bearing jo bhi hain woh individual line corrn jo sight
per hain woh cancel nahi hoti hain.

18. Nature of target ke liye ranging ke dauran sabhi gun ko concentrate kiya jata hain
ya special procedure istemal kiya jata hain. Jarurat nahi hain to guns parallel fire nahi
karti concentrate on No----aur parallel lines to No ---- applicable nahi hain.

19. Clinometer laying. Is eqpt mein clinometer laying ki jarurat nahi hain. Jab ki
sight test ke dauran clinometer istemal kiya jata hain.

20. Angle of sight. OP alternation to height order karke angle of sight change ker
sakta hain. GPO angle of sight pass nahi karta kyonki guns ko hamesha QE pass kiya
jata hain.

21. Posn correction and Gun correction. Pon corrn aur gun corrn dono applicable
nahi hain.

Fire By Order

22. Agar FBO order kiya jata hain to gun ready report dega jab ramming control
button press karne se pahale charge bag loading trough aur shell loading tray me ho.
Same drill salvo ranging ke dauran follow kiya jayega.

Rules for lading the Guns

23. 155mm FH 77B 02 initially load nahi ki jayegi jab tak fire order na mile.

24. Ranging ke dauran fresh firing data (Bg, QE, Charge, Fz setting) aur executive
order to fire milne ke bad guns ko reload kiya jayega.

25. Corrector and Fuze setting. Corrector applicable nahi hain.

26. Elevation. Elevation ko QE ke dwara pass kiya jayega. Yeh hamesha mils mein
aur four digit me pass kiya jayega.

Method of Fire for Effect

27. Application of Brust Fire. Jab burst fire tech istemal karna hain to OP do ya
teen round gun fire interval ke bina order karega. Rounds ko jaldi se jaldi fire kiya
jayega.

28. Special Rules for Smoke Shoots.

(a) GPO smoke screen ke fire for effect ke convention me ek round add
karega.

(b) Alternate. Yeh procedure applicable nahi hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
61
29. Target Description. Jab BCM or ODM ek sath kaam ho raha ho tab target
descrption ko four digit code mein digitally pass kiya jayega.

Summary of Rules for Firing During a Shoot

30. During Ranging. Gun ko fire karne ke liye GPO dwara niminlikhit executive
order fire plan ke liye diye jayenge :-

(a) Fresh gun data receive karne ke bad.

(b) Repeat. Guns last data per fire karegi.

31. Salvo Ranging. Jab OP teen guns ko ranging ke liye nominate karta hain to yeh
salvo ranging ko jahir karta hain tab GPO salvo ranging ke rule ko apply karta hain aur
order karta hain Lt/Rt troop salvo ranging.

Use of the Order Repeat

32. Repeat order GPO aur guns ke beech mein ranging aur fire for effect ke dauran
istemal kiya jata hain, Ranging aur fire for effect ke dauran jab guns ko last data per fire
karna ho.

33. Sweep and Search Sweep and search applicable nahi hain.

Report from the GPO to the OP

34. Change of Grid. Change of grid ke dauran GPO OP ko report deta

hain,”Changing now to----grid, erase all old target record on Bty/Regt grid”.

35. Badram. Is report ki jarurat kewal manual loading ke dauran hoti hain. Automatic
loading ke dauran Bad Ram jadatar nahin hota hain.

36. Mistake in Laying. Yeh applicable nahi hain.

37. Passage and Acknowledgement of Orders. Yeh applicable nahi hain.

PART II : CHANGES APPLICABLE FOR KRASNOPOL AMN

Fire Discipeine – OP end

38. Selection of OP. OP danger zone se bahar mein hona chahiye. (Ref part 3
Firing Tables). Apex angle ki pratibandh ko selection ke dauran dhyan me rakha jayega.

39. Nature of Target. Yeh niminlikhit hain.

40. Using Single Gun. “Single gun target Krasnopol 74 (Frequency) Delay (agar
jarurat hain to)”. Yeh order jahir karta hain ki frequency 74 aur fuze ko delay per set
karke ek gun se Krasnopol amn fire kiya jayega. Ager fuze setting ka koi reference na
mila ho to iska arth fuze ko instantaneous setting “O” per set kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
62
41. Sequential Firing. LDR ko sequence mein max six target engage karne ke liye
design kiya gaya hain. Isliye LDR 1D20 mein DES mode me six cycle of illumination jo
ki dono cycle ke beech mein 10 second ka interval hota hain woh programme of
operation banaya gaya hain aur LDR 1D22 mein do cycle ke beach mein interval 05 se
leker 25 sec tak ho sakta hain.
Interval = Max duration of laser emission (15 second)+ delay time (10 sec)

42. Indication of Target. Is ko ordinarily GR aur height ya polar coordinate ke

dwara pass kiya jata hain.

43. Fire By Order. Fire by order OP officer pass karta hain lapse time set karne ke
liye aur target ke upper LDR ko lay karne ke liye.

44. Method of Fire. Is mein ranging nahi kiya jata hain, method of fire hamesha one
round gun fire pass kiya jata hain OP officer LDR ko target ke upper set karke lapse time
laga kar fire order pass karta hain. Command post se shot report dene ke bad laser
triggering ko shot report ke sath synchronize kiya jata hain.

45. Adjustment of Fire. OP officer available indication aur experience ke upper

depend karke logical correction ya repeat ka order deta hain. Sabhi correction normal
tarike se line OT ke relation mein deta hain Krasnopol amn range ke liye + one thousand
mtrs aur line ke liye + four hundred mtrs ke ander guide hoker target ko hit karta hain ise
Basket of error kahate hain. Sabhi precaution aur gun aur laser ki synchronize ke
baojud projectile niminlikhit karan se target ko hit nahi karta hain.

(a) Non deployment ya improper function of guiding system ki wajah. Guiding

system ki deployment OP end per ek peculiar whistling type ki awaz sunai deta
hain jab projectile flight mein vertex ko pass karta hain yeh control fins ke
deployment aur control actuator ki wajah se hota hain.

(b) Projectile Basket error ke bahar girta hain.

Example :- Target ki range ke liye + one thousand aur line ke liye + 400 mtr

46. War head ka function nahi hota hain.

47. Recording the Target. Terminal guidance ke karan amn sabhi non std condition
ke effect ko cover karta hain. Isliye target coordinates ko reduce nahi kar sakte.
Normally target record ki jarurat nahi hota hain.

48. Communication. Is mein gun ki firing aur LDR ke laser beam ki firing ke ander
synchronise hona chahiye. Is liye GPO aur LDR ka operator ke ander direct
communication ki jarurat hain. Yeh isliye kiya jata hain taki jab projectile target ke najdik
pahuche tab laser beam ki illumination target ke upper ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
63
Fire Discipline – Gun End Conventions

49. Niminlikhit additional conventions follow kiye jate hain,

(a) Gun data manually Arty board ya calculator ke dwara work out kiya jata
hain jab tak koi appropriate software na mile.

(b) Hamesha FBO lagu hota hain.

(c) Loading aur ramming manually kiya jata hain. Loading aur ramming ke
dauran special care liya jata hain.

(d) Gun/guns ko Bty centre per concentrate kiya jata hain

(e) Terminal guidance ke karan shoot ko hamesha one round gun fire ke sath
shuru kiya jata hain.

(f) OP officer ke dwara nature of target ke sath frequency aur fuze setting
pass kiya jata hain. Ismein default fuze setting instantaneous “O” hain.

(g) Elevation ko in mils mein pass kiya jata hain.

50. Amn tab tak load nahi kiya jata jab tak niminlikhit data projectile ke upper set
karke No 1 aur TP Ldr ke dwara check nahi kiya jata hain.

Frequency - As orderd by OP

Fuze setting - -do-

Booster Plug setting -

K1 switch setting - Calculated from firing tables

NN time setting -

51. Nature of Target. Same as per normal fire discipline.

52. Ammunition Order. Normal amn order is prakar hain K-155/155-03, 75

November 54, delay. Charge 5, Bravo 2, Killo 2”. Yeh jahir karta hain ki projectile
(with/without booster) fire hoga. Frequency setting 75 per set kiya jayega. T-90 fuze
setting (NN time setting) 54 per set kiya jayega fuze (for war head) “3” delay per set kiya
jayega. Krasnopol charge 5 istemal kiya jayega. Jab K-155 istemal kiya jayega tab
buster plug ko remove kiya jagega K1 switch setting (for zone setting) “2” per kiya
jayega.

53. Preparation of Amn. Convention ki lihaj se GPO shoot ke dauran deri se

bachane ke liye 2 RPG prepare karne ke liye order dega. Jo amn istemal nahi hoga
usko bad me repack kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
64
CHAPTER-11

DUTIES IN ACTION AND GUN END PROCEDURES

SECTION - 36 DUTIES AT REGIMENT AND BATTERY LEVEL

THE COMMANDING OFFICER (CO)

1. CO, sabhi artillery matter ka brigade commander ya combat command cdr ke

adviser hain aur niminlikhit subject ke liye responsibnle hain.

(a) Brigade ya combat command ki sabhi kisam ke fire support ko coordinate

karna.

(b) Ensure karta hain ki brigade ya combat command mein Jitne artillery unit
allot hain sabhi best advantage ke liye istemal ho rahi hain.

(c) Supported arm cdr ko sabhi support ke bare mein brief karna.

The Intelligence Officer (IO)

2. Intelligence officer niminlikhit subject ke liye responsible hain. Jo ki brigade ya

combat command tactical HQ level ka CO ka staff officer hota hain.

(a) Tactical information ko collect karna unki checking karna aur sab ko pass
karna.

(b) CO ki jarurat ke mutabik sabhi map aur records ko up-to date karna.

(c) Brigade CB aur artillery intelligence staff ke sath close liaison ko maintain
karna.

The Second in command (2IC)

3. 2IC ka main duties.

(a) Gun area mein 2IC CO ka deputy hota hain.

(b) Gun area ki recce, selection aur preparation ka bandobast karna.

(c) Out line survey plan banana.

(d) Regiment aur bty posn ke ander local defence co-ordinate karna aur usko
supervise karna.

(e) Amn ki supply aur replenishment mein supervise karna.

(f) Regt ki welfare aur administration mein supervise karna.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
65
The Adjutant

4. Adjutant apni administrative duty ke alawa CO ya artillery brigade HQ ya CB staff

ya Bty Cdr ya OP officer se aaye hue fire order per regt ke fire ko control karta hain. Jab
Regt kisi bhi ek target ko engage kar rahi hain tab us target ka nature of target, Grid Ref
and description of target deker next higher HQ ko suchit karne ka jimmewar hain.
Target ko engagement ki antim mein next higher HQ ko “Shoot terminated” aur shoot ke
result ke bare mein suchit karne ka jimmewar hain.

Example – 23 shoot terminated 20 inf killed ya 23 shoot terminated, tgt recorded.

5. Programme Shoots. Regiment ko jo task allot huva hain us task ko Bty’s ko

allot karne ka jimmewar hain. Jab jarurat ho apni ya dusri sub units ko task tables
prepare karke issu karta hain.

6. Concentrations of observed fire. Regiemental concentrations ko ek ordinary

OP control karta hain. Us samey Bty’s ko target engage karne ke liye target ke number
aur amn ki scale ko order karne ka jimmedar adjutant hain. Divisional concentration
mein jo ki OP officer ya HQ Artillery Brigade se order receive karta hain unper regt ka
fire control karne ka jimmewar hain. Adjutant mike aur higher target ki order pass karne
mein madad karta hain.

7. Target Records. Adjutant regimental aur higher tgt ki recording ko maintain

karne ka responsible hain .Jab bahut jyada tgt record ho jate hain tab Adjt GPO’s ko
batata hain ki kaun se tgts ko full record karna hain aur kin targets ko columns 1 to 8 tak
enter karna hain. Ager koi doubt hota hain to next higher HQ ke sath consult karta hain.

8. Map Board/Artillery Board. Map ya Arty board mein niminlikhit maintain karta
hain.

(a) Important Regiment aur higher target ka record.

(b) Apni regiment ki Bty’s ka zone of fire aur alternate position.

(c) Regt ke all OP’s ka posn aur zone of observation.

(d) Own troops ka positions.

9. Counter Bombardment Duties. Jab regiment ka counter bombardment ke sath

taluk ho to adjutant apni normal duties ke alawa niminlikhit duties carry out karta hain.

(a) CB staff ko OP’s ka location aur Bty ki guns aur arc of fire badli hone par
inform karta hain.

(b) HB task aur un sabhi Bty’s ka jo ki uske sath engage karne ke liye
available ho unka record rakhta hain.

(c) Artillery Brigade HQ ko target registration ki report dene ka jimmewar hain

(Ref to Sec 85, Para 12 aur ATI, 2A/1969, Sec 3 Para 65)

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
66
10. Tactical Information. Tactical information ko receive karna aur pass karna aur
record rakhane ka jimmewar hain aur ek tactical map mein maintain karta hain jo map
own troops aur enemy ki posn ko darshata hain.

11. Amn state. Regiment ke ander available amn upto date ke record ko maintain
karta hain.

12. Meteorology. Meteorological data ko upto date maintain karta hain.

13. The Regimental Survey Officer (RSO). RSO regimental Svy party per
command karta hain aur regt ke ander sabhi Svy work keliye CO ko guide karta hain.
RSO ka duties niminlikhit hain.

(a) Regt ko ek Grid per lana.

(b) Detailed svy plan taiyar karna.

(c) Adjt ke sath consult ke bad sabhi Bty’s ko regt grid ke ander change hone
ka order dena

(d) Jab higher Svy information mila hain to change of grid carry out karne ke
liye CO’ Ko advise karna.

(e) Jab jarurat ho to OP ko Svy provide karta hain aur targets ko fix karta hain.

(f) Regt ke sabhi directors, compass ko calibrate karne ka jimmewar hain.

(g) Jab Survey duties mein engage na ho tab regt CP mein Adjutant ko madad
karta hain aur usko relief karta hain.

14. The Headquarter Bty commander. Headquarter Bty Cdr sabhi technical sig
matter ke bare mein CO’ ko advise karta hain, Regt ke sabhi sig eqpt ka repair aur
servicing ka jimmewar hain. Regt ka sabhi line aur radio commn ke layout plan karta
hain. Jab jarurat ho to regt CP mein duty officer ka kaam karta hain.

The Battery Commander (BC)

15. Battery Commanders sabhi Artillery matter mein Inf Battalion/Armed Regt/Combat
group cdr ka adviser ka kaam karta hain. BC ki responsibilities niminlikhit hain.

(a) Inf Battalion/Armed Regt/Combat group ke fire support ko coordinate karta

hain.

(b) Supported Arms Cdr ko batata hain ki kis fire order per fire support ki
jarurat hain.

(c) Supported Arms ke sath milap karna.

16. BC party us supported Arm ke HQ ke sath hota hain jis par Bty direct support
deta hain. BC hamesha supported Arm Cdr ke sath hota hain aur sath sath recce bhi
karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
67
Battery Second in Command (Bty 2IC)

17. Bty 2IC Bty area mein BC ke liye deputy ka kaam karta hain aur niminlikhit ke liye
responsible hain.

(a) Bty area ke liye local defence ko coordinate karna aur plan karna.

(b) Gun area mein attack hone per Bty ko Command karna.

(c) Gun ka servicing record maintain karna.

(d) Gun se sambandith karwai jismein amn ki storage aur dumping

samil hain.

Observation Post (OP) Officer.

18. OP officer nimnlikhit task pura karne ke liye hota hain.

(a) Target ko engage karna.

(b) Supported Arms ke sath milap karna aur Arty ke bare mein salah dena.

(c) Jimmewari ke ilake ko lagatar observation karte rahana.

(d) Tactical jankari hasil karna aur bhejte rahana.

19. In task ka importance depend karta hain uska tactical situation aur observer ke
role ke upper.

20. Ek observer supported Arm ke sath deploy hota hain ya kuch samay tak purely
Artillery ka role karte hain. Inki duty tactical situation per depend karta hain jo ki AT-11,
1/1973 mein diya gaya hain.

21. Types of Observer. Observer panch kism ke hote hain jo is prakar hain.

(a) Static ground observation post (OP) sometimes called an “Anchor OP”.

(b) Forward observation officer (FOO).

(c) Air obsn post (Air OP)

(d) Stay behind observer.

(e) Commando observer.

22. OP Party. Ground OP party mein niminlikhit admi hota hain:-

(a) Observer.

(b) Observer ka technical Assitant (OPA).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
68
(c) Jarurat ke mutabic drivers aur radio oprs, veh ko maintain rakhane ke liye
aur har samay comn provide karne ke liye.

23. Agar party ko lambe samay tak kam karna pare to sabhi members apas mein ek
dusre ka kam kar sake aur observation, control of Arty fire aur comn eqpt ka operation is
tarah ki duties aani chahiye.

24. FOO. Ek observer ko kabhi kabhi FOO ki duty bhi karni par sakti hain ek mobile
operation ya ek operation ke phase ke liye fire support ensure karne ke liye woh
supported Arms ke sath chalta hain. Woh jarurat ke mutabic paidal ya gadi mein chalne
ke liye yogya hona chahiye. Jab woh is prakar employ kiya jata hain to fire ko observe
aur control karna mushkil hota hain. Jab jahan ho sake woh static OP offr ke sath kam
kare jise hum anchor OP bhi kahte hain. Jab ek observer ko kafi lambe samay tak
operate karna pare to use kuch jyda logon ki jarurat par sakti hain.

25. Air OP. Ek Air OP ko normally ek specific task diya jata hain, Technical assistant
aur Opr’s ka duty pilot ko khud hi karna parta hain. Kabhi kabhi dusra observer bhi fire
control karne ke liye passenger ke taur par usme jata hain.

26. Supported Arms ke sath liaison

(a) Observer ko her samay supported Arms Cdr ke sath liaison rakhna
chahiye. Jab bhi ho sake is lision ka personal contact dwara aur kabhi kabhi kisi
operation ke plan ka discussion karte samay maintain karna chahiye baki samay
per comn dwara maintain karna chahiye.

(b) Khas karke observer ko niminlikhit baaten supported Arms Cdr se malum
karni chahiye.

(i) Friendly forces aur dushman ki ground par loc.

(ii) Future tactical plan.

(iii) Local defence ka arrangement.

(c) BC fire planning per advise deta hain aur sabhi prakar ka fire coordinate
karne ke liye responsible hota hain. Jaise – Inf Mor, Inf supported Wpn, aur close
support Air Craft.

27. Observer ke liye Order. Observer’s ke order mein yah baaten shamil honi
chahiye :-

(a) Observer ka kaam (see para 18).

(b) OP officer ka kam kiya hain ya FOO ka.

(c) Kab aur kahan establish hona hain.

(d) Kiske sath usko kam karna hain.

(e) Observation ka zone.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
69
(f) Ketne samay tak waha per rahna hain.

(g) Route, Vehicle par pratibandh, aadi.

28. Iske Ilawa bhi use iske liye brief kiya jata hain.

(a) Tactical situation mein shamil hain :-

(i) Dusman aur friendly forces ke bare mein jankari.

(ii) Mahatavpurna ya faidemand area.

(iii) Future Plans.

(iv) Local patrol activity.

(v) DF target list aur recorded tgt.

(b) Artillery pratibandh aur control se sambandith.

(i) Observed fire aur registration ki policy.

(ii) Amn expenditure.

(iii) Jaldi Istemal ke liye auth guns (see para 29).

(iv) Comn.

(c) Location aur taiyari ki state.

(i) Own Regt (Jisme svy ki state shamil ho).

(ii) Dusari Arty units.

(iii) Other observer location (Supported Arms ke observer bhi shamil).

(d) Adm se sambandit.

(i) FOL aur Ration ki supply.

(e) Vehicle aur sig eqpt, Bty re supply aur unka maintenance.

29. Normally OP offr ki apni Bty ki guns ke sath direct call hota hain, agar woh
samajta hain ki tgt par jyada fire ki jarurat hain, to woh Adjt ke dwara jyada unit ki mang
kar sakta hain. Auth OP officer ke case mein Arty Cdr kisi ek task ya special Cat ke tgt
ko engage karne ke liye fire unit aur amn allot karta hain.

The Gun Posn Officer (GPO)

30. Deployment. GPO diye hue area mein apni Bty ko deploy karne ke liye
jimmewar hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
70
31. Preparation and Occupations. Preparation aur accupation sambandit GPO ki
duty Sec 37 mein di gai hain.

32. Duties In Action. Bty ko deploy karne par GPO niminlikhit baaton ke liye
jimmewar hain.

(a) Fire control aur Adjt ko jankari pas karna, jab uski guns tgt ko engage kar
rahi ho us samay nature of tgt, Grid ref aur tgt description dekar. Aur shoot
khatam hone par woh Adjt ko shoot ka result aur shoot terminate ki jankari deta
hain. Jaise ki, 63 shoot terminated 4 vehicle destroyed.

(b) Guns ke beech mein parallelism maintain rakhana.

(c) Din mein ek bar aur her move ke bad sight test aur adjustment karna.

(d) Amn ko prepare karna aur ch temp measure karna.

(e) Correction of moment ka data prepare aur check karna.

(f) Bty CP mein check :-

(i) Concentration of observed fire.

(ii) Programme shoot aur predicted fire.

(g) Tgt record ko maintain rakhna.

(h) Change of grid.

(j) Datum shoot ki calculation.

(k) Running Amn ka record aur maint.

(l) Calibration record ko maintain rakhana (IAB 4) aur adopted MVs ka

istemal, Gun aur CP dono mein karna (AT II, 10/1987).

(m) EFC record ko maintain karna.

(n) Alt posn ya agali position taiyar karna.

(o) HBs ko engage karte samay agar yeh ensure karna ki uski guns HB list
main di gayee individual gun location per direct hain, iski detail ke liye DUAI
5/1976 part I section 10 ko refer karein.

33. Tactical Information. Tactical information ko recieve karna, pass karne aur
uska record rakhna uski jimmewari hain. Own troops aur en troops posn aur tactical
map ko maint karna. Bty area mein sabhi present persons ko tactical stituation ke bare
mein inform karna.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
71
Troop Leaders

34. Troop Leader GPO ko assist karta hain.

(a) Guns ko line transfer karna.

(b) Check parallelism karwana aur maintain rakhna.

(c) Order ko pass karna.

(d) Har guns ke round to round record ko check karna.

(e) Gun action ke dauran kam par supervision karna.

(f) Gun aur Amn ki daily servicing mein supervision.

(g) No 1 dwara kiye sight test mein supervision.

(h) Rest period mein routine administrative duty karna.

(i) En attack ke dauran apne troop par command karna.

SECTION – 37 : PREPARATION AND OCCUPATION OF BTY POSN

1. Gun posn ke recce, preparation aur occupation ke sidhant day aur night ke liye
same hain, night recce possible hain lekin night occupation ki sari tyari jaha tak ho sake
din mein kar leni chahiye.

PART – I DAY OCCUPATION

1. GPO ko deployment order BC, OP Officer, 2IC ya CO se verbally/radio per milte

hain. Yah order hain :-

(a) Gun area (A) - 9860.

(b) C of Arc bearing (C of A) (B) - 320 degree.

(c) Zone of fire (C) - 30 degrees left and right.

(d) LTSDT (D) - 3000.

(e) Time to be ready (E) - 1930h.

3. Yeh order GPO ko move ke dauran, Hide mein, Conc area mein, pehle se
deployed Gun area mein ya Gun posn occupy karte samay mil sakta hain.

4. Deployment order milne par GPO nimin action leta hain :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
72
(a) Detail map recce se GPO Gun area ka route, route mein ane wala land
marks, time plan for move aur Gun group ke liye RV aur likely Gun posn select
karta hain. Woh decide karta hain ki method of occupation kya hoga. Agar
raaste mein koi rukawat hain to GPO ko uski jankari milti hain.

(b) Gun Gp ke liye RV select karte samy dhyan mein rakhne wali baten.

(i) Achha cover ho.

(ii) Khuli Jagah ho.

(iii) Aane jane ka raasta thik ho.

(iv) Axis of aadvance aur jis Gun posn ko occupy karna hain us ke
nazdeek hona chahiye. Guide ke taur par 500 se 1500 mtr door.

(c) Bty subaltern ko RV dena.

5. Iske bad GPO Gun area ki taraf move karta hain. Gun area ke move ke dauran
lagatar map recce karta hain aur radio net par sabhi trasmission sunta hain. Gun area
mein pahunchne par confirm karna ki correct square mein hain. Recce party ke
protection ke liye LMG Gunner ko dply karta hain. Ground par C of A bearing malum
karta aur kisi vantage point se detail recce karta hain, diye gaye area mein most suitable
Gun Posn select karta hain. Posn select karte samay woh nimin batein dhyan mein
rakhta hain :-

(a) LTSDT par gun fire kar sake aur zone of fire ko cover kare.

(b) Comouflauge aur concealment accha ho.

(c) Air aur ground attack se protected ho.

(d) Gun platform achhe ho.

(e) Gun se 100 mtr ki doori par 15 mtr ka crest ho, jo ki flash cover dega (for
field Guns).

(f) Tank threat se bachane ke liye fd of fire achha ho.

(g) Digging ke liye asan ho.

6. Best Gun posn select karne ke bad GPO nimin batein decide karta hain :-

(a) Approximate posn of Gun platform firm, level aur digging ke liye asan ho.
FD Bty ka frontage idealy 120 se 150 mtr hona chahiye.

(b) CP Position. Achhi command post ki khubian :-

(i) CP location aise jagah par hona chahiye jaha se GPO exerciseko
voice aur visual control kar sake, agar tannoy system fail ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
73
(ii) Preferably up wind flank mein located hona chahiye.

(iii) Guns ke itna pass nahi hona chahiye ki command post disturbed
ho. As a guide nearest Gun se 40 mtr ki doori se kam nahi hona chahiye.

(iv) Ground aur air se chupaav hona chahiye.

(v) Aane jane mein asani ho.

(c) Director posn. Nerest gun se kam se kam 60 mtr ki duri par ho. Aisi
jaghe mein nahi hona chahiye jahan par director ki magnetic compass per effect
ho. Waha se maximum guns dikhai dena chahiye. Agar jarurat hain to No 2
director posn bhi select karni chahiye gun ko line pass karne ke liye. Director is
tarah se lagna chahiye ke svy dir ko jyada madad mile.

(d) Location of Reserve CP . Jis flank mein main command post sited hain,
uske dusre flank mein reserve command post honi chahiye aur wah bty fire ko
control karne ke kabil honi chahiye.

(e) CP Wagon Line. Yah command post se 100 m se 150 m door hona
chahiye jis bhi disha mein cover available hoga.

(f) Track plan aur method of occupation Left flanking, Right flanking aur
Independent ho sakta hain. Yah centre of arc bearing par depend karta hain aur
gun position ke flank jaha se guns apne apne platform par aati hain udharan ke
taur par agar occupation gun position ke right se hota hain to method of
occupation right flanking hoga ya independent method mein guns ek point of
dispersal se apne apne plat form ko occupy karti hain.

C/A

FIGURE 1A – INDEPENDENT OCCUPATION

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
74

C/A
G
U
N C/A
P
GUN PLATFORMS L
A
T
F
O
R

FIG 1B - RIGHT FLANKING FIG 1C - LEFT FLANKING

(g) Wegon line flank mein ho aur ho sake to kudrati cover mein ho. Local
defence ke lehaj se wagon line ki location :-

(i) Gun posn ke pass (200 mtr se kam nahi) taki wagon line aur gun
posn ke local defence ka talmel ho sake.

(ii) Neighbouring defended locality ke najdeek hona chahiye.

(iii) Piche ki tarf, agar puri regiment ki wagon line hain.

(h) Alternative posn :-

(i) Main gun posn ke itne pass nahi honi chahiye ki CB fire mein posn
barbad ho jaye.

(ii) Flank mein hona chahiye taki firing range kam na ho, main posn
mein En ke CB fire ke dispersion se cover na ho.

7. Sabhi posn decide karne ke bad GPO ek flag lagata hain. Is par GPO ki recce
party, right troop leader, WL JCO TA JCO (TA 1), TA2, aur BHM double se GPO ke
pass aa jate hain. BHM baki 5 Guns ke flag carry karta hain.

8. GPO ab WL JCO, troop leader, aur BHM ko yah order deta hain :-

(a) Centre of Arc bearing ground mein kis disha se jata hain.

(b) Six Gun platform ka posn batata hain.

(c) Track plan aur method of occupation batata hain.

(d) WL ka general area batata hain.

9. Wagon line JCO aur BHM apne order ke bad march kar jate hain, GPO, TA I ko
order deta hain aur tp leader aur TA2 ko order deta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
75
10. TA JCO (TA 1) director stand, skirt, compass, director pad aur meghaphone carry
karta hain aur TA 2 stadia rod, map compass protector aur data table carry karta hain.
GPO TA JCO(TA 1) ko bulata hain aur yah order deta hain :-

(a) TA JCO (TA-1) se centre of arc bearing check karata hain.

(b) Bty director ki posn.

(c) Director Ko centre of arc par lay karne ka tarika batata hain agar normal se
alag hain to jo ki director compass method.

11. Iske bad TA 2 ko bulata hain aur Bty centre ka GR nikalne ka order deta hain.
Priority ke taur par inme se ek tarika batata hain :-

(a) By GPS / DGPS.

(b) MAP spotting.

(c) Bg aur distance.

(d) Resection.

12. TA 2 ko map aur ground par Bty centre ka GR nikalne ke liye ref points dikhata
hain, first method ko chod kar (by GPS/DGPS).

13. Iske bad troop leader ko Bty Command post aur Command post wagon line ki
jagah dikhata hain.

14. BHM Order milne ke bad Gun group lane ke liye RV mein chala jata hain aur jate
samay sari sign posting karte hua jata hain.

15. Wagon line JCO WL ki detail recce karta hain aur uska sign post lagata hain. WL
ki khubian :-

(a) Mausam ko dekhte hue road ke pass aur aane jane ke liye rasta achha
hona chahiye.

(b) Air aur ground se chupaav hona chahiye.

(c) Ground attack ke khilaf protection hona chahiye.

(d) Veh, cook house aur dusre adm elements ke liye jarurat ke mutabik jagah
available hona chahiye.

16. Is samay TA JCO (TA-1) centre of arc par director set up karta hain aur report
karta hain “ director ready for check”.

17. TA 2 Bty centre ka grid reference nikalta hain, data table par note karta hain aur
GPO/TP Ldr se check karwata hain. Is data table ko check karne ke bad TA3 and TA 4
apne Arty board plot karte hain aur in GR ko palmtop mein feed karte hain. Iske bad woh

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
76
Bty lay out leta hain aur ek CFA ko plot karta hain. Dusra CFA koi bhi available TA
dwara plot kiya jata hain.

18. Troop leader Comd post ko organize karta hain jab TA3 aur TA4 Arty board plot
/Palmtop mein GR feed karte hain. Wah Met msg / Rough & Ready met data per C of
M plot karte hain.

19. Isi dauran GPO baaki Gun flag lagata hain aur stadia rod ki spike ko lagata hain
aur Bty centre per guns ko receive karne ke liye tayyar ho jata hain.

Drill at the RV

20. Time ko dekhte hue RV par priority wise yah kam hota hain :-

(a) Bty subaltern RV par vehs ko disperse karta hain.

(b) Early warning sentry post kiye jate hain.

(c) Yadi jarurat hain to Anti tank sector diya jata hain.

(d) Quick sight test kiya jata hain. Agar Quick sight test RV par nahi kiya gaya
hain to Bty subaltern GPO ko Gunposn par pahunch kar is baat ki jankari deta
hain.

(e) “Prepare for action” ka order kiya jayega aur prepare for action ki drill ki
jayegi.

(f) Bty 2IC ya Bty subltern, No 1 aur 2nd tp ldr ko ikatta karta hain apne gadi
ke pass aur BHM ke ane ka intajar karta hain..

21. GPO se deployment ke order lene ke bad BHM Gun gp RV par pahunchata hain.
BHM aur Bty subaltern ne gadi interchange karne ke bad Bty subaltern ‘J” veh me Gun
area ki aur move karta hain. Gun area me pahunchane ke bad, Bty subaltern GPO ko
report karta hain, our GPO use director posn dikata hain aur C of A deta hain. Woh
director par jata hain aur director ki correctness check karta hain aur Gun ko angle pass
karne ke liye ready ho jata hain.

22. BHM Second tp ldr aur No 1’s ko brief karne ke bad, Guns ko gun area ki aur
lead karta hain, jaha par GPO Gun ko receive karta hain.

23. GPO reserve CP ko uski posn ki aur direct karta hain, Reserve CP ka senior TA,
main CP se Bty centre ke GR aur Bty layout leta hain aur Arty boards aur (CFA) reserve
CP mein plot karwata hain.

24. BHM, Guns ko unke platform ki taraf direct karta hain. GPO aur tp ldrs Guns ko
action me lane ke liye jaruri supervision karte hain.

25. Jaise hi Gun’s action me aa jati hain, bty subaltern guns ko angle pass karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
77
26. Jaruri saman aur amn utarne ke bad Gun towing vehicles ko BHM WL tak ke liye
lead karta hain, WL JCO receive karta hain aur WL ko organize karta hain. Jis veh se
Gun Posn ki jarurat nahi wah directly WL mein move karte hain.

27. GPO ya tp ldr Arty boards aur CFA aur C of M graph CP me check karte hain.

28. RV par agar quick sight test drill carryout nahi kiya hain to GPO quick sight test
ko carry out karta hain.

29. C of A record hone ke bad, GPO Bty ki kum se kum ek Gun ko compass prismatic
se check karta hain. Tp ldrs unke TP ki sabhi Guns ko check karenge ki correct C of A
per lay hain.

30. Jaise hi Arty boards plot kiye jate hain/palmtop me data feed kiye jata hain aur
check ho jata hain, GPO, BC, OP officer aur Adjt ko report deta hain ki uski bty ready
hain. Yeh nimnlikhit prakar se deta hain :-

“Bty (23) ready at letters ----(Bina ht ke GR ko unicode mein report dega) on---- grid.

Note :- “Ready on----grid” yeh phrase sirf tabhi istemal hogi jab unit/subunit, uske grid ke
higher grid par ready ho. i.e. Bty on Regt or higher grid aur Regt on division ya higher
grid.

31. Ready report dene par aur agar fire order na mile ho tab (sabse pahle) GPO yeh
karega :-

(a) Tp ldr aur No 1 ko call karega aur unhe nimnlikhit brief karega.

(i) Stand easy posn.

(ii) Posn of assembly for advance aur withdrawal.

(iii) Anti-tank sectors, reference points aur tanks ko engage karne ke

liye opening range.

(iv) Local defence ka organization.

(v) Digging, camouflage aur concealment ki policy.

(b) Dusre director ki madad se check parallelism.

Duties aur Relief ka Organisation.

32. Guns ko action me lane ke bad, ek suggested priority of work is prakar hain :-

(a) Comouflage nets ka lagana.

(b) Tannoy cables ko jamin me dabana.

(c) Gun pits aur slit trenches ko taiyar karna.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
78
(d) Carts shelter ko taiyar karna.

(e) Living shelters ko taiyar karna.

(f) Alt aur future posns ka preparation karna.

33. Ladai me, her Gun me aadi detachment ka hona aam baat hain. Yeh No 1 ki
jimmewari hain ki jaruri relief ho sake, jarurat padne par GPO Puri detachment take post
karane ke liye order dega.

34. Gun pit me her samay her detachment ka ek aadmi hona hi chahiye. Her aadhi
detachemt ka jo duty par hain, wah Gun pit se najri milap karsake aur cover me rahega.

35. Har samay par kam se kam ek Troop Leader pakka duty pe hona chahiye.

36. Daily servicing aur sight testing keliye, ek se jyada Gun ek samay par out of
action nahi hogi.

PARA - II NIGHT OCCUPATION

Introduction

37. Gun posn ko raat ke samay occupy karna, tab pad sakta hain, Jab dushman ki
hawai takat uske hak me ho, surprise hasil karna ho aur night operations ko lagatar
support dekar dushman par pressure banaye rakhna ho. Night occupation ke principle is
prakar hain:-

(a) Din me jyadase jyada recce aur preparation.

(b) Ocupation ke dauran, pahle aur badme puritarah se silence jisse secray
aur surprise hasil ho aur lights ka kam se kam use.

38. Din aur raat ke occupation ka farak age ke paragraphs me diya gaya hain.

Preparetion

39. Night occupation ka success puritarah se jo detailed preparation kiya hain uske
upar aur Command aur control ke upar nirbhar hain. Jaise ki Gun posn ka occupation
raat ke samay karne ke liye kuch special stores ki jaroorat padti hain. Jo din me nahi
padti, woh is prakar hain :-

(a) Director ke liye beacon light.

(b) Shaded torches hand.

(c) CP ke liye lighting arrangement.

(d) CP ke liye black out arrangement.

(e) Raat ke liye sign post. Eg;- PP, CP, WL, Alt posn, etc.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
79
(f) Marking ka saman, jaise ki, White tape, quick line (Chuna) White paper,
Gun markers etc.

(g) Bty Pickets.

(h) Beacon corner prism.

(j) Single aiming post ke sath siege lamps.

(k) Alag-alag badges.

(l) Director se CP - telephone line.

(m) Convoy lights, muzzle lights and so on.

(n) Hurricane Lanterns/Power packs, night sign post ko jilluminate karne Ke

liye.

(o) Agar ho sake to night vision devices.

Orders

40. GPO nimnlikhit additional orders dega.

(a) Recce party ka composition.

(b) Recce party ke liye No Move Before (NMB)(eg: NMB Recce Party ----h).

(c) Time jisse pahle gun group move na kare (eg: “NMB Gun group-h).

(d) Priority of tasks ko dekhte hue extent of preparation

Recce and Drill

41. Orders lene ke bad, GPO is tarah age badhta hain :-

(a) Detailed map recce karta hain.

(b) Agar jarurat hain to , Gun group ke liye RV select karta hain.

(c) Agar jarurat hain to Gun gp ko RV aur time to move dega.

42. Sahi samay par, GPO har gun se ek admi, khas karke Gun 2IC ko lekar, recce
party ke sath gun area ki our move karta hain. Normal tarike se woh detailed recce
carry out karta hain, woh kuch extra chije bhi select karta hain.

(a) Actual posn ke najdik preliminary post (PP) jiski khubiyan is prakar hain :-

(i) Jitna ho sake actual position se nazdik ho..

(ii) Jarurat ke mutabik jyada space hona chahiye, jisse Guns aur
tractors asani se us mein aa sake.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
80
(iii) Main route se hatkar hona chahiye.

(b) Beacon corner prism (s) ki posn (Guns ke piche aur nearest gun se kum se
kum 150 mts dur).

(c) Bty pickets ki posn (300 se 500 mtr dure aur ho sake to left front ya right
rear ho sake to ).

(d) Night WL.

(e) Night Reference Objects (200-500 meters).

43. Recce ke dauran, GPO nimnlikhit baton par khas dhyan deta hain :-

(a) Gun Platforms. Her Gun ke liye do platforms select aur mark hona
chahiye jaha par Gun ko action me lana ho woh jagah ek Flag-rod se aur jaha
gun pit khodna ho, woh jagah bina flag wale rod se mark ho.

(b) Jaha tak ho sake, track par obstacles na ho.

44. Recce karne aur plan taiyar karne par, GPO order deta hain jisme yeh bante
samil hoti hain :-

(a) Gun platforms.

(b) C of A bearing.

(c) Director posn.

(d) CP posn.

(e) CP WlL.

(f) Track plan

(g) Night WL.

(h) Day WL ki rough posn.

(j) PP.

(k) Night RO’s

(l) Beacon corner prisms ya Bty pickets.

(m) Director ko C of A me lay karne ki method (Agar normal se alag ho to ).

(n) Local defence plan.

(o) Immediate crests.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
81
(p) Guns ka ane ka samay aur gun protinidhi yon ka PP par pahunchane ka
samay.

(q) Tape laying aur night sign post jalane ka samay.

(r) Method of occupation.

45. Uske bad posn prepare karne ki drill shuru ho jati hain. Alag-alag ranks, unki
duties is prakar carry out karte hain.

(a) TA JCO/TA 1. GPO dwara dikhaye gaye area me suitable director posn
select karta hain aur director C of A me record hone ke bad, “Director ready for
check”, ki report deta hain.

(b) TA2. Bty centre ke ilake me stadia rod leke pahunchta hain (GPO dwara
dikhaye gaye ilake me) woh bty centre ke GR aur height nikalta hain, GPO ya
troop leader dwara check karwata hain. Woh Bty lay out ka data nikalta hain,
beacon corner prisms ko plant karta hain ya Bty pkt plant karta hain aur unka
bearing aur distance CP se leta hain aur uska record rakta hain.

(c) BHM. Woh PP se guns aur CP tak ka route select aur mark karta hain,
Woh sabhi sign posts site karta hain.

(d) Troop Leader. Woh CP ki correct posn select karta hain aur uske
organization ka order deta hain. Woh compass dwara platform markers ko C of A
par align karte hue flag ko place karta hain. Woh Gun pits ke marking ki puri
tarah se janch karta hain, her Gun se beacon corner prism ka bearing padhta
hain, usko angle me badli karta hain aur uska record GPO ko deta hain. Bad me
woh local defence ki detailed recce karta hain, LMG site karta hain aur unki posn
mark karta hain. Agar samay hain to woh range card taiyar karta hain aur fixed
lines ko mark karta hain.

(e) WL JCO. Ni WL me indl vehs ka location WL JCO decide karta hain.

Central pt se WL tak ka ya indl guns se lekar WL tak ka route WL JCO select
karta hain, uske bad day WL me Jakar recce karta hain. CP se Ni WL tak ka
route ko select karta hain aur mark karta hain.

(f) Route marking andhera hone ke bad karta hain, taki dushman ke tactical
mission se bacha ja sake.

46. GPO director ko check karta hain aur TA JCO ya TA1 ki madad se six Gun flag
ka rough angles leta hain aur usko duplicate banata hain. Alt posn ka detailed recce
karega (See para VII) Arty boards, CFA, C of M ko check karega, agar tp ldr check nahi
kiya hain to.

47. GPO day light ke dauran Gun rep ko nimnlikhit posn dikhata hain.

(a) Director ka posn.

(b) Bty picket ka posn.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
82
(c) Beacon corner prism ka posn.

(d) CP ka posn.

(e) Track plan.

(f) C of A ka direction.

48. GPO director aur BCP ka rough angle likha hua slips bhi gun rep ko dega.
Jarurat hain to andhera hone ke bad night sign post ko jalaya jayega.

Drill for Occupation.

49. Correct samay me BHM RV par jata hain aur Guns ko lead karke PP par lata
hain. Guns PP par ane se thodi der pahle directors, bty pkts aur night Ros illuminate
kiya jata hain.

50. Guns PP par rukti nahi hain, Gun rep Gun ko lead karte hue respective Gun
location me jata hain. Uske bad Gun rep, Gun No 1 aur det ke dusre members ko jaruri
details aur instruction deta hain, Uske sath rough angle slip bhi No 1 ko deta hain.

51. Gun apne apne location me ane ke bad, GPO director posn par aur Bty subaltern
CP me jate hain.

52. Transfering Lines to the Guns :- Sec 39 me detail me diya gaya hain.

53. Tp ldr (Shuru me jo recce party ke sath aya tha) check karta hain ki No 1 fully
briefed hain.

54. C of A record hone ke bad GPO her troop ke ek Gun ko compass se check karta
hain. Uske bad, Adjt , BC aur OP officer ko “ready” report deta hain.

Atternative Dril

55. Kuch aise jagah par jaise ki hilly terrain ya broken ground me ek alternative drill
ko swikar kiya jata hain. Us situation ka drill nimn prakar se hain :-

(a) GPO Guns ko PP par receive karta hain. No 1, No 3 aur driver ko niche
utarke ek order of line me khade hota hain. GPO is party ko track ke sath lead
karega. Bty subaltren BHM, Lt tp Ldr aur WL JCO is group ke sath join karte
hain.

(b) Jaise hi Gun platform ke pass group pahunchta hain, GPO Sabhi guns ke
No 1, No 3 aur driver ko plateform par nimnlikit bante darsata hain :-

(i) C of A bearing ground par kahan se gujarata hain.

(ii) Director ki jagah.

(iii) Bty picket ki jagah.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
83
(iv) CP ki jagah kaha hain.

(v) Rough angle slip No 3 ko deta hain aur check karta hain ki No 3 use
sahi padta hain.

(vi) Beacon corner prism ka rough angle slip bhi deta hain. (Agar
jarurat hain to ).

(vi) Track plan kaunsa use karna hain.

(c) GPO ke briefing ke bad No 3 platform ke pass chala jata hain aur No 1 aur
driver baki party ke sath mil jate hain. Bty subaltern Troop leader aur WL JCO
sabhi order sunte hain. Uske bad pura group PP par atta hain aur No 1 apni Gun
ko lead karke apne platform par lekar jata hain.

(d) Baki drill same hain, jaisa ki pahle bataya gaya hain.

Misc

56. GPO night deployment ke dauran kuch additional activity karta hain, joki is prakar
hain.

(a) Listening post lagata hain.

(b) Main aur reserve Gun posn earmark karta hain.

(c) Digging order kiya jata hain jo priority me diya gaya hain.

(d) Indl aur tps ke sabhi Guns ko Gun pit me jane ka adesh deta hain, jisse C
of A ko dubara se record kiya ja sake.

(e) Gun ke C of A par record hone ke turant bad. “Stand to” ka order karta
hain, aur check karta hain ki sabhi apne weapon pit ya fire trench me chale gaye
hain.

57. GPO first light ke turant bad nimn likhit bate check karta hain.

(a) Sabhi vehs day WL me chale gaye hain.

(b) Sabhi night sign post aur marking hata liye gaye hain.

(c) Camouflage net laga diye gaye hain.

(d) Cables ko bury kar diya gaya hain.

(e) Track mita diye gaye hain.

58. “Stand to” ke bad, agar time hain to nimnlikhit karwai kiya jata hain.

(a) Day bearing record kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
84
(b) Check parallelism kiya jayega.

(c) Sight test kiya jayega.

(d) GPO nimn order deta hain.

(i) Anti-tank sectors.

(ii) Reference points.

(iii) Advance aur withdrawal ke lie jagah.

(iv) Stand easy ki jagah.

PART II : OCCUPATION OF A GUN POSN

AT NIGHT WITHOUT DAY LIGHT RECCE

Introduction

59. Tactical jarurat hain ki raat ke samay bina din ki roshni mein ek Gun posn ki recce
our prep karna. Arty ke ander her unit ki yeh kabiliyat ho woh her situation mein is kam
ko kar sake.

Planing

60. Suraksha aur surprise ko hamesha dyan mein rakha jayega. Kam se kam light
aur kam se kam awaj ka istemal hoga.(Orders ko chilakar bolana avoid karna chahiye)

61. Planing ke samay neche likhe huye baton ko dhyan mein rakha jayega.

(a) Gun area main track ke najdeek ho.

(b) Routes, Jamini banawat ke bare mein available information ka max

istemal. Jaise ki map recce, Air photos our air OP pilot us area mein din mein
recce kiya hain ya patrols jo ki us-area mein bheji gai hain jis se jaruri information
li ja sakti hain.

(c) Uper para B diye gaye sabhi information ke sources ka aim land marks
wah dudna hain taki fixation mein asani ho land marks night mein bhi map our
Ground chunana mein asani se pahchan sake.

(d) Security. Enemy patrol ke against security ka jankari karte huye Gun
area ko recce aur prep se pahle search aur secured karna chahiye.

(e) Time. Subsequent tayari mein jyada samay lagega. Jise kam karna
chahiye.

(f) Area mein rukawat nahi honi chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
85
Special Preparations.

62. Darkness aur aprichit jamini banawat ki wajah se neache likhe pahle mein
problems ho sakti hain.

(a) Route ka selection.

(b) Gun Platform our CP ka selection.

(c) Svy.

(d) Occu ke dauran recce party our Guns per Comd our control.

(e) Occu se pahle Gun posn ki security.

Selection of Route

63. Ek Regt ke dyply mein sub unit ke overlap ya direction ke bhulne ka khatra hain
khas kar jab suitabletrack available nahi hain. Iske lie land marks, route marking sys
tape ke sath our lights ko tatha guide ko plan kiya ja sakta hain.

64. Yadi possible hain to RSO our 2IC ko available info jo ki air photo our map mein
hain us ke anusar skeleton route chart banana chahiye. Limited recce ke bad woh ise
modify kar sakte hain Bty aur RHQ area ki detail fill kar sakte hain. GPOs, Adjt, Svy
party aur Mike party ko yeh chart issue kar sakte hain. Jisme tracks aur mashoor jamine
nishan bhi mark hain.

Selection of Gun Platforms.

65. Gun platform, CP, director posn select karna mushkil hain isliye std aur pahle se
nirdharit dply pattern use ho sakti hain. Iske lie Bty mein ek ya jyada layout tape tiyar
karke unke rough angle jamini banawat ke mutabic workout kar sakte hain. In angles ko
accept kiya jayega jabki kuch Guns 5 se 10 m tak displayed hogai hain.

Survey

66. Jab ki orientation initating aur pass karne mein problems nani hain. Fixation
mein problem aati hain. Is problem ko minimise kar sakte hain, agar ache map our
prominent landmarks hain. RSO ya GPO indepndent Bty ke case mein fixation obtain
karne ke liye Bg and dist method use kare. GPS our DGPS ko istemal karte huve map
study ki maddad se move ke dauran gross check karte hain ya vehicle milometer ka
istemal karte huve own position workout karne mein maddad milti hain.

67. RSO ko ye chahiye ki woh GPO ko min assist de. Jab ki halat ijajat de to normal
assist dene ke liye illuminated stadia rod istemal ho sakti hain. Illuminated stadia rod
istemal se advantage ke sath-sath ye disadventage bhi hain ki isme surprise ko diyan
rakhna chahiye.

68. First light hote hi regt grid establish karna chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
86
Command and Control

69. Racce and prep karne se pahle Gun area ko search karne ki jarurat hain our
alag-alag Groups ko guide karne ke lie jaruri hain ki control centre aur protection sqd ko
establish kiya jaye.

70. Regt ka deployment hone par is squad mein 1 x JCO tatha 15 – 20 ORs recce
party ke liye ho sakte hain aur agar bty ka deployment hain to 4 -6 Ors ho sakte hain.
Agar possible ho sake to is party ko radio sets, NVDs aur kuch LMGs provide karni
chahiye. Is party ka task is prakar se hain :-

(a) Main axis par “Dispersal point / battery in” ke pass ek Report/Control
centre establish karna.Control centre ke liye adequate black out arrangement
hona chahiye.

(b) Regt/Bty area mein routes our track marking tatha guides per provision
karna.

(C) Enemy patrol our stay behind parties ke khilaf Gun area ko protection
dena chahiye.

71. Inf protection available na ho aur dushman ki activities ka pata ho to protection

sqd ki nafari badai ja sakti hain.

72. Gun Gp jab anjan jagah se move kar raha ho to dushman ki attack ke khatra hain
to activities ka muqabla karne ke liye khas kar halt ke dauran speed ya jaldi se action
karne ki reharsal karna chahiye agar jaruri hain to dushman ke khilaf offrs ya JCO’s ke
ander spl sqd ko detail kiya ja sakta hain.

Security of Gun area

73. Nature of operation mein enemy activities ka kuch khatra ho sakta hain ya khatra
enemy patrols ya stay behind parties dwara recce party ke kam mein rukawat dal sakta
hain. Search area mein recce parties ko move karne se pahle use secures karna
chahiye. Dushman ka khatra, jamini banawat aur visibilities ke adhar par protection sqd
dwara actual mathod istemal ho.

Special Equipment

74. Normal tayari ke alawa ni occu ke lie nIche likhe eqpt use ho sakte hain taki
deplyment mein asani ho.

(a) Layout Tape. Uper para (66) men bataye gaye ke mutabic.

(b) Illuminated Gun Flags. Illumination ke liye gun flag ko tayar karna
chahiye. Lights ka alag –2 istemal kare taki pahchanne mein asani ho inka
istemal tabhi ho sakta hain jab ki uneven ground ya closed terrain mein layout
tape use nahi ho sakti hain.

(c) Illuminated Stadio Rod. Ek lakdi ki clips ke sath stadia rod per mount
karne ke lie 2.5 V torch cell our wirings ki sath banana chahiye. Ise stadio rod se

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
87
fix kiya jata hain accpecctable accuracy ke ander director ki help se 300m tak duri
nap sakte hain ek stadio rod ek single light ke sath (Bty ko pahchanne ke lie
colour code use hoga) bhi estemal kar sakte hain.

Bty Deployment Drill

75. Order milne per GPO niche likhe squence mein karwahi karta hain.

(a) Through out map recce or gun posn mein route select karta hain GPO ko
jaruri landmarks tabulate karna chahiye taki use correct Gun area pahchanne
mein madad mile. Use route chart tayar karna chahiye our dusre gp ko issue
karna chahiye.

(b) Gun Gp ke liye RV select karna aur Gun GP ko RV deta hain. RV

prominent Landmarks per ho. Gun posn ko move karne se pahle order of march
dena chahiye. Sufficient time gap recce our Gun gp ke beech mein ho taki
andhere ke samay recce aur tayari ho sake. RV per guide chodna chahiye.
Enemy ki patrolling ki activities hain to RV par protection party bhi chhodna
chahiye.

(c) Gun area mein pahuchne ke bad use yeh yakeen karna chahiye ki woh
correct area mein hain pahle se deside kiye gaye landmarks or protection party
search ke liye bhejna chahiye aur LMG tatha dusre santri dply karna chahiye.

(d) Area search karne ke bad protection sqd GPO ko report karta hain jo unhe
nimn likhit debrief karta hain.

(i) Yakin hain ki area mein koi dushman nahi hain.

(ii) Search kiye gaye area ka extent.

(iii) Gun posn ke tour par search kiye gaye area ki suitabilities.

(iv) Koi land marks jo ki night mein fixation obtain karne mein help kare
(Agar GPS avaliable nahi hain).

(v) Crest clearance pt of view se koi immediate crest hain to.

(vi) koi additional details incl obstacles jaise ki blind wells or technical
and terrain condition.

(e) Iske bad GPO detail recce shuru karta hain is kam ko effectily karne ke lie
GPO pure Gun area mein walk karega. Tp Ldr or BHM GPO ke sath uski recce
mein hona chahiye.

(f) GPO our BHM ki recce hone ke bad BHM party tape lay karte hain tape lay
karne ka tarike is prakar hain.

(i) GPO No 1/ No 6 gun platform mein jaker C/A ke prependiculer

compass shot leta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
88
(ii) GPO BHM ko is Bg per bhejta hain std tape ke mutabik jaruri dist
cover hone ke bad torch ki sahayta se signal dekar BHM GPO ko apne loc
indicate karta hain.

(iii) GPO BHM ko torch sig ki maded se correct Bg par align karta hain.

(iv) Iske bad Centre tape GPO se BHM posn tak lay karta hain.

(g) BHM sabhi recce party, ko age bulata hain our GPO Bty centre par neache
likhe ke mutabic use brief karta hain.

(i) C/A bg our iska direction ground par kahan se gujrata hain. Jo ki
prominent sky line feature ya koi dusre land mark ke relation mein indicate
karta hain.
(ii) Sabhi order dply of Gun at night ke mutabic lagu ho.

(iii) Recce party ko obstacle ke bare mein batata hain jaise ki wells,
gahre khade jo ki recce party ne white tape/chuna se mark kiya hua hain
ke bare mein batata hain.

(h) GPO our TA 2 milkar Bty centre ka GR nikalte hain.

(j) TA 1. Drill mein koi change nahi hain agar std layout tape hain to rough
angle pahle se hi workout kiye hote hain.

(k) TP LDR Comand post veh ko guide karta hain aur iski jagah par CP mein
tannoy our director setup mein line bijwata hain.

76. Ek bar tayari complete hone ke bad BHM GPO ke order per Gun ko lene jata
hain.

77. Gun ane ke bad Night occu ki driil follow ki jati hain.

78. First light mein niche likhe additional task complete hone chahiye. First light ka
istemal karte huye :-

(a) Weagn line ka selection.

(b) Loc def ka org.

(c) Agar jaruri hain to gun our CP ka adjusment.

(d) Como our concelment.

Drill for Regiment Night Deployment without Day light Recce

79. Gun area mein pahuchane ke bad 2IC halt karta hain navigation our fixation ki
wajah se Gun area main road se bilkul najdeek hona chahiye. 2IC C/A ke parallel
square ke ek side mein khada hota hain isse dply our reqd area ki search karne mein
help milti hain woh blue light ko blink karta hain (fig 1(d)) jo uske radio oprator ke
anteena ke uper mount hoti hain. Search party weapon aur obstical marking store ke

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
89
sath dismount hoker do line mein khadi hoti hain order of march (OOM) is prakar ka
hoga P, Q ek line mein our HQ, R dusri line mein OOM mein Bty ke sabhi indl 2IC ke
done side mein Figer 1(E) ke mutabic khade honge.

80. Jabke sabhi 2IC ke peache khade ho jate hain GPO aur svy offrs 2IC ko addl
briefing ke lie report karege 2 IC apne hat extend karta hain jo ki 2IC ke dono side sabhi
search party ko form up ke lie indication hain sabhi move 2IC ke najdeek hoga. P,Q Rt
turn HQ aurR 2IC ke Lt turn karenge 2 admiyon ke beeach 5 se 7 m tak gap hoga jo ki
visibiltiy our train condition par nirbhar hain is prakar laghbhag 2IC ke dono side 150m
chain banti hain.

C/A

2IC

Figure I (d) 2IC Location in the sqr with the respect to C/A

81. 2IC search shuru karne ke liye tape dega dono party independently search karegi
Q aur P ke RT tp ldr apni parti ke sath 600m straight direction mein jane ke bad Halt
karega koi bhi admi party ko stop karne ke liye tap de sakta hain, obstacles mark karne
ke liye sabhi turn hoker left ki taraf aur 150m line ke uper chalne ke bad hain . Sub Adjt
our P Bty ka RT TP LDR 1xLMG (Q&R LMGs har point per LMG Dply karegi sabhi turn
90Deg face 2IC ke Direction mein jiski light throught serch ke samay rahti hain sabhi
600m wapas chalenge our 2IC ke line mein pahuchege SA our P Bty ka Rt Tp leader ek
our LMG (P & R LMGs) pt per dply karega sabhi turn andar ki taraf 2IC ki light ki taraf
face karte huye 150 m per chalenge aur apni orginal posn per chalengi jahan se search
shuru ki thi. Total serch area 600 x 600. GPO our svy offrs fallout honge our apni-2 Bty
se verbal report lenge our 2IC ko search per debriefing ke lie report karege. RHM uski
tapes laying stores ke sath fallout honge.

82. 2IC Svy offrs ke sath search kiye huye area ke centre mein apni light ka switich
on rakhte hua jayega RHM 2 IC ke peache Tape layout karega. Sabhi veh mein jayega.
Our do line mein honge OOM Q-P and HQ, R our Bty ke ander as per seniority GPO
leading hoga. Uske pass persnol weapon ke alawa or koi storage nahi hoga. BHM tape
laying stores, compass, binocular our map. 300 mtr chalnne ke bad 2IC apni light ko
blink karega jo ki indication hain sabhi ke liye 2IC ke order ko ane ke liye loc pata chalta
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
90
83. Sabhi tapes ke sath move karenge do bty each side veh bhi parties ko follow
karegi aur order of march 2IC veh, Svy offrs vehs, veh of P, Q, of R and HQ Bty GPO
apni parties ko gen direction ko chodkar jahan se Bty posn mein jana hain 2IC ke pass
order ke lie report karega . GPO ka OPR us ki light on karke recce party ke sath stay
karega. Yeh jarurie hain taki TA 1 our GPO 2IC ke order ke bad wapis pahunch sake
complete ‘O’ GP 2IC ke pass order ke lie report karega. Alag 2 Bty ka Bg aur dist figer 1
(F) di ya gaya hain.

84. Order ke bad GPOs apni respective area ka Bg padhta hain TA 1 party ko GPO
ke pass bulata hain GPOs apni – 2 party ko Bty area mein lay jata hain aur BHM tape
lay kart a hain. RHM RP Nco ko Dis P per veh ko lane ke lie bhejta hain RHM Disp per
wait karta hain our Bty ke H1 our J veh ko respective area mein jane ke lie guide karta
hain respective RT Tp ldr unki H1 our J veh ko disp se H1 our J veh ko respective Bty
area ke liye guide karenge our Bty in (23 IN, 43 IN) sign post point plant karenge. Regt
HQ ke vehs disp per ruke jayenge aur tabhi move karenge jab regt HQ area mein RHM
tape lay kar deta hain.

LMG Q 600m LMG P

150 m
RTL
2XLMG

GPO
600m P BHM

WL JCO
WL JCO

GPO
Q BHM

RTL
2IC
RTL

R GPO
BHM
600m WLJCO
SGL OFFR

H SVY OFFR
RHM
Q
2XLMG
JA
150 m
600m

LMG R LMG R

FIGURE 1(e) : Search Drill

85. Jab GPO aur BHM std tap lay kar rehe hain tab sabi appt H1 and J veh se store
unload karte hain. Baki drill same rahti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
91
Regimental Deployment Drill

86. Reg Deploy drill normal night occupation ki tarah se hoti hain. Nimn likhit taiyari
ki jati hain.

(a) Preliminary Preparation. Regt 2IC available info aur map study jo ki gun
area mein jane se pahale ground ke bare mein hoti hain Regt ka takkriban lay out
decide karta hain. Gun area mein pahuchne par woh control centre (CC)
establish karta hain our Para 81 ke anusar search karta hain aur area ko secure
kiya jata hain. Uske bad woh jis tarah se area permit karta hain us tarah se ya by
foot ya by veh area ko recce karta hain. Svy offr, Sig offr, WL JCO, RHM, 2IC ke
sath rahte hain. Uske bad ek selected jagah se Regt 2IC GPOs ko Bg aur dist ke
dwara Bty area banta hain. GPO apne apne area mein jate hain, suitability check
karte hain our radio par report dete hain.

(b) Marking of Track. Recce party pahuchne se pahle, main axis se Dis P
take k Regt track ban jana chahiye.

C/A

Q Bty P Bty
Dist 225 m
Dist : 225 m
Bg C/A +45
Bg : C/A - 450
eg

RCP RHQ
Dist 225 m
R Bty Bg C/A +/- 135 Deg
Dist : 75 m
Bg : C/A +/-1800

FIGURE 1(f) : Layout of the Regiment

87. GPO apni recce party ke sath apni respective posn mein jata hain. Bty ka BHM
Jyadatar is point se gun posn tak tap laying start karta hain. Woh iske liye GPO ko
follow karta hain. GPO Gun posn mein pahuchne ke bad radio par Regt 2IC ko area
suitabnility ki report deta hain. Agar Jarurat hain, tab woh 2IC dawara bataye gaye area
se thoda door Bty Gun posn select kar sakta hain.

88. Ek bar jab area confirm ho jata hain, tab 2IC sabhi gun posn par jata hain our
boundary coordinate karta hain.

89. Iske bad jab Gun Dis P par pahuch jati hain tab deployment drill normal night occu
ki tarah hoti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
92
PART IV- RECCE AND OCCUPATION OF A CONC AREA BY A FIELD BTY

Introduction

90. Kisi bhi operation ko start karne se pahle Bty ko conc area mein briefing,
coordination aur rehearsal ke liye dply karna pad sukta hain. Conc area ki day aur night
recce aur occn drill niche diye gaye para mein di gayi hain.

Requisites and Likely Threats :-

91. Concentration area ki main requirements is prakar hain :-

(a) Ek bty ke liye 500m X 500m jagah honi chahiye.

(b) Achha comouflage our concealment ho.

(c) Aane jane ke liye asan ho.

(d) Dushman ki medium gun ki range se bahar ho.

(e) Defence ke liye uchit hona chahiye.

(f) Ground aur air attack se protection pradan karta ho.

(g) Dusman ka hone ki apeksha kam ho.

92. Concentration area jyadatar apne troops ke fwd line se pichhe hota hain. Par phir
bhi ground aur air threat se khatra hota hain conc area dusman ke heliborn troops stay
behind party, commando raiding parties aur air attack lagatar khatra bane rahte hain. Is
liye isse bachne ke liye tayari rahni chahiye. Aaj kal ki warfare mein enemy is yogya hain
ki woh electronic tariqe, satellite our remotely piloted veh se conc area ka pata laga
sakta hain.

93. Air attack se bachne ke liye hame badia camouflage aur concealment karna
chahiye. LMG bhi air defence role per use kar sakte hain. Yadi AD Gun hain, to air
defence ke liye unka istemal karna chahiye.

94. LMG ke alawa, hum Gun ko direct firing role per istemal karke ground threat ke
khilaf use kar sakte hain. Conc area ke charon taraf 1500 se 2000 mtr ke range par ‘DF ’
select karne chahiye our woh local OP/LP ki observation mein hone chahiye.

Day Occupation.

95. Ek Bty ko conc area mein dply ke liye CO, BC aur supported arm Commander ke
dwara order diya ja sakta hain. Yeh order Bty 2IC ya GPO ko milte hain, jinme nimn
likhit shamil hota hain.

(a) Location of battery concentration area.

(b) C of A bearing.

(c) Degree of preparation.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
93
(d) Concentration area mein rukne ka likely samay.

(e) Pass ki doosari units.

(f) Time to be ready.

(g) Koi doosari administrative/special hidayatey.

96. Battery 2IC/GPO yeh order receipt karne ke bad detail map study karte hain our
neech likhe ko select karte hain :-

(a) Route aur is raste par rukavaten.

(b) Gun group ke liye RV.

(c) Agar sambhav hain, concentration ke liye suitable area.

97. Bty subaltern ko RV milti hain. RV aur gun area ki requirement same hain.

98. Recce. Conc area ki recce aur siting ki jimmewari bty 2IC ka hota hain. Bty
2IC ke obsence mein yeh kam GPO ke dwara kiya jayega. Reccc party nimn likhit
persons, stores aur veh hota hain :-

(a) Battery 2IC (K vehicle).

(b) H1 our J vehicles aur day occupation ka complete store our personnel.

(c) Guide sabhigun ke liye OP/BC, our adm ke liye. Jiske liye J veh (1 Ton)
ke bajay 3 Ton veh ko use kiya jayega.

99. Concentration area mein aane ke bad Bty 2IC ensure karta hain ki woh correct
area mein pahunch gaya hain our LMG gunner ko deploy karta hain. Recce ke dauran
woh following decide karta hain.

(a) Conc area ka extent.

(b) Gun ke liye ilaka.

(c) LMGs.

(d) Battery HQ jisme Bty office, CP aur WL shamil hain.

(e) Administrative area jisme cook house, rest area aur latrines shamil hain.

(f) Bty charging bay aur exchange ki jagah.

(g) Ander ane, bahar jane aur Dis P ki jagah.

(h) Track plan.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
94
(j) BC / OP parties.

(k) Order site ki jagah.

(l) Local defence aur anti tank layout.

100. Sabhi element ki location dicide karne ke bad Bty 2IC apne order deta hain, jisme
ye shamil hain.

(a) Land marks.

(b) Sabhi elements ki posn.

(c) C/A Bearing.

(d) Stand to timings.

(e) Bty ke aane ka samay.

(f) Digging ki policy.

(g) Time to be ready.

(h) Time for orders (agar jaroorat hain to).

101. Order dene ke bad Bty 2IC pas ki sub unit ke sath local defence co-ordinate
karne ke liye chala jata hain.

102. GPO, order receive karne ke bad, detailed recce karta hain aur niche likhe posn
ke liye sahi jagah chunata hain.

(a) Gun platforms (Lagbhag 100 mtr apas ki doori).

(b) Director ki jagah (kam se kam troop ki ek Gun visible ho).

(c) CP aur CP WL.

(d) Battery centre.

(e) Anti tank layout.

(f) Bty ka local defence.

(g) Gun platform Normal Bty deployment ke liye gun platform, agar tgt indirect
firing area se engage karna ho.

103. Concentration area ke neeche likhe pattern hote hain :-

(a) Circular.

(b) Triangular.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
95
(c) Rectangular.

104. Order receive karne ke bad sabhi appointment apni respective duty karte hain jo
ki is prakar hain :-

(a) GPO. Doosare Gun flag plant karta hain. Gun platform decide karne
Ke bad woh niminlikhit decide karta hain.

(i) Local defence ka ourter perimeter.

(ii) Gun perimeter.

(iii) Vehicle perimeter.

(iv) Administrative echelons.

(b) Right Troop Leader.

(i) Local defence mein GPO ki madad karta hain loc def chart banata
hain.
(ii) Occupation of Concentration area ki preparation mein GPO ki
madad Karta hain.

(c) WL JCO.

(i) Order site aur alternative site ko organize karta hain.

(ii) Cook house, latrines aur rest area ko organise karta hain.

(iii) Agar jaruri hain to track ko improve karta hain.

(iv) Inner perimeter mein sabhi veh ki posn chunta hain aur camouflage
karata hain.

(d) Signal JCO.

(i) Bty exchange ki sahi jagah chunata hain.

(ii) Charging bay aur maintenance bay ki sahi jagah chunata hain.

(iii) Line ke dwara concentration area mein communication provide

karta hain.

(e) BHM.

(i) Bty IN, OUT our DisP sign post plant karta hain.

(ii) Day deployment ki sari duty karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
96
(f) CP Staff. TA, 1, 2, 3 aur 4 day deployment ki sari technical duty karte
hain. Arty boards 360º mein plot hota hain aur dono troop ki ek Gun C/A par
record hoti hain.

105. Nirdharit time par, sabhi appointment Bty Dis P par jate hain aur gun gp ke aane
par, unko respective place par le jate hain.

106. Har troop ki ek gun C/A par record ki jayegi. Occupation ke bad “stand to” kiya
jayega.

Routine

107. Conc area mein nimnlikhit routine daily hota hain :-

(a) “Stand to” at dawn, dusk aur odd times par aur perimeter patrolling.

(b) Digging. Priority is prakar hain :-

(i) Slit trenches.

(ii) Weapon pits.

(iii) Gun pits and CP.

(iv) Living in shelters aur amn bays.

(c) Eqpt, weapons aur ammunition ka maintenance.

(d) Sight and serviceability test.

(e) Administration aur rest.

(f) Operation ke liye orders, briefing aur rehearsals.

108. Enemy ke threat ki advance information ke liye OP/LP pura time man kiye
jayenge aur unke beech communication banaya jayega.

109. Conc area ke nazdik DF ke engage ki jimmewari Bty 2IC/BC ki hoti hain.

Night Occupation.

110. Aaj kal ke samay concentration area ki occupation night ke samay hoti hain.
Night occupation ke principle is prakar hain :-

(a) Jyada se jyada recce aur preparation din ke samay.

(b) Occupation ke samay kam se kam awaz.

(c) Occupation ke samay kam se kam light.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
97
111. Preparations. Store ki checking aur preparation din ke samay ki jayegi.
Nimnlikit stores ki checking jaruri hain :-

(a) Light beacon director.

(b) Night RO’s aur Bty pickets.

(c) Night sign posts.

(d) CP ke liye lighting aur blackout arrangement.

(e) Tape newar.

(f) Appointments ke badges.

(g) Line aur telephone / tannoy.

(h) Hurricane lamps.

(j) Muffled hand tourches.

(k) Illuminated stadia rod.

(l) Batteries.

112. Orders. Neeche likhe extra order diye jate hain.

(a) Recce party ka composition.

(b) Recce party ka NMB.

(c) Gun group ka NMB.

(d) Kaha tak preparation kiya jayega (Agar Jaruri hain).

113. Conc area ke ander Bty 2IC aur GPO day occupation ke jaise order deta hain.
Andhere ke karan additional order jaise ki laying tapes, lighting of sign posts, director
aur ROs jo diye gaye.

114. Sabhi appointment ni occupation with day light recce ki duty karte hain. Guns
aane ke bad “stand to” kiya jayega.

115. First light se pahale ke action mein koi change nahi hain.

Drill at Regimental Level.

116. Regimental level ki drill Battery level ki tarah hain, except :-

(a) Regt recce party ka overall incharge Regt 2IC hota hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
98
(b) Regt recce party ka composition normal occupation of gun area ki tarah
hota hain .

(c) Regiment recce party mein jaroorat padne par additional guides honge.

(d) Kyon ki puri regt conc area ko occupy karegi, har bty ko area of resp diya
jayega.

117. Generally jo order regt 2IC ke dwara diya jate hain woh occupation of gun area ki
tarah hote hain. Jo additional information order mein di jati hain woh is prakar hain :-

(a) Pass mein koi dusari unit.

(b) Operation ki preparation ke liye koi order.

Miscellaneous.

118. Concentration area ki requirment ke anusar pura recce aur correct occupation drill
hona bahut jaruri hain. Guns direct shooting/anti tank role ke liye conc area mein dply
ki jayengi. Do guns record ki jayengi aur tgt ki engagement ke liye ek suitable gun posn
chuna jayega air threat se bachne ke liye achha camoflauge, concealment aur
dispersion kiya jayega. Conc area mein normal routine follow kiya jayega.
Concentration area ke salient features dispersion, good camouflage aur concealment
acha communication aur protection hona chahiye.

PART V- LOCAL DEFENCE OF GUN AREA

119. Modern warfare mein fire supremacy ko establish karne ke liye Gun area ka
defence bahut jaruri hain. Def ki planning, coordination aur conduct limitation aur threat
perception se bachne ke liye pakka karna chahiye.

Limitations

120. Gun area ke local defence ko nimn likhit factor prabhavit karte hain.

(a) Occupied area ka bada failav.

(b) Limited manpower.

(c) Primary task jo ki fire sp ko lagatar perform karna.

(d) Defence store aur mines ki allotment mein kam priority.

Threat.

121. Gun posn par nimnlikhit khatre ho sakate hain :-

(a) Ghuspaithiye ya Gun barbad karne wali party.

(b) Enemy ke dwara occupied area mein peeche ruki hui party.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
99
(c) Paratroopers/Commandos.

(d) HeliborneTroops.

(e) Combat team jisme tank aur armoured personnel carriers.

(f) Air.

122. Threat ke prakar jamin ki banavat aur dusman ke source par nirbar karta hain.
Gun area par hamla kisi bade hamle ke saati jyada hoga. Normal infanty ke attack night
mein aur tank ke attack din mein hote hain. Par mechanized infantry / tank raat mein Ni
vision device ka istemal kar sakte hain.

Planning.

123. Jimmewari. Local defence co-ordinate karne ki jimmewari is prakar hain.

(a) Bty Gun posn - GPO.

(b) Battery Gun area wagon line sahit – Battery 2IC.

(c) Regiment head quarters – BC HQ bty / Adjutant.

(d) Regiment (wagon line ko milakar) – Regt 2IC.

124. Planning ke vichar. Sambandhit adhikari conc area select karte samay nimn
likhit soch vichar karta hain :-
(a) Ground aur air threat se bachav ke liye gun posn mein jane ka rasta.

(b) Koi purana featuers jo Gun area ya usko jane wala raste ko dominate karta
ho.

(c) Gun area ke pass koi dead ground jaise ki pedon ki jhund ya jamin ke
ubhrav.

(d) Prakrutic rukavaten.

(e) Prakrutic rukavaton se bachav.

(f) Defence store aur mines ki availibility kya hain.

(g) Time kitna hain.

(h) Prakrutic camouflage aur concealment kitna hain.

(j) Man power ki availability.

(k) Future plans.

(l) Air defence Gun, agar dply hain, to Regt Gun area mein ya wagon line
mein location.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
100
Plan

125. In points par vichar karne ke bad, local defence ka plan work out kiya jata hain jis
mein ye include hona chahiye :-

(a) Bty Gun area jitna ho sake depth provide karna chahiye aur apsi support
mein hona chahiye.

(b) Bty ke under gun platforms ki posn is tarah honi chahiye taki secondary
platform ko kam se kam movement mein pahunchkar tank / infantry threat ka
mukabala kar saken.

(c) Batteries ke liye local defence sector hone chahiye.

(d) Early warning ka arrangement hona chahiye jis mein ki OPs, LPs aur
patrols ke liye location, strength, timing aur communication shamil hona chahiye.

(e) Guns ke liye Anti tank sector jisme opening range shamil ho.

(f) Gun posn ke charo taraf DF tasks ka selection aur coordination. Ek bty ke
front ka DF task flanking ya depth fire unit ko dena chahiye. Medium Gun ko is
tarah se deploy karna chahiye taki jin likely approaches se dusman ka tank ane
ka khatra ho, woh cover kar sake.

(g) Protective minefield aur wire obstacles lagane ki jimmewari.

(h) Mobile reserve ki strength, location aur task. Iski strength aur composition
manpower aur local kam par nirbar karti hain. Iska aim ek reserve banana hain
jiski str har bty aur RHQ mein kam se kam ek rifile sec ke sath LMG aur uska
over all commander JCO se kam nahi hona chahiye. Mobile reserve ki RV ke liye
do alternative areas nominated hone chahiye.

(j) Digging aur dusre stores.

(k) Defence stores ki allotment.

(l) DF engagement ke dauran safety ensure karne ke liye najdiki units ke sath
communication.

(m) LMG incl LMG in air defence role ka location, unka arc of fire aur fixed
lines.

(n) Wagon lines ka location aur local defence ka arrangement.

(o) Air defence guns agar gun area ya WL mein loc hain to unke sath
communication aur coordination.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
101
Preparation.

126. Time aur resources ke hisab se nimn likhit sabhi ya jyadatar tayari ki jani chahiye
:-

(a) Against Tanks.

(i) Early warning system ki testing.

(ii) Range cards ki preparation.

(iii) Reference point aur ground per opening range ki limits ki pahchan.

(iv) Bty ki guns ka apas mein aur najdiki sub units ki flanking guns ke
beech mein arcs of fire ka coordination.

(v) Secondary platform par jane ki rehearsal.

(vi) OP tak line lay ki jayegi.

(vii) Selected guns ke liye 360º gun pits prepare kiye jayenge.

(viii) DF tasks ka survey aur gun data ke liye separate target record
register mein entry.

(ix) Air defence guns ke sath (warning procedure) tie up kiya jayega.
Grnd attack ke khilaf inka effective istemal ho sakte hain.

(b) Against infantry.

(i) Gun posn mein LMG aisi jagah par sited honi chahiye jahan se ki
woh raiding parties se asani se over run na ho sake. Is liye LMG ke bagal
mein rifle trenches honi chahiye aur gun pits ya command post ke pass
mein honi chahiye.

(ii) Ground par LMG ke arc of fire ka coordination.

(iii) Reserves ki movement ka rehearsal.

(iv) Standard aur full “stand to” ki strengths pahle se decide ho, jab full
‘stand to’ hota hain tab bty koi fire support provide nahi kar sakti hain. Sirf
en ke bade attack / raid ke khilaf apna pura defence ke liye.

(v) LPs ke liye line lay ki jayegi.

(vi) DF task ka survey aur ek separate target record book mein gun data
ki entry.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
102
(c) Defence Against Air Attack

(i) Per bty RHQ aur WL mein ek ek LMG air defence role par lagao.
Gun area mein inki loc, enemy AC ke raste mein is tarah se lagi honi
chahiye ki koi ek CP use control kar sake.

(ii) Yadi dummy gun position prepare kiya hain to wahan bhi LMG site
karni chahiye.

(iii) Air Craft ki engagement ke liye opening rg ke liye land marks select
karna chahiye.

(iv) Dushman ke air craft ki pahchan ke liye sentries ki rehearsal

karwani chahiye.

(v) Air raid warning ki drill tie up honi chahiye. Gun area, wagon line
aur najdiki units mein lagi air defence gun ke sath coordination hona
chahiye.

(vi) LMG ka firing control karne ke liye strict fire order issue karne
chahiye.

(d) For Night Attacks.

(i) Night “stand to” ki rehearsal bar bar honi chahiye aur defences ko
check karna chahiye.

(ii) Fixed line ke liye LMG ki fire ka arrangement check karna.

(iii) Illumination tasks ke liye star shells ka preparation.

(iv) Mobile reserve ko earmark karna aur movement ki rehearsal.

(v) Khatre wale ilake mein ek ke scale par LMG ka alternate posn aur
movement rehearse hona chahiye. Gun area mein agar air defence guns
hain to unko bhi defence mein include karna chahiye.

(e) Obstacles and Defence Works

(i) Order ke anusar protective minefields aur wire obstacles lagana.

(ii) Early warning ke liye Wire obstacle ke sath tin cans aur trip flare
lagana.

(iii) Priorities ke mutabik defence work ki sabhi preparation karna.

(f) Defence of Wagon Lines. Apne resources ke andar hi gun position ki

tarah hi preparation ki jayegi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
103
Conduct

127. Arty weapon aur amn ki capability ka pura istemal karna chahiye. Mountaineous
area mein jo area Bty / Regt guns ke dwara cover nahi kiya ja sakta, uske liye mortar ya
flanks par guns use ki jati hain. Gun area ka local defence khatre ke hisaab se conduct
kiya jata hain :-

(a) Against Tank Attack :-

(i) OPs early warning pass karta hain. Flanking batteries / units,najdik
unit ko warning deneke bad DF task engage karti hain.

(ii) GPO ”Tank Alert” ka order karega.

(iii) Guns tab fire open karegi jab tanks guns ki range mein hain aur
GPO se ‘engage’ order mil chuka hain.

(iv) Gun ke dwara direct shooting ke liye night mein battle field
illumination arrange kiya jana chahiye. Illumination ke dwara enemy ke
night vision divice temporarily ineffective ho jate hain.

(b) Against Infantry. Bahut close country ya mountain terrain mein poor
visibilly ke alawa din mein infantry gun position par attack nahi karti hain.
Iske khilaph defence conduct is prakar hain.
(i) OPs ya LPs early warning denge. Positive identification ke liye area
illiuminate kiya ja sakta hain. Najdeek unit ko inform karne ke bad DF task
fire kiya jayega. Agar jaruri hain to OPs ya LPs safe alternative position
mein jayenge ya apne ilake ke defence mein cover lenge.

(ii) Jab dusman najdeek aa jata hain nominated gun se area ko

illuminate kiya jayega. Sabhi available weapon ke dwara aur guns se
direct laying ke dwara jyada matra mein ek sath fire dala jayega.

(iii) Jaise gun destruction party heavy coverfire ke sath pass mein aati
hain to small arms ya grenades ke dwara aur unke supported element ko
guns ya automatics ke sath hi engage kiya jayega. Mountaineous terrain
mein slope ki wajah se sath hi grenade neeche roll kar jaate hain. Isse
bachane ke liye suitable length ka thread bandhna chahiye. Jisse ki
grenades desired jagah par explode hoga.

(c) Use of mobile Reserve. Kisi battery mein attack hone par, Adjt / 2IC ke
order par, doosari battery ke mobile reserve nischit do RV mein ek par ikkatha
kiye jate hain. Adjt, attack ke direction ko dhyan mein rakhkar RV ko nominate
karta hain. Mobile reserve ko shuru mein ikkatte karte samay enemy ke attack
direction ko dekhna chahiye. Mobile reserve ka Commander RV par control aur
agle ki tayari karta hain aur order ka intejar karega. Jab picture clear ho jata hain
Adjutant / 2IC further order dete hain. Mobile reserve ko ye jo sambhavit kam
diye jate hain, jinka rehearsal preparation ke dauran kiya jata hain. Woh is
prakar hain :-

(i) Jis jagah attack hua hain vaha aur force bhejana.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
104
(ii) Situation ko sambhalana.

iii) Perimeter mein ghuse enemy ko bahar nikalna.

(d) Against Air Attack.

(i) Air alert sentries / OPs jo forward defended localities mein hote
hain, woh air raid ki warning apni unit aur gun area ki air defence guns ko
pass karte hain.

(ii) Sabhi log cover lete hain.

(iii) Air defence role ki LMG aur AD gun attack karne wale air craft ko
engage karenge.

Daily Routine

128. Jaldi se jaldi action lene ke liye aur same daily routine avoid karne ke liye nimn
kam kiye jate hain :-

(a) “Stand to” ki rehearsal alag- alag samay par karo.

(b) “Stand to” ke dauran perimeter aur gun area ke charo taraf agar koi dead
ground hain to uski patrolling karo.

(c) Early warning arrangement ko test karo. Daily routine mein gun position
aur troop ke fwd line ke beech patrol bheji jati hain. Is patrol mein 1 NCO aur 3 x
OR hote hain aur ek battery mein aise do patrol hoti hain. Yadi regiment hain to
patrol ko mila karke unki strength badayi ja sakte hain.

(d) Subah ke kam aur meal time ko alag alag samay par karna chahiye aur tps
ko group mein bhejna chahiye.

(e) Small arms ki maintenance ko check karo.

(f) Sham ke “stand to” ke bad camouflage net hataye jate hain. Subah “stand
to” ke pahale inhe vapas lagaya jana chahiye.

129. Ek gun area jo defence ke liye thik se organised hain, woh enemy ke coordinated
attack ko bhi hara sakte hain.

PART VI – QUICK AND OPEN ACTION

Quick Action

130. Jab ek battery advance column ke sath move kar rahi hain tab yadi fire support
chahiye, tab OP offr “Action” ke sath fire orders deta hain.

131. Jaise hi OP offr ko tgt indicate kiya jata hain aur woh tgt ko map spot kar raha
hain. OPA ko “Action” ka order, BT bearing nearest 10 Deg mein order karna chahiye.
e.g, “Action Bearing 240 degree” GPO sabse pass ki gun position mein apni guns ko

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
105
turant deploy karta hain. Accuracy ya concealment se jyada speed ki jarurat hoti hain
GPO jitna Jaldi ho sake fire shuru karne ke liye, ye step lega.

132. Quick action ke liye kam se kam jaruri vehicle gun area mein le jaye jayenge.
Bachhe huye, agar sambhav ho, cover mein road se utar kar halt kiye jayenge.

133. Drill. Yadi quick action ki ummid ho aur BC se is bare mein warning order mila
ho to GPO gun se 300-400 mtr age jata hain. Order”Action bearing --- digrees” milane
par woh guns ko pahale se nirdharit signal deta hain. Speed badakar nearest gun area
mein enter karta hain (vapas muda nahi jayega) aur apne vehicle ko area ke centre
mein is tarah se park karta hain. Jis se vehicle ka rear ordered bearing ke direction
mein face karte hain. Yadi fire order mil chuke hain, voh map par T (GR of tgt) aur G
(GR of bty centre) ko plot karta hain, Uske bad yeh drill ki jata hain :-

(a) GPO gun aur tgt ki plotting ko dubara check karta hain, target ka bearing,
range aur A of S workout karta hain iske bad apna map TA2 ko hand over kar
deta hain.

(b) TA 2, independently bearing range aur Aof S ko nikalta hain aur GPO ko
deta hain. GPO yeh data apne data se gross error ke liye check karta hain.

(c) BHM road se bahar apna vehicle ko park karta hain aur gun area ke
entrance par traffic ko control karta hain.

(d) Leading gun ko CP Vehicle se 15-20 meter peeche action mein laya jata
hain. Agar ground permit karta hain to sabhi gun ‘Action Rear’ ki jayengi.

(e) Agar modified individual angle method use kiya ja raha hain toTA 1 centre
gun ke peeche 60 meter par director ko set karta hain.

(f) GPO pahle gun jo action mein ati hain usse fire ko open karta hain. Troop
leader bachi guns ko action mein late hain. Woh apni gun ko ‘fire’ order dene se
pahle TA 2 se data check karta hain.

(g) Gun ko line pass karne ke liye modified individual angle ya aiming point
method ka istemal kiya jata hain.

(h) Sabhi Gun C/A par record hone tak GPO guns ko order “Bearing -----
digree ---- minutes” mein pass karta hain. Troop leader in orders ka record
rakhata hain aur uske troop ki gun jaise hi ready hoti hain unko pass karta hain.

(j) Agar computers available nahi hain to tgt grid correction par CFA se gun
data nikala jana chahiye.

(k) Agar CFA available nahi hain, to quick action method se Arty board set up
kiya jayega jo DUAI, 2/67 mein diya gaya hain. Agar OT aur BT bearing 5 degree
ke ander hain, to temptale ko BT line par orient kiya jayega.

(l) Agar quick action ke bare mein pahale se malum hain to kuchh prepration
pahale se ki ja sakati hain jaise arty board set karna, director stand par mount
karna aadi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
106
(m) Agar BC / OP offr jante hain ki battery ko wahan par lambe samay tak
rakhana pad sukta hain to “Reorganise, Time to be ready-----” ka order karte
hain.

Open Action

134. Open action us samay kiya jata hain jab tgt gun posn se visible hota hain. Shoot
ko GPO control karta hain.

135. When Gun are Already in Action.

(a) Jab gun pahale se action mein hain aur C/A recorded hain, tab sabse
efficient tariqa normal indirect laying hain, sivay ek well defined tgt ke. GPO
bearing A of S aur range nikal karke gun ko normal sequence mein pass karta
hain. Woh khud shoot ko control karta hain.

(b) Direct Laying. Agar tgt achchi tarah se pahchan mein hain to direct
laying kiya jayega. GPO tgt indicate karne ke liye neeche likhe method istemal
kar sakta hain :-

(i) Vertical clock ray ki madad se jaise “Reference point factory,

chimney top. RIGHT 4 o clock 8 degrees / 167 mils (description).

(ii) Trail move karake jab gun tgt par point kar raha hain, tab ‘ON’ ka
order karte hain.

(ii) Sector se anti tank drill ki tarah. Jaise ki “Tank Left Sector”.

136. When Guns action mein na ho.

(a) Jab guns action mein nahi hoti, GPO guns ko sabse pas ke area mein
action mein lata hain aur direct laying se tgt engage karta hain yadi tgt ki achchi
pahchan hain, nahi to indirect laying ki istemal karta hain.

(b) Indirect Laying. Normal method se gun ko C/A par lay karne ka samay
nahi hoga. GPO ek unmistakable aiming point select karta hain aur tgt se aiming
point ka angle hand se measure karta hain. Phir woh guns ko neeche likhe form
mein order deta hain :-

(i) “Battery tgt HE 117 charge 2”.

(ii) “Aiming point Church Tower 26 Degrees / 500 mils”.

(iii) “Angle of sight -----“.

(c) C/A ka koi record nahi rakha jata.

PART VII- PREPARATION OF ALTERNATIVE AUR FUTURE POSITIONS

137. Fire unit ke dwara alternative position select aur prepared kiya jata hain. Yeh is
liye hain ki agar enemy ne bty ko locate kar liya ho aur enemy ka shelling ya air

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
107
bombardment ke karan casualities ho raha ho to nayi loc mein mov karke same task
kiya ja sake. Alternative and future posn occupation ke liye puri tarah prepare kiya
jayega. Agar battery independently kam nahi kar rahi to RHQ ke order bina battery
alternative posn mein move nahi karega.”

138. Alternative position mein nimn likhit preparation ki jati hain :-

(a) Gun platforms recce aur mark kiye jate hain. Director ya Beacon Corner
Prism ke rough angle slip ready ki jayegi.

(b) Director ki position mark ki jayegi, Original postion se parallel line pass kiya
jayega aur do RO’s aur Night ROs ka angle record kiya jayega.

(c) Battery centre current grid par fix kiya jayega aur Battery command post
mein record rakha jayega.

(d) Crest clearance data prepare kiya jayega.

(e) CFA set up karne ke liye data nikala jayega aur record rakha jayega.

139. Time milane par niche likhi karwai bhi kiya jayega :-

(a) Alternative posn ke liye jaroori tgts ka tgt record GPO ke dwara prepare
kiya jayega.

(b) Sabhi jaruri telephone lines laid kiya jayega..

(c) Gunpits cartridge shelters, slit trenches aur CPs dig kiya jayega.

140. Kabhi kabhi, unit mein ek alternative posn taiyar kiya jata hain. Jo GPO Alt posn
ko tayar karta hain uski responsibility hain ki neeche likha data dusari battery ke GPO
ko dega :-

(a) Gun platform, CP aur director ka location.

(b) Alternative position ka orientation aur fixation.

(c) Bty layout ka data.

(d) Director ke rough angle.

(e) Night ROs ka bearing.

(f) Mike aur higher tgts ka tgt record. Agar jyada tgt hain to adjutant yeh kam
batteries ko bant dega.

(g) Weapon pits ki jagah aur dusare local defence ki detail.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
108
PART VIII- BATTERY KI TROOPS DWARA LEAP FROGGING

141. Jab fire support ke liye ek bty ho aur operation independently ho to sari battery ko
naye gun position mein move karna thik hain jiske dauran armour ya infantry mortars ki
kshamta par nirbhar karta hain. Kabhi aisa ho sakta hain ki battery ke troop ko “Leap
frog” ya “step up” karke advance to contact ke dauran aur “retrograde operation” mein
lagatar support dena pade.

Advance to Contact ka Procedure

142. Battery ki present grouping mein koi change karne ki jarurat nahi hain. Agar puri
battery gun area ‘A’ mein deploy hain aur ek troop ko step up karne ka order mila ho to
complete recce party, jisme ‘H’ vehicle aur ‘J’ vehicle recce ke liye aage badte hain.
Yadi troop alag deploy hain aur ‘leap frog’ ki jarurat hain, to rear troop ka ‘H’ vehicle
reccy party ke sath jayega, jaise hi first troop ready report deta hain. ‘J’ vehicle recce
par ja rahe H1 ya H2 ke sath RV par milega. Aisi jaroorat nahi padni chahiye ki do alag
deploy troop ki H1 aur H2 ki ek sath jarurat pade.

Retrograde Operations ka Procedure

143. Retrograde operation mein advance to contact ka procedure istemal hoga sirf
antar yeh hain ki nayi gun position kabhi record karna pad sakta hain. Is task ko pura
karne ke liye Bty 2IC ya ek troop leader detail kiya jata hain. Iske liye ek TA director ke
sath available hona chahiye.

Signal communications

144. ‘Leap frogging’ aur ‘stepping up’ ke liye battery ke dono troop ke liye hidayaten
neeche di gayee hain.

145. ‘H’ vehicle, ka radio station 23, 23A, 43, 43A, 63 aur 63A call kiya jayega. Battery
net ya Regiment net par operate kar raha ho 23,43 aur 63 apne bty net par control
stations hogi aur regiment net par out station honge.

SECTION 38 – BATTERY LEVEL PAR SURVEY

Introduction

1. The C/A. Yeh woh grid bearing hain jis par bty ki guns initially action mein ati
hain, yeh bearing normally 10 degrees (or 100 mills) order kiya jata hain.

2. Battery centre. Yeh battery ki guns ka lagbhag geometrical centre hota hain.
Battery centre ka grid reference ya coordinate battery CP mein artillery board set karne
ke kam ata hain, aur tgt ki sabhi line aur range ki measurement is point se ki jati hain.

3. Engagement of Targets. Di huyee fire unit ke sath tgt engage karne ke liye
jaruri hain ki guns C/A bearing ke parallel initially laid hon. Har battery ke liye fire kholne
ke basic preparation neeche diye gaye hain :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
109
(a) Jis bearing par fire ki jarurat hain, us line ko establish karo (orientation).

(b) Bty centre ke coordinates ya grid reference malum karo (fixation).

(c) Guns ko line pass karna (section 39).

General

4. Yadi observed fire dwara ek battery se tgt ko engage karna hain to us battery ke
liye approximate orientation aur fixation bhi thick hain. Opening round target ke najdik
area mein girega aur unko observation ke dwara correct kiya ja sakta hain.

5. Jab ek se jyada battery ka istemal ho raha hain to har battery se tgt ka ranging
alag alag hoga, agar dono battery ne ek hi grid establish na kiya ho. Yani dono battery
ne ek hi survey ka istemal kiya ho. Yadi yeh grid Map grid ke pas hain to met condition
ka correction lagakar bina ranging kiye hue tgt par reasonable accuracy mil sakti hain.

6. Is tarah ke engagement ko predicted fire kahte hein.

7. Niminlikhit ko ensure karne ke survey ki jarurat hain :-

(a) Jaise hi guns gun position main pahuchati hain ache se acha map data per
fire karne ke liye ready hona chahiye.

(b) Regiment ke har battery aur divisional artillery brigade ki har regiment ek
common grid (Regiment or Divisional grid) par pahunch sake. Higher grid ko
establish karne ke method ke liye AT III 9/76 dekhen.

(c) Aur ant mein ek theater grid establish ho jata hain. Yeh grid puri theater of
war ke liye common ho jata hain jis grid ke map istemal ho rahe hain uske sabse
nazdik hota hain.

8. Change of grid ke jyadatar, higher grid ka data shuru mein hi mil jata hain aur
change of grid nahin karna padta. Agar theatre grid ka data available ho to change of
grid karne ki zarurat nahi hain. Fire ko kholne ke liye higher grid ka intezar nahi kiya
jayega.

Battery mein Survey Duties.

9. GPO ki Duties. GPO ke gun position mein pahuchne ke bad use higher grid nahi
mila hain to GPO Battery grid ko establish karega.

(a) C of A ko malum karega.

(b) GPS / DGPS, map spotting ya bearing and distance aur map par mark
important feature ke dwara ya simple map resection se battery centre ka fixation
ko pata karega. (AT III 9/76).

10. Jaise hi higher grid milta hain battery grid khatam ho jata hain.

11. GPO yaha se survey carry forward karne ke liye ready hona chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
110

(a) Battery area mein battery director ko RSO dwara minimum survey
provide karna chahiye.

(b) RSO available nahi hain to GPO ko main gun position se alternate gun
postion ka survey karna chahiye.

SECTION 39 - LAYING THE GUN IN THE C OF A

C of A ko Establish Karna

1. GPO director ya prismatic compass dwara C/A establish karega. Woh prismatic
compass ka istemal tabhi karega jab uske pass samay kam ho aur aiming point method
ya modified individual angle method dwara guns ko line pass karna ho (Para 3).

Din ke samay Guns ko line pass karna.

2. Guns ko line pass karne ka mukhya tariqa individual angle method hain (DUAI -6
/ 1970)

3. Quick action ke dauran guns ko neeche likhe method se line pass kiya jayega.

(a) Modified Individual Angle Method

(i) GPO kisi ek gun ke barrel ko prismatic compass ka istemal karte

hue tgt bearing par lay karega. Jaise hi pahla round fire ho jayega dial
sight ko director par lay karne ka order karta hain aur gun ke main scale ka
angle pukarta hain. Woh main scale ka angle read karta hain aur jo angle
Number 1 ne order kiya usko check karta hain. Usi angle ko director ko
pass karta hain “Number -------mils/degrees” .Aur nikale gaye Bearing ko C
of A mante hue guns ko defersecond method se record karne ka adesh
deta hain jaise ki “Number------ Record as bearing ----- mils/degrees defer
second method.

(ii) Grid ref nahi milne par gun ke barrel ko deduced bg par lay nahi kar
pane par GPO gun ke barrel ko ordered bg par compass ki madad se lay
karta hain. No 1 mile huye order bg ko defer second method ke tarika se
record karta hain. Dial sight ko director par lay karta hain aur main scale ka
angle report karta hain. GPO angle director ko pass karta hain. “No –
mils/degree”.

(iii) Director ko gun se 60 meter doori par set kiya jayega. TA 1 mile
huye angle ko set karega aur nominate gun ki dial sight ke upar lay
karega. abhi director C/A ke 180 degree opposite lay ho jata hain.

(iv) TA 1 baki bache hue guns ke dialsight par director ko lay karega.
Bty subaltern director ke eye piece ke neeche jo sahi angle aata hain use
read karega aur gun ko pass karega.

(v) Yeh method individual angle method jaisa hi hota hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
111

(b) Aiming Point Method. Yeh method kewal us samay istemal karte hain
jab suitable aiming point Flank mein visible ho. Aur jab sabhi guns straight line
ho taki staggered setting ke error se bacha ja sake yeh method guns ke gun
position mein ane aur recording hone ke beech ka samay mein hone wale delay
ko kum karta hain. Yeh procedure is prakar se hain :-

(i) GPO aiming point select karte samay nimn baton ko dhyan mein
rakhta hain.

(aa) Jitna ho sake door ho.

(ab) Sabhi guns ki badti hui line mein ho.

(ac) Unmistakable hona chahiye.

(ad) Sabhi guns se visible hona chahiye.

(ae) Laying edge achha hona chahiye.

(ii) Kisi ek gun platform par GPO aiming point ka prismatic compass
dwara bearing read karta hain. Woh us bearing ko grid bearing mein
convert karta hain aur C/A ko subtracts karke resultant angle ka record
rakhta hain (Figure 2)

C/A 100

BG 2700

AIMING POINT BG 2600

FIG 2 – RECORD ANGLE 260º HAIN

(iii) jab gun, gun position mein aa jati hain to GPO aiming point indicate
karta hain, agar ho sake to director ke telescope ke madad se indicate
karta hain aur sub para (ii) mein aye hue angle ko gun ko pass karega,
“Aiming point ----- mils /degrees.” Sabhi guns ko aiming point ke upar lay
karenge uske bad gun C of A par record kiya jayega.

(iv) Yadi aiming point ya modified individual angle method ka istmal ho

chuka ho to , GPO ko mauka milte hi individual angle method se guns ko
line pass karna chahiye (DUAI, 6/70).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
112
Recording the Bearing.

4. Jaise hi guns C/A par lay ho jayegi. GPO order karega “Record As bearing ------
mils/degrees” Time ko bachane ke liye woh guns ko individually C/A record ka order
karega.

Transferring Line to the Guns by Night

5. Night ke samay guns ko required bearing par lay karne ke liye neeche likhe kisi
ek method ka istemal kiya jata hain.

6. Individual Angle Method. Night mein special drill is prakar hain :-

(a). Jaise hi gun gun position mein aati hain, director, ROs aur pickets
illuminate kiye jate hain.

(b) Jaise hi gun action mein aati hain Number 3 rough angle ko dial sight par
lagakar director par lay karega. Number 1 report karega “Number ---- finished
with director” aur dial sight ko illuminate karega.

(c) Uske bad normal individual angle method dwara (DUAI, 6/1970). Jaise
day recording ki jati hain karega sivay inke.

(i) Recording ke duaran dial sight aur director ke light on rakhi jayegi
except jab yeh sambhav na ho aur jab guns ko angle set kiye ja rahe ho.

(ii) Jab GPO second round ke angle pass kar deta hain GPO order
karta hain “Record as night bearing ----- degrees paralleloscope/collimator
and battery picket/beacon corner prism”.

7. Jab Tannoy system fail ho jata hain har detachment ke runner dwara guns aur
CP mein written massage diya jayega.

8. Star Method. Star method ki drill is prakar hain.

(a) Jitna jaldi ho sake GPO star ya stars ko selects karega jo ki suitable
position mein ho jis se guns required C/A par record ho. Star selectin karte
samay yeh condition honi chahiye.

(i) Star kam chamkila aur unmistakable ho.

(ii) Star, jo sight use ki ja rahi hain uske cowl ke elevation ke limit mein
ho. Jaise dial sight 103A/104A ke liye 17 degree mein ho. Aur is tarah
select kiya jana chahiye jo ki slowly East ya West mein neeche ho.

(iii) Ek planet jo ki jayada chamkila aur asani se dikhne wala ho use

nahi lena chahiye kyon ki woh teji se move karta hain.

(b) C of A par set karte samay director battery area ke centre mein hona
chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
113
(c) Director par star se future position ka angle lena chahiye. Aur jis path se
star move ho raha hain usi path par aage ka point ho jis per star three to five
minutes mein pahuch jana chahiye. Selected star ko har gun platform se
dikhana chahiye GPO dwara Numbers1 ko aur troop leader ko. Aur guns ko
order is tarah pass kiya jana chahiye.
“Aiming point star as indicated ---- mils/degree---- minutes”.

(d) Number 3 is angle ko dial sight par lagayega aur number 1 is setting ko
roughly check karega. Number 1 trail ko katvayega jab tak guns ke dial sight star
par lay nahi ho jati. Number 2 brakes ko lagayega. Number 1 cross level sight
karega aur traversing gear ki madad se star par accurate lay karega.

(e) Director position se countdown is prakar karega.

“30 Seconds---- 20 Seconds ----10 Seconds ---5, 4 , 3, 2, 1 Now”.

9. Now ke order par No 1 traverssing hand wheel se apna hath hatayega aur yakin
karega ki dial sight thick lay hain aur report karega “Number--- finished with star”. Yadi
koi gun star par thick se lay nahi hain to report karega “Number --- not observed”.

(a) Guns se finished with star ki report milne ke bad GPO record the center of
Arc ka order karega aur ensure karega ki director limit ke sath RO par close hain.

(b) Jis gun se “number---- not observed”. ki report mili hain us gun ko fresh
angle pass kiya jayega aur same drill usi gun ke liye ki jayegi.

Recording Bearing by Night

10. Neeche likhe kisi do tarike se bearing ko record kiya jayega, jo ki neeche priority
wise diye gaye hain.

(a) Collimator/Right angled mirror paralleloscope.

(b) Battery picket.

(c) Becon corner prism.

(d) One aiming post.

Check Bearing

11. Parallelism DUAI 6/1970 ke anusar check kiya jayega jo ki is prakar hain.

(a) Agar sambhav ho sake to C/A record hone ke turant bad.

(b) Night GAP se day GAP par ane ke liye first light par.

(c) Night GAP record karne ke liye last light se pahle.

(d) Kisi fire plan se pahle.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
114
12. Raat ke samey star method se bhi check parallelism kar sakte hain. Drill is
prakar hain :-

(a) GPO ek suitable star select karega, aur Number 1 ko dikhayega. Aur woh
order karega “Check bearing ---- degrees. Aiming point star as indicated”

(b) Gun par same drill ki jayegi jaise “Check bearing--- degrees. Aiming point
director”. Kewal Number 1 dial sight ko star par lay karega bajay iske ke woh
director par lay kare aur report karega “Number ---- Ready”.

(c) director par drill same hain “Check bearing ---- degrees. Aiming point
director”. Bajay dial sight ke woh star par lay karega.

(d) Jab sabhi guns se ready report mil chuke hain GPO countdown ka order
karega-
“30 Seconds---- 20 Seconds---- 5, 4, 3, 2 , 1 Now”.

(e) Count down ke dauran har gun ka No 1 aur jo TA director par hain sabhi
star par lay rakhenge. Number 1 dial sight ke micrometer aur TA slow motion
spindle ka istemal karenge. TA aur layer ‘Now’ ke order par apna hath
instrument se hata lenge aur yakin karenge ki us samay thick laying thi.

(f) Star ka angle director aur gun par check kiya jayega aur number 1 written
mein angle likhakar bty CP mein bhejenge. Aur director ko close on RO kiya
jayega ki woh limit ke ander hain.

(g) Gun ka aur director ka angle 5 minutes ke ander milna chahiye.

(h) Director par koi error hain to yeh drill dubara ki jayegi kyon ki yeh error
neech likhe ke anusar ho sakta hain.

(i) Order”Now” ka order par direcrtor ka accurate lay na hona.

(ii) RO ke sath limit mein nahi milna.

(j) Yadi kisi gun ka angle limit mein nahi milta hain to us gun ko dubara star
method se record kiya jayega.

SECTION 40 – DIRECTING THE GUNS AT TARGET AND TRANSFERRING TARGET

DATA TO GUNS

PART I – DIRECTING THE GUNS AT THE TARGET

AAM SIDDHANT

1. Kisi target aur plotting tgt grid correction ka battery center se tgt ka map range aur
map bearing work out karne ka tarika DUAI 12/1988 mein diya gaya hain. Normal
engagement mein guns line of fire ke parallel fire karti hain. Target par fire ko distribute
karne ka niyam aur sequence para 11 aur 16 mein diye gaye hain. Kuchh distribution ka
tarike ke yahan varnan kiya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
115

2. Jab yeh jaruri ho ki individual gun ko target ke alag alag point par lay karna ho to
bearing aur range malum karne ke liye yah point hote hain.

(a) Battery center se us point ka bearing aur range malum karo.

(b) Particular gun ke liye jo concentration ho ta hain, use battery center ki

bearing mein add karo aur jo bearing abhi ata hain, woh bearing us gun ka
bearing hoga. .

3. Concentration and Distribution of Fire over a Target. Target ka size aur

shape ko dekhte hue alag alag pattern mein fire dene ke liye action ke dauran usi prakar
ka lay out hona chahiye observer yeh effect is tarah se hasil kar sakta hain.

(a) “Concentrate”.

(b) A standard linear concentration”.

(c) Sweep and search.

(d) By giving Target grid correction.

4. Concentration of line of Fire. Yadi Battery frontage se target ka frontage small

hain to observer “Concentration” ka order kar sakta hain. Yeh order milne ke bad GPO
battery centre se us gun ka concentration calulate karega aur guns ko pass karega.

LINE CORRECTION .

5. Guns ke line of fire aur line of point ke beech ke jis correction se cover kiya jata
hain use conc kahte hain. Figure 3 mein concentration number 1 ke liye less ‘a’ degree
hain, Number 2 ke liye less ‘b’ degree hain, number 4 ke liye more ‘d’ degrees hain
jaise.

NO 6
f

NO 5
e
NO 4 d
BATTERY CENTRE TARGET
c
NO 3
b
NO 2
a
NO 1

FIGURE – 3 LINE CORRECTIONS

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
116
6. Kisi ek gun ko ek point par concentrate karne ka correction, us point par bane
apex angle ke barabar hogi jo print figure 4 mein dikhaya gaya hain. Figure 4 mein
cocentrate karne ke correction ke jarurat hain gun y se lakar battery centre par:-

(a) For traget T1----------------- Apex angle A

(b) For target T2----------------- Apex angle B

(c) For target T3----------------- Zero.

7. Yeh dekha gaya hain ki neeche diye hue battery layout mein correction target ke
bearing aur Range dono par nirbhar hota hain.

T1

T2
A
T3
B
B

BATTERY CENTRE

FIGURE – 4 LINE CORECTION

8. Correctrations Displacement calculator ya Converter Field Artillery ke dwara work

out ki jati hain aur jo small value jo sight par lagai ja sakti hain usko round off kiya jata
hain, aur chapter 1 mein diye hue form ke mutabik pass kiya jata hain.

Position Correction

9. Jaise Figure 5 main gun parallel line par same range par fire karti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
117

No 1

No 2

No 3

BATTERY CENTRE TARGET

No 4

No 5

No 6

FIGURE - 5

10. Battery Center se har gun ka target par different range displacement correction
aur line of fire per depend karta hain. (Figure 6).

FIGURE 6

11. Bty centre aur gun se tgt ke range mein farak hota hain. Bty centre par line of fire
se 900 par jo line banti hain usse gun kitna aage ya piche hain use posn correction kahte
hain. No 1 gun ki posn corrn plus, No 2 ki minus, No 3 ki plus, No 4 minus hogi.

12. Posn corrn Bg per depend hoti hain, tgt ke range ka is par farak nahi hota. GPO
bty centre se posn corrn work out karta hain aur gun same sign se apply karti hain yeh
CFA ya displacement calculator se workout karte hain.

13. Posn corrn ko nikalane ka tarika section 11 main diya hain posn corrn nearest 25
mtrs main pass ki jati hain.

MISC

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
118

14. Jab correction indiviual gun ko pass karte hain, small corrn ki plotting ki galti se
bachne ke liye GPO shoot ke duaran tgt grid correction ki tareha pass karta hain.

15. Jab Op offr conc ka order karta hain to wah parallel line to No ----- ke order se
cancel karta hain. Tab gun parallel line to named Gun ke bg aur rg per fire karti hain.
Gun posn per iska procedure yeh hain.

(a) GPO order “Parallel line to number ----“.

(b) Number 1 named gun ke bg, A/S aur elevation ko sight se check karta
hain.

(c) GPO named gun ki posn corrn ko reported elevation se nikalta hain.

(d) GPO sabhi gun ko fresh bearing aur elevation pass karta hain.

17. Special conventions. GPO hamesha Bty centre se tgt ka conc niche diye
huve condition main pass karta hain.

(a) Standared linear concentration.

(b) Smoke screens.

(c) Registration.

(d) Precision.

(e) Ladder (Both Air Op and Ground OP)

18. Target Registration mein shoot mein hissa lene wali sabhi guns concentrate ki
jayegi.

Concention for Non Standard Condition.

19. Target ke initial bearing aur range par yeh kuchh ya sabhi correction apply ki
jayegi.

(a) Line aur range ke liye C of M (Jis mien rotation of earth bhi shamil hain).

(b) Projectile correction.

(c) Non rigidity correction.

(d) MV correction.

Target Grid corrections.

20. Target gid correction Jo Op officer pass karta hain us se data nikalne ka tarika
DUAI 7/88 main diya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
119
Engagament of Previously Recorded tgt. Target ko dubara engage karne ke liye fired
data two hours ke ander hona chahiye. Datum pt ranging se datum correction nikali jati
hain. Jo ki two hours ke liye valid hoti hain.

PART II – TRANSFER OF DATA TO THE GUNS

22. Yeh part GPO duty ko tgt ka data guns ke pass karne mein effect dalta hain.
jiski drill direct laying aur indirect laying ke liye gun drill pamphlet mein main diya hain.

23. Sighting system ko do group main batagaya hain.

(a) Reciprocating non-calibrating and non compensating sight.

(b) Reciprocating, calibrating and compensating sights.

Indirect Laying For Line

24. Indirect laying main dial sight ke dwara gun line per lay hoti hain. Jab C/A
record kiya gaya ho to gun kisi required bg per lay ho sakti hain. Jab slipping scale per
bg set kiya ho aur sight GAP par lay hain. GPO jab guns ko line pass karega to drift ka
allowance cater kiya jayega.

Indirect laying for line at Large Angle of Sight.

25. Kuch sighting sys ko is prakar design kiya gaya hain ki jab A/S lagai jati hain aur
elevation ke liye lay karte hain to dial sight horizantal plane par tilted hoti hain. Aisi sthiti
mein dial sight sahi horizantal angle ko read nahi kar pati. Yedi gun ki sight par main
scale par 0º to 180º lagate hain tab vertical cross wire tilted ho jata hain jisse error
indroduce hota hain. Yeh error jab tak A/s 5º tak hoti hain tab tak neglected hain.
Jyada A/S ke liye special drill ko gun drill book mein diya hain. Yeh drill tab use nahi
hota jab QE gun rule use ho raha hain tab A/S gun par zero set ki jati hain.

In Direct Laying For Elevation

26. Indirect fire mein elevation ke liye laying ke alag tarike nimn likhit hain.

(a) TE Gun Rule TE scale and sight clinometer. GPO Guns ko A/S aur
range jo op se order aya hain us ke liye work out karke order karata hain .
Range aur posn corrn ko jorh karke gun rule se TE read karte hain. A/S ko side
clinometer par set karte hain. (eg 105 mm abbot).

(b) QE Gun Rule and QE Scale (Elevation Scale for Mortors) aur Field
Clinometer.

(i) OP se aye huye order se GPO range aur A/S aur jarruri position
correction ko nikalta hain.Range + posn corrn aur A/S dono gun rule par
set karte hain. QE ko read karte hain aur QE scale ya Fd clinometer
(105/37 IFG jab gun rule istemal ho rahe ho)per set karata hain.

(ii) Mortors mein elevation do parts mein pass karte hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
120
(aa) Gun corrn mein False A/S (Yah range table ki graph C se
milti hain.) Posn corrn aur MV corrn samil hain.

(ab) Range table ke colm No 6 se AP mille hain.

(c) Bina Gun Rule ke Laying. GPO guns ko elevation deg mein me pass
karta hain.

Bina Gun Rule ke Laying

27. Yah tarika niman likhit ke liye istemal hota hain :-

(a) Gun par normal elevation QE scale par lagate hain. (Mor ke liye elevation
scale) jab gun rule na ho to Fd clinometer ka istemal karte hain (120 mm mor).

(b) Jab clinometer ka order ho to elevation Deg mein me pass karte hain.

28. Para 27 ka (a) aur ( b) same hain aur yeh QE elevation ke liye. Jab Shoot ke
dauran Fd clinometer ka order diya gaya hain to Para 37, 38 mein diya gayahain.
29. GPO Sabhi haltaon mein jaruri data work out karne ka responsible hain .Jis se
mili hui QE per har eqpt laid ho kar jaururat ke mutabik range aur A/S achieve kar sake.

30. QE mein nimn samil hain :-

(a) Range se AP work out karana. (Other eqpt mein TE)

(b) Posn corrn.

(c) Loss and gain MV ke liye correction.

(d) Jump ko reverse sign se istemal karna.

(e) A/S.

(f) Mortars mein range se TE work out karega.

31. Har gun ke liye individual QE aur TE pass karne ki bajai jo ki elev ke sath change
hoti hain. GPO initial mein gun corrn pass karta hain Gun corrn ko No1 shoot ke dauran
har elev me samil karta hain. Jab linear, smk screen fire ho raha ho ya gun pgme issue
kiya ho to gun corrn ele mein samil hota hain.

32. Gun corrn mein niminlikhit parameters hote hain.

TABLE XVII

Laying by QE/TE Laying by elevation scale

(a) Posn corrn (a) Pon corrn ko degree aur min mein
badli karna hain (uchit sign se)
(b) MV corrn (b) MV corrn deg min mein (uchit sign se)

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
121
(c) Jump @ Eqpt aur charge jo istemal ho (c) A/S
raha hain ulte sign se)
(d) A/S

@ Gun corrn us eqpt par nirbhar hain agar range table mein AP ke bajaye TE diya hain,
lekin NON Standard jump ke liye corrn ki jaurat hain.

33. Elevation sabhi gun ko pass kiya jata hain AP (ya TE) plus gun corrn jis gun ka
lagu hain aur jo gun ka QE ban jata hain.

Calculation of gun corrns.

34. Gun corrn calculation Table XVIII mein darsaya gaya hain.

TABLE XVIII – 105/37 IFG CHARGE 2

Range 6000 meters

MV 307 297 287

Number in Action 1 2 3
Mtr Min Mtr Min Mtr Min
1. Posn corrn +75 +36’ -50 -24’ -100 -48’
2. MV corrn -2º 20’ - +3º 06’
3. A/S +20’ +20’ +20’
4. 1+2+3 -1º 24’ +3º 2’ -28’
5. Less upward jump -11 -11 -11
6. Gun corrn -1º35’ +2º51’ -39’

35. Posn corrn and MV corrn mtr se mins mein, opening range par convert kiya jata
hain.

Orders to The Guns

36. GPO gun ko elev ka order deta hain. Jo ki para 35 ka example neeche diya gaya
hain. Jo ki “Clinometer laying. Gun corrn No 1 minus 1º 35’, No2 Plus 2º 5’, No 3,
Minus 39’.
Clinometer laying during shoot.

37. Shoot ke dauran clinometer laying mein change karne ki jarurat parti hain to GPO
order deta hain. “Clino meter laying, report QE”.

38. Har gun last line aur elev par lay rahti hain QE Fd clinometer se napi jati hain No
1 GPO ko report deta hain clinometer ke indix error ke sath. QE se last range ki range
table se AP ya TE minus karke GPO gun corrn nikalta hin. Yadi ek gun hissa lay rahain
jaise precision shoot tab gun corrn nikalne ki jarurat nahi hoti jab tak tgt record ka order
nahi hota. Range table ka column No 5 mein QE mein koi bhi change hain to data mil
sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
122
Direct laying

39. Jab direct laying ka istemal ho raha ho to gun ko dial sight, Open sight ya
Telescope se tgt per direct lay karte hain. A/S Tgt per Automatically applied ho jati hain
jab elevation ke liye tgt per lay karte hain.

40. Elevation normal us equipment ke mutabik use karte hain. GPO guns ko order
karta hain jab yah include hain.

(a) Tgt ka indication kiya jata hain. Tab Gun line aur A/S per lay hoti hain.
Range ya TE, jis se guns elevation ke liye lay ho sakti hain.

(b) Range jab lagate hain to Gun TE per lay hoti hain.

Section 41 – LAYOUT OF REGIMENTAL HEADQUARTERS AND

BATTERY COMMAND POST

Layout of Regimental Headquarters

1. RHQ ka accommodation is prakar hota hain.

(a) CO ka office aur 2IC ka office close rahta hain.

(b) Regiment CP.

(c) Regiment office.

(d) Computing centre baki se kuchh distance per hota hain.

(e) Regimental Exch.

2. Fire control exercise CP mein hota hain aur lay out is prakar hona chahiye :-

(a) Adjt fire order line telephone aur radio set jo ki Artillery Brigade aur
Regimental net per hota hain un ki asan pahuch mein hona chahiye.

(b) Adjt map ko study kar sake. Jab fire order line, telephone aur radio set par
baat kar raha ho.

(c) Tgt Records, task table available hona chahiye.

3. RHQ ka detail layout, vehicles, building ya dugouts jo istemal ho raha hain par
nirbhar karta hain. Ise Fig. 7 me darsaya gaya hain layout of dugout CP. Is fig me do
radio set CP ke ander dikhaya gaya hain es samay radio set ko bahar rakha gaya hain
or CP ko control kiya gaya hain. Jab veh ka istemal kiya jata hain to CP ka lay out veh
ke under fitting kiya hota hain.

4. Orgnisation of work. Adjt RHQ ke kam ko batne ka aur unke rest period ka
dhayan mein rakhne ka responsible hota hain. RHQ mein aur signal exchange mein

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
123
staff hallaton per depend karta hain.Lekin narmal hallaton mein neeche diye gaye
mutabik hota hain :-

(a) CP Duty offr.

Two radio operators.
One orderly.

(b) Signal Exchange One NCO

One exchange Operator
One DR

Lay out of a Battery Command Post

5. Battery elake me do CP hoti hain. Ek main CP jo fire par control karta hain. Aur
doosri Reserve CP alag se lagaya jata hain.

6. Lay out of firing (Main) Command Post. Bty CP ka lay out is prakar hota
hain:-

(a) GPO dono Arty Bd ya palmptop, msg pad aur CP shooting form bina posn
change kiya huye dekh sake. Aur guns par control kar sake.

(b) Fire order line ka telephone aur radio set ka hand set GPO tak aasani se
pahuch sake.

(c) Task table, tgt list aur tactical map, kam ke samay GPO ke najdik rahta
hain.

(d) CP me kam karte samay aadmiyo ke bich kam karane ke liye jagah honi
chahiya.

Org of work. GPO CP ke kam aur sabhi ka rest period bantne ka jimmewar hain.
Normal kam ke dauran yeh hote hain.

(a) Duty offr aur GPO.

(b) Two TA’s

(c) Two Oprs

8. CP staff ke kam me koi dakhal andaji nahi karega aur duty ke alawa kisi ko CP
mein jane nahi diya jayega.

9. Reserve CP me sabhi eqpt/Inst set up kiya jayega aur plot kiya jayega. CP to CP
line bichhaya jayaga GPO Reserve CP ko activate kar sakta hain, agar function ki
jarurat parti hain. eg change of grid ke dauran, Lambe fire plan ke dauran jab gun pgme
prepare kiya ja raha ho aur alt posn technical work karte hain.

10. Reserve CP ko harkat karne ki bajay firng CP mein eqpt aur man power ko
assemble kiya jaye to firing CP me GPO ki dekh rekh me kam achhi prakar se ho sakta
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
124

11. Agla deployment order milne par reserve CP fire par control karta hain. Jab tak
new gun Area me gun action me nahi aate.

CO & 2IC
CLERKS
FIRE ORDER LINE
TO BATTERIES

TABLE

TAC MAP

TABLE
A
TABLE
D
J
T

MAP BOARD

SURVEY PARTY

RESTRICTED
FIGURE – 7 LAYOUT OF RHQ
 RESTRICTED
125
12. Battery CP ka layout vehicle ke sath aur dug in ka niche diya gaya hain.
CFA TA 1
TA 2

EXCH
OPR OPR
RFO

TANNOY

TA 3 GPO TA 4

SHOOTING
GPO BOX TAC MAP
MAP

FIGURE 8 – BATTERY COMMAND POST LAYOUT WITH VEHICLE

STEPS TO
10’ SEAT PERS

4' 2’ 4'

OPR
4'
REMOVABLE
CFA BOARD
TGT REC

10’ 3’ TA 3 GPO TA 4
TA 1 OPR
TA 2
GPO TAC
BOX MAP C of M
3’

4' 3’ 3’

ENTRANCE

FIGURE -9 BATTERY CP LAYOUT (DUG IN)

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
126
SECTION 42 : HIGH ANGLE FIRE

GENERAL

1. High angle firing ke bare mein detail mein AT III 5/2000 mein likha huwa hain
uske kuch vakya yaha par darshaya gaya hain.

2. Jab gun ka AD zero se badhta hain, range bhi badta hain jab tak ki elevation 45
degree tak nahi pahunchta hain. Yadi elevation is ke bad bhi badta hain to range kam ho
jata hain. “High angle fire” ka matlab hain un trajectories ke sath fire karna jisme
maximum range ke bad agla kam range milta hain.

3. Correction for non std condition. Asamanya halton ka range par asar
jaise MV baromatic pressure aadhi jo esi prakar hain woh high angle mein bhi low angle
ki tarah saman hain. Jaise Mv badhne se range badti hain to range ke liye hame ise
minus ka correction chahiye. Esi prakar high angle mein range badane se elevation kam
hota hain. Niche likhe niyam ko achhi tarah se samaj sakte hain.

(a) Jab hum range correction ko meter mein dikhate hain to correction ka
nishan high aur low angle mein same hota hain.

(b) Jab hum range correction ko degree aur minute/ mils mein dikhate hain to
sign correction ka high angle mein ulta aata hain low angle se.

4. Up Hill and Down Hill Shooting. High angle fire mein NR correction ke liye
trajectory bahut jyada hain aur correction bhi jyada hain usko hamesha lagani chahiye.
Doosara low angle mein positive Angle of sight aur TE ko milakar QE banta hain is liye
isko apply nahi kartein hain. High angle fire mein angle of sight ka correction range ke
liye chahiye isliye angle of sight ko hame false angle of sight mein apply karten hain.
False angle of sight aur NR dono ko milakar nikala jata hain. Isko graph C aur D se
malum kiya jata hain.(Chapter IV, Section I Para 17-21of AT III 5/2000).

5. Eqpt mein sighting system mein itana jagah hain jis se High angle mein ham
elevation upto 70 degrees tak lay karke fire kar sakte hain. Isi prakar low angle mein bhi
fire kar sakten hain.

6. GPO’s ka Gun,s ko elevation order, Gun rule hain ya nahi is par nirbhar karta
hain:-

(a) Jab Gun Rules hain. GPO same low angle fire ke tarah hi fire order deta
hain except Angle of sight ko false angle of sight mein convert karta hain gun’s ko
range pass karne se pahle.

(b) Jab Gun Rule nahi hain. Clinometer laying ki drill ka istemal kiya jata
hain. Esko nikalne ka tarika, order pass karne ka aur gun par lagane ka ek saman
hain. Jis ko ham low angle fire mein use karte hain. Weh is prakar hain.

(i) GPO sabhi guns ko AP range table se required range ke samane

dekh kar pass karta hain. Shoot ke dauran elevation badali hone par naya
AP pass karte hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
127
(ii) Initial Order mein GPO individual gun ko gun correction pass karta
hain. Jis ko No 1 har bar elevation mein (jo upper (i) mein diya gaya hain)
samil karta hain :-

(aa) MV Correction.

(ab) Position Correction.

(ac) Jump with reverse sign.

(ad) True angle of sight aur range ke against range table se false
angle of sight padho.

7. Agar OP officer shoot ke dauran low angle se high angle (ya is se ulta) ka order
karta hain to niche likha tarika istemal kiya jayega.

(a) Agar jarrurat hain to new charge workout kiya jayega .

(b) Line ke liye drift ke karan jo tabdili hue hain use pass kiya jayega.

(c) Reduction se prediction nahi kiya jayega jab tak koi error nahi milta during
the ranging.

(d) False A/S concerned charge ke graph C se dekha jayega aur new A/S ke
taur per pass kiya jayega.

(e) GPO fresh time of flight ki report dega.

SECTION 43 - CREST CLEARANCE

GENERAL

1. Definitions

(a) Occupied Crest. Koi crest jo FDLS ki general line mein hain weh own
troops ne occupy kiya hain ya nahi ,ya jisko “occupied” nominate kiya gaya hain.

(b) Unoccupied Crest. Koi crest jo FDLS ke aage hain ya jisko “unoccupied”
nominate kiya gaya hain.

(c) Standard Safety Factor. Agar ek crest ko rounds hit karne ka mana hua
khatra spasht ho, tab kisi ek equipment ke kisi ek charge mein jo amount range mein
joda jaye jis se crest ko round hit karne ka khatra na rahe, yeh amount us charge ki
sabhi range ke liye saman hain aur iski value range table aur crest clearance graph
mein di gayi hain. Occupied crest ke under , trajectory ko B se nazdik nahin karna
chahiye. Isme A’,B' Standard Safety Factor hain . Un occupied crest mein reduced
factor ko use karega aur is factor ko jarrurat parne per reduce kiya jayega. Yaad rahe
ki isse hamen jyada rounds crest per aur kam rounds tgt per aayega. Occupied crest
ke acceptable rds 0.05%, aur unoccupied crest ke 0.2%hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
128

C
B

A’
B’

Figure 10 - STANDARD SAFETY FACTOR

2. Crest Clearence problem mein main three aspects hain jo is prakar hain.

(a) Jab gun posn ko selection karte hain to guns LTSDT tak fire karne ke kabil
aur overlap charge hone chahiye.

(b) Gun se aise AD per fire nahi kare jis se woh occupied crest per hit ho jaye.

(c) Yojna ke dauran Cdr ko yeh malum hona chahiye ki konsa area ko hum
engage nahi kar pate hain, aur uske liye bty dead ground trace prepare karte
hain.

Crest Clearence ki Jimmedari

3. Har ek gun ke No 1 ki jimmewari hain ki gun ki trajectory samne kisi bhi

immediate crest ko clear kar rahi hain Eg. A tree,. House ya apna aircraft.

4. The GPO is Responsible :-

(a) Bty posn select karta hain, jo crest clearance ke hisab se sahi hone
chahiye.

(b) Us charge ka minimum safe AD malum karna taki hum occupied crest aur
unoccupied crest ko clear kar sake.

(c) Yeh ensure karna ki guns kabhi aise AD per fire nahi kare taki woh
occupied crest mein hit ho jaye.

(d) Prep of bty dead ground trace.

5. OP officer kisi bhi rukawat ke nature aur height ke bare mein GPO ko inform
karne ka jimmewar hain jaise OP area men koi tree ya building ya crest jinke karan in
crests ki height inki effective height map men darshain gai height se jyada dikhain deti
ho. OP officer apni battery ko kinhi khas targets ko engage karne ki sambhavna ke bare
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
129
men supported arms commander dwara puche gaye sawalon ka jawab dene ke liye
taiyar rahe. Koi bhi shanka hone par use GPO ki madad leni chahiye. Kisi crest ko
clear karne mein use takrane ka danger hone par change of charge se sambandit rules
Chapter 1 mein dekhein.

Crest Clearance Calculation – General

6. Crest clearance calculations ko hal karne ke liye niche methods diya gaya hain :-

(a) Crest Clearance Table. Crest clearance point of view se gun posn
suitable hain ya nahi yeh malum karne ke liye use hota hain.

(b) Comparison of Angle of Departure. CC Graph available nahi hain to tgt

crested hain ya nahi malum karne ke liye iska use karte hain.

(c) Crest Clearance Graphs. Bty CP men safe AD malum karne ke liye aur
gun ko pass karne wali bg, elev safe hain ya nahi yeh malum karne ke liye use
karte hain.

(d) Angle of Departure Charts. Minimum safe AD ko malum karne ke liye

aur bty dead grnd trace banana ka aadesh dene ke liye iska use karte hain.
(dekhen DUAI 1/75, Bhag-1).

7. Upar diye gaye tarike (b) (c) aur (d) men adhik MV wali gun battery ke kisi target
par engage karne ya nahi karne ka pata lagane men mahatavpurn samjhi jati hain.
Jahan kewal ek hi gun se engage kiya jana hain, sabse kam MV wali gun crest
clearance ke liye sahi mani jati hain.

Crest Clearance Table

8. Crest clearance table mein har ek charge ke liye alag alag diya gaya hain. Jiska
istemal ham gun posn select karne men karte hain. Isme crest ka alag – alag rg & A/S
diya hain. Crest ko clear karne ke liye minimum safe range niche likhe conditions men
diya gaya hain :-

(a) Jab firing zero A/S par kar rahe hon.

(b) Jab met conditions std hon.
(c) Jab gun ki MV range table MV ke saman ho.
9. Agar tgt area ka A/S zero se jyada ya kam ho to tgt ki A/S ko adjust karne ke liye
kuch allowance lagate hain. Eg. Agar tgt area ki A/S one degree (20 mils) elevation hain
to crest ki effective A/S one degree (20 mils) decreased hogi ya ulta hoga.
10. Gun LTSDT ko cover kar rahi ya nahi isko GPO niche likhe process se pata kar
sakta hain :-
(a) Crest ka A/S rough method se pata karta hain eg. Hand se, Protractor &
Plum bomb se.
(b) Crest ka estimated range workout karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
130
(c) LTSDT, line of fire mein crest ko jahan par cut kar raha hain wahan map
par pt lagata hain.
(d) Us pt ka range aur A/S calculate karta hain. Kis lower ch men rg achieve
ho raha hain us ko note karta hain.
(e) Jo charge note kiya hain (d) us ke crest clearance table men check karta
hain:-
(i) Range to crest (b).
(ii) A/S to crest (a) minus A/S (d) & note minimum safe range.
(f) Jis eqpt se low and high angle dono men without special preparation fire
kar sakte hain us ko crest clearance se gun posn men koi problem nahi hain, aur
aise gun area jis se ham low angle se fire nahi kar sakte us ko ham unsuitable
nahi kah sakte.
11. Jab minimum safe range (e) LTSDT ki range se kam ho (d).
12. Example105/37mm IFG.

(a) A of S to crest .................. 10ºE

(b) Liberal estimate of range to crest .................. 1000

meters

(c) Range to LTSDT (charge 2) .................. 4600

meters

(d) A of S to LTSDT .................. 2ºD

..

(e) Minimum safe range to crest at charge 2 .................. 4500

corresponding to range 1000 meters and A of S meters
(10ºE – 2ºD) = 12ºE

Is men LTSDT ki range crest clear ki minimum safe range se jyada hain. Is liye gun
posn crest clearance ki lihaj se suitable hain (in low angle fire.

12. Charges ke beech men Overlap. Yadi crest aise hain ki ek charge ki minimum
safe range uske next lower charge ki maximum rg se jyada hain to woh tgts, joki is dono
ranges ke beech hon hum engage nahi kar sakte. Gun posn select karte samay GPO
crest clearance table se critical crest ko clear karne ke liye safe range dekhta hain.
GPO us charge ke minimum safe range aur agle lower charge ke maximum range ke
beech 1000 mtr ka overlap rakhta hain. Yeh samashya pahadi ilakon men kuch charges
men aati hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
131

CH 2 MAX RG

CH 3 MIN RG

CAN NOT BE ENGAGED

FIGURE 11 (a)

Ch 3 Min safe Rg
Ch 2 MaxRg

OVERLAP

FIGURE 11 (b)

Comparison of Angle of Departure

13. In procedure mein prevailing conditions mein crest ko clear karne ke liye angle of
departure aur tgt ke angle of departure ko compare kiya jata hain. Crest ka range aur
A/S map se nikala jata hain.

14. Niminlikhit allowance ko angle of departure to crest aur target ke liye apply kiya
jata hain :-

(a) C of M.
(b) Projectile correction if any.
(c) Non – rigidity correction.
(d) MV correction.
(e) Additional safety factor proximity fuze ke liye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
132
15. Yeh tarika table XIX men diya gaya hain.

TABLE XIX 105/37 IFG CHARGE 2 (MV 307 M/S)

Ser Crest Target

(a) (b) (c) (d)
1. Map range 3300 5400
2. Standard safety factor(own troops dwara occupied kiya crest) 750
3. (1) plus (2) for crest 4050
4. A of S (at range 1) +90 +40’
5. C of M (at range 1) +287 +482
6. Standard predicted horizontal range (SPHR) (3) plus (5) for crest (1) 4337 5882
plus (5) for target
7. Projectile correction for range 6 Nil Nil
8. Predicted Horizontal range (PHR) (6) plus (7) 4337 5882
9. Non rigidity correction for range (8) and A of S (4) +145 +20
10. Predicted range (PR) (8) plus (9) 4482 5902
11. Corresponding Angle of Projection 17058’ 26038’
12. MV correction at range (11) -1016’ -2014’
13. AP + MV correction 16042’ 24024’
14. Plus A of S (1) +90 +40’
15. Angle of departure 25042’ 25004’

Safe angle of departure crest ko clear karne ke liye target ke angle of departure se jyada
hain isliye target ko safe tarike se engage nahi kiya ja sakta.

Crest Clearance Graphs

16. GPO har ek charge ka minimum safe angle of departure nikalne ka jimmewar
hain jo ki para 3(b) (ii) mein mention kiya huva crest ke anusar hain.

17. Procedure. GPO map ko padhta hain aur us crest ko chunta hain jo sabse
uncha ho. General men hamne dekha ki crest ke sabse unche bhag ko clear karna
muskil hain. Phir bhi kai bar highest crest ke bajay neeche wala crest clear karna muskil
ho jata hain. Aise doubtful case men AD chart ki madad se crest aur critical point ko
draw kiya jata hain.

18. Figure 12(a) jab crest A aur target `T’ hain to bina kisi problem ke crest ko clear
kar sakte hain, par crest `B’ usse chota hain jise clear nahi kar sakte. Yeh pt jo clear
karna bahut hi mushkil hain ise critical pt kahte hain.

AA CRITICAL
BB POINT

C T

Figure 12 (a) CREST WHERE CRITICAL POINT IS NOT THE HIGHEST POINT

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
133

T1 T2

B
A
Figure 12 (b) CREST WHERE CRITICAL POINT IS THE HIGHEST POINT

19. Crest clearance graph se `Crest Range’ niche diye gaye tarike se workout kiya
jayega:-

(a) GPO sabhi crest problem pts ko map par mark karega.

(b) Is map par bty centre plot karega aur sabhi ka bg aur range har pt se
measure karega. Agar crest gun area se dikhain de sakta hain to Bg director ya
gun ki madad se li jayegi.

(c) Jitne bhi highest pt hain unke bg aur range (b) ke dwara critical pt ka
height nikala jayega aur A of S calculate ki jayegi. Agar crest gun area se visible
hain to A of S director aur gun ki madad se nikali jayegi.

(d) Jo (b) par range mila hain usme har ek charge ke liye jo safety factor hain
use add karo. Jo range aata hain usme NR aur bty ki fastest MV gun ki MV ka
allce add karo.

(e) Jo data (c) aur (d) par mila hain use graph par set karo jo ke detail men
DUAI-1/75 Bhag II men diya gaya hain.

20. Table XX men is calculation se kiya gaya data ko dkhaya gaya hain.

TABLE XX : EQPT 105/37 IFG

1. Bearing 3150 3210
2. Charge 2 3 4 2 3 4
3. MV of fastest gun (m/s) 296 367 472
0 0
4. A/S to crest 5E 5E 50E
5. Map range to crest 5000 5000 5000
6. Standard Safety Factor 750 700 750
7. 5+6 5750 5700 5750
8. NR for A/S (4) and range (7) +155 +90 +42
9. Crest range (7) + (8) 5905 5840 5792

21. Aam taur par line ke liye sirf ek hi crest occupied hota hain (chahe visible ho ya
na ho) usi ko graph par plot kiya jata hain lekin yadi same bearing men do occupied

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
134
crest hon aur us mein ek crest clearance ke liye jyada problem ho, dusra C of M lagane
par ho to us case mein dono crest graph par plot kiya jayega.

Choice of Charge

22. GPO charge select karta hain par jab close target engage kar raha hain tab OP
offr hi charge nominate karega. Charge ki choice normally range to target aur crest
clearance problem ko dekhte hue ki jati hain.

Dead Ground Traces

23. Mountainous countries men regimental ya artillery brigade Headquarters yeh

janna chahta hain ki kon sa area ham crest ke karan engage nahi kar sakte. Tab Adjt
GPO ko us area ka dead ground trace banana ka kam deta hain. Har ek charge ka area
alag – alag rangon se dikhaya jata hain. Yadi sambhav ho to colour code crest
clearance graph ke anusar hona chahiye.

Charge 1 ………… Red

Charge 2 ………… Black

Charge 3 ………… Blue

Charge 4 ………… Orange

Charge 5 ………… Green

Charge 6 ………… Purple

Charge 7 ………… Yellow

Charge Super ………… Brown

24. Dead ground trace banana ek bahut jyada laborious kaam hain, jarurat hone par
hi aadesh dena chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
135
SECTION 44 - BASIC DRILLS AND CHECKS IN THE COMMAND POST

General

1. CP mein kaam ko organise karna GPO ki jimmedari hain. GPO ko `TAs’ ke kam
men khud shamil nahi hona chahiye, uski primary duty hain ki woh lagatar aur samajdari
se TAs ko supervise kare, usne kaam ko check karta hain aur guns ko aadesh deta
hain.

Command Post Shooting Form (CPSF)

2. OP se jo bhi aadesh aate hain weh operator ke pad men likhe jate hain, aur weh
orders jo TAs ke liye lagu hain wahi CPSF men likhe jayenge. Eg. Indication of target,
grid correction, details of Linears & smoke screens etc.

Basic Drills

3. Basic command post men basic drill jo ki GPO aur TA2 & TA3 ke beech men
battery target ke liye hoti hain veh table XXI ke mutabik hain .

TABLE XXI – BASIC DRILLS

Ser From OP GPO TA 3 TA 2

1. Nature Det ko take post karega.
of target Nature of tgt ka order karega.
2. Initial Suitable charge ko chunta GR ko arty board TA 3 se Bg aur
orders hain. CC problem check par plot karta range leta hain.
karta hain. TA3 par visual hain. Map data C of M,
check rakhta hain, jaise hi nikalta hain.C of projectile corrn,
data mil jata hain guns ko M aur corrections A/S aur NR
aadesh pass karta hain. ko use karte hue workout karta
data ko predict hain
karta hain.
3. “Fire” Is order par GPO, OP ko
shot ki report ke sath time of
flight bhi deta hain aur adjt ko
batayega. 23 engaging
tgt….. description………..
4. Ranging Observer ke orders par amal Tgt grid corrn plot Jab tak tgt
and fire karta hain. Guns ko order karta hain switch record na ho
for effect pass karta hain aur deri se nikalkar range ke tab tak shoot ki
bachte hue jaldi action leta sath CPSF men karwahi men
hain. likhta hain. hissa nahi leta.
5. Shoot ka Jab tgt record karna ho,
khatam Jiska procedure tgt record
hone par men hota hain . Order stand
easy deta hain. Shoot ke
result ki report adjt ko deta
hain aur CP log men bharta
hain.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
136
Checks

4. Target ka GR

(a) GPO operator ke pad ko check karta hain aur yakeen karta hain ki usne
repeat back kiya hua aur likha hua ek saman hain.

(b) GPO check karta hain ki TA 3 ne GR ko sahi square men plot kiya hain.

5. Deduction of Map Data

(a) TA 3 arty board se data padhta hain aur CPSF pad par entry karta hain.

(b) GPO check karta hain ki likha hua sahi hain aur gross error ke liye visual
check rakhta hain.

(c) GPO aur TA 2 swayam alag alag A of S nikalte hain.

6. Aadeson ko Pass Karna

(a) GPO dwara pass kiya gaya har order TA CPSF par likhta hain.

(b) Yadi aadesh pass karne men koi galti hui hain to artillery board par maujud
TA mistake ko batata hain.

(c) Har orders ko No 1 aur Tp Ldr acknowledge karte hain.

7. OT Bearing aur Target Grid Corrections ko Plot karna

(a) GPO visually check karta hain ki OT bearing TA dwara sahi plot kiya gaya
hain.

(b) GPO mentally switch workout karta hain aur guns ko pass karta hain.
Ranging ke dauran elevation aur fire for effect ke dauran nature of fire pass karne
se pahle yakeen karta hain ki pass kiya gaya switch TA dwara arithmetic tarike
se nikale switch se milta hain.

(c) Pure shoot men GPO “common sense” check rakhta hain, eg. drop 800 ke
correction mein range par 800 mtr se jyada change nahi ho sakta.

8. Recording a Target. Gun se aaye hue data aur CPSF ke data ko GPO tally
karta hain. Agar koi badlao hain to pahle tp ldr se gun ko check karwata hain aur phir
badlav rahta hain to gun ke data ko accept karta hain. Usi samay agar koi change hain
to kis tarah ka change aur kitna change hain is ka report OP ko deta hain aur op ke
action ka intazar karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
137
SECTION 45 - DETECTION OF ERRORS IN THE GUN POSITION

1. CP ya gun dwara kiya gaya har ek galti ko gun posn par pata kar sakte hain.

Gun Errors

2. Gun par koi error hone par niche diye gaye procedure mutabik drill hoga.

3. For Line Check.

(a) Kya sahi bearing/ bearing centre sight par lagaya gaya hain.

(b) Layer ne sahi GAP ka istemal kiya hain aur GAP / collimator par sahi lay
kiya hain.

(c) Dial sight apne socket men sahi tarah se clamp hain.

(d) Main scale ke GAP reading ke niche slipping scale se C of A bearing sahi
tarah se clamp ki gai hain.

Ya

(e) Kahin collimator move to nahi kiya hain, iske liye correct switch C/A se
note karo.

(f) Sight ko GAP par lay karo aur angle note karo. Current switch aur
recording plate ka angle ka antar 1 mils / 5 minutes men hona chahiye.

(g) Agar (a) se (d) tak sab kuch sahi hain to to quick alignment sight test kiya
jayega. Agar isme bhi theek hain to ‘check bg’ drill carry out ki jayegi.

4. For Elevation and A of S (Guns with non – Calibrating Sights). Check :-

(a) Kya sahi charge load kiya gaya hain.

(b) Kya gun rule sahi charge ke liye aur sahi tarah se istemal kiya gaya hain.

(i) MV (charge aur nature of propellant).

(ii) A of S.

(iii) Range.

(c) Kya sahi QE nikala gaya hain aur elevation scale / field clinometers par
sahi apply kiya gaya hain.

(d) Kya A of S scale sahi set hain.

(e) Agar (a) se (c) tak sahi hain to quick elevation sight test kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
138
CP Errors

5. CP Error ka Karan pata karne ke liye. Check :-

(a) OPR ke pad se OP offr ka order CPSF par sahi sthanantrit kiya gaya hain.

(b) Kya CPSF arithmetically sahi complete kiya gaya hain.

(c) Kya section 44 men diya gaya basic CP drill aur checks sahi tarah se kiya
gaya hain.

(d) OPR ke pad par likha hua order gun ko pass kiya aur woh sahi check
istemal kar raha hain.

Kisi Galti Hone ka Pata Lagne par Karwahi

6. Line aur elevation error milne par tp ldr, yadi gun observed shoot ya programme
shoot par engage kar rahi hain to action is prakar leta hain :-

(a) Agar gun se fire nahi hua hain to galti ko sahi karega.

(b) Yadi gun ne fire kar diya hain.

(i) Observed Shoot. Ranging ke dauran woh error ka size aur kis
tarah ka error hain iski report GPO ko dega. (eg. “Line error at 2, 2 fired at
bg 315 degree” or “ Elevation error at 3, 3 fired at 6800”). Aur GPO ke agle
aadesh ka intejar karega. FFE ke dauran weh nirdharit gun ko `Stop’
dega, galti ko durust karayega aur fire ko jari karega, sath hi GPO ko iske
bare men batayega.

(ii) Programme Shoot. Weh nirdharit gun ko “stop” dega, galti ko

durust karayega aur gun ko fire mein shamil karayega, sath hi GPO ko iski
report dega.

7. Agar koi line galti aur elevation galti hone par jis gun se fire kiya hain weh GPO
ko report dega aur yadi gola girne se galat ganana nikal sakti hain to OP offr ko bhi
jankari dega sath hi kis tarah ki galti hain aur kitni badi galti hai iski bhi jankari dega aur
agle aadesh ka intazar karega.

8. Report milne par op officer karwahi niche diye gaye procedure ke anusar karega
:-

(a) Aadesh “Accept, Repeat” ya “Accept” aur jis gun ne tgt grid corrn ke sath
fire kiya hain aur weh corrn ke satah round acceptable hain. Yadi aadesh “accept”
milta hain to GPO pichle round fire kiye gaye ko sahi manta hain aur shoot ko
aage badhata hain.

(b) Aadesh `sahi hone par information do’ is aadesh par GPO gun ko stop
pass karega, galti ko durust kiya jayega aur “………. Now correct” ki information
OP ko dega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
139
(c) Yadi galti wali gun ranging gun hain to karwahi para 8(b) ke anusar karega
aur niche diye gaye orders ko follow karega :-

(i) Dusri gun ko aadesh dega aur galti wali gun ko sahi karayega.
Sahi hone par pass karega eg. “Correct”.

(ii) Aadesh “parallel line to …….”(the ranging gun). Yeh order regt ya
higher concentration lagu nahin hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
140

CHAPTER –III

FIRE KO ADJUST KARNE AUR OBSERVATION KARNE KA TARIKA

SECTION 46 - GENERAL

Observation ki Technique

1. Observer ke pass observation mein madad karne ke liye equipment aur

instruments ki puri sreni maujud hain. Observation din ke samay aur raat ke samy jari
rah sakti hain. OP dal ke sabhi sadashye duty ke kabil hone chahiye. Raat ke samay ki
observation ko maddenazar rakhte hue duties ko overlap rakhna chahiye. Jab tak
observer ki aankhon ka effect kam na ho jata hain yeh over lap utna jarurat ke anusar
hona chahiye.

2. Yeh jaruri hain ki har ek observer ko observation ke zone ki jankari honi chahiye.
Silence registration ke process men zone ke bare men jankari rakhna OP aur OPA ko
waqfiyat mein madad karta hain. Har OP ko apni duty se pahle map mein zone ka aur
tgt map ka abhyas karna chahiye.

Recording and Passage of Information

3. Data grahan karne aur record karne ek lagatar chalne wali karwahi hain, jo
silence registration aur firing ke dwara prapt kiya jata hain. Jaise hi information milti hain
use jaise hi sambhav ho sake pass karna chahiye aur niminlikhit par note karna chahiye
:-

(a) Shooting map par.

(b) Target map par.

(c) OP log mein.

4. Shooting Map. Shooting map kam se kam 1 : 50000 ki scale par hona chahiye.
Jaise hi koi info milti hain niche di gai details map par ankit karni chahiye. Agar yeh
sambhawna ho ki yeh map dushman ke hat lag jata hain to yeh marking security ke lihaz
se mark hona chahiye :-

(a) Sabhi gun ki position ya deployment areas jahan se weh fire call kar sakta
hain aur arc of fire kisi bhi tarah ki range limitations ke sath.

(b) Apne forward troops ki position.

(c) Recorded targets, dushman ki guns, mor ki posn and so on.

5. Target Map. Yeh recorded shooting map ki tarah design kiya gaya hain. Isme
pura 4(c) aur anya details ke bare men information rakhte hain.

6. OP Log. Dushman ki information, sabhi fired target aur badi tac information jo
future plans, movements OP log mein record karni chahiye. Yeh information sitrep se

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
141
mila kar OP log men hona chahiye. Yeh ek observer se dusre observer ko hastanantran
men madad karti hain.

7. Passage of Information. Dushman ke bare men sabhi jaruri information ko jaldi

se jaldi bina koi deri ke report dena chahiye aur dusri samanya information ka record
rakhna chahite aur samay milne par pass karna chahiye. Niche di gai report hamesha
pass ki jayengi :-

(a) Apne aage ke troops ki harkat ki suraksha ka yakeen karna jab target
engage ho raha ho.

(b) Har ek target jisko engage kiya ja raha hain uska description aur parinam
bhi pass karna chahiye.

(c) Sabhi tarah ki hostile shelling, mortaring, air attacking aur toxic attacks ko
shell report / mortar report mein diya jayega.

Preparation for the Engagement of Targets

8. Silent Registration. Silent registration ke tarike se target ka data bina kisi firing
ke nikalte hain. Yeh observer ko targets engage karne mein madad karta hain. Map ke
upar zone ko record kiya jata hain. Is ko niche likhe process se kiya jata hain :-

(a) Map ko align karo. Jamin ke upar main features ko dekho aur pahchano.

(b) Map par aur ground mein apne own troops ki position aur dushman ki sthiti
ko locate karo.

(c) Yeh observation ke jariye arc limit, guns ka range aur general line of fire ko
jamin par pahchano.

(d) Alag alag points ko select karo jo zone ko breadth aur depth mein cover
karte hue yeh target indication mein istemal karte hain. In points ka OT bearing,
distance aur grid reference workout karte hue target record men record rakho.

(e) Crest line aur dead ground ko ground par dekho.

9. Silent registration ka data OPA ke sath check karen, silent registration ka process
kabhi khatam nahi hota.

10. Fire se Zone ka Registration Karna. Yadi tactical halat hamare ko permit karte
hain to firing ke dwara zone ko register karna chahiye. Acche mapped area mein silent
registration ke gross galti ko check karna. Badly mapped area mein data firing ke dwara
hi nikala ja sakta hain. Point ko as a target record kiya jayega aur GPO uska GR nikal ke
OP ko pass karega. Is point ko shooting map aur tac map par mark kiya jayega. Is case
mein OP ka order hoga “Single gun tgt regn” aur description hoga “Regn of a zone”.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
142
SECTION 47 - TARGET KA INDICATION

Introduction

1. Observer ko target jaldi aur sahi tarike se indicate karna iska main aim hain. Yeh
tarika depend karta hain ki aapsi milap sambhav hain ya nahi. Tgt ko check back karna
ya yakeen karna hain ke observer ne tgt ko sahi pahchana hain.

Indication ke Tarike

2. OP par niche likhe tarike ya inke combination se target indicate kiya jata hain :-

(a) Un sabhi halat mein jab aapsi milap sambhav hain ya nahi, tab:-

(i) Grid ref aur height se.

(ii) Salvo fire karke, smk ya tracer rd fire karke.

(iii) Hawai chitra se.

(b) Jab aapsi milap sambhav ho, tab :-

(i) Vertical clock ke tarike se.

(ii) Kisi optical yantra ko stand par mount karke ya Pointer staff ki
madad se.

3. Reference Point. Kisi bhi operation mein jitni jaldi possible ho reference point un
sabhi ke beech agreed ho jana chahiye jo target indication ke liye jarurat pad sakti hain.
Inko naam ya number diya jayega taki asani se refer kiya ja sake. Yeh koi prominent
feature, dushman ki jani pehchani jagah, pahle engage kiya hua target ya firing dwara
point indicate kiya ja sakta hain.

Vertical Clock Method

4 Vertical method us samay istemal kiya jata hain jab tgt ko ref pt se indicate
karna ho .Fig 13 main iske method ka principle darshaya gaya hain. Observer ki eyes
point A ke tree par lane ke liye indication hoga :-

“Reference point Lal makan nichla bhag dahina kinara, dahne do baje, do degree,
LONE TREE”.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
143

20

Figure 13 - VERTICAL CLOCK

Checking back Target.

5. Jab observer ko tgt indicate kar diya jata hain, wah usko is tarah check back
karega :-

(a) Target ke kuch features ko describe karta hain.

(b) Vertical clock method. Jo tgt ya uska part aap ko dikhaya gaya hain
usko ref pt manlo. Phir koi dusra object short distance ke ander jo binocular ke
field of view ke ander hain check back karo.

Measuring the Angle

6. Angle ko is tarah measure kiya ja sakta hain :-

(a) Binoculars, jo accuracy ki jarrurat hain, Ref Pt & Tgt dono close aur
binoculars ke field of view mein hain.

(b) Hand for angle ( over 6 deg 120 mils) jab unmistakable object ko indicate
karna ho ya observer object ka general area indicate kar raha ho.

7. Measuring by Binocular. Binoculars ke field of view ke centre mein horizontal

graticule mark kiya gaya hain.

(a) Horizontal. Graticule ke beech anter 30 Minutes (10 mils)

(b) Vertical

(i) Large centre graticule …………… 1 deg (20 mils)

(ii) Middle size graticule …………… 30 min (10 mils)

(iii) Small size graticule …………… 15 Min (5 mils)

8. Hath se Napna. Hath ki muthi se 19 deg tak ka angle napa ja sakta hain. Sabi
troops ko apne hath ko calibrate karna chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
144
Guns ko Target Indicate Karna

9. Initial order ke dwara OP gun ko tgt indicate karta hain kyon ki bearing, angle of
sight aur range pahle round ke liye pata ki ja sakti hain. Iske liye nimlikhit procedure ka
istemal karte hain.

(a) Six Figure Grid Reference aur Height “123456, height 150 Meters”
Agar tgt recorded nahi hain to sabse achha tarika yeh hain ki eight figure GR tab
istemal kiya jata hain jab observer fire ko adjust karna nahi chahta hain. eg fire
plan.

(b) Target letter aur Number. Tgt recorded hone par eg “ tgt M 3541” yeh
sabse achha tarika hain, jab sabi CP mein target recorded hain to.

(c) Record kiye Huye Target se Correction Dekar. Ek tgt jo record kiya
huwa hain uske najdik dusre target hone par record kiya huwa target se ek
correction ke sath indicate karega. Eg “Target M 4502 Oscar 160 Right 200 Add
500 Up 50 mtr”. Iska niyam is prakar hain :-

(i) OT bearing naye target ka istemal karega.

(ii) Agar height ka correction hone par correction ke sath “UP ya

Down……… “ pass kiya jayega.

(iii) Agar new target purane recorded target se 500 mtr se jyada door
hain to us case mein iska istemal nahi kiya jayega.

10. Safety ya dead ground ke karan se target ke upper fire karna desirable nahi hota
hain major aise point par fire karo joki safe ya dikhain de. Target ke correct grid
reference pass kiye jayenge jisse target ki tactical information correct hogi aur tgt record
jyada complicated nahi hoga. Issi dauran tgt ka indication upar diye Para 9 (a) ke
mutabik OT bearing aur jaruri grid correction dekar kiya jata hain. e.g ….
“Tgt…..Oscar….ADD…”

Air Photographs

11. Yeh principle OP Officer ko Map ko supplementing ya replacing karne ke liye

istemal kiya jata hain.Vertical air photo graph Oblique air photo graph se achha mana
jata hain, kyonki plan view map aur ground ke sath compare kiya ja sakte hain.

12. FOO ke briefing ke liye oblique air photo graph istemal kiye jate hain. kyonki is
photo main ground ek najdik angle se dikha sakte hain. Yeh photo air OP ke liye sabse
achha hain. Jab tak ki kam ht se na li gayi ho yeh photo weh ilake ko dikata hain jo ki
ground se pata nahi lagte.

13. Air Photo se target indicate karne ka tarike is prakar hain.

(a) Dono type ke photograph grided kiye huve hain. Is grid lines ki madad se
target ka grid reference malum kar sakte hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
145
(b) Air photographs mein record kiya huwa targets aur uska number annotated
kiya ja sakta hai.

(c) Yadi Vertical air photographs base line kiya huwa hain aur block plot bhi
prepare kiya huwa hain, accurate fixation is mein radial plot method se obtain
kiya ja sakhta hain.

SECTION 48 - ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE

Introduction

1. Adjustment of fire woh process hain jis se firing kar ke ek tgt ko engage karne ke
liye correct gun data pata karna hain. Iske stages is prakar hain:-

(a) Ranging gun ko target ke upper adjust karo.

(b) Fire unit ka MPI/MPB adjust karo.

2. Fire ko correct karne ke orders :-

(a) Target grid correction.

(b) Height of burst (HOB) ko correction dekar.

Ranging ke Niyam

3. Ranging ka rules is prakar hain :-

(a) Ranging point ko select karna.

(b) Ref line ke madad se range ko adjust karo.

(c) Long bracket ko reference line ki madad se estabilish karo.

(d) Bracket ko tab tak split karo jab tak target round ya short bracket nahi
achieve hota.

(e) MPI / MPB ko adjust karo.

4. Target grid correction ka order ref line ke relation mein, positive info milne par
order kiya jata hain. Yeh is prakar hain :-

(a) Line observer to target (OT) (sabse common hain).

(b) The line guns to target (BT).

(c) Ek line jo ki jameen ke par do point ke beech se gujarti ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
146
Adjustment for Line

5. Line OT se round door girne par usko ek angle ke taur par durust napa ja sakta
hain.Yeh OT distance ke anusar badali ho jata hain.Yeh OT distance 1 degree (10 Mils )
1000 mtr par subtend karta hain. iske rules is prakar hain :-

(a) Correction accurately workout kiya jata hain aur round off 25 mtr mein
guns ko pass kiya jata hain.

(b) Agar round tgt se over/short ya Add/Drop corrn dene ke bad Op Officer OT
factor ko change karta hain.

(c) Large appex angle mein adjust karne ke tarika section 48 mein diya gaya
hain.

6. Line correction workout karne ke liye OT factor istemal karne ka tarika.

R2 T2 1500 METERS
OT Factor = 25 METERS

R1 T1 1000 METERS
OT Factor = 17 METERS

2º

Figure 14 - Line Corrections

7. Notes :-

(a) T1 aur T2 OP se alag alag duri par do targets hain.

(b) R1 aur R2 do rounds hain jo ki T1 aur T2 par OT line se 20 deg door gira
hain.

(c) R1 ke liye corrn jab (T) mein fire karne ke liye T1=2X17M= RIGHT 25.

(d) R2 ke liye corrn jab T2 per fire karne ke liye T2=2X25m=50=> RIGHT 50.

Adjustment for Range

8. Range ko adjust karne ke liye niminlikhit tarike available hain :-

(a) Bracketing.

(b) Stop watch.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
147
(c) Cross observation.

(d) Ladder procedure.

(e) Locating devices.

(f) Integrated OP Equipment (IOE).

(g) Laser Range Finder (LRF).

Bracketing Method

9. Ankhon se tgt ka distance actual nap nahi sakte hain. Is liye line OT per round ko
adjust karne ke liye bracketing ka tarika istemal karte hain. Ek bracketing establish karte
hain tab ek round over aur ek round short milne per usko short bracket tak split karta
hain. Bracketing ka rule is prakar hain :-

(a) Long bracket ka size OT distance, ground ki command aur OP officer ke

zone se wakfiyat aur apne troops ki safety par nirbhar karti hain. Samanyatah
long bracket 400 meter ka hota hain. Lekin 200 ya 800 ke bracket kam men laye
ja sakte hain. Long bracket ka hona aur target par “creep” hone ke bajay bahut
bade bracket ka aadesh dena behtar hota hain, Basharte jyada se jyada two
corrections ke results, round wastage kiye bina aur bina time lagaye target
bracket men rakha jaye.

(b) Long bracket establish hone per tgt round ya short bracket achieve hone
tak ise aadha kiya jata hain. Normal short bracket 100mtr tak ka hota hain jabki
larger concentration ke liye 200 meter aur larger concentration ke liye 400 meter
se kam ka bracket lagana kabhi bhi sahi nahi rahta.

10. Bracketing Procedure Ka Example Niche Fig 15 Mein Diya Gaya Hain,

T
T

Figure - 15 BRACKETING PROCEDURE

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
148
Round Observation Correction
1. Over DROP 400
2. Short (long bracket established) ADD 200
3. Over DROP 100
4. Over (short bracket established) DROP 50 (1 round gunfire)

11. Agar kisi stage mein OP Offrs ko tgt round milne per adjustment of MPI kiya jata
hain.

12. Double Correction. Double corrn tab diya jata hain jab line aur range ke
liye positive ho time ki bachat karne ke liye.

13. Adjustment for Height. Agar shoot ke dauran, tgt ki ht malum huya ki galat
work out kiya hain to usko correct kiya jayega UP/DN ka order deker.

Stop Watch Method

14. Principle. Jab kisi source flash ki nazar aati hain ( Dushman ki gun ho ya apna
ranging round) yeh dekha gaya hain ,observer ko crack speed of sound ka report milta
hain. Observation se distance measure karta hain. Interval liya jata hain jab se flash
nazar aaya aur bang jab suna gaya. Is liye jo distance OT=1030 / 3 X t meter, jab ki (+)
time hain interval ka flash to bang se bearing to the source liya jata hain. Jab prevailing
Surface Air temp accurate measure kiya ho.

15. Ranging round fire karke repeat or fix kiya jata hain. Uske bad fire ko niche diye
gaye tarike se adjust kiya jata hain.

(a) Observer ke mutabik lateral correction dekar.

(b) Range correction ke liye tgt ka OT distance aur do rng rd ke mean ka diff
pass hota hain.
Cross Observation Method
16. Is ka principal hain do point jinka location malum ho, jinki locations ka pata hota
hain, Do points par se ek dusre point ka bearing, jaise apna ranging round liya jata ho
tab yeh point intersection karke fix kiya jata hain. Do OP posts ke cross observation ke
adhar par Instrument Cross Observation se target grid correction graphic form men milta
hain. Dono OP se target par banne wala angle jaruri accuracy hasil karne ke liye
minimum 6 degree ka hona chahiye.
Ladder Procedure

17. Air OP Ladder. Yeh procedure khas taur par Air OP ki madad ke liye hota hain.
Kyonki air OP range ka anuman lagane men safal nahi ho pata hain. Phir bhi yadi OP
ki command acchi hain to ise ground OP se bhi kamyabi se lagaya ja sakta hain. Isse
samay ki bachat hoti hain. Is procedure men ranging ke dauran ek sath do salvos /
rounds ki firing shamil hoti hain, jisme aadesh kiye hue ladder ki aadhi doori upar –
niche banti jati hain. Inme se ek round / salvo se target ki position sahi – sahi napi ja
sakti hain aur OP samanya ranging chorkar MPI ki adjustment ke liye ja sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
149
18. Ground Ladder. Tgt ko teji se engage karne ke liye OP ke liye yeh ek dusra
procedure hain. Ek bar jab round line OT par mil jata hain (ya required correction ka
sahi anuman lagaya ja sake) to time OT sahit jaruri ladder ke sath battery fire ke ek
round ke liye aadesh deta hain. Bad ke do rounds ke beech ke bracket par jane par
“Stop” ka aadesh deta hain aur OP officer dwara MPI / MPB ki adjustment ki jati hain.

Adjustment by Locating Devices

19. Fire ka adjustment locating devices se bhi kiya ja sakhta hain. Jaise ki sound
ranging aur radar. Kam roshni ya anddhre men bhi inka stemal kiya ja sakta hain.

20. Sound adjustment. Isme sound ranging devices ka istemal kiya jata hain jaise
ya sound sources par fix adjust karne ke liye.

21. Radar Adjustment. Radar ka prayog karte hue fire ka adjustment is prakar kiya
ja sakta hain :-

(a) Direction of Own Artillery Fire (DOOAF).

(b) Trajectory Ranging.

22. Integrated OP Eqipment. Isme ek goniometer hota hain jo target se shot girne
par vertical aur horizontal deviation ko napta hain. Isme ek laser range finder bhi hota
hain jo target ka range aur shot ke girne ko mapta hain. Isme ek suvidha yeh hoti hain
ki raat ko aur aise samay mein jane se saaf dikhain nahi deta hain iske liye ek Night
Observation Device (NOD) lagaya ja sakta hain. Computerised IOEs ke sath correction
ko workout karke sidhe GPO ko pass kiya ja sakta hain.

SECTION 49 – OBSERVATION OF FIRE

1. Fire ke obseration par niminlikhit baton ka prabhav padta hain :-

(a) OP officer ki ground par command.

(b) OP officer, guns aur target ke beech ka angle (Apex angle).

(c) Target area men aur uske charo taraf ground ka slope.

Command of the Ground

2. OP officer dwara kisi bhi round se mili jankari uske ground par command par
nirbhar karti hain. Jitna adhik weh niche jamin men dekhta hain ya kisi pahadi ke samne
dekhta hain uski command utni behtar hoti hain. Jahan command behtar hoti hain
wahan yeh dekhna bhi asan hota hain ki round kahan girte hain, aise men pure
confidence ke sath double corrections pass ki ja sakti hain. Jahan command acchi nahi
hoti hain, wahan positive observation mushkil hoti hain. Aise halat mein doubtful
information se bachne ke liye savdhani baratni chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
150
Apex Angle

3. OP Officer shoot ke dauran amount of length zone par yadi dhyan nahi deta to
line ke liye use dhoke men dala ja sakta hain. Guns ka zone to ek jaisa bana rahta hain
jabki observer dwara dekhi gai kul duri, apex angle ke size ke sath badhti jati hain aur ek
lane ki tarah dikhain deti hain. Jaise ki figure 16 men dikhaya gaya hain. Apex angle
observer, target (OT) aur Battery Target (BT) par banne wala acute angle hain.

4. Jaise hi apex angle increase hota ahi, observer ko chahiye ki weh line OT par ek
lane ki tarah dhyan de. Use OT line ki taraf do ya do se adhik successive rounds se ek
jhukav sthapit karne ke bad hi correction order karni chahiye.

0-500 mils 500-800 mils 800-1100 mils 1100-1600 mils

or or or or
0-25 degrees 25-45 degrees 45-60 degrees 60-90 degrees
No range zone seen Half range zone seen Three quarters zone Full range zone seen
Line zone seen seen
(a) (b) (c) (d)

Figure 16 - THE AMOUNT OF ZONE SEEN

5. Amount of zone ko pata karne ka suggested method jo ki line OT ke kisi bhi aur
dekhi ja sakti hain (apparent zone), niche di gai hain :-

(a) Apex angle ko measure karo.

(b) Pata karo ki range zone kitna dikhain de raha hain - none, half, three
quarter aur full.

(c) Range table men 50 per cent length zone* range BT par dekho. (istemal
kiye jane wale charge ka pata CP dwara report kiye gaye time of flight se lagaya
ja sakta hain).

(d) Multiply (b) aur (c). Yeh weh zone hain jo line OT ke kisi ek taraf dekha
jayega.

(e) OT factor ka istemal karte hue (d) ko angle men badlo.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
151
(f) Example

(i) Apex Angle - 38 degree

(ii) Zone seen - Half

(iii) 50 % lamba zone BT range per - 50 meters

(iv) OT line ke dono side me dikhain dega - 25 meters

(v) OT (1500 mtr per) - 25 meters

(vi) Zone as angle (seen either side) - 1 degree

Note :- *1. AT Vol III,5/76 ke section 28 ke sub para 3 ko milakar dehe to, 82% round
50% length zone ke dono taraf girte hain. Yeh length zone OT lane ke chodai ke
liye prayapt hain.

2. Yeh dekhne mein aaya hain ki jo zone OT line ke dono taraf dikhain dega
woh prayapt hain. Is liye kewal lambai zone ko hi napte hain.

6. Large Apex Angle. Yeh dekhne mein aaya hain ki 25deg tak ke apex angle ke
parbhav ko chode diya jata hain. Parantu jab apex angle bada hota hain to iska parbhav
ulta hota hain. Jiske liye niche kuchh line di gai hain.

(a) Ek pahla gola jo line OT se door hain usko line ke liye najdik 50mtr tak sahi
karna hain.

(b) Jab koi gola, line OT ke upper hain aur nischit taur per upper aur niche ka
pata chalta hain. Uske liye range corrn ka order diya jayega.

(c) Jab koi round pahle round ko chhorker line OT se door hain , tab tak koi
corrn nahi di jayegi jab tak do ya jyada round ek taraf achhi tarah se nahi dekhle

(d) Jab kisi samay koi round line aur range dono ke liye dikhain deta hain, to
line aur range dono ke liye corrn di jayegi jab yeh malum chalta hain ki es se line
bhi adjust ho jayegi.

(e) Yadi koi round line OT se door hain aur range ke liye kuchh dikhain nahi
deta hain to us round ko sahi karne ke liye dobara fire karne ke liye order diya
jayega.

Slope

7. Pahari aur parvati ilake mein Tgt sansodhan corrn jo ki samtal plane per lagati
hain, Ground ke slope ki wajah se sahi parbhav nahi deta hain, Iske sath nimn parbhav
parte hain.

(a) Guns aur OP ke jagah ka rista.

(b) Dhalan ka sidhain numa hona.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
152
(c) Fire ki disha slope ko crosses kar rahi ho.

8. Is samashya ko Fig no 17 me dikhaya gaya hain.

CHANGE OF
TRAJECTORY

GUNS FIRING OVER THE OBSERVER

GUNS FIRING TOWARDS THE OBSERVER

Figure 17 - Effect of slope on Target Grid Corrections

(Cross Section View on Line OT/BT)
Note:- (a) OP officer ne pahla round RI per dekha aur corrn Drop 400 ka adesh diya
aur bracket banaya to round B per gira. Kyonki corrn samtal plane per lagaya to
round B ki bajaye BI par girega ya R2 per girega B per nahi.

(b) Jab OP officer T ki unchain ke barein mein puri tarah se sahmat hain to
usko height adjust karna chahiye.

9. Uniform dhalan per kisi tgt ko engage karte hain to niche likhe tarike ko range
correct karne ke liye bahut hi upyogi mana gaya hain.

(a) Pahle round ko line ke liye correct karna chahiye.

(b) Tgt se round kitna upper ya niche gira hain isko binocular ki madad se
napna chahiye

(c) Jo para B mein bino ki madad se observation padha hain uske viprite
range ke liye uchit corrn (ADD/DROP 400 ya 200) ka order karo.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
153
(d) Para (b) aur (c) mein agar koi displacement corrn ko sign ke sath plus,
minus karo.

(e) Agli corrn nimn prakar se adesh karo (last observation ke sign ko dhyan
mein rakho)

Pahle ka rg corrn X Last observation (sub para (C)

Range correction in mtr = -------------------------------------------------
Total round ke anusar displacement (sub para (d)

(f) Udharan

(i) Pahle round ka observation = +20

(II) Range corrn ka adesh = Drop 400

(iii) Doosre round ka observation = - 10

(iv) Displacement corrn = 30 (disregarding the sign)

(v) Displacement 3 degs correction 400 meters ke karan.

Displacement of 10 now required will be caused by = 400 x 1/3 = 133.3
meters

(vi) Agla corrn jo dena hain *Add 125 ** (meters)

Dhalan aur Large Apex Angle dono ka mila jula Parbhav

10. Jab Large Apex Angle aur dhalan dono sath hain to uska parinam is prakar
dekhne mein ata hain, Udharan, Jab jamin ka slope OP se door dhalte huye jata hain
aur apex angle jayada remarkable hain. OP officer line BT ke relation me slope ke effect
ko dekhta hain aur OT ke relation mein corrn nikalta hain . Is ka ek udharan niche Fig
No 18 me dikhaya gaya hain, woh bhi mahatav purn hain jab observer ke upper koi
samyeshya hoti hain to woh niche likhe tariko ka istemal karta hain :

(a) Line ko adjust karne ke liye corrn Add/ Drop ya uska ulta. Dono corrn (jaise
normal shoot me ) kabhi nahi dena hain yeh process kuchh dhire hain.

(b) Yadi jarrurat hain to tgt ke nazdik “ Oscar Bravo:” pass karo.

(c) Dhalan ke parbhav ka asar ko alag –alag do rounds 200-400mtr mein

karo.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
154

X R2
X R1

OP

Figure 18 - COMBINED EFFECT OF LARGE APEX ANGLE AND SLOPE

Notes :-
(a) OP ne round RI ko dekha aur tgt ka bracket karne ke liye “ Add400 “ ka
order kiya.

(b) Is corrn ka parbhav horizontal plane per dikhain diya aur Guns ne upper tgt
ke niche point kiya is liye round ko spur ne rok liya aur round R2 per gir
gaya.

(c) Correction ADD 400 ke sath uchit left corrn pass karne se round tgt per hit
hona tha.

(d) Upper likhe udharan mein yadi OP officer ne line BT ke relation mein
dekha hota jo ke spur ka relation hain aur jab round tgt ke nazdik tha to Oscar
Bravo ka order karna chahiye tha.

Aids to observing fire

11. Binoculars. Jab tgt ke upar aur nazdik fire karna hain, binocular observation ka
sabse achha tarika hain, large area tgt aur OP ke najdik tgt ko chod ker beech ke
graticule ke niche ke hisse ko tgt ke ranging point ki sidhain mein set karo. Is tarike se,
observation jaldi ho jati hain, udharan ke taur par graticule ke niche ki line se niche hain
to short hain aur Add correction ki jarrurat hain. Binocular ko shoot ke pahle round ko
dekhne ke liye use nahi karte hain.

12. Smoke and Dust. Is se nimnlikhit ke liye information milti hain:-

(a) Smoke shoot mein hawa ka rukh aur speed.

(b) Out of sight burst hone wale rds ka location.

(c) Off the line OT rounds ka positive observation karne mein jo ki anyatha
doubtful hota. Yeh halaki tabhi sach hain jab hawa across line OT chal rahi ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
155
13. Sound. Round ki awaz se round ki location ka especially jungle aur mountains
mein jab round unobserved hain to yeh OP officer ko deduction mein madad deta hain
jaise:-

(a) Round ki disha ko jahir karta hain.

(b) Information deta hain ki round blind nahi hain.

Target Round

14. Round ko tgt per observe karne ke liye khas dhyan diya jata hain. Jab area tgt
mein ranging kar rahe ho to us round ko tgt round nahi accept kiya jata jab tak near
edge saaf dikhain de aur samne dhool aur dhuwa aur door ka hissa pichhe. Agar pin
point tgt hain to direct hit se ya tgt ka hissa hawa mein fly karta huya nazar aata hain
dust saaf hone ke bad tgt ka shape change nazar aaye. Agar solid tgt hain direct hit se
ek characteristic flash paida ho

15. Correct Round. Pin point ke case mein agar round tgt round nahi hain para
14 ke anusar to ye correct round kaha jayega agar ye tgt ke bahute nazdik hain to
precision ke tarike se MPI ko adjust kiya ja sake.

16. Unobserved Round. Unobserved round ke karan liye jane wale action es
prakar hain:-

(a) Round dead ground mein gir sakta hain. Dhyan se agar map study kiya to
dekha ja sakta hain ki tgt area mein dead ground kahan hain aur judicious target
indication se opening round ko dekha ja sakta hain. Jab bhi round dead ground
mein girta hain usko account nahi karna chahiye aur reapeat hoga. OP officer
round ki location ko access karta hain awaz ki brust ko dekhte huye jab awaz
hawa mein aaye, koi smoke dikhain de , uski ground ki knowledge aur line of fire
or naye factor in tarika se kuch positive information round se lie ja shakte. Jo ki
suni ja shakte hain dekai nahi deti aur suitable corrn de shakte hain.

(b) Rd blind ho sakta hain agar OP offr ne rd ko dekha ya aawaj suna hain to
ek or same data per fire karwa sakta hain.

(c) Visibility kam hone se is case mein salvo rg hi helpful hoga. Kam se kam
opening rd rg ke liyen kuch case mein smk rd fire karna jaruri hoga.

(d) OP offr confuse ho shakta hain jab usi area mein dusri unit bhi fire kar rahi
hain. Apne rd ko pahchanane ke liye “Stand by” procedure ya salvo rg obsn ki
madad kar shakte hain.

(e) OU rd ko avoid karne ke liye obsn ko zone apne aur apne asst mein batna
chahiyen aur nangi ankh se dekhna chahiyen.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
156
SECTION 50 – OBSEVERS BASIC DRILL

Introduction

1. Ek shoot ko six hiso mein baat sakte hain.

(a) OP offr ko tgt indication karwana

(b) Shoot ki planning karna aur initial order pass karna.

(c) Ranging (Agar jarurat hain).

(d) MPI adjust karna (Agar jarurat hain).

(e) Fire for effect((Agar jarurat hain).

(f) Shoot ko khatam karna aur record karna (Agar jarurat hain).

2. Jab bhi sambhav ho sake nikale huye data OP offr OPA ke sath check karega
guns ko pass karne se pahale. Jab kabhi OP offr ke sath asst na ho to OP offr dono
duties ke liyen prep hoga aur manega ki independent check nahi ho sakta hain. In halat
mein woh khali samay ka istemal karage e.g. jab shell hawa mein hain to order ko
recheck karega aur agar jaruri hain to correct karega.

3. Sare fire order OPR ko order karaga clear awaz mein. Agar OP offr ke order
mien josh aur teji nahi hain to guns ka response poor hoga.

Action by OP Offr and OPA

4. During the Target indication Stage.

(a) OP Officer.

(i) Tgt ko pahchanna.

(ii) Tgt ko check back karna.

(b) OPA. Agar sambhav ho to usi samay pahchanna. Jab OP offr tgt ko dekta
hain.

5. During the Planning and Passage of Initial Order Stage.

(a) OP Officer.

(i) Guns ko chetavani dena e.g. Bty tgt.

(ii) Appreciation aur plan banana.

(iii) OPA tgt aur ranging pt dekana

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
157
(iv) OT bg aur tgt ki location nikalna aur OPA ke sath check back karna.

(V) Guns ko initial order dena.

(vi) Gross check ke hissab se OPA ko check karna niche likhe mutabik:-

(aa) OT Factor (appericiation mein istemal ke liye agar pahle nahi

nikala) tgt size ke access ke liye.

(ab) Apex angle aur zone seen aur inko OT lane mein convert
karna jab large apex angle ho.

(vii) Effect of slope aur apex angle ko consider karna.

(viii) Observation mein asani ke liye zone ko OPA aur apne beech batna.

(b) OPA.

(i) Target ko identifies karna aur OP officer ko check back karna.

(ii) Target location aur OT bearing ko check karna OP officer ke sath.

(iii) Wks out aur Reports.

(aa) OT Factor is tarike se ”1degree at 1500 mtrs Subtents 25

mtrs”.

(ab) Apex angle.

(iv) Effect of slope aur apex angle ko consider karna.

6. During Ranging stage.

(a) OP Officer.

(i) Ranging ko carryout karna.

(ii) Use ful round ko record karna as per drill in para 18.

(iii) MPI/MPB ko adjust karna.

(iv) Agar jaruri hain to amends :-

(aa) The Tgt height.

(ab) The OT Factor.

(ac) The OT bearing for a moving tgt.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
158
(b) OPA.

(i) Jab GPO time of flight ki report dene ke bad OP offrs ko 2X50 %
zone aur OT lane dena(large apex angle mein).

(ii) Correction ko check karna para (a) ke mutabik.

(iv) Shell ko burst hone se 5 seconds pahle “standby “ ki report dena.

(iv) “Stand by” or “Stand by for 1” (in case of battery fire).

7. During the FFE Stage.

(a) FFE ke liye orders aur numbers of rounds aur method of fire dena.

(b) Agar jaruri hain to MPI/ MPB ko correct karna.

(c) Fire ko tgt per batna agar jaruri hain to.

(d) FFE ko jari rakhna jab tak shoot ka aim achive nahi ho jata.

8. During the End of Shoot Stage.

(a) OP Officer.

(i) Orders dega agar tgt ko record karna hain.

(ii) Shoot ka result bayan karega.

(iii) Guns ko order dega Stand easy agar jaldi dusra shoot shuru hona
hain.

(b) OPA.

(i) OP log ko pura karega.

(ii) Target map per jaruri data entry karega.

(iii) Recorded data milne per OP log ko aur target map ko amends
karega.

OT Bearing

9. Grid bearing line observer target ka order GPO ko kiya jayega. Jab fire ko OP
Officers adjust karna chahata hain ranging aur FFE par. Bearing nikala jata hain niche
likhe in tariko dwara

(a) Kisi ek point ka Bg malum hain to udhar se napta hain .

(b) Compass se jahan magnetic attraction na ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
159
(c) Integrated OP eqpt (IOE).

(d) Tgt map ki madad se.

(e) Map se napta hain, measure karne ka koi method na hone per jab jarrurat
parta hain .

(f) OP or Tgt ka sahi GR nikalta hain.

10. Ek new OT Bg deta hain jo 10deg aur 100mils change ho ya woh payi jati ho.

Grid Refrence or Height Nikalne ka Tarika

11. Grid reference malum kiya ja sakta hain :-

(a) Shooting map / Target map se normally GR nikalta hain.

(i) OT Bg plot karke.

(ii) Nirdharit doori ko OT line per ya IOE se OT line par distance dekar.

(iii) Map se GR ko check karta hain e.g. Valley mein na hokar pahari
per hota hain.

(iv) Map se GR ko padhna.

(b) Kisi jane huye point se grid corrn lagaker us point ka GR padhna.

12. Height ke tgt ka GR ko map par plot karke padhta hain.

OPA ko Observation Plan ke Bare men Batana

13. OPA ko brief karna bahuta hi jaruri hain

(a) Ranging point dekhna.

(b) Aur kis prakar tgt per nazar rakhna.

Pahle Round ka Observe karna

14. Binocular se dekhte huye field of view se bahar ja sakta hain is liye OP officer aur
OPA tgt ke zone ko devide kar lete hain aur bager binocular ke dekha jata hain. OP offrs
kathhin ilake ko dekhta hain is prakar pure ilake ko dekha jata hain. Lekin poor visibility
hone par ek person binocular se dusra nangi aankh se dekhta hain.

“Stand by” Drill

15. Her ek round ko dekhne se pahle OPA ( ya GPO ko adesh diya to ) report karta
hain Standby ya round burst hone se 5 second pahle.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
160
Drill for Unobserved Rounds

16. Round ko nahi dekha to karwai is prakar kare:-

(a) Jab OP offrs round ko observe nahi kar pata woh OPA ko report karta hain
“OU “.

(b) Agar OPA ne round ko observe kiya hain to wah sahi corrn Opr ko pass
karta hain. Uske bad round kaha burst huya wah OP offrs ko batata hain.

(c) Agar OPA ne bhi observation nahi kiya to wah report deta hain OU . OP
offrs estimate karta hain ki round kaha gir sakta hain aur agla round dekhne ke
liye correction deta hain.

17. OU drill jaldi aur positive hain. Jo round dikhain nahi deta wah waiste of amn aur
samay ka barbadi hain.

Recording of Useful Rounds

18. Useful round ka recording ka drill is prakar hain :-

(a) OP offrs use mein aane wale round ko Tgt map par record karna chahata
hain to GPO ko Record 1 ka order karta hain agar shoot mein ek se jyada round
record kiya hain to seniority se number deta hain.

(b) Jis data par round gaya hain us data ke niche GPO CPSF form mein under
line karta hain aur R1 ya R2 ka order karta hain.

(c) GPO normal shoot ko aage jari rakhta hain.

(d) Shoot khatam hone ke bad GPO us data ka grid ref aur height OP offrs ko
bhejta hain . Agar Met available nahi hain to fired grid refrence ko bhejta hain.

Correcting Errors on the Guns

19. Kisi samay agar safety involved ho to OP offrs sahi karne ke step leta hain agar
koi errors guns par hone par guns ko firing se rokta hain. Her samay hamesha wah
deduced error ka report deta hain ya GPO suspected karta hain koi indication dete huye
agar ho sake to nature and size deke, e.g line error at 2 (line BT per dekhne par ) GPO
iska error dhundtha hain aur correct karta hain . Us ke bad wah OP offrs ko report deta
hain 2 now correct aur ranging gun OP offrs ke irade ke mutabik firing shooru karti hain.

Leaving the Guns Empty

20. Shoot ke anth men OP officer ko jahan tak ho sake guns ko khali chodne ki
koshish karni chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
161
CHAPTER – IV

ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS

SECTION 51 - PLANNING OF THE SHOOT

General

1. Ek shoot ko tgt ka nature aur size ke mutabik tayar kiya jata hain. Shoot ka aim
achive karne ke liye OP offrs shoot ke pahle planning karta hain . Yeh planning agar
information change hone par change karta hain. Shoot ke planning ke dauran procedure
is prakar hain,

(a) Shoot ka aim devide karna

(b) Aim ke upper effect karne wale factor consider karna.

(c) Plan ke ander various elements decide karna.

2. Ek experienced OP offrs jaldi se jaldi shoot ka aim aur appreciation plan karta
hain .Agar less experienced OP offrs hain to kuch time spend karta hain jo ki checking
factors dhyan mein rakhta hain to avoid subsequent improve aati hain wastage of time
and confusion yeh karne se shoot unsuccessful ho jati hain.

3. Speed ki Ahamiyat. Koi bhi shoot ho speed aur aim ko achive karne ke liye
jyada jarrurat hain , OP party, Cp, Guns and communication baki task se free karna
chahiye.

Aim

4. Yeh jarruri hain ki shoot ka aim malum hona chahiye taki shoot ko start karne ke
liye shoot ka dividation min 6 classes mein devide kiya gaya hain. Niche diye gaye
paragraph mein shoot ke classification ke bare mein explain kiya gaya hain.

5. Target Requiring Neutralisation. Neutrilisation tab achieve hota hain jab ham
artillery fire power se enemy ko uske weapons ka effectively use na karne den ya
observation aur mov se rok saken. Isse casualty hone ka dar individual ko bana rahta
hain aur uske moral par effect padta hain. Jabki, personal ki actual casualty aur eqpt ke
damage se aim achieve hone men madad milti hain. Usually, material effect ke bina yeh
moral effect achieve nahi kiya ja sakta. Smoke jyada effective nahi hona is statement se
alag hain. Achieve kiya hua neutralization kisi diye gaye time mein tgt par deliver kiye
gaye amn ki weight ke mutabik hota hain. Iske sath sath enemy ka moral aur usne kis
tarah ki protection li hui hain is par bhi degree of neutralization nirbhar karta hain.
Artillery fire uthane ke bad bhi kitne samay tak enemy neutralized rahta hain iske aadhar
par ham neutralization fire ko ham two types men devide kar sakte hain :-

(a) Immediate Neutralisation. Iska desired effect hain “enemy ka sir dabakar
rakhna” take veh effective tarike se hamare troops ki activities men dakhal na de
sake jab tak ki sufficient accuracy aur tadad men us par artillery fire dala ja raha
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
162
(b) Lasting Neutralisation. Yeh us samay achieve hota hain jab is se enemy
ki casualties hon, uske weapons aur def work damage hon, uska comn disturb ho
aur uske command and control ka organisation toot jaye. Iska effect kuch samay
bad tak bhi rahta hain chahe arty fire utha bhi liya jaye. (Yahan par iska aim
enemy ko demoralize karna nahi hain. Demoralisation neutralization se alag hain
aur ise yahan consider nahi kiya ja raha hain).

6. GF Target. Yeh tgt moving mein hote hain fire karke ek jagah se dusri jagah
move kar jate hain . Moving tgt ke khilaf yeh udeshya hain normally destruction aur
harassment karna hain. Ek bar jab tgt halt ho jata hain to normal shoot ki tarah lagatar
engage kiya jayega. Jyada ter movement ek jagah se dusri jagah hoti hain. Jab moka
mile to tgt ko engage karna chahiye jab wah ruka huya hain. Yeh safalta tgt ki speed aur
barbadi per nirbher hain. Yadi tgt initially movement nahi kar raha hain, aur kuchh
samay ke liye movement karta hain phir ruk jata hain to yeh safalta jitna samay available
hain us per nirbher hain.

7. Target Requiring Registration. Aim of technical janana jaruri hain tgt ke

engagement ke liye aur other tgt ki future engagement ke liye. Registration karane ke
bad mein place ko prapt karne ke liye engagement kiya jata hain. Samay ki bachat ke
liye registration kiya jata hain . Jyada accuracy ki jarrurat hain jab samay available ho.

8. Tgt Requiring Destruction. Jyada accuracy ki jarrurat hain. Tgt ko safalta

purvak barbad karne ke liye aur accuracy ko prapt karne ke liye samay ke anusar Amn
expenditure kiya jata hain.

9. Illumination Shoot. Illumination shoot ka udeshya es prakar hain :-

(a) Illumination apne attacking troop ko advance karane ke liye area ko

illuminate kiya jata hain. Agar hamare FDLS per enemy advance karti hain to
uske loc ko janne ke liye.

(b) Tgt ke upper Arty fire ko adjust karne aur obsn ke liye kiya jata hain.

(c) Dushman ke night device ko barbad karne ke liye .

(d) Enemy ko confuse karne ke liye.

10. Indication Shoots. Indication of shoot ka udeshya hain tgt ko jahir karna . Apne
own troops ko aane wale samay mein aur air craft ko indicate kiya jata hain.

Consideration of Factors

11. General. Shoot ke aim ko hasil karne ke liye plan ko samjhana jaruri hain. Ek
se jyada factor jo ki plan ke upper effect dalte hain:- Ismein kuchh detail hain jo niche
diye gaye hain :-

(a) Target.

(b) Surprise hasil karne ki jarrurat.

(c) Fire ko adjust karne ke liye samay hona.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
163
(d) Apne troop ki suraksha.

(e) Weapon ka hona aur unke bare mein jankari hona.

(f) Fire ka sahi aur durust hona.

(g) Tgt ke aas-paas ka ground.

(h) Weather.

12. The Target. Kuchh jaruri tathye niche diye gaye hain:-

(a) Tgt kaisa hain aur kitni protection jaruri hain.

(b) Tgt ke upper fire karne ka reaction kya hain.

(c) Tgt ka size aur shape.

(d) Tgt area mein element ka dispersion kaisa hain.

13. Surprise ki Jarurat. Fire ko target par adjust karne ke sabhi tarikon se surprise
ko kam kar dete hain aur fire for effect ke effect ko kam kar sakte hain. Surprise ka loss
hona particular importance rakhta hain jahan aim ko achieve attrition se kiya ja raha ho.

14. Time Available for Adjustment of Fire. Yeh hamari tactical requirement aur
enemy ke action par depend karta hain. Jab time ki kami hoti hain us samay ranging
kam deliberate ya nahi bhi ki ja sakti. Yadi bina kisi ranging ke fire khola jata hain to fire
ki accuracy bahut had tak is baat par nirbhar karti hain ki data calculate karne mein non
– std conditions ka allowance ki accuracy kya thi. Engagement ki speed apne aap mein
koi maine nahi rakhti jab tak ki aim achieve karne ke liye sufficient accuracy na ho. Jab
bhi time, ammunition aur tactical situation permit kare fire ki effectiveness ko target par
adjust karke bhadaya jaye.

15. Apne Troops ki Safety. Apne artillery fire se yadi apne jawano ki casualty hoti
hain to yeh apne troops ke moral ko nuksan pahunchata hain aur unka confidence apne
artillery support se kam hota hain jab tak ki enemy ka threat itna na ho ki arms
commanders ko yeh risk accept na ho. Normal circumstances mein apne troops ki
casualties ka risk nahi lena chahiye. Yeh kahne ki jarurat nahi hain ki yadi koi target
apne troops ke bahut close hain to us samay fire control par bahut care ki jarurat hoti
hain.

16. Availability and Characteristics of Weapons. Weapons ki availability hamesha

limited hi rahti hain aur kabhi – kabhi hi yeh unlimited hogi. Jab hamare pass weapon ki
choice ki sambhavna hain, us samay sahi task ke liye sahi weapon ka chunav karna
chahiye. Sath hi sabhi koshish ki jani chahiye ki aim ke lihaj se amn ka chunav kiya
jaye. Mojuda weather conditions ke anusar hi smoke amn ka istemal ho. Sahi weapon
aur ammunition ki choice sahi task ke liye niche likhe sub factors par nirbhar karti hain :-

(a) Range aur arc of fire.

(b) Gun ka zone.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
164
(c) Ammunition ki availability aur mojuda conditions men uski suitability.

(d) Lathality.

(e) Crest Clearance.

(f) Higher priority task par commitment.

17. Accuracy and Consistency of Fire. Yen mukhyatah niminlikhit ke karan limited
ho sakte hain :-

(a) Survey errors.

(b) Non std – conditions est karne mein error.

(c) Inherent dispersion.

18. Target ke Charo Taraf ka Area. Yeh fire ke observation ko effect kar sakta hain
aur sath hi ranging palan ke sath shoot ko complete karne ke liye lagne wale time ko
bhi.

19. Mausham. Mausam ke Mojuda halat niche likhe ko effect kar sakti hain :-

(a) Observation.

(b) Ammunition ki choice aur fuze ka function.

(c) Time Plan.

Plan ke Elements

20. General. Plan may be regarded as a series of decisions on itselements. Plan ke

elements niche diye gaye hain aur yahi aane wale paragraphs men discuss kiye gaye
hain :-

(a) Kis tarah ki guns ka istemal hoga.

(b) Kitni guns ka istemal hoga.

(c) Kis tarah ke ammunition ka istemal hoga.

(d) Low ya High angle fire ki choice.

(e) Ranging plan.

(f) Method aur Fire for Effect ka duration.

(g) Target record kab aur kaise karna hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
165
21. Nature of Guns to be Used. OP officer apni unit se alag tarah ki guns ka fire bhi
mang sakta hain. Ranging aur arc of fire ke mutabik nature of guns ki choice ko effect
karne wale factors is prakar hain :-

(a) Nature of the Target. Material damage karne ke liye aur strongly built
positions par casualty karne ke liye large calibre ki guns ke fire ki accuracy ke
sath jarurat hain. Unprotected ya lightly protected troops ki casualty karne ya
casualties ka threat karne ke liye small calibre ki guns jyada effective hain. Bade
shells utni hi matra men girane ke bajay small shells badi matra men girane par
jyada casualties hongi.

(b) Proximity of Own Troops. Apne troops close hone par small calibre guns
ke accurate fire ki jarurat hain. Weh weapons jo kewal high angle men fire karte
hain (e.g. Mortars) aur rockets all round splinter effect aur high angle fire aur
rocket ke dispersion ke karan suitable nahi hote.

(c) Time Available. Jab time bahut kam ho, short time of flight ki jarurat hoti
hain. Isliye high angle fire suitable nahi hoga.

22. Number of Guns to be Used. Iska consideration target ki tactical importance ke

anusar hota hain. Kuch consideration jinke adhar par OP offr number of guns decide
karta hain veh hain:-

(a) Target ka Size. Bade targets jyada guns ke sath more effectively engage
kiye ja sakte hain, kam guns hone par unke unavoidable dispersion aur fire ko
move karke advantage le sakte hain.

(b) Time Available. Large concentrations se ranging mein kam time lagta
hain aur total required punishment target par jaldi deliver kiya ja sakta hain.

(c) Ammunition Available. Jab ammunition allotment generous ho tab OP

officer iska adventage lene ke liye ise jyada guns se fire kara sakta hain. Jab
ammunition kam ho, us samay har round ki jarurat ko dekhte hue yeh jaruri hain
ki kam guns ko accurately target par direct kiya jaye.

23. Kis Tarah ka Ammunition Use Karna Hain. Us tarah ke shoots ko chodkar
jinme aim apne aap nature of ammunition batata hain (e.g coloured smoke or flare
shell), choice of ammunition niche likhe considerations se decide hota hain :-

(a) Choice of Shell. HE aur smoke amn ki choice ke beech mein primarily
depend karta hain nature of target aur target ke size ke sath weather ki conditions
par. HE ka istemal tabhi kiya jayega jab damage karna ho /ya casualty karni ho.
Smoke shell ke employment ke bare men detailed discussion section 55 – 56
men diya gaya hain.

(b) Choice of Charge.

(i) Normally charge ka selection GPO dwara hota hain. Charge

selection ke samay niche diye gaye fectors ko dhyan men rakha jata hain
:-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
166
(aa) Target ka range.

(ab) Target ka nature.

(ac) Apne troops ki target se najdiki.

(ad) Consistency, i.e. zone.

(ae) Jab HE use kar rahe hain to lethal coverage. Yeh bade
angle of decent se achieve hota hain.

(af) Engagement ka time kam karne ke liye kam time of flight.

Target par supersonic shell girane se jyada demoralizing hota hain.

(ag) Crest clearance ki problem.

(ah) Jyada wear se bachna. Yeh particularly high performance

guns ke liye applicable hota hain, jaise 105mm ABBOT aur 130mm.
Jabki yeh charge selection men jyada mahatav nahi rakhta jab tak ki
bahut hi jyada suit na kare.

(ii) Low aur high charge ke important characteristics niche diye gaye
hain :-

(aa) High Charge. Diye gaye range ki time of flight lower charge
ki tulna mein kam ho jayegi. Kul milakar yeh shoot ke time ko kafi
had tak kam kar deta hain. Generally lower charge ki tulna mein
higher charge ka bikhrav kam hota hain. Higher charge se jyada
remaining velocity milti hain jo us samay useful hoti hain jab delay
fuze ko well dug in enemy ke khilaf istemal kar rahe hon.

(ab) Low Charge. Angle of descent lower charge ki tulna men

jyada hota hain. Yeh proximity fuzes ke sath advantage deta hain.
Jab smoke shell ko hard ground par istemal karte hain to reduced
remaining velocity ke sath advantage milta hain. Lower charge men
higher charge ki apeksha gun ka wear bhi kam hota hain.

(iii) Yadi OP officer ke pass shoot ke dauran kisi khas charge ke liye
special reason hain to weh apne aap charge ka order kar sakta hain. Yadi
target crested hain to GPO charge ko change kar sakta hain.

(c) Choice of Fuze. Choice of fuze normally nature of target par depend karti
hain. Ground aur weather factor ko bhi consider kiya jata hain. HE shell ke sath
different fuze ke combinations is prakar hain :-

(i) Direct Action(DA)/Super Quick (SQ) Fuzes. Yeh open troops ki

casualty ke liye aur jo equipments fragments se disable ho sakte hain e.g
AFVs, field guns jo shallow gun pits men hain ke khilaf istemal kiya jata
hain. Waise yeh field works ke against effective nahi hain kyonki yeh
target ke surface par burst hota hain. Tooti-footi jamin aur soft jamin dono
hi iski effectiveness kam kar deti hain. Jo troops jamin level ke neeche

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
167
open tranches men hote hain un par kewal direct hone par hi casualty hasil
hoti hain.

(ii) Delay/ Graze Fuzes. Yeh fuzes 1/100 se 1/10 second tak ki delay
dete hain. Delay fuze shell ko target par detonate karne se pahle penetrate
karne deta hain aur field works aur buildings ke liye behtar hain. Jyada
remaining velocity aur kam angle of impact ke sath delay fuzed HE ke sath
istemal karke ricochet siddhant se air burst effect hasil kiya ja sakta hain
(e.g Fuze V 429).

(iii) VT (CVT) or Mechanical Time Fuze. Sabhi tarah ke unprotected

personnel targets ke liye HE shell yadi air mein burst kare to ground par
burst karne se jyada effective hota hain. Jabki is tarah ke fuzes ki
availability kam hone ke karan units inka istemal open slit tranches mein
personnel ya open APCs ke khilaf nahi kar pati. VT fuze time fuze ke
mukable jyada regular height of burst achieve karta hain aur fuze length
adjust karne ki jarurat nahi padti aur normally time fuze ke mukable jyada
effective hota hain. Halanki VT fuze target ke immediate crest ke karan
burst ho sakta hain aur ise heavy rain mein bhi use nahi kiya ja sakta
kyonki ho sakta hain ki yeh premature ho jay. Time fuze crest se sensitive
nahi hote aur is tarah yen aise targets ke liye suitable hote hain jo steep
cover ke piche hon, chupao mein hon aur isi tarah ke jo VT fuze se engage
nahi kiye ja sakte. Non standard conditions ke effect ke karan normally
correct / fuze length ko adjustment ki jarurat padti hain.

24. Choice of Low or High Angle Fire. Jyadatar aadhunik guns ko is tarah banaya
gaya hain ki weh low aur high angle dono mein fire kar saken. Low ya high angle fire ki
choice observer banata hain aur weh niche likhe se prabhavit hoti hain :-

(a) Low angle Fire. Low angle fire mein high angle ke mukable adventages is
prakar hain :-

(i) Diye gaye range ke liye time of flight kam hoti hain aut isi liye shoot
jaldi complete ho jata hain.

(ii) Dispersion ka zone range aur charge ke liye kam hota hain aur
ranging simple hoti hain.

(iii) Adhiktar equipments ke sath drills asan hoti hain aur gun end par
karwahi asan hoti hain.

(iv) Supported arms ko close support sambhav hain.

(v) Enemy ke locating devices se pata lagana muskil hota hain.

(vi) Kisi bhi tarah ke eqpt ke liye kisi khas taiyari ki jarurat nahi hain.

(vii) Prediction asan aur accurate hain.

(b) High Angle Fire. Dusri taraf high angle fire mein nimin likhit adventages
hain :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
168
(i) Crest clearance ki samasya nahi hain. Yeh khas taur par us samay
jyada maine rakhta hain jab target kisi deep valley mein ho ya kisi crest ke
piche ho.

(ii) Sabhi ranges par jyada angle of decent milta hain. Yeh us samay
faidemand hain jab over head protection wale targets ko delay fuze ke sath
engage kar rahe hon.

(iii) Proximity fuze ka faida liya ja sakta hain.

(iv) Hill shooting mein trajectory par dhalan ka effect bahut kam hota
hain aur ise najar andaj kiya ja sakta hain.

(v) Khadi trajectory ke karan splinter ka effect behtar aur charo taraf
milta hain.

(vi) Gun jyada sthir rahti hain.

25. Target par Fire ka Distribution. Jo factors target par fire ke distribution ko
prabhavit karta hain weh hain target ka size aur shape, time available aur fire for effect
ke dauran control. Jab tak OP officer koi khas aadesh nahi deta tab tak battery ka
centre target ke centre par align kiya jata hain aur guns parallel line mein fire karti hain.
Yeh `simple concentration’ kahlata hain. Baki ki situations is prakar hain :-

(a) Gun ke Frontage se Narrow Targets. Yadi target gun ke effective

frontage se narrow hain to `concentrate’ ka aadesh dekar battery ke frontage ko
banawati tarike se kam kiya ja sakta hain.

(b) Guns ke Frontage se Bade Targets. Jab target guns ke effective

frontage se bada hain to is tarah ke targets par fire ko bantne ke sambhavit tarike
is prakar hain :-

(i) OP officer fire for effect ke dauran target grid correction ka aadesh
dekar fire ko target ke ek bhag se dusre bhag par move kiya ja sakta hain.

(ii) Sadharan concentration ko target ke beech mein direct karke guns

ko sweep aur / ya search ka aadesh dekar. Yeh tarika us samay kamyab
hain jab observer pure fire for effect ke dauran control hasil nahi rakh sake.

(iii) Yadi target bilkul ek line ke aakar mein ho aur jab jaruri ho ki target
par ek line mein hi fire dalna ho, jaise bund ke sath ka defence ya canal ka
kinara to std linear concentration ka istemal kar sakte hain.

(iv) Target ko do ya jyada bhagon mein bantkar un par alag – alag fire
units ko direct Karna. Yeh dhyan mein rakhna chahiye ki yeh engagement
met limit ke andar ho, har ek hisse ko ek alag target number diya jay. Is
tarah ke targets ko ek group banakar nickname diya jayega.

(v) Target ko engage karne ke liye MFDT tarike ka istemal kiya ja sakta
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
169
26. Ranging Plan. Yeh jaruri hain ki ek clear ranging plan banai jaye aur iska palan
kiya jaye. Ranging plan ko weh koi bhi factor jo shoot ke plan mein shamil hain,
prabhavit kar sakta hain. Weh matters jin par nirnay liya jana jaruri hain weh is prakar
hain :-

(a) Method and Degree of Ranging. Yeh nimin likhit par nirbhar karta hain
:-

(i) Time available.

(ii) Surprise ki jarurat.

(iii) Kaisa target hain, kitni suraksha hain, aakar aur location kya hain.

(iv) Target apne jawano ke kitne najdeek hain.

(v) Kis tarah ka amn prayog karna hain.

(vi) Kis tarah ka shoot hain.

(vii) Target ke charon taraf ki jamin.

(viii) Mausam.

(b) Ranging Point. Yeh weh point hain jahan par ranging gun ko direct kiya
jata hain. Yeh koi definite object hona chahiye jahan se target grid correction
napi ja sake. Target ke sambandh mein is point ki sthiti ranging gun ki choice par
asar dal sakti hain. Smoke screen aur linear shoot mein yeh karamshah point 1
aur centre point honge.

(c) MPI and/ya MPB ko adjust karne ka tarika.

* Target end par ek battery jitna frontage cover karti hain yeh jaruri nahi ki uska
deployment bhi utna hi ho. Yeh line of fire aur axis ke anusar kam jyada ho sakta hain.

27. Fire for Effect ka Tarika aur Duration. Jab jarurat ke anusar ranging aur MPI
(aur / ya MPB) adjustment sahit ek khas had tak puri ho jati hain to OP offr ko jab tak
uska aim kewal target ko register karna na ho, shoot ka aim hasil karne ke liye FFE ka
aadesh deta hain. Jab fire ka aim target ko punish karna hota hain tab FFE bahut soch
vichar ke bad kiya jana chahiye FFE par lagaye jane wale fire ka nature, qty aur tivrata
veh jaruri baten hain jin par OP officer ko apni pahal shakti aur suj bujh ka istemal karna
target ke engagement ko niminlikhit upayon se aur jyada effective banaya ja sakta hain
:-

(a) In aim se ki surprise hamesha mojud rahe, fire ka prayog adal-badal kar
karna chahiye. Hamesha ek jaise hi tarike ka istemal nahi karna chahiye.

(b) Kitne rounds ka aadesh dena hain yeh depend karta hain :-

(i) Target area ke andar giraye jane wale rounds ka number.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
170
(ii) Target ka size.

(iii) Charge aur range ke liye 50 per cent length zone.

(iv) Angle, jo line of fire target ki longer axis ke sath banti hain.

(c) Jab bhi fire for effect ka observation sambhav ho ise savdhani se observe
karna chahiye aur ise `walking away’ se bachane ke liye har sambhav prayas
karna chahiye.

(d) Law of diminishing returns TOT engagement ki jarurat ki taraf sanket karta
hain. Initial fire se sabse jyada casualty hoti hain.

28. Kya Target Record kiya jana hain ? Kaise Record kiya jana hain ?

(a) Siddhant rup se koi bhi target jise dubara engage kiye jane ki sambhavna
hain, shoot ki samapti par record kiya jana chahiye. Lekin bahut se target,
recording targets ki recording ke aim ko achieve karne mein badha dalte hain.
Aam taur par targets ko tab tak record nahi kiya jana chahiye jab tak ki unke
future engagement ka andaja pahle se na ho.

(b) Target ko original engagement se one level upar record kiya ja sakta hain.
e.g. battery se engage kiya gaya target regiment target ke roop mein record kiya
jay, yadi observer ya senior officer yeh samajhta hain ki dubara engagement par
adhik weight of fire behtar rahega.

(c) Yadi target ko aisi fire units se engage karne ka irada ho jinke paas initial
engagement ki met limits mein fired data nahi hain, tab target ko “as fired’ record
karne ka order dena chahye.

Initial Orders

29. Upar plan ke jin various elements ka discussion kiya gaya hain, un par OP officer
dwara liye gaye decision initial orders ke roop mein samne aate hain. OP ke aise orders
ki ek aisi list sahi sequence mein Chapter 1, Section 4 mein di gai hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
171
SECTION 52 – IMMEDIATE NEUTRALISATION SHOOT

BHAG I – INTRODUCTION

1. Yeh ek bunyadi shoot hain. Yeh section 50 mein diye gaye tarike ke anusar
conduct kiya jata hain. Yeh assan aur teji se pura hota hain. Aamtaur par isme DA
fuzed ke sath HE ka istemal kiya jata hain.

2. Iska aim enemy ko apni karwahi mein rukawat dalne se rokna aur uski planning
ko aage badhne se rokna hain. Yeh us samay liya jata hain jab dushman sthir hota hain.
Isme jarurat ke anusar accuracy ke sath speed ka hona bahut jaruri hain.

3. Is section mein kewal battery target ke procedure ke bare mein hi bataya gaya
hain. Regiment aur us se bade targets ka tarika Section 56 mein combined kiya gaya
hain.

PART II – PROCEDURE AT THE OP

Initial Orders

4. Target ka nature “Battery Target” ya “Troop Target” hota hain.

5. Observer ranging ka tarika chod sakta hain. Jisme GPO kisi ek gun ko ranging
ka aadesh deta hain. Jabki observer kisi khas gun ko nominate kar sakta hain ya `salvo
ranging’ ka aadesh de sakta hain.

Ranging

6. Ranging tab tak ki jati ha jab tak ki ya to :-

(a) Line OT ke sath ek short bracket (100 mtr) nahi ban jata. Phir veh bracket
“Add/Drop 50, one RGF” ka aadesh dete hue split ki jati hain.

(b) Round target area mein burst hote hue dikhain deta hain jisme “one round
gun fire” ka order kiya jata hain.

7. Ab single round gun fire par battery ki MPI tab tak adjust kiya jata hain tab tak :-

(a) Target ke charon aur round giren.

(b) Jyada tar rounds target area mein burst hon.

Fire for Effect

8. Jab MPI adjust ho jay to target ko gun fire ke alag – alag numbers ke rounds ke
bursts se tab tak engage kiya jana chahiye tab tak ki shoot ka aim hasil nahi ho jata.

9. Neutralisation ki degree tab jyada hoti hain jab thode-thode karke lagatar fire
karne ke bajay small aur irregular interval par heavy fire dala jay.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
172
End of Shoot.

10. End of Shoot ki basic drill ka tarika Section 50 mein diya gaya hain.

PART III – PROCEDURE AT GUN POSITION

11. Gun position ki karwahi ka tarika Section 44 ki tarah hi hain.

PART IV – MISCELLANEOUS POINTS

12. Air Burst Fuzes. Is tarah ke shoot mein air burst HE ka istemal karne ka tarika
Section 53 mein diya gaya hain.

Delay Fuze

13. Jab delay fuze ka istemal karna hain tab observer iska order apne initial orders
mein deta hain e.g.

14. “Cap On” ya “Delay”. Ammunition convention ka istemal kiya jayega.

PART V – GF TARGETS

General

15. Moving targets ya veh targets jo engagement ke dauran move kar sakte hain ke
engagement ke liye ek modified tarike ke istemal ki jarurat padti hain. Normally guns se
quick reaction hasil karne ke liye ek battery ka istemal kiya jata hain aur jitna ho sake
shoot ko simple rakha jata hain.

16. Is tarah ke engagement ka aim normally harassment hota hain ya thodi matra
mein neutralization hota hain yadi target moving hain. Target stationary hain to aim
neutralization hoga.

17. GF targets ke khilaf time fuzed HE ka istemal nahi karna chahiye jab tak ki target
stationary na ho aur corrector of the movement malum na ho.

18. Moving Targets

(a) Yadi is baat ke evidence hon ki target jaldi hi aise point par pahunchega jo
ya to recorded target hain ya jise map par sahi tarike se locate kiya ja sakta hain
tab OP officer khas samay tak fire order rokte hue is point par FFE ke complete
orders de sakta hain.

(b) Dusre halaton mein immediately us posn par fire suru kar dena chahiye jis
par pahle round pahunchne tak target ke pahunchne ki sambhavna ho. Yadi zone
jana pahchana ho ya map reading assan ho us samay opening round one round
gun fire hona chahiye ya ek ya ek se adhik ranging round fire kiye ja sakte hain.
Jaise hi target ko hit karne ke liye necessary corrn ka anuman lagaya ja sake, fire
for effect suru kar dena chahiye. Bracket lagane ki koshish nahi karni chahiye jab
tak ki bina bracket ke anuman lagana sambhav na ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
173
19. Pahle round ke bad fire for effect par ya ranging par aage ke rounds target par
burst hon iske liye bold corrn diye jane chahiye. Target ki speed aur disha aur burst of
fire ke beech ke samay ka andaja hamesha lagana chahiye aur fire ko hamesha target
ke aage rakho.

20. Niche diye gaye orders ko dubara pass karna chahiye yadi halat is tarah ke ho
jayen ki :-

(a) OT bearing yadi isme 10 degree (200 mils) ka badlav ho.

(b) Naya height ya height ke liye correction yadi dikhain de aur samay permit
kare nahi to OP officer height me badlav ke effect ko target grid corrections mein
shamil karega.

(c) Jab bhi time of flight mein 5 seconds ka badlav ho to OP ko report di

jayegi.

21. Stationary Targets. Is tarah ke targets ko engage karne ke do main methods

hain :-

(a) Ranging target se kuch duri par ki jayegi aur fire for effect ko correction ke
sath target par khola jayega. Jab map ya kisi dusre tarike se ranging point aur
target ki relative position pata ho, to ranging ka maksad hoga gun ko map ke
anusar fire karane ke liye jaruri adjustment karna. Ranging short bracket tak ki
jayegi. Iske bad jaise hi fire for effect considered ho jata hain one round gun fire
se jyada se khola jayega.

(b) Pahle round ko target par direct kiya jay. Yadi zone jana pahchana ho aur
map reading asan ho tab pahla round one round gun fire hona chahiye jis se yadi
sambhav ho to target ko hit karne ke liye jaruri correction ka anuman lagaya ja
sakta hain. Yadi jab tak target fire na kiya jaye, tab tak target ke move karne ki
sambhavna na ho tab OP officer ranging se bachne ke liye apne target indication
par savdhani purvak kuch samay laga sakta hain.

22. Aamtaur par stationary target par fire for effect ke pahle burst ke liye
synchronized fire arrange karna faide mand rahega. Yadi shoot suru hone ke bad target
move karta hain to ise moving target ke tarike se engage kiya jayega.

23. Jab tak target bahut bada na ho, teji se move kar rahe target ko ek se jyada
battery se engage karna kifaiti nahi hoga. Lekin stationery GF targets ko battery ke
bajay bade concentration se behtar tarike se engage kiya ja sakta hain kyonki fire ke
unavoidable dispersion se jyada galtiyan hone ka andesha rahta hain. GF term
ragiment aur higher level par `nature of target’ mein shamil nahi kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
174
SECTION 53 – HE AIRBURST SHOOT

BHAG I – INTRODUCTION

1. HE round air mein burst hote hain aur downward fragments paida karte hain jo un
troops ki casualty mein kargar sabit hota hain jo open tranch mein ya khade cover ke
piche hain aur jahan ground burst se nahi pahuncha ja sakta. Yeh un troops ke khilaf bhi
effective hain jo open ground mein hain aur rough ground par aur snow and desert area
mein bhi ground burst se jyada effective hote hain. Iska moral effect bhi ground burst se
jyada hota hain. Ricochet air aurst ke bare mein is bhag ke last mein alag se bataya
gaya hain. Do tarah ke air burst fuzes proximity aur time fuze ke characterstics niche
diye gaye hain :-

(a) VT Fuse (Proximity).

(i) Yen fuze time fuze se jyada regular height of burst achieve karte
hain.

(ii) Inme fuze length ke adjustment ki jarurat nahi hoti aur normally time
fuze se jyada effective hote hain.

(iii) VT Fuze target ke najdeek crest hone par premature ho sakte hain
is liye aise halaton mein time fuze ka istemal kiya jata hain.

(iv) Heavy rains mein inka performance sahi nahi rahta.

(v) Wet ground par HOB dry ground se jyada rahta hain.

(vi) Height of burst angle of desent ke anusar badalta rahta hain. 20 se

30 degree ke beech height of burst 20 se 30 meter alag – alag hoti hain.
Jyada angle of descent ke dauran jaise ki high angle of fire mein lower air
burst 1.5 se 5 meter ke beech hote hain.

(b) Time Fuzes.

(i) Time fuze crest se sensitive nahi hote is liye jo targets steep cover
ke piche hain unko engage karne ke liye time fuze ke sath engage kiya
jata jinhe VT fuze se engage nahi kiya ja sakta.

(ii) Non std conditions ke effect ke karan normally corrector / fuze

length ke adjustment ki jarurat padti hain.

(iii) Mechanical time fuzes mein .2 se .3 seconds ka fuze zone hota

hain. Is fuze zone ke karan HOB mein kafi bade variations hote hain jab
steep angle of descent hota hain. Isi liye high angle fire mein ya low angle
fire mein long ranges par inka performance behtar nahi rahta.

2. Air burst fuzes ke istemal mein economise ke liye aur isliye ki air burst ke
fragments ko observe karna hamesha asan nahi rahta, isliye by convention jab tak small
bracket nahi ban jata ranging HE ground burst se ki jati hain. Tab time fuzes ke cases

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
175
mein HOB ke liye ranging ka process aur MPB ke adjustment ki karwahi fire for
effect se pahle ki jati hain. Proximity fuzes ke cases mein fire for effect ka order dene se
pahle line aur range ke liye MPB adjust kiya jata hain.

BHAG II - PROCEDURE AT THE OP

3. Shoot ki planning banate samay OP officer air burst ammunition ki us quantity ka

anuman lagata hain jiski use fire for effect ke dauran jarurat padegi. Initial orders mein
veh guns ko warn karta hain taki ranging ke dauran inhe ready rakha jaye.

Initial Orders

4. Nature of target ka order hoga :-

(a) Proximity fuze ke liye, “…..Target VT”.

(b) Dusre fuzes ke liye, “……Target Airburst” observer normally actual fuze
specify nahi karta.

5. Required airburst ammunition ki quantity ke liye warning order is prakar diya jata
hain eg. – “Battery target VT, Prepare 8 round per gun”.

6. Jab tak observer alag aadesh nahi deta, by convention ranging HE ground burst
se ki jati hain.

Ranging

7. Ranging nature of shoot ke liye munasib tarike aur degree mein ground burst
ammunition se ki jayegi. Samay ke anusar set kiye gaye ranging rounds ko change
karne ke liye order dene ka procedure basic taur par vahi hain ki single round istemal
kiya jaye ya salvo round. Kisi jaruri line ya range correction ke sath “corrector..(or
airburst yadi koi fuze indicator nahi hain) ka order kiya jata hain. Yadi ranging ka
method change karna hain to iske liye uchit order diya jata hain eg. , yadi single round
se salvo ranging mein HOB ke liye change karni hain to “ Salvo ranging” aur “Raise A of
S” ko normal sequence mein shamil kiya jata hain.

8. Ranging gun ko HE ground burst se load rahne se bachane ke liye, jab OP officer
airburst ke liye change karna chahta hain, veh ranging samapti ki aur order karega
“Number 1 one RGF” jab short bracket establish ho jata hain :-

(a) “ADD/DROP 100……………1 RGF” (Specifying the ranging gun(s) ).

9. VT fuzes se fire for effect suru karne se pahle ammunition change karne ke liye
order hoga “VT”.

Ranging for Height of Burst with Single Round

10. Jab ground burst ke sath ranging complete ho jati hain to HOB ke liye ranging ka
process ek gun se single round fire karke ki jati hain. Yeh do bhagon mein hoti hain :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
176
(a) Sabse pahle target par line of sight par burst hasil karne ke liye brackting
ke jariye fuze setting hasil ki jati hain.

(b) Iske bad A of S ko uthate hue burst ka point air mein rakha jata hain. Alag
– alag equipments ke liye maximum HOB niche diya gaya hain :-

(i) 105 mm ………. 40ft.

(ii) 130mm ………. 55ft.
(iii) 155mm FH77B02 ………. 55ft.

11. Fuze setting ke liye brackting usi tarah se ki jati hain jaise ranging ke liye. Yadi
ground burst hota hain tab fuze length jyada hoti hain aur jab air burst hota hain to fuze
short hoti hain. Fuze length jab correct hoti hain jab ek round air mein aur ek round
ground par short bracket hasil kar liya ho ya low air burst ho. Bahut low burst jamin par
burst hua dikhain deta hain kewal ek dull red flash se hi ise pahchana ja sakta hain. Tab
A of S ko raise kiya jata hain aur battery ki MPB ko assess kiya jata hain aur yadi jarurat
ho to gun fire se correct kiya jata hain.

Ranging for Height of Burst with Salvos

12. Jab salvo ranging ki ja rahi hain tab pahle se raise A of S ke sath air burst ka air
mein bracket sambhav hain.

13. Fuze ke zone of dispersion ke karan jab mean HOB correct hota hain tab bhi
kuch ground burst hote hain. 213 fuze se sabhi ranges par ground burst ka average 3
aur 1 ka hota hain. Yeh long range par kuch jyada aur short range par kam hota hain.

14. Observer do tarah se fuze setting pass asar dalne ke liye orders de sakta hain :-

(a) Weh “Corrector” ki values ka order de sakta hain, eg “Corrector 120”. Yeh
normal method hain.

(b) Weh fuse setting mein alteration ka aadesh de sakta hain, eg

“Lenthen/Shorten Point 4”. Iska istemal tab hota hain jab gun par fuze indicator
nahi hota.

Bracketing for Corrector

15. Jab 100 ki corrector value kisi fuze indicator par set ki jati hain to standard
conditions ke anusar har gun ke liye uski MV ke anusar fuze setting read ki jasakti hain.
Corrector ki value ko kam karke fuze setting kam aur badhakar fuze setting badhain ja
sakti hain. Brackting se jab observer corrector ki value pata karta hain yeh mojuda met
conditions ke liye effective hoti hain. Yeh “corrector of the movement” kahlati hain.
Small bracket corrector ki 8 units ka hota hain aur suvidhajanak long bracket 16 units ka
hota hain.

16. Observer niche likhe orders de kar brackting suru kar sakta hain :-

(a) “Corrector 100” Yeh aadesh tab diya jata hain jab weh complete
brackting procedure se corrector of the moment nikalna chahta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
177
(b) “Corrector…….” 100 ke alawa koi dusri value di jati hain jab observer
apne experience se ya pahle shoot ke result ko dekhte hue janta hain ki corrector
ki value orderes value ke aas – pas hain. Iske bad observer 4/8 units ke bracket
se suruwat karta hain.

17. Jaise hi short bracket lagai jati hain observer order karta hain “Raise Angle of
Sight, Corrector ….(split of the short bracket) one RGF. Yadi brackting ke dauran low air
burst milta hain tab “Raise A of S One RGF”. Niminlikhit examples se ranging ki
samapti par diye jane wale orders ke bare mein bataya gaya hain :-

Round Observation Orders

4 - “ADD 100, Number 3 1 RGF”.
5 - “Single gun/.......ranging”. “Corrector 100 DROP 50”.
6 Ground “Corrector 84”.
7 Air “Corrector 92”.
8 Air “Raise A of S. Corrector 96. One RGF”.

Bracketing by Alteration of Fuze Setting

18. Iska principle bhi bilkul same hain jo corrector se bracketing ke liye hain. Lekin
isme observer fuze setting mein actual alteration ka order karta hain eg “Lengthen point
8”. Fuze setting mein short bracket 0.4 aur long bracket 0.8 ka hota hain.

19. Ranging ke end mein diye jane wale niminlikhit orders se diye jane wale orders
clear ho jate hain :-

Round Observation Orders

4 “ADD 100. Number 3 1 RGF”.
5 “Single gun/...... ranging”. “Airburst. DROP 50”.
6 Ground “Shorten point 8”.
7. Air “Lengthen point 4”.
8. Air “Raise A of S. Lengthen point 2 One RGF”.

Adjusting the Mean Point of Burst

20. Bracketing process se fuze setting milti hain ya lagbhag sahi hoti hain. Iske bad
jab A of S raise kar di gai hain to observer iska anuman laga sakta hain ki HOB correct
hain aur ground par round ke splinters ke effect se yeh nirnay le sakta hain ki kya kisi
target grid correction ki jarurat hain. Alag alag equipments ke liye optimum height of
burst 11(b) ke anusar hain. Yadi MPB ki height ka anuman lagane mein koi difficulty
hain to OP officer ground aur air burst ke liye 4:2 ka ratio ke liye adjust karta hain.

21. MPB ka adjustment corrector ke mamle mein 4 units aur fuze setting ke mamle
mein 0.2 ki change aur jarurat padne par target grid correction ke sath iska order diya
jata hain.

Fire for Effect

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
178
22. Fire for effect appropriate quantity mein kiya jata hain.

End of Shoot

23. Target record kiya ja sakta hain lekin corrector ya fuze setting kewal “Fired” data
ke saman avdhi ke liye hi applicable hoga. Us samay ke bad proximity fuzes ke alawa
“corrector of the moment” ka order dekar airburst se engage kiya ja sakta hain. Iske bad
GPO corrector ko predict krega.

PART III – PROCEDURE AT THE GUN POSITION

24. Is procedure mein sadharan HE shoot se differences kewal nature of ammunition

ke karan hain. Yeh differences is prakar hain :-

(a) Airburst ammunition ki preparation, jiska aadesh shoot ke pahle hi diya jata
hain.

(b) Ranging gun ground burst se load ki jati hain.

(c) Fuze correction hasil karne hote hain.

(d) Airburst par change karne par yadi jaruri hain to non standard projectile
correction apply ki jati hain.

25. Is bhag mein yeh mana jayega ki fuze indicator ka istemal kiya ja raha hain. Agar
fuze indicators available nahi hain to uske bare mein part iv mein diya gaya hain.

The Fuze Indicator

26. Har ek gun ke liye fuze indicator diya gaya hain, charge aur nature of time fuze ke
liye. Sahi fuze setting hasil karne ke liye jin variables ko madhye najar rakha jata hain
weh is prakar hain :-

(a) MV . Range reader ko adopted MV par set karke.

(b) Non Standard Meteorological and Other Condition. Corrector scale ko

order kiye hue corrector par set kare.

(c) Range. Range reader ko GPO dwara order kiye gaye range plus position
correction par set kare.

(d) A of S. Aadesh kiye gaye corrector mein correction observe ki jati hain.

27. Iske bad mojuda halaton ke anusar gun, charge aur range ke against fuze setting
read ki jati hain.

Initial Orders

28. Nature of target “Battery Target” hota hain (jaisa uchit ho).

29. Iske bad ammunition orders hote hain. In orders mein niminlikhit shamil hain :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
179
(a) Fire for Effect ke liye required ammunition ka type “HE 213 airburst”.

(b) Har ek gun ke liye ready rakhe jane wale rounds ki quantity eg “Prepare 8
round per gun”.

(c) Ranging gun jis ammunition ka use karegi uska adesh eg. “Number 4 HE
117”. Udharan ke liye ek pura order is prakar ho sakta hain :-

(d) “HE 213 airburst – prepare 8 round per gun – charge 4 – Number 4 HE
117”.

30. Baki ke initial orders basic procedure ke anusar hi hain.

Ranging

31. OP officers ke orders ka samanay roop se palan kiya jata hain jaise “ADD/DROP
100 No…..1 RGF”. Yeh order sanket deta hain ki fuze setting ke liye bracketing ya
proximity fuze se fire for effect suru hone wala hain. Yadi observer “airburst” ka aadesh
deta hain aur gun ko khali karne ya HE ground burst fire karne ka aadesh chod deta
hain, to aise mein GPO ranging gun ko aadesh deta hain “1 RGF” aur report dega
“Number… ground burst”. Iske bad weh phir se observer ke orders ka palan karta hain.

Bracketing for Fuze Setting

32. Observer ka order yeh ho sakta hain “Corrector 100, Drop 50, single gun
ranging”. Iske bad GPO karwahi is prakar karta hain :-

(a) HE gound burst ya kisi galat ammunition se loaded guns ko last range aur
line par fire kiya jata hain. Yadi jaruri hain to ranging battery ka GPO OP ko report
deta hain jaise “shot 3 ground burst”.

(b) Woh aadesh deta hain “HE 213 Airburst Corrector 100”.

(c) Target grid correction plot kiya jata hain aur gun ko fresh switch ka aadesh
diya jata hain.

(d) Fresh range par fuze 213 ke liye projectile correction apply kiya jata hain
(eg. 105/37 IFG mein weight mein 0.18 Kg ki kami hain).

(e) “Number…….Ranging” ka aadesh kiya jata hain aadesh kiye hue method
of fire ke anusar.

33. Iske bad ke rounds ke liye OP se mile fresh corrector ka aadesh guns ko upar (d)
ke elevation ke sath diya jata hain jab tak ki observer target grid correction ka aadesh
nahi deta.

Raising A of S

34. “Raise A of S, Corrector……1RGF” ka aadesh milne par GPO us equipment ke

liye optimum height of burst (given in Paragraph 11(b) ) ke liye map range ke anusar A
of S raise karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
180
Fire for Effect

35. Fire for effect ke dauran target grid correction ka kam Paragraph 34(c) aur (d) ke
anusar kiya jata hain aur corrector mein koi badlav hone par sidhe guns ko pass kiya
jata hain.

End of Shoot

36. Yadi aadesh diya gaya hain to target ko Section 73-74 ke anusar record kiya jata
hain (Corrector ki value fired dataki value ke sath hi samapt ho jati hain).

BHAG IV – MISCELLANEOUS

Proximity Fuze

37. Jab VT fuze ke sath round fire kiye ja rahe hain us samay upar Bhag III mein diye
gaye procedure mein antar is prakar hain :-

(a) Fuze setting ke liye bracketing ki jarurat nahi hoti.

(b) Non-standared projectile correction ko false range mein pahle se hi shamil

kiya gaya hain.

(c) Fire for effect suru karne / MPB ko adjust karne se pahle A of S ko raise
karne ki jarurat nahi hoti.

38. OP se “VT” “1RGF” ka aadesh milne par procedure is prakar hain :-

(a) Yadi jaruri hain to un guns ko fire kar diya jata hain jo galat ammunition se
load hain.

(b) GPO VT ammunition ka aadesh deta hain eg “HE VT 7A”.

(c) Yadi koi target grid correction hain to plot ki jayegi aur guns ko fresh switch
pass ki jayegi.

(d) Fresh range ke samne range table se false range liya jayega.

(e) False range aur one RGF ka aadesh guns ko diya jata hain.

Fuze Setting for the Range Tables

39. Jab guns par fuze indicator available nahi hota tab fuze setting range table se
prapt ki jati hain. Yeh fuze setting kewal standard conditions mein range table MV guns
ke liye hi lagu hoti hain. GPO MV mein change ke liye jaruri allowances nikalta hain aur
dusre non-standard conditions ke liye allowance observer ke bracketing mein shamil ke
liye chod deta hain.

40. Fuze Corrections. Observed fire ke samay jab bhi fuze setting mein koi bhi
change ki jarurat ho, har ek gun ko alag – alag fuze setting ka aadesh karne se bachne
ke liye GPO initial orders mein ya iske bad jitni jaldi sambhav ho “Fuze corrections” ka

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
181
aadesh deta hain. Is fuze correction mein Non-standard MV aur position correction ka
allowances shamil hota hain. Yeh correction har ek No 1 dwara shoot ke dauran pass
kiye gaye fuze setting mein shamil kiya jata hain. Fuze corrections ko predicted range
par calculate kiya jata hain.
Example – 105/37 mm IFG HE 213 Charge 3.
TABLE XXI – FUZE CORRECTIONS
Shell HE Fuze 213 Charge
3
Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
Sub-section letter
MV M/s 379 369 359
1. Difference MV from standard +10 - -10
2. Range required by observer 8000 8000 8000
3. Position correction -25 +50 +100
4. Fuze correction for position -0.15 +0.30 +0.60
correction
5. Fuze correction for MV -0.80 - +0.90
6. Total fuze correction (4+5) Shorten Lengthen Lengthen
1.0 0.3 1.5

41. Iske bad sabhi guns ko pass ki jane wali fuze setting OP officer dwara required
range ke samne range table se read ki jati hain. Niminlikhit paragraphs mein upar diye
gaye Para 34, 35 aur 36 mein batai gai jaruri procedure mein variations diye gaye hain.

Bracketing for Fuze Setting

42. OP se aadesh ho sakta hain “Air burst, Drop 50 Number…….Ranging”. GPO is

prakar se karwahi karta hain :-

(a) Ground burst ya galat ammunition se loaded guns ko last line aur elvation
par fire ki jati hain. Jarurat padne par kewal ranging GPO hi OP ko report deta
hain eg. “Shot 3 ground burst”.

(b) Air burst ammunition ka aadesh deta hain eg. “HE 213 airburst”.

(c) Target grid correction plot ki jati hain aur guns ko fresh switch pas ki jati
hain.

(d) Projectile correction sahit fresh range ke samne range table se fuze setting
read ki jati hain aur guns ko pass ki jati hain eg. “Fuze 26.7”. Guns pass kiye
gaye fuze setting mein apni fuze correction shamil karti hain.

(e) Iske bad guns ko fresh range pass ki jati hain.

(f) “Number………ranging” ka aadesh diya jata hain.

43. Iske bad ke rounds ke liye observer dwara order kiye gaye “shotrten / Lengthen
point….” (upar Para 41) ko GPO fuze setting mein jo upar (d) mein mili hain use shamil
karta hain. Sahi elevation ke sath guns ko fresh fuze setting pass ki jati hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
182
44. Udharan :-
(a) OP “Shorten Point 8”
(b) GPO “Fuze 25.9 .................. (last elevation)”.
(c) OP “Lengthen point 4”
(d) GPO “Fuze 26.3 .................. (last elevation)”.
Fire for Effect

45. Fire for effect ke dauran target grid correction ka karya Para 44(c), (d) aur (e) ke
anusar kiya jata hain aur fuze setting mein koi bhi changing Para 45 mein bataye anusar
kiya jata hain.

Corrector of the Moment

46. Correction of the Moment / Fuze setting malum karne ke liye ek alternative drill jo
time saving bhi hain aur accurate bhi, niche di gai hain :-

(a) Outline Procedure. Jab OP officer ranging gun ko target par adjust kar
raha hota hain, GPO by convention dusri gun ka prayog karte hue corrector of the
moment est karta hain. Jab tak OP officer ranging puri kar leta hain tab tak GPO
corrector of the moment ke sath taiyar ho jata hain. Iske bad OP officer raise A of
S ke sath sidhe hi MPB / FFE ko adjust karta hain.

(b) OP End. Yadi yeh procedure istemal kiya jata hain to OP officer nature of
target mein ek aisa surakshit square shamil karta hain jisme GPO corrector of the
moment est karta hain. OP se aadesh is prakar hota hain :-

“Battery Target Airburst Square 1556”

“185656 Ht 800m. Oscar 52 , Enemy in trenches, Fire”.
At the split of short bracket OP officer orders
“Raise A of S, One RGF” (Presuming that corrector of moment has been
established by the GPO).
(c) Gun End.

(i) “………..Target airburst square……” ka aadesh GPO ko yeh batata

hain ki use gun end se abtaye gaye square mein firing karke corrector of
the moment establishment karna hain. Corrector of the moment est karne
ke liye GPO dusri gun ka chunao karta hain aur uske piche director setup
karta hain. GPO weh bearing, range aur A of S select karega jis par gun
se airburst dikhain dega (diye gaye square mein). Iske bad corrector of the
moment est karne ki karwahi battery subaltern ki dekh – rekh mein hoga.

(ii) Yadi OP dwara HE ground burst ka short bracket hasil karne tak
corrector of the moment est nahi hua hain to GPO progress aur delay ki
report OP officer ko is prakar dega “corrector of the moment negative,
delay 120”. Iske bad OP officer yeh decision lega ki gun end se corrector
of the moment est hone tak wait kare ya khud corrector of the moment est
kare.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
183
(iii) Mike target hone par adjutant non ranging battery ko gun end se
firing karte hue corrector of the moment est karne ke liye nominate karega.

Ricochet Airburst

47. Projectile ke burst hone se pahle bouncing ko hi ricochet kaha jata hain. Yeh
khas tarika 130mm gun mein HE shell fuzes V429 ke sath open target ya tranch mein
bina kisi upri cover ke hon. Iske asar se enemy ka moral bahut jyada toot jata hain.

48. Ricochet fire ki sambhavna nirdharit karte samay yeh jaruri hain ki target end par
angle of slope ke liye uchit choot dete hue angle of impact ka pata lagaya jaye. Ground
targets ke liye yeh value 2 degree se 20 degrees aur water born targets ke liye 2
degrees se 10 degrees ke andar hona chahiye. Jis adhiktam range tak ricochet hota
hain weh range range table se liya ja sakta hain aur “R” letter yeh limit batata hain jis
tak kisi bhi ek charge se ricochet fire kiya ja sakta hain.

49. Ricochet firing ki kuch visheshtayen niminlikhit hain :-

(a) Ricochet firing us samay ki jati hain jab target area mein 50 percent se
jyada ricochet hasil kiye ja sakte hon. Iske liye ranging ke dauran ricochet burst
aur ground burst ka record rakha jana chahiye. Phir bhi yadi ricochet bursts 50
percent se kam hon to ricochet fire karne ki salah nahi di jati aur OP ko chahiye
wapis normal ground burst kare. Iske liye OP officer aadesh karega “Direct action
Oscar Bravo ADD 50 repeat”.

(b) Point of impact se burst 2 se 20 meter uchain par aur 50 meter door hote
hain.

(c) OP officer point of burst ke reference se corrections order karta hain na ke

point of impact se aur MPI ko target se line BT par 50 meter short rakhega.

50. OP officer nature of target ka aadesh is prakar deta hain “Battery Target Rico” OP
officer dwara charge ka aadesh karna ek samanaya baat hain. GPO guns ko
ammunition orders dete samay usme aadesh “Delay” shamil karta hain jaise “HE V429
Delay Charge 2”. Phir No 1 selector “Z” par aur cap off fire karega.

51. Target Record. QE reduction ke bad mile fired range mein 50 meter add kiya
jata hain. Yeh range reduced co-ordinates hasil karne ke liye use kiya jata hain. “As
Fired” target hone ki sthiti mein iski jarurat nahi padti.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
184
SECTION 54 - REGISTRATION SHOOTS

General

1. Sabhi registration shoot tgt ki takniki jankari haasil karne ke liye kiye jaate hain
taki samay aane par tgt to re-engage kiya ja sake.Aam taur per ye woh tgt hote hain
jinko neutralize karne ki zarurat hoti hain.Registration shoot nimn teen prakar se liya ja
sakta hain:-

(a) Registration of the Zone. Iska varnan sec -46 mein kiya jaa chuka
hain.

(b) Registeration of point. Iska uddeshya hain, shooting ke dwara kisi point
ka grid ref, ya non std met condition ke correction ke bare mein jaankari hasil
karna (point ko datum point ya witness point ke liye register karna).

(c) Registration of Concentration. Iska uddeshya hain ki sabhi gun jo tgt ko

engage kar rahe hain tgt ki disha mein ho, har gun ka indl rd dekh kar ya phir
kuch chune hue guns ka fire dekh kar.

2. Is section mein ye mana gaya hain ki OP offr ko ya to aadesh mil chuke hain ya
nahin to usne registration ki vidhi ka chunav swayam kiya hain.

Registration of a Point

3. Tgt woh bindu hogi jo OP offr ko indicate kiya gaya ho ya nahin to usne swayam
hi uska chunav kiya ho.Dono mein se kisi bhi sthiti mein yeh woh point hoga jiska grid
ref tgt ko paribhashit karta ho,yani ki , nimnlikhit mein se ek:-

(a) Kisi samanya concentration ka kendra.

(b) Kisi standard linear concentration ka kendra bindu.

(c) Koi aisa point jo ki datum pt ya witness pt ke roop mein chuna gaya ho.

(d) Pt H8 ya koi vibhinn pt jo ki MFDT ke aadesh mein shaamil ho.

4. Upar likhe sabhi binduon mein (d) ke siway, tgt ka grid ref jo tgt record se haasil
hua hain, sabhi ko vitrit kiya jayega. Corrector of moment ko bhi vitrit kiya jayega.

5. Jab tgt ko kisi aur samay par engage kiya jaa raha ho tab fire mein correction
dena sambhav nahi hoga, aise halat mein IN shoot ke ranging phase ke samay se bhi
jyada accuracy ki awashyakta hoti hain.Yeh karwahi karne ke liye ek troop ki zarurat hoti
hain.Agar samay izazat de, to ranging ke karwahi mein MPI ko tgt pe adjust karne ke
liye bty fire ka istemaal karna chahiye. Agar corrector for time HE ke awashakta hain to,
MPB tab tak adjust karna chahiye jab tak 2 air burst aur 1 ground burst haasil nahin ho
jate. Agar samay ka aabhav hain aur accuracy ki kami swikar ki ja sakti hain to, OP offr
ko ek RGF se aur fuze ke liye ek short bracket se santusht hona padega.

6. Short bracket haasil ho jane par, OP offr troop ke MPI ko bty fire ke rds per adjust
karta hain suitable interval ke sath.Isse woh acche se accha judgement karne mein

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
185
saksham ho jayega jo ki use tab nahin milti yadi woh gun fire se MPI adjust karta raha
hota.Jaise hi troop ka MPI adjust ho jata hain tgt record kar liya jayega.Yadi kisi rare
case mein OP offr ye dekhta hain ki “ADD/DROP 50” ka correction round ko point ke us
paar le jata hain to OP offr “ADD/DROP 25” ka correction dega.

7. Battery fire ka first round me agar do non ranging guns, ranging guns se different
fire kar rahi hain to, OP officer ko ek non ranging gun fresh ranging karni chahiye. Wah
GPO ko uska prakar aur uska magnitude ke bare me batyega. Wah current data par
fresh ranging open kar sakata hain (jo round ko produce karta hain gun concerned ke
pichle round ke nazdik) ya fresh indication target ka. Yadi registration point raat ko star
shell illumination ka istemal karna hain tho nature of target “troop target registration obsn
by star” hoga . ek troop aur ek gun dusre troop se bhag lenge. Dusre troop ki gun star
shell fire karega.

8. Jab corrector of moment bhi pata hain tab original ranging gun ko height of burst
ke liye range kar dete hain. Jab corrector ka ek chota bracket unit line of sight par milta
hain tab angle of sight ko raise kar deta hain aur troop ka salvo ranging se MPB ko
height of burst pe adjust kar deta hain ,correction of units ka corrector pe.

9. Correct burst ka experience or comparison gharo aur pedo se aur farak corrector
bracketing ke dauran OP ko madad karega, fuze zone ka andaza lagane mein jab MPB
optimum height of burst ke nazdeek expect kiya ja sakta hain

10. Recording the Target. Jab ranging aur adjusting pure ho jata hain tab target
aur corrector of moment record karte hain, nimnlikhit points ko OP officer dhyan rakhta
hain:-

(a) Adhiktar use target letter aur No pata hoga to wah use order mein include
karega. Agar target linear concentration,smoke screen ,datum/witness point ko
jaahir kare to wah use apni order mein indicate karega.

(b) Agar registration short bracket paar rokte hain to woh “ADD/DROP 50” ke
correction par record karega aur yaadi corrector of moment diya hain toh “ diye
hue corrector pe”.

(c) Jo order use milta hain woh yeh indicate karega ki usne target ko “as fired
record karna hain. Yeh jahir karta hain ki “As Fired “ GR circulate kiya jaayega.

(d) Dusra registration ko shuru karne se pahle use “Target….. recorded” report
ka intezar kar na chahiye varna target ka record lost ho jayega. Ye report
darshata hain ki guns se record GPO ke pas pahonch gaya hain aur check ho
gaya hain aur GPO further fire orders per action karne ke liye taiyar hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
186
11. Registration of a point ka example table xxii aur xxiii mein diya hua hain

TABLE XXII – REGISTRATION OF A POINT

OP Officer’s Orders Observations Remarks

“Troop Target Registration” The ranging point is a hut in
“187 202 Ht 625 Meters” the centre of the area.
“Oscar 22”
“Defended Locality”

“Fire” LEFT.
“Right 200” Short.
“ADD 400 Over.
“DROP 200” Over.
“DROP 100” Short.
“ADD 50, Battery Fire 20” Number 1 and 2 short. Number 2 has been
Number 3 over. MPI ranging.
Correct.
“Record as Target M6871”
“Stand Easy”

TABLE XXIII – REGISTRATION OF DATUM POINT AND

ESTABLISHING OF THE CORRECTOR OF THE MOMENT

OP Officer’s Orders Observations Remarks

“Troop Target Registration Airburst” GR aur target number
“Target U 1800, Oscar 179” ‘Datum shoot, Over RIGHT of datum points Bty
Fire” mein already
recorded hain
“Left 100 DROP 100” Short
“ADD 50 Battery Fire 20” “Datum Point” MPI correct Number 1 ranging
Corrector 90 1 Ranging “ Ground hain
“Corrector 74” Air Pause till GPO se
“Corrector 82” Air gun data of Datum
point record hotha
hain.
“Raise A of S, Salvo ranging” 2 Air, 1 ground
“Corrector 86”
“Record as corrector of the moment”
“Stand Esay”

Registration of a Concentration

12. Target ek area ya ek linear feature, ya ek point bhi ho saktha hain,jaha

neutralization purpose ke liye fire direct kiya ja saktha hain. Yah OP offr ya uska artillery
commandar ya supported arm commenders point karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
187
13. Sabi Guns jinka fire eventual concentration shoot mein hissa lene ke liye hain
woh shoot mein hissa lenge jab ek regiment ya jyada istemal hoga. Sirf ek
representative ke liye fire karegi. Engagement ke liye orders same registration ki tatah hi
honge. Is section mein yeh dealt nahi hain.

14. Initial Orders. Agar engagement orders shoot ke douran diya jatha hain, the
phrase”Fire Plan” aur target number (normally known the OP offr in this case ) initial
orders mein include karna chahiye taki GPO orders ko note karne ke liye taiyaar rahe.
Agar yah intended nahi hain to nature of target simple”….target” hoga. “Registration”
word ko use nahi kia jayega kyoki yah use karne se GPO ranging Gun(s) ko concentrate
kar sakta hain, but it is helpful to the GPO to include in the description of target some
phrase such as”Registering for fire plan” ya “Registering target P 1872”.

15. Registering with One Battery. Shoot short bracket tak same IN shoot ki tarah
hi liya jayega. The ranging gun aur ranging point normal manner ki tarah select kiya
jayega.

16. MPI ko phir battery fire par adjust kiya jaayega suitable interval ke sath taki
individual guns ka fire ko distinguish kiya jaa sake. Achchhe conditions mein normal
interval (5 seconds)kafi ho saktha hain magar 10 ya 15 seconds better hain. Agar wind
RIGHT ki taraf se hain toh it is advisable to order battery fire from the LEFT.

17. MPI adjust kar ne ka uddesh hain ki sare guns target pe effective hain.One round
of battery fire order karna hain, aur OP officer nein individual point of impact of each gun
aur general effect of the fire of the battery dono ko observe karna hain.

18. Pahle, OP officer yeh consider karta hain ki bty ka MPI puri taraha se tgt ke
centre mein hain. Agar nahi hain to, correction diya jayega aur round ya rounds of Bty
fire , fire kar ke MPI correct kiya jayega.

19. Individual guns ke effectiveness ko judge karne ke liye registering a point ki tarah
gun ka zone, Bty frontage ke karan round girne ka antar ko dhyan dena chahiye. Agar
koi ek gun ,zone of the gun ke karan MPI pura prabhavit nahi hain to pahle rd ko repeat
karna chahiye. Agar woh rd pechhle rd ko confirm karta hain to us round ko correction
dekar fire karvana hain. Aise correction ko tgt ke uncovered position par ya tgt ki centre
par direct karna hain.

20. Agar koi gun ka round se galati evident ho jata hain us gun ka galati ka nature aur
magnitude ko order “Error at …..”, dena behethar hain. “…..now correct” ki report aane
par gun ko phir fire karvana hain. Agar time kam hain to gun ko correction dekar fire kar
ke us ko correct karna hain. Agar yeh kiya hain to shoot ke akhir mein GPO ko is galati
ke bare mein inform karna chahiye.

Regiment Ya Us se Bada Fire Unit Ka Istemal

21. General. Is prakar ke shoot ka ek hi pharak hain ki ek battery se bhi jyada guns
ka fire dekha jayega.

22. Jab regiment ya jyada guns engage kar rahe hain to chotte inaccuracies ka effect
nahi hoga, aur aam taur per yeh jaruri nahi hain ki “ranging checks” of ek gun ya ek

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
188
ranging salvo per bty ya ek div ke ek regt se jyada diya jaye, magar sabhi ek hi grid
mein hona chahiye.

23. Ranging Checks. Is ka aim hain ek fire unit ka fire as a whole adjust karna , thaki
yeh yakin ko hi galti nahi kiya gaya ho aur ranging ke dauran diye gaye corrections ko
har individual fire unit dwara sahi tarike se follow kiya gaya hain. Niche diye huye
procedure regimental concentration ke liye hain. Agar Div artillery concentration hain to
“regimental” shabdh “battery” ko replace karega:-

(a) Agar ranging bty ne middle of short bracket mein fire nahi kiya hain to ek
final round ranging battery dwara fire kiya jata hain. Phir ek round baaki bache
hue battery se fire kiye jaate hain. Is ke liye “……(call sign)ranging repeat” order
diya jata hain. Yahan par last method of ranging lagoo hoga.

(b) Agar pura fire unit ka MPI needs correcting, OP Offr satisfy hone tak
correction deke fire repeat kiya jayega. Provided saare battery ka ek hi jagah par
fire ho raha hain tab registration ko complete maana jayega.

(c) Agar koi ek Non ranging battery, ranging battery ki jagah par fire karta hain
lekin doosra ranging battery us jagah par fire nahin karta hain tab galti us battery
mein hain aur is samay us mistake ko correct karne ke liye order , eg. “Error of
RIGHT 200 at …..(call sign)” diya jaayega. Jab report”……now correct” mil jata
hain tab galat karyawahi karne wale battery ko dubara se fire kiya jata hain.

(d) Agar both non ranging btys fire sath mein hain par ek hi jagah par nahi hon
, to ranging bty mein mistake ho sakta hain. Agar, ya sirf two btys hain aur samay
kam hain, fresh target indication kiya jayega aur phir ranging kiya jayega.

24. Jaise in bty concentration, care must be taken to distinguish the natural, the
expected,aur kabi desirable dispersion of the fire in a regimental ya higher concentration
from the mistakes. Single rd fire se salvo fire kam mislead kar sakta hain. Corrections to
individual fire units, either to remedy chhote inaccuracies ya mistake ko deal karna,
applicapble nahin hain sirf met period mein applicable hain.

25. Registration by Night. Regimental ya larger fire units ke sath raat ko

registration karna, star shell ko observation ke liye istemal karne par niminlikhit
procedure follow kiya jayega :-

(a) Initial Orders. Aise shoots ke liye initial order hoga “Mike/Uniform tgt
Observation by star”.

(b) Sabhi batteries, yeh maan ke ki unhe ranging battery ke liye chuna jaa
sakta hain, star aur HE shell ka data nikalenge. Par star ammunition tab tak load
nahi kiya jayega jab tak ranging battery ko nahi chuna jata hain.

(c) Tarika. Nimnlikhit tarika aapnaya jayega:-

(i) OP officer sahi HOB ko lane ke liye star ko adjust karega, saahi
hone par wah “Star Adjusted” ka order dega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
189
(ii) HE ground burst ke sath ranging ki jayegi, single gun ya salvo
ranging battery ka Istemaal karte hue. He shell ke pahle star shell burst
hona chahiye jo ki time of flight par nirbhar karta hain.

(iii) Ranging battery ke ek baar adjust hone par, OP officer use rest ka
aadesh deta hain aur doosri batteriyon ka ranging check karta hain jiska
tareeka para 23 me bataya gaya hain. Ranging bty ko rest milne par bhi
star gun fire karte rahegi jab tak use “Number --- HE” ya “Cancel
observation by star” ka aadesh nahi milta hain.

(iv) Agar Mike ya usse bade targets hain aur jab battery ya regiment jo
HE fire kar rahi hain wah Star shell fire karne waali battery se alag hain,
tab neeche likhe hue tarike ke mutabik karwaahi hogi:-

(aa) Mike targets ke liye, HE fire karne wali battery ka GPO yeh
dekhega ki sahi “interval Star HE” banaya hain, jo doosri battery ko
sahi samay par star fire karwa kar kiya jata hain ( fire order line
par/regiment fire order net par)

(ab) Uniform targets ke liye, regiment ka adjutant, jiski battery HE

fire kar rahi hain Star shell ki firing bhi karwayega.

26. Target Par Fire Ko Baatna. Agar target chhota hain, to line of fire ko
concentrate kar sakte hain. Agar target itna bada hain ya aise aakar ka hain ya aisa
khada hain ki use simple concentration se nahi barbad kar sakte hain, tab Section 29,
para 25(b) ke anusar karwai ki jayegi.

Time Fuzes Ka Upyog

27. Ek Battery Ke Sath Registration. Agar HE time fuze ke sath istemal kiya jana
hain, to corrector ya fuze length ka chhota bracket banana hoga. Is ke liye MPI aise
adjust karte hain:-

(a) Jab Splinters Ka Asar Dikh Sakta Hain. Ranging ke dauran,

chhote bracket ko bante hue OP officer change of ammunition ka order karta hain
aur corrector ya fuze length ke liye Chhota bracket banata hain. Aisa karne ke
bad wah MPI aur MPB battery fire par ek sath adjust karta hain.

(b) Jab Splinters Ka Asar Dikhne Ki Sambhavna Kam Hain. Ranging

khatam karne ke bad OP officer pahle battery ka MPI adjust karta hain. Uske bad
wah change of ammunition ka Order karta hain, aur corrector ya fuze length ka
Chhota bracket banane ke liye wapas single gun ranging karata hain. Iske bad
OP officer battery fire ke rounds ke zariye Battery ka MPB adjust karta hain.
Registration of battery concentration airburst ammunition ke dwara , dono, jab
splinters ka asar dikhta hain aur jab nahi dikhta hain ka Udaharan table XXV me
diya hain.

28. Use of Regimental or Larger Fire Units. OP officer ranging battery ke sath
short bracket firstly establish karta hain aur tab short bracket split hone par doosre
battery se ground burst ammunition ke sath ranging check fire karata hain. Wah tab
ranging battery ko revert karta hain, airburst ammunition change karta hain aur salvo

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
190
ranging me optimum height of burst achieve karne ke liye fuze length adjust karta hain.
Uske bad wah doosare batteries se salvo ranging fire karta hain, Agar jaruri hain HOB
ko adjust karta hain. Registering a regimental airburst. Concentration ka example table
XXV mein hain. Larger airburst concentration seldom hoga. Ise as a point register karne
ke case me yeh bahut usual hoga aur tab corrector of the moment ko establish karen.

TABLE XXIV – REGISTERING A CONCENTRATION USING AIRBURST

OP Officer’s Orders Observations Remarks

Battery Concentration
“Battery Target Airburst” “176406 Ht 200 Ranging carried out with
m” Ground Burst.
“Oscar 228”
“Registering Target P 6875”
“Troops in open trenches”
“Fire” Short.
“ADD 400” Over.
(Est of short Bracket)
“DROP 200”
“ADD 100”
When Effect of Splinters is Likely to be Seen
“Corrector 100 DROP 50” Ground.
“Corrector 84” Air
“Corrector 92” Air

“Raise A of S Corrector 96 Battery Fire 10” “MPI correct Number 3 and 5

short”
“1, 2, 4 and 6 rest ADD 50 Repeat”
“Record as Target. Stand Easy”
When Effect of Splinters is not Likely to be Seen
“DROP 50. Battery Fire 10” MPI correct. Number 1 and 4
over.
“2, 3, 5 and 6 Rest DROP 50 Repeat” Number 1 and 4 correct.
“Take Post. Corrector 100, Single gun Air.
ranging”
“Corrector 116” Ground.
“Corrector 108” Ground.
‘Raise A of S, Corrector 104, 1 RGF”. MPB Correct.
“Record as Target, Stand Easy”.
Mike Concentration
“Mike Target Airburst”
“187605 HT 3000 meters”.
“Oscar 272” 63 reports ready
“Registering Target M 7807” Over

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
191
“63 Ranging, Fire”
“DROP 400” Short
“ADD 200” Over
“DROP 100” Correct
“43 Ranging Repeat” Correct
“23 Ranging Repeat” Correct
“63 Salvo Ranging ” Height of burst
Raise A of S. Corrector100. ideal.
“43 Ranging Repeat” “23 Ranging “Record as tgt. Stand Easy”.
Height of burst ideal. Repeat”
Height of burst
ideal

SECTION 55 - STANDARD LINEAR CONCENTRATION

PART A – INTRODUCTION

1. Standard linear concenrtration MPsI ya MPsB ki line hain jiski lambai adesh ke
anusar 300, 400 ya 500 meters hoti hain. Har ek fire unit ki guns ki MPsI ya MPsB
concentration ki lambai par barabar jagah chod kar bati hui hain. Is concentration ka
adesh hum tab dethe hain jab hume target par line of fire, ek sidhi line par karni hain.
Udharan jaise sadhak par ya nadhi ke kinare par. Parantu linear fire ka istemal
immediate neutralization shoot ke liye nahi kiya jayega. Nimna likhit table mein minimum
fire unit di gayi hain jo ki alagh alagh length par engage karne ke liye chayiye.

TABLE –XXV

300 Meters 400 Meters 500 Meters

Light Regiment One regiment ……. …….

Mountain, Field and Para Two Batteries One Regiment ……..

Field regiment

Medium, Heavy Motar or One battery Two batteries One Regt

Heavy regiments

2. Agar volume of fire jyada chahiye aur guns available hain to badhi fire units ka
istemal kiya ja sakta hain.

3. Koi bhi linear tgt jis ki frontage 300 meters se kam ho, use jaldi se aur jyada achi
tarah se engage kar sakte hain fire for effect with lines of fire parallel ke dauran
corrections dekar.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
192
PART B - PROCEDURE AT THE OP

4. Concentration area ki layout uski lambayi, centre point aur bearing along the line
of MPsI aur MPsB se darsaya ja sakta hain. Bearing de diya jata jaise observer ko dikta
hain ya agar tgt observer ki line of sight ke saat OP se door ja raha ho.

5. Standard linear concentration ko niche diye gaye tariko se register kiya ja sakta
hain:-

(a) Registering as a Point. Ek linear concentration ko hamesha ek point ki

tarah register kiya jata hain, jab bhi tgt ek battery se badi fire unit se
engage karna ho. Is ka varnan sec-54 mien kiya gaya hain. Recording ke liye
order hain ”Centre point Record as target…….” (agar linear layout initial order
mein diya ja chuka hain) or as “Centre Point, bearing……….metres. Record
as target………..” (agar linear layout nahi diya gaya hain).

(b) Registration of a Concentration. Yeh procedure tab istemal hota hain

jab linear target ko ek battery ke dwara engage karte hain.

(c) Linears using Airburst Ammunition. Jab standard linear concentration

ko airburst ammunition se register karte hain, sec-53 mein diya gaya
procedure istemal kiya jayega.

6. Procedure For The Registration of a Linear as Concentration. Standard

linear Concentration ke conduct ke liye nimnlikhit points hain:-

(a) Phrase “Linear”nature of target mein samil karte hain. Agar is stage mein
OP officer bearing deta hain to FFE mein karwai jaldi expect kiya jata hain.
GPO “………Target Linear “ ke hukum par ranging gun/troop ko concentrate karta
hain.

(b) Ranging centre point ke upar short bracket tak ki jati hain.

(c) Order is form mein diya jata hain ”Centre point (at….) (target grid correction
if applicable) Bearing………..”. Layout of linear ek round gun fire se confirm kar
sakte hain.Is order ke saat order for establishment of short bracket for corrector /
fuze setting aur adjustment of MPB jab time fuze HE istemal hota hain tab bhi de
sakte hain.

(d) Individual guns ko correction dene mein linear shoot mein simple
concentration se bhi jyada savdhani ki jaroorat hain jab tak requirement establish
nahi ho jata.Is tarah ki correction CPs mein asani se handle nahi hoti aur
individual gun ke MPI mein farakh aa sakta hain CPs ki galti ke kaaran.

(e) CPs mein koi bhi dikat nahin hoti jab target grid correction ko as a whole
apply kiya jata hain. Linear ke bearing mein koi bhi alteration ho to delay ho
sakta hain lekin agar fire dikhata hain ki bearing 20 degrees (350 mils) ya use
jyada se galat hain to nayi bearing di jani jaroori hain. Agar samay hain to aur
jyada rounds battery/ gunfire se dekhi jani chahiye.

(f) Agar fire for effect turant nahi chahiye to target record kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
193
PART C – PROCEDURE AT THE GUN POSITION
7. Concentration ki position uske center point ki location, length aur uske bearing se
define ki jaati hain.
8. Ek regiment ke guns ka standard failav kisi bhi linear concentration ke frontage ka
diagram figure 19 mein niche diya gaya hain.

P,Q, R BATTERIES
6 GUN BATTERIES 6 5 4 3 2 1
CENTRE POINT

P & Q BATTERIES
LIGHT REGIMENT
6 5 4 3 2 1
CENTRE POINT
Figure – 19

9. CP mein standard linear concentration fire karne ka procedure Mike aur Higher
concentration fire karne ka jaisa hain, siway nimnalikhit ke ilawa:-

(a) GPO ranging gun ko battery centre par concentrate karega.

(b) FFE par data check karne ka tarika slightly different hain.

10. CP mein Kaam

(a) TA -1 gun 1,2,3 & 6 ke liye position correction & conc nikalta hain aur TA-2
gun 1,4,5,6 ke liye, aur woh data ko programme shoot form me note karta hain.

(b) Agar linear ka bg diya hain GPO clockwise angle check karta hain TAs ke
line aur range ke liye displacement correction nikalne se pehle. TA1aur TA2
No.1,2,3,6 aur 1,4,5 & 6 ke liye Opening data par displacement correction nikalte
hain aur programme shoot form mein note karte hain.

(c) Observed fire mein, OP ke order “centre pt bearing ……..deg……metre

par GPO ranging gun ko ‘NO------ REPORT Bg aur Elev’ ka order deta hain.
Yeh bg aur elevation arty board ke data se position correction aur concentration
ke amount se alag ho sakta hain agar nahi to troop leader gun ko check karta
hain aur is me se concentration aur position correction nikal deta hain aur ye
centre to centre data ban jata hain.

(d) TA1 aur TA2 centre to centre data ki bearing aur range, programme shoot
form me note karta hain displacement correction ko nikal kar us me bhar diya jata
hain.

(e) TAs ab apni apni respective guns ke liye total bearing and range nikalta
hain.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
194
(f) GPO No 1 aur No 6 gun ke puri bearing and range ko compare karta hain .
Yeh data agar CFA se nikala gaya hain tab 20 min line ke liye aur 30 meters
range ke liye milna chahiye, agar DC se nikala gaya toh 10 minutes line aur 10
meters range ke liye.

(g) GPO ab “cancel posn corrections” ka order deta hain aur final bearing and
range sabhi guns ko programme shoot form se pass karta hain.

(h) GPO gun ko fire karwata hain aur zaroori reports deta hain

(j) Automated FCI ke sath jo bearing aur elevation gun ko pass hote hain
woh CPSF par direct likte hain. Programme shoot form ka istemal nahi kiya jata
hain.

11. Standard Linear Concentration Ko Nikalna. Engagement ke bad standard

linear conc ko move karna tabhi practical hain ki conc wahi pass ho jo CP mein
conversion ke bad sabhi gun par barabar lagt hain e.g, oscar 280 RIGHT 200 yeh
corrn centre ke data par lagta hain aur bearing aur range me jo anter hain woh guns ko
pass kiya jata hain. e.g, “More 15 minutes ADD 150”.

SECTION 56 – REGIMENTAL AND HIGHER TARGETS

PART I – INTRODUCTION

1. Do ya do se jyada batteries simultaneously same target par fire karna ho to

nature of target ko target record letter se derive kiya jata hain eg.

“Mike Target” – regt ke sabhi bty.

“Uniform Target”– do ya adhik regt ya alag regts ki btys.

2. Sabhi unit ke fire ko milane ka natija:-

(a) Badha tgt engage ho sakta hain jaise 400 by 400 meter (uniform tgt) aur
250 by 250 meter (mike tgt).

(b) Kam samay me jyada fire tgt par daal sakte hain.

3. Shoot nuetralisation, smk screen ya airburst ke sath lie ja sakte hain. Uniform tgt
simple conc par kam karte hain

4 Procedure In Principles Par Nirbar Hain:-

(a) Observer ke pas kitne autority hain ie:-

(i) Ordinary Observer. Adjutant battery, tgt number aur

ammunition allot karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
195
(ii) Authorised Observer. Artillery cdr fire unit, tgt number aur
ammunition allot karta hain. Yeh kisi khaas kaam ke liye diya jata hain aur
is waqt kisi ki permission lene ki zarurat nahin hain. Aagar tgt No nahi milta
to observer apne block mein se de sakta hain

(b) Ek special signal procedure ka use kiya jata hain.

(c) CPs par extra checks kiye jaate hain.

Procedure

5. Shoot niche diye huye tarike se liya jata hain :-

(a) OP apne initial orders Adjutant ko deta hain. Orders samanya roop se
radio par pass kiye jaate hain. Agar OP officer ko sirf do bty chahiye to woh ise
apne initial orders mein hi specify karta hain, e.g. “25, Mike target, 63 stand
easy”.

(b) Adjutant observer ke initial orders ko phir se padhata hain.

(c) Fire units sun rahe hote hain. Adjutant OP officer ke sare orders regiment
fire order line par repeat karta hain jo ki fire unit dwara acknowledge kiya jata
hain.

(d) Asadharan sthitio mein jab ki regiment fire order line batteries ke failav
ya koi aur karan se maujud nahi hain tab batteries apne orders aur unka
acknowledgement radio par hi karte hain ya agar maujud hain to adjutant orders
ko low powered radio par transmit karta hain.

(e) Ordinary OP hone par adjutant khud decide karta hain ki kaun si
batteries ko shoot ke liye nominate karna aur target ko kitna ammunition allot
karna. Yeh nirnay nimnlikhit baton par adharit hain :-

(i) Maujuda tactical situation ko dhyan mein rakhte huye target ki

ahemiyat.

(ii) Kya batteries engage karne ko free hain, ya apne present task se
call off ki ja sakti hain aur kya tgt ki range mein hain.

(iii) Ammunition state.

(f) Adjutant apna decision OP officer aur batteries ko is prakar deta hain,
“ Target M…..all available scale 4” ya “Target M ….23 aur 43 available, scale 3” aur
aise hi.

(g) Adjutant samanya roop se ranging battery ko nominate karta hain,

samanya roop se sabse pehle “Ready” report deni vali battery.

(h) Sari batteries fire order line par Adjutant ko report deti hain. Adjutant bad
mein jaroori reports ko OP ko pass karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
196
(j) Procedure ki detail Part B aur C mein di gayi hain.

Uniform Target

6. Uniform target ka principles Mike target jaise hi hain, sirf us se large scale hain.
Uniform target mein BM artillery Divisional Artillery ke liye wohi kaam karta hain jo ki
Adjutant regiment target mein karta hain.

7. Outline Procedure. Uniform target ki procedure mike target jaisi hain aur niche
di gayi hain.

(a) Observer apne initial orders Adjutant aur apni regiment ki batteryon ko
deta hain.

(b) Adjutant observer ke order BM Artillery ko aur doosare adjutants ko

brigade fire order line par pass karta hain.

(c) BM Artillery para 5 mein bataye tarike se kaam karta hain.

(d) Isi dauran doosari regiments ke adjutants jinho ne call para (b) ko suna
hain woh apni batteries ko initial orders pass karte hain.

(e) Observer samanya roop se apni regiment ki battery ko ranging ke liye

nominate karta hain. Ya phir ranging regiment ko nominate karta hain.

(f) Observer ke saare orders ranging regiment ke adjutant ke dwara non-

ranging regiment ke adjutants ko aur wahan se sari batteries ko pass hote hain.

(g) Divisional artillery ke MPI ko fire for effect ke pehle inspect karne ki koi
jaroorat nahi hain. FFE observer dwara coordinate kiya jata hain.

(h) Regiments ke andar procedure Mike target ke samaan hi hain.

8. Uniform target mein hissa lene ke liye order ki gayee regiment sari available
batteries ke sath hissa leti hain. Agar jaroori hain to adjutant missing batteries ke karan
kam padte fire ko badha hua scale de kar pura karta hain.

9. Fire Discipline. Fire discipline ke normal rules apply hote hain par individual
batteries ya regiments ko order pass karte samay aage orders lagagne mein dhyan
rakhna chahiye.

10. Engagement by Authorized Observers. Special tasks ke connection mein,

ek observer ko sidha batteries ya regiments se fire call karne ko authorize kiya ja sakta
hain. Observer ko pehle hi usko allow ki gayi fire unit se engage karne ke minimum size
ke tgt aur ammunition kharch ka amount ke bare mein brief kiya jata hain. Woh target
numbers allot karne ke liye jimmedar hain. Agar woh artillery brigade ka authorized
observer hain to uske paas divisional artillery net ka radio set hoga.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
197
PART II – PROCEDURE AT THE OP

11. Observer ke point of view se Mike target ka engagement battery tgt ke

engagement se thoda alag hain. Observer ko signal procedure pata hona chahiye aur
hamesha apne initial orders adjutant ko pass karna chahiye aur kishi bhi halat mein OP
officer ko adjutant ke batteries aur ammunition ki availability ke orders ka intezaar karna
chahiye. Yeh bahoot zaroori hain ke shoot jaldi liya jaye.

Initial Orders

12. Target ka nature hain “………….target”.

13. Bad mein indication of target aayega. Koi method of ranging dena aam baat nahi
hain.

14. Jab tak battery ready report nahi deti tab tak “Fire” order nahi diya jata.

15. Is baat ka dhyan rakhna chahiye ke ordinary OP shoot ko aage nahi chala sakta,
elava ke khud ki battery agar adjutant ne para 5 ke mutabik permission di ho.

Ranging

16. Kyon ki fire ka failav target ke paas itna bada hain ke 200 meters se chhota
bracket establish karna ya 100 meters se kam ka target grid correction(uniform target ke
samay short bracket 400 meters ka hain) use karna jayaz nahi hain.

17. Ranging khatam hone par observer regiment ka MPI “One round gun fire” de kar
inspect karta hain. Agar yeh santosh janak hain to fire for effect diya jayega, varna tab
tak ke jab tak MPI santoshjanak nahi banta tab tak single rounds of gun fire se
corrections de kar diya jayega.

Fire for Effect

18. Fire for Effect ke orders ‘scale’ ke sath diye jaate hain. Adjt dwara authorized
ammunition ko exceed nahin kiya jayega. MPI adjustment mein istamal rds ko bhi total
main shamil kiya jayega.

19. Fire for effect ko normal tarique se control, observe aur correct kiya jayega.

End of shoot

20. Shoot ka result report kiya jayega aur zarurat hone par tgt ko record kiya jayega.

PART III - GUN POSITION PAR PROCEDURE

21. Gun posn par, signal procedure ke ilawa, regt aur higher tgt aur bty tgt ke beech
main difference CP par kiye jaane wale ‘Extra checks’ ka hain.

22. Do Arty boards ka istemal kiya jata hain. Har TA CPSF ka istemal karta hain. TA
data independently work out karenge aur GPO use compare kar ke hi guns ko fire hone
dega. Initial Map data ke limits main milne par GPO un mein se ek ko prediction ke liye

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
198
istemal karega. Kyonke dono arty boards par same bty center plot hain, shooting
window, ke requirement nahin hote. TAs ke dwara nikale gaye various data ke
agreement ke limits nimilikhit hain.

(a) Map Data To Tgt. 30 min/ 8 mils for line aur 5 min/2 mils for A/S aur 50
m for range.

(b) Predicted Data To Tgt. 5 min/ 3 mils for line aur 25 m for range.

(c) Position Correction. 25 m.

(d) Concentration. 5 min DC ke sath aur 10 min/3 mils CFA ke sath.

(e) Corrector or Fuze Length Predicted. Agree hone chahiye.

(f) Gun corrections. 5 min/2 mils.

(g) Palmtop/ laptop ke sath limit of agreement hain 5 min/2 mils.

23. Predicted data check karne ke bad har TA gun ko order kiye hue line aur range
par target replot karega. Target grid template ko is plot par OT bearing ke disha mein
align kiya jayega.

24. Initial Data Ke Limit Main Nahin Milne Par Karwai.

(a) Initial Map Data. Target ko replot kiya jayega. Fresh data nikala jayega.

(b) Dono TA independently data predict karenge. Agreement ke limit hain 5

min for line aur 25 m for elevation. Agar data agree nahin hota to ‘repredict ka
order diya jayega’.

25. Shoot Ke Dauran Procedure.

(a) ‘Fire’ ka order milne par guns fire hone ke bad “23 (43 ya 63)
shot……flight……” ka report OP/Adjt ko diya jayega. Agar order “Fire” nahin mila
hain to “ 23 Ready. Flight….(seconds)” ka report Adjt ko diya jayega.

(b) Mike aur higher tgts ke liye, agle corrections ko dono arty boards ke beech
check kiya jayega aur GPO “Fire by order” order karega. GPO pure shoot main ek
arty board ka data follow karega, aur doosre board ke data se check karega.
Dono boards ke beech agreement ki limit 30 min/ 8 mils aur 50 mtr hain. Check
pura hone ke bad hi GPO guns ko “Fire” ka order dega.

(c) Agar dono boards ka data nahin milta to GPO “Check” ya ‘Check replot”
order karega. Jo ki drill is prakar hain :-

(i) “Check”. Dono TA akhri target grid correction ke plot ko check

karenge aur bearing aur range ko phir read karega. GPO ensure karega ki
dono TA ek hi Tgt grid corrn ko plot kar rahe hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
199
(ii) “Check Replot”. “Check” order karne ke bad bhi agar dono arty
boards nahin milte to “check replot” ka order kiya jata hain. Is aadesh par
dono TAs OT bearing aur sare corrections ko dubara plot karenge aur
bearing aur range phir se read karenge.

26. CP work ka discussion neeche table me diya gaya hain.

TABLE XXVI DRILL FOR ENGAGEMENT OF A REGIMENTAL OR

HIGHER CONCENTRATION

GPO Two TAs independently

Own troops ki safety check karega Arty boards par GR plot karke map bg
aur range nikalega.
Map data check karega ( limit 30 min for line aur 50 A of S calculate karenge.
m for rg aur 5 min for A of S)
(Nahin milne par replotting ki jaygega).
Suitable charge decide karta hain aur TA Hav crest Ordered Map data ko predict karega.
clearance check karta hain. Prediction ko supervise
karega aur predicted data ko check karega ( Limit 5
min aur 25 m)
Edit kar ke Guns ko orders dega Position corrections, concentration aur
time of flight calculate karega
“Shot” aur “time of flight” ke report ke orders dega. Tgt grid correction plot karenge.
Dono TA ki karwai par check rakhega aur data
check karega.
Dono TA ki karwai par check rakhega Order karne par target ko record
karenge.

Initial Orders

27. Guns ko “Mike target ka order diya jata hain. Jaise hi checked data available ho
jata hain baaki ke initial orders diye jaayenge. In orders mein ranging gun nominate kiya
jaayega aur “fire by order” bhi hoga.

28. Jaise hi ranging gun ready ho jati hain GPO adjt ko report karega “……..” (call
sign) “Ready flight……..”. Agar kisi doosre bty ko ranging bty nominate kiya gaya ho
to yah report nahin de jayegi.

29. Predicted data ke preparation ke dauran, availability of batteries aur ammunition

ke orders Adjt se milenge. Har CP mein yeh maan kar chala jayega ki us bty ko shoot
mein shamil kiya jayega.

Ranging

30. Agar Bty ranging ke liye nominate hoti hain to GPO order deta hain “fire” aur OP ko
report deta hain “_______(call sign) shot_____”. Iske bad ranging normal tarike se jaari
rahti hain, har correction ke order par arty bd check hota hain.

31. Non ranging Bty saare correction plot karti hain, aur guns ko sare orders pass hote
hain.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
200
Fire For Effect

32. Jis prakar se orders milte hain, un par amal kiya jata hain. Koi bhi target grid
corrn , arty boards ke beech theek se check kiya jaana chahiye.

End of shoot

33. Agar zarurat hain to Tgt record kiya jayega.

PART IV : MISCELLANEOUS

34. Previous procedure, tgt ko HE grnd burst shell se engage karna sikhata hain.
Anya prakar ke shoots ke liye nimnlikhit points ko dhyan mein rakha jaaye :-

(a) Airburst Shoot

(i) “Time and Percussion” fz ka prayog karte samay , corrector aur fz

setting ki bracketing hamesha salvo ranging se ki jaaye.

(ii) Non ranging bty ki jo guns , ranging ke liye nominate hain aur HE
grnd burst se load hain, “Corrector____” ya “Airburst” , order milte hi , ye
rds fire kar degi, OP ko koi report nahi di jayegi.

(b) Smoke Screens. Flanking pts ko maddenazar rakhte hue, har bty CP
mein ek swatantra check avashya karna chahiye.

35. Is procedure ka udaharan table XXVII mein diya gaya hain.

TABLE XXVII – MIKE TARGET PROCEDURE

Ser OP’s Orders (on Radio) Adjutant (on Radio to OP Battery (on line) to
on line to Guns) Adjutant
1. “25 Mike Target” “Mike Target”
2. “832498 Ht 160 m, Oscar “832498 Ht 160 m, Oscar
30, platoon locality” 30, platoon locality
3. “All available. Scale 6” (in “23 ready flight 31”“43
case of ordinary OP) “23 ready flight 30” “63 ready
ready flight 31” flight 32”.

4. “Fire” “23 ranging” “Shot 1 flight 31”(on

radio).
5. “Left 200 ADD 400” “Left 200 ADD 400” “Shot 1” (on radio).
6. “DROP 200” “DROP 200” “Shot 1” (on radio).
7. “ADD 100, 1 RGF” “ADD 100, 1 RGF 8. All batteries report Shot
“Shot” to adjutant.

8. “Shot” “Shot” “Shot” to Adjutant.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
201
9. “3 RGF” “3 RGF” All batteries report “Shot”
to Adjutant.
10. “Target neutralised. Stand “Shot“
easy” “Target neutralised Stand
easy”

SECTION 57- PLANNING THE USE OF SMOKE

INTRODUCTION

1. Smoke ka istemal in halat mein kiya jata hain :-

(a) Aimed ya observed fire ko rok kar dushman ko neutralize karne ke liye.

(b) HE ke sath fire karke dushman ko confuse karne ke liye.

(c) Fire ko observe karne mein madad ke liye.

(d) Tgts, objectives, aur fireplan ke operation ki phases ko indicate karne ke

liye.

2 Same amount ke HE amn aur same no of gun ki tulna me smoke se hum jyada
ground ko neutralized kar sakte hain. Smoke ke limitations is prakar hain :-

(a) Sirf aimed direct fire aur observed in direct fire se bachav.

(b) Ek fire unit ke pass limited no of smoke amn hota hain. Is liye smoke amn
ke expenditure par dhyan dena chahiye.

3. Dushman ko “blind” aur own tps ko “screen” kar ke neutralization achieve kiya
jata hain. Area to be blinded enemy ko aur area to be screened own tps ko contain
karta hain. “Screen” effective smoke ki line hota hain (para 21).

4. Smoke shell ke type is prakar hain:-

(a) Base Ejection (BE)

(b) White phosphorus (WP)

BE Smoke Ke Characteristics

5. BE smoke ek prakar ka carrier shell hain jisme 2 ya 2 se jyada smoke emitting

canister hota hain aur time aur percussion fuze se juda hota hain. Yeh shell line of sight
se kuchh upar ek fix ki hui height par burst hota hain. Jab shell burst hota hain to
canisters jal jate hain aur shell se bahar hawa me nikal kar ke ground ki original
trajectory ko closely follow karte hain. Ek single gun ka MPI ek single point of origin ko
darshata hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
202
6. Har canister ek gahri patli dhuen ki line chhodti hain jo hawa ke bahao ke sath
unchain aur chodai mein badhta jata hain. Point of origin se kuchh duri tak screening ka
koi asar nahi hoga kyonki baadal naa hi uncha hain aur na hi chora; tab baadal effective
hota hain; aur ant mein dhuan gehra ya phir zarurat ke anusaar uncha ho jata hain.

7. Jab tak upar ki hawaein naa chal rahin ho dhuan upar ki taraf kam badhta hain.
Temperate climate mein, dhuan ground se chipka rehta hia aur 15 meter se upar nahi
jata hain. Wo kuchh dur tak contours banata hain aur ghati mein ikkatha hota hain.

8. Canister par zamin ka asar is prakar se hain.

(a) Hard rocky maidan canisters ko uchhal deta hain; angle of descent jitna
steep hoga phailav utna kam hoga. Isiliye, BE smoke ka hamesha lowest charge
charge ke sath fire kiya jata hain.

(b) Boggy ya baraf se dhaka hua grnd canisters ko apne mein dhasne deta
hain. Is wajah se effective smoke mein kami hogi ya phir canisters bujhh
jayenge.

WP Smoke Characteristics

9. WP smoke shell mein ek explosive bharaa hua hain aur ek direct action fuze
hain. Screening ke alawa, WP ko casualties pahuchane ke liye istemal kiya ja sakta hain
aur agar paristhitiyaan sath de to fire start karne ke liye bhi. WP jalne wale padarthon
jaise sukhe ghaas, scrub, lakdi ki imaarat etc. ko aag lagane ke liye istemal kar sakte
hain.

10. Jab WP brust hota hain, ya dhuane ka ek kendrit garam round banata hain jo har
ek disha mein phail jata hain aur ek stambh banata hain. Ek suitable fire ki dark e sath
dhuen ke gole bade hote hain, ek dusre se jud jaate hain aur hawa ke bahao ke sath aur
bade ho jaate hain.

11. Temperate climate mein bhi, baadal ki ek standard lambai dena mumkin nahin
hain kyonki lambai mausam par nirbhar karti hain. Sukhe mausam mein, effective cloud
banana mushkil hain. Favourable conditions mein rate of fire similar condition aur
burning time mein BE smoke ke rate of fire se teen guna hota hain.

Layout of Smoke Cloud

12. Ek single point of origin se produce hua typical dhuen ka layout Fig. 20 me hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
203

O A(H) B(W) C(L)

PLAN VIEW

SIDE VIEW
FIGURE 20 – SMOKE DIMENSIONS AND DEFINITIONS
O Point of origin
A Point where the smoke is high enough to be effective
B Point where the smoke is wide enough to be effective
C Point where the smoke may become ineffective under normal conditions

OA Effective smoke ka distance (height)

AC Effective smoke ka length (height)
OB Effective smoke ka distance (width)
BC Effective smoke ka length (width)

Planning Data

13. Table xxviii aur xxix me un eqpt ka planning data diya hain jinke liye smoke amn
service mein available hain.

TABLE XXVIII – BE SMOKE PLANNING DATA

EQPT OA AC OB WIDTH TIME AVG

AT B FOR BURNING
BUILD TIME(MIN)
UP(MIN)
105 MM 75 300 250 50 ½ to 1 1½
IFG

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
204
TABLE XXIX- SMOKE PLANNING DATA
Ammunition Effective Distance ( M) Time for Average
Build Up burning
Length Width Height (Seconds) Time
(Minutes)

120 MM WP Smoke 100 30 15 - -

Bomb

120 MM Smk Emission 150 50 15 - 4-5

Bomb

155 MM Smk 200 100 20 20 6

155 MM Smk IR 200 100 20 20 3

The Effects of Weather on Smoke

14. Smk par weather ka asar ek jaisa hain magar alag alag matra ka hain. Maujuda
mausam ke halat hi is baat ko govern karte hain ki smk ka istemal ho sakta hain ya
nahi, kitne pt of origin aur rate of fire ki zarurat hain. Smk par mausam ka prabhav is
prakar hain :-

(a) Wind speed humidity aur turbulence ka effect rate of fire par padta hain
jisse hume continuous screen mile.

(b) Wind direction line of screen aur positioning of point par asar dalta hain.

15. Ideal weather conditions:-

(a) Wind.

(i) Direction from flank.

(ii) Speed 10-15 fs.

(b) Nami mausam (Highly humid).

(c) Moderate turbulence.

16. Weather conditions ka affect rate of fire par hota hain. jisse hame continuous
screen milta hain.

17. Wind Speed.

(a) 15 fs se adhik ki wind speed BE smoke ko jaldi disperse kar deti hain.
Isliya high rate of fire chahiye, jab 5fs se kam ki wind speed hoti hain to smoke
uppar ki taraf disperse hoti hain isliya effective length of screen ek point of origin
se kam ho jati hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
205
(b) WP smoke ke sath thodi tez wind pillaring ko kam karti hain aur
effectiveness increase kar data hain.

18. Humidity. Dry atmosphere (low humidity) me, smoke jaldi disperse ho jayega
isliye high rate of fire chahiye. Is factor ko turbulence ke sath dekha jata hain.

19. Turbulence. Hot wind jo ground se niklti hain turbulence create karti hain jo
smoke ko pillar, drift karti hain aur gaps banati hain. Jab high turbulence aur low
humidity ho to smoke use nahi karni chahiye. Tubulence ko is prakar se expressed kiya
jata hain :-
(a) “High”. Yeh hot day ke dauran hoti hain. High rate of fire chahiya.
(b) “Low”. Clear nights me one hr sunset se phele aur one hr sunrise ke
bad hota hain.
(c) “Moderate”. Overcast day me hota hain. Ideal smoke ke liye. Jab wind
speed 15fs se jayda hoti hain, turbulence hamesha moderate hoti hain.

20. Rate of fire required continuous effective smoke ke liye alag alag weather
conditions ke combination ke sath table XXX me diya gaya hain.

TABLE XXX- BE SMOKE RATES OF FIRE (Rounds per Min)

Equipment Raining Overcast Dry with
bright sun
Wind speed 5 15 25 5 15 25 5 15 25
(ft/s)
105 mm IFG 1 1.5 2.5 1 2 2.5 3 6 3

Line Of Screen

21. Jis line par smoke chahiye use line of screen kahte hain. Yeh required length of
screen ko include karti hain. Fig 21 me XY line of screen hain. Points of origin smoke ke
is tarah se liye gaye hain ke screen line XY par banegi. Points of origin wind ki direction
par depend karte hain. Yeh para 22 aur 23 me batya gaya hain.

Area to be Y E
Blinded
D

Area to be
Screened

F X G
FIGURE 21-PLANNING OF SMOKE ( SKETCH DIAGRAM)

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
206
Placing the Points of Origin

22. Direction of wind aur smoke ki khubiya points of origin ki positioning aur number
decide karegi. Jab wind:-

(a) A Flank Wind. Jab wind direction line of required screen ke 15

degree me hoti hain. Points of line of screen par is tarah se liya jaye ki do point ka
interval effective length of smoke ke barabar ho.

(b) A Following or Head Wind. Line if screen ke 76 se 90 degrees ke

beech me ho. Points of origin line of screen ke parallel aur door liya jata hain
jaha par smoke effective hogi width ke liye. Points ke beech ka difference
effective width of smoke ka hoga. Jab head wind ho, jo ki “area to be blinded” se
“area to be screened” ki taraf ja rahi ho, tab smoke own troops ko difficulty degi.
Agar shoot phir bhi lena hain to points of origin line XY ke enemy side par liya
jayega.

(c) An Oblique Wind. Line of screen se 5 aur 75 degree ke beech mein ho.
Points of origin line XY ke parallel aur distance jo ki vary karege para (a) aur (b)
ke mutabik. Distance of points aur point of origin effective length ka ¼ ya 2/3 hota
hain. Yeh wind direction par depend karta hain.

23. The Up wind Point of Origin. Yeh important hain ki upwind point of origin ko
kam se kam OA Ke distance ke brabar rakha jaye flank wind ke samay, aur follow wind
ke samay OB ke distance ke brabar rakha jaye jaisa ki fig 22 me diya gaya hain. Vibhin
karno ki anischitta, MPI ka asli posn on ground aur point X ground par aur canister
dispersion ek generous margin of safety point of origin par rakhna avashyak kar deti
hain. Ek fig jo ki 1½ ya 2 times theoritical distance OA ke barabar istemal karna chahiye.
e.g, 150mtrs for 105/37 IFG.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
207
TABLE XXXI – SUGGESTED DISTANCE BETWEEN POINTS OF ORIGIN IN CASE
OF A SMOKE SCREEN
Ser No Angle between line of Screen & Distance between points
Wind Direction ( Meters)

1. 00 to 15O 300
2. 16O to 30O 250
3. 31O to 45O 200
4. 46O to 60O 150
5. 61O to 75O 100
6. 76O to 90O 50

OB
Y Y Y 6
5
4 4 WIDTH AB
2 3
3 2

X X 2 X 1
TWICE OA
1
1
FIGURE 22 – POSITIONING OF THE POINT OF ORIGIN

Notes :- 1. XY is the line and length of required screen in each case.

2. Black arrow indicates direction of wind.

Shoot ko plan karna.

24. Shoot plan karne se pahle observer ke pass nimnlikhit jankari hone chahiye.

(a) Shoot ko plan karne se pahle observer ne supported arm cdr se niche die
gaye jankari prapt karna jaruri hain

(i) kaunsa area blind karna hain .

(ii) kaunsa area screen karna hain.
(iii) kis time par screen effective hone ki jarurat hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
208

(iv) Screen ka duration kya hona chahiye.

(v) kya supported arms cdr testers fire karne ke liye sehmat hain .

(vi) Agar smk nakam raha to kya alt HE task ki jarurat hain aur is task
ko implement karne ke liye kaun auth hain.

(b) Weather ke bare me jankari lena. Weather ki jankari niche diye gaye chijon
se mil sakti hain :-

(i) Jis ilake me round burst hui hain us ilake ke smk aur dhul ka bartav
dekh ke.
(ii) From data pertaining to 5 secs TOF / met line 00 in a met telegram.
(iii) Smk tester ko fire karke.

25. Upar de hui jankari prapt karne ke bad observer niche die hui chijo ke upar
decides karta hain

(a) kaunse procedure ko istemal karna hain.

(i) Quick smk shoot.
(ii) Smk screen.
(b) Line of screen.
(c) Position of pt of origin.
(d) Rate of fire and total ammunition required.

26. Line of Screen. Observer ne figure 22 me diye gaye diagram ki tarah map par
diagram banana chahiye aur us par wind direction, Upwind point of origin aur line of
screen draw karna chahiye. Line XY ko “ area to be blinded” ke nazdik draw karna
chahiye taki own troops ko kam se kam asuvidha ho aur adhik se adhik area ka
screening ho. Yadi yeh close ho to enemy move ho kar screen ko aage aa jayegi aur
screen ineffective kar deta hain. Kabhi kabhi yeh jayada suvidha janak ho sakta hain ki
line ko apne troops ke nazdik rakha jaye jab large area ko blind karna ho aur small area
ko screen karna ho.

27. Points of Origin ka Position. Yeh line of screen ka line aur wind direction par
nirbhar hain. Points of origin hamesha required line of screen ke upwind direction mein
hona chahiye. Number of points work out karte samay plus side mein ginti karna achha
hain kyoki ek baar fire karne ke bad points ko reduce karna asaan hain lekin badhana
mushkil.

28. Rate of Fire. Rate of fire ko table XXX se pata lagate hain. Yeh moujuda
weather condition par nirbhar karte hain aur type of smoke (BE ya WP) istemal karne
par. Rate of fire ko pata lagate samay error ko plus side par rakna chahiye kyon ki
badane se asan rate of fire ko ghatana asan hain jab fire for effect shuru hota hain.

29. Jab rate of fire equipment ki intense rate of fire se jyada hain tab do guns ko ek
point par fire karna chahiye, aur jin ka interval adha kiya jayega intense rate ko barkarar

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
209
rakne ke liye. Observer ko “Alternate” word ka istemal karke fire for effect me indicate
karna chahiye. GPO phir initial rounds do guns ko control karega interval us ek point par
jo ki section 16 mein explain kiya gaya hain.

Example:-

1. Equipment 105/37 IFG

2 Rate of fire reqd 6 round per minute, ie , interval 10 seconds

3 Intense rate of fire 5 rounds per minute

of equipment

4 Observers order “ Fire by Order ….. rounds gun fire 20 alternate”.

Build up

30. Smoke ko effective karne ke liye jis samye :-

(a) Ek minute BE (105/37 mm IFG) ke liye average conditions me build up ke

liye hona chahiye. Yeh kabhi kabhi demand ke mutabik change ho sakta hain.

(b) Tej build up ke liya 2 round ( one round 155mm FH 77B) fire for effect ke
dauran GPO aur observer ke beech convention hain. Observer ke fire for effect
me number of rounds order karne ke bad GPO 2 rounds extra add karega.

31. Total Ammunition par point is prakar nikala jata hain :-

Example :- 105/37mm IFG BE Smoke

1 Length of time smoke reqd for 8 min

2 Build up time 1 min
3 Total time smoke must last(1) plus (2) 9 min
4 Burning time 1 min
5 Total time reqd (3) minus(4) 8 min
6 Rate of fire(sky overcast : 15 fs wind) 2 round per minute
7 Rounds reqd to maintain screec (5) X (6) 16
8 Rounds for buid up screen 2
9 Total rounds per point of origin reqd (7) plus (8) 18

Example 2 :- 105/37mmIFG BE smoke (agar rate of fire required

equipment ke intense rate of fire se jayada hain to).

1. length of time smoke required for 8 min

2. Build up time 1 mins
3. Total time smoke must last (1) + (2) 9 mins
4. Jalne ka samaye 1 mins
5. Kul samaye jo chahiye (3) minus (4) 8 mins
6. Rate of fire (Bright sunny day; 15 fs wind) 6 RPM
7. Screen banaye rakhne ke liye jaroori rounds (5)x(6) 48

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
210
8. Rounds required per gun screen banaye rakhne ke liye 24
9. Rounds for build up 2
10. Total rounds per gun (8) plus (9) 26

Smoke Testers

32. Jab supported arm commander ijajat de, tab observer uske weather ke estimate
aur uske point(s) of origin ke layout ko smoke (tester) rounds fire kar ke confirm kar
sakta hain. Amtaur par ek single round upwind point of origin par fire karna kafi hota
hain. Jab jarurat ho tab Testers baki points of origin par bhi fire kiye ja sakte hain.

33. Testers may be ordered by :-

(a) Fire for effect ke ek tarike se, jaise ke. “Smoke tester, Point1, 1 RGF”. Do
round build up ke liye jodne ka, observer aur GPO ke beech ka niyam yahan lagu
nahi kiya jata.

(b) Ranging gun ko “Smoke, Repeat” Ammunition ko badalne ka aadesh dene

par .

Miscellaneous Points

34. Fire by Order. Observer ne fire for effect se pahale “Fire by order” ka aadesh
dena chahiye. Es tarah supported arm se time of firing coordinate kiya ja sakta hain.

35. Target Grid Corrections. Fire for effect ke dauran corrections diye ja sakte
hain. Jab is tarah koi corrections diye jate hain to guns do opening rounds phir fire
karke he asli method of fire ke bache rounds ko fire karta hain. Observer ko ye dhyan
mein rakhana chahiye ke koi bhi target grid correction smooth firing ko dislocate karega.
Aam taur par, fire for effect shuru hone par, smoke screen ke layout ko, jaise ke, bearing
aur/ya distance ko, badalna bilkul namunkin hota hain.

36. Fuze Length. Fuze length ko badalne se canisters ke girne ko thoda sa adjust
kiya ja sakta hain. Udharan ki taur par –

(a) Agar ground burst hota hain to, fuze length ko kam se kam 3.0 se kam
karna chahiye.

(b) Agar canisters bahut jyada uchal rahe ho, tab fuze ko ek bar 1.0 se kam
karne se angle of descent ko badhaya ja sakta hain aur unki bachi huai velocity
ko kam kiya ja sakta hain, jisse ke woh zamin par gun ke close gire aur kam
uchale ya bilkul na uchale.

(c) Agar ye saf zahir hain ki canisters kuch jyada hi sidhe aur HE round jaha
gir rahe the us jagaha se kafi pahle gir rahe hain, to fuze ko ek bar 1.0 se lamba
karna phaidemand hoga.

37. Altering the Rate of Fire. Shuru mein order kiya huye rate of fire bada hona
chahiye, kyoki agar screen taiyar hone par rate of fire ko badhane ka aadesh dena ho,
tab woh effective hone me samay lega. Screen ka thik tarah se nirikshan karna chahiye

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
211
taki agar ye saaf hai ki rate of fire zarurat se jyada hain to use turant kam kiya ja sake.
Ussi prakar, zarurat se jyada guns ko shoot se, “Stop loading” ka aadesh de kar, nikal
lena chahiye.

SECTION 58 - SMOKE SE NEUTRALISATION

BHAG I - QUICK SMOKE SHOOT

Parichay

1. Quick Smoke Shoot nimnalikhit karan ke liye istemal kiya jata hain.
(a) Jab task asan ho.
(b) Smoke ki jarurat urgent ho.
(c) Blind kiya jaanewala area chotta ho.
(d) Hawa ka rukh ek flank se hain.

2. Acchi paristithiyon me, ek troop ya ek hi gun kafi hain, par OP Officer shoot ki
shuruat jyada guns ke fire se suru karta hain.

3. Paristithi accha na hone par ya waqt ki kami ke karan puri battery ke fire se Quick
smoke shoot chalaya jayega. Lekin is shoot me ammunition ka istemal bahut jyada hota
hain. Acchi paristithiyon me Quick Smoke shoot “Sweep” ke order ke sath chalaya
jayega. Is se yeh shoot kam samay me hi “smoke screen” ke parinam de sakta hain.

4. Sabhi guns ke line of fire parallel hote hain. Aisa mana jata hain ki sabhi guns ki
MPI ek hi point se shuru hoti hain. Guns ki MPI upwind point ke direction mein hoti hain.

OP ka Procedure

5. OP Officer sec 57 ke anusar shoot ka plan banata hain jis me rate of fire aur
number of rounds per gun ka nirnay liya jata hain. OP Officer upwind point ka origin ka
pata lagata hain.

6. Initial Orders. Nature of target ke sath nirdharit ya apekshit number of rounds

guns ko order kiya jata hain e.g. “Troop Target Smoke prepare 7 rounds per gun”.

7. Upwind point of origin ki GR aur height order diya jata hain.

8. Convention ke anusar ranging ek gun ke dwara HE ground bursts se kiya jata

hain. Ranging ki jarurat nahi hone par, FFE khola jata hain.

9. Ranging. Accurate ranging ki jaroorat nahi hain. Aam taur upwind flank ki
point of origin suitable position me hain , is baat ke yakeen ke liye ek ya do round kaafi
hain.

10. FFE. FFE ke orders me niminalikhit orders bhi include hote hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
212
(a) The change of ammuniton for the ranging gun.

(b) “Fire by order”. Iski jadataur jarurat padti hain.

(c) Number of rounds aur interval ( is me number of rounds me smoke

ke build up ke liye lagne wale do round shamil nahi hain).

11. FFE ke complete order ka ek udharan :-

(a) “Smoke. Fire by order 5 rounds gun fire 40”

12. Sec 57 ke anusar Smoke ko observe karne ke bad zarurat padne par correct kiya
jata hain.

Gun Posn Par Tarika

13. HE shoot ke procedure se antar ammunition ke karan aata hain jo ki nimnlikhit

hain:-

(a) Smoke amn ke tayari.

(b) HE se loaded gun ko khali karna.

(c) Smoke amn ke tayari ke leye ye calculate karne honge:-

(i) Fuze setting.

(ii) Exta deflection ke liye Drift aur false range yadi projectile ballistically
standard ke sath match na kare.

14. Initial Orders. Nature of tgt rt/lt tp target hoga (ya jaisa uchit ho).

15. Amn ke liye orders nimanlikhit honge :-

(a) FFE ke liye smoke istemal hoga.

(b) Lowest suitable charge.

(c) Ranging kar rahi gun amn istemal karege e.g ”number 2, HE117’’.

16. Poora amn order is prakar se diya jaayega :-

“Smoke prepare seven rds per gun. Charge 2: Number 2 HE 117”.

17. Individual fuze corrections nahi di jayengi.

18. Bachey huye orders normal tarika se diye jaayenge.

19. Ranging. Ranging apne normal tarika se ki jayegi. OP officer ranging guns se
HE amn ko khali karne ka aadesh dega. Agar OP aisa karna bhool jata hain to GPO

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
213
“smoke” ke adesh par ranging ko aakhiri line aur elevation par khali karne ka adesh
dega. GPO OP ko report dega eg. “shot 2 HE”.

20. Fire for effect. OP officer dwara fire for effect ka aadesh milne par eg, ”smoke
fire by order 5 rounds gun fire,40” nimnilikhit karyawahi ki jaayegi:-

(a) Ranging gun ko amn change karne ka aadesh diya jaayega i.e. “smoke”.

(b) “fire by order” ka aadesh diya jayega.

(c) Final range milne par range table se nimnlikhit data dekh kar guns ko pass
kiya jaayega.

(i) Drift ka deflection eg.”Less 15 minutes”, jaroorat padne per.

(ii) Fuze setting eg. ”Fuze 9.5”.

(iii) False ya actual range.

(d) Fire for effect ke order dete samay GPO dwara atirikt do round convention
ke mutabik diye jaayenge, eg :-

“2 rounds gun fire, followed by 5 rounds gun fire,40 seconds”

21. OP officer dwara di gayi corrections ko arty board par plot kar sahi range order ki
jaati hain. Yah zaruri nahi hain ki fuze setting ya atirikt drift har baar order kiya jaaye.
Correction dene ke bad GPO guns ko 2 round gun fire karne ka aadesh dega jiske bad
hi guns bachey huye rds fire karte hain.
22. Koi bhi alterations to fuze setting jo ki OP order karta hain guns ko fresh fuze
setting me pass hoti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
214
23. Example. Ek example quick smoke shoot ka is Table XXXIII main diya hain.

TABLE XXXII – EXAMPLE OF A QUICK SMOKE SHOOT

Ser OP’s Order GPO Order GPO’s Report Remarks

1. “Troop Target Smoke. “Left Troop Target (a) Ye two rounds

Prepare 13 RPG (a) Smoke, prepare 13 include karta hain jo ki
123456 ht 300m (b) rpg, Ch 2, Number GPO ka convention
Oscar 215, blinding 1 HE 117, (d) Bg hain.
platoon locality (c). Fire” 210 degs, A of S 10
(b) GR of upwind
min E, Number 1
point of origin.
ranging 5800,
blinding platoon (c) Security ka dhyan
locality Fire”. rakhna hain.
“Shot 1 flight 22”
(d) HE amn ordered to
the ranging gun.

2. “DROP 200”(e) “Less 10 mins, “Shot 1” (e) Meticulous ranging

5650” is not required

3. “Smoke, FBO, 11 RGF “5650, Number 1, 1 “Shot 1, HE” (f) In FFE, 2 rds less
30” (f). RGF, than the number of
rounds given for
Smoke, FBO Fuze
preparation are
21.9 5650, 2
ordered.
RGF followed by11
RGF 30 secs”. (g) After a total 4 rds
from each gun have
been fired.
(h) The unexpended
rds of the ordered
method of FFE and
for build up are
ordered.

4. Fire Fire Shot

5. “DROP 200” (g) “Stop loading”

“Less 10 mins,
5475, 2 RGF
followed by 9 RGF
30”(h) Go on” .

6. “ Stand Easy” “ Stand Easy”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
215
BHAG II – SMOKE SCREEN

Introduction

24. Smoke screen ke liye quick smoke se zyada deliberate approach ki zarurat hain.
Smoke screen aam taur se fire plan ka hissa hota hain aur jab koi task quick smoke ke
liye mushkil ho to hamesha hi istemal kiya jata hain. Guns ko individual points of origin
par direct kiya jata hain jo ki line of screen par hote hain.

25. Shoot mein screen ki zarurat guns ke ready hone par ya phir fire plan ke hisse ke
taur par ho sakti hain. Jab screen fire plan ka hissa ho to screen ki zarurat kuch samay
bad ranging(agar ho to) khatam hone par hote hain. Is case mein ho sakta hain ki
registration aur final engagement ke samay mein antar ho aur mausam mein badlav ho
jaye jisse smoke screen ineffective ho sakta hain. Is kaaran ke liye alternative HE task ki
zarurat hoti hain. Kyonki smoke screen se bahut bada area neutralize kiya ja sakta hain,
is effect ke liye HE task mein kai target ek sath engage karne ki zarurat pad sakti hain.
Mausam mein badlav ke asar se bachne ke liye jahan tak possible ho to ranging aakhre
moment par karne chahiye. Jahan par possible ho to smoke tester fire kar ke planning
ko confirm kar lena chahiye.

26. Jab six se zyada points of origin ke zarurat ho (battery) to regiment mein batteries
ke baant is prakar hote hain :-

(a) P Battery ---- Points 1-6

(b) Q Battery ---- Points 7-12
(c) R Battery ---- Points 13-18

27. Jab ek se zyada guns ko har ek point par direct karna ho ya phir koi gun out of
action ho to adjutant har battery ko points allot karta hain jo ki battery ne engage karne
hain.

28. Agar wind “following” ya “head” hain to battery smoke screen se quick smoke
shoot ke muqable mein takreeban dugani frontage ko cover kiya ja sakta hain. Is
condition mein agar sweep ko quick smoke shoot ke sath use kiya jaye to yeh smoke
screen se behtar hain kyonki isme CP mein kam kaam karna padta hain.

29. Layout of Screen. Screen ke layout mein yeh sab hota hain (Figure 23) :-

(a) Upwind point of origin jise “Point 1” kahte hain

(b) Line of screen ki bearing (XY). Yeh hamesha point 1 se point 6
tak order ki jati hain.
(c) Number of points.
(d) Adjacent points ke beech ka dist.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
216

DIRECTION OF WIND

AREA TO BE
BLINDED

DISTANCE BETWEEN
POINTS

X X X X X X X Y
1 2 3 4 5 6

AREA TO BE SCREENED

XY BG LINE OF SCREEN
FIGURE – 23

30. Jis takneek dwara fire ko screen ke individual points par distribute kiya jata hain
woh is prakar hain.
(a) Sabhi guns battery center par concentrate hoti hain.

(b) Battery center se point 1 ka data ranging dwara hasil kiya jata hain.

(c) Tab guns ko individual bearing, range aur fuze length order kar
apne-apne points par direct kiya jata hain.

OP Par Karyavahi

31. Section 57 main bataye anusar OP officer apna anumaan aur plan banata hain.
Vah number of rounds per gun calculate karta hain aur origin ka upwind point chunta
hain.

32. Initial Orders. “…………… target, Smoke Screen” nature of target hain.

33. Bache huye initial orders ka sequence quick smoke shoot ke sequence ke
samaan hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
217
34. Ranging. Ranging, zarurat padne par, quick smoke shoot ke tarah hi poori ki
jati hain, Normal procedure ke anusar point 1 hi smoke screen main ranging point hota
hain. Yadi kisi bhi jagah per rounds girta hain uske location confidently observe karta
hain, ki wah specified point hain to ranging ko chhod kar FFE ke order de sakta hain.

35. Fire for Effect. Fire for effect ke orders is prakar hain.

(a) “Smoke”. Ranging gun ke liye amn ka badlav.

(b) “Point 1”. Is ko tgt grid correction ke sath order kiya ja sakta hain, eg “
Point 1 at left 50”.

(c) Screen ke layout ke liye orders.

(d) “FBO”. Is ko hamesha include kiya jata hain lekin jab “Engage
at........hours” aur timing of a fire plan order ho tab nahi kiya jata hain.

36. Pure fire for effect ke order ki example is prakar hain:-

”Smoke, point 1, Bg 120, 6 points 150”.”fire by order,12RGF30”.
Yadi round point 1 ki jagah aur kahin burst hota hain to order is prakar hoga:
”Smoke point....bg...6 points 150,12 RGF 30”.

37. Smoke screen ko dhyan se observe kiya jata hain aur correct kiya jata hain
(section57).

38. Smoke Tester (s). Yadi support arm cdr se permission milne par, smoke tester
(s) ko fire karke screen ke layout aur rate of fire ko confirm kiya jata hain.

39. Target Records. Jaise ki Smk Screen apne nature ke hissab se ek guranteed
shoot hain aur mausam ki aniyamitta Smoke Screen ke dhanche ko badal sakti hain,
Yeh sambhav nahin ho pata hain ki in targets ko engage karne ke samay ke mutabik
record kiya jaye. Is liye Registeration of smoke last samay tak nahi kiya jata hain.
Mukhyata niminlikhit tarike apnaye ja sakte hain.

(a) At The Conclusion of Ranging. Jab point registered ho jata hain aur
guns HE registration ke liye jaroorat parti hain to OP officer point 1 ko record
karne ka order deta hain, aur layout of screen ki detail deta hain eg, “Record as
target P 1376, Point 1 bearing............points”.

(b) At The End of The Shoot. Agar OP officer ke pass smoke screen ko
record karne ka reason hain to, normal procedure istemal kiya jayega.

Procedure at the Gun Posn

40. Initial Orders.

(a) Nature of target is “...target smoke screen”.

(b) Orders amn ke liye aur quick smoke shoot ke liye same hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
218
(c) GPO ranging gun ko bty centre par conc karta hain, yeh ek convention
hain.

41. Ranging. Smoke shoot mein ranging gun ko quick smk shoot ki tarah clear
kiya jata hain. Ranging ke smapt hone par OP officer “Point 1” aur screen ke layout ko
signify karega.

42. Procedure. OP officer order karta hain “Point 1...........” CP me procedure is

prakar follow kiya jayega :-

(a) GPO ranging gun ko “Report bg and elevation” ka order deta hain. No.1
verbally report deta hain, gun data ko GPO CPSF se mile pt 1 ke data ke sath
check karta hain. Gun data aur CPSF data me conc aur posn corrn ka diff hona
chahiye. Agar diff nahin milta hain to GPO gun data ko troop leader se check
karvata hain, agar data sahi paya gaya toh accept kiya jata hain. Is waqt GPO
ranging gun ko clear karne ke liye order deta hain, agar guns HE se loaded
hain, “ Smoke” aur “Fire by Order” ka order dega.

(b) TA 3 aur TA 4 same bearing aur range note karte hain, target grid template
hata kar pt 1 ko direct Artillery Boards par plot karte hain. (agar bty tgt ho to TA
4 is stage par kaam shuru karta hain).

(c) TA3, TA4 ploted point se diye hua bg par line draw karte hain.

(d) Dono TAs is line par dist naap kar ke pts mark karte hain.
(i) TA 3- 1,2,3,6
(ii) TA 4- 1,4,5,6

(e) Agar six pts se kam hain to dono flank guns ke pts aur GPO dwara ordered
guns ke pts plot karte hain.

(f) TA 3 pts 1,2,3 aur 6, TA4 pts 4,5,6 aur 1 ke bg aur rg nikalte hain aur
smoke screen form (IAFB 1005) me enter karte hain.

(g) GPO flanking pts ke guns ka bearig aur range compare karta hain. Match
karne ki limit 30 min line aur 50 metre rg jab Artillery Boards use kiye ja rahe ho.
5 mins line aur elevation ke liye jab automated FCI use kiye ja rahe hon.

(h) TA 3, TA 4 apni respective guns ki conc aur posn corrn nikalte hain.
(opening map data par nikal sakte hain, aur agar nahin nikali gai hain to ab work
out karenge) Ab woh total bg, rg, aur fuze length nikalte hain.

(j) Automated FCI’s dwara, guns ko pass karne wala data directly CPSF mein
note kiya jayega. Is waqt smk screen form istemal nahi kiya jayega.

(k) GPO ab “Cancel posn corrn/Cancel gun corrn” ka order pass karta hain
aur final bg, fuze length aur range sabhi guns ko smk screen form dwara pass
karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
219
42. Target records. Yadi tgt record order kiya hain to normal procedure istemal kiya
jayega. Agar OP officer modify karna chahe to woh verbal instructions GPO ko pass
karega.

Miscellaneous.

43. Smoke Screen With More Than One Bty.

(a) Shoot ko regimental target mana jayega. (Section 56)

(b) Bty screen me seniority ke mutabik Pt 1 se posn occupy karti hain.

(c) Senior bty normally ranging bty hoti hain.

(d) Saari bty OP ke order follow karte hain aur pt 1 ka checked data rg bty se
leti hain.Yeh CPSF mein note kiya jata hain. Jaise hi “Point 1.....” ka order milta
hain bty, para 42 ke mutabik drill ke jayegi. Is waqt GPO, flanking guns ka bg aur
rg (HE Data) compare karta hain.
44. Example. Smoke screen shoot ka example Table XXXIII .mein diya hain
TABLE XXXIII- EXAMPLE OF SMOKE SCREEN SHOOT

Ser OP’s Orders GPO’s Orders GPO’s Remarks

No Report

1. “ Battery Target Smoke “Battery Target Smoke “Shot 1 (a) Ammunition

Screen “ Prepare 16 Screen Prepare 16 Flight Preparation ka
RPG(a) (b)123456 Ht RPG , Charge 2 No 1 21“ order diya jayega
0
300 m Oscar 210 HE 117 Bg 210 No 1 (b) Smoke Screen
Blinding Coy Locality (c) less 20’ (d) A of S 1 ka layout diya ja
Fire”. degree elevation No 1 sakta hain lekin ye
Ranging 6800, Blinding koi kam ka nahin
Coy Locality © Fire”. hain.
(c) Security of own
tps ko dhyan me
rakhen.
(d) Rng gun ko
conc pass honi
chahiyae.

2. Ranging Continues

3. “ Smoke Pt 1 Bearing No 1 report Bearing “Shot 1 (e) Rng gun dwara

330, 6 points, 150 FBO and elevation (e) 7000 HE” Bg aur elevation ki
14 RGF 30””. (f) No 1,one RGF (g) report de jayegi.
Smoke, FBO, Cancel
(f) Less two
position corrections No rounds total amn
1 Bearing 2150 , No 1 prepare kiya
Fz 11.7 No 1 7200 (h) jayega.
FBO 2 RGF followed Ready
(g) Rng gun ka HE
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
220
by 14RGF 30 sec. amn clear kiya
jayega, agar
jaroori ho to.
(h) Bearing , Fz
Length, and range
individual guns .ko
pass karenge.

4. Fire Fire Shot

5. “Drop 100” ( j) “ Stop Loading Less 10 (j) Yahna Tgt grid

Minutes, Drop 100, 2 correction order
RGF followed by 12 kiya hain jab ki
RGF 30 “ Go On”. total 4 rounds
sabhi guns fire kar
chukee hain.

6. “Report All Gone” All

Gone

BHAG III : EMERGENCY SMOKE SCREEN

45. Agar bty posn par tank se direct attack hota hain to dushman ko smoke se blind
karte hue emergency withdrawal karte hain. GPO ko yah consider karna chahiye, ki
screen ke effective hone tak, kiya baki guns se HE fire karwana chahiyae.

46. Bty ko jaldi target indicate karne ke liye ek ya jyada guns par jaate hue anti tank
sectors ko darshata hain. Troop leader baki guns ko respetive points par direct karne me
GPO ki madad kar sakta hain.

47. Emergency withdrawal ke dauran GPO decide karta hain ki kaun si gun GPO ke
under mein tank par attack kartr hue aakhir mein gun posn se withdrawal karegi.
Amuman yeh upwind flank ki aakhiri gun hoti hain. Smoke screen ke bante hi tractors ko
gun posn par bula liya jata hain. Har gun apni posn chodne se pehle 2 RGF poora
karegi taaki smoke screen effective rahe. Last gun ko gun posn se le jaane ki jimmewari
GPO ki hoti hain ,aakhiri gun ka intejaar nahi kiya jata hain .

48. Numbers 1 screen par nazar rakhte hue jahaan kahin bhi gap dehta hain, wahan
par smoke ke round aim karte hain. Yahan par normal laying ki zarurat nahi hain kyonki
eyepiece par nazar rakhte hue achie tarah lay kiya ja sakta hain.400 se 600 mtrs par
smoke screen banane ke liye guns ko point blank tak depress karte hue fuze 1.5 par set
kiya jata hain.

Drill

49. GPO FFE kholne ke sath hi initial orders deta hain. Upwind troop ko additional
orders milte hain taki effective screen bani rahe aur down wind troop ko cease firing

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
221
deta hain. Yah guns “cease firing “ ke order par 2 RGF karte hue apni posn khali kar
deti hain.

50. Uske bad GPO upwind flank ko “Cease firing” ka aadesh deta hain jo
circumstances ko dekhte hue screen maintain karte hue gun posn khali kar deti hain.

51. GPO last gun ke sath posn chodta hain. Assembly posn me control resume karta
hain aur sabhi guns ko safe jagah par le jata hain.

52. Example Is example mein LEFT troop upwind flank me hain.

Orders Remarks

“Battery target emergency smoke

Screen smoke,charge 1 prepare 12 RPG
fuze 1.5
right sector Y shaped tree”------

GPO/troop leaders direct

individual gun

“Point blank 5 RGF fire”

“Right troop,5 RGF”
"Left troop 5 RGF, Right Right troop to fire 2
troop cease firing” RGF on the orders of the Nos 1.
“Number 4 cease firing”
"Number 5 cease firing” Each gun fires 2 RGF
“Number 6 cease firing” on the order of the Nos 1.
53. Is drill ko guide ke toer par rakha gaya hain jise tac zarurat ke tor par badla ja
sakta hain. Confusion avoid karne ke liye yeh zaruri hain ki apni apni duty ke clear
jankari ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
222
CHAPTER – V

MISCELLANEOUS SHOOTS AUR PROCEDURES

SECTION 59 - ILLUMINATION SHOOT

1. Illumination star shells carrier type ke hote hain aur illuminating composition,
parachute se bhara hua ek canister me hota hain. Shell ko hawa me burst kiya jata hain,
jaha par illumination composition aag pakad leta hain aur dheere dheere jameen par
girta hain aur ek kafi bade area me roshni failata hain.

Definitions

2. Illumination shoots se sambandh rakhane wale terms ke paribhasa neeche di gai

hain :-

(a) Area of Illumination. Surface area jisko illuminate karna hain,

required intensity ke sath optimum height of burst par. Isko us point ke radius me
darshaya jata hain jo ki point of burst ke vertically neeche ground par hota hain.

(b) Optimum Height of Burst. Yeh wo height of burst hain jahna par
canister poora jal kar zameen par girta hain.

(c) Candle Power. Ye ek source ki illumination shakti ko darshane ka ek

zariya hain. Ye diye gaye roshni ke source ki illuminating power ka ratio ek
standard candle se karti hain.

(d) Intensity of Illumination. Area of illumination ke andar lifht ke intensity.

(e) Illumination Point. Ye woh point hain jaha illuminating shell burst karta
hain. Ye area of illumination ke vertically upar hota hain.

Technical Data

3. Star shell ka technical data jo planning ke liye istemal kiya ja sakta hain, neeche
diya gaya hain :-

Ser 155 mm
DATA \ EQPT IFG 120mm
No MIRA MIRA ER

(a) Radius of Illumination. 400 m 600 m 800 m 800 m

(b) Total time of Illumination. 30 47 60 60 seconds

seconds seconds seconds

(c) Effective time of Illumination 30 47 55 55 seconds

seconds seconds seconds

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
223

(d) Optimum HOB 350 m 350 m 500 m 500m

(e) Candle Power. 8.5 lacs 10 lacs 21 lacs 18 lacs

(f) Effective distance of point of origin 2500 m 3000 m 3500- 3500-4000 m

from observer. 4000 m

(g) Average rate of descent. 6-8 m/s 3-5 m/s 4 m/s 4 m/s

(h) Time for illumination to become Instants Instan 5 5seconds

effective. taneous taneous seconds

Note :- HOB ko badalne se area of illumination aur intensity of illumination is

prakar change hoti hain:-

(a) Agar HOB ko do guna kar diya jae to.

(i) Area of illumination ka radius do guna ho jata hain.

(ii) Intensity of illumination ek chauthai ho jaati hain.

(b) Agar HOB ko aadha kiya jae to.

(i) Area of illumination ka radius aadha ho jata hain.

(ii) Intensity of illumination chaar guna ho jaati hain.

Employment

4. Star shells ko niminlikhit purpose ke liye istemaal kiya ja sakta hain.

(a) Us jagah ko illuminate karna, jahna apne attacking troops advance kar
rahe ho.

(b) Us jagah ko illuminate karna, jahna dushman ki FDL’s ho jahna se wo

advance kar sakta ho.

(c) Armour Operations ko raat me madad karne ke liye.

(d) En ki NOD’s ko naakam karne ke liye.

(e) Raat ko patrols ko madad karne ke liye taaki en ki strength aur position ka
pata chale.

(f) OP offr ko night me tgt par fire adjust karne ke liye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
224
5. Tactical operations ko support karne ke liye continuous illumination ka istemaal
kiya jata hain aur arty fire ko adjust karne ke liye coordinate illumination ka istemal kiya
jata hain. Yah techniques alag hone ke wajah se discuss ki jayengi.

In Support Of Tactical OPs.

6. Alag alag situations me intensity of illumination ke requirment alag alag hogi.

Movement ke liye illumination, observation ke comparison me kam chahiye. Jarrori
intensity ko HsOB ko kam ya jyada kar ke hasil kiya ja sakta hain.
7. Madhya bindu (‘T’) ko yadi illuminate karna hain, to ‘T’ ko is prakaar se rakha jata
hain:-

(a) Observation, Surveillance and Control of Fire. Target centre ke upar.

(b) Movement. Yah nirbhar karta hain ki hum kaunsa ammunition istemaal
kar rahe hain, lekin yeh hamesha apni sena ke age rahega. 105mm IFG ke liye
point of illumination apni sena se 2000-2500 metres aage rehta hain.

(c) Neutralisation or Incapacitation of Enemy Night Observation Devices.

Devices ke samne aur low HOB par.

8. Planning Data Table

TABLE XXXIV

IFG 120mm MOR

Movement Observation Movement Observation and
and Surveillance
Surveillance
Points of Points 800 m Points of burst Points 1200 m Points of burst
burst ke dur aur apni 600 m dur aur ill dur aur apni 1000 m dur aur ill
beech ki duri sena se 2 se karne wale area sena se 2.5 se karne wale area ke
2.5 km aage. ke upar. 3 km aage. upar.

Rates of fire 3 rounds per 4 rounds per 2 rounds per 3 rounds per
minute per minute per point minute per minute per point of
round of of burst. point of burst. burst.
burst.
Uchit HOB. 350 m. 350 m. 350 m. 350 m.

155 mm FH77 B 02
Movement Observation and Surveillance
Points of Points 1600 m dur aur apni Points 1200 m dur aur ill karne wale
burst ke sena se 3.5 se 4 km aage. area ke upar.
beech ki duri.

Rates of fire.
4 round per 3 minutes per point 2 rounds per minute per point of burst.
of burst.
Uchit HOB. 500 m. 500 m.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
225
OP Par Kaaryavahi

9. Planning ke Waqt Sochne Wale Points. Jab supported arm commander ko

illumination chahiye, tab dhyan mein rakhne wale points :-

(a) Tactical.
(i) Purpose of illumination.
(ii) Location of own troops.
(iii) Neighbouring units/formations ka task, jis se ki unke plans kharab
na ho.
(b) Technical.
(i) Jis area me illumination karna hain uska failav.
(ii) Jamini banawat aur mausam.
(iii) Sadhno ki availability.
(iv) Duration and time.
(v) Intensity of illumination.

10. Upar likhi reqmt ka dhyan mein rakhne ke bad OP offr ko dekhna chahiye :-

(a) Area of illumination ki shape ke anusar No of illumination ke pts

aur unka layout.

(b) HOB reqd.

(c) Kahan rakhna Illuminating rd.

(d) Rate of fire.

11. Sambhav layout is prkar hain (dekhen fig 24) :-

(a) Ek single pt par illumination.

(b) Linear Illumination. Is layout me, points specified bg ki line mein

barabar doori par place kiye jate hain. Point 1 specify kiya jata hain. Line ka
spread OP offr bg dekar, dega. Spread ka extent number of points aur unke
beech me doori dekar dega. Linear illumination ke liye order is prakar hoga
“Point 1 at Add 200 (tgt grid corrn agar jaroori hain) Bg 280, 4 Points 800”. Fire
ko point 1 par adjust karne ki koshish karni chahiye. Agar fire ko kisi aur point par
adjust karna hain to OP offr us point ko apne orders me specify karega. Gun end
ka procedure para 13 (a) me diya gaya hain.

(c) Triangular Illumination. Is layout me points ek equilateral triangular

fashion me banta hain. Point 1 specify kiya jata hain. Point 2 aur 3, point 1 ke
relation me clock wise direction me hote hain. Triangular layout dete samay OP
offr point 2 aur 3 ka point 1 se bg aur equilateral triangle ke ek side ka length
order karega. Triangular illumination ke liye order is prakar hoga. “ Point 1 at

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
226
Right 200 (tgt grid corrn agar jaroori hain to) Triangle Point 2 Bg 180, Point 3
Bg 240, 800”.

(d) Box Illumination. Is me layout box pattern me ek specified distance par

banya jata hain. Box ko kisi bhi direction me place kiya ja sakta hain. Point 1 kisi
corner point ke roop me specify kiya jayega. Bache huye points No 1 ke clock
wise direction me honge. Box ka layout indicate karne ke liye, Bg length aur point
1 se box ke width, aur points ke beech ke doori, order karega’ Box illumination ka
order is prakar hoga, “Point 1 at Right 400 Add 300 (tgt grid corrn agar jaroori
hain). Box Bg 200, 3 Points, Bg 290, 2 Points, 800”.

800 M 1
240º

60º

3 60º

800 M
180º

60º

2
TRIANGULAR ILLUMINATION

1 800 M 2 800 M 3
200º

290º
800 M

6 5
4

BOX ILLUMINATION

FIGURE 24 – ILLUMINATION LAYOUTS

12. OP officer “……Target Star” ke warning order ke sath shoot shuru karta hain .
Kitni guns shoot mein hissa lengi yeh nirbhar karta hain ki kitne illumination points hain.
Star ko illumination layout ke adhar par adjust kiya jata hain. Normally , HOB ke liye
adjustment ki jaroorat nahin hoti kyon ki gun end par procedure yeh sunishchit karta
hain ki round optimum HOB par hi burst ho. Agar, star jamein par girne ke bad bhi kafi
samay tak jalta rahe ya phir hawa mein kafi upar hi jal kar khatma ho jaye toh, OP officer
HOB ko adjust karta hain “up/down…..” (25 metres ke multiples mein) ki corrections de
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
227
kar jo nirbhar karta hain ki HOB ko upar ya niche karna hain. Jab ek gun se adhik hissa
le rahi hoan to OP officer linear/triangular/box layout order karta hain method of fire for
effect ke sath jaisa ki Sub Paras 11(b) to (d) mein diya hain. ‘Fire by order’ ka order
dekar OP officer shoot ka control apne paas rakhta hain. Box illumination ke liye poora
order ho sakta hain “Point 1 at ….Box, bearing……points, bearing points,800 , FBO , 16
RGF , 15”.

Gun End Par Procedure

13. OP officer se illumination layout ka order milne tak GPO single gun ranging with
star shell karega . Is par woh ordered layout ko last data par plot karega aur tgt grid
correction (if any) ko shamil karega aur har gun ke point of burst ke liye technical data
workout karega . Har layout ka technical data workout karne ka procedure niche diya
gaya hain :-

(a) Linear Illumination. OP officer se order milne par “Point 1, bearing….” ,

layout ko artillery board par plot kiya jayega , aur sabhi guns ka individual data
workout kiya jayega jaise ki smoke screen ke liye karte hain. Agar, fire Point 1 ke
alawa kisi aur point par adjust kiya jata hain to yeh OP officer dwara layout
orders mein specify kiya jayega ,eg; Point 3 jis case mein GPO points 1 aur 2 ko
di gayi bearing par point 3 se pahle plot karega.

(b) Triangular Illumination. “Point 1 ……Triangle , point 2 bearing……point

3 bearing….” ka order milne par layout ko artillery board par plot kiya jayega aur
individual guns ka data workout kar ke unhe pass kiya jayega .

(c) Box Illumination. “Point 1 Box, bearing …..”, ka order milne par layout
ko artillery board par plot kiya jayega aur points ko clockwise direction mein likha
jayega (1 ke relation mein). Individual guns ka data smoke screen form par
workout kiya jayega aur guns ko pass kiya jayega.

14. Star shell ke range table, koi bhi HOB aur range ke liye, fuze setting aur QE dete
hain. Koyi bhi point of burst ka line, fuze setting aur QE workout karne ka tarika is
prakar hain:-

(a) Ordered point of burst ka artillery board se map line aur range pado.

(b) C of M apply karo, hamesha SPL aur SPHR milega.

(c) Star shell ke HOB workout karne ke liye, star shell ke jo optimum HOB aur
target aur battery ke beech me jo anthar hain, unko joden.

(d) Star shell ke range table se, SPR aur HOB jo order kiya hain, jaise
para14(c) mein diya hain, uska fuze setting aur QE pado.

(e) Agar OP offr “up/down---------,meters”, order karta hain, to GPO star shell
ke liye naya HOB workout karega. Is HOB aur SPHR ke samne jo fuze setting aur
naya QE ata hain, GPO usko guns ko order karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
228
Note:- Jaha tak ho sakhe, palmtops use karna chahiye.HOB ke up/down corrections ke
sath,palmtop gun correction ko change karne ke sath,trajectory ko raise/lower karta aur
RT fuze setting ko badalte hain.

15. Example. 105/37mm IFG daura, Box – illumination method shoot ka

udhaharan niche diya hua hain:-

TABLE XXXV: EXAMPLE OF ORDERS FOR CONTINUOUS ILLUMINATION LAYOUT

IN SUPPORT OF TACTICAL OPS
Ser OP Offr’s Orders Gpo’s Orders Gpo’s Remarks
Report

1. “ Bty tgt star “ Bty tgt star prepare

prepare 12 RPG” 12 RPG”
2. “942691 ht 600 “Star Charge 3, “Shot
m,oscar bearing 245º20’, A of 3,Flight
232,illuminating S Zero, No.3 25”
enemy Ranging, Fuze 25,
defences,Fire” Elevation 24º20’,
illuminating enemy
defences, FIRE.

3. “Right 150, Add “More 2 30’, “Shot 3” **Bold tgt grid corrn order
400” ** fuze 26.6, karte hain.Bg,range aur ht
elevation 25º 45’ ” ke liye double corrections
istemaal karna
chahiye,ammunition
bachane ke liye.Jyada
accuracy ki jarrorat nahin.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
229

4. “Point 1 at ADD “Number 3 report @GPO reported bearing or

200. Box bearing bearing and QE”@ elevation ko CPSF se
200, 2 points; milata hain. Target grid
Bearing 290, 3 correction laagu karte hain
points, 800, FBO, or data note karte hain.
12 RGF, 20" Arty board ka point or is
data ki correction ko box ka
point 1 leta hain. 200 or
290 bearing par is point se
line draw karte hain. Is line
par 2 or 3 point ek dushare
se 800 m doori par plot
karte hain. Box pura hone
par points ke numbering,
clockwise direction me aur
tab harek point ke bearing
or range read karte hain. Is
range par star shell ke final
HOB ke against wah har
gun ke liye fuze setting or
QE range table se workout
karega. Data gun ko order
kiya jayega.
(Data passed to
guns) “FBO 12
RGF 20 secs”
"Ready”
5. “Fire” "Fire” “Shot”
6. "Illumination “Illumination
effective Stand effective.
easy” Stand easy”

Adjustment of Artillery Fire

16. GPO hamesha star shell or HE ammunition ke firing ke interval ka antar ko work
out karta hain .
17. The order "Interval star and HE ....................." OP officer ka dawara bhi paryog
keya ja sakta hain jab OP, GPO dawara liya gaya interval badlana chahta ho.
18. Procedure at the OP.

(a) OP officer is order ke sath "......... target observation by star" ka order

karta hain.
(b) Sab se pahle star shell fire karne wali gun ko tgt par adjust kiya jata hain,
taki HE rounds ka observation liya ja sake (Meticulous ranging ki jaroorat nahin
hain). Orderd corrections Star and HE dono ke liye aplicable hoga, except “Up
/down..... meters” correction, HOB adjust karne ke liye kewal star shell ke liye
lagoo hogi. Gun ke adjust hone ke bad “ Star adjusted” ke report di jayegi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
230
(c) Ranging HE ground burst single gun ya salvo ke sath ki jaati hain, HE shell
ki bursting preced/succeed star shell se hoti hain.Star aur HE shell ke beech ki
interval ko GPO report karta hain jo ki “Interval star and HE….” ko sath badal
sakta hain.

(d) “Cancel Observation by Star’ ka order tab use kiya jata hain jab star shell
fire karne wali gun ki aur fire karne ki jarurat nahi hoti. Ammunition badalne ka
order Star shell fire karne wali gun ke liye bhi diya ja sakta hain, eg ,
“Number….HE”.

19. Gun End Ke Procedure.

(a) Star Shell ke Gun data ko determine karne wale procedure usi prakar se
kiya jata hain jis prakar se upar para 11 main hain. Smoke Screen form (IAFB
1005) ko GPO star data ko work out karne ke liye pryog main la sakta hain.

(b) GPO battery(Regimental aur higher targets ke case main ranging

battery) ki ek gun ko star shell fire karne ke liye nominate karega.

(c) Jab OP “Star Adjusted” reports karta hain tab GPO use Guns ko pass karta
hain aur Star Shell fire karne wali gun usi data par fire karti rahegi jis par star
adjust kiya gaya tha. HE fire karne wali ranging gun(s) ab last centre to centre
data per fire karengi, HOB ki corrections ko chod ke. Star Shell fire karne wali gun
HE fire karne wali gun(s) se pehle fire karengi, GPO dawara nikali gayi interval
pe, ya OP ke dawara order ki gayi internal par, har correction aur method of fire
par.Subsequent target grid correction star shell fire karne wali gun pe lagu nahi
hongi, jab tak use change of ammunition ka adesh GPO se nahi milta, i.e.,“
Number………HE”.

(d) Suvidha ke liye, GPO “FBO” adesh dega jab OP officer ranging with HE ka
adesh dega.

(e) OP ka adesh “Cancel Observation by star” ka oder milne par , GPO star sell
fire karne wali gun ko “Stand Easy” ka adesh de ga. Jab ki, change of ammunition
ke adesh par star shell fire karne wali gun fire unit ki bachi huyi guns ke
samnantar ammunition aur gun data par fire karna jari kare gi.

20. Interval Star an HE. Do shells ke times of flight ka comparison karke GPO
corresponding interval ko is prakar se calculate karta hain :-

(a) Wo T of F ko Star range table se nikalta hain.

(b) Is T of F se wo HE shell ki time of flight ko subtract karta hain aur is time

ke sath time required for full illumination ke sath add karta hain(nil agar star
instantenrously effective ban jaye eg 105 IFG or, 5 seconds for 155mm).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
231
21. Example. 120 mm mortor Charge 3

Star Shell …….. 2700 meters, HOB 400 35 secs.

HE Shell …….. 38 secs.

Difference(HE Shell
Ka kam time lena) …….. 3 secs.

Full illumination ke liye time interval ki avashakta ………. Nil.

Star aur HE shell ke bich total time interval ………. 3 secs.

22. 105 mm ke sath specimen shoot ka ek example niche wale table mein diya gaya
hain.

TABLE XXXVI: ADJUSTMENT OF ARTILLERY FIRE USING STAR SHELL

OP Officer's GPO's Orders GPO's Remarks

Ser Orders Report
to OP
1. “Battery Target" “Battery Target"
“Observation by
star"
2. "939621 Ht 200m “HE 117 Ch 2 *HE data may be passed
Oscar 241.Number 3 star, to the remaining guns
Company locality
Bearing 230º 40’ A later.
Fire” of S 15 E Number 3
A of S zero Number
3 ranging Number 3
Fuze 24.3 5800 *
Number 3 Elevation
28º 45' Company
locality, Fire”
“position
corrections number “Shot 3,
1, 3, 5 minus 25, flight
number 1, 2, 4, 5 25”
rest”
3. “Right 200 Add “More 10 30' Fuze
200” 25.3 elevation “Shot 3”
29º45’
4. “Star adjusted, “Star Adjusted. ** difference between
Single gun ranging. Take post. More OPening data and the
Repeat". 1030"** FBO 5975 last centre to centre data
number 3 and 4, 1 after correction at ser 3.
RGF

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
232
5. “Number 3 and 4
fire"
6. “Left 100, Drop “Less 45’ 5850
200” Number 3 and 4, 1
RGF
“Number 3 and 4 “Shot”
fire"
7. “1 RGF" “1 RGF" OP officer observes the
“Fire” “Shot” MPI and adjusts if
required.
8. “Number 3 HE, 3 “Cancel FBO After OP officer is
RGF” Number 3 HE 117, satisfied that the MPI is
bearing 229º 55’ A on the target.
of S 15’ E, position
correction number
3 plus 25, 5850, 3 “Shot”
RGF”
9. "Target neutralised, “Target neutralised,
Stand easy” Stand easy"

23. Use of Star for Adjustment of Artillery Fire in Mike and Higher Targets.
Is procedure ko istemal karne ke liye Section 54 ko refer kare.

Flare Ke Taur Par Illuminating Shell

24. Burst on impact par fire kiye gaye illuminating shell ko BE colored flare ke sthan
par air force ko target indicate karne, dur sthit objectives ko mark karne aur aise hi dusre
kamo ke liye raat mein istemaal kiya jaa sakta hain.

25. OP End Par Karwai. Nature of target “single gun target star” “percussion”
hoga. Ranging percussion par set star shell se ki jayegi, jab tak target area mein round
nahi aa jata. Fire for effect, TOT basis par open kiya jata hain. Effective time of
illumination ke mutabik method of fire mein ek suitable interval diya jata hain.

26. Gun End Par Karwai. GPO ke order illuminating shell ke liye normal
procedure mein rahenge. HOB ke liye koi extra allowance nahi lagaya jayega. AP, range
to impact ke against dekha jayega aur guns ko actual angle of sight ko jod kar pass kiya
jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
233
SECTION 60 – AIR OBSERVATION POST (AIR OP) SHOOTS

Introduction

1. Air OPs ka sabse acha istemaal un targets ko engage karne ke liye kiya jata hain,
jo ground se nahi dikhte. Targets engage karne ke liye sabhi rules aur procedures air
OPs ke liye bhi lagu hote hain. Is shoot ke prakar age ke bhag mein diye gaye hain.

OP Par Karwai

2. Initial Orders.

(a) Pre arranged shoots mein ye order, bina “fire” ke order ke,pilot ke dwara
take off se pahle diye jate hain.

(b) Target ki height order karne ki zarurat nahi hoti.

(c) OT bearing ka matlab kisi zamini nishan aur target ko milati hui line,line
BT, cardinal point ya koi bhi asan direction ho sakta hain.

(d) “Fire by order” aam taur par pilot ko uska aircraft manoeuvre karne ka
mauka dene ke liye order kia jaTa hain.

3. Shoot ke dauran normal fire orders diye jate hain.

Gun Position Par Karwai

4. Gun end procedures normal hote hain, neeche likhe additions ke sath :-

(a) Pre arranged shoot mein hissa lene wali sabhi units pilot ke udan bharne
se pahle “ready” aur T of F report karti hain, bhale hi shoot ranging ya FFE se
shuru ho raha ho.

(b) Jab “OT-BT” order kiya jata hain, to ranging battery apna OT line ka
bearing shoot mein hisa lene wali dusri fire units ko report karega.

(c) GPO map se height read karta hain. Mike & higher concentration mein jo
battery ya regt engaging kar rahi hain uska senior call sign wali battery target ki
height order karta hain jo woh used kar raha hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
234
SECTION 61- RANGING BY LADDER (AIR OP)

Introduction

1 Air OP apne kam karne ke tarike se dushman ke liye ek asan target ban jata hain.
Kyunki woh kafi samay tak dushman ke anti-aircraft devices ke pahunch me hota hain.
Is samay ko sath hi shoot ke samay ko kam karne ke liye “Ranging by ladder” procedure
ka istemal kiya jata hain. Aam taur par yeh Air OP ke liye fayademand hain lekin ek
ground OP bhi iska istemal karke shoot me lagne wale samay ko kam kar sakta hain.Air
OP is procedure ka istemal us samay bhi karta hain jab map reading mushkil ho,jab
reference points asani se na mile ya jab lambe OT distances par fly karna ho.

Principle

2. Air OP ko OT ke sath, left ya right ke duriyon ka anuman lagana bahut mushkil

hota hain.Is liye woh ek aisa method istemal karta hain jisse woh range aur line ko
bracketing kar sake. Ground par do landmark banakar unke, andaz se, OP distance ko
judge kar sakta hain. Yeh landmark do round/salvo fire karke banaye jaate hain jo ek
dusre se 200 , 400 , ya 800 m dur hote hain. Dono round/salvo ki madad se OP tgt ki
position ko read kar sakta hain aur normal ranging kar sakta hain. Do round / salvo ke
bich ka farak samajh aane par dahine taraf ki gun/tp tgt se zyada aur baye taraf ki gun/tp
tgt se kam distance par fire karte hain yeh distance jo ladder order kiya gaya hain usse
adha hota hain.

OP par Procedure

3. OP offr opening ladder ki duri decides karta hain. Yeh duri OP offr ki ground se
wafiyat aur OT dist par nirbhar karegi . Lambe ladder ka matlab kam wafiyat.

4. Initial orders me nature of tgt ke sath OP offr ladder ki length order karega, e.g.
”Bty tgt ladder 400”. Baki orders normal tarike se diye jayenge.

5. Opening ladder order karne ke bad OP offr ninmalikhit tariko se kaam karega:-

(a) Woh ek aur ladder order karega jo opening ladder se alag ya same ho
sakti hain. ie :-

(i) Right100 Ad200 Ladder 200 (Yadi ladder OT line se dur hain). Is
case me original ladder 400 tha.

(ii) Right 100 Add 200 (jab same ladder ki jarurat ho).

(iii) Repeat (ek normal fire discipline order).

(b) Kisi ek round /salvo ko observe karke uski madad se normal ranging
shuru karega,e.g.From the Right Add 100 (Is baat se GPO yeh samajhata hain ki
jo correction mila hain usse woh right gun/tp ke data par lagayega aur woh gun/
tp ranging gun / tp ban jayegi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
235
(c) Exact correction order karke MPI ko adjust kare,e.g.from the left , right 50
add100 1 RGF. (Isse GPO ko pata chalta hain ki jo correction mila hain woh Lt
Gun/Tp se apply hoga. GPO yeh data sabhi six guns ko pass karega).

Gun Position Par Karwai

6. Initial orders milne par GPO gun data deduce karta hain aur predict karta hain. Iske
bad do guns ko,ya salvo ranging mein dono troops ko ,ranging ka order deta hain,eg.

“Number 2 & 3 ranging” ya “ right & left troop salvo ranging”

7. GPO di gayi ladder ko aadha kar ke,line OT par lagata hain aur, ladder length ki
aadhi correction right gun/troop ko add mein pass karta hain aur left Gun/troop ko Drop
mein pass karta hain.GPO ranging guns ko concentrate bhi karta hain.

8. Ranging ke dauran sabhi corrections tgt grid template par,line OT ,par hi lagayi
jayengi diye gaye ladder dist ke centre pt par,agar specifically order na ki gayi ho eg “
from the left/right”.

9. MPI adjustment ke dauran ,agar order prefix ho “ from the left/right”,appropriate

gun ke data par hi template par correction lagayi jayegi. Iske bad bearing aur range
artillery board se padh kar baki six guns ko pass kar di jati hain, aur pass ki gayi
concentration apne aap cancel ho jati hain.

10. Mike aur Higher Targets. Ranging bty ke alawa baki sari fire units bhi OP se
di gayi tgt grid corrns template par ranging bty ki tarah hi follow karti rahti hain

TABLE XXXVII : RANGING BY LADDER

Ser OP Orders Gun Data Orders to the Guns
1. “Battery target Ladder 400 “Bg 47º25', “Battery target HE 117 Ch 3
123456 Ht 800" Concentration Bearing 470 25' Number 2
Number 2 Less 25' Less 25', Number 3 Less
Number 3 Less 10' 10',A of S 30 E”
2. “OT-BT, Platoon locality, “Range 7800” “Number 2 and 3 ranging
Fire” Number 2 8000, Number 3
7600, Platoon locality, Fire”.
3. “Right 100 Add 200” “M 1º 30' 8000” “M 1º 30' Number 2 8200,
Number 3 7800”
4. “Ladder 200” “M 45’ 8000" “Number 2 - 8100, Number 3
“From the left, Right 50 (Correction applied - 7900”. Bg 49o 40' 8000, 1
Add 1001 RGF”. to data of left gun) RGF"

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
236
SECTION 62 - RANGING BY LADDER FOR ENGAGEMENT OF
TARGETS BY GROUND OP

PART I- INTRODUCTION

General

1. Aisa shayad hi hoga ke tgts jo ki immediate neutralisation hone hain wo jyada der
tak dikhe. Is liye aise tgts ke liye speed bahut hi jaroori hain. Large apex angle aur slope
ka effect in karno ki wajah se OP ko ranging mein kafi mushkil aati hain. Normal ranging
mein sabse jyada samay bracketing mein lagta hain, par ek round ko line OT par lana itna
mushkil nahi hota agar opening round sahi measured aur subtension factor sahi apply
kiya ho.

Outline Procedure

2. Ladder procedure mein ek bar round line OT par aa jata hain ( Ya ek correct
estimate ki hui correction mil jati hain). One round of bty fire karke hota hain, jisme har
gun ki disha ek point par fire ki jaati jo ki 200/100 meter par hota hain. Aise ladder
invariably thek hote hain target bracketing ke liye,aise hi yeh spanning 1000/500 meter
doori tak karta hain.

3. Jaise hi target two rounds ke beech bracket ho jata hain ”stop” order diya jayega,
ammunition save karne ke liye. Is stage par, bracket 200/100 meter hoga,aur OP officer
MPI adjust kar sakta hain correction order kar ke,aur agar jaroorat ho to bracket split kar
sakta hain.

4. Ladder procedure ka use akalmand tariqe se OP officer kar sakta hain.Agar kabhi
bhi aisa lagta hain ki normal procedure se jaldi result pa sakte hain to” Cancel ladder”
order se change kar sakte hain. Aise case, adhiktar opening round jo target ke pass girta
hain ya target round hone ki samay aate hain.

Fire Disicipline and Convention

5. “------ Target Ladder”. Ye order OP se GPO ko darshata hain ki OP ab Ladder

method se ranging karne walla hain, sabhi guns jo shoot main hissa le rahi hain wo
concentrated hongi GPO convention ke hisab se.

6. Ladder Add/Drop200/100

(a) “Lader Add 200 / 100”. Ye order OP se GPO ko darshata hain ki guns
ko points par directed kiya jaye jo 200/100 meter door ho, aur, ”Add” direction jo
target grid template par hain,wahan se start kiya jaye jahan se pichla round fire
kiya gaya ho ya correction order kiya gaya ho, Add ke direction ki taraf.

(b) “Ladder Drop 200 /100”. Ye order OP se GPO ko darshata hain ki guns
ko points par directed kiya jaye jo 200/100 meter door ho,aur ,”Drop” direction jo
target grid template par hain,wahan se start kiya jaye jahan se pichla round fire
kiya gaya ho ya correction order kiya gaya ho, Drop ke direction ki taraf.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
237
7. “ Cancel ladder, reference…..”. OP se ye order darshata hain ki:-

(a) Cancel concentration.

(b) Jis data par named gun ne fire kiya hain usse centre to centre data liya
jaye.

8. Convention. No1 gun ko hamesha farthest point par directed kiya jayega.

PART II - PROCEDURE AT THE OP

General

9. Initial Orders. OP Officer hamesha nature of target ke sath ladder shabd

lagayega.

Ranging

10. Ladder order karna. OP officer sahi ladder order kare,jab usne round
dekha ho OT line par ya usse ye lagta hain ki correction order se wo ye pass kar sakta
hain. Nimn guidelines dimag main rakhna chahiye :-

(a) Jab opening round OT line se bahut door ho. Tab wo usse laterally move
kar sake ladder order karne se pehle. Lateral correction ke sath range correction
bhi diya jaye basharte opening round theek information de.

(b) Jab opening round target se bahut close ho tab OP Officer 100m ka ladder
order kar sakta hain,yeh tabhi kiya ja sakta hain jab OP ki command acchi
ho,maps barosemand ho aur jab OP officer pehle se hi shoot le raha ho same
area main.

11. Examples.

(a) R1* TARGET OT Factor - 50 meters

Observation - Doubtful left 8 degrees.

Correct Order “Right 400” opening round OT line se kafi alag hain.isliye OP
officer ek round aur dekhega ladder ka order karne se pehle.

(b) R 1* OT Factor - 50 meters

TARGET Observation - Over right 2 degrees.

Correct Order - “ Ladder Drop 100 at left 100 Drop 200. Bf 25”. Double
corection diya gaya hain taki target ki jaldi bracketing ho saken.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
238
12. Ladder Place Karna. Line correction ke sath range correction dene se
target ki jaldi bracketing ki ja sakti hain. (Range correction dete waqt dhayan
mein rakhna chahiya ki woh sahi tariqe se di gayi ho taqi bracketing karne me fail
ho jane par barbad na ho sake.Ladder aur double correction dete waqt OP officer
ko ye dhayan mein rakhna chahiye ki ladder ka sabse dur wala round pehle fire
kiya jayega).Ek acha ladder teen round mein target ko bracket kar dena chahiya.

13. Example

+ OT Factor - 50 meters
Observation - Short Right 1 degrees.
R 1*
(Round target se karib 600 meter pehle gira)

Correct Order. “Ladder Add 200 at left 50 BF 20”. Number range

correction diya ja chuka hain,agar round pehle bhi gira ho to bhi kyonki 200
meter ka ladder 1000 meter tak cover karta hain aur uska pahla round
target ke aas pas hi girega.Aur agla round me target bracket ho jayega.

14. Interval. Jo bhi interval diya jayega woh time of flight se five second
jyada diya jana chayia. Is karwai ke karne se is baat ko dhayan mein rakha ja
sakta hain ki jab target ki bracketing ho jati hain tab, abhi tak nahi fire kiye huye
rounds ko stop de kar bachaya ja sakta hain.lekin mortars aur High angle ki
firing mein, interval ko chota hona chahiya taki time ko bachaya ja sake.

15. Adjustment of MPI. Bracketing aur target round milne ke bad OP

officer “stop” aur”cancel ladder bolta hain. Reference------------“ .ye reference woh
gun ko jayega jiska round target pe gira hain ya bracket ke woh round ko jisse
OP officer aage ki corrections de sakta hain.iske bad woh is tarah se follow
karega.

(a) Agar target round hain to woh sidha MPI adjust karega,aur order
karega. “stop, cancel ladder.reference 1 RGF.”Go on”.

(b) Agar ladder 100 meter ka ho to woh sidha MPI adjustment se start
kar sakta hain. Apne orders ko tod kar is tarah se order dega”stop.cancel
ladder. Reference ---- add/Drop 50 1RGF, go on”.

(c) Agar ladder 200 meter ka hain to OP officer ko ek aur ranging round
dekhna chahiya taki ek short bracket achieve kiya ja sake. Yeh kam woh
“stop “ ka order deke karta hain. Cancel ladder. Reference…….. Single gun
ranging. ADD/ DROP 100, Go on”. Normal case mein MPI Adjustment, split of
short bracket ke dauran kiya jayega.

16. Fire for Effect. Ekbar MPI adjust ho jane par OP officer normal tariqe se
target ko barbad kar sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
239
PART III - PROCEDURE AT GUN POSITION

Initial Orders Milne Par.

17. Nimn karwai hogi :-
(a) Sabhi gun ki Concentration work out kiya jayega.
(b) Initial concentration sirf ranging gun ko order kiya jayega.
“Ladder ........” Ka Order Milne Par
18. Nimna karwai hogi :-
(a) Appropriate ladder ko template par plot kiya jayega aur sab guns ke liye
data workout kiya jayega. Number 1 gun ko ladder par farthest point par direct
kiya jayega.
(b) Concentration sahit poora data guns ko firing sequence ke anusar pass
kiya jayega. Jo guns ko fire karne ke liye jaruri hain.
“Stop, Cancel Ladder Reference ........ “ ka Order Milne Par
19. Nimnliki karwai hogi :-
(a) GPO “Stop” ka order dega.
(b) Nominated gun ki data, centre to centre data mana jayega. Yadi OP
officer ki koi bhi correction order ho to isse gun data per apply kiya jayega.
(c) Para 19 (b) mein workout kiya gaya data sabhi gun ko pass kiya jayega.
20 Ladder ranging shoot ka example Table – XXXVII mein diya gaya hain.

PART IV - MISCELLANEOUS POINTS

21. Large Apex Angle. Large apex angles mein fire karte samay ladder ke
successive rounds zone ke baare mein jankari de sakte hain. Is jankari ka prayog
adjustment of MPI ke samay sahi correction de kar karna chahiye. Nimnlikit example
dekhen -

R1* Ladder - 100 meters

R2* OT Factor - 60 meters
R3*
+ Observation - MPI Left 1 degree
R4*

22. Slope ka Asar. Ladder firing ke dauran, zone aur trajectory par slope ka asar
dekha jata hain. Iske liye MPI adjust karte samay theek correction dekar slope ko adjust
kiya jata hain.
23. Is tarike se ground OPs IN target ko jaldi barbad kar sakte hain. Is tarike se slope
/zone ke karan aane wali correction ka pata chalta hain. Iska istemal hill shooting ke

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
240
dauran, ya large apex angle se shoot lete samay kar sakte hain. OP officer ko ladder ki
length chunne aur lagane ki poori jankari hona zaruri hain.

OT FACTOR - 50 YARDS
R1
R2
OBSERVATIONS
R1 - OVER LINE
TARGET R2 - OVER RIGHT 2 DEGREES
R3
R3 - SHORT RIGHT 4 DEGREES

Ladder Drop 200

Correct Order. “Stop, Cancel Ladder. Reference 3, Left 150. ADD 100, Single
Gun ranging Go On”. Round 3(R3) 4 degrees Right tha aur OT factor ko dhayan
rakhte hue 200 meter ka lateral correction chahiye tha. Lekin, slope ke karan ADD
100 ka correction round ko 1 degee ka fasla dega. Isliye sirf ADD 150 ka correction
diya gaya.

TABLE XXXVIII - EXAMPLE OF ORDERS IN A LADDER RANGING SHOOT

Ser OP GPO Report Remarks

1. “Battery Target “Battery target, HE GPO ne baaki guns
Ladder 456123 ht 117, Charge 2, bearing ko position
100 m, oscar 120, 160º, number 4 more correction pass kiya.
active platoon 10’, A of S 1ºE,
locality, Fire” position correction “Shot 4,
number 4 plus 25,
flight
number 4 ranging, 25”
6500, active platoon
locality, Fire”
“Load”
2. Ladder Add 200 at “ number 1 bearing Sabhi guns ka
Right 100, BF 30” 155º number 1 7200 “ concentration
(Issi prakar sabhi guns shamil hain.
ko Bg aur elev pass
kiya jayega.).
“1 RBF 30 seconds”
“Shot 1”
“Shot 2”
“Shot 3”
……..
4. “Stop. Cancel ladder, “Stop, Number........ #This is the bearing
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
241
Refernce 2, single Ranging Bg 157º, and elevation
gun ranging, Drop 6750#, Go On” obtained after
100” applying the
correction to dat of
number 2, gun
named in OP’s
orders.
5. “Add 50, 1 RGF” “Load, bearing 158º,
6775, 1 RGF”
“Shot”
6. “5 RGF” “5 RGF” “Shot”
7. “Target neutralised, “Target neutralised,
Stand easy” Stand easy”

SECTION 63 - LOCATION AND ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS BY STOP WATCH

Introduction

1. Stop watch method ka istemal distance nikalne mein hota hain,jisme ki chamak
aur visfot hoti hain jo ki OP dekh sakta hain. Ye tariqa tgt ki satik location batane mein
madad aata hain. Aur kudh ki arty fire ko tgt per stop watch, survey aur silent
registration, 1/25,000 map ki madad se tgt ki location pata kar sakta hain. Is tariqe ka
istemal raat ke andhere mein surveyed tgt ko engage karne, aur datum point ke corrn
nikalne ke kam aata hain.lekin din ke samay is tariqe ka istemal bracketing se bachne
ke liye kiya jata hain jabki MPI adjust pahle hi ki tarah kiya jata hain.

2. Ye tariqa kisi bhi shoot ke sath istemal kiya ja sakta hain. Visheshkar IN shoot
mein ye samay kam karta hain kyonki OP ek corrn se MPI ko adjust kar leta hain.ye ek
OP ka tariqa hain aur is se gun end par koi badlav nahi hota.

3. Equipment Required
(a) Stop watch1/10 or 1/5 sec.
(b) Director No.7.
(c) Coordinate transformer on tgt map.
(d) Thermometer.
(e) Table jo time flash to bang se sambhandit ho.

Sidhant

4. Light ki gati itni adhik hain ki uska observer tak pahuchne ka samay na ke
barabar hain. Jab dushman ka wpn fire karta hain to uski chamak dekh kar aawaz ko
kudh tak pahuchne se observer se tgt tak ka distance nikala ja sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
242
5. Source ki bg director aur compass se li ja sakti hain. Jis se source ko sahi locate
kiya ja sakta hain.

Atmospheric Conditions Ka Prabhav

6. Taapman ke karan sound ki velocity kafi had tak prabhawit hoti hain aur, kuch
kum had tak humidity aur hawa ki speed se.

7. 10ºC taapman par sound ki velocity 333.3 m/s le jati hain.Isliye 100C taapman ko
hi standard taapman liya jata hain aur har 1deg C increase ya decrease ke liye sound ki
velocity bhi badthi/gathi hain by 0.6 m/s, udharan ke liya 300C taapman ke liye sound ki
velocity bhi 12 m/s ke rate se badthi hain. Ise tarah sound ki velocity kisi bhi tapman ke
liye calculate kari ja sakti hain.

Tables of Ranges Corresponding to Time Flash to Bang

8. Tables of ranges ke corresponding time flash to bang aur velocity of sound ke

correction har 50 deg taapman ke farak ke liye table xxxix me diya hua hain. In tables ki
absence mein , OP offr ko maujuda taapman par sound ki velocity ko calculate karke ise
time flash to bang se guna kar dena chahiye required range pane ke liye.

Drill

9. OP offr ko chahiye ki wo flash ki bearing aur time flash to bang ko eaksath

dakhe. Aam taur par OP offr ko time flash to bang ko measure karna chahiye aur OPA
ko flash ki bearing director /compass ki madad se layni chahiye. Adjustment of fire ke
dauran director ko target par lay karna chahiye aur graticule ki madad se ranging round
ki lateral deviation ko measure karna chahiye. Baki ki drill todhi si alag hain jo ki purpose
of shoot par nirbhar karti hain Jo niche di gai hain.

Target Acquistion

10. Target ko pahli bar dekne ke bad OP offr aur OPA target ko pahchane ke bad
dono observation lene ke liye tayyar hothe hain.Agar target bad mien bhi daubara active
ho jata hain to agli 4 observation lene ke bad unka mean nikalta hain. Agar aur koi
observation nahi ley saktenhain to sirf 2 observation ka mean nikala jata hain.

11. Calculations

(a) Recorded ki gayi timings ke mean le aur usme 0.1 second ko jod de jo ki
observer ka reaction time hain.

(b) Issi waqt OT distance ko range table main dekhe.

(c) Range main temperature ki correction ko lagaye, agar map distance to

target ki zarurat ho to.

(d) Agar table available na ho to moojuda taapman par sound ki velocity ko

calculate karo aur sound ki velocity ko mean of recorded timing ke sath guna kar
do.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
243
(e) Observed bearing par map distance ko plot karo aur target ke coord pata
karo. Jo ki same OP ke grid ke honge.

12. Example

(a) Maujauda taapman 20ºC.

(b) OT bg to the tgt (Director se) 162º 10.

(c) Observation to time flash to bang :-

(i) 10.5 secs.

(ii) 10.4 secs.
(iii) 10.3 secs.
(d) Meantime flash to bang : 10.4 secs.

(e) Add reaction time to observer : 0.1 secs.

(f) Time flash to bang” : 10.5 sces.

(g) OT distance to tgt from table : 3500 mtrs.

(h) Temp correction for 20 deg C : +6 X time flash

to bang.

(j) Total correction to temp : +63.

(k) Actual OT distance to tgt : 3563.

(l) OT bg par is OT distance ko tgt map par plot karo aur tgt ke coord workout
karo.

Adjustment of fire

13. Adjustment ke dauran lateral correction normal shoots ki tarah aa yengi. Range
ke liye koi bracketing nahi ki jayegi par OT distance to tgt aur tgt round ke diff ko order
kiya jayega. Dono cases mein, procedure same rahega chahe tgt surveyed ho ya silient
regn se ya stop watch obtained kiya hua ho.

14. Procedure

(a) Bino ke graticule ki madad se ranging round aur tgt ke lateral deviation ko
dekha jayega.

(b) Time flash to bang ko har ranging round ke liya record kiya jaiga phir ise
OT distance mein convert kiya jaiga, ise mein maujda taapman ka allowance
lagao.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
244
(c) OP to tgt aur distance from the OP to mean rounds ke difference ko
workout karke range correction nikala jayega.

(d) Substention factor normal tarike se nikala jayega. Point of Burst ka OT dist
se deviation ko lateral correction mein convert kiya jata hain..

(e) Har round ko repeat kiya jayega aur line aur range ki correction ke liye do
observations ka mean liye jayega.

(f) Dead grnd ke case hone par OU rounds ko appropriate correction dekar
un rounds ko observe karo.

15. Example

(a) Maujauda taapman : 30º C.

(b) OT distance : 2700.

(c) Deviation of ranging rounds:

(i) First : left 1º 20‘.
(ii) Second : left 1º 40‘.
(iii) Third : left 1º 30‘.
(d) Flash to bang ka observation:

(i) First : 8.8 secs.

(ii) Second : 9.0 secs.
(iii) Third : 8.9 secs.
(e) Add 0.1 second as reaction time to d (iii) - 9.0 secs.
(f) Distance to MPI(table se) at standard
temperature -3000 m/s.
(g) Temperature correction(table se) - 12 x 9=108 meters.
(h) Distance to MPI - 3108 meters.
(j) OT factor - 3.1x17=52.7=55.
(k) Correction for line - 55 x 1.5 = 82.5 = Right 75.
(l) Correction for Range -3108-2700=408=DROP 400
(m) Correction ordered to guns -“Right 75 DROP 400”

16. Predicted Time. Yeh time flash to bang less observer ka reaction time hain, jo
stop watch dikhata hain, agar round target pe burst hota hain ya ek distance par jo ki OT
distance ka equal hain, under prevailing atmospheric conditions. Known OT distance to
target aur prevailing velocity of sound ko dhyan me rakhte hue, OP officer, target ke
engagement se pehle, sound waves ko us tak pahunchne ka time predict karta hain. Is
prakar ke engagement ke wakt, range corrections observed time flash to bang ke
aadhar par aasani se work out kiya ja sakta hain. Yeh method bahut achcha hain kyonki
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
245
OP officer ko kisi bhi stage mein tables ko refer karne ki zarurat nahi hain. Corrections
Para 14 mein bataye gaye tarike se hi work out kiya gaya hain.

17. Example.

(a) Prevailing temperature = 30 deg C

(b) OT distance = 2700 meters
(c) Velocity of sound at 10 degree C =333.3 meters/sec
(d) Temperature correction for velocity per degree =0.6 meters/sec
(e) Correction for velocity of sound at +20 degree C =(20x0.6)=12.0 meters/sec
(f) Prevailing velocity of sound(v) =(333.3+12)= 345 meters/sec
(g) Predicted time flash to bang =(2700/345)= 7.83secs
(h) Reaction time =0.1sec
(j) Predicted time =7.73secs

18. Calculation Of Range Correction.

(a) Mean observed time to flash = 8.9 secs

(b) Difference in time = 1.17secs (8.9-7.73)
(c) Correction for range = (Vxt)= (345x1.17)
= +403.65= ”DROP 400”

19. Target Acquired And Engaged By Stop Watch Within Datum Limits. Agar
target ko stop watch se datum period ke andar acquire aur engage kiya gaya ho to OT
distance of the target tatha ranging rounds ke liye temperature correction apply karne ki
zarurat nahi hain.

Engagement of Targets at Night

20. Observation. Kyonki flash of target aur ranging round ka raat mein bearing
lena mushkil hain, lateral deviation director se “Look in” bearing aur A of S par measure kiya
jata hain.

21. Fire for Effect. Raat ke dauran ye mumkin nahin hain ki, anuman lagaya ja
sake ki target round achieve hua hain. OP officer ko fire for effect kholna chahiye jab
use nimnlikhit observation milte hain:
(a) Lateral deviation 25 m ke andar.
(b) Ranging round ka distance aur target ka distance 50 m ke andar.

Deduction of Datum Corrections.

22. Datum correction datum point par ranging ya 3 round ke group ka MPI fix karke
nikali jati hain. 3 round ke Group ka MPI fix karne ka tarika para 22 mein bataya gaya
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
246
23. Ranging troop se, one round battery fire,uchit interval datum point ke map data
par.

(a) Teeno rounds ka target grid correction deduce kare, jaisa ki para 14 mein
diya hain.

(b) Sabhi target grid corrections ka mean nikale aur gun ko pass kare “Datum
point at……….”.

(c) GPO target grid correction ko template par plot karke bearing and
range find karta hain.Yeh fired data hain.

(d) GPO (Section 76) mein bataye gaye tarike se datum correction work out
karta hain.

Orders

24. OP ranging round find karne ke liye sare orders normal shoot ki tarah
dega.GPO’s order aur gun end ke procedures main koi change nahi hoga.

Limitations

25. Is method ka main limitation hain ki,war ke dauran jab bahut battle noises sunai
deti hain to to OP ke liye accurate data pata karna mushkil ho jata hain. Ye tarika dead
ground jaise ilake main useful nahin hain kyoki isme flash ya smoke dekhna padta hain
time of burst ke samay.

TABLE XXXIX- TABLES FOR USE WHEN USING STOP WATCH METHOD
VEL OF SOUND AT 100C = 333.3 m/sec
TEMPERATURE CORRECTION IN METERS PER SEC

Temp(0C) Sign 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-100 Minus 12 12.6 13.2 13.8 14.4 15 15.6 16.2 16.8 17.4

-200 Minus 18 18.6 19.2 19.8 20.4 21 21.6 22.2 22.8 23.4

00 Minus 6 5.4 4.8 4.2 3.6 3 2.4 1.8 1.2 0.6

+ 100 Plus Nil 0.6 1.2 1.8 2.4 3 3.6 4.2 4.8 5.4

+ 200 Plus 6 6.6 7.2 7.8 8.4 9 9.6 10.2 10.8 11.4

+ 300 Plus 12 12.6 13.2 13.8 14.4 15 15.6 16.2 16.8 17.4

+ 400 Plus 18 18.6 19.2 19.8 20.4 21 21.6 22.2 22.8 23.4

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
247
DISTANCE EVERY 0.1 SEC TIME FLASH TO BANG IN METERS AT 100C
(When considering ranges, whole value nearest to 1 metre to be taken)

Time .0 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Flash to
Bang in
Seconds

0 Nil 33.3 66.7 100 133.3 166.7 200 233.3 266.7 300

1 333.3 366.6 400 433.3 466.7 500 533.3 566.7 600 633.3

2 666.7 700 733.3 766.6 800 833.3 866.6 900 933.3 966.7

3 1000 1033.3 1066.6 1100 1133.3 1166.6 1200 1233.3 1266.6 1300

4 1333.3 1366.6 1400 1433.3 1466.6 1500 1533.3 1566.6 1600 1633.3

5 1666.6 1700 1733.3 1766.6 1800 1833.3 1866.6 1900 1933.3 1966.6

6 2000 2033.3 2066.6 2100 2133.3 2166.6 2200 2233.3 2266.6 2300.6

7 2333.3 2366.6 2400 2433.3 2466.6 2500 2533.3 2566.6 2600 2633.3

8 2666.6 2700 2733.3 2766.6 2800 2833.3 2866.6 2900 2933.3 2966.6

9 3000 3033.3 3066.6 3100 3133.3 3166.6 3200 3233.3 3266.6 3300

10 3333.3 3366.6 3400 3433.3 3466.6 3500 3533.3 3566.6 3600 3633.3

11 3666.6 3700 3733.3 3766.6 3800 3833.3 3866.6 3900 3933.3 3966.6

12 4000 4033.3 4066.6 4100 4133.3 4166.6 4200 4233.3 4266.6 4300

13 4333.3 4366.6 4400 4433.3 4466.6 4500 4533.3 4566.6 4600 4633.3

14 4666.6 4700 4733.3 4766.6 4800 4833.3 4866.6 4900 4933.3 4966.6

15 5000 5033.3 5066.6 5100 5133.3 5166.6 5200 5233.3 5266.6 5300

16 5333.3 5366.6 5400 5433.3 5466.6 5500 5533.3 5566.6 5600 5633.3

17 5666.6 5700 5733.3 5766.6 5800 5833.3 5866.6 5900 5933.3 5966.6

18 6000 6033.3 6066.6 5100 6133.3 6166.6 6200 6233.3 6266.6 6300

19 6333.3 6366.6 6400 6433.3 6466.6 6500 6533.3 6566.6 6600 6633.3

20 6666.6 6700 6733.3 6766.6 6800 6833.3 6866.6 6900 6933.3 6966.6

Note :- 1. Temp Corrn per degree C/sec time flash to bang = 0.6 m.
2. For deducing predicted time subtract correction from map OT.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
248
SECTION 64 - ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS BY INSTRUMENT CROSS
OBSERVATION

General
1. Instrument cross observation ( ICO) target par artillery fire adjust karna bina koi
process of bracketing hain, jisse time aur ammn ki bachat hoti hain.yeh method
correction to datum pt ke liye bhi istemal kiya jata hain khas tor night ke samay.

2. Yeh method graphically tgt grid correction ko deduce karta hain based on cross
obsn from two obsn posts.Yeh method OP end ka primary procedure hain ranging ke
dauran.

Principle

3. Yeh graphical intersection par adharit hain. Yeh principle ka istemal ranging
round ko target ke relation mein fix karna hota hain.

4. Accurate deviation of line isse nikala jata hain. Ek single OP se yeh as certain
karna mushkil hain.difference between range tgt aur ranging round. Two OP ki madad
se target ke relation se round ke exact location fix karna aasan hain.

OT : MAIN OP
OT : SUBSIDIARY OP

R : LOCATION OF
RANGING ROUND

MAIN OP

FIGURE 25 - PRINCIPLE OF ICO

5. Fig mein T tgt ko aur R, loc of rng round ko darshata hain.Ranging round ka
deviation main aur subsidery OP se X and Y mts right ki taraf. Yeh deviation main OP ke
instrument par marked hain. Lines in dono pt se banaya jata hain aur respective OPs ke
parallel jab tak lines intersect na ho.Yeh intersection true loc of round in relation to tgt ko
darshata hain. Ab main OP ke OT ki relation mein correction nikali jaygi aur guns ko
pass ki jayegi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
249
Description

6. General. Yeh instrument 8 inch sq ke base wale ek hardboard se banaya

gaya hain. Template ka size us par mark kiya hota hain.Ek aur disc celluloid same size
is co- axially mounted base disc par aur free rotate hone ke liye pivot banaya gaya
hain.Base par circle mark ko “ Subsidiary OP disc” aur rotating disc ko “ Main OP disc”
kehte hain.

7. The Base. Base hard board ka bana hain jiski ek side 8 inch ka hain.
Subsidiary OP disc ke upar ke sire (jo ki base par marked hain) 2 arcs marked hain ek
black main aur ek red mein.Black arc subsidiary OP disc ke bahari taraf hain aur central
mark ke dono taraf 0 deg to 60 degrees marked hain. Har deg ke upar khudai hain aur
har 10 deg ke upar likha hua hain. Red arc black arc ke upar hain. Red arc scale ki
marking black arc scale ki marking se double hain. Aur 0 deg se 15 degree tak central
mark ke dono taraf marked hain.Yeh har 30 minute par marked hain aur har 5 degree
par numbered hain. Iska ek sketch niche diya gaya hain.

FIGURE 26 (a) FIGURE 26 (b)

8. Subsidiary OP Disc. Yeh base par hi marked hain aur target grid template
ki tarah isme bhi 15 graduations both sides mein hain. Jo ki center ke dono taraf 1:
25000 scale par hain. Ek black arrow central vertical line ke extension par hain.Jo ki
zero marks ke against hain.

9. Main OP Disc. Yeh celluloid ka bana hain aur subsidiary OP disc ki tarah
marked hain. Central vertical line ki extension main red arrow marked hain jo ki base ke
angles ko align karne ke liye hain.Grid line ka colour subsidiary OP disc ke colour se
alag hona chahiye. Main OP disc subsidiary OP disc par freely rotate kar sakta hain. Fig
26(b) mein diya gaya hain.

Requirements

10. Iske liye two OP, square of target area mein establish kiye jaten hain taki dono
observe kar saken.Dono OP ke beech ka angle 12 degree se kam nahin hona

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
250
chahiye(Acchi accuracy ke liye). Agar conditions 12 degree ka apex angle permit nahin
karte hain tab 6 degrees ko accept karna chahiye.Agar dono OP ka base target area ke
square hain to distance is prakar hona chahiye:-

Apex Angle Distance

(a) 6 Degrees Sabse door target ke range ka 1/10

(b) 12 Degrees Sabse door target ke range ka 1/5

11. Agar doosra OP available nahin hain to OPA ko subsidiary OP mein bhej dena
chahiye . Is case mein main OP ko OPA ke kam ko check karna chahiye . Dono OP ke
beech ek one to one line lay karne chahiye.

Setting Up aur Istemal

12. Setting Up.

(a) Subsidiary OP apni OT bearing report karta hain.

(b) Main OP apni OT Bearing aur subsidiary OT bearing ke beech ka

difference nikalta hain jo ki 2 OP’s ka target par apex angle hain.

(c) Agar main OP right mein hain to woh arrow zero mark ke left mein move
kar leta hain aur deduced apex angle ko black scale par milata hain. Agar Main
left mein hain to woh marking ko right ke zero mark se align karega.

13. Istemal. Deviation nikalne ke bad iska use is prakar hain:-

(a) Ek arbitrary scale ka chunav jo ki deviation ke value par nirbhar hain.Koi

bhi convenient scale jaise ki one square equal to 10,25,50 m ko use kiya ja sakta
hain.

(b) Main OP disc par deviation Main OP ka plot kiya jayega. Pivot se shuru kar
square ginti karen. Main OP ke OT ke right angle par right aur left.

(c) Phir main OP disc par Subsidiary OP ka deviation mark karo jo ki

subsidiary OP ke OT se right angles par ho.

(d) In dono points ke parallel lines draw karo jo ki OT se parallel ho jab tak ki
woh intersect na kare.

(e) Inter section round ka position show karte hain in relation to target. Round
ka displacement target se nikalo sign ko reverse karo aur guns ko correction ki
tarah pass karo.

14. Red Scale ka Use. Red scale ki marking black scale ki marking se twice
hain.Agar apex angle bahut chhota hain eg 6 to 10 degree, toh red scale ko black scale
ki jagah use karo. Is se better intersection milega. Agar red scale use mein hain toh
deduced add/Drop correction ko double karke guns ko pass karenge.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
251
15. Example

Using Black Scale Main OP Subsidiary OP

(a) OT Bearing 210 220

(b) OT Distance 1500m 1600m

(c) Observation Left 1 Left 2

(d) Deviation in metres Left 25m Left 55m

(e) Apex angle 220 – 210 = 10

16. Instrument se correction ayi Right 25m Drop 170m. Guns ko yeh Right 25 Drop
175 order ki jayegi. Is example mein Main OP right mein hain.

17. Red Scale Ka Istemal. Upar diye hue example ko red scale par karne se
“Rt 25m Drop 85” ka corretion aata hain .

Procedure

18. BC ya main OP yeh dhyan rakhte hain ke subsidiary OP ne target dekh liya hain
aur usko comman laying edge ya ranging point batate hain. Agar fire suru karne se
pahle subsidiary OP main OP par hain to usko target dikhane mein koi problem nahi
aati. Agar woh apni loc par hain to usko pahle se selected land mark ya OT bg se tgt
dikha sakte hain. Aur land mark ke relation mein Rt/Lt, Add/Drop ki madad se bata sakte
hain. jaha tak ho sake main OP ko samjhana chahiye ki woh subsidiary OP par hain aur
uske anusar batana chahiye. Dusra tarika infinity se tracer fire karke bhi bata sakte hain.
.

19. Jab main OP ko bharosa ho jaye ki subsdiary OP ne tgt dekh liya hain uske bad
hi main OP apne initial orders dega. Subsidiary OP regimental or bty net ka listening
round par dekhta hain. Initial orders ke bad subsdiary OP apana OT , OT distance aur
substension factor main OP ko batata hain.

20. Uske uprant ek ranging round fire kiya jata hain. Dono OP round ko observe
karte hain aur sirf line se round ka deviation note karte hain. Subsdiary OP ise deviation
ko mtrs mein tabdil karta hain aur OP ko info deta hain . Main OP apana aur subsdiary
OP ka correction instrument par lagata hain aur range correction ko calculate karta
hain. Yeh corrections gun ko diye jate hain aur MPI adjust kiya jata hain . Correction
nimn likiht bato par nirbhar nahi karta hain :-

(a) Din ka pahala round.

(b) Agar round director aur bino ke field of view se bahar burst hota hain.
(c) Mortar se firing karte waqt jab base plate lagi hui ho.

21. Tgt se door burst hota round. Agar round director aur bino ke field of view se
bahar burst hota hain to main OP line ka correction dega taki woh round field of
view mein aa sake. Yeh isleye kiya jata hain ki round ka burst dono OP dwara observe

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
252
kiya jaye aur bade error ki sambhavana na ho. Jo round dono OP dwara observe
nahi kiya jaye use “OU” karar diya jayega.

Night shoot

22. Ni mein shoot observe karte waqt deviation measure karne ke liye director jarur
istemal hoga. Bg aur angle of sight din ke waqt liya jayega. Raat ke waqt tgt dikhayi
dene par us tgt ko director se measured OT bg aur angle of sight par fix karenge .
Jab ranging round bursts hota hain to dono OP se devitions measure ki jati hain. Aur
instrument par normal manner se correction work out ki jati hain. Yeh correction guns ko
pass ki jati hain. Aur dusra ranging round fire kiya jata hain. Ranging tab tak jari rahti
hain Jab tak dono OP No deviation ya deviation itna kam hain ki work out kiya hua
correction 50m se kam hain tab iske bade fire for effect ka order diya jayega. Yeh dekha
gaya hain ki night ko gun fire mein MPI ko observe karna aur adjust karna muskil hain
isliye procedure mein day shooting se difference hain. Yeh man liya jata hain ki agar
ranging round tgt par hain to baki guns bhi tgt par effective fire karengi. Agar MPI ki
accurate adjustment chahiye to Regn of a point, round of bty fire sutaible interval ke sath
order kiya jayega aur har gun ke liye correction workout kiya jayega.

23. Pehala round OU na ho ise ensure karna hain. Round director ke naazar se
bahar na jaye OP ne usse open sight se dekhna chahiye.Aur director ko swing kar ke
us disha mein jahan par burst hua hain “ON” pukara jata hain.Isse ye yakin kiya jata
hain ki round FOV mein brust hua hain aur use accurate measure kiya jasake. Kisi bhi
halat me gole ko director ke nazar me anne keliye correction nahi dena chahiye.isse
round subsidary OP director ke nazar se bahar chala ja sakta hain.Ye baat hamesha
yaad me rakhni chahiye ki ek baar round accurately dekhliya jaye to correction sahi de
sakte hain Director ko isske bad purane bearing par chode diya jaye.

24 Example.
TABLE XL: SPECIMEN ORDERS FOR ICO SHOOT

Main OP Subsidiary OP GPO Remarks

"25 for 25A reference “25A for 25 Target Transmission on
Red House, Oscar 260, identified. line. Main indicates
Right 200 ADD 400, Dry target to subsidiary.
scraggy tree, MMG
under tree
“25 for 23 Battery As usual GPO
Target 872416, Ht checks back all
600m, Oscar 310, orders.
concentrate, Report
stand by, Active MMG”.
“25 for 25A report “25 A for 25 oscar On line.
Oscar” 280"
“Fire” “Shot 3
flight18.....
stand by”
"Right 150" “Right 100” On line to main

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
253
(observation) (observation)

"Repeat" “Shot 3 ..stand

by
"Repeat" “Shot 3 ..stand
by
Right 50 (observation) “Right 25" On line to main.
(Observation)
“Left 100, Add 100, 1 “Shot ... stand Main works out two
RGF” by separate
corrections and
orders mean to
guns.
“Left 50 Add50, Repeat” “Shot .... stand Adjustment of MPI
by by normal means.

“Target neutralised, “Target P 7901

Record as target, Stand Recorded”
Easy”

25. Pahle se recoded tgt se naya tgt ko engage karna. Iss tarike se
subunit/ unit ka fire direct kiya ja sakta hain datum limit ke undar.Pivot ek naye tgt ko
darshata hain .Apex angle ko nikala jata hain naye tgt aur OP ke bich naya OT se
correction diya jata hain.Guns ko purane OT se deviation nikala jata hain.Is ka uddesh
hain ki purane tgt se naya tgt engage kiya ja sakta hain. Ranging nahi ki jati hain.

26. Main OP subsidiary OP ko pehle ki tarah fresh tgt show karta hain. Dono OP old
tgt se new tgt ka antar nikalte hain. Yeh deviation main OP ke inst par plot karte hain aur
corrn nikalte hain. Yeh corrn gun ko 1RGF ke sath pass ki jati hain. Height mein antar
bhi correction ke sath jarur pass karna chahiye.

Deduction of Datum Correction

27. Din ke samay datum correction deduction ke liye ye instrument sirf ranging me
istemal kiya jata hain.Iske bad MPI ko adjust karne ke liye normal method use kiya jata
hain.Is instrument ko night mein use karne ke liye additional preparation ki jaati hain.

28. Preparation. Main aur subsidiary OP par director ko setup karo. Daylight
me select kiye gaye center of datum point par crosswire ko lay karo.Director ki
accidental shifting se bachne ke liye RO’s ko select karo.

29. Method.

(a) Map data ke anusar ranging troop se 1 RBF. Uchit interval ke sath kiya
jaye.

(b) Har round ko director se observe kijiye aur lateral deviation find out karo.
Is tarah teen lateral devitions ka set milega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
254
(c) Deviation ko plot kijiye aur teeno tgts ka grid corrn findout kijiye. (para 13
ke anusar).

(d) Teeno tgt grid corrns ka mean find out kijiye aur is mean ko sabhi guns ko
pass karo.e.g, Datum point at_ _ _ _.

(e) GPO template par tgt grid corrn plot karega aur bearing aur range find out
karega. Yeh fire data hain.

(f) Section 75 ke anusar datum corrn workout karega.

30. Scientific Calculator Ka Use. ICO ka istemal scientific calculator se nimn

formula jo ki solution of triangle par based hain, se bhi kiya ja sakta hain.

USE OF SCIENTIFIC CALCULATOR FOR ICO

Main OP Left Formula Main OP Right Formula

Main OP Sub OP Main OP Sub OP
Left Left -(M Cos A – S/ Sin A) Right Right -(M Cos A – S/ Sin A)
Right Right (M Cos A – S/ Sin A) Left Left +(M Cos A – S/ Sin A)
Left Right -(M Cos A + S/ Sin A) Right Left -(M Cos A + S/ Sin A)
Right Left (M Cos A + S/ Sin A) Left Right (M Cos A + S/ Sin A)

SECTION 65 – DISTRIBUTION OF MASSED ARTILLERY FIRE ON TARGETS

1. Vartman mein, hamare paas 400 metres x 400 metres se bade target par fire
bantne ki koi khas taknik nahi hain. Aise taknik ke gair - maujudgi mein agar koi aisi
stithi aa jaati hain to us waqt fire plan banane wala officer, alag alag fire units ko alag
alag fire points par direct karta hain. Is tarha se fire banntne par nimnlikhit kathinayian
aati hain.

(a) Yeh taknik fire plan banane wale officer ke experience aur skill par nirbhar
karta hain. Isse target par asaman tarike se fire batne ki shanka hain.

(b) Irregular shape ke target par fire karne mein guns aur ammunition ki
barbadi hogi.

2. Bhavishya mein, defensive tatha offensive mein, bade size ke tgts engage karne
ki jaroorat hogi. Aise stithi mein nimnlikhit paristithiyan aa sakti hain:-

(a) Offensive operational mein, dushman ki accurate location ka pata lagana

mushkil hoga. Par general disposition ki information jaroor mil sakti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
255
(b) Defence mein, brigade attack jisme two battalions up ki formation mein
hongi, ek raat mein 1000 metres ki frontage teh kar payengi. Aur combat team
ke attack par, 1200 se 1600 metres ki frontage, din mein teh hogi.

3. Artillery ke jyada allotment se aur guns ki range mein badhotari ke karan, kisi
single target par jayada fire units ko concentrate karna ab mumkin ho gaya hain.

Principle

4. Is taknik ka principle, ek gridded template ke madat se individual fire units ko,

target par respective points par direct karte hain, jisme kam se kam fire units hissa le
sake aur target ko sampoornta aur samanta se cover kar sake.

Description

5. General. Upar bataye principle ke istemaal ke liye, yeh template banaya gaya
hain. Iski banavat sadharan hain aur yeh unit mein talc par bhi banaya ja sakta. Iska
sketch Fig 27 mein diya gaya hain.

6. Gridded Template.

(a) Scale Template map ya grid sheet ki scale ke base par banai gai hain.
Yeh 1: 25000, 1: 50000 or 1 Inch to 1 Mile ho sakta hain. 1 Inch to 1 Mile ya
1:50,000 ke liye template use karna sambhav nahi hain.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ABCDEFGH JKLMN OP

FIGURE 27 : THE TEMPLATE

(b) Intersection. Yeh ek fire unit ke center of concentration ko darshaata

hain. Yeh intersection 150 meter ki doori par hota hain kyunki ek field / mountain
Bty 150 x 150 meter ke jagah ko cover karta hain. Bhale hi ek Light/Medium Bty
200 x 200 meter cover karta hain, lekin asaani aur uniformity ke liye use 150 x
150 meter ka jagah cover karne ke liye diya jata hain.

(c) Numbering System. X axis A se P tak number kiya jata hain, jabki Y
axis 1 se 15 tak numbered hota hain. Iske kaaran yeh template 2250 x 2250

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
256
meter ka poora jagah ko cover karta hain. Targets pe points ko neeche likhe jaisa
bataya jaat hain.

(i) A1, E8, N6 aur aise hi.

(ii) Line 6, E se H, Iska matlab intersection E6, F6, G6, aur H6 hain.

(iii) Line H, 2 se 5. Iska matlab intersection H2, H3, H4 aur H5 hain.

(d) Kisi Formation mein yeh template jyada area cover karne ke liye ismein
lines ko increase karke banaya gaya hain. In template mein X axis A se Z tak
number kiya hain, I letter ko number 1 se confuse naa karne ke liye nikal diya
hain, aur X axis 1 se 25 tak mark kiya gaya hain. Is kaaran yeh template 3750 x
3750 meter jaga ko cover karta hain.

7. Reference Marks. Reference marks do hote hain, jo ki template pe mark kiye

gaye hain jo ki neeche aur vistaar mein bataye gaye hain.

(a) “H8 Mark”. Template ke beech wale point ko H8 intersection aur ek gol
aakar se darshaya gaya hain.Jo target engage karne ho jinhe Massed Artilery fire
ki zarurat ho, convention ke anusaar is intersection ko target ke GR par rakha jata
hain jo target centre ko darshata hain.
.
(b) Observation Post (OP) Mark. Ise OP ke naam se template ke neeche H
line ko kheench kar mark kiya jata hain aur yeh H1 intersection se 400 meter ke
duri pe mark kiya jata hain. Yeh mark close DF ke engagement/planning ke
dauran istemal mein laya jata hain. Convention ke anusar yeh mark us GR par
rakha jata hain jo ki Designated OP ke loc ko darshata hain. Designated OP woh
OP hain jo ki is tempate ko istemal karke DF ko engage karne ka task lega. Yeh
template Designated OP ke 400 meter ke daire mein Tgts ko engage karne ke
istemal mein safety ke wajeh se nahi laya ja sakta hain. Lekin agar fire DF’s jo ki
400 meter ke daire mein ho unke upar laana ho to target grid corrections ke
dwara laaya jaa sakta hain.

8. “Orientation Line”. “H” rekha ko lamba kheench ke upar tak liya gaya hain
aur ye ek arrow se mark kiya gaya hain. Is rekha ko Orientation Line ke nam se jana jata
hain aur yeh template ko orient karne mein istemaal mein laya jata hain aur “Axis
Bearing.....” se order kiya jata hain. Convention ke anusar “Axis Bearing ko Grid Bearing
jaisa order kiya jata hain.

APPLICATION

General

9. Yeh template dono target ko Predicted aur Observed fire se engage karne ke
kaam aata hain. Yeh in sab ke liye labh dayak hain:

(a) Kam se kam fire units ka pata lagana jin ki zarurat ek target ko engage
karne mein istemal mein ayengi jo ki uplabdh fire unit ke ek concentration se
effectively engage nahi ho payengi.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
257
(b) Yeh pata lagana ki fire units ko kin kin points par direct karna hain.

10. Jab dushman ke failav ka sahi pata ho tab is template ka istemal nahi karna
chahiye. Aur general area ko chote vibhag mein banta ja sakta hain jab ek alag target ko
engage karna ho.

Engagement ke tarike

11. Preparatory Bombardment. Ladai ke shuruvat mein samay ke kami ke

vajah se recce theek tarah se nahi hua hoga. Par Air OP aur havai tasveerein target ki
seema ko janne mein istemal mein laya jata hain, jo ki man chahe samay par engage
kiye jaa sakte hain.

12. Immediate Neutralisation. Yeh shoots bhi preparatory bombardment ki

tarah template ki madat se liye jaa sakte hain.

13. Covering Fire. Yeh template covering fire ke istemaal ke liye theek nahi
mane gaye hain kyunki fire units ke fire par yadi koi adla badli ki jaye to vah bahut
complicated ho jayenge. FOO ke liye ek battery ke fire ka pata karne mein bahut dikkat
hogi.

14. Close DF Task. Is template ko DF tasks ke plan aur engage karne mein
istemal mein laya jata hain.

(a) DF planning ki selection aur indication mein jab pehle se ek pre planned
DF task diya ho.

(b) Tactically related DF tasks ko ek sammuh mein bandna.

(c) Ek dum se diye gaye aur pehle se plan DF task ko engage karna.

(d) Shifting of fire dusman ke movement ko swikarta hain.

METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT

Preparatory Bombardment aur Immediate Neutralisation

15. Target area ka Delineation. Officer jo ki fire plan bana raha ho voh target
area ke seema ko Map/Artillery Board par banata hain. Yeh delineation Supported arm
Commander se milta hain. Practice mein, Gunnery adviser bhi target ka delineation kar
sakta hain, aur is samay voh Supported Arm Commander se pakka karta hain.

16. Fire units ko direct karna. Agar hamein kam se kam fire units ka pata
lagaana ho, koshish yeh honi chahiye ki template is tarike se lagaana chahiye ki target
area mein kam se kam intersection ho. Yeh dhyan dena chahiye ki fire units ko
intersection mein direct nahi kiya ho jo ki target area mein ho, par voh bhi jo kinaro par
ho.Yeh prapt karne ke liye, Officer jo fire plan bana raha ho use yeh karna chahiye:-

(a) H8 template ko target area ke beech o beech rakho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
258
(b) Is ke bad trial aur error se template ke position ko is tarah orient karna
jisse kam se kam intersection target area par ho. Template ke Sahi aur galat
orientation example figure 28 aur 29 mein dikhaye gaye hain. Yeh dekhe jayega
ki template theek prakar se orient kiya gaya hain, Target ko puri tarah se engage
karne ke liye 11 fire units ki zarurat hain.

Figure 28 – CORRECT ORIENTATION

Figure 29 - INCORRECT ORIENTATION

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
259
17. Halaki fig 29 target ke same size aur shape mein hain, 13 fire units ki zarurat hain
kyonki template sahi tarah se oriented nahi hain.

(a) Template ko is position mein fix Karen.

(b) Niche diye gaye rules ko paden.

(i) H8 ki GR aur Ht e.g-GR829421 Ht 300 m. Height respective fire

unit jo ki intersection ko engage kar raha hain, map dwara parha jayega.

(ii) Bearing of orientation line eg-Axis Bearing 30 degrees.

(iii) Sare intersections jo ki target area ke andar enclosed hain aur

boundary par hain eg-H6, H10 and so on.

18. Passage of orders. Para 16 aur 17 me diye gaye instructions ko complete

karne ke bad, jo officer fire plan bana raha hain wo engagement to appropriate authority
ko pass karega. Example table XL aur XLI me hain. Ye appropriate authority hain

(a) Adjutant. Jab sirf ek regiment maujud hain

(b) Brigade Major(BM). Jab artillery Brigade maujud ho.Agar additional arty
brigade hain to Div Arty Brigade ka BM orders lega aur regiment under command
ko task allot karega reinforcing artillery brigade ko bhi.

(c) Corps Fire direction center(FDC). Jab ek Victor target ko engage karna
hain aur Corps FDC arty brigade ko control karta hain tab orders Corps FDC ko
pass hoga . Tab SO1 (Arty) integrated reinforcing arty brigade ko task allot
karega usi tarah jaise Div Arty Brigade BM karta hain.

19. Trace of Target Area. Delibrate fire planning ke case me target area ka trace
officer jo fire plan bana raha hain, prepare karega aur Corps FDC / BM ko issue karega.

Closed DF Task

20. General. Maujuda system larger areas aur quick sifting ko cater nahi karta
hain, in limitations ko template ke dwara door kiya gaya hain. Ane wale paragraph mein
kewal engagement of preparatory bombardment ke tarikon se difference ko highlight
kiya gaya hain.

21. Aim. Jab hum defensive fire ko engage kare to ek belt of fire aana chahiye
apne aur assaulting troop ke beech.Jab dusman ki troop is belt of fire ko paar kar le tab
is belt ko aage ki taraf bara dena chahiye. Jo ki dubara apne aur assaulting troops ke
beech yeh dusman ki jyada casualty karega. Yeh apna present system se alag hain
jisme hum current ya predicted enemy position par fire karte hain, jo ki dubara apne aur
assaulting troops ke beech.

22. Impromptu Engagement.

(a) Permission Mangne Ka Tariqa. DF task ko engage karne ke liye

permission mangne ka tarika wahi purana hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
260
(b) Code name. Fire orders ke age TUSHAR ko prefixed kiya jayega. Iska
matlab nimn prakar hoga:-

(i) Template ka istamal DF task ke liye hoga.

(ii) Arty board par template ka OP mark jo OP fire call kar raha hain
uske position ke sath aline kiya jayga.

(c) Ordering Axis Bearing. Jab kabhi bara attack ho aise halat me Cdr ko
assault ka direction pata hona chahiye. Is assessment par OP axis Bearing ko
order karega.e.g, “Tushar Axis Bearing…….” Yah bearing generally enemy’s ke
axis bearing assault ka back bearing hoga.

(d) Placing the Template. OP officer ko nimn prakar se aage barna

chahiye:-

(i) OP Mark Para 8(b) ke anusar template ka “OP Mark”’ map par
marked OP location par rakho.
(ii) Orientation Line Phir template “OP Mark” par pivot kiya jata hain
jis se “Orientation Line” order ki gayi axis bearing ke taraf point kare.
(iii) Is prakar template ko lagao.

(e) Fire Units ko direct karna

(i) Opening Line Ka Chunao. Ek bar template lag gaya phir OP

officer attacking troops aur own troops ke beech suitable interscetion
chunta hain jo ek line banate ho. Chuni line attacking troops ke jitna najdik
ho sake, hone chahiye. Lekin ye line gun end se uchit doori par honi
chahiye taki technical peraration jisme orders ka transmission shamil hain.

(ii) Intersection Ki Sankhya Ka Nirnay. Ye aakraman ke failao par

nirbhar hain. Aakraman ki gahrai ka koi matlab nahi kyon ki sabhi
samuhon ko is belt of fire se gujarana padega.

(f) Fire Order Karna. OP officer ko rate ke sath “Gun Fire” order karna
chahiye. Initial Orders ke sath “Fire by Order” har hal mein dena chahiye. OP
uchit samay par “Fire” order kar ke sunischit karta hain ki ye belt of fire age badh
rahe aakramak jawano ke age ho.

(g) Agli Line Ki Taiyari Ka Adesh Dena.

(i) Agle engagement ke liye belt of fire teji ke sath badhe, iske liye gun
end ko “Prepare for line……” ka order de kar jitni jaldi ho sake, agli line ka
ishara kar dena chahiye.

(ii) “Prepare for line…….” ka order dene ka samay is prakar hona

chahiye :-

(aa) Jahan tak ho sake, jaise hi guns pichhli line par ready report
de.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
261
(ab) Us halat mein, jab upar wali paristhiti mein order dena
sambhav na ho tab ye “Shot” report ke bad order ki jane chahiye.

(iii) Agli line/ intersection ke samuh ka chunao failao, gahrai aur

akraman ke raftar par nirbhar hoga. Lift ke matra nirdharit karne ke liye
nimnlikhit niyam prayog kiye ja sakte hain :-

(aa) Infantry ka ek attack jo 2 minutes mein 100 meter age badh

raha hain, uske liye 2 lines ka lift karna hain.

(ab) Ek mechanised attack jo 1 minute mein 200 meter age badh

raha hain, uske liye 4 se 6 lines ka lift karna hain.

(iv) Gun End par action. “Prepare for line…….” ke order par,
battery command post engagement ke liye technical data nikalega par yeh
data guns ko pass nahi hoga.

(h) Fire ki lifting. Jab adhikansh jawan is line ko par kar chuke ho, OP
“Stop”, phir naya intersection/line aur phir “Go On” order karega.

(j) Dushman ke rukne par action. Yadi aakaramak jawan kisi line ko par
karne se pehle / bad mein ruk gaye ho to OP “Stop’ order kar sakta hain aur
samanya tarike se ruke huye troops ko chuni huyi fire units se engage karega.

(k) Example :- Engagement of DF Task ka example Table XLI me diya hain.

22. DF Planning. DF’s planning karte samay OP offr sabse likely approach ke
along mein line chunta hain. Ise OP offr yakin karta hain ki jab yeh DF engage ho raha
hain, tab command post me technical data work out karne se aur extra transmission se
samay barbad na ho. Yoh DFs task table mein dikhaye ja sakte hain. Task table ko
bharne ka tariqa Para 27 me diya gaya hain.

23. Grouping of Target. Ek tarah ke targets ko is tariqe se asani se Group kar

sakte hain, aur ek nickname se sombodith karte hain.

Miscellaneous Aspects

24. Woh aspects, jo preparatory bombardment, IN shoots aur Close DF task

engagements ke dauran common hain. Is para mein vistar se samjaya gaya hain.

25. Thickening of fire on Specified Intersections

(a) Kab istemal karte hain. Jab guns aur ammunition resources izazat dein
ya phir fire ko specified point pe thicken karne ki jarrorat ho, tab do ya aur fire
units ko chuninda instruction diye jate hain.

(b) Conventions. Passage of orders ke dauran confusion se bachane ke

liye kuch conventions diye gaye hain :-

(i) Uniform Distribution Pattern. Jab number of fire units diye gaye
intersection par same ho, per point one unit, tab distribution orders ke ant

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
262
mein yeh specifically order kiye jane chahiye. eg. “Target U 7708,
TUSHAR, Axis Bearing 40, Line 7 G to J, Line 8 G to J.Two medium
batteries per unit.

(ii) Unequal Distribution Pattern. Jab number of fire units jo ki har

intersection pe directed hain, number of fire units se alag ho to har point pe
fire unit specified honi chahiye. e.g,

Target V 7702, 830421 Ht 800 mts

Axis Bearing 30
Line 7 G to J, One battery per point.
Line 6 G,H,J, Two batteries per point.
Line 8 G to K, Two medium batteries per point on G 8 and J 8, one
mountain battery on K8.

26. Selection of Intersection in Mountains. Mountaneous terrain mein, enemy

equally spread nahi ho sakta hain. Jo officer fire plan/OP bana raha hain, use inter
section select karte samay valleys, nallahs aur ground ki banawat yad rakhni chahiye.

27. Task Table. Task Table ki jarrorat pre planned DF task aur preparatory
bombardment ko pura karne ke liye hain. Examples yeh darsate hue, done ke liye
“Machhli” aur “Saras”, table XL and para 4 me example ki tor par diye gaye hain. Task
table ko bharte samay jaruri points niche diye gaye hain:-

(a) Prepatory Bombardment.

(i) Column “e” (Grid Reference aur Height aur / Ya Description.

(aa) Centre point (H-8) ka Grid Refrence and Height.

(ab) Axis Bearing.

(ac) Engage karne wala intersection.

(ii) Column ‘f’ (units to engage). Kitni fire units ko har ek

intersection engage karna hain. Agar koi special type ka eqpt chahiye to
vo mentioned hona chahiye.

(b) DF Tasks. Am taur par yeh nimn likhit ke alawa bombardment se kafi
milte julte hain:-

(i) Column ‘e’. H-8 ke Grid Reference aur Height likhne ki jagah
par code name TUSHAR likha jata hain.

(ii) Column ‘h’ (Rate). “Gun fire” suitable interval ke sath.

(iii) Column ‘J’ (Remarks). “Designated OP” eg 25 OP at. Yeh

shabad indicate karte hain ke template 25 OP ki location par lagegi.
“Saras” mein 25 OP ki unit bhi dikhani chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
263
28. Target Records.

(a) Preparatory Bombardment / IN. Jab template istemal hoti hain to target
recording ka procedure nimnlikhit dhang se hota hain:-

(i) Column 1. Tgt ka letter aur number is column mein enter hota
hain. Koi bhi alag number lagu nahi hota jis tgt par / intersection par indl
fire units directed hota hain.

(ii) Column 2. Nimnlikhit data enter hota hain:-

(aa) Centre pt (H8) ki GR aur Ht.

(ab) Axis ki Bg jo ordered hain.

(ac) Intersections jo chuninda fire units engage karegi. Jaise ke

305 Med Regt ki P Bty enter E-6 and Q Bty H-6.

(iii) Column 3 to 24. Various fire units ke duara unke specified

intersections ke liye yeh normal manner main bhara jata hain.

(b) DF Tasks. Aam taur par yeh nimnlikhit ke alawa prepatory bombardment
se kafi milte hain:-

(i) Column 1. Tgt letter aur No of DF likha jata hain, HB ki jagah par.

(ii) Column 2. H-8 ki siraf Grid Reference aur Height dene ki bajai OP
ka No bhi likhna hota hain, e.g, 25 OP at 212138 Ht 800 meters.

29. Actions at Various Level.

(a) BM. Formation ki integral arty bde ke BM ko fire plan banane wala offr
ya OP order, pass karega. BM units ko intersections apss karega aur kisi bhi re-
enforcing arty bde ki FDCs ko allot karta hain. Iskeliye woh nimnlikhit bation ka
dhyan rakhta hain:-

(i) Fire units ki mojudgi.

(ii) Tgt ki duri.

(iii) Fire plan banane wale offr ke duara pass ki gayi koi bhi hidayat
jaise ke H-5, two Med Bty. Iske mutabik yeh jaroori hain ki is intersection
main do Med Btys allot ki jayen.

(b) Corps FDC. Jab tgt ko corps arty engage karta hain to corps FDC ko
orders milte hain. SO1 (arty) ka kaam BM ke kaam jaisa hi hoga. Jo upar para
29(a) mein bataya gaya hain.

(c) BMs Re-enforcing Arty Bde. BM Re –enforcing artillery brigade, BM

of integral arty bde /corps FDC se order leta hain. BM intersections ko Comd ki
units ko banta hain. Jaise upar para 29(a) mein bataya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
264
(d) Adjts. Adjt ko BM se orders milte hain uske bad wo apni btys ko kaam
banta hain. Use jitni jaldi ho sakta hain btys ko Grid Reference, Height aur Axis
Bg deni chahiye, bina intersections ke intezar ke.

(e) GPO. Jab GPO ko tgt ka GR, Ht aur Axis Bg milta hain us target /
designated OP ko arty bd par plot karna chahiye aur template lagana chahiye .
Jab intersection milta hain to usse sirf apne intersection ka data nikalna chahiye.
Har GPO intersection ki Ht alag alag nikalega.

Advantages

30. Ane vale paragraph mein massed arty fire ko bantne ke liye template ki
advantages ko darsaya gaya hain.

31. Uniform Distribution of Fire. Area tgt par, fire ko aise bantna chahiye, ki tgt
ke centre ke alawa fire baki hisson main bhi pahunche, par is ke alawa large
concentration mein, U tgt main jyada fire MPI tgt ke madhya main hi hoti hain.

32. Speedy Engagement of DF Tasks. Jo fleeting DF tasks bade area main

mojud hain unhe template asardar tarike se engage karne mein madad karta hain. Fire
ko teji aur asani se shift kiya ja sakta hain. Yeh DF pllaning aur Grouping of targets mein
madad karta hain.

33. Economy of Effort. 400 X 400 metre bade area target ke liye maujuda tarike
ki tulna mein kam fire units ki zarurat padti hain. e.g, 400 X 400 metre ke target ke liye
jahan ek artillery brigade (14 fire units) ki zarurat padti hain wahin is method ke istemal
se kafi kam fire units se target effectively cover ho jata hain.

34. Reduction in Technical Work. Template ke istemal se fire plan banana wale
officer ko different fire units ke liye nirdharit GR nikalne ki zarurat nahi padti. Isse samay
ki bachat karne mein kafi madad milti hain.

35. Simplicity and Responsiveness. Template ke istemal se fire plan banana wale
officer ko samay kam lagta hain aur wo kisi bhi shape aur size ke target ko asani se kam
samay se handle kar sakta hain. Yah method mukhya rup se irregularly shaped tgt par
fire planning ke kam ata hain. Task table mein kafi had tak serial No kam honge, is se
simplicity hasil hoti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
265
TABLE XLI- EXAMPLE OF PASSAGE OF ORDERS FOR ENGAGEMENT OF
TARGETS WITH VARIOUS FIRE UNITS

1. Jab ek Artillery Brigade ko Target Engage karna ho.

(a) Officer Making Fire Plan/ OP to BM. Target U 7700 , 829421, Ht

2100 m . Axis Bearing 30 , G9 , H6 , H7 , H8 , H9 , H10 , J8 , J9 , K8 . One
Battery per point. Scale 2 . Rate Normal. Engage at 1100H

(b) BM to Adjts. Target U 7700 , 829421 , Ht 2100 m Axis beaging 30 , 23

( 7 Fd Regt) G9, H6 , H7 , 43 ( 8 Fd Regt) H8 , H9 , H10, 63 ( 113 Fd Regt) J8
, J9 , K8. Scale 2 . Rate Normal.Engage at 1100.

(c) Adjt 7 Fd Regt to Btys. Target U 7700 , 829421 , HT 2100 m . Axis

Bearing 30 , 23 ( P Bty ) G9 , 43 ( Q Bty) H6 , 63 ( R Bty) H7 . Scale 2 . Rate
Normal. Engage at 1100.

2. Jab do Artillery Brigade ko Target engage karna ho.

(a) Officer Making the Fire Plan/ OP to BM. Target V 7700, 429410
Ht 2100 m , Axis Bearing 30.

Line 6 G to J

Line 7 F to K

Line 8 E to K

Line 9 E to J

Line 10 G to H

Sabhi lines, ek pt per ek Bty

Engage at 1100

(b) BM se Reinforcing Arty Bde ke BM ko. Tgt V 7701, 429410 Ht

2100 Axis Bg 30

Line 7 F to G

Line 8 E to G

Line 9 E to G

Scale 2, ek pt per ek Bty

Engage at 1100

(c) BM aur Adjts se Btys ko. Sabhi BMs duara apne apne units ko, aur
Adjts duara apni apni Btys ko hukum, para 1 mein bayan kiye gaye tarike ke
saman diya jayega.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
266
3. Jab Tgt Ek Corp ki Do ya Do se jyada Arty Bdes se Engage karna ho tab.
Aisi stithi mein Fire Plan banane wala Offr Corps FDC ko hokum pass karega.
SO 1(Arty) phir se Arty Bdes ke BMs ko intersections bantega. Is tarah Corps FDC, ek
Div Arty Bde ke BM ke saman hi kaam karta hain, jo ki Para 1 mein bataya gaya hain.

4. Task Table ko bharne ke tarike ko darshati udaharan neeche di gai hain:-

(a) MACHHLI :- DF Task Table barne ki udaharan neeche di gai hain:-

Grid Ref, Ht Units to Amn Rate Remarks

aur/ya Engage
Description
TUSHAR
Axis Bg 350
degrees
G10 Two Btys HE GUN FIRE 25 OP
30”
H10 One Bty HE GUN FIRE
30”
J10 One Med Bty HE GUN FIRE
30”

(b) SARAS :- Prearatory bombardment ke task table ka bhara namuna.

Grid Reference, Units To Engage Ammunition Rate

Height and /ya
Description 7 Fd 8 Fd 318 Fd 12 Med 1841 Lt
Regt Regt Regt Regt Regt
GR 822421

HT 2100 m

Axis Bearing
40 degrees

G9 1 1 HE
SCALE 8
H8 1 1 1 HE
RATE
J8 1 1 HE

NORMAL
K7 1 1 HE

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
267
TABLE XLII – EXAMPLE FOR ENGAGEMENT OF DEFENSIVE FIRE TASKS
Action by OP (25) Action BY BM Action by Adjt Action by GPO Remarks
1 2 3 4 5
Attack Build Up

1. OP permission leta As per normal

hain DF tgt engage DF engagement
karne ke liye procedure

2. 25 Uniform target 3. Checks back. 5. Bty ko inform karta 6.(a) Designed (a) Designated
Target U7706,Tushar hain ki or ka GR plot OP ka adjt yeh
Axis bearing 350 4. Yahi regts ko (a) Tgt no karta hain ensure karta hain
over. bde fire order fire (b) Method of ki sabhi ko apna
(25 Auth OP on D 5 line pe deta hain engagement(Tusar) (b) Template ko loc pata hain.
Net) U 25 se © Axis bearing orient karta hain
(d) OP ka designation b) Tgt loc ya DF
Eg U25# (c) Baki order ke ka GR pass
liye wait karta nahin kiya jata
(E) Designated OP ka hain. hain.
location.(Regt/net or
fire order line) #“GPO ko kaun
sa GR plot
8. Check back karna hain aur
7. Line 6, Foxtrot to karta hain dono OP ko
November, FBO, Gun 10. 23 Check back “Differentiate “
fire,rate slow,over 9. Regts ko baki roger out karne keliye form
(a) 23,line 8 25 ki zarurat hain
Foxtrot to Hotel , 11. Eg 23 btys ko on
43 line 8 Juliet to fire order line/regt net;
Lima; 63 line 8 23 Foxtrot 8,43 Golf
Mike to 8,63 Hotel 8,FBO,Gun 12.(a) 23 check
November. fire,rate slow. back karta hain Har level pe
b)FBO,Gun Fire, baki roger out points Ko sub
Rate slow (b) GPO apni allot kiya jata
apni intersection hain.
14.(a) Acknowledges ke liye data work
all bty’s. out karta hain
(b) reports to BM 23 aur guns ko lay
16. Report ko 15.(a) Sare regt ready on U 7706. karvata hain
acknowledge karta acknowledge
hain karta hain. 13. (a) 23 ready
(b) OP25 ko on tgt U7706
report deta hain (b) aise hi baaki
Ready on U7706 GPO bhi report
20. checks back karte hain.
@17.25 prepare for 18. Check back
line 6,over 21. Bty’s ko pass
19. Regt ko karega.
order pass karta @Preparation
hain. order kitni jaldi
22.(a) 23 check de sakta hain
back karta hain utni acha
(b) Line 8 ke liye hain.Yeh orders
tech data work baaki stage mein
out karta hain. paas kiya jata
Par comd post hain agar koi
jab tak executive “Chance” ho yeh
order nahin milta firing mein delay
hain guns ko lane keliye ya
paas nahi karta phir fire mein
hain

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
268
1 2 3 4 5

Assaulting troops “Fire ka order tab

Line 8 ke najdik diya jana chahiye jab
enemy plan kiye
23. 25,U7706 fire 24.Check back gaye belt of fire par
over. karta hain. pahuchhne wala ho.
25.Regts ko orders 26.Check back 28(a)Check
pass karta hain karta hain. back karta hain.
27.Btys ko (b)Guns fire karti
orders pass hain.
karta hain. ©Shot report
31.Regts se shot 29.Btys se shot deta hain.
report leta hain. report leta hain.
32.”Shot” ki report 30.BM ko “shot”
deta hain,serial 18 report deta hain.
aur 19 ke mutabik. 37.Serial 22 ke Is stage me shot ki
33.”Shot report leta 36.Serial 20 aur mutabik. report di jayegi agar
hain. 21 ke mutabik. pahle nahi diya gaya
34.Serial 17 jaisa, hain to.
agar pahle hi order
mila ho

ASSAULTING TROOPS HAVE CROSSED THE BELT OF FIRE ON LINE 8

% (a) “Line6” gun’s

%38. 25 Stop, Line6, 39.Check back ko direct karne ka
GO ON, over. karta hain. 41.Check back executive order hain.
40.Regts orders karta hain.
pass karta hain. 42.Btys ko 43(a) Check
orders pass back karta hain. (b) Order “Stop”
karta hain. (b) Doosra line assaulting tps ke
(c) Guns ko line speed ko dhyan me
6 par ready rakh kar dena
karta hain aur chahiye
fire karta hain

45.”Btys” se shot 44. “Shot on

49.”Shot” report 47.Regt se shot report leta hain. Line6” ki report
receive karta hain. report leta hain. 46.BM ko Line6 deta hain.
48.”Line6” par OP par shot ki report
ko shot report deta deta hain.
hain.
ASSAULTING TROOPS WITHDRAWING

50. 25, Enemy 51.Check back

withdrawing Stand karta hain. 53.Check back 55.Check back
easy. 52.Regts ko orders karta hain. karta hain.
pass karta hain 54.Btys ko 56. Gun’s ko
orders pass orders pass
karta hain. karta hain.
Note : 1. OP officer BM ko D5 net mein bulata hain.
2. BM Regt ko order hamesha bde fire order line par karta hain.
3. Adjt bty ko order regt fire order line par karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
269
SECTION 66 - FIRST SALVO EFFECTIVENESS

General

1. Artillery se sambandhit jawano, hathiyaron aur samanon ko nuksaan target par hue
achook aur achanak first salvo ke karan hoti hain. Uske bad target apne posn ko
badalne ki koshish karta hain aur surakshit posn ko akhtiyar karta hain. Is samay fire
karne se safalta to milti hain par woh pahle rd ke apeksha kam asar dalti hain. Isi
karanon ke wajah se First Salvo Effectiveness (FSE) jaroori hain.

2. FSE ki paribhasha yeh kehti hain ki pahle fire assault ki shamta jo topekhane ki
wajah se target par zaroori suppression,neutralization aur destruction karta hain, isse
pahle ki target apni jagah badal sake.

FSE ko Affect karne wale Factors.

3. FSE ko achieve karne mein nimin factors effect dalte hain:-

(a) Fire ki achukta.

(b) Marak kshamta.

(c) Jawabi karwai ka samay.

Fire Ki Achukta

4. Predicted fire ki accuracy par asar dalne wale factors :-

(a) Target fixation ki achukta.

(b) Survey mein galatiyan.

(c) Guns ki calibration mein galatiyan.

(d) Met ki accuracy.

(e) Charge temp ki naap mein galatiyan.

(f) Plotting mein galatiyan.

(g) Range table mein galatiyan.

(h) Gun performance mein pratidin variation.

(j) Sight testing, setting aur laying mein galatiyan.

(k) Ammunition ki preparation,handling aur storage.

5. Sabhi level ke commanders ko kam se kam galatiyan karni chahiye

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
270
Marak Shamta

6. Dushman ko zaroori volume of fire aur speed se engage karne ki shamta ko

marak shamta kehte hain.

7. Pura asar haasil karne ke liye nimn karya ko poora karte hain.

(a) Tej aur vistrit target analysis observer ke dwara.

(b) Sabhi fire units ka ekjut hokar saamna karna.

(c) Surprise. Bina chetavni ke maarne ki shamta.

Response Time

8. Jab ek target ko detect kar liya jata hain to us target ko jald se jald engage karna
hain. Iske mutabik target ko kam se kam time me engage karna hain.

9. Jis samay target dekh lie jaye, to use effectively engage karne ki karwai is prakar
hain.

(a) Target Acquisition

(i) Detection.

(ii) Identification.

(iii) Location.

(b) Target ka analysis observer dwara

(c) Fire ka udesh har level par

(d) Resource allocation at RCP/FDC

(e) Battery CP mein technical data preparation aur guns ko aadesh pass
karna.

(f) Fire ko adjust karna ,jab jaroorat ho

(g) Firing of guns aur shell ke udaan ka samay target tak.

(h) Communication breakdown ke karan rukawat.

10. Uppar samil kuch action ek sath hote hain. Jab ki dusre sequence mein hote
hain. Sub para 9(b),(d),(e) and (f) mein jo samay lagta hain woh training ke dwara kam
kar sakte hain. Tab dusre action mein samay kam karne ka procedure ko modify kiya ja
sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
271
Tarika

11. Is section mein observation of fire ke dawran karwai ko discuss kiya jayega.

(a) Situation 1. Yeh tarika agar target location ki accurate jankari ho to

istemal kiya jayega.is tarike mein meteor ki jankari nahi hoti.

(b) Situation 2. Is tarike mein target location ki jankari nahi hoti.

(c) Situation 3. Is tarike mein target aur ek reference point ka relative

distance maloom hota hain.Target aur reference point ka accurate location ki
jankari nahi hoti.

12 Situation 1 :Target location ka accurate jankari hona. Is situation mein yeh

tarika follow kiya jata hain.

(a) Stop watch

(b) Instrument Cross Observation

(c) Integrated OP Equipment

(d) Field Artillery Radar.

(i) DOOAF procedure.

(ii) Trajectory ranging for mortar and high angle fire.

(iii) Sound adjustment.

13. Situation 2 : Target ka pakka pata nahin ho. Is ‘case’ mein target ka pata
lagana ke lie ek hi rasta hain aur woh hain ‘instrument cross observation’. Yeh situation
tab aata hain jab zamin me dhalan ya chadav ho.

14. Situation 3 : Target aur reference point ke beech ka “Relative Distance pata
ho”. OP Koi sa bhi tariqa jaise ki bracketing ya ladder procedure reference point tak
range karne ke liye use kar sakta hain. Jab ek bar reference point firing ke dwara
accurately ho jata hain, tab tgt fire assault ke order ke sath ek single correction ke dwara
tgt ko engage kiya ja sakta hain.

Tariqa

15. Jab hum normal tarike se engage karte hain tab dushman ko apne “posture’
badlne ke liye bahut time milta hain. FSE ko achieve karne ke liye, fire ko direct karne ka
tarike mein modification kiya gaya hain. Out line procedure

Detailed Tarika

16. Ranging Point. Ranging point chunte samay yeh sab chise dhyan mei rakhte
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
272
(a) Target se dur, par “Datum Limit” ke andar.

(b) “Fall of shot” observe karne ke liye area clear hona chahiye.

(c) Ranging point aur target ki height ho sake to ek hona chahiye.

17. Ranging Karne ka Tariqa.

(a) Pehle ek sighter round ko fire kiya jata hain yeh dekhne keliye ki shot
visible hain ki nahin.

(b) Ek troop se 3 Round fire kiya jata hain aur uske shot kisi ek method se fix
kiya jata hain.

(c) Deviation aur A of S director ya Integrated OP equipment ke goniometer ki

madad se measure kiya jata hain.

(d) Range fix karne ke liye jo method chuna jata hain woh situation ke upar
nirbhar hain jo para 11 mei diya gaya hain.

(e) Group ka MPI work out kiya jata hain aur tgt grid correcton aur height
correction aagar kuch hain to woh bhi nikala jata hain.

(f) Yeh guns ko paas kiya jata aur guns report ready deta hain correction
lagane ke bad.

(g) Corrections jo order kiya jata hain woh saare fire units jo shoot mein hissa
lete hain aur follow karte hain.

18. Fire Ka Application.

(a) Fire assault mein ammunition ka order pehle hi paas kiya jata hain.

(b) Jab guns report ready deti hain tab OP offr engagement dete hain TOT
tarike se.

Fire Discipline Aur Conventions

19. General. Jaldi samajne keliye aur transmissions kam karne ke liye 2 naye
“Terms” ko introduce kiya gaya hain. Jo alag alag order par certain action lete hain, jo
niche diye gaye hain :-

(a). “……Target Fire Assault Scale 6”. Yeh order yeh darshata hain ki FSE tgt
ke upar achieve karna hain. Yahan speed aur accuracy bahut mahine rakhta
hain.FFE pe fire karne keliye Scale order kiya jata hain. TOT procedure use kiya
jata hain FFE par

(b) Instrument Adjust. Ye procedure indicate karta hain ki OP fire ko adjust

karne ke liye kisi instrument ko use karega. Ek special procedure use kiya
jayega, joki neeche diya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
273
(i) GPO ek ranging troop ko nominate karega.

(ii) Ranging troop ko bty centre per concentrate kiya jayega.

(iii) OP ke fire order per ek sighter rd fire kiya jayega.

(iv) Agar correction aata to correction aply karne ke bad naya sighter rd
fire kiya jayega.

(v) Order milne per kewal ranging troop se fire kiya jayega.

(vi) FFE per GPO concenteration cancel karta hain, agar initial orders
mein conc nahin diya gaya hain.

20. “RIGHT 500 ADD 200 UP 50 Scale 6”. Order indicate karta hain ki sabhi fire
units correction apply karne ke bad fresh data per fire karne ko ready ho jaye . ready
report higher CP ko de jayegi

21. “TOT 2 Minutes From Now”. Ye order indicate kata hain ki adjutant word “Now”
se count down start karega, sabhi fire units appropriate time per time of flight ko dhyan
mein rakh kar fire karengi. Adjutant OP ko shot ki report dega.

22. An example of engagement by regt is given below.

Ser
OP’s order Adjutant (On Radio) Btys on line to Adjt/OP
No.
1 Mike Tgt Fire Assault “Mike Tgt Fire Assault
Scale 6 Instrument Scale 6 Instrument
AdjUst Adjust”
2 “853256 ht 610m (GR of 853256 ht 610m
Ranging Pt) oscar 130” Oscar130
3 “43 Ranging “ “43 Ready Flt 3o”
4 Fire Fire “S1(on radio)
5 Drop 200 Drop 200 “S1 (on Radio)
6 BF 20” BF 20” S1, S2, S3 (on Radio)
6 BF 20” BF 20” S1, S2, S3 (on Radio)
7 Left 750 Add 350 Up Left 750 Add 350 Up All bty report ready to
20m Scale 6 20m Scale 6” Adjt.
8 “Ready”
9 “TOT 2 Minutes from “TOT 2 minutes from Bty Fire at Time less
now” now” then the time of flt
10 50 (Count down on Line) 23 Shot, 43 Shot, 63
49, 48 and so on Shot
11 Shot
12 All Gone
13 Target neutralised Target neutralized
Record as Target M Record as Target
1321 M1321
Ht 610m Ht 610m

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
274
Note:- 1. Sabhi orders / reports GPO aur Adjt ke beech regiment fire order
line per diye jayenge.

2. Sirf OP aur Adjt ke beech sabhi orders radio set per pass kiye
jayenge (except ‘shot’ report during adjustment of fire).

3. OP ke dwara Adjt ko pass kiye gaye orders sabhi batteries bhi

sunegi aur immediately action liya jayega.

4. Ranging pt ko OT ke dwara ya kisi purane recorded tgt se tgt grid

correction dekar bhi indicate kiya ja sakta hain

SECTION 67 – PRECISION SHOOT

PART A - INTRODUCTION

1. Precision shoot tab liya jata hain jab kisi small tgt jaise ki pill box, bunker ko
destroy karna ho. Tgt generally fortified hota hain is liye HE projectile ke sath medium ya
heavy guns ka istemal light guns se jyada effective hain. Shoot adhik expensive hota
hain in terms of time and ammunition.

2. Shoot ek gun se liya jata hain. Adjustment of MPI, paanch round ke group se
check kiya jata hain. Corrections line BT ke reference mein diye jata hain.

3. Laying. Laying ka normal tarika use kiya jata hain, lekin ye advise kiya jata
hain ki ranging khatam hone par laying ke liye field clino meter ka istemal kiya jai.

PART B – PROCEDURE AT THE OP

4. Nature of target “Single Gun Target Precision“ hota hain (actual gun ko nominate
kiya ja sakta hain).

5. Ranging short bracket tak ki jati hain

6. Short bracket ko split kiya jata hain aur “Oscar Bravo” order diya jata hain.
Paanch rounds ka group fire kiya jata hain. Interval time of flight se jyada rakha jata
hain. Har ek observation ka record rakha jata hain. Line aur range ke liye correction
neeche diye gaye rules ko dhyan mein rakh kar diya jata hain.

Correction for Line.

7. (a) Paanch round ke pehle group se OP officer ne line BT ka andaja lagana

chahiye.

(b) Observation se positive jaankari milte hi line ke liye correction diya jata
hain.E.g, dial sight par set kiya jaa sakne waala , yeh correction dial sight par
lagne wala sabse chota correction ya uske multiple ke rupe mein diya jayega e.g,
“More ( or Less) ---- Minutes”. Pratham correction, apex angle, range aur
bracketing ki aavashyakta par nirbhar karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
275
(c) Yadi apex angle 25 degree ( 500 mils) ya kam ho, to ranging dwara ki hui
line lagbhag sahi hogi. Zaroori adjustments kam honi chaahiye aur OT-BT factor
apply karke ek correction kafi hona chahiye. E.g,

Distance OT … … … … … … 1500 meters

Distance BT … … … … … … 6000 meters
Line OT par round ko target par lane ke liye switch M 20 minutes

Correction = Switch x (1500)

6000 (BT)

Correction = 20 x 1 = M 5 minutes
4
(d) Bade apex angle ke sath line ke liye bracketing karna jaroori hain. 6000
meters tak ke range ke liye shuruvati line correction 20 minutes (8 mils) hona
chahiye aur 6000 meters se jyada range ke liye 10 minutes (4 mils) hona chahiye.

Range Correction

8. Range ka correction line BT par “ Add/Drop 50/25” mein diya jata hain. Iske
niyam is prakar hain:

(a) Agar line BT par 5 round ke group ke pehle 3 round “Plus / Minus” observe
kiya jate hain, toh turant “Add / Dp 50” ka correction diya jayega aur 5 round ka
naya group fire kiya jayega. Agar is group ke pehle 3 round same observation
deta hain, tab correction to repeat kiya jayega.

(b) Agar next group ke pahle 3 round opposite obsn dete hain, toh Add / Dp
25 ka correction order kiya jayega aur 5 round ki naya group fire kiya jayega..

(c) Agar 5 round ke group mein 4 round plus aur 1 round minus ( ya vipreet
ho) observe kiya jata hain, tab agla 5 round ka group Drop 25 (ya Add 25) ke
correction ke sath order kiya jayega.
(d) Jab koi 5 round Group mein , 3 round plus aur 2 minus ho ( ya vipreet ho)
ya Group ke pehle char round mein se 2 round plus aur 2 round minus ho, to
range ko sahi mana jata hain.

(e) Target round ko plus aur minus dono count kiya jayega..

9. Pure tarike ka ek udharan niche diya gaya hain.

TABLE XLIII – PRECISION SHOOT KE DAURAN OBSERVER’S KE ORDERS

Ser Observer’s Order Round Observations Remarks

No No
1. Single gun Target Precision 1 Over line Apex angle 35
459822 ht 275m degrees
Oscar 60 Range 5000m
Fire
2. Drop 400 2 Short line Ranging jari short
bracket tak
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
276
3. Add 50 Oscar Bravo 5 RGF 3 Minus left
40”
4. More 20 minutes 4 Minus ?
5 Minus ?
5. Add 50 Rpt 8 Plus right
6. Less 10 minutes 9 Plus ?
10 Plus ?
11 Plus ?
7. Drop 25 Repeat 12 Minus Right Line abhi correct
13 Minus hain
8. Less 5 minutes 14 Plus Range abhi
15 Plus correct hain.
Observer target
ko manchaha
result milne tak
engage kar sakta
hain.

Fire For Effect

10. Jab MPI adjust ho jata hain OP officer 5 se 10 rounds gun fire ke group mein fire
for effect order karta hain.Har round dekha jata hain aur gun ke target ko“wander off
“karne ke tendency ko 25 meter tak thik kiya jata hain lekin yeh tabhi hota hain jab 5
round Group fire ke pehle 3 round fire for effect ke liye order kiye jate hain aur baki 2
round jo MPI adjust ment ke liye order hote hain woh same observation de.

End of Shoot

11. Shoot ko bina kise successful result ke bina terminate karna pad sakta hain. Is
halat mein, agar is target ko bad mein neutralise karne ki jaroorat pad sakti hain, tab use
battery target ke taurpar record kiya jayega.

PART C – GUN POSITION KA PROCEDURE.

Shuruwati Adesh (Initial Orders)

12. Yadi observer kisi gun ko nominate nahi karta hain , to GPO sabse accurate gun
ko nominate karta hain. Nominated gun bina observer ke anumati ke bina change nahi
ke jayegi.

13. Sabse consistent charge order kiya jayega.

14. “Clinometer laying” ke procedure ke liye nechay deye gaye para 17 aur 18
dekhe.

Ranging Aur Fire For Effect.

15. Gun position par, gun ki loading aur laying par khas dhyan diya jayega.
Observer ke dwara fall of shot ke galat deduction se bachne kay liye, gun end par kiya
gaye chote se chote error ko bhi observer ko report kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
277
Shoot Ki Samapti (End Of Shoot)

16. Target ko zarurat padne par record kiya jayega.

PART D- MISCELLANEOUS POINTS

17. Section. 9 main diya gaya Clinometer laying ke procedure ko follow kiya jayega.
Line, elevation ko order karne se pehle , command post main, gun correction ko sabhi
elevation mein joda jayega aur phir gun ko pass kiya jayega.

18. Clinometer laying dwara engaged target ko record karne ki drill chapter VI main
di gai hain.

SECTION 68 - INDICATION SHOOTS

PART - A – INTRODUCTION

1. Indication shoot ka udeshya apne troops ko target indicate karna hain, jesmain,
apne aircraft bhi shamil hai. Is shoot dwara nimanlikhit ko indicate kiya ja sakta hain :-

(a) Target, objective, reference point ya phir koi feature jo ground par ho.

(b) Fire plan ya operation ka koi bhag ya safalta hasil karna.

2. Is shoot mein nimnalikhat prakar ke projectile ka prayog kiya ja sakta hain :-

(a) Din Ke Samay (Day Time).

(i) Coloured smoke.
(ii) Smoke white.
(iii) HE, jab koi confusion na ho.

(b) By Night.
(i) Coloured fiare.
(ii) WP, jab conditions favourable ho.

3. Yadi coloured flare shell maujood na ho to, illuminating (star) shell ko percussion
par set kar ke indication of target ke liye fire kiya jayega. Illumination (star) shell ke
visheshtain dhyan mein rakhna chahiye e.g, time of illumination jo sec- 59 ke para 3
main diye gaye hain. Yah procedure sec 59 para 22 se 24 mein diya gaya hain.yadi koi
confusion hone ki sambhavana na ho, to raat ke samay illumination shell available na
hone par HE shell ka bhi prayog kia ja sakta hain

4. Din ke samay, aircraft ko target indicate karne ke liye, smoke ka ek round kafi
hain. Yadi night main star shell ka prayog hota hain tab, do se teen round ke zarurat pad
sakti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
278
PART B- OP PAR PROCEDURE

5. Single gun ka prayog hota hain. Jo bhi special ammunition required hain, use
order kiya jayega. Is mein ranging karne ki koi jaroorat nahi hain. “TOT” order kiya
jayega ya phir required time par “Fire” ka order diya jayega.

6. OP Ke Order. OP ke order ka namuna niche diya gaya hain :-

“Single gun target, smoke red

123456 Ht 200 m
Oscar 120
1 RGF
Indicating target to air craft
TOT 1300 hrs”.

PART C - GUN END KA PROCEDURE

7. Gun end par procedure main koi bada antar nahin hain. Kewal smoke shoot main
GPO ka convention follow nahi kiya jata hain, jiske antargat smoke ko build up karne ke
liye GPO 2 RGF ka order deta hain.

8. Aircraft ko target indicate karte samay GPO misfire ki sambhavna ko dekhte huye
do guns ko ready karta hain. Dono guns appropriate time par fire karte hain.

SECTION 69- INDICATION OF TARGETS AND CONTROL OF ARTILLERY FIRE BY

OTHER ARMS

1. Woh procedure jise se dusere arms ke offrs artillery fire lete hain, use Artillery
Target Indication kaha jata hain. Is ka prayog(use) tab kiya jata hain jab OP offrs ya(or)
BC ke sath koi personal contact nahi hota. Is procedure ko “Control of Artillery Fire by
Other Arms, 1987” ki précis mein vistar se diya gaya hain.

2. Is section mein Arty officer ko “OP offr” kaha gaya hain. Jo supported arm ke offr
fire support mang raha hain, unhe “The observer” kaha gaya hain.

Communications

3. Armour ko support karte samay BCs aur OP officer normally regt or squadron net
par hote hain, aur jab infantry ko support karte samay battalion net par hote hain. Jarurat
padne par OP offr company net par bhi ho sakte hain.

4. Dusre arm ke radio set mein artillery offrs ke Call Sign is prakar hain :-

BC of Fd Bty ------------------------ 16 A
Senior OP offr---------------------- 16 B
Junior OP offr---------------------- 16 C
Third OP offr----------------------- 16 D
(e.g, Medium Battery ke OP officer)
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
279
5. Agar koi OP officer net par akela artillery officer hain e.g, net par akela OP officer
ho, tab call sign ke sath letter suffix nahi kiya jayega , Uska call sign 16 hoga.

Principles

Jab bhi possible ho shoot OP offr ke dwara hi liya jayega. Isliye observer OP officer ko
target ke bare mein jaruri information provide karega jisse OP officer ko target ko
pahchan ne mein aur us par jaruri fire power ko judge karne mein madad mil sake.

6. Agar OP officers target ko na pahchan paye to observer tab tak fire ko correct
karta hain, jab tak ki woh tgt ko hit na kare. Target ko hit karte hi fire for effect ke liye OP
offr ko hand over karta hain. Shoot mein kisi bhi samay agar OP officer target ko
pehchan leta hain toh woh usi samay shoot ko apne hath mein le leta hain.

Radio Procedure

7. Niche diye gaye differences ke alawa normal artillery fire orders ko use kiya
jayega :-

(a) Ek special warning order ka prayog hota hain.

(b) Sabhi transmissions ke liye call signs ka prayog hoga.

(c) Radio par baki traffic se jyada priority artillery fire orders ko nahi di jati.
Repeating back ko terminate karne ke liye “out” ka prayog hota hain, jo ki OP offr
aur observer ke beech ke link ko finish karta hain. Dusre transmission ke liye
fresh call ki jarurat hoti hain. Jab recipient ko malum ho ki order incomplete hain
(e.g, warning order ke ant mein) tab repeating ke bad “over” ka prayog karna
chahiye.

(d) Agar order ka koi part galat (wrong) diya gaya ho tab sirf us incorrect part
ko “WRONG” prefix laga kar dubara bataya jayega.

(e) Transmission ko repeat karne ke liye niche diye gaye tariko mein se kisi ko
bhi use kiys ja sakta hain :-

(i) “Say Again” yani pura repetition.

ya
(ii) “Say Again…” agar bich me kuch transmission miss ho jaye.
eg,”Say again Oscar Tango”.

Indication of Tgt

9. Net ke sabhi stations ko chetavani dene ke liye observer ka OP officer ko first call
hoga ”Target”.

10 Uske bad observer target ke bare mein nimnlikhit details pass karta hain :-

(a) Target kahan hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
280
(b) OT bearing.

(c) Target kya hain.

(d) Target ke sath kya karna hain.

(e) Kab aur kab tak.

11. Tgt Kahan Hain. Iske liye normally grid ref diya jata hain. Agar observer grid
ref nahi de sakta hain to tab niche diye method mein se kisi bhi method ko use kiya ja
sakta hain :-

(a) Kisi reference point se target grid correction. Reference point saaf nazar
aana chahiye.Reference point do parties ko pehle se pata chahiye. Yeh koi
previously recorded target bhi ho sakta hain. E.g, “Reference BRIDGE.OT 110
degrees. Go RIGHT 200, ADD 1000.
Ya
“Reference target M2468. OT 41 degrees.Go left 300.”

(b) Salvo se target grid correction. Kharab map wala area mein reference
point ke liye OP officer ko salvo fire karne ke liye kaha ja sakta hain. Salvo ko fire
karne ke liye rough area indicate kiya ja sakta hain. Is ke liye normally map ka
square bataya jata hain. E.g, “ Fire salvo (sequence) 4250. Salvo ke girne ke bad
observer tgt grid correction deta hain.

(c) Target par tracer ya coloured smoke fire karke bhi indicate kiya ja sakte
hain.

12. OT Bearing. Yeh grid bearing hain jab tak specifically magnetic bearing nahi
bola jata hain. Observer yakin karta hain ki ye bearing tgt ka hain aur ref point ka nahin.

13. Tgt kya hain. Is mein target description aur target location include kiya
jayega. E.g, “Brown kheti ke baye kinare par pedon ke niche machine gun”.

14. Uspe kya karna hain. Target pe kis prakar ka fire support chahiye jaise,
“neutralize ya blind with smoke”.

15. Kab aur kab tak. Aam tarika is prakar hota hain:-

(a) “Neutralize now , yani fire jald se jald chahiye“.

(b) “Neutralise at…hrs for…minutes”.

(c) “Neutralise for minutes report jab ready”.

(Is case mein jab guns Fire For Effect ke liye ready ho jata hain tab OP officer
ready report deta hain).

16. Target indication ka pura example :-

“Target”

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
281
“Grid reference 249523 height 600 mtrs . OT 53 degs. Ditch mein 2 LMGs
neutralize now “

17. OP Officer message ko repeat back karta hain aur target ko pehchan ne tak
radio par “wait out“ pass karta hain.

Procedure : Jab Target Identify Na Ho.

18. Agar OP officer target nahi dekh pata hain, tab woh report karega “tgt not
identified send corrections “. Yadi observer ne reference point ke liye salvo manga hain,
to yeh report nahi bheji jayegi, kyon ki target dikhana mushkil hain.

19. Yahan se age tariqa same hain, chahe target identify na hua ho, ya observer ne
referance point ke liye salvo manga ho.

20. OP Officer guns ko fire order dega. aur Salvo ranging ka order diya jayega. Oscar
bearing observer ki di jayegi. Pehla salvo indicated point par fire kiya jayega.

21. Amn ke upar koi restriction hone par OP officer kisi bhi shoot mein kisi bhi samay
single gun ranging de kar observer ko report karega, jaise ki Single gun ranging.

22. Jab gun fire karti hain, tab OP officer observer ko “Shot” report deta hain.
Observer normal target grid correction se ranging karta hain .

23. Agar observer ko salvo nazar nahi aata hain tab woh report karega “un
observed”. Ab OP officer niche diye gaye methods mein se kisi bhi method ko follow kar
sakta hain :-

(a) Usi jagah per ek aur salvo fire karna.

(b) Aisa correction order karna jis se observer ko salvo nazar aa sake.

(c) Smoke round fire karke. Observer bhi “smoke” order kar sakta hain.

24. Observer ranging dwara round ya salvo ko target area meinadjust karega aur
report karega “on target”.

25. Shoot ke dauran agar OP officer round dekh sakta hain to woh har correction ke
sath observer ki OT line ko judge karke target ko identify ki koshish karega. Identify hote
hi report karega “Target identified” aur shoot ko age continue karega.

Tariqa : Jab Target Identify Ho Jaye

26. Agar OP officer kisi bhi samay per target identify kar leta hain, to woh observer ko
report karega “Tgt identified”.

27. Is ke bad OP officer shoot ko observer ke instructions ko dhayan mein rakte hue
age continue karega. Yahan par OP officer ne apne location se fresh OT bearing pass
karna dhyan mein rakhna chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
282
28. Is ke bad OP officer observer ko ranging complete hone tak aur guns fire for
effect ke liye ready hone tak koi report nahi dega.

Fire For Effect

29. Ranging complete hone par ( ya “On target “ ke report par ), OP officer apni guns
ko fire for effect ka order dega. Normally lines of fire parallel hongi.

30. Jab OP ko order mila ho “ Report when ready to engage”, tab OP officer guns ko
“FBO” pass karega aur GPO se ready report milte hi observer ko ready report dega.
Observer sahi time par “Fire” order dega.

31. Sabhi case mein , OP officer observer ke diye time par fire for effect ke liye fire ka
order dega . Pehla round fire hone par OP officer observer ko “Shot” report dega.

32. Fire effective hone par observer “Fire effective” ki report dega. Agar fire effective
nahi ho to correction di jayegi, e.g, “Add 50 Rpt”. OP officer hamesha yaad rakhega ki
correction observer ki line OT par diya ja raha hain .

33. OP officer guns ko “Report all gone” ka order karta hain aur guns se yeh report
milne par observer ko bhi report deta hain.

SECTION 70 - PROCEDURE OF ENGAGEMENT OF TGT

USING KROSONOPOL AMN

PART 1 - INTRODUCTION

1. Krasnopol amn ek terminaly guided ammunition hain. Is system mein ek Laser

Designater dwara laser fire karke target ko illuminate kiya jata hain. Yeh laser beam
target se reflect hota hain aur is reflected beam dwara projectile ko flight mein correct
karke target par laya jata hain. Yeh amn 155mm Gun system ke liye bana hain aur iske
khass hisse is prakar hain:

(a) 155mm guided projectile.

(i) HE fragementation (HEF) warhead.

(ii) Laser seeker semi active homing head .

(b) 155 mm guns ka standard projectile charge (bags mein).

(c) Laser (target) designator cum range finder (LDR ID20\ LDR ID22).

2. Gun end aur OP end do no par procedure khas hain. Is system ka detailed
description, employment, firing conditions, aur amn system handle karna aur LDR ID210
/ 22 ke handling ka tariqa Schoolo of Arty ke liaison letter Number 1 / 2002 on
Krasanopol Amn System mein diya gaya hain. Amn ki kimat aur firing ki khas condition
dekhte huve iska istemal kewal us tgt par kiya jana chahiye jiska careful analysis liaison

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
283
letter ke parameter ke hisab se kiya gaya hain. Niche diya gaya tariqa OP par ek LDR
aur 1 gun ya 1 bty ke liye hain .

PART II : BASIC PRINCIPLE AND SEQUENCE

3. OP aur GPO ne niche diye gaye baton ko dhayan rakhna chahiye :-

(a) LDR aur projectile ek hi frequency par ho.

(b) OP officer apne initial orders mein LDR ki frequency aur war head ka fuze
setting ( instantaneous / delay) shamil karega taki GPO use projectile par laga
sake.

(c) GPO lapse time (LT) gun fire karne se pehle OP officer ko pass karega
jisko woh LDR mein laser firing karne se pehle set karege.

(d) Laser ka firing gun ki firing ke sath synchronized hona chahiye. Isi liye OP
end aur gun ke beech mein fool proof communication aur coordinated drill hona
chahiye. OP officer normally FBO pass karta hain.

(e) Krasnopol ammunition 2 parts mein aata hain joki projectile section aur
control section. Dono section ko jodkar gun mein load kiya jata hain. Control
section ko projectile section mein jodne se pehle is ammunition mein special
preparation kiya jata hain. Jodne se pahle kuch settings projectile par set ki jati
hain aur woh is prakar hain :-

(i) Frequency (4,74,75 or 76).

(ii) Booster plug (BP) setting (0 for booster plug not removed and 1 for
booster plug removed).

(iii) K1 setting (1- near zone ya 2- far zone)

(iv) Fuze setting for warhead (O - instantaneas ya 3 - delay).

(v) NN time setting (yeh fuze PAD T-90 par set kiya jata hain).

(f) Projectile ki length loading tray se jyada hain, Is liye loading aur ramming
manually karne ki jarurat hain.

(g) Ye ammunition terminal guidance ke principle par kaam karta hain. Is liye
ranging karne ka zarurat nahi hain. Shoot FFE se shuru kiya jata hain (1 RGF/ BF
suitable interval ke sath).

(h) Arty board / palmtop / BCM / Calculator se mila hua map range ko final
corrected range pane ke liye successive range approximation karna padta hain.
Yeh School of Arty Lision Letter 1/2002 mein diya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
284
(j) Terminal guidance sabhi non-standard conditions ko cater karta hain. Is
wajah se hum iska data reduce nahi kar sakte hain aur koi target record nahi
maintain kiya jata.

(k) Available met telegram mandatory hain. Lekin operation condition mein
jab bhi met telegram nahi hain toh rough and ready met / datum correction ko
standard ammunition HE 77B se work out kiya jata hain aur apply kiya jata hain.
Is se hit probability kam ho jata hain.

PART III - CONVENTIONS AND PROCEDURES- OP END

Firing Conditions

4. Projectile niche diya hue conditions mein effective hoga. Yeh conditions na hone
par hit probability kam ho jati hain :-

(a) Wind velocity15 m/s tak kisi bhi disha mein.

(b) Altitude 4500 m tak.

(c) Line of fire aur laser beam ke beech ka max permissible apex angle 45
deg hain. 20 se 25 deg ka angle ideal hain.

(d) Moving tgt ke liye speed max 36 Kmph hain.

(e) Air temperature from minus 40 deg se plus 55 deg C tak.

(f) High angle fire 60 deg tak. Lekin filhal high angle firing table available nahi
hone ke karan is ko high angle mein istemal nahi kiya jata hain.

(g) Gun aur target ke beech ka maximum permissible height difference firing
table mein diya gaya hain. Acche accuracy ke liye yeh difference kam se kam
hona chahiye.

(h) Laser designation ke liye aur projectile ke liye aur projectile dwara reflected
laser ko receive karne ke liye cloud base target se 600 m se kam ki height par
nahi hona chahiye.

(j) Target ke us face ko illuminate karna chahiye jo line of fire ke square ho.
Laser ka reflection target ke rang par dependent hain. White surface badhiya
reflection aur black surface poor reflection karta hain. Target ka rang light hona
laser reflection ke liye accha hain.

5. LDR ko set up, inspect aur orient karne ke bad, range finding aur designation
modes mein istamal kiya ja sakta hain. LDR angle of sight measure karne ke liye bhi
istamal ho sakta hain. OP officer ranging mode mein LDR se target ka range pata kar
sakta hain. LDR OP officer ko nimnlikhit ke liye madad karta hain :-

(a) GR of target.

(b) Polar method of engagement of target.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
285
6. Krasnopol ammunition ke sath LDR designation mode mein employ hota hain.
OP officer ne diya hua conditions ke anusar target ko chunne ke bad LDR ke cross wire
ko target ke lower portion par lay karna chahiye. 7000 m par laser beam ka diameter
3 m / 10 ft hain.

7. Nature of target. Nature of target niche diya methods se diya jata hain :-

(a) Using Single Gun. “Single Gun Target Krasnopol, 74. (frequency) delay
(if required)”. Yeh order indicate karta hain ki single gun ka krasnopol ammunition
ke sath fire kiya jayega. Frequency 74 hogi aur fuze setting delay par hogi. Agar
fuze setting ka koi reference nahi diya hain to fuze setting instantaneous setting
“O” hoga.

(b) Sequence mein Firing. LDR maximum six targets ko sequence mein
engage kar sakta hain. DES mode mein LDR laser ke six cycles ko fire karta hain.
LDR 1D 20 ke liye cycles ke bich ka Interval 10 seconds hain aur LDR 1d 22 ke
liye operator interval ko 05 se 25 seconds ke bich select kar sakta hain. Interval
ko calculate karne ka tariqa niche diya gaya hain.

Interval = Maximum duration of laser emission (15 seconds) + delay time

(10seconds / as chosen by operator)

8. Indication Of Target. Ye GR aur height ya polar coordinates mein pass hota

hain .

9. FBO. FBO normally pass kiya jata hain. Is se OP officer lapse time (LT) ko LDR
par set karke aur LDR ko target par lay karne ke bad fire ka order de sakta hain.

10. Method Of Fire. Ranging nahi karne ki wajah se method of fire hamesha 1
RGF hota hain. OP officer fire tabhi pass karta hain jab LT LDR par set kiya gaya hain
aur LDR laser fire karne ke liye taiyar hain. LDR ke triggering ko gun ke firing ke sath
coordinate kiya jayega. Iske liye LDR operation aur GPO ke bich drill thik hona chahiye.

11. Fire Ka Adjustment. Ek guided ammunition hone ke karan Krasnopol

ammunition trajectory ko flight ke dauran khud correct kar sakta hain. Projectile agar
target se range ke liye + 100 m aur line ke liye + 400 m dur bhi agar aim kiya gaya hain,
tab bhi target par direct hit kar sakta hain. Ise Basket of Error kahte hain. Lekin
nimnlikhit karno se erfect talmel (gun firing aur laser ke bich) aur sbhi savdhni rakhne ke
bad bhi round target ko hit nahi kar sakta hain:-

(a) Guidance system ka improper functioning ya deploy na hona. Guidance

system ka deployment ek alag whistle type ke awaj ke rup mein suna ja sakta
hain. Control fins ka deployment aur control actutor ke dwara compressed air ka
release kia jana hain, is awaz ki wajah hain. Control fins ka deployment jaruri
hain. Is liye whistling sound sunai dena jaruri hain.

(b) Agar projectile ko Basket of error ke bahar aim kiya gaya ho (+ 1000 m
range ke liye aur + 400 m line ke liye).

(c) Warhead ka kam na karna.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
286
12. Recording the Target. Terminal guidance ke karan ammunition non standard
conditions ke effect ko cover karta hain, jisse target co-ordinates reduce nahi kar sakte
hain. Is liye target ko record karna jaruri nahi hain.

13. Communictions. LDR se laser aur gun ke firing ke bich talmel hona awashyak
hain. is liye LDR operator aur GPO ke bich reliable communication aur sahi drill jaruri
hain. Yeh terminal guidance ke dauran sahi samay par target ko laser dwara illuminate
karne ke liye jaruri hain.

PART IV- CONVENTIONS AND PROCEDURE- GUN END

14. Nimnlikhit additional conventions ko follow kiya jayega :-

(a) Gun data ko manually work out kia jayega. Iske liye jabtak sahi software
nahi issue hota hain tab tak arty board / BCM / laptop / calculator use kiya jayega.

(b) FBO lagu hoga.

(c) Terminal guidance ke karan shoot hamesha FFE se shuru hoga (1RGF/
BF with interval).

(d) Warhead ka frequency aur fuze setting hamesha OP officer initial orders
mein nature of target ke sath pass karega. Default fuze setting ”0” hain.

(e) Amn ko tab tak load nahi kiya jayega jabtak nimnlikhit data ko projectile par
set nahi kiya jata aur Number 1 aur troop leader dwara check nahi kiya jata :-

(i) Frequency - Jaisa OP ke dwara order kiya

gaya hain.

(ii) Fuze setting - -do-

(iii) Booster plug setting Firing table se

(iv) K 1 switch setting calculate kiya

(v) N N time setting jayega

15. Nature Of Target. “Number ____ gun target Krasnopol / Troop target
krasnopol / Battery target Krasnopol” ka order OP officer dwara diya jayega, nature of
target ko dhyan mein rakhe. OP dwara order kiye gaye nature of target ko dhyan mein
rakte hue GPO “Number --- gun target Krasnopol / Troop target Krasnopol / Battery
Target Krasnopol” ka order dega.

16. Ammunition Orders. Normal amn ka order is prakar hoga :-

“K-155/155-03, 75, November 54 delay, Krasnopol Charge 5 / 5Green, Bravo 1,

Kilo 2”

17. Iska matlab hain ki projectile (booster ke sath ya uske bina) fire hona hain.
Frequency 75 set kiya jayega. T -90 fuze setting (NN time setting) 54 hain. Fuze

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
287
(warhead ke liye) “3” yane delay par set hoga. Krasnopol charge 5 ya Bofors charge 5
ka istemal kiya jayega. Booster plug ko remove kiya jayega. K1 switch ki setting 2 par
hogi (far zone).

18. Amn ki taiyari aur checking No 1 aur Tp leader ko bahut dhyan se karna chahiye.

19. Example. Krasnopol ammunition system se engagement ka example niche

table mein diya gaya hain.

ORDERS KE EXAMPLE : KRASNOPOL AMMUNITION KE SATH SHOOT

OP Ke Orders GPO Ke Orders Remarks

Single Gun Tgt “No 1 Gun Tgt (a) Warhead ki Fz setting
Krasnopol Foxtrot 74 Krasnopol K-155/155-03 Delay
Delay Foctrot 74, Delay, November (b) Bravo plug ki setting 0
123456 Ht 640 ---- Charge ---Bravo 0/1, ya 1
Oscar 296 Kilo 1 / 2” (c) K1 plug setting 1 ya 2
Fire by Order (d) NN time setting PAD
En tank To Guns T-90 Fuze par set kiya
1 RGF Bearing---------Mils jayega
FBO
Elevation -----Mils 1 RGF
(Guns rpt ready)
To OP: Ready Flt ----secs,
Lapse time ------secs
GPO ne report kiya huve
lapse time ko OP LDR
par set karta hain. To Guns : Fire Drill ko synchronize kiya
Fire To OP: Shot Over jayega
LDR ko tab trigger karna
jab GPO se shot report
mile

SECTION 71- ENGAGEMENT OF TARGETS USING INTEGRATED OBSERVATION

EQUIPMENT (TI-IOE)

PART 1- INTRODUCTION

1. TI-IOE ek light weight observation fire monitoring system hain, jo ki raat aur din
mei istemal kiya jata hain. Yeh system observation device ke sath target ka detection,
LRF ke sath range measurement, Astro North Finding Module (ANFM) ke sath azimuth
measurement, aur measurement of elevation angle aur target coordinates ke generation
per aadharith hain. Iske vistrit technical specification aur characteristics UHB mein diye
gaya hain. Is ke mukhya bhag is prakar hain :-

(a) ARTIMLR - Artillery Thermal Imaging Module Long Range.

(b) LRF - Laser Range Finder ( maximum range 20 km).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
288
(c) Digital Goniometer – Accuracy 1 mils.

(d) ANFM – Astro North Finding Module.

(e) Magellan GPS – Accuracy +/-12m.

(f) Nickel Metal Hydride (Ni Mh) Rechargeable Batteries.

(g) Battery Charger.

(f) Video Monitor.

2. System functions

(a) Range malum karna aur fire control karna.

(b) Target ko acquire karna aur fixation malum karna aur target data bank ko
manage karna.

(c) Celestial bodies ki madad se north malum karna.

(d) Compass ki madad se north malun karna.

(e) Magellan GPS se own position malum karna.

(f) Fall of shot ko correct karna aur MPI ko adjust karna.

Operation

3. Opeartion ko tariqa ia prakar hain :-

(a) Tripod ko set up karna.

(b) Angulation head ko tripod par lagana.

(c) Angulation head par ARTIM-LR aur LRF ko lagana.

(d) Angulation head ke circular bubble ki madad se system ko level karna.

(e) ARTIM-LR aur LRF ke beech bore sight alignment karna.

PART II – OP PAR PROCEDURE

Engagement of Targets

4. Jaise hi target dikhai deta hain, OP offr guns ko warning order deta hain, e.g,
‘__________’ Target’ aur OPA ko target indicate karta hain. OPA IOE ko previously
selected RO par lay karta hain aur ensure karta hain ki orientation disturb nahin hua
hain. Uske bad woh IOE ko target par lay karta hain aur report karta hain “ON”. OP offr
IOE mein dekhta hain, agar zarurat ho to use adjust karta hain aur apni jagah wapas

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
289
jakar ‘Report’ order karta hain. OPA laser ko activate karta hain aur range note karta
hain. OP officer range, bearing aur angle of sight report karta hain.

5. OP offr polar method se guns ko target indicate karta hain aur GPO ko initial
orders pass karta hain. Initial orders mein ‘Report Stand by’ bhi shamil karta hain. Target
ke aas paas ki ground aur surprise ki requirement ko dhyaan mein rakhte hue, OP
officer opening correction order karke opening round ko target se door bhi place kar
sakta. Agar opening corrn diya jata hain to fall of shot ko likely location OPA ko indicate
kiya jata hain, aur OPA ‘Ready to observe’ report karta hain.

6. Jab shell burst hota hain, OPA point of burst ka bearing, range aur angle of sight
note karta hain aur OP officer ko report karta hain. Agar usne burst ko nahi dekha to
woh report karta hain ‘Not observed’. Yeh ensure karne ke liye ki OPA next burst
observe karen, OP officer ya to ‘Repeat’ order karta hain ya phir correction deta hain.
Round observe hone ke bad ‘Repeat’ order karke ek aur round dekha jata hain. Final
correction dono obsns ke mean se work out kiya jata hain. Height correction OP officer
khud calculate karta hain. Ab correction GPO ko order kiya jata hain e.g, ‘Rt / Lt and / or
ADD / DP – 1 RGF’. Uske bad MPI aur FFE ka adjustment normal tarike se hota hain.

7. Agar time kam hain, to OP officer single round ke observation se mili correction
par MPI adjustment ka order de sakta hain.

8. Practical Hints. Round observe karne par uska range line ke liye laser fire
kiya jata hain. Laser kis jagah par aim karna chahiye iski priority niche diya gaya hain :-

(a) Round burst hone ka bad bana hua crater.

(b) Smoke produce hote hi turant smoke cloud ka base.

(c) LRF se nazar aane wala koi aisa object jo point of burst se ekdam karib
ho.

(d) Agar jarurat hain to height corrections ‘ Up / Down ---m’ pass karke diye
jayenge.

9. General Procedure.

(a) Target ka data work out karne ke liye IOE ko use kiya jayega.
(b) Target ka GR pass kiya jayega. Agar surprise hasil karna hain to order
karke round ko door place karo. Yeh jagah target se datum limits mein honi
chahiye.
(c) Shoot ke mutabik initial orders pass karo.
(d) Do round ko observe karo aur unka mean lo.
(e) IOE dwara work out kiya hua line aur range correction, aur OP officer
dwara work out kiya gaya height corrections GPO ko pass kiya jayega.
(e) Is ke bad adjustment of MPI aur FFE kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
290
Alag Alag Shoots Lene Ke Tariqa

10. IN Shoot.
(a) Initial orders pass karo.
(b) GR target ke centre ka hona chahiye. Zarurat hain to correction order
karke round ko target se door place karo.
(c) Round ko observe karo. ‘Repeat’ order karke ek aur round ka observation
lo. Dono observations ka mean lo.
(d) IOE dwara work out kiye gaye correction ko 1 RGF ke order ke sath GPO
ko pass karo.
(e) Uske bad adjustment of MPI aur FFE normal tariqa se kiya jayega.
Example

Tgt
Rt11°°
7775 6900
Rt 10°°
6700

Bty Tgt
296 786 Ht 625 Substension Factor
Oscar 223
Rt 1000 Dp 800
MMG
Fire
Rpt
Do rounds dekhne ke bad OP correction order karta hain.
Left 1250, ADD 975 1 RGF (MPI Correct)
3 RGF
Record as tgt M2501
Stand Easy

11. Registration Shoots.

(a) Initial orders pass karein ( e.g, Tp tgt Regn).

(b) Suitable interval ke sath BF order karein jis se teeno rounds ka observation
IOE se le sakein.

(c) Teeno rounds ko observe karein.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
291
(d) Teeno observations se MPI IOE ki madad se work out karo aur IOE se
correction bhi work out karo.

(e) IOE se work out kiye gaye correction ke sath order de “Record as target
……..’ ya “Datum point at ……..” dein.

Example

Tp Tgt Regn
Rt 3°
739221 Ht 638 7150
Rt 4°
Oscar 115 7100
Tgt
Rt 3° 30'
BF 40’ 6900 7050
Datum Shoot
Fire
Teeno round ka observation lo

Subtension Factor 1 degree at 7100 subtends 120m.

Teeno round ka mean is example mei hain Right 3030’, 7100.

Corrections ordered Datum pt at Lt 425 Dp 200

Record as tgt M2502
S/E.
12. Linear Shoot / Smoke Screen Shoot.
(a) IOE ka istemal karke linear length and bearing / smoke screen ka data
workout karo.
(b) Centre point ya point one ko register karo.
(c) Suitable interval ke sath BF order karo, jisse teeno rounds ka observation
kiya ja sake.
(d) Yadi linear ko concentration ke roop mein register kiya ja raha hain, tab IN
shoot ka procedure use karna chahiye.
Example

A Rt1°° 30'
Rt 1°° 7200
7150
Tgt
Rt 1°° 15'
7000 7050

B
Mean of observations Rt 1° 15' at 7133m
1° at 7150m subtends 120m

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
292
13. Steps
(a) IOE se linear ke end points ka bearing, angle of sight aur range work out
karo.
(b) In points ke coordinates bhi compute karo.
(c) Coordinates ki madad se linear ki bearing aur length compute karo ya
coordinates ko map par plot karo aur linear ki bearing aur length read karo.
Order
Tp Tgt Regn
E 23445 N 34556 Ht s237
Oscar 346
Registering Centre point linear 400 bg 310°
BF30”
Fire

Centre point at Lt 150 Dp 150 ( Teeno observation ka mean hain right 1015’, 7133)

Record as target

Stand Easy

14. Battery Concentration.

(a) Initial orders pass karein (Battery Target).

(b) Pehle round ko repeat karein. Dono round ke mean se IOE se correction
workout karein aur battery fire order karein.

(c) Sabhi rounds ko observe karein aur MPI ko fix karein. Zarurat hone par
correction pass karein.

(d) Iske bad shoot bina IOE se liya jayega.

Example

Lt 4°°
7400
Lt 6°° Tgt 7000
7200

1° at 7200 subtends 125m

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
293

Bty Tgt
722193 ht 650
Oscar 215
Registering platoon locality
Fire
(Ranging round ke bad)
Repeat
Rt 600 Dp 300 BF 40” (IOE dwara correction dono round ke observations ke mean se
work out kiya jayega).

Rt 75 Ad 50 (MPI ko IOE dwara fix kiya jayega aur MPI se correction work out liya
jayega).
(Iske bad shoot ko IOE ke bina se chalaya jayega).
Record as tgt M 4312.
Stand Easy

15. Smoke Shoots. Smoke Shoot me bahut zyada accuracy ki zarurat nahi hoti. Is
liye corrn dene ke liye ek ranging round observe karna kafi hain. Procedure is prakar
hain.

(a) Initial orders pass karein.

(b) Ek ranging round ka IOE se obsn le.

(c) Ek correction ke bade smoke ke orders pass karein.

16. Precision Shoots.

(a) Initial orders pass karein (Single Gun Tgt Precision).

(b) Do round ka observation le aur correction work out kare.

(c) Corrcetion ke sath MPI adjustment ke liye “Clinometer laying, Oscar Bravo
5 RGF –“ ka order pass karein.

(d) MPI adjustment aur FFE IOE ke bina kiya jayega.

PART III - PROCEDURE AT GUN POSITION

17. Gun end par procedure mein koi antar nahi hain. Chapter IV mein diye gaye
procedure ko follow kiya jayega.

PART IV – MISCELLANEOUS POINTS

18. IOE nearest meter tak correction deta hain. Agar gun end par palmtop ya BCM ka
prayog kiya ja raha hain to correction round off karne ki jarurat nahi hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
294
SECTION 72 - DOOAF PROCEDURE

MRBFSR ( ELM - 2140 NG)

1. ELM - 2140 NG radar mein DOOAF capability hain jiski madad se 105 mm aur
130 mm shells se 12 km tak aur 155 mm shells se 15 km tak target engage kar sakte
hain. DOOAF sirf ground burst ammunition se kiya ja sakta hain. Radar ‘line of sight ke
principle par kam karne wala equipment hain.

2. Conventions.

(a) Oscar hamesha 3600 hota hain.

(b) Normal fire orders ka procedure follow kiya jata hain.
(c) Ranging battery standby procedure ka istemal karti hain.
(d) Corrections ko do ya do se zyada rounds observations ke mean se
workout kiya jata hain.
3. Procedure :-
Ser RCPO Orders Adjt Bty
1. 36 Mike Tgt DOOAF 36 Mike Tgt DOOAF
E1234 N5678 HT600 m E1234 N5678 HT600 m
Oscar 360 deg Oscar 360 deg
FBO FBO
Fire Fire
(Batteries ko line par) 43 ready flight
20 (Adjutant lo line par)
2. 43 ranging flight 20
(report ready to RCPO)
3. Fire Fire 43 Shot
43 Standby
4. Repeat Repeat 43 ready
(Report ready)
5. Fire Fire 43 Shot
43 standby
6. Cancel FBO Cancel FBO
Right 400 DROP 400 Right 400 DROP 400
5 RGF 5 RGF 23 shot
63 shot
43 shot
7. Tgt neutralised Tgt neutralised
Record as Tgt L1234 S/E Record as Tgt L1234 S/E

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
295
LORROS

4. LORROS, SATA units/Arty units ke pass as sector stores hota hain. Iski lambi
range observation capability aur laser range finder se max range 12.5 km tak DOOAF ke
liye ek bahut hi badhiya equipment bana hain.

5. Conventions.

(a) Ek fire unit ke case main corrections Osacar Bravo par pass kiye jate hain
aur Mike aur higher targets ke case main Oscar par.

(b) Line correction observer dwara deg aur min main pass kiye jate hain. Mike
targets aur above ke case main observer ko line correction OT factor se karne
chahiye kissi bhi normal engagement ki tarah.

(c) FBO tab tak lagoo hain jab tak cancel na kiya jaye.

(d) Standby procedure invariably follow kiya jayega.

(e) Corrections do rounds ke mean par work out kiye jayege.

6. Procedure :-

Ser LORROS Sec Cdr Adjt GPO

1. 36 Bty tgt DOOAF 36 Bty tgt DOOAF
E......N......HT...... E......N......HT......
Oscar Bravo Oscar Bravo
PI loc PI loc
FBO FBO 23 ready flt 30
2. 23 available
3. Fire Fire
S1, Stand by
4 Rpt Ready
5 Fire S1
Standby

6 More 10 30' ADD 450 M 10 30' ADD

Cancel FBO 450
5 RGF Cancel FBO
5 RGF
Shot
7. Tgt Neutr S/E Tgt Neutr S/E

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
296
UAV

7. UAVs khas karke area tgt ko engage karta hain. Dhushman UAV ka sthan jaan
na le uske liye usko tgt par kam se kam samay bitana chahiye. UAV khas karke IN
shoots ke liye use hota hain. Lekin dusri tarah ke ammunition ke sath aur shoot bhi le
sakte hain.

8. Khasiyat.

(a) UAV ke sath nature of tgt lagate hain (eg…. Target UAV).

(b) FBO pure shoot key dauran lagoo rahega, jab tak cancel na mile.

(c) Oscar hamesha 360° liya jayega aur pass nahi ki ya jayega.

(d) Ready report ke sath gun ki vertex height paas kiya jayega. Agar low
angle fire hain to vertex height sab se door wale tgt ki di jayegi. Agar high angle
fire hain to target se nazdeek gun / bty ki height pass kiya jayega.

(e) Shoot ke dauran agar vertex height mein 150m ka farak aata hain, to voh
new vertex height pass ki jayegi.

(f) Standby procedure CP aur GCS ke bich mein lagoo rahegi.

(g) GPO 2 RGF 30” Ranging gun ko pass karega.

9. Procedure

KHAS ORDERS FOR ENGAGEMENT OF TGTS USING TI-IOE

Ser GCS Adjt Bty

1. 56 Mike Tgt UAV Mike Tgt UAV
2. 123576 Ht 600m 123576 Ht 600m 43 ready flight 25
enemy tank harbour enemy tank harbour Vertex ht 2450m
(online to the btys 63 ready flight 22
adjt will give FBO) Vertex ht 2100m
23 ready flight 23
Vertex ht 2200m
3. 43 ranging vertex
ht 2450m
4. Fire Fire Shot 1 flight 25”
5. Left 125 Add 225 Left 125 Add 225 (All bty report
1 RGF 1 RGF shot to adjt
online)
6. Shot
7 3 RGF 3 RGF
8. Tgt Neutr S/E

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
297

CHAPTER – VI
TARGET RECORDS AND CHANGE OF GRID
SECTION 73 - TARGET RECORDS –GENERAL AND NUMBERING
PART A- GENERAL

Introduction

1. Target record karne ka aim hain ki jab jarurat pade to us target ko bina delay kiye
engage kiya ja sake.

2. Target record ko in do tariko se hasil kar sakte hain:-

(a) Target ko register aur safalta se engage kiya ja sake aur jis data par
guns ne fire kiya hain uska record is tarike se karte hain taki use dobara engage
kiya ja sake.

(b) Command post ko us target ka grid ref diya jata hain,use bearing, A of S
aur range mein convert karke use record karte hain. Grid ref nikalne ke tarike
map spotting,air photographs,CB locating device ya kisi aur tarike se nikalte
hain,ya phir grid ref jo doosri unit ne diya hain jisne tgt ko engage kiya hain .aur
use rec karte hain as per para (a).

3. Number of tgts rec karne ki ek limit hoti hain, jisko exceed nahi kiya ja sakta.agar
is limit ko badhate hain to ismay zyada samay lagta hain kyonki inhe prepare karna ,inka
record dhoondne me time adhik legta hain. Is liye BM aur adjt targets ki category bante
hain.

Classes of Target

4. Recorded targets ko bty, regt etc mein banaya jata hain.Ye depend karta hain
kitne tgts records rakhne hain aur circulate karna hain ya fire unit ke size par,
classification zaruri nahi hain ki jis level par tgt engage hua hain ya record hua hain aur
na hi jispar woh reengage ya engage hua hain jab zarurat padti hain.example tgt
engage bty ne kiya,register troop ne aur map spotting BC ne aur order aya usko regtl tgt
rec karne ka.rec maintain kiya jayega regt ki har command post mein,taki us tgt ko har
bty engage kar sake jab zarurart ho.

5. Hostile bty ke case mein uski classification uski extent nahi batati ki us tgt ko kahan
tak circulate aur record karna hain.is point par orders CB staff deta hain.

6. Recorded tgt ki class usko ek letter aur number ke dwara identify kiya jata hain.

Records To Be Kept

7. Amtaur par har command post aur HQ sare recorded tgts ka record apne pass
rakhte hain aur higher level par.regt ke under,responsibilities is prakar se hain:-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
298
(a) GPO sare records duplicate mein IAFB 548 tgt book mein rakhta hain. jab
tak ki order na kiya gaya ho.woh adjt ko sari necessary details jo ki regtl aur
higher target recrds ki jo uski bty ne originate ki hain.

(b) Adjt sare regimental aur higher tgts ka record apne pass rakhta hain. GPO
ko tgts ki sari detail mili hui hain iski responsibility bhi adjt ki hoti hain.

Definitions

8. Grid Reference. Grid ref recorded tgt ka woh point hain jo tgt ki location batata
hain.point tgt ka centre batata hain,except smoke screen meinaur hostile btys jisme indl
guns ki position indicate hoti hain.

9. Centre To Centre Data. Yeh data bearing, A of S, range aur corrector or fuze
setting jo bty centre se tgt centre ki hoti hain.

10. Shoting Corrections. shooting correction ka difference centre to centre data

aur bearing , A of S, elevation aur fuze setting jispar guns ne actually fire kiya hain,eg
position corrn,line aur range displacements linear concentration ke liye,aur indl corrn jo
OP ne order ki hain.

Responsibilities For Target Records

11. HQ ARTY(ARMY/CORPS/DIV).

(a) Tgts No is prakar allocate hote hain:-

(i) Ten ke blocks mein jo unit ke under command hain.

(i) Indl particular tgt jo har ek level par originate huva hain, ie
Army(w)corps(v)div (u)tgts.

(iii) Authorised OP ke liye.

(b) Tgt record ko maintain karna ,sare tgts ke liye apne aur higher levels par.

(c) Records ko circulate karna higher aur lower HQs mein.

(d) Important tgts ka level upgrade karna.

(e) Target ko apne level categoriesing karta hain .

(f) Un tgts ko cancel karna jo unke level par hain.

(g) Ek regt ko nominate karna reduce data nikalne ke liye jab ranging na ki gai
ho fired target ke liye jo unke dwara originate huva hain.

(h) Fresh tgt number dena aur pehle wale tgt number ko cancel kar dena jab ek
tgt number do bar record ho gaya ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
299
(j) yakeen karna ki sabhi tgts jo ki cancel kar diya gaye hain unhe black mein
cross kiya gaya hain aur tgt book mein “CANCELLED” likha gaya hain.

12. Regimental Headquarter

(a) Niminlikhit ko tgt No dena -:

(i) Regt ki subunit ko ten ke block mein.

(ii) Regt Tgts.

(iii) Authourised observers.

(b) Sabhi tgts ke liye tgt record maintain karna, apne aur aapne se bade level
Ke liye,IAB548 main

(c) Tgt records ko higher HQ aur bty CPs mein bhejna

(d) Imp tgts ke levels ko upgrade karna

(e) Order kiye gaye tarique se tgts ko categorise karna aur recorded tgts ko
aapne level pe categorise karna,agar observer ne nahi kiya hain to.

(f) Order kiye gaye tarique se tgt ko cancel karna

(g) Jab Regtl tgt ki ranging nahi hui ho ko ek bty to reduced data ke liye
nominate karna, ya phir HQ Artillery Brigade dwara detail kiya ho us target ke liye
jo ki higher level Par originate hua hain.

(h) Cancel hue sabhi tgt ko black pen se cross mare aur sath hi “CANCELLED
“ likhe IAFB-548 mein.

13. Battery CPs

(a) Bty CP nimminlikhit ko tgt no allot karta hain

(i) Bty Cdr aur sare OPs ko fire planning mein istemal ke liye.

(ii) To battery targets.

(b) Category C ko chod kar IAB 548 mein sabhi tgts ke bare mein aur reserve
CP ke liye pure record maintain karna.

(c) Tgt record ke liye fired data ko reduced karke reduced data nikalna.

(d) Rng battery hone par regt aur higher tgts ke target record initiate karna. i.e,
pehli bty jo ki ranging karti hain, ya phir RHQ dwara nominated ho.

(e) IAFB-548 mein un safe tgts ko red se cross karna.

(f) Grid ke badalne se target record me badlav honge

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
300

(g) Recods ko ek hi regt ke regimental HQ aur bty CP me circulate karo.

(h) Order ke anusar target ko distribute karo.

(j) Order par Bty ke ander originated tgt ko cancel karo.

(k) Ek ranging gun ko reduced data orginate karne ke liye nominate karna jab
ranging nahi huva hain aur fired target ko record karna hain.

(l) Sabhi Canceled targets ko cross karne ke bad “CANCELLED” likha jayega
IAFB-548 mein.

14. OBSERVERS

(a) Future engagements ke liye target record karna.

(b) Record kiye jane wale target par fire adjust karna.

(c) Apne troops ke liye unsafe targets ko report karna

(d) Targets ko cancel karne ke liye Bty Cdr ko recommend karna.

(e) Fire plan jo ki unka dwara originate huva hain unmein targets ko target No
dena.

15. THE CO AND BC

(a) Future engagements ke liye target record karna.

(b) Apne tps ke liye unsafe targets ko record karna.

(c) Targets ko Bty CP/Adjt ke dwara categorise karwana.

(d) GPO/Adjt ke dawra target cancel karwana.

(e) Fire plan targets ko target No dena. Tgt level originator ke mutabik hoga.

(f) Yadi ek target do bar record ho jaye to target list aur fire plan ko
coordinate karna, fresh target No dena aur existing target No ko cancel karna.

16. Numbers Ka Reallocation. Cancelled targets ke No jarurat padne par CP

ke dwara reallote ho sakte hain,yeh dhyan rakhna chahiye ke woh single no na ho aur
na dus ke blocks me ho.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
301

PART B -TARGET KE LETTERING AUR NUMBERING

Lettering

17. Target ki class uske number ke aage lage letter se darsai jati hain.

(a) Battery Targets. Letters P,Q,R,and S unki seniority ke hisab se regt

mein use hote hain. Koi attached bty jo letters pehle se hi use mein hain unse
agla letter use karte hain.

(b) Regimental Targets. Letter M use hota eg, M 3501.

(c) Formation Targets. Yeh niche like letters use hote hain.

(i) Divisional targets U

(ii) Independent Arty Bde targets Y

(iii) Corps targets V

(iv) Army targets W

(d) Hostile Batteries. Hostile batteries guns,mortars or rocket launchers ko

niche like number diye jate hain jab CB staff wo numbers allot karta hain.

(i) Corps CB Staff. N

(ii) Divisional CB Staff L

(e) Special Tasks. Ek recorded target ke kuch special khubiyan ho sakti

hain jaise ki wo ek DF task ya ek point ho sakta hain, barrage mein ya uska ek
nickname ho sakta hain. Jinki yeh khubiyan hoti hain wo target letter aur number
ke part nahi hote hain par wo targets record ya target list ke remarks column
mein likhe jate hain.

Numbers

18. Har dus target numbers ka ghuma phira ke banaya hua blocks jo ke corps artillery
HQ se artillery formation aur CB staff jo ki corps ke andar hi hote hain unhe distribute
karna hain. Phir ye blocks bari bari se regt,division aur brigade CB staff akhir mein regt
se btys ko bheje jata hain. Jo tgt no. authorised block ke bahar hote hain unko use nahi
kiya jata hain. Ek block uske pehle no. se indicate kiya jata hain,eg, 8510 matlab 8510
se lekar 8519 tak.

19. Numbers ke block ka distribution maujuda halat par nirbher karte hain. Niche
likhe kuch possible distribution jo ki regt ke andar diye ja sakte hain 300 numbers(30
blocks 10 ke)

RHQ 3500,3900,4110,1250,aur bahut(150 numbers)

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
302

P Battery 8510,6320,aur bahut (50 numbers)

Q Battery 9300,5210,aur bahut (50 numbers)
R Battery 3610,5860,aur bahut (50 numbers)

20. Yeh dekha gaya hain jab No. limited hote hain tab RHQ centrally apne pas uska
ek sabse jyada % rakh leta hain as spare jo ki btys ko jarurat padne pe diya jata hain.

21. Commanders or OP officer jinko fire plans banane aur special task chalane hote
hain unko aksar apne own target Nos ki jarurat padti hain. Yeh wo ya to apne HQ se eg,
ek CO apne Adjt se aur ek BC apne GPO se aur apne superior commander se le lete
hain.

22. Artillery ke Corps ke andar targets ko duplication nahi ki ja sakti jo ki kise ek bty
ne engage kiye hain iseliye apne aap mein ek alag block No, jisse pehle uska uchit
letter ka istmal kiya jayega chahe wo bty ke liye ya div ke liye ya corp ke liye recorded
ho. Agar target ko upgrade karna ho to uska letter change ho jata hain.

23. Agar ek target originally corps dwara recorded ho aur woh as a army target use
kiya jaye ya phir corp arty mein pas kiya jai. Original no. Drop kar diya jata hain aur
army HQ se naya letter de diya jata hain. Letter W ke sath eg, target U aur V 5882 W
6401 ban sakta hain.

24. Agar target record enemy gun, mortars ya kise aur ka ho, CB staff ke alawa kisi
aur dwara record huwa ho to usko normal letter aur No, regt ya bty block ke hisab se
diya jata hain. Jab target CB staff ko report kiya gaya ho tab CB staff usko hostile bty se
record kar sakta hain tab target ko letter N ya L milta hain. Unit jo us target ko already
record karchuki haiin use inform kar diya jata hain target change ke bare mein. Agar
target location CB staff dwara change kar diya ho to naya No allot kar diya jata hain.

25. Kuch khas circumstrances mein tgt No naye tarike se bante jate hain ya phir
order kar diye jate hain general staff dwara.

Target Letters Aur Numbers Ka Baantna

26. Jab tgts firing dwara record kiye jate hain No ko aam taur par jis CP se shoot liya
gaya hain uske dwara No diya jata hain.

(a) GPO dwara tgt engage kiya hua bty tgt.

(b) Adjt dwara engage hua regtl tgt.
(c) BM dwara engage kiya hua div tgt.

27. Letter ka No jis level par tgt record kiya hua hain usi hisab se diya jata
hain.

28. Jo tgt fire plan ka part ho jisme DF task bhi shamil ho jo aam taur jo officer fire
plan mein shamil hain uske dwara allot kiya jata hain. Chahe wo tgt regn ya map
spotting dwara record kiya gaya ho. Yeh chise jo already recorded tgt hain fire plan mein
us par lago nahi hota. Is case mein weh apna tgt letter aur No original par rahta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
303
Agar fire plan higher level par banaya gaya ho to tgt aam taur par upgrade ho jata hain
jo officer fire plan banata hain eg, upgrade tgt P 6882 to tgt M 6882. P bty ka GPO is
duaran adjustment karta hain range aur false angle of sight ke liye agar jarurat ho to tgt
record ko baki btys aur adjt ko pass karta hain.

Nicknames aur Codewords

29. Nicknames aur codewords ko banane aur istemal karne ke niyam SD/58 aur
AT1,6/72 mein diye huye hain. Codewords ko security ke liye istemaal karte hain aur
targets ke liye aam taur par istemaal nahi karte hain. Halaki, fire plans mein, ek Group of
targets ke liye, ya targets engage karne ke tarike ke liye, ya phir sirf ek single target ke
identity ke liye nickname ka istemaal karte hain. Nicknames do shabdo se bante hain,
jisme ki dono hi koi colour nahi ho, aur locally devise hote hain, lekin ye shabd RHQ
issue karta hain officers ko jinhe inki zarurat hoti hain.

30. Ek nickname kabhi bhi normal target number ke badle istemaal nahi kiya jata,
lekin uske sath joda ja sakta hain. Isliye nicknames ko target record ke remarks column
mein bhara jata hain. Agar zyaada nicknames hon to alphabetical list banaya jata hain.

31. Categorization of Targets. Targets ko nimnlikhit bhago mein categorize

karte hain,jin haalaton mein karte hain woh para 32 mein diye gaye hain:-

(a) Category A. Targets jinko fully record kiya jata hain aur jinko current data
ke sath upto date kiya jata hain. Yeh har bty mein 10 hote hain aur DF(SOS) bhi
shamil kiya jata hain. Inko IAB 548 mein record kiya jata hain. DF(SOS) data ko
bhi gun programes ke sath issue karte hain.

(b) Category B. Targets jinko fully record kiya jata hain aur jinke liye current
firing data maintain nahi kiya jata hain( Coln 1-24). Agar fired data available hain,
toh yeh targets record hote hain lekin upto date maintained nahi kiye jate.

(c) Category C. Targets jinko IAB 548 mein record nahi kiya jata, lekin unke
information ko target list ya HB list mein likha jata hain.

32. Jab zyaada targets hon, artillery advisor unko categories(joki para 31 mein diye
hue hain) mein bant dete hain. Isse CP ka work load kam hota hain. Targets ki category
IAB 548 ke column 2 mein enter kiya jata hain. Targets ka categorization jitna ho sake
low rakhna chahiye aur yeh nimnlikhit pe nirbhar karte hain:-

(a) Target ka importance.

(b) Tactical situation.
(c) Total number of targets jinko record karna hain.

33. Cancellation of Targets. Target record ka load kam karne ke liye aur Tgt Nos
spare karne ke liye targets ko cancel kiya jata hain. Yeh nimnlikhit cases mein karte
hain:-

(a) Agar target numbers ka duplication ho.( naya number allot kiya jata hain).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
304
(b) Agar target unit ke area of operation mein jyada samay tak na ho ya jiska
koi tactical value na ho.

(c) Agar target CB target ban jaye toh use naya CB number allot karte hain.
Agar target ka location nahi badal gaya ho, toh sirf prefix letter badal jata hain
aur target number same rahta hain.

(d) Agar target ek army target ban gaya ho new No ke sath.

(e) Agar own troops ke movement se target unsafe ho jaye.

SECTION 74 - BATTERY MEIN TARGETS KE RECORDS - GENERAL

Observer Ke Orders

1. Agar observer last fired data pe target ko record karna chahe toh woh nimnlikhit
orders dega:-

(a) “Record as target” ya

(b) “Record as target…..(letter and number)”, agar woh target number apne
block se allot karta hain.

2. Jab order “Record as target” diya jata hain, battery dwara engage kiye gaye
target ko battery target ke naam se record karte hain. battery se higher level dwara
engage kiye gaye target ko use level pe record karte hain.

3. Agar observer target ko higher level pe record karna chahe toh woh order karta
hain “Record as target…….(letter and number)” ya “Record as (mike, aur…)target” mein
ranging bty ka GPO target number allot karta hain.

4. Jab observer final data pe fire karwana nahi chahe, tab woh order karta hain
“Record as target at……..(target grid correction)”.

5. Agar initial engagement ke short time ke andar observer target ko doosre

batteries ke fire se engage karna chahe, toh woh order deta hain ”Record as target
Mike1231as fired”.

Outline Procedure

6. Targets Jinpe Gun se Fire Kiya Gaya Hain. Jab koi bhi gun target pe fire kar
chuki ho aur usko target record ka order mila ho, GPO fire kiye hue guns ke Nos.1 se
target record reports leta hain. Fired data ko check kiya jata aur Target Record Book
(IAB 548) mein enter kiya jata. Phir standard conditions pe reduce kiya jata hain. Mike
target ke case mein, ranging bty ka GPO adjutant aur baaki btys ko data pass karta
hain. Agar HB tgt record hota hain, toh CB staff ke pass ek tgt registration report
IAFB915 form pe jama kiya jata hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
305
7. Targets Jinpe Gun se Fire Nahi Kiya Gaya Hain. Jab btys dwara nahi fire kiye
gaye tgt ka GR aata hain CP pe, GPO apni bty ka data deduce karta hain aur use
IAB548 mein record karta hain.

8. Recorded Target ko Engage Karna. Jab ek recorded tgt pe fire lana ho, toh
fired data (record karne ke 2 hrs tak) istemaal kiya jata hain. Nahi toh reduced data ko
predict kiya jata hain. Re-engagement ke liye istemaal kiye gaye ammunition ko hi
standard ammunition liya jayega jab tak OP officer koi specific ammuntion apne fresh
initial orders mein pass na kare.

The Tgt Record Book

9 IAB 548 GPO dwara tgt record karne ke liye istemal kiya jata hain. Is book mein
numerical index to tgt records, bty centre survey data record karne ke liye aur tgt data ke
liye pages hain.

The Tgt Record Index

10 IAB 548 ke pehle 10 pages tgt record index hote hain.

11. Jab tgt book mein tgt record ki jati hain index ke against tgt number ki entry ki
jathi hain.

Bty Centtre Survey Data

12. Jab 548 ke agle four pages current grid par GR or co ordinates of the bty centre
ko record karne ke liye hain. Change of grid ya change of posn par old entries ko cut kar
diya jatha hain.

Tgt Data

13 Baki bache hue pages tgt record karne ke liye hain, column ke use niche bathaye
gaye hain. Jaise hi record of tgt miltha hain data six lines ke Group ke pehle line me
enter kiya jatha hain, baki 5 lines usi tgt ka fresh data ke liye hain aur previous data cut
kar diya jatha hain jab wah data applicable nahi hota hain.

Column 1 Letter And Number

14. yeh self explanatory hain.

Column 2 Description And Remarks

15. OP dwara order kiya gaya brief tactical description enter karten hain eg “Def loc”,
”Mor posn conc” aur any special remarks ya special points jaise “DF”,”Point H”,”Linear
400 bearing 315 deg”,GR and ht of HB/designated OP, axis bearing and intersections to
be engaged while using MFDT, H/A, category of tgt or a nickname.

Column 3 To 5 Grid Reference

16. (a) Jab arty board use ho raha ho to eight figure GR aur height enter Karen.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
306
(b) Jab palmtop use ho raha hain to ten figure GR aur height enter Karen.

Column 6 R or F

17. Letter R ya F yeh batata hain ki centre to centre data aur GR reduced hain ya
fired hain.

18. Battery ke bahar se mile hue records including tgt lists, reduced hain aur letter R
column 6 me enter kiya jatha hain jab tak yeh specify kiya nahi jatha ki wah fired hain.

Column 7 How Obtained, Date and Time

19. All targets ko firing dwara engage kiya jayega, har ek bty is column mein ranging
bty ka letter likhega jaseki eg, “ P Reg” or “R Reg ”. Is entry se hame ye pata chalta hain
ki ye kis bty ne engage kiya hain aur kitna samay par engage kiya hain. Agar koi queries
ho to usko bi entry kiya jayega.

20. Agar is tgt list se tgt nikalana ho to ise coloumn7 me enter kiya jata hain eg “ U
Tgt list no 17.sabhi fire data ke liye date and time jispar tgt ko engage kiya hain eg
“0931140” . 2 ghante ke bad data khatam ho jata hain. Jabhi jarurat ho “ As fired” ki
entry is column me banaya jata hain

Column 8 Grid

21. Yeh column tgt jis grid par hain uske GR ko darshata hain. Jabhi firing ke bad
grid referance nikala jata to yeh wahi hota hain jis gun ka data use hua ho . Har change
of GR, naya GR , naye GR ka nam, nayi line par enter kiya jata hain aur purana data
hata diya jata hain .

Columns 9 and 10 ammunition

22. (a) Fired data par shell ka weight fz , charge, propellant dala jata hain

(b) Reduced data par std shell , fz aur suitable ch (jo crest ki problem nahi
deta) aur propellant dala jata hain.

Column 11

23. Yeh ek separate col hain jo 105 mm abbot (SP) gun ke liye use hota hain.

Column 12 to 18 Centre to Centre Data

24. Fire Data Entries.

(a) Column 12 se 14. Isme centre to centre fired data enter kiya jata hain jo
ki No 1 tgt report se mila hain.

(b) Column 15. koi entry banaye nahi jati.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
307
(c). Column 16. Isme bina calibrating sight , gun rules or false TE (high angle)
se nikala gaye Angle of Projection or TE (tgt) ki entry ki jati hain. Yeh entry coln
14 me rg ke jasi hoti hain

(d) Column 17. Fz setting aur corrector ko enter karne ke liye

(e) Column 18. Isme QE less P/C aur rg guns gun rule ke bina aur high
angle par enter kijati hain yeh entry reduction ke samay kam ati hain . yeh column
Fz setting me badlav ki recording me bhi istaml kiya jata hain. Tgt jaise star shell
jo obsn ke liye istamal ho, bg ka record, star QE aur fz setting ko bhi is column
me dala jata hain.

25. Reduced Data Entries. Reduced data hamein milta hain ya to firing data ko
reduce karke ya grid bg ko reduce karke. Bg aur range ko jitna possible ho utna
accurately enter karein aur a/s ko smallest convenint value main convert karein taki use
sight par apply kar sakein. Arty board ke sath, bg aur rg ko 5 min aur 25 m ke accuracy
ke sath padha ja sakta hain.

26. Non-rigidity correction map range ya reduced range ke against work out karke
column No 15 mein entry karte hain. Agar high angle hone par NR correction column No
15 mein entry nahi karte hain. Isko hum reproduction ke liye istemal karte hain, agar C
of M plus proj correction milke 500 m se jyada correction hone par is ko hum predicted
horizontal range ke against dekha jayega. Column No 17 mein koi entry ka jarurat nahi
hain kyon ki reduced data, standard proj ke liye applicable hain.

Columns 20 to 24 Shooting Corrections

27. Shooting corrn centre to centre data aur wo data jis par gun ne fire kiya hain
uske beech ke difference ko kahtein hain.

28. Inme shamil hain :-

(a) Concentrations of line (Column 20). Enter to nearest 5 min.

(b) Position Correction (Column 22). Enter to nearest 25 meters.

(c) Indl corrn OP line aur elevation dono ke liye order karta hain. Enter to
nearst 5 min and 25 m.

(d) Line aur displacement guns ko specific points par during linear
concentration par direct karne ke liye kaam mein aata hain.

(e) Gun Corrections. Nearest minute me enter karte hain.

29. Conc para 28(a) mein entry nahi hoga yadi concentration FFE mein shamil nahi
hain ya OP ne order diya hain, “Record as Tgt P1234 Concentrate”. Yadi guns ko
concentrate convention se kiya gaya hain to bhi concentration ki entry nahi hogi.

30. Column 21 ka istemal high angle fire mein hongi (section 83). Column 23 bina
calibrating sight ya bina gun rule wale eqpt ke liye hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
308
31. Entry kiye hue shooting correction badli nahi hoga except QE laying aur high
angle fire mein change hoga.

32. Apne own Tps ki movement ki wajah se unsafe nominated tgt ke record ko red
line se struck kiya jayega.

Reduced Grid References

33. Mike ya Higher tgts ko record karte samay ranging bty ka centre to centre data
istemal karke reduce GR nikala jata hain. Grid ref ko adjt aur doosri bty’s ko circulate
kiya jata hain aur her bty apne reduced centre to centre data prepare kar leti hain.

34. Is liye ek recorded tgt ke kewal ek GR hota hain aur dubara engagement ke
samay fire concentration majboot hona chahiye.

35. Ranging battery ko niminlikhit tariqe se define kiya jata hain;-

(a) Agar ranging ya registration ho chuki ho, yeh target par ranging ki jane wali
pehli battery hoti hain.

(b) Agar target ranging ke bina engage kiya gaya ho , tab HQ Arty Bde aur
adjutant jarurat parne par ek regiment aur battery ko target record jari karne ko
bolte hain.

Passing Target Records

36. Target record command poston ke beech column by column pass kiye jayenge.
Data bhejne wala operator IAB 548 se data parta hain aur data prapt karne wala
operator is data ko IAB 548 mein likhta hain aur is data ko check back karta hain.

SECTION 75- RECORDING A TARGET

1. Har ek command post ke pas duplicate target record books hoti hain, lekin kisi bhi
gun position par sirf main command post wale use karte hain.alternative command post
se target ke liye ek alag target record book istemal ki jayegi.

2. Agar reserve command post par kaam se ya main command post se targets
engage karne par naye records milne chahiye, to dono command posts ke beech full
detail pass ki jani chahiye taki ek up-to-date record maintain kiya ja sake.

3. GPO ki jimmewariaen is prakar se hain ;-

(a) IAB 548 se sambandhit sare kam par ek common sense visual check
rakhna aur is baat ki pushti karna ki independent check kiye gaye hain.

(b) GPO ki battery se Mike aur Higher targets ke liye jo data originate ho raha
hain, use adjutant aur dusre GPOs ko pass karna. Pass kiye jane wale data mein
column 1-10,17,or 18 ‘as fired’ records ke liye pass kiye jayenge aur column 1-8
‘reduced targets ‘ ke liye pass hote hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
309
(c) Yeh ensure karna ki command post ke beech full aur ‘up-to-date’ records
pass kiye gaye hain.

(d) Change of grid order kiye jane par , naye data ki determination aur uski
entry ko supervise karna.

(e) Safety ka dhayan rakhna.

Targets on which Battery has Fired

4. Is section mein low angle fire aur calibrating sights ya gun rule ka istemal assume
kiya gaya hain.

5. Agar ranging ek battery se ki ja rahi thi , ya battery ko ranging battery nominate

kiya gaya tha , to ‘fired data ‘, ‘reduce’ kiya jata hain aur reduced data circulate kiya jata
hain. Agar battery ranging battery nahi thi , tab fired data record kiya jata hain, lekin koi
bhi further action nahi liya jata jab tak ki adjutant se GR ya ranging battery nahi mil jati,
jab ki ek reduced entry ki jati hain.

6. Ek target jo ki battery se registered kiya gaya hain aur record ke liye order kiya
gaya hain, usse deal karne ki drill niche is prakar se de gaye hain;-

(a) GPO ‘Record as Target’ ke order milne par guns ko ‘Record as Target -----
----- letter and number’ order karta hain.

(b) No. 1 se report milne per, GPO us report ko last ordered data se check
karta hain. Agar koi report disagree karta hain toh GPO apne aap ko satisfy kar
leta hain ki yeh report accurate record hain sight setting ki. Agar koi galti hain toh
GPO us ki report OP ko deta hain aur phir yeh OP officer per depend karta hain ki
woh offending gun ke report ko accept karta hain ki nahin.

(c) Jaise hi GPO sabh report se satisfy ho jata hain woh observer ko inform
karta hain. “Target, ________ (letter & number)recorded”.

(d) Sabhi TA fired data ki entry karte hain column 1,2 and 6 to 10.

(e) Sabhi TA center to center data aur shooting corrections ko nikalte hain,
agar zaruri hain toh sare TA ka data deduce kiya hua bilkul same hona chahiye
aur badme check karke column 12 se 18 aur 20 se 24 me enter karna chahiye.

(f) Kam chalta rehta hain IAFB 917 aur fired data ko independently reduce
karte hain. Check kiya jata hain ser. 8 me ( limit 5 min aur 25 mtr). Uske bad arty
bd per GR nikali jaati hain use plot karke jo ki reduced bg aur range hain. Mike tgt
aur higher tgt ki ht, map se padi jaati hain. Ht aur GR col. 9 me bhari jaati hain.

(g) Koi bhi ek ht (f) se accept ki jaati hain aur ser10-13 ke IAFB 917 mein
independently Mike aur higher tgt ke liye record hota hain. Agar koi adjustment
false angle of sight ke liye nahin hain toh ek data ser, 8 me se col12 se 14 aur ek
GR aur ht col 3,4 aur 5 col 6 aur 15 me complete kiya jata hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
310
(h) Agar ser 13 indicate karta hain ki range me adjustment chahiye toh do TA
complete 14 se 33 independently shuru karte hain aur ek data par agree karke
ser 8,9 aur 13 me bharte hain.

(j) Ser 35, 36 check kiya jata hain aur ek data ko IAB 548 me enter kiya jata
hain. IAB 548 ke col 12 aur 13 me nearest 5 min aur col 14 me nearest 25m tak
record karte hain.

Note:- Jab bhi IAB 548 ke col 12 aur 13 me entry hoti hain to wahan nearest mils me
hogi.

7. Agar observer tgt ko record target grid correction par record karna chahta hain
toh GPO, No 1 ki report ko check karega jis per last round fire hua tha aur correction
laga kar center to center data par record karega.

8. Jab tgt ki reduced GR mil jaati hain toh bty command post responsible hoti hain
observer ko report dene ke liye.

“Tgt……(letter and number) GR……. HT……….”

Tgt ordered to be recorded as fired

9. Agar order kiya gaya hain tgt ko record karne ke liye “as fired” per toh tarika para
6 (a) se (d) ke upper ka liya jaayega aur additional entry “ as fired” ke col 7 me bhari
jaayegi.

(a) Dono TA same data ko independently deduce kar ke “as fired” GR per
check karte hain woh limit me hain ya nahin (20m Easting aur Northoing) aur ek
ans ko col 3 aur 4 me enter karte hain.

(b) Ht independently calculate ki jaati hain. Fired range aur angle of sight ki
agreed ht ko col 5 me enter kiya jata hain. Airburst shoot fuze 213 ke sath Ht
calculate ki jaati hain tgt ki true angle of sight per.

(c) Col 1-10 aur 17-18 agar applicable hain toh circulate kiya jaayega adjutant
ko aur doosri btys mein.

(d) Fired data ko reduce kiya jaayega jaise hi time milega aur fired record ko
hata diya jata hain 2 hrs ke bad.

(e) Jaise hi reduced data available hota hain use col 1 se 8 me enter karo.

10. Registeration of concentration. Uniform and higher tgt.- fired GR ko nilkaal kar
bty se ranging check ko doosri bty ko circulate karo.

Recoding a Tgt from Outside Source

11. Tgt ka record doosre source se inme se ek tarike se record kiya jata hain.

(a) GR, with No and description, ek observer se yaa task table ka ser. Yaa tgt
list se.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
311
(b) Reduced ya as fired tgt record ranging bty se ya adjutant se agar tgt.
Divisional ya higher tgt hain.

12. Sabhi halaton mein dono TA ne milke target record ko complete karte hain, jo ki is
prakar hain :-

(a) Details mili hui col 1se 8 me reduced data ke liye ya col 1 se 10 aur 17 se
18 fired data ke liye.

(b) Dono TA independently center to center data calculate karte hain.

(i) Bg aur range accurately jahan tak sambhav hain.

(ii) Angle of sight sabse choti value ki jo sight per set ho sakti hain.

(c) Yeh data check kiya jata hain aur limit 10min bg 5min AOS aur 25m range
ke liye.Ek data accept karke col 12 13 aur 14 me enter kiya jata hain. Reduced
GR per NR correction calculate hoti hain check hoti hain aur enter kiya jata hain
col 15 mein.

(d) Agar zarrori hain toh shooting correction work out hoti hain aur center to
center data per accept checked aur enter kiya jata hain col 20 aur 24 main.
Shooting correction pehle baatai hui accuracy ke adhar per enter ki jaati hain.

SECTION 76- QE LAYING AUR HIGH ANGLE TARGET KE RECORDS

General

1. Jab guns high angle fire kar rahe hon aur gun rules available nahi ho toh fired
data recording aur reduction mein kuch badlav hote hain. Lekin, GR se target record
bharne ke tarike mein koi badlav nahi hota. Isme bearing, angle of sight, range aur
shooting corrns shamil hote hain.

2. Is data ka istemaal predicted data aur gun corrns tgt ko re-engage karne ke liye
jarooratanusar istemaal mein laya jata hain.

QE laying Low Angle Fire Bina Gun Rules Ke

3. Nos 1 reports(IAFB 878). Nos1 ke dwara di gayi reports ke khaas features:-

(a) Angle of Sight guns ko report nahi ki jaati, sivaye ke jab clino laying by
guns normal laying ho aur sights apne aap drift compensate kare.

(b) Gun corrn report ki jaati hain(Serial F).

(c) Serial H mein field clinometer se ya other laying instrument se read kiya
gaya angle aur agar koi index error hain to usko bhi report kiya jata hain. Is
elevation mein Serial F ka gun corrn aur index error ka corrn shamil hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
312
4. Fired data ka record Jab bty ne tgt ki ranging kar li hain aur sari guns FFE kar
chuki hain to records ki entry column 1,2,6,10,14,16,18,22 aur 23 mein ki jaati hain.

5. Entry ka tarika is prakar hain:-

(a) Individual elevation se index error minus karne par QE milta hain. QE se
gun corrn minus kare. Ye apko last elevation to the guns dega jo center to center
range hain. Range aur elevation ko coln 14 aur 16 mein aur A/S to tgt ko Coln 13
mein likhe. Coln 18 mein ranging gun ka number aur uska QE(index error adjust
karne ke bad) posn corrn aur gun corrn minus karke likhe. Coln 22 mein gun
corrn ka posn corrn element aur indl rg corrn plus karke likhe.

(b) Col 23 mein, Col 16 ke elevation ko QE se minus karke QE likhe.ye drill

Mike ya higher tgts hone par adjutant dwara rging bty nominate karne aur follow
kare.

(c) Agar bty ne ranging ki ho aur FFE na kiya ho toh Col 23 mein entry nahi ki
jaati.

6. Col23 ke shooting corrns 2 hr tak lagu hain. Iske bad naye gun corrn calculate
kare. Isme posn corrn shamil indl rg correction shamil ho jo ki gun correction ka element
hota hain.ho.

7. Reduced Record. Reduction ki prakriya fired QE minus posn corrn(center to

center QE of ranging gun Coln18) par adharit hain.

8. Reduction mein MV corrn aur A/S ka adjustment hota hain jo rg adjust karta hain.

9. Reduced record normal tarike se banaya jata hain.

High Angle Fire

10. Jab ki Tgt recording ke kuch details H/A fire mein laying ke lie use hote hain, yeh
feature laying ke sare tarike mein ek samman hain. Yeh is prakar hain.

(a) Column 2 mein H/A likhen.

(b) Tgt engage karte samay, A of S aur NR, False A of S mein shamil hain.
Isliye NR corrn column 15 istemal nahin hota. Column 13 mein False A of S
likhen par yeh sirf fired data pe lagoo hain aur 2 ghante tak fired data re engage
kar sakte hain. True yah map A of S bhi coln 13 mein likhe jaati hain, reduction
prakriya mein istemaal ke liye.

(c) Colm 13 mein true A of S, false A of S adjst karne ke bad final reduction
par record ki jaati hain. Column 5 mein reduced height likhen.

(d) Reduced data se re prediction recorded true A of S, center to centre range

aur posn corrn par aadharit hain. Reprediction hone par fresh gun corrn calculate
karein kyunki C of M change hone ke kaaran inme kaafi antar aa jata hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
313
Column 13 aur 14 mein reduced centre to centre data record elevation ke liye
karein.

(e) Fired data re engagement ke liye, elevation aur individual shooting aur gun
corrn ko hamesha record karen agar gun rule naa ho to.

11. Fired Data. Method of laying ke kaaran huye tgt record variation sirf fired data
pe asar dalte hain.

12. Laying with gun rule. Fired record karne ka tarika low angle fire ki tarah hi
hain. No1 sight ke A of S ya gun rule aur posn corrn aur range report karte hain. Inhe
Column 13, 14 aur 22 mein shamil kiya jata hain. Woh QE jis par gun ne fire kiya hain
bhi report kee jati hain, jise GPO gun data reduce karne mein istemaal karta hain aur
Column 18 mein entry karta hain. Column 13 mein GPO false A of S, True A of S record
karta hain. True A of S ka istemaal “as fired” height calculation mein hota hain.

13. Laying with CDSA . No 1 ki report mein TE scale pe lagaai hui false TE,
index error corrected QE aur sight clinometer pe set ki hui A/S shamil hoti hain. Fired
data ke elevation element aur shooting corrn mein nimnlikhit shamil hain:-

(a) Column 13. True A/S.

(b) Column 14 . Centre to centre rg.

(c) Column 17. Col 14 ke corresponding rg ka false TE.

(d) Column 18. Ranging gun ka number aur QE (Position correction

nikal kar).

(e) Column 21. Numbers 1 dwara report ki gayi A/S. Yeh re-engagement ke
dauran fired data ke sath A/S ke taur par di jati hain, isliye yeh asliyat me A/S ki
correction nahi hain.

(f) Column 22. Column 14 ki ranges me farak aur har gun ki apni range, jo
ki posn/displacement corrections tatha observer dwara order ki gayi koi indl
corrections entry kartehain.

Gun Rules ke bina QE Dwara Laying

14. Yeh heading un sab cases ko cover karta hain jisme Number 1 range report nahi
karte hain par usme yeh shamil hain:-

(a) Serial (f) me report kiye gaye Gun correction.

(b) Serial (h) me report kiye gaye field clinometer ki readings aur index error
ke corrections ya elevation scale ki readings.

15. Fired aur shooting ke corrections ke elevation elements me nimnlikhit detail hogi
:-

(a) Column 13. True A/S.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
314
(b) Column 14. Centre to centre range.

(c) Column 16. Range se milti AP ya TE.

(d) Column 18. Ranging gun ka number aur QE (Position correction nikal
kar).

(e) Column 22. Column 14 ki ranges me farak aur har gun ki apni range, jo ki
posn / displacement corrections tatha observer dwara order ki gayi koi indl
corrections hain.

(f) Column 23. Column 16 ki elevation me farak aur QEs (field clinometer ki
readings se index error ki corrections nikal kar) Nos 1 se report ki gayi.

SECTION 77 – ADJUTANT KE TARGET RECORDS

1. Adjt sabhi regt aur bade tgts ka record Section 73 me bataye gaye tarike se
rakhta hain. Wah sirf Column 1 se 8, aur Column 1 to 10, 17 ya 18, agar “as fired” grid
ref ki case jaise applicable ho to.

2. Adjt bahar ki unit se mile tgt records ko IAB 548 me enter karta hain par tgt liston
ko file karta hain.

3. Sabhi batteries ko jaruri details pass karega, aur agar regt ne koi divisional ya
independent arty bde aur higher targets ko registered karne par unka grid reference HQ
arty bde of the divisional ya independent arty bde ko pass karega.

4. Change of Grid hone par section 79 ke mutabik drills follow kiya jayega.

SECTION 78 – CHANGE OF GRID

General

1. Initial deployment aur theatre grid ke estblishment ke beech hone wale survey
operations ka sequence chapter 11 main diya gaya hain.jab naye grid ka data milta hain
tab “change of grid” ki karwai ki jaati hain. Ismain nimnlikhit batein ho sakti hain :-

(a) Purani grid ke sabhi fixed points ke naye coordinates ka deduction aur
guns ke orientation main antar.

(b) Un sabhi targets ke aye GR ka deduction jinke current grid references

purane grid par hain.

(c) Un sabhi targets ke naye centre to centre data ka deduction jinke grid
references pehle se hi nayi ya upar GR par hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
315
RSO’s ki Zimmedariyan

2. RSO ki duties AT III,9/76 main hain.Agar Regimental ya higher grid par badlav ka
nirnay hota hain to RSO grid north ki bearing main zaroori badlav ko calculate karta hain
aur har battery area ke kam se kam ek point ke coordinates naye grid par deta hain,yeh
preferably battery centre hona chahiye.

3. Yeh change diye gaye samay par regiment ki sabhi batteries dwara carry out
honge aur change ke orders advance mein jari hona chahiye taki zaruri karwai ki ja
sake.

4. Yeh orders nimnlikhit ko shamil karte hain

(a) Samay jispar change ki karwai honi hain

(b) Centre of arc bearing main hone wala koi badlaav.

(c) Battery area ke kisi fixed point ke coordinates regimental grid par,eg-
“battery change to regimental/divisional/theatre grid at ……………hours. Bearing
59 degrees 30 minutes,record as bearing 60 degrees,amend RO’s and old grid
target records more 30 minutes.Coords battery centre E 31520,N 44115 Ht 550
metres”.

GPO ki Zimmedariyan

5. GPO guns ko change ke samay bearing main kisi jaroori badlav ka order deta
hain aur battery director form par RO angles main badlav tatha sabhi targets ke target
records main badlav ka zimmedar hota hain. Woh BC aur OP offr ko inform karta hain.

Target Records ka Amendment

6. Galtiyon se bachne ke liye battery CPs target records ke amendment ko nirdeshit

karne wale principle ko achchhe se samajhna zaroori hain.

7. Change of grid se :-

(a) Fixation ka change ho sakta hain.

(b) Orientation ka change ho sakta hain.

(c) Orientation aur fixation dono ka change.

Fixation ka change

8. Agar Bty Cetre ka fixation mein change hain, to Arty Board’s ko naya grid data
pey set up kiya jata hain aur tgt records per amendments kiya jata hain:-

(a) Bty mein register kiya Huwa targets. Bearing, A of S aur range mein
koi change nahi hain, lekin target ka GR fresh deduce kiya jayega, iska wajah hain
bty centre ka co-ordinates ka change.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
316
(b) Naya or Higher Grid pe registered target. Target ke GR koi change
nahi hain, kyoki target already naya or higher grid pe hain. Old targets ke liye
record kiya huwa centre to centre data, incorrect hain aur battery centre se naya
co-ordinates deduce kiya jata hain.

Orientation mein change

9. Agar sirf guns ka orientation change hota hain to, arty board mein koi alteration
ka zarurat nahi hain, kyoki dhono grid pey bty centre ka position same hain, sirf target
records pe amendment kiya jata hain:-

(a) A Bty mein register kiya huwa targets. A of S and range mein koi
change nahi hain. Column 12 RSO’s ke message ke hisab se change kiya jayega.
Bearing ka change hone se, target ka GR bhi change kiya jata hain.

(b) Naya ya Higher Grid pey registered target. Centre to Centre data aur
GR mein koi alteration nahi hain. Change of Grid se guns target ke taraf aur
closely direct ho jate hain.

Fixation and Orientation mein change

10. Agar fixation aur orientation mein change kiya jata hain tho, Para 8 aur 9 mein
bataya gaya Operations ko carry out karna hain.

Targets Registered by Other Units

11. Same grid pe other fire units se register kiya huva targets pe same effect hota
hain jo targets bty mein kiya jata hain, lekin deduce kiya huwa naya GR ko registering
by ka GPO circulate karta hain.

12. Neeche ka examples un actions ka outline hain jho change of grid pe order kiya
jata hain. Registered targets ke sath, A of S aur range ko bhi adjust kiya jata hain. C of
G ka order milne par jo karwai hota hain uska bari mein aur registered targets hain to
uska A of S aur range ka fresh adjustment kaise karna hain, uski bari mein nichey
examples mein diya gaya hain.

(a) Targets Registered by the Battery.

TYPE OF GUNS ARTY TGT RECORDS EFFECT OF

CHANGE BOARD CHANGE
(i) No change in Bg, A/S Tgt and gun
Fixation only No Change Replot Bty & Range remain in same
centre (ii) Record new grid Relative posn
reference
(iii) Amend Coln (8)
Orientation Record Fresh No Change (i) AMEND BEARING
only Bearing (ii) AMEND GRID C OF A moves on
REFERENCE ground
(iii) AMEND COLN (8)
Fixation and Record Fresh Replot Bty (i) Amend Bearing
Orientation Bearing Centre (ii) Amend grid reference C OF A moves on
(iii) Amend Coln (8) ground
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
317
(b) Targets Received from Outside Source which are on the same Grid as, or a
Grid Higher then the New Grid.

TYPE OF GUNS ARTY TGT RECORDS EFFECT OF

CHANGE BOARD CHANGE
(i) Amend in Bg , A/S &
Fixation only No Change Replot Bty Range Tgt and gun do
Centre (ii) No Chane in Grid not remain in
Reference same relative
(iii) Amend Coln (8) posn

Orientation Record Fresh The change

only C/A Bearing No Change Nil directs the guns
more accurately
on the C of A
ordered.
Fixation and Record Fresh
Orientation Bearing Replot bty (i) Amend bearing, A/S Relative posn of
centre & Range guns & tgt
change

Note :- Target record ke battery centre page ko survey data ke mutabik amend
kiya jayega..

Change of grid ke dauran tgts ka engagement

13. Change of grid ke adesh milne ke turant bad GPO reserve CP ko nai grid per
badalne ka adesh deta hain aur tgt record ka kam karne ka adesh deta hain. Firing CP
purane grid per badle ke samay tak rehta hain aur sabhi engagement of tgts calls ko
jawab deta hain.

SECTION 79 - COMMAND POST ME CHANGE OF GRID KI DUTIES

1. Jab Change of grid ka adesh ata hain to neeche di duties ko Bty CP me kiya jata
hain:-

(a) Bty director se ROs ki readings ke record ko adesh anusar

badla jati hain, taki director ko kabhi bhi badli bearing per lagaya ja sake e.g

RO ki asli reading - 264 Degrees 30 Minutes

RSO se adesh - “Bearing 59 Degrees 30 Minutes, record

as Bearing 60 Degrees. Badlo ROs aur
purane grid tgt records more 30
Minutes”.

RO ki badli reading - 265 Degrees.

(b) Agar RSO ne sirf bty centre ke alawa bty area me kisi aur point ke co-
ordinates diye hain to bty centre ke fresh co-ordinates pata kiye jate hain aur IAB
548 me dale jate hain

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
318
(c) Change ke samay GPO guns ko adesh deta hain “Bearing 59 Degrees 30
Minutes, record as Bearing 60 Degrees”.

(d) Naye bty center ke GR ko dono Arty boards per plot kya jata hain, aur tgt
records ko Sec 71 ke anusar badla jata hain.

(e) Bty ke under registered regimental aur higher tgts ke badle records ko
RHQ aur dusre GPOs ko diya jata hain. Badla “as fired” data kisi bhi recorded tgt
“as fired” aur still current bhi diya jata hain.

Battery dwara register kiye gae targets

2. Battery dwara register kiye gae targets ka centre to centre data ek ek karke badla
jayega. Dono TA ek sath kam karenge. Tarika neeche diya hain :-

(a) Naye grid ko coln 8 me dalo.

(b) Nayi bearing jo ki badli hain, coln 12 me aur purani Aof S aur range ko
columns 13 aur 14 mein dalo.

(c) Naya record dono TA ke dwara pura kiya jayega. Kam har kadam per
check hoga.

3. Mountainous country mein ya change in orientation / fixation par reduced angle of

sight aur naya angle of sight mein agar difference 5 minutes se zayada ho tab
adjustment of range for false angle of sight kare.

4. Fired Data. Kise bhi current fied data ka bearing amend kare . Jab battery mein
regimental ya higher target ka “As fired “ data record kiya gaya hain aur ye data still
current hain tab ek fresh record ( Column 3,4,and 5) ko deduce aur circulate kare.

Targets Received From Outside Sources.

5. (a) Targets Aur Battery Same GR Par. Registering Bty ya RHQ se naya
GR milne par dono TA’s GR ko column 3, 4 aur 5 mein enter kare aur
independently fresh centre to centre data deduce kare. Is data ko check kare
aur record complete kare.

(b) Naye Ya Higher GR Ke Targets. Jab Arty Bd ko naya se plot kiya

gaya ho , record kiye gaya tgts ka naya range aur bearing check kare aur IAB
548 mein record kare. Old GR ke liye centre to centre data workout kare aur
change karne ka order de.

6. Column 20 aur 24 mein record kiye hua individual shooting corrections naya aur
purane GR ke liya saman rahate hain.

Drill In the Command Post

7. *(a) Bty centre ka naya GR IAFB 548 mein enter kare.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
319
(b) IAFB 548 ke Column 8 mein tgt ke samne naya GR ka name old grid data
ke niche enter kare.

*(c) Arm range aur Bearing Arc hata de.

*(d) Naya Bty center ka GR arty board par plot kare.

*(e) Agar Res CP available na ho to purane aur naya Bty centers ke grid
positions ke liye ‘Window’ banaye.

*(f) Purane bty center aur penciled arc ko mita de.

*(g) Naye grid position par Arm range aur Bearng arc ko set kare.

*(h) Board ko check karva Le.

*(j) IAFB 548 ke column 12 mein har target ka naya bearing enter kare.

@(k) Agar false angle of sight ke liye range ka adjustment zaruri na ho to

column 13 mein original angle of sight aur column 14 mein original range enter
kare .

@(l) Naye grid data par targets plot kare.

@(m) Target ka naya GR padein. Dono TA’s ke beech 20 m Easting aur

Norhthing ka agreement hona chahiye, agreed GR column No.3 , 4 aur 5 mein
bharein.

(n) Change ke liye diye gaye order ke waqt IAFB 548 se purana data mita diya
jata hain.

NOTE:- Jab bhi change of grid order kiya jata hain serial no (a) se (n) ki drills ki
jaati hain. Agar sirf fixation change hoti hain to @ dwara mark kiye gaye serial ko chod
dein aur original bearing dobara likhein.Jab sirf orientation change hoti hain to,* dwara
mark kiye gaye serial ko choda jata hain.

8. Change Of Grid Nikalna. Agar gun area main reserve CP maujud hain to
change of grid ka sara kaam wahan par hoga. Is kaam ke liye reserve CP main target
record ki ek book bheji jayegi. Firing ke dauran arty board change honge aur baki
boards replot honge aur reserve CP data ko up to date karegi.

Change of Grid aur Duties of ADJT

9. Target Naye ya Higher Grid par ho. In targets ke liye adjt koi action nahi leta
hain.kyunki unka GR change nahi hota hain.

10. Target jo Doosri Grid par ho. Jaise hi originating battery ya Arty Bde HQ se
badla hua GR milta hain OP offr usse record kar leta hain. Wo is GR ko baki sabhi
Bty’s main bhi paas kar deta hain. Div ya higher tgt ke case main yeh tgt Arty Bde HQ
main bhi paas hotein hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
320
SECTION 80 – TARGET RECORD EXAMPLE

General

1. Nimnlikhit diye gaye example IAB 548 ko bharne ka tariqa batatein hain. Yeh
examples IFG 105/37 ko use karte hue banaye gaye hain:-

(a) Part A . Calibrating sights aur gun rules ka prayog karte hue low
angle fire karne par R Bty ne yeh records banaye.

(b) Part B . R Bty CP main banaye gaye QE laying aur high angle
fire records.

PART A - LOW ANGLE FIRE

R 3046 – Simple Battery Target

2. Battery ne HE se tgt engage kiya. Left tp ko OP ne ADD 100 ka aadesh diya .

“Record as target” ke aadesh par GPO ne no. R 3046 allot kiya No. 1 ki target record
report :-

(a) Tgt letter & No R-3046 R-3046 R-3046 R-3046 R-3046 R-3046
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 117
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N
Charge 3
(d) Bearing 15030’ 15030’ 15030’ 15045’ 15045’ 15045’
(e) Angle of Sight 15’E
(f) Position or Gun Corrn
(g) Corrector or Fz setting
(h) Ele on sight or Gun 6650 6650 6650 6725 6725 6725
rule

3. Nos 1 ki target record report GPO ke centre to centre data se agreed hain. No 3
ranging tha.

M 2124 Troop Target Registration

4. Battery ne standard linear concentration ke centre point ko left troop ke dwara

register kiya hain. Number 4 ranging gun tha aur standard ammunition charge 4 istemal
kiya gaya tha.

5. Nimnalikhit concentration aur position correction order kiya gaya tha.

Number 4 Number 5 Number 6

M 10 minutes M 20 minutes M 30 minutes
+ 25 meters - 100 meters
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
321
6. Shoot ke akhir me observer ne order kiya “ Record as Target M 2124. Liner 400,
bearing 87°.

7. Nos 1 ke target record report check karne par sahi paya gaya. GPO ranging gun
ke data se centre point ka data deduce karta hain jo is prakar hain:-

(a) Bearing, A of S and Range Number 313° 15’20’ E 8,425

4 ne report kiya

(b) Concentration and position correction. M 10 +25

(c) Centre to centre data (a) minus (b) 312°50’ 8, 400

8. Target thik R 3046 ki tarah hi record kiya gaya hain. TAs dwara linear
displacement correction ko nikala aur check kar ke nearest 5 minute aur 25 meters me
columns 20 aur 22 me record karte hain, GPO columns 1 to 8 se reduced data ko
Adjutant tatha anya GPOs ko pass karta hain. Fired data ko do ghante ke bad strike
through karte hain.

R 4253 – HE213 Airburst

9. Observer ne battery ko target par ranged kiya hain, height of burst ke liye ranged
karke aur A of S ko raise ka order dekar MPB ko adjust kiya jata hain. Guns observer
dwara concentrate kiya gaya hain. Shoot ke samapan me observer order karta hain
“Record as target R 4263.” No 1 ki target record report is prakar hain, NO 4 ranging gun
thi.

(a) Tgt letter & No R-4253 R-4253 R-4253 R-4253 R-4253 R-4253
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 213
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N
Charge 3
(d) Bearing 4050’ 50 5010’ 5025’ 5040’ 5050’
(e) Angle of Sight 15’E
(f) Position or Gun Corrn - -25 +50 - - +25
(g) Corrector or Fz setting 118 118 118 118 118 118
(h) Ele on sight or Gun rule 8,000 7,975 8,050 8,000 8,000 8,025

10. Fired centre to centre data,Bg 5deg 20 min, range 8000 tha. Fired data recorded
with raised A/S jo ki column No 13 aur corrector jo ki column no 17 mein record kiya
jayega. Samay milte hi jaldi se jaldi data reduce kiya jayega jisme raised A/S ko usi
amount se lower kiya jayega, jisse ki reduced data standard ammunition se har prakar
se sambandhit hoga. Fired data ko do ghante ke bad kaat diya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
322
U 9678 – From a Tgt List

11. Dono TAs tgt list se grid ref nikal kar bharenge aur alag alag centre to centre data
aur shooting corrections workout karenge(jarurat padne par). Check karne ke bad one
set of data chuna jayega aur bhar diya jayega. Ammunition standard hoga aur charge
GPO dwara chuna jayega.

M 5092- Mike Tgt Linear

12. Battery ne standard ammunition use karke Mike target linear 400, Bg 242 deg
mein hissa liya. “P” Bty ranging Bty thi aur sabhi batteries ne fire for effect pa engage
kiya. Observer ke orders “Record as tgt M 5092”. Nimnlikhit target record report ke
udaharan hain.

(a) Tgt letter & No M-5092 M-5092 M-5092 M-5092 M-5092 M-5092
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 117
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N/S
Charge 4
(d) Bearing 228010’ 227 50’ 227 30’ 227025’
0 0
22705’ 226055’
(e) Angle of Sight 30’E
(f) Position or Gun Corrn - -25 +50 - - +25
(g) Corrector or Fz setting 118 118 118 118 118 118
(h) Ele on sight or Gun 8900 8875 8950 9050 9000 9075
rule

13. Centre to centre data 227025’ aur range 8975 hain.

14. Pichhla centre to centre Bg aur range use karke fired data record kiya jata hain.
Column No 7 mein “P Reg” aur date and time enter kiya jata hain. “P” battery se reduced
grid ref milne par TAs reduced centre to centre data nikalte hain, check karte hain aur ek
set enter kar dete hain.

M 6695 – Doosri Battery se pass ki hui “As Fired” Grid Ref

15. “Q” Bty ne tgt M6695 ko record kiya aur “As fired “ tgt rec circulate kiya.Dono TAs
fired centre to centre data circulate karte hain aur ek set data enter kar dete hain. Sath
sath Q bty reduced data circulate karti hain aur R bty CP reduced record complete karti
hain. Fired data 2 ghante bad kaat diya jata hain.

PART B- QE LAYING AND HIGH ANGLE FIRE

Target R 4659 QE Laying ,Low Angle ,Using Gun Rules

16. Battery ko target record kaene ka hukum mila. No 3 ranging gun thi. No1 ki target
record report is prakar hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
323

(a) Tgt letter & No R-4659 R-4659 R-4659 R-4659 R-4659 R-4659
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 117
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N
Charge 3
(d) Bearing 11030’ 11030’ 11030’ 11030’ 11030’ 11030’
(e) Angle of Sight 20’E
(f) Position or Gun Corrn +50 -100 -100 - +50 -50
(g) Corrector or Fz setting
(h) Ele on sight or Gun 6150 6100 6000 6100 6150 6050
rule

R 3541

17. Yeh udaharan darshata hain ki tgt gun rule ke hone par kaise engage kiya
jayega. Ranging gun aur data ko nahi badla gaya hain:-

(a) Tgt letter & No R-3541 R-3541 R-3541 R-3541 R-3541 R-3541
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 117
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N
Charge 3
(d) Bearing 11030’ 11030’ 11030’ 11030’ 11030’ 11030’
(e) Angle of Sight 20’E
(f) Position or Gun Corrn 1014’ 49’ 1031’ 34’ 9’ -41’
(g) Corrector or Fz setting
(h) Corrn for index error +3’
(j) Ele on sight or Gun 19015’ 18050 19038’ 18035’ 1807’ 17020’
rule

18. Arty board se pari gayi aakhri range 6100 thi aur range table se pari gayi uski AP
18 degrees 1 minute thi. A of S 20 minutes E thi.

19. No 1 ke tgt record report ko check karne ke liye GPO calculation karta hain.

Gun Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
(1) Ele on sights 19015’ 18050 19035’ 18035’ 1807’ 17020’
(2) Corrn for index error +3’ -3’
(3) QE (1 minus 2) 19015’ 18050 19032’ 18035’ 18010’ 17020’
(4) Gun corrn 1014’ 49’ 1031’ 34’ 9’ -41’
(5) Centre to centre Ele(3-4) 1801’ 1801’ 1801’ 1801’ 1801’ 1801’

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
324
20. Agar report sahi payi jati hain toh serial 5 ki elevation column 16 mein aur uski
range 6100 column 14 mein bhari jati hain.

21. Ranging gun ka No aur QE jissko ki index error ke liye adjust kiya hua hain aur
position correction nikali hui hain, column 18 mein bhari jati hain. Reduction karte hue
yeh entry istemal ki jati hain.
22. Har gun ki shooting corrn column 23 mein bhari jati hain.Yeh corrn QE ke bich ka
antar hain jisse index error corrn hatai jati hain aur column 16 ki elevation hain,do
ghanto ke bad inhe kat diya jayega. Column 1,2 aur 6 se 13 tak aam tarike se pure kiye
jate hain. Column 22 me gun corrn ki posn corrn bhari jati hain.
Reduced Data

23. Column 12,13,18 se reduced data nikala jata hain. Reduced data aam tarike se
record hota hain.Column 16 mein koi entry nahi hoti.
Tgt R 4660 Ko Gun Rule Ke Sath High Angle Mein Engage Karna

24. Bty ki saari gun ne ek tgt engage kiya . NO 3 gun ranging gun thi. Jab “record as
tgt R 4660 “ order aaya to NO 3 ko apne tgt record mein QE dalne ko kaha gaya. Yeh
QE reduction mein kaam laya jata hain.

25. GPO ko milne waali report yeh hain

(a) Tgt letter & No R-4660 R-4660 R-4660 R-4660 R-4660 R-4660
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 117
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N
Charge 2
(d) Bearing 9015’ 9015’ 9015’ 9015’ 9015’ 9015’
(e) Angle of Sight 10’D
(f) Position or Gun Corrn +50 - - -100 - +50
(g) Corrector or Fz setting
(h) Ele on sight or Gun 6050 6000 6000 5900 6000 6050
rule

26. Isske sath No 4 QE 56º7’ aur index error corrn -3’ report karta hain.

27. IAB 548 mein ki gayi fired data entry yun hogi:-
Column 1 se 12 ---- ---- --- aam normal tariqa
Column 13 --- ---- ---- true aur false A of S.

Column 14 .... ..... ..... Centre to centre range.

Column 18 ..... ..... ..... Ranging gun ka number aur QE(adjusted

for index error and position correction).
Position correction element 47'.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
325
Column 22 .... ..... ..... Position or individual corrections.

The Reduced Entry

28. Column 13 me (true) A of S . Column 15 me koi entry nahin, kyon ki non-rigidity

false A of S me included hain.

Field Clinometer ki madad se Target R 3561 High Angle me engage karna

29. Gun rule nahin hone par usi target ko record karna, yah usi data aur usi ranging
gun par adharit hain :-

(a) Tgt letter & No R-3561 R-3561 R-3561 R-3561 R-3561 R-3561
(b) Number of Guns 1 2 3 4 5 6
(c) Ammunition HE
Shell incl wt marking 117
Fuze
Driving Band
Propellant N
Charge 2
(d) Bearing 9015’ 9015’ 9015’ 9015’ 9015’ 9015’
(e) Angle of Sight
(f) Position or Gun Corrn 36’ 1040’ -1027’ -3040’ 2021’ 48’
(g) Corrector or Fz setting
(h) Corrn for index error +3’ -31’
(j) Ele on sight or Gun 60020 61021’ 58017’’ 5607’ 6205’ 62032’
rule

30. Artillery board ka pichhla range 6,000 tha aur uske liye range table se
corresponding AP 59 degrees 44 minutes hain. Target ka (true) A of S 30’ E tha .

31. The GPO makes the following check against the Nos. 1 Target Record.

Gun Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
(1) Ele on sights 60020 61021’ 58017’’ 5607’ 6205’ 62032’
(2) Corrn for index error +3’ -3’
(3) QE (1 minus 2) 60020 61024’ 58017’’ 5604’ 6205’ 62032’
(4) Gun corrn 36’ 1040’ -1027’ -3040’ 2021’ 48’
(5) Centre to centre Ele(3-4) 59044’ 59044’ 59044’ 59044’ 59044’ 59044’

32. Reports ke sahi hone par is prakar entry ki jati hain :-

Column1 to 12 ..... .....As normal

Column13 .... ..... .....The true As of S.

Column14 .... ..... .....Centre to centre range.

Column16 .... ..... .....Centre to centre A of P or TE.

Column18 .... ..... The number of the ranging gun and

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
326
QE(adjusted for index error and position
correction).

Column22 ..... ..... ....Position or individual corrections.

Column23 ..... ..... .....Shooting correction for individual guns.

Change of Grid

33. Change of grid ke liye aadesh :-

“R Battery change to theatre grid at 1200 hours............... Amend ROs and old
grid target records more 20 minutes”.

34. Low Angle Fire ke udaharan - Part 1:- Target records mein following
amendments ki jayengi :-

(a) Targets R 3046 and M 2124 ke liye Column 12 “More 20 minutes” se

amend kiya gaya aur fresh deduced GR adjutant aur other batteries ko circulate
kiya gaya.

(b) Target R 4253 aur M 5092 jahan fired data 1200 hrs tak valid hain,Col12
More 20 mins se amend kiya jayega,aur fresh fired centre to centre data ko
regiment grid ke data ke niche enter kiya jayega. Columns 6 & 8 bhi pura kiya
jayega. T arget M 5092 ke case me fresh adesh milne par. 5092, theatre grid pe
fresh reduced grid Refrence milne par P bty se fresh centre to centre data work
out kiya jayega aur columns 3,4,5,6,8,12,13,14 line 4 me complete kiya jayega.

(c) Tgt M 6505 ke liye Q bty theatre grid pe reduced grid refrence milne par
fresh centre to centre data work out hoga aur line 3 me jaruri line complete hoga.

(d) Tgt U 9678 ke liye koi change nahi hoga, grid refrence pehle se theatre
grid pe hain.

35. Tgt record bharne ka example ,ek bade area tgt using MFDT bhi page No 286
and 287 me diya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
327

PART A TARGET RECORD IAFB 548

LETTER & DESCRIPTION & GRID REF F HOW GRID AMN CENTRE TO CENTRE DATA SHOOTING CORRCETIONS
NO REMARKS OR OBTAINED
R DATE &
TIME
EASTING NORTHING HEIGHT SHELL& FZ PROP BG A/S RANGE NR AP/TE CORR/FZ GUN LINE A/S RANGE AP/TE FZ SETTING
CH SETTING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0
R 3046 COY LOC F R Reg REGT HE 117 N3 15 30’ 15’E 6650 1
SWEEP 100 2668 4824 615 R 090840 REGT 1505’ 15’E 6825 5 2
2653 4819 615 R THEATRE 15025’ 15’E 6825 3
4 M 15’ 75
5 M 15’ 75
6 M 15’ 75

M 3124 TR F R Reg REGT HE 117 N/S 4 31305’ 20’E 8400 1 M 50’ 25

2462 4840 630 R 090915 REGT 312055’ 20’E 8325 10 2 M 20’ -50
0
2459 4836 630 R REGT 312 15’ 20’E 8325 3 M 10
4 25
5 L 35’ -50
6 L 40’

R4253 Pl in open F R Reg Regt HE 117 N3 5020’ 15’E 8000 1 L 30’ -

0
Conc 2600 4850 615 R 091020 Regt 5 40’ 15’E 8125 5 118 2 L 20’ -25
0
2596 4854 615 R THEATRE 6 15’E 8125 3 L 10’ 50
4 M 5’
5 M 20’
6 M 30’ 25

0
U9678 Def Loc 2588 4902 525 R U Tgt List THEATRE HE 117 N/S 4 342 20’ 20’E 8825 10 1 25
NO 1
2 -50
3
4 25
5 -50
6

M5092 Wood Linear 400 F P Reg Regt HE 117 N/S 4 227025’ 30’E 8975 1 M 45’ -75
0 0
Bg 242 2742 4860 555 R 091040 Regt 227 10’ 30’E 8875 12 2 M 25’ -100
0
F THEATRE 227 10’ 30’E 8975 3 M 5’ -25
0
227 20’ 30’E 8850 4 75
5 L 20’ 25
6 L 30’ 100

0
M6695 Coy Loc 2714 4912 600 F Q Reg Regt HE 117 N3 229 35’ 25’E 7975 1 25
09100
0
2717 4935 610 R As Fired Regt 229 20’ 25’E 7850 10 2 -50
2717 4929 610 R THEATRE 229040’ 25’E 7875 3
4 25
5 -50
6

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
328

PART A TARGET RECORD IAFB 548

LETTER & DESCRIPTION & GRID REF F HOW GRID AMN CENTRE TO CENTRE DATA SHOOTING CORRCETIONS
NO REMARKS OR OBTAINED
R DATE &
TIME
EASTING NORTHING HEIGHT SHELL& FZ PROP BG A/S RANGE NR AP/TE CORR/FZ GUN LINE A/S RANGE AP/TE FZ SETTING
CH SETTING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0
R 4659 Bunkers F R Reg REGT HE 117 N3 11 30’ 15’E 6100 1 50
0
Categoty C 2668 4223 630 R 091100 REGT 11 20’ 15’E 6325 10 2
3 -100
4
5 50
6 50

0 0
R 3541 Bunker F R Reg REGT HE 117 N3 11 30’ 20’E 6100 NO3 1 50 1 14’
QE
Clino Laying 2668 4223 630 R 091100 REGT 11020’ 20’E 6325 10 19008 2 - 49’
’
0
Category 3 100 1 31’
4 34’
5 50 9’
6 50 41’

0 0
R4660 Morter F R Reg Regt HE 117 N2 9 15’ 30’E 6000 59 44’ NO4 1 50
QE
0
H/A 2612 4138 695 R 091130 Regt 9 55’ 30’E 6275 56051 2 -
’
3
4 100
5
6 50

0 0
R3561 Morter H/A F R Regt Regt HE 117 N2 9 15’ 30’E 6000 59 44’ NO4 1 50 36’
QE
Clino Laying 2612 4138 695 R 091130 Regt 9055’ 30’E 6275 56051 2 - 1040’
’
0
3 1 27’
4 -100 -3040’
5 2021’
6 50 48’

0
U3990 Coy Loc 2847 4875 760 R U Tgt List THEATRE HE 117 N/S 4 230 4’ 40’E 9772@ 1 -75
No2
H8 2382 4860 2 -100
HT 750M
0
AXIS Bg 45 3 -25
J9j

4 75
5 25
6 100

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
329
CHAPTER VII

ESTIMATION OF MET CORRECTION

INTRODUCTION

1. Target per accurate predicted fire lane ke liye aur observed fire ke dauran
opening rd tgt ke paas ho, iske liye non std conditions ka correction map data per lagana
jaruri hain. Non std conditions main sab se imp corrn non std met condition ke hain. Is
ko pata karne ke tarike jo ki: datum pt, witness pt, met telegram, aur “rough and ready”
met aage discuss kiye hain.in sab tarikon main datum pt mtd sab se accurate aur
jyadatar use kiya jata hain.

2. Sec 81 main mtn trn main met corrn find karne aur application se sambandit
dikaton ka varnan kiya hain.

SECTION 81 – DATUM POINT

Introduction

1. Datum pt rg ka aim shooting se total corrns to map line aur rg jo ki C of M ki tarah

use ho sake.

2. Datum pt rg met telegram ke sthan per C of M data malum karne ke liye use hota
hain. Met telegram nahin hone, contours main adhik variation hone aur met data pe kam
barosa hone pe datum pt rg use kiya jata hain.

3. Datum pt rg se best result prapt kiye jaa sakte hain:-

(a) Datum pt ko engage karne aur tgt ko engage karne ke bech time ko kam
se kam rakhana.

(b) Datum pt ke bg, A of S, rg tgt ke bg, A of S, rg ke kareeb hone chahiye.

4. Single datum pt shoot ke results datum pt ke general area main aane wale tgts
per lagu hota hain. Group of tgt jo ek datum pt ki madad se cover na ho sake tab her
Group ke liye datum pt select kiya jayega.

5. Datum pt rg airburst aur ground burst dono ko cover karta hain. Dono process
lagbag saman hain aur dono main actual map bg aur rg ki tulana fired bg aur rg se ki
jati hain.

6. Gun se pt of burst ki map bg aur rg ko pata kiya ja sakta hain –

(a) Rg gun ka MPI kisi aise pt per adjust karna jis ka GR malum ho.

(b) Radar obsn ki madad her Group ka MPI/MPB fix karna.

7. MPI ya MPB ki posn ya pt jis par MPI adjest kiya jata hain use datum pt kahte
hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
330
8. Para 6(b) ke method ke anusar MPI ya MPB assess karne ke liye kam se kam 5
rd ka gp fire kiya jana chahiye.

Correctins Ka Swarup

9. Prevailing conditions me datum pt hit karne ke liye MPI aur MPB tak map bg aur
rg tatha ranging gun ki bg aur rg mein jo difference hain wah total line aur rg ki corrn ko
darshata hain. Nimn cheejen include hoti hain

Range Line
(a) C of M (rotn of earth corrn ke sath) (a) C of M (rotn of earth corrn ke
sath)
(b) Projectile corrn. (b) Deflection for drift
(c) NR corrn for A/S & rg to datum point (c) Rg gun aur datum point ke relative
svy mein aye error ke liye corrn
(d) Adopted Mv ke liye MV corrn
(e) Rg gun aur datum point ke relative
svy mein aye error ke liye corrn

10. Deduction of corrn ke process ke dauran (b), (c), (d) ko rg corrn se nikala jata
hain aur (b) line corrn se nikala jata hain. Resulting corrn ko line and rg “corrn at the
datum point” kahte hain.

Target ke engagement ke liye corrn ki application

11. Is “corrn at the datum point” ko lagane ke liye jo considerations hai:-

(a) Considerations:-

(i) Limits Bg 350 mils/20 degrees (rg gun to datum point).

(ii) Elevation 2000 m.

(iii) Ht 300m/1000 ft.

(b) Time interval kam se kam ho 2 ghante se jyada nahi

Ranging Gun Ke Alawa Guns Dwara Corrn Ka Use

12. Datum point ranging dwara nikali gayi corrn rg gun ke alawa anya gun ko lagu
hain jab:-

(a) Nature of guns, angle of fire (H/A ya L/A), charge, nature of propellant rg
gun aur anya gun ka same ho

(b) Anya gun caliberated hain aur ranging gun se same grid par hain.

(c) Anya gun rg gun se 2000m/yard 300m/1000feet (ht ke liye) limit mein hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
331
13. Yah datum limit kewal bataur margdarshan ke liye hain. Jarurat padne par local
arty cdr ke marji par ya prevailing met condn ke anusar nimn prakar se change ho sakti
hain

(a) Unstable met conditions ki surat mein , khas taur par long rg eqpt ke liye
limit ghatayi ja sakti hain.

(b) Stable met condn me limit badhyi ja sakti hain.

FIGURE 30 DATUM LIMITS

14. Figure 30 mein P bty ne bg 300 mils/ 17 degrees aur rg 8200m/yards par datum
point ‘D’ register kiya hain. Isliye P bty ke liye datum point corrn bg 6350 se 650 mils aur
357 se 37 degree, rg 6200 se 10200 m/yard ke limits ke dauran lagu hain. (area WXYZ).

15. Para 11 ki condition satisfy hone ki wajah se corrn Q bty ko circulate kiye ja sakte
hain, lekin R bty ka dist 2000m/yard se jyada hone ki wajah se R bty ko nahi kiya ja
sakta. Area (W’X’Y’Z’) mein yah corrn Q bty ko lagu hain corrn bg 6350 se 650 mils aur
357 se 37 degree , rg 6200 se 10200 m/yard ke limits ke dauran hain (as measured from
Q bty centre.

16. Shaded area ke andarwale tgt DP ‘D’ se ht ke liye +300m/1000ft ke limit mein
hain aur P bty dwara nikale gaye corrn ko lagakar kewal P aur Q bty dwara engage kiye
ja sakte hain.

17. Datum limits mortars aur guns ka ek saman hota hain.

Adjusting the MPI onto a point of known GR(Low Angle Fire)

18. shoot ko OP officer normal tarike se control karta hain,jo ki registration shoot ka
cry deta hain jab datum point par ground burst mil jata hain .Tgt description ”Datum
shoot” hota hain. Registration ke pure hone par OP officer GPO ko “Datum point”
kahakar indicate karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
332
19. Method of Laying. Normal method of laying of equipment use hota hain.QE jis
per gun laid hota hain ko end of the shoot par field clinometer ke madat se measure
karte hain.

20. Duties of the GPO. Ranging battery ka GPO nimnlikhit ke liye responsible hota
hain:-
(a) Ensure karta hain ki Datum point aur Tgts ka GR same grid me hain

(b) Jarurat parne par ,OP officer ko Datum point ka GR aur description bata
hain.

(c) Ranging gun ko nominate karta hain aur jahan tak ho sake standard gun
ko hi select karta hain.

(d) Amn aur propllent preperation ka order karta hain jise engagement of
targets me use karna hota hain.

(e) Tgts ka predicted Line, A of S and Range calculate karta hain.

(f) Calculate aur jarurat hone par Line aur Range corrections of Datum point
ko circulate bhi karta hain (corrected for charge temperature).

(g) Kisi tgt ke liye maujuda temperature par line aur range corrections
calculate karta hain. Jab bhi charge temperature standard se 10C se badalta hain
to datum corrections ka prediction karta hain.

Deductions of corrections at the Datum point (Low Angle Fire)

21. Line Correction. Datum point ka line correction, map bearing to the datum
point ko fired centre to centre bearing to the datum point me se substract karke nikalte
hain. Fired bearing ko drift correction thatha concentration ke liya adjust karte hain.

22. Range correction. Range correction at the datum point computation ya use of
angle of departure chart ke madad se nikalte hain, (DUAI 1/75).TE jispe gun fire hua QE
(as measured by field clinometer) se map angle of sight ko subtract karne se nikalte
hain. Yadi range table mein angle of projection hain to angle of projection jispe gun fire
hua ko jump aur QE ( as measured by field clinometer)ko add kar ke aur observed angle
of sight ko subtract karne se nikalte hain, (avashyak amendment Table XLIV mein kiya
jayega).

23. Range corresponding to TE aur AP, agar AP range table mein tabulated hain to
range ko adjust kar standard predicted horizontal range to the datum point nikalte hain.
Yeh true standard predicted horizontal range nahi hain kyunki isme C of M correction ke
alawa dusre corrections bhi hote hain jaise ki adopted MV ka correction ranging gun ka.
Practice mein yeh error ignore kiya jata hain. Map range ko standard predicted
horizontal range adjusted for position correction se subtract karke range correction to
the datum point nikalte hain.Table XLIII iska ek udhaharan deta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
333
TABLE XLIV - DEDUCTION OF CORRECTIONS AT THE DATUM POINT
(LOW ANGLE FIRE)

105MM IFG, HE 117, CH5, MV of Ranging Gun 601 M/S, CH TEMP 25 C

(1) (2) (3)

1 Map Horizontal distance from map or observing unit 12213M

2. Map angle of sight 31' E
3. Map bearing 3100 52'
4. Fired bearing 3100 10'
4a. Less concentration L 30'
4b. Drift Correction at range (1) L 37'
4c. Fired bearing less concentration (4 minus 4a) 3110 17'
or fired bearing less concentration and drift
correction (4 minus 4a + 4b)

5. Line correction (4c minus 3) MORE 25'

6. QE at which gun fired 250 11'
7. Jump -20'
8. Angle of departure (6 + 7) 240 51'
9. Map angle of sight (2) 31’E
10. Angle of projection (8 minus 9) 240 20'
11. Range corresponding to (10) 11708
12. MV variation at range (11) from table +212
“Variation in range for variations in MV”
13. Predicted horizontal range (13 + 14) 11920
14. Non rigidity variaion from Graph 'B' for range
(13) & AIS (2) -11
15. Predicted horizontal range (13+14) 11909
16. Projectile correction -
17. Standard predicted horizontal range (15 minus 16) 11909
18. Less position correction -15
19. Standard predicted horizontal range (Bty centre to DP) 11924
20. Ch temp variation* +67
21. SPHR (19+20) (plus ch temp variation) 11991
22. Map horizontal range 2213
23. Range Correction (21 minus 22) DROP 222

Notes. Method of working out charge temperature correction 105/37 IFG

(a) RT Page 182. From the tables for ranges ( to nearest 5 mtrs)
corresponding to met line number batata hain met line number nirbhar hain
MV aur SPHR par, 4.7 is case mein.

(b) RT Page 176. Met line number nikalne ke bad, corrn of

moment tables (+67) se charge temp ke badaulat hone wali variation
nikalo.

2. Limits. 10 min line ke liye aur 20 yds/mts range ke liye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
334
Target Engagement Keliye Correction Ka Application (Low Angle Fire).

24. Deduced kiya hua corrections woh correctios hain jo ki maujuda conditions mein
datum point ko hit karne ke liye chahiye. Isse jo range corrn, nikalta hain woh standard
charge temp par hain, agar charge temp standard se 10C se jyada vary karta hain,
datum correction maujuda charge temperature par predict kiya jayega. Eg.105/37 IFG
charge 4, range 9725, datum correction minus 100, Charge temp 250C, maujjuda datum
correction minus 144 hoga ( RT pages 170,172). Target engagement keliye jarurat hone
wala correction ko nikalne ka tariqua niche samjhaya gaya hain.

25. Single Datum Point.

(a) Line correction. Datum point par line correction ko datum limit ke ander
hi applicable mana jata hain aur ye sidhe target ke map line par apply hota hain.

(b) Range correction. Range correction appropriate map range ke khilap

C of M graph ke upar plot kia jata hain. 2000 mts/yds kam ya jyada map range
keliye range correction niche diya gaya formula se nikala jata hain:-

Datum point ko range correction X time of flight jis range keliye correction chahiye
Datum point tak time of flight

26. Range correction in do ranges ke liye (datum point ke map range se 2000 mts /
yds kam ya jyada) bhi plot hote hain aur ye teeno plot ek sidhi line se judi jati hain. Phir
target ke liye datum limit ke under is line se map range ke upar datum corrections padhi
jati hain (DUAI,1/75).

27. Same line of fire ke upar do ya usse jyada datum points(100mils/5degree ke

under). Har datum point keliye appropriate line aur range correction C of M graph
par plot kiye jata hain. Additional range keliye range correction bhi nikala jata hain,datum
point tak 2000mts/yds jyada observed range se maximum range aur observed range se
2000mts/yds kam minimum range para 25 main diye hue formula use karke (b) ye do
nikale hue range correction bhi appropriate range ke khilap plot kiya jata hain.mile hue
plot ek sidhi line se jude jate hain aur ploted points se jyada ya kam ki range ke liye
datum limits tak har end par continue kiya jata hain.Ye ek line correction curve aur ek
range correction curve banata hain.iske bad targets tak correction datum limit ke under
einhi curves map range par padhi jati hain.

Circulation of correction.

28. Jab datum point ranging se deduce kiya hua correction dusre batteries ko pass
hota hain, us message main niche diye hue data jarur hone chahiya:-

Heading Example of Message

(a) Nature of equipment 105/37 IFG
(b) Charge Charge 4
(c) Nature of propellant. NS
(d) Time of firing 1300 hrs.
(e) Bearing of line of fire ( to the nearest degree/20 mils) 6420 mils / 3450
(f) Map horizontal distance (to the nearest 100 12,400.
meters/yards)
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
335
(g) Low or high angle fire Low angle.
(h) Height of datum point (to the nearest 10 meters or 25 110 meters/350 feet.
ft)
(j) Line correction (to the nearest minute/mil) Less6mils/Less19
minutes
(k) Range correction (to the nearest 10 meters)* ADD 470.*

(l) Grid reference and height of ranging battery GR732471Ht178meters

(m) Grid of ranging battery Regt.

NOTE:- *with automated FCIs,range corrections can be circulated to nearest 1m.

29. Procedure Battery main Ranging Battery ke alwa:- Basarte datum shoot ke
result pane wala bty ke guns ranging bty se 2000 mts/yds aur 300mts/yd ht ke ander ho
target ko engage karne keliye aur target datum limit ke under hain ki nahin decide karne
ka tariqua bilkul saman hain jaise ki datum point shoot (s) panewale ke dwara fire kiya
gaya ho .

30. Datum point ek hi bearing ,A of S aur ranging bty se ek hi horizontal distance par
hone ka assume kia jata hain, ranging bty se reciepient bty tak ki duri ke liye koi bhi
allowance nahin diya jata hain.kyun ki datumpoint se correction ek trajectory ki particular
bearing aur vertex keliye applied hota hain naa ki ek particular pont ke liye. Jab tak
ranging bty aur recipent bty para 12 (C) main diye hue limit ke under hain tab tak un ke
bich ka ht diff ko najarandaj kiya jata hain.

High angle fire

31. Datum point ranging airburst ke sath high angle fire me use nahi kiya jayega
paranthu datum point ranging groundburst ammunition ke sath high angle fire me
satisfactory result dega. Iske liye tayari aur shoot ka control low angle fire me jab MPI
adjustment ek known point jiska GR pata ho ushe prakar hain.

32. Sirf ek datum point ka upyog hota hain high angle fire mein, range aur line
Corrections jo pata kiya gaya hain sidha apply kiya jata hain un target ke liye jo datum
limit me hain. Mortar mein bhi range aur line corrections sidha apply kiya jata hain.

33. Ya jada datum point jyada accurately assessment range and line correction se
kiya jata hain. Yeh corrections C of M graph mein uchit map range mein plot kiya jata
hain.

34. Line corrections. Line ke correction datum point ke liya map bearing se fired
bearing ghata kar pata kiya jata hain. Agar prayog kiya jane wale equipment mein drift
ke liye compensation nahi kiya ja raha hain to drift ka correction fired bearing se ghataya
jayega. Agar upyog kiya jaane wale upyog ke sight drift ke liya low angle mein
compensate kar raha hain aur partially high angle ke liya drift compensate kar raha ho to
drift scale ko zero par set kar ke total drift correction ko fired bearing se substract kiya
jana chahiye.

35. Range corrections. Range correction datum point par nikalne ka tariqa high
angle mein aur low angle mein kuch antar rakhtha hain ye hain:-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
336
(a) Gun ke dwara fire kiya gaya QE field clinometer se measure kiya jata hain.
Gun ka angle of departure QE ko upyog mein jo charge hain uske jump ko jod kar
patha kiya jata hain.

(b) False angle of sight jo ki true angle of sight aur non rigidity variation ko
mila kar graph ‘D’ mein QE ke against aur true angle of sight ke sath dekha jata
hain.

(c) False angle of sight ko angle of departure ke sath jod diya jata hain aur
resulting angle ko equivalent range mein range table ke madad se convert kiya
jata hain

(d) MV variation ko is range ke sath jod diya jata hain us range ke sath jo
predicted horizontal range se milta hain.

(e) Position correction agar hain to substract kiya jata hain aur hamen
standard predicted horizontal range milta hain (battery centre se DP).

(f) Charge temperature variation pata kiya jata hain aur standard predicted
horizontal range aab standard charge temperature ke liya correct kiya jata hain.

(g) Range correction map horizontal distance se standard predicted horizontal

range se ghata kaar pata kiya jata hain. Table XLV is pure computation ka ek
udhaharan deta hain.

Radar Observation

36. Radar observation ek locating unit se MPI aur MPB ek group of ground burst aur
airburst rounds low angle mein fix karne me upyog kiya jata hain jab:-

(a) jab ground observation se MPI ek us point paar jiska GR malum ho us par
adjust karna sambhav nahi hain.

(b) Yeh ek alternative method ke tarah upyog kiya jaa saktha hain jab line aur
range correction establish karne ke liya jab met telegram nahi mile.

Duties of GPO

37. Ranging battery ke GPO ke jimmewariya hain:-

(a) Observation unit ke plotting centre aur CP ke beech mein communication

provide karna.

(b) Observing unit ko nimnilikhit jankariya dena.

(i) Use hone wale equipment.

(ii) Map bearing angle of sight aur range har datum point ke liye
ranging gun se.

(iii) Ranging guns ke coordinate.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
337
(c) Ranging gun ko nominate karna jo agar sambhav ho to standard gun ho.

(d) Ammunition ke tayariya ka order dena aur nature of propellant specify

karna.

(e) Har datum point ke liya predicted bearing angle of sight range fuze length
calculate karna.

(f) Calculate karna aur jarurat padne par line and range corrections datum
point ke liya circulate karna.

(g) Target ko engage karne ke liya required line and range corrections
calculate karna.

Conduct of the Shoot

38. Radar Loc ka svy aur tgt ka svy same grid pe hona chahiye. Observing unit is svy
ko karta hain.

39. Radar center shoot ko OP ki tarah control karta hain.

(a) Jab observing unit ready ho jata hain to GPO ko ready report deta hain
“Ready to observe”.

(b) Jaise hi ranging gun ready ho jati hain GPO “ready flight ……” ki report
radar center ko deta hain. FBO ka istemal kiya jata hain.

(c) Rng gun ke ready hote hi radar fire ka adesh deta hain aur GPO “shot .. “
report deta hain. Agar rd satisfactory ho to radar center 4 RGF deta hain aur GPO
ready report deta hain.

(d) Jab radar center observation ke liye ready ho gaya hain to fire ka order
deta hain. GPO normal procedure se report deta hain.

(e) Shoot ke khatam hone radar center GPO ko following data deta hain:-

(i) Grid bg gun se MPI / MPB tak.

(ii) Observe kiya gaya A/S.

(iii) Observe kiya gaya dist, map rg gun se MPI/MPB tak MPI/MPB
coordinates.

40. Jis bg, A/S aur Rg par gun fire karti hain use fired data liya jata hain aur data jo
radar center deta hain use map data mana jata hain. Iske bad GPO table XLIV ke
mutabik datum corrections ko normal procedure mein workout karta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
338

TABLE XLV-DEDUCTION OF CORRECTIONS AT THE DATUM POINT

(HIGH ANGLE FIRE)

105/37 IFG, Ch 3, HE 117, MV ot the Ranging Gun 364 m/s Ch temp 250 c

(1) (2) (3)

1. Map Horizontal distance from map or observing unit 6810

2. Map angle of sight 20’E

3. Map bearing 1410 00'

4. Fired bearing 1390 40'

4(a) Less concentration M 10'

4(b) Drift Correction at range (1) L 20 48'

4(c) Fired bearing less concentration (4 minus 4a) or fired bearing 1420 18'

less concentration and drift correction (4 minus 4a + 4b)

5. Line correction (4c minus 3) M10 18'

6. QE at which gun fired 640 53'

7. Jump +9'

8. Angle of departure (6 + 7) 650 02'

9. False angle of sight at QE (6) and true angle of sight (2) Graph D +8'

10. (8) plus( 9) 650 10'

11. Range equivalent to elevation (10) from tables 6939

12. MV variation at range (11) from table -99

"Variation in range for variations in MV”

13. Predicted horizontal range (11 + 12) 6840

14. Projectile correction -

15. Standard Predicted horizontal range (13+14) 6840

16. Less position correction -23
17. Standard predicted horizontal range (Bty centre to DP) 6863
18. Ch temp variation +40
19. SPHR (19+20) (plus ch temp variation) 6903
20. Map horizontal range 6810
21. Range Correction (21 minus 22) ADD 93

Note:- Limits: 10 mins for line and 40 meters for range.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
339

SECTION 82 - WITNESS POINT

General

1. DP aur WP procedure milte julte hain. WP procedure ka use previously registered

tgt ko engage karne ke liye, surprise ko maintain karte hui ya jo observation jo pahle
available thi ab avail na ho. WP ke liye kisi svy ya met pt ki zarurat nahin padti. Is liye
unmapped country mein faidemand hain, lekin jab svy info available ho to DP rg karni
chainae kyon ki woh jyada accurate aur universally acceptable hain.WP dono L/A aur
H/A ke liye applicable hain.

Procedure

2. Target engage karne ke bad, witness point ko register kiya jata hain, same
normal tariqe se orignal amn use karke. Target or witness dono ka fired data record kiya
jata hain. Witness point bg ke liye 350 milsya 20 deg, aur range ke liye 2000 m or yds
approx ussi ht per hona chahiye. Best result pane ke liye witness point tgt ke close hona
chahiye. Jab aisa possible na ho to witness point permited limit main kahi bhi lay sakte
hain.

3. Target ke re-engagement se pehle witness point ko phir se register kiya jata hain.
Second time ka fired data ko compare kiya jata hain pehle data se. Dono main diff met
condition main change ke karan hota hain.

Application of Correction

4. Low Angle Fire. Correction niman prakar apply kiye jate hain:-

(a) Fired bearing to witness point ka difference seeda recorded bg to target

main add kar dete hain.

(b) Range correction ke difference ko nimin factor se multiply karte hain:-

Time of flight for original range to target

-------------------------------------------------------------
Time of flight for original range to witness point

5. At High Angle Aur Mor Fire. Dono bg aur rg to witness point ke diffrence
seeda original fired data for target main apply kiya jata hain.

6. Table XLVI mein low angle ka example diya gaya hain:-

SER (2) BEARING A OF S RANGE

(1) (3) (4) (5)
1 ORIGINAL FIRED DATA FOR 93040” 20’E 8750
TARGET
2 FIRED DATA FOR WITNESS POINT
FIRST REGISTRARTION 87020’ 20’E 8125
3 SECOND REGISTRATION 88025’ 20’E 7900
4 DIFFERENCE (3-2) M105’ - D 225

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
340
5 RG CORRN (4) 225X29.3 = DP 250
T/F FOR RG (1) 26.3
T/F FOR RG (2)
6 NEW GUN DATA FOR TGT
LINE (1)+LINE CORRN(4) 94045’ 20’E 8500
RG (1)+RG CORRN (5)

7. Use Of Correction By Fire Units Other Than Rng Bty. Limits same datum
point rng ki tarah use hoti hain except fire units in diff grid bhi in correction ko use kar
sakti hain,jab tak ki in fire units ne same target ko reg/engage kiya ho first registration
of witness point ke 2 hrs ke under.jabki fired GR to target unhi fire units ko circulate kiya
jata hain jo same grid main ho.

8. Jab bhi Witness Pt Correction Use Karke Koi target register Ya re-engege Karna
ho to fire plan banane wale officer ko target as fired record karne ko order dena chahiye.

9. Circulation Of Data By Gpo Of Rng Bty. Witness point correction workout

aur circulate karne ki responsibility GPO ki hain. Nimanlikhit data circulate kiya jata
hain:-

(a) Nature of equipment.

(b) Ammunition.

(c) Time of first engagement.

(d) Bearing to witness point (nearest deg/20 mils).

(e) Range to witness point (nearest 100 m/yds).

(f) Height of witness point (nearest 20m/50feet).

(g) Line and range correction on re engagement (nearest5 min/miland

25meters).

(h) Time of re engagement.

(j) Grid reg and height of ranging bty.

10. Procedure at Bty other than Ranging Bty. Same datum point ranging ka
procedure apply kiya jata hainwitness point correction un targets per apply kiye jate hain
jo first witness point registration ke 2 hrs ke under register /engage kiye gaye hon. Yeh
targets phir second registration ke 2 hrs tak re engage kiye ja sakte hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
341
SECTION – 83 MET TELEGRAMS

Introduction

1. Met telegram mausam sambhandi drushtyon ka anuman lagane ka ek sadan

hain. Pahale bataye gaye tarikon “datum point” aur “Witness Point” ke viprit is mein aise
durshtyon ko nikalne keliye gunon ki firing samil nahi hoti hain. Yeh observation ke sath
prachalith mousham sambhandi parasthidhiyon ke vastavik observation par adarith hain.
Jine ek standard code ke roop mein lagu hone wala mein bhi prayok thayon ko circulate
kardiya jatha hain. Mausam sambandhi prashit parasthidhiyan jine telegram mein samil
kiya gaya hain wah Madhya samudra level par barometer pressure hain, Ballistic air
temperature, wind speed aur wind direction. Ine wooden ke win samayo ke liye aam
taur se 5 to 60 sec tak generally time lagta hain.

2. Paryogen ke adarpar mausam sambandhi telegram niminlikhit mein se kisi ek

prakar ka ho sakta hain. Prayokhit asankan sathahi target vaju shuraksha sound ranging
nuclear follow out yeh vimanan. In mein se prathik ke observation ka tarika aur parisuth
thatha alag alag hoti hain.

Surface Target Met

3. Prayokhik aur ashangan mausam telegram mein probth parisuth thatha doosri
jata hoti hain. Parandu line sanklith kara mein jate same lakta hain. Doosri aur sathahi
target mausam sambandhi report utne parisudh nahi hoti hain. Aise unise observation
aur completion mein apne gaya kuch saral karne ke karan hota hain jo mukhyata
samaya bachane ke liye kiya jatha hain observation vibhin tarike unke anu roop
paristhuthi thatha aur mausam telegram ke discussed pehaluvon ke bare mein vol III
pamph 5/76 & AT vol VI Pamph 8/88.

4. Applicability. Met telegram artillery brigade ke mausam sambandhi anubhag

dwara provided kiya jata hain. Datum durshyon ke viparith mausam sambandhi telegram
sabhi kism ke upar karo. Par lagu hoti hain. Jo artillery brigade gun area mein lage hue
ho. Sahit woh alpocone par fire kar raha ho yeh wah cone par. Aalaki vibin kism ho ki
pas kan dwara fire kiya hain round mein alag alag prakhshan buth prakhshan hoti hain.
Aur yeh prachalith mausam sambandhi prasthiyon se alag alag dung se prabavit hoti
hain saraltha tatha gathi ke hith mein yeh mana jata hain ki agar jin roundon ko udan ke
samay wahi hain to woh watavaran ke samaan par mein se kujarte hain aur is prakar un
mein mouke ke lagbhag waise hi turshthiyan hoti hain.

Time and Space Validity

5. Time Validity. Met ki badalti prakurti ki kaaran samay ka antaral met msg ki
accuracy ko kam kar sakta hain. Magushuda eqpt ke sath mausam sambhandi
anubhag ke liye mausam sambhandi sandhesh do ghante mein ek bar se jyada
frequently karna bahut muskhil hota hain. Prayuk jana wala samay ko nirdharit karne
wala kisi prakar ke visist niyam nahin hain. Kyon ki nirdharan wathavaran ki visita ho
sankraman ka mausam anubhag ki gati vidhiyon aur akanshitt mausam sambhandi
ranging mein udhan samay/mausam sambhandi line ko sankya par nirbhar karega. Jab
mausam ka pattern parivarthan seal hota hain to time limit bhi badal jatha hain to
sandesh beech ka samay kai ghante tak badaya ja sakta hain. Yeh din ke samay aur
maujudha mausami prasthithi par nirbar kartha hain. Niche diyegaya fig 31 mein

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
342
udharan tarike dhikhaye gaye jo stir vatavaran mein parivartan seal temperature density,
profile par aadharit hain. BSBA mausam sambandhi telegram mein bathayegaye samay
mein us do ghante ki beech ka samay hain. Jis keliye telegram lagu hota hain jab ki
ICAO mausam telegram mein a valid time ki suruwat hain.

SUNRISE

EVERY TWO HOURS

1 ½ HRS

EVERY FOUR HOURS EVERY HOUR

TRANSITION
3H

2400 1200

EVERY FOUR HOURS

TRANSITION
EVERY TWO HOURS 3 HRS EVERY TWO HOURS

EVERY HOUR

SUNSET

FIGURE 31 - TIME VALIDITY

6. Space Validity. Kyon ki kafi bade sankya mein barivasti number samil hoti
hain isiliye vishvas ke sath yeh kehana bada muskil hoti hain kyon ki mausam station
sambandi sandesh kisi vishist viyastak baith hain. Mausam sambandi sandesh ki
vaithatha ki adhyan se housath mausam prastithiyon ko guide line duriyan sthabit huve
hain wah is prakar hain:-

(a) Samthal ilaka mein traj mid point se 20KM tak mausam sambandi anubhav
se data swikar hain.

(b) Parvatiya ilaka, samundar ilake aur samunder ke kinare jyada se jyada
mausam sambandhi abakhshya krith chotti dooriyon ke liye bahut antar hain.
Mausam sambhandi sandesh ke wah tatha bobhag ke asangati ke karan
anubhag mein kam ho jayega artat ek hi ghati se nabi gaye mausam sambhandi
agale kuch kilometer ki doori par doosri ghati ke aakde ka prathi milan nahin
karenge.

7. Mausam sambhandi section se am tour se yeh agaah kiya jata hain ki wah har do
gante ki bad mausam ke jankari len. Agar division zone mein ek se adhik mausam

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
343
section sthit ho to yeh karya is prakar kiya jata hain, jis se ki mausam santashon har
gante prasharith kiya jata hain. Agar prayogyata unit ko ek se adhik mausam sambhandi
sectionon se sandesh upalabth hota hain to nimnlikhit criteria ka prayog kiya jana
chahiye:-

(a) The Best. Projectile trajectory ki mid point ke 20km ke antar ke section
se.

(b) Second Choice. Sabse nazdhik mausam section se jo trajectory mid

point se 30 kilometer tak aur do gante se kam ho.

(c) Third Choice. Station se jo 30 kilometer ke antar ho aur do gante se

jyada purana ho.

8. Met Message Systems ke Prakar.

(a) BSBA met system .

(b) ICAO met system.

(c) Russian System.

9. BSBA Met System .

(a) Met massage low angle fire aur high angle fire ke alag alag diya gaya hain.

(b) Bar inches mein aur BAT degree/Fahrenheit mein diya gaya hain.

(c) Yeh 10,000 meters altitude tak cover karta ha

(d) Iska standard conditions is prakar se hain :-

(i) Wind - Still

(ii) Bar - 30"

(iii) BAT - 60 deg F

(iv) Humidity - 50%

(v) Air density - 1222.5 gm/m3

(vi) Ch temp - 60 deg F

(vii) Velocity of sound - 1120 fs

10. ICAO met system:- Anek prakar ke met messages jo ki field artillery mein
istemal hota hia woh is prakar hain :-

(a) Low aur high angle fire ke liye common met message.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
344
(b) BAR aur BAT std hain jo percentage mein diya gaya hain.

(c) Standard conditions is prakar hain:-

(i) Wind - Still

(ii) BAR - 760 mm

(ii) BAT - 150 C

(iv) Humidity - Nil

(v) Charge Temperature - 150

(vi) Density - 1225

(vii) Velocity of Sound - 340 - 343 gm/ cm3

(d) Met CM (Computer). Artillery fire ko computer ke madad se control

karne ke liye istemal kiya jata hain. eg, 155mm. Is mein data surface se upto 20
km tak diya hua hain.

(e) Met Ballistic. Arty guns ko manual computation ke jariye control

karne ke liye diya gaya hain. eg,105 mm IFG . Is mein data surface se upto 18 km
tak diya hua hain.

11. ICAO met system ke dusre met messages hain met TA (Target Acquisition), Met
SR (Sound Ranging) aur Met FM (Fall out).

ROUGH AND READY

12. Bhumika. Jaise ki pahele wale section mein bataya gaya mausam sambhandi
section dwara jari kiya gaye hain mausam telegram vayu tapman aur vayu mandali topu
ki prakshiyanu par aadharit hota hain, jo udhan aur samay par kiya jata hain jis ke liye
yeh lagu hota hain. Prantu aise sthiti bhi faide ho sakta hain jab prakshahit karni ko
tatha upaskar ki anu upasthiti yeh upar likhi ki karan aise prakshan karna aur prachalit
mausami pradhithiyon ki shati purti karna sambhav nahin hoga. Aise prasthithi ke liye
vivasta karne ke vaste Bharathiya Mausam Vibhag ne sun 1940 se 1950 tak ki 8 saalon
se vibin sthan par observation liya hain. In observation ko artillery fire ke liye mausam
sambhandi nishkarsh nikalne ka Rough and ready tarika 1969 namak ek pamphlet mein
compile kiya gaya hain. Yeh prakshyan kisi visesdhan mausam har din ke samay ke liye
air temperature aur wind ke arsath ke roop mein hota hain. Napne ki prakriya DUAI 1/75
Bhag III mein diye gaya hain.

High Angle Fire

13. Is dharna se ek hi T/F par fire karne wale sabhi guns ke mouke ki truti bhi ek hi
hoti hain. Uncha cone (high angle) fire mein bahut ghambir galtian honge. Do round jin
mein se ek ko low angle fire gaye hain doosri ko high angle par. T/F ek hi hain.
Prachalit mausam sambhandi prasthithiyon se ek hi seema tak prabhavit nahin mana ja

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
345
sakta hain. Is prakar high angle fire karna hota hain to jis prakar fire ke liye upayubth
mausam sambhandi telegram ki mausam sambandi section se anurodh kiya jayega.

14. Yeh paye jate hain ki met telegram ki sabhi elements jaise ki, barometer
pressure, ballistic air temperature, wind speed, wind direction (ECW) T/F ke 50 seconds
samay tak nimn tatha uncha dono prakar ki cone fire karne ke liye samanya hain udhan
se 60 seconds se jyada ke liye nimn high angle fire karne ke liye air temperature
samanya hain. Jab ki wind ki disha aur gati alag alag hain is prakar jab nimn tatha
uncha tatha high angle par fire par lagu hone wale mausam telegram ke liye anuroddh
kiya jata hain to std code ko nimnlikhit prakar se sansodhit kiya jata hain :-

(a) Samanya T/F ke samay ke 50 seconds tak ek normal met telegram.

(b) 60 seconds ke udhan samay se upper kewal nimn H/A fire par lagu hone
wale data groupon se pahele indicator code “77777” data jata hain.

(c) Indicator code “99999” 60 seconds ki udhan ke samay se uppar kewal high
angle fire par lagu data gruopon se,

15. Upar diya hua sirf BSBA met message ke liye lagu hain. Yeh met message ICAO
format high ya low angle dono ke liye common hain.

16. Adhunik priority mausam telegram tayar kerne ke liye “Radio Sonde” prayog
karna hain yeh tracking radar duwara aur calculation computer dwara kiya jata hain.
Jisse quick tatha sahi parinam samne aathi hain. Mausam telegram Antar Rashtriya
Viman Sankatan (ICAO) ke manu ko (Standard) par adarith hota hian aur metric union
mein hota hain maujuda pranali ke viparith jagah data vibin udhan samayon ke liye kiya
jata hainh. Yeh vatavaran ki vibin unchain wale parvaton jitne “met lines” kehte hain un
ke liye diya jata hain. Kyon ki round ke bich jalne wale brakchayabat bahut bade sankya
mein bad jate hain aur unka prakshyan liya jate hain is liye yeh mausam telegram jyada
accurate hoti hain.

SECTION 84 - CORRECTION OF THE MOMENT IN THE MOUNTAINS

Introduction
1. Jaise ki pahele wale sec mein bataya gaya hain ki moment ki duristi nirdharit
karne keliye prayog kiye jane wale vibin tarike unjagon mein lagu hote hain, jahan jamin
mein adhik ubar kabar aur gun aur target ke bich unchain mein adhik asamanta ek jaise
nahin hain. Lekin hill area mein chote samtal durion par unchain mein jyada antar gun
area ki kami aur bahut adhik thandi mausam sabhandi data nikalne mein parisaniyan atti
hain.
Problems

2. Samay sirf vayu mandal ke high trajectory se gujarne wale aur height ka hi
nahin balki target ke bich unchain mein bahut jyada antar ki bhi hain. Mausam
sanbandhi parishthithi mein turant parivartan hota hain. Aise anischat mausam jamin ki
upar aur nicha ki wajah se hota hain. Jis mein hawa ki aspast roop se changing hota
hain.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
346
3. Yeh paya gaya hain ki parvaton par mausam sambhandi paristhithiyon ka
prabhav usi gun se fire karte samay subsonic aur supersonic (different charges) ballistic
ki wajah se ek dam alag hota hain.

4. Gun area ki kami ke karan usi regiment ki battery ki alag alag unchain par lagai
jata hain. Isi karan wah datum ki limit se bahar ho jati hain.

Datum Point

5. Kyon ki datum ki limit 1000 feet ya 300 meters height of target hain, isiliye alag
alag height par jarurat ke anusar datum points register karna chahiye.

Witness Point Procedure

6. Is tarike ka istemal pahari ilake mein kiya ja sakta hain. Lekin tgt ki seema par
lagai jane wali height ki seema ke kaaran yeh nomal ek jaise nahin hota.

“Rough and Ready” Met

7. Paharon par mausam sambhandi corrn nikalne ka yeh bhi ek kargar tarika hain
aur iska successful istemal kiya ja sakta hain.

Met Telegram
8. Met telegram se milne wali moment ko correct un tgt ke liye puri tarah sahi hain,
jo ki angle of sight zero par hote hain. Lekin isse guns se lagbhag 300 meters ya 1000
feet ki height ke andar target ko engage karne ke liye bina kisi serious galti ke use kiya
ja sakta hain. Large angle of sight ki condition me ankul banane ke liye met telegram ko
correct karne ka tarika age wale paragraphs mein bataya gaya hain.
9. Met Conditions at Large As of S. Figure 32 mein trajectory GT woh hain jiski
moujuda conditions mein target ko jo usi level par hota hain jispar teen guns hit karne
ke liye jarurat hoti hain. Trajectory GT1 woh hain jiski samaan sthiyon mein target T1 jo
angle of sight A par T ke T ke uppar lambbat hain us ko hit karne kel iye jarurat hoti
hain. Yadi target GT1 ko aage badaya to woh X par gun level se milega.

T1

X
A
G
T

FIGURE 32

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
347
10. GT aur GT1 dono trajectores ke liye time of flight wahi mana ja sakta hain. Lekin
dono trajectory par gole ki flight ko prabavit karne wale met condition paristhithiyon
ekdham alag hogi. Vastav mein trajectory par GT1 ke liye BAT thatha wind ke trajectory
GT ke value ke apaksha pure hua trajectory GX ke jyada kharab honge. Isiliye
trajectory GT1 ke liye C of M nimn likhit tarike se calculate kiya jata hain :-

(a) Range Table data for the time of flight for trajectory GT ("actual” time of
flight).

(b) Values of BAT and wind read from the met telegram against the time of
flight for trajectory GX ("met” time of flight for A of S ‘A’).

11. Determining Arc C of M. Range tables mein tabulated kiya hua met T/F , actual
T of F aur alag alag A of S keliye har 10 seconds keliye prepare kiya gaya hain.

12. Kisi bhi diye gaye actual time of flight aur angle of sight ke liye moment ko correct
karne ke liye karwai is prakar se hain :-

(a) Range tables se actual time of flight aur A of S ke against metor time of
flight read karo.

(b) Met telegram se BAT aur wind ka value met T of F ke against read karo.

(c) BAT aur wind ke values ko istemal karke, C of M for the actual T of F
malum karen. Is procedure ka example para 14 mein diya gaya hain..

13. GPO dwara har 50 A/S ke liye correction of moment ke alag alag graph set kiya
jayenge (DUAI 1/75). Kisi bhi tgt ke liye correction of moment un graph se padhi jati
hain jo target ke A/S ke sabse pass ke A/S keliye taiyar kiya jate hain.

14. Agar range table ICAO met system ke lihaj se banaya gaya hain to met line No
alag alag range ke liye alag alag height diya jata hain (ie 105/37 IFG). Met telegrams
taiyar karte samay A/S nahin chahiye, kyon ki met line No graphical form mein range
tables ke Part II mein diya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
348
CHAPTR - Vlll

REDUCTION AND PREDICTION

SECTION 85 - PREDICTION

General

1. Predicted fire mein sabhi fire ate hain jo ki non statndard condition aur other
condition ko dhyan mein rakhtehue kam mein laye jata hain. Present non statndard
condition ke prabhav ko rokhne keliye effected C of M ko ya C of M Graph (DUAI 1/75,
Part III) ka istemal karte hue meteor telegrams C of M se prapth suchano se firing (sec
79) se nirdharit kiya ja sakta hain. Meteor telegram C of M se mile non statndard mein
correct karne wala predicted fire H/A firing ke liye bahut sahi hoga. Predicted high angle
firing ground burst ke datum point ranging se prapth kiya jana chahiye.

2. Nimnlikhit factors accuracy of predicted fire ko prabhavit karte hain :-

(a) The accuracy of the C of M par.

(b) The accuracy of fixation of the target par.

(c) The accuracy of survey of the gun par.

(d) Jis tarike se bearing, A of S aur range nikala gaya hain uski accuracy par.

(e) The accuracy of calibration, sight testing aur laying par.

(f) Sorting of ammunition par jaise ki nature aur weight of projectile aur nature
of propellant.

(g) Ammunition ko handling karte samay aur preparation ke dauran jo care

lete hain, e.g, cleanliness of ammunition, avoidance of damage to driving bands,
and the proper storage of cartridges.

(h) Link up of survey at gun and OP end par.

Principles of Predicted Fire

3. Target ke upper predicted fire lane ke liye bearing, A of S aur battery center se
target tak ki horizontal range ki sahi jankari hona chahiye.

4. Map/Arty board se mapi gaye ya gun tatha target ke sahi grid reference se
computed bearing, A of S thatha range ko map data ke roop mein jana jata hain. Nimn
likhit ke prabhav ke liye map bearing aur range mein sansodhan ka prayog karna jaruri
hain :-
(a) Non-standard met conditions.
(b) Difference from standard of the equipment and ammunition in use.

(c) Uphill or downhill shooting (non-rigidity of the trajectory).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
349
5. Nimnlikhit ko chorkar samanyatah map A of S mein jaruri nahin hote hian:-

(a) At high angle fire (Section 41).

(b) When using time HE / Chemical shell.

6. Guns ki bearing, A of S aur range ko antim roop se order karte hain woh predicted
data ke name se jana jata hain.

Corrections to Range

7. Jab nimn likhit praisthithiyon hoti hain to pratiek equipment ka range table se kisi
nischat range par target ko hit karne ke liye nimnlikhit malum kiya jata hain:-

(a) Met conditions aur charge temperature standard hota hian.

(b) Range table, jis projectile ke basis per compiled kiya gaya hain.

(c) Gun aur target same horizontal plane par hona chahiye.

(d) Range table jis gun ki MV ke adharit compiled kiya gaya hain.

8. Bator roop mein isse paristhithiyon aati hain aur componsaed sambhandhit
sansanon non statndard condition jaruri hain.

9. Yeh correction is prakar hain :-

(a) The C of M. (Approximately same for all guns of a battery).

(b) The projectile correction. (Usually same for all guns of a battery).

(c) The non-rigidity correction. (Usually same for all guns of battery).

(d) The MV correction. (Usually differs for each gun).

10. C of M. Ismein non standard condition ke correct karna partha hain, jo ki bty ko
sabhi guns ke liye samany thatha nischit time ke liye hote hain. Yeh correction niche
diye gaye hain :-

(a) Non-standard meteorological conditions se corrections jaise ki :-

(i) Barometric pressure.

(ii) Air Temperature.

(iii) Wind.

(b) Non-standard charge temperature ka correction.

(c) Rotation of the earth ka corrections.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
350
Note :- Range table ke under koi amendments huva hain to usko gun rule apply nahi
kiya gaya hain. Gun rule standard condition ke against banaya gaya hain.

11. Standard Predicted Horizontal Range. Map range ke moment ke correction jo

barometer pressure, ballistic air temperature thatha charge temperature ki maujuda
paristhithiyon ke antergat target ko hit karne ke liye jarurat hoti hain, jabki :-

(a) Standard projectile ka use ho raha ho.

(b) Tgt bhi gun ke horizintal plane per ho.

(c) Gun ka MV aur range table MV same ho.

12. Is range ko standard predicted horizontal range ke name se jana jata hain.

13. Projectile Correction. Range table standard projectile ke upper banaya hua
hain. Is liye fire projectile ke bich mein kiya antar hain yeh pata hona jaruri hain :-

(a) Non standard weight ka correction ya shell ka prakar.

(b) Non standard weight ka correction ya fuze ke prakar.

14. Is liye jahan tak ho sake kisi target ko engage karte samay battery ke har ek gun
ek hi prakar ka projectile, ek hi prakar ke weight aur ek hi prakar ke fuze ko istemal
karna chahiye.

15. Predicted Horizontal Range. Projectile correction standard projectile

horizontal range se malum kar sakta hain. Lekin target hit karte samay kounsa
ammunition aur moujuda condition kya yeh pata hona chahiye. Weh is prakar hain :-

(a) Target aur gun ek saman horizontal plan ke upper hona chahiye.

(b) Gun ke MV range table MV ho.

16. Yeh range predicted horizontal range se malum kar sakte hain. Jab standard
projectile istemal ho raha ho aur predicted horizontal range, standard horizontal
predicted range ke saman ho. Is mein form mein diya hua ko hum hamesha istemal
karte hain.

17. Non-Rigidity Correction. Jab target ki A of S zero se jyada ho projectile

horizontal range ke liye yeh lagu hain jab uphill ya down hill mein shooting kar rahe ho to
yeh correction malum kar sakte hain. Trajectory par non-rigidity ke range ke liye kya
correction hain ya non – rigidity correction.

18. Predicted Range. Target hit karne ke liye range predicted horizontal ke upper
non-rigidity correction se malum kar sakte hain. Lekin is ke liye gun ke MV range table
ke mutabik hona jaruri hain. Is se hum predicted range malum kar sakte hian. Agar
target aur gun ka level ek jaise ho to predicted range predicted horizontal range ke jaise
honge. Form mein diya hua terms hamesha istemal kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
351
19. Muzzle Velocity Correction. Agar gun ke adopted MV range table ke MV se
alag ho to predicted range nikalne ke liye niche diye gaye prakar se lagana padega :-

(a) Gun rule ke MV corrector scale ya caliberating sight ko gun adopted MV ke

upper set karo. Elevation ya appropriate correction predicted range mein apply
ho jayega. Jab gun rule ya calibrating sight jab set karenge.

(b) Jab gun par gun rule ya calibrating sight na ho ya jab field clinometer
istemal kar raha ho to GPO elevation deg aur minute mein nearest one minute
mein pass karta hain aur MV ka allowance gun corm mein apply karke gun ko
pass kiya jata hain.

20. Predicted range plus MV ccorrection ko koi special term se nahin darshaya jata
hain.

Corrections to Line

21. Line corrections do categories ke hote hain:-

(a) Line ke liye moment correction.

(b) Drift ka correction.

22. C of M. Jo movement corrn line ke liye hota hain wahi non-standard condition ke
liye lagu hota hain. Isse battery se sabhi guns apply karte hain. Yeh nischit samay ke
liye lagu hota hain. Yeh correction is prakar hain :-

(a) Wind ke liye correction.

(b) Rotation of earth ke liye correction.

23. Standard Predicted Line. Maujuda conditions mein hum yeh bearing nikalte
hain. Aur C of M ke map line ke sath sight ke liye lagu hota hian. Jisse target hit hota
hain. Lekin iske sath drift correction lagu nahi hota hain. Isko standard predicted line
Kehte hain.

24. Corrections for Drift. Yeh sara correction range table se nikalte hain aur non
standard projectile ke liye koi extra correction hota hain to standard predicted line ke
sath plus kiya jata hain.

25. Predicted Line. Yeh bearing drift correction ke sath add ho jata hain, jo
projectile target ko hit karne ke liye use hota hain. Uske liye standard predicted line ki
jarurat hota hain maujuda conditions mein. Ise predicted line ke name se jante hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
352
26. Is prediction ka process table XLVII mein summed up kiya gaya hain.

TABLE XLVII

Ser Range Line

1 Map range Map Line

2 plus C of M plus C of M
3 = Standard predicted horizontal range (SPHR) =Standard predicted line
4 plus projectile correction plus drift correction
5 = Predicted horizontal range (PHR) = Predicted line.
6 plus Non-rigidity correction
7 = predicted range (PR)
8 plus MV correction
9 = Predicted range plus MV correction (PR + MV corrections).

Application of Corrections for the Engagement of Targets

27. Sabhi target mein hamesha non standard condition ki correction lagate hain.
Sivay jab “as fired” grid reference istemal karte hain.

Rounding off

28. Sabhi correction nearest mil/minute aur meter mein read karke aur apply karne ke
liye yeh jaruri hain ki gun ki sight ke graduation ke mutabik predicted data ko round off
kiya jata hain , eg:-

(a) Predicted line nearest 1 mil or 5 minutes mein hona chahiye.

(b) Sight par gun rule istemal ho raha hain to predicted range par choti suitable
value set ki jayegi.

29. Calculations ka principle yehi hain ki predicted fire mein rounding off hamesha
last stage par kiya jana chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
353
SECTION 86 - PREDICTED FIRE WITH TIME AND VT FUZES

Time Fuzes

1. Time fuzes ke teen mukhya parakar hota hain :-

(a) Mechanical.

(b) Powder burning.

(c) Electronic time fuze.

2. Aam taur par mechanical time fuze jyada accurate hain.

3. Targets ko time fuze ke sath engage karne ka uddesh nimn likhit hain :-

(a) Kisi karan round target ke vertically upper burst ho raha hain.

(b) Kisi karan round target ke short burst ho raha hain aur apne raste ko
chodkar woh point of burst se target tak lagatar trajectory bana raha hain.

4. Agar kisi bhi case main target ko unobserved fire se engage ka order mile, to
predicted line, range aur A of S ke liye predicted corrector aur fuze setting ke bare mein
janna jaruri hain. Predicted corrector aur fuze setting ki calculation ke liye GPO jimmedar
hain.

5. Para 3 (a) mein predicted fuze setting kaise calculate kiye jata hain aur maujuda
conditions mein wah shell ko kaise burst karte hain is ke bare mein jankari diya hain.
Target ke line of sight ke upper jis karan shell burst ho raha hain us par vijay pane ke
liye predicted fuze setting ko bhi calculate karna chahiye. Target ke upper burst karne ke
liye fuze setting ko badli kiye bigar false A of S ko apply karenge, woh is prakar hain :-

(a) Time HE. GPO target ki opening map range per us equipment ki
optimm HOB ke upper A of S ko badalta hain.

(b) BE Chemical Shell. Sabhi ranges per 10 mils/30 minutes A of S

badalta hain.

6. Predicted data mein false A of S include hota hain.

7. Para 3 (b) mein maujuda conditions mein shell burst hone keliye fuze setting
range table mein diya hain, jarurat point ke upar trajectory target se short hota hain.
Predicted fuze setting weather conditions ke upar calculated hota hain, jo ki is point ke
upar shell burst hone ke liye prevailing HOB ko alter karne ke liye data range table mein
diya gaya hain.

8. Predicted Fuze setting calculate karne ke liye do cases hota hain. Jo equipment
aur fuze ke liye Fuze indicator nahi hota hain, har target ke liye fuze setting alag alag
calculate karna jaruri hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
354
9. Fuze indicators, corrector of moment pata karne ke liye convenient hain, jo ki diye
hua charge aur sabhi ranges ke liye applicable hain. Isko hum range table se predict kar
sakte hain ya jaise para 13 mein bataya gaya tarike se aur shooting se bhi malum kar
sakte hain. Kisi bhi target ka predicted fuze setting fuze indicator se read kar sakte hain.
Predicted fuze setting ya corrector of the moment met telegram ki tarah hi time period ke
liye valid hain. Agar corrector of the moment firing se malum karte hain to engagement
of targets aur time of shooting ke bich ke interval jitne ho sake short hona chahiye aur
ho sake to two hours se jyada nahin hona chahiye. Agar meteorological conditions
steady nahin hain to, maximum time limit reduced kiya ja sakta hain.

VT Fuzes.

10. Yeh Fuze proximity device ke sath fitted hota hain jo automatically target ko
approach karte hi auto maticaly function hota hain.

11. Yeh fuze ballistically standard fuze se differ karti hain jis ke aadhar par range
table compiled hain aur isiliye range different hain. Jab predicted fire ka istemal karte
hain to normal sequence se false range as a projectile correction ke tour par apply karte
hain.

Prediction of Fuze Setting

12. Mechanical aur powder burning time fuzes ke liye corrections to the fuze setting,
predicted range par range table se read karte hain ki jo additional effects of non
standard conditions mein time of flight ke liye. Powder burning time fuzes mein effect
of non standard conditions on the rate of burning of the fuze composition keliye
correction to fuze setting jaruri hain. In dono effects hamesha ek direction mein nahin
milta hain, is liye akhir mein dono ka alag alag work out karna padta hain.. Is ke karan
standard se variation ke liye correction work out karte hain woh mechanical fuze ke liye
ek direction aur powder burning ke liye opposite direction mein hoga. Fuze temperature
hamesha charge temperature ki tarah hi measure kiya jata hain. (See Section 83).

Calculation of Predicted Fuze Setting

13. Predicted fuze setting is tarah calculated kiya jata hain :-

(a) Range tables se predicted range par fuze setting aur time of flight read
karen.

(b) Met telegram mein air temperature ke value aur barometric presseure,
met line number ya time of flight se nikalo. Deduce “Bar at battery height”.

(c) Range table ke ander non standard conditions ke liye fuze correction
predicted range ke against me read karo. Standard se har unit ke value ke
variation jaise 10 m/s MV mein loss 10oC temp mein badotari jaisa.

(d) Har ek non standard condition ko calculate karo. Appropriate correction ki

algebric sum lo.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
355
14. Example. 105 / 37 I FG, Charge 3
MV 364 m/s (-5 m/s)
Bar at bty height 950 (95% of std)
Air temperature 900 (90% of std)
Charge temperature 20.60 C
A of S Zero
Predicted range 8000

Predicted fuze setting dono TAs ka apas mein milna chahiye.

TABLE XLVIII

Ser Correction for Correction

1 Predicted range 8000

2 Fuze setting corresponding to (1) 31.2
Corrections read against range (1)
3 Barometer 950 +0.1
4 Air temperature 900 -0.5
5 Charge temperature 20.60 C +0.05
6 A of S Zero
7 Total fuze correction less MV (see note) -0.35
8 MV -5 m/s +0.45
9 Total fuze correction +0.1
10 Predicted fuze setting (2 plus 9) 31.3

NOTE :- Jab predicted fuze setting No of guns ke liye calculate karna ho jab ki
sabhi guns ek hi predicted range par fire Karen. Yeh sahi rahega ki calculate Karen first
serial 3 to 7. Jo ki sare gun ke liye barabar hain. Uske bad MV correction jo ki
individual gun ki hain usse apply Karen.

15. Eqpt jo fuze indicator istemal ho raha ho yeh generally sahi rahega ki predicted
value of corrector of moment ko calculate Karen. Jo ki har range ke liye applicable hain.
Har target ki separate predicted fuze setting calculate karne se yeh behatar hain.

16. Target ki A of S ke liye jo correction kuch cases ko chodkar “Corection to

Corrector setting range” ke sath vary nahin karte aur yeh range table se calculate kiya
jata hain, jo ki niche example ke sath diya gaya hain :-

Example. 105/37 IFG Charge 3 mechanical fuze. Is mein non-standard conditions

hain jo example at Para 14 mein diya hua hain. The air temperature used is that
corresponding to the appropriate mean fighting ranges.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
356
TABLE XLIX

Ser Correction for Correction

1 Bar at bty height 950 +1.8

2 Air temperature 900 -6.5
3 Charge temperature 20.60 C +0.5
4 Total correction -4.2
5 "Standard" value of corrector 100
6 C of M for shooting at A of S zero 95.8(96)

NOTE :- (a) MV correction fuze indicator mein applied kiya jayega.

(b) Baki correction for large A of S ke liye jarurat hain aur har ek target
main applied karna hain. Jo value serial 6 mein diya hain.

(c) Pridicted Correction dono TA’s ka apas mein milna chahiye.

Determination of the Corrector of the Moment by Firing

17. Calculation ki apeksha shooting ke dwara corrector of moment ko attayadhik sahi

kar sakte hain. Yeh satisfactory sidhant hain ki teen air burst ka ek group angle of sight
convenient main fire kiya jayega. Aur ensure karega ki gun position se burst dikhain
deta hain. Burst ka har ek angle of sight, (ranging gun usi angle of sight par laid aur
director dwara lagaya jayega) mapa jata hain. Yadi point of burst line of sight se niche
hain to corrector of moment chota hain. Three mils ya teen minutes ke badlav ke liye
range athwa low height of burst, range table mein diya hain. Corector ko isi same
amount se fire karke adjust kiya jata hain. Yeh sidhant line of sight par burst ke liye
corrector setting deta hain.

18. Corrector of moment angle of sight zero per hamesha kam hoga, jo para 19 mein
dikhaya gaya hain. Is reduced corrector of moment ko gun position officer dusri batteries
mein jahan lagu hain wahan pass karta hain. Pass kiye gaye corrector of moment ko
prayog karne se pahle yadi jaruri hain to Gun Position Officer target ka angle of sight ke
liye alag se correction apply karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
357
19. Example. 25 PR, HE 213 Charge 3.

TABLE L

Ser Correction

(1) (2) (3)

1 Gun fired at 10,000m

A of S 60E 100
Corrector 100

2 Observed A of S to MPB 70 30'

3 Correction required. Lower bursts by 10 30'

4 Alteration to corrector required. Lengthen (to lower

bursts 10 mins, lengthen Corrector 3.1) 9 x 3.1
= 27.9
5 Corrector of the moment for shooting at A of S 60‘ E 127.9

6. Additional correction due to lowering line of sight by 60 Shorten 5.8

7 Corrector of the moment for shooting at A of S zero 122.1 (122)

(25 Pdr ke Example mein diya gaya alteration to corrector ka data lower angle of
sight ke liye presently available nahin hain).

Observation from an OP

20. Fire ke sath observation se normal OP corrector of moment ko prapt karta hain.
Is ka standard procedure section 51 mein diya gaya hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
358
SECTION 87 - CHOICE OF AMMUNITION FOR PREDICTED FIRE

Shell and Fuze

1. Achhe result ko prapt karne ke liye standard projectile ko istemal kare jis ke liye
range table compiled hain aur shell same ballistic performance ka ho. Ek shoot ke
dauran shell same nature aur same wajan ka hona chahiye.

Charge

2. Ek acche result ke liye most consistent (kam dispersion) wale charge ka istemal
karna chahiye aur range ke liye Head aur TAIL Wind ki corrn dena sahi nahi hoga jab
proj ka velocity sound ki velocity ke barabar ho. Is karan charge select karne ke samay
charge ki MV 305 m/s se 381 m/s ke bich mein nahi hona chahiye, specialy wind speed
(line of fire mein jyada ho)15 m/s.

Cartridges for Predicted Fire

3. Niche diye kuch mahatav puran baten jinko fire ke samay cartridges ka selection
aur handling karte samay dhyan mein rakhna chahiye:-

(a) Nature of Propellant. Agar sambhav hain to woh nature of propellent

use Karen jis se full calibration carried out kiya hain. Kisi bhi halat kisi ek
engagement task ke liye throughout ek hi nature of propellent use karna chahiye.
Yeh dhyan rakhna jaruri hain ki jo nature of charge temperature ka allowances
lagaya ja raha hain. Woh is nature of propllant ke appropriate ho.

(b) Propellant Lots. Aam taur par mixed lot of propellent predicted
engagements mein use karte hain.

(c) Storage. Propellents mein heat ke bad conductor hain, is liye apne
surrounding temperature ko dhire latein hain, agar phir bhi cartridges open mein
stock ki jaye to woh atmospheric temperature ke changes se aur suraj ke radiation
se effected hongi, nateejnan cartridge to cartridge ya single cartridge ke
temperature mein variation hoga. Cartridges jo gun position mein deliver ki jati
hain us mein bhi surrounding temperature fluctuations considerable hoga. Agar
properly stored cartridges available hain to is tarah ki cartridges predicted fire mein
istemal nahin karni chahiye.

(d) Charge Temperature. Charge temperture ka regular aur careful

measurement banae rakhna chahiye.

The Need for Good Storage of Cartridges

4. Agar surrounding temperature teji se badli ho raha hain to surrounding cartridges

se center wali cartridges ke temperature mein antar hoga aur is ka charge temperature
par asar ko determine kar pana mushkil ya asambhav hoga. ie, C of M graph ko setting
up karne ke liye jo charge temperature use karte hain, jyadatar agar surrounding
temperature teji se change ho raha hain same stock ki alag alag cartridges ka

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
359
temperature appreciably alag alag aur us ek cartridge ka charge measurement pure
stock ke result ko mislead kar sakta hain.

5. Agar surrounding temperature bahut ahista ahista badli ho raha hain to kisi bhi
cartridge ke temperature se jyada anter nahin hoga. Charge temperature ko reliable
rakhne ke liye cartridges ko store karne ka best method hain, ensure Karen ki
surrounding temperature minimum rahta ho aur rapidly change nahin hota ho. Is tarah
ki condition mein surrounding temperature ko effective charge temperature ke taur par
accept kiya ja sakta hain.

Storage karne ka Tariqa

6. Predicted fire ke dauran cartridges ko dhup mein nahin rakha jayega. Agar koi
permenent cover na ho to cartridge ko box mein band rakha jayega lid ko band karke.
Stock ko cover kiya jayega. Green our khaki tarpolin ke madad se kam se kam 6 inch
air space chorkar side se cover kiya jayega. Nahin to kam se kam 3 inch ka mitti ka
dher hona chahiye. Box ko height mein nahin hona chahiye. Sahi amn storage ke
importance ko jyada emphasis nahi de sakte hain.

Charge Temperature Napne ka Tariqa

7. Charge temperature nimn likht tariqe se measured kiya jata hain:-

(a) Cartridges in Cases. Koi bhi ammunition box ko khola jayega, aur
thermometer ko box ke under band rakha jayega, kam se kam 10 minutes tak
thermometer ko under rakha jayega aur lid ko band kiya jayega. Bad mein lid ko
khola jayega aur thermometer se reading note kiya jayega.

(b) Cartridges in Bags for BL Guns. Koi bhi ek ammunition box ko khola
jayega. Thermometer ko millboard cylinders ke ander rakha jayega. Sath mein
box ko band kiya jayega kam se kam 10 minute ke bad read kiya jayega.

8. Agar koi cartridge ke ander dalne ke liye thermometer ka koi case na ho

thermometer box mein insert karna us mein clear marking hona chahiye. Kyon ki
damage ya loss ka khatra rahta hain. Gun drill book jo detail mein diya hua hain charge
temperature ko kaise measure kiya jata hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
360
SECTION 88 - REDUCTION OF GUN DATA

General

1. Jab tgt ko firing se register kiya hain, to fired data do ghante ke liye lagu rahega.
Aur ranging gun ke datum limit ke under hoga (section 79). Agar target ko datum limit
ke bahar engage karna hain to grid ref aur data ko reduce kardena chahiye. Aur us
target ko dubara engage karne se pahle naya paristhithiyan ka gun jaise banana
chahiye. GPO ke jimmewari hain ki reduce data ko malum karna aur battery ke sabhi
target ke grid reference malum karna.

2. Is ka out line procedure is prakar hain :-

(a) Non standard condition ke wajah se jo gun fire data mein anter ata hain
wah reduced line aur reduced but not adjusted range” deta hain.

(b) Mike and higher target ko engage karne ke liye correct Angle of Sight use
jayega. Battery target ke ander adjustment of false A of S use nahin kiya jata
hain.

(c) Agar koi A of S use kiya hain to jahan par lagu ho MV correction wrong
apply ho lekin range ke liye sahi kiya jayega.

3. Map data par fired data ko kam karne ke bad fired center to center data aur
elevation ke liye ek ke bad ek successive adjustment ki jarurat parti hain. Yeh
adjsutment fix kiya gaya hain aur viprit order mein lagaya jata hain. Is ko map data se
predicted data mein badal diya jata hain. Reduction of gun data form fig 33 aur 34 mein
diya gaya hain. Reduction ke dauran value ko adjust karne ke liye table aur graph ko
variation ke liye istemal kiya jayega. Is table aur graph ko prediction ke liye use kiya jata
hain.

4. Application of adjustments ke liye form mein diya gaye Serial

(........................................ ) plus (minus) Serial (........................... ) ke rup mein print kiya
jata hain. Yeh nischit kiya gaya hain ko jo bhi value atta hain use same sign mein apply
kiya jata hian. Jaise table aur graph se read kiya gaya ho. Agar jarurat pare to
adjustment ko algebraically kiya jayega, ie,

Bg 78o 45' minus less 1o 5'=79o 5 0’

4725 plus Drop 150 = 4575
5150 minus Drop 125 = 5275.

Finding Reduced Data

5. Vistrit prakriya is prakar hain (See Figures 33 and 34) :-

(a) Fired center to center range par range table se padha gaye drift value fired
center to center bearing par lagu karen ( if applicable).

(b) SPHR graph se mila hua SPL se C of M ka value read karen

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
361
(c) Cenre to center data mein non rigidtity variation graph B se read karo
predicted range aur A of S par.

(d) Jo PHR read kiya gaya tha column No (c) mein projectile corrn ko range
table se read Karen. Jab aisi projectile apply kiya gaya ho uske liye false range ki
zarurat ho to SPHR aur PHR ke barabar false range ke liye range table se read
kiya jata hain.

(e) "reduced but not adjusted range” dene ke liye C of M ko correct karo.

Checking A of S

6. Yah adjusment of range for false A of S, mike aur higher target ke liye zarurat
parti hain. Yeh procedure nimn prakar ke hain:-

(a) Reduced bearing aur reduced but not adjusted range se 8 figure grid
reference note karo.

(b) Map se us point ka height read karo aur A of S work out karo.

(c) Yeh A of S aur record kiya gaya A of S ke difference ko range table mein
part I ke Column No 5 se range in meter workout karen. Agar range 25 meter ke
ander hota ho grid reference work out kiya column (a) se usko accept karo.

(d) Agar 25 meter se jyada difference aya to adjusment of range for false
angle of sight ki karwai karo.

Adjustment of Range for False A of S

7. Aim of Adjustment. Agar koi target galat A of S lagake engage kiya aur
battery ne usko register kiya to reduced target ka grid reference galat hoga. Agar us
target ko dusre ne engage kiya to fire effective nahi hoga.

8. Jab target register kar diya gaya hain to angle of departure jis par ranging gun
fired ki jati hain ko sahi mana jata hain. Kyon ki gole ko target ko hit ya bracket karte
dekha gaya hain. Agar large apex angle ka use kiya ho to angle of projection aur record
ki gayi range bhi bahut choti hogi aur bahut small A of S use kiya gaya ho to angle of
projection aur record range bahut chota hoga.

9. Method of Adjustment. Sahi range aur A of S nirdharit karne ke liye tarikqa

hain ki sahi range dene ke liye fired A of S aur map A of S ke bich ka antar ko prayog
meinlakar trial rg work out karte hain, aur use predict karke AD mein convert karte hain.
Jaise target ko read karne ke liye use kiya jata hain difference ko range column 1 kam
column 5 se range table part I se convert kiya jata hain. Agar difference 25 mtr se jyada
hain to naya A of S ka prayog kiya jayega. Aur trial range ko is antar ke pahle trial range
mein jorkar malum ki jati hain. Agar dusribar nisfal ho gaya hain to problem ko AD chart
mein use kiya jana chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
362
10. Reduced data se IAF 548 mein is prakar enter kiya jata hain:-

(a) The reduced bearing (Serial 8).

(b) The adjusted A of S (Serial 36).

(c) The reduced range (Serial 35).

(d) The reduced grid reference (Serial 16).

Low Angle Fire-QE Laying

11. QE laying se istemal kiye gaye A of S mein galti ki sambhavana rahne ke alawa
istemal kiya hua MV correction error bhi samil rahta hain. Ek shoot ke shuru mein order
kiya gaya gun correction mein woh MV correction bhi shamil hain, jo ki shoot ki opening
range ke liye hote hain. Agar target ko materially different range mein record kiya ho to
MV correction original gun correction se inaccurate hoga. Is liye isse reprediction ke liye
istemal nahin hota hain.

Method of Adjustment

12.IAFB 917 (Reduction of Gun Data-Low Angle Fire) par kam shuru karne se pahle
fired QE ko predicted range se niche diye gaye example ke jariye kiya jayega.

Example:- 105/137 IFG Ch 2. MV 292 m/s

1. Fired QE ( less position correction) 300 37'

2. Jump +11'
3. A of D (1 plus 2) 300 48'
4. Fired A of S 10 10' E
5. A of P (3 minus 4) 290 38'
6. (5) in meters from the Range table 6258
7. MV variation at range (6) - 173
8. Predicted range (6) plus (7) 6085

13. Predicted range jo ki serial (8) ka wah entered hota hain. IAFB 917 form mein
serial 1 mein reduction process kaise workout karna wah table L1 mein diya gaya hain.

High Angle

14. Jab koi target ko high angle mein engage karna hain tab A of S aur non-rigidity
corrections dono false angle of sight mein samil hain. Jo bhi allowance atta hain range
table mein graphical form mein relate karta hain. A of S aur predicted horizontal range
us ke liye koi alag se non rigidity correction low angle fire ke liye nahin hain.

15. Jab reducing high angle gun data, false A of S ko hum read karte hain Graph D
se true A of S (para 14) aur jo QE gun ne fire kiya hain. Jab ki maximum range table MV
variation jo ki is par metres aur false A of S jis mein non rigidity ka value bhi samil hota
hain, jo ki mils/degree me diye gaye hain. Yeh wah batata hain jo false A of S jo fired
QE se MV variation samil hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
363
16. QE Laying Using Gun Rules. Nos 1 report karta hain bearing, QE, correction
for index error, position correction if any aur A of S (false A of S). Yeh data check kiya
jata hain. QE less position correction ka istemal elevation ke rup mein reduction
process hota hain (Figure 34).

17. QE Laying Without Gun Rules or Range Scales. Nos 1 report jo report deta
hain us mein bearing, QE, correction for index error, and gun correction mein reduction
process ke bari mein figure 34 mein show kiya haya hain.

Checking A of S in High Angle

18. Checking aur adjusting for incorrect A of S ka maksad para 7 mein diya gaya
hain. Asli A of S reduction process ke liye istemal kiya jata hian. Jo A of S serial 16 se
paya gaya hain usko jo initially workout kiya gaye A of S ke sath compared kiya jata
hain.

19. Jab tak limit of agreement mein adjust nahin hota tab tak process ko reapeat kiya
jayega.

20. Automated FCIs automatically reduction ko carry out kar lete hain aur reduced
data deta hain. Adjustment of range for False A of S is tarah carried out kiya jata hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
364
TABLE LI : REDUCTION OF GUN DATA

Target Number M 4600 Shell and Fuze HE 117Charge 3 MV 369 m/s

Ser Range A to S Bearing

Number
1. Fired centre-to-centre data 7300 1020’E 2960 40'
2. Drift correction at range (1) (if applicable) L 26'
3. Non-rigidity (Graph B) range (1) and A of S (1) -55
4. P H R (1) plus (3) 7245
5. Projectile correction NIL
6. S P H R (4) minus (5) and S P L (1) minus (2) 7245 2970 06'
7. C of M as read from the Graph +35 L 4'
8. Reduce but not adjusted data (6) minus (7) 7215 0
297 10'
9. Grid reference at range and bearing
E 8692 N 1892 Ht650m* 650m
10. Height of Battery. 440m
11. Difference height (9) minus (10) +210m
12. A of S for (11) at range (8) 10 41’E
13. Difference A of S (1) minus (2) -21’E
14. (13) in yards / meters from Range Table range (8) -72 +41
(adjust if more than 25 yards / meters)
15. Approximate adjusted range (8) plus (14) 7138 7179
16. Grid reference at range (15) and bearing (8)
E 8698 N 1889 Ht640m-* 640 645
8694 1981 645m
17. Battery height 440 440
18. Difference height (15) and (17) +200 +205
19. A of S for (1 8) at range (1 5) 10 36’E 10 38’E
20. Trial adjusted range (15) or (20) plus (34) 7038 7179
21. C of M at range (20) +60 +32
22. S P H R (20) plus (21) 7168 7211
23. Projectile correction NIL NIL
24. PHR (22) Plus (23) 7168 7211
25. Non rigidity +55 +56
26. PR (24) plus (25) 7223 7267
27. Range Table AP (or TE) for (26) 220 56' 230 9'
28 A of S (19) 10 36’E 10 38'
29. Range Table AD / QE (27) plus (28) 240 32' 240 47'
30. Range Table AP or TE for 1 230 19' 230 19'
31. A of S (1) 10 25' 10 25'
32. Range Table AD / QE for target (30) plus (31) 240 44' 240 44'
33. (32) minus (29) +12' -3'
34. (33) yards / meters from Range Table (if 25 yards/ +41 -10
meters or less on further adjustment required)
35. Reduced range (20) 7179
36. Adjusted A of S (19) 10 38' E

* Height is read from the map

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
365
TABLE L II ; REDUCTION OF GUN DATA - HIGH ANGLE FIRE

Target Number M 3802 Shell and Fuze HE 117 Charge 3 MV 364 m/s

S No Range A to S Bearing
1 A of S to target 1020’E
2. Fired QE (less posn corrn) and bg
(less concentration) 630 06' 2960 40'
3. Jump +9'
4. Angle of departure 0
63 15'
5. False A of S (Graph D) at QE (2), A of S (1) +20'
6. (4) plus (5) 630 35'
7. (6) in yards / meters from Range Table 7302
8. Drift correction at range (7) L 20 36'
9. MV variation at range (7) from table of -104
‘Variation in range for variation in MV 7198
10. PHR (6) plus (7) 299016'
11. Projectile correction NIL
12. S P H R (1 0) minus (1 1) and S P L (2) minus (8) 7198
13. C of M as read from the Graph +125 M 21'
14. Reduced but not adjusted data (12) minus (13) 7073
15. Grid reference at range and bearing (14)
E 8006 N 2074 Ht 600 605m
16. Height of Battery. 465m
17. Difference height (15) minus (16) +140
18. A of S for (I 7) at range (1 4) 10 7’E
19. Difference A of S (1) minus (1 8) +13’E
20. (19) in yards / meters from Range Table range (14)
Adjust if more than 25 yards / meters -46
21. Approximate adjusted range (14) plus (20) 7027
22. Grid reference at range (21) and bearing (14)
E8010 N 2072 Ht 615
23. Height of Battery 465
24. Difference height (22) minus (23) +150m
25. A of S for (24) at range (21) 10 14’E
26. Trial adjusted range (21) or (26) plus (35) 7027
27. C of M at range (26) +120
28. S P H R (26) alus (27) 7147
29. Projectile correction NIL
30. PHR (28) Plus (29) 7147
31. (30) in degrees and minutes 640 12'
32. MV correction at range (30) -31
33. (31) plus (32) 630 41'
34. False A of S (Graph C) Range (30) and A of S (25) -20'
35. Angle of departure (33) plus (34) 630 21'
36. Minus Jump (Same at ser (3)) +9'
37. QE 630 12'
38. Difference QE (37) and (2) -61
39. (38) in yards / meters from Range Tables. If 25 yards +21
or less no further adjustment required.
40. Reduced range (26) 7027
41. Adjusted true A of S (25) 10 14’E

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
366
CHAPTER - IX

FIRE PLANNING

SECTION 89 - INTRODUCTION TO FIRE PLANNING

General

1 Fire plan wah plan hain jo ek unit ya fmn ke hatiyar istemal karne ke liye tactical
operation ke liye banaya jata hain. Taki unke fire ko co-ordinate kiya ja sake. Is plan
mein arty hathiyar hi nahi balki choti hathiyar se bombari tak ki sabhi prakar ke fire cover
karta hain.

Responsibility

2. Kisi bhi operation mein unit ya formation ka commander fire plan sahit tactical
plan ke liye jimmedar hota hain. Usi level mein artillery commander unit ya fmn ko
available sabhi prakar ke fire support ko co-ordinate karne ke liye jimmedar hota hain
aur woh commander ki fire plan jarurat ko adhesh mein badal deta hain. Uplabdh fire
support mein field artillery, tank, infantry mortar, air craft, thatha navy guns bhi available
hote hain.

Categories of Fire Plan

3. Fire plan ka do category hota hain, jo ki tactical operation ki tarah hota hain (ie.
defensive or offensive) :-

(a) Defensive Fire Plan. Jab apne own troops defensive mein ho enemy
ke attack ko rokhne mein ho us samay defensive fire plan use kiya jata hain. Yeh
defensive fire plan on call ya target list ke sequence mein hote hain. Yeh us
samay kiya jata hain jab commander usse manta hain ki enemy ki entrance mein
FUP, HQ, Communication Centre ya reserve areas ho. Kyon ki dushman ki aur se
pahal hota hain thatha planned target ko engage karne ke samay aur sequence
nischat nahin kiya ja sakta hain aur nahin malum hone wale target ka sankhaya ke
sath sath nischat kiya ja sakta hain. Defensive fire plan us samay bhi lagu hota
hain jab own troops ek defensive se dusre mein chala jata hain. Jo pahle se
nirdharit fire plan wapis samay bhi fire plan istemal kiya ja sakta hain. Defensive
fire plan ke aur jyada jankari section 90 mein diya gaya hain.

(b) Offensive Fire Plan. Jab own troops enemy defence aur attack karte hain
supporting fireplan us samay istemal kiya jate hain wah nimnlikhit prakar ka hain.
Yeh kis level par attack karna uske upar depend karta hain.

(i) Quick fire plans.

(ii) Deliberate fire plans.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
367
Quick Fire Plans

4. (a) Yeh fire plan brigade aur lower level par banate hain. Yeh simple fire plan
se alag hota hain. Ek ya ek se jyada unit is fire plan mein samil ho sakte hain.

(b) Quick fire plan us samay istemal kiya jata hain jab infantry battalion ke
direct support mein ho. Quick fire plan banane ki jimmedari battery commander ki
hoti hain. Kuch halat mein yeh planning ek se adhik battery commander involve
hota hain, jiska antim coordination regimental commander karta hain.

(c) Jimmedar officer supported arms commander ke sath milkar fire plan
banata hain. Yeh sambandhit command post se aur detail mein order deta hain.

Deliberate Fire Plans

5. Yeh brigade ya usse higher level par banate hain. Is mein ek se adhik unit hissa
lete hain. Commander aur uske artillery advisor ki planning alag alag hote hain. Yeh
detail plan infantry aur armoured unit commander ke sath battery commander direct
support mein banata hain. Regiment commander or artillery brigade commander ki aur
se iska planning agree ki jati hain aur artillery headquarters dwara fire plan ke liye fire
adhesh jari ki jati hain, jis par action shuru ho jata hain (AT 1, 6/72).

Principles of Fire Planning

6. Yeh fire plan panch sidhanton jo ki niche diye hue sabhi fire plan ke liye lagu hota
hain. Is pe kisi tarah ka mahatava nahin diya jata hain aur alag alag sthithiyon mein
jyada kam istemal karte hain. Us ko normal tarike se use karne ke liye officers ko achha
plan banane mein madad deta hain.

(a) Co-operation. Is ka matlab planning mein sabhi arms ke bich sahyog

karna.

(b) Concentration of Fire. Available fire unit se hamesha jyada target hote
hain. Fire ko sabse jyada important target par concentrate kiya jata hain.

(c) Flexibility. Normal situation mein ane wale unexpected badlav ke karan
pure plan ke ander barabar teji se change karne ki jarurat yeh flexible plan se kiya
jata hain. Jismein iske change ke liye super imposed fire unit, aur required amn se
pahle practice kiye gaye drill ke mutabik prayog karna hota hain. Achha
communication ke sath authorized OPs ko achha madad milta hain.

(d) Simplicity. Yadi flexibility saral hain to plan ko badalne chahiye. Simple
plan banane mein immediate badli karne ke liye asan aur kam error hote hain.
Jahan tak sambhav ho kam serial hona chahiye aur ammunition thatha rate of fire
mein koi change nahin hona chahiye.

(e) Surprise. Fire plan ko secret rakha jayaga fire ko prayog mein lane ke
liye implications ki jarurat parti hain. Jaise registration karta hain shooting, smoke
tester karke pahle se isse pata lagana hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
368
SECTION 90 - MAKING THE FIRE PLAN

Sequence of Fire Plan

1. Allotment of Resources Tactical plan ke kewal roop rekha ki apeksha adhik

charcha karne se pahle direct support artillery commander ko yeh jankari hona chahiye
ke supporting operation se nibatne ke liye kiya kiya sadhan hain. ie :-

(a) Upalabth guns ki kism aur sankhya.

(b) Upalabth ammunition ki matra aur kism.

(c) Upalabth OP parties ki sankhya .

2. Jab gun us ke command mein hoti hain yeh vishesh roop se us ke adhikar mein
hoti hain, jab us sthiti ko chorkar use uchatar mukhalay se yeh shuchna prapth karna
chahiye delibrate fire plan mein yeh shuchna uchhatar command ke duaran jari kiya hain
out line fire plan mein samil ki jayega. Vastav mein outline fire plan mein prathan artillery
strotro kha ek mathar bandan hi hoga.

3. Tactical Plan. Yeh plan commander thayar karega aur ubalabth artillery ke
mathra par depend karta hain.

4. Yadi tactical plan taiyar karte samay artiilery adviser ne thosh salah dene hain,
tab woh pahale apni artillery sutro ke mokhadwat ko samje aur sankya ke samartan
mein fire karne ke apni samantha ka mulyankan kare. Use nimn likhit baton ka dhyan
mein rakhna chahiye :-

(a) Target ko samanayata kam se kam ek battery allot ki jayegi.

(b) Kisi samay use ki artillery mein target ki sankya ko abandh kiya ja sakta
hain. Is liye uska mulyankan kiya hain. Aur is prakriya mein adhyarupth ke
janewala fire uniton ko nahin ginna chainhiye.

(c) Use ki artiilery kitna samay thak prabhavi rate of fire kar sakta hain aur
woh samay bathana mahatwapuran hain. Ammunition bachakar rakha hain to
usse pahele nikaldena chahiye.

5. Fire Plan. Yeh plan commander aur uska artillery advisor banayega. Jis mein
prarambik bombardment, CB policy targets ki abandh karne ke vidhiyon thatha smoke
testers sahith registration se sammandhit kahi anudeshyon sammandhi nirnay honge.

6. Delibrate fire plan mein registration restriction sammandhi shuchna yadi koi ho to
use outline fire plan mein kiya ja sakta hain. Artillery commander ke pass palabdh
target numbers aur nick name ka ek block hona chahiye.

The Details of the Fire Plan

7. Artillery commander supported arm commander se path kare aur nimnlikhit baton
uka charcha karen :-
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
369
(a) Detailed Tactical Plan Yadi attack opreation hain to artillery commander
ko nimnlikhit baton ke jankari hona chahiye :-

(i) The outline plan including phases.

(ii) The start line.

(iii) The axis of attack and boundaries.

(iv) The objective (s).

(v) The rate of advance.

(vi) DF tasks.

(vii) H hour.*

(viii) Success signal.

* Supported arm commander ko H Hour ke bare mein advise dete smay artillery
commander ko nimnlikhit mein kuch yeh sabhi par vichar karna hoga :-

(aa) Registered kiye jane wala targets ke sankya aur registration

ke liye upalabdh observer.

(ab) Prediction karne wale targets ki sankya.

(ac) Fire Plan adhesh ke passage ke liye jaruri samay, jis mein
registered batteries dauran predict data hota hain.

(ad) CPs par kiye jane wale technical work ka matra.

(ae) Ammunition tayar karne ke liye jaruri samay.

(af) H hour se pahle fire karne ki koi avaysakta.

(ag) Kya sabhi guns action mein hain.

(ah) Supported arm mein samil hone ke liye FOOs ke liye samay
ki jarurat.

(b) Defensive aur withdrawal laraiyon mein akraman prakriya yeh hoti hain. In
sankriya hon ke liye akramank kism ka fire plan jaruri hoti hain. Withdarawal mein
nimnlikhit suchna bhi samil hoti hain :-

(i) Kam se kam surakshit doori jisse fire ko apni troopon ke pass laya
ja sakta hain.
(ii) Jis samay tak hamare apne troop delaying/covering/intermediate
position mein rehte hain. Woh aoudhi tatha position ke avasthithi.
(iii) Jis samay tak nirdharit targets par fire karna apekshit hota hain woh
samay.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
370

(c) Fire Plan.

(i) Targets ke pahchhan aur targets ke sankya.

(ii) Targets ke Grouping aur nicknames.

(iii) Targets ke liye fire units ka allotment.

(iv) Methods of engagement aur distribution of fire.

(v) Allotment of ammunition aur rates of fire.

(vi) Timings of timed programme aur duration, aur “on call” targets ke
rates of fire.

(vii) Modification ka responsibility, smoke screen par kisi vikalpa plan ke

anke karan.

(viii) Samay bhada paln yeh kisi bhag ke anth ko banane ke liye apakshit
koi signal.

(ix) Arrangements for liaison and observation, including FOOs.

(x) Jis hadh tak registration karna chahiye aur kar sakte hain, woh
depend
karti hain:-

(aa) Surprise.

(ab) Accuracy of the fixation of targets.

(ac) Time.

(ad) OP officers available.

* Modern target acquisition system, jaise ki TIIOE aur LORROS ke

madad se registration karne mein samay kam lagta hain.

8. Apekshit fire support ke sabse asaan tarika chuna jana chahiye. Kabhi kabhi
supported arm commander ko salah dena jaruri hota hain ki woh apni fire plan mein
modification karen yadi safalta hasil karne mein dikhat hoti hain. Yeh sankriya shuru
hone mein dheri hoti ho to une isse dala ja sakta hain.

Method of Engagement and Distribution of Fire

9. Fire units ke adhyanth kipayath aur prabavi vitharan ko dhyan mein rakte hue
artillery commander supported arm commander ko salah dete samay targets ko engage
karne keliye sabse accha vidhi par vichar Karen. In vicharon par prabhav dalne wale
nimnlikhit karan hain :-
(a) Target ka tactical mahatva thatha sankriya mein is ke sambhavit asankya.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
371
(b) Target area mein dushman ki nafri ke bare mein shuchna.
(c) Jis hadh tak ka neutralization ki jarurat hain..
(d) Target area ki shape aur size.
(e) Jin target par supported infantry ya armour dwara assault kiya jana hain.
(Is keliye jaruri hain shortest safety distances par in targets ke liye fire units
reserve kiya jana chahiye).

10. Superimposed Artillery. Prakarak dupon ke direct support mein artillery uniton
samanyatha samay badth karya karam mein superimpose hoti hain aur opportunity
targets ke avandh ke liye kuch FOOs ke call par hoti hain. Aise uniton ke fire aise hona
chahite ke yadi dusri kam ke liye ataya jata hain to samay badth ka karya karam ke
guarantee sudha prabahv kartha ko koi nukshan nahi pohunchta hoti. Hamla shuru hone se
purva yeh mahatvapurn hota hain ke yeh FOOs jane ke kon kon se batteries se call karsakta hain.
Kyun ki yeh purva niyogit hoti hain. Aakir FOOs ko aise artillery ke istemal karne ke baremein
anurodh karne ke vardhman kaam ko bandh karne ki avasakta nahin hoti hain.

11. Upalabdh fire abandh ya vitaran karne ke tariqe niche diye gaye ke anusar hain :-

(a) Concentrations. Jab kshetra dushman ke bare mein chuchna acchi hoti
hain, tab yeh sankridhan target ke liye adhyandh kipayadi aur prabvaik hoti hain
aur is mein fire ko targets par sahi tour par direct tatha correct kiya ja sakta hain.
Nimnlikhit mein kisi ek tarika se concentraion ko ek bade target area par batna
sambhav hota hain :-

(i) By Adjusting Individual Fire Units on to Separate Parts of the Area

of the Target. Individual fire uniton ko target area ke alag alag hisson par
adjust karte hue yadi is vidhi ka prayog kiya jata hain tab individual fire unit
dwara abandh kshethron ke liye pratiek target sankya ya apekshit hogi
aise mamuli targeton ke gruopon mein rakha jaye aur unko nickname diye
jayen.

(ii) By Sweeping and Searching. Is mein ammunition expenditure aur

own troops ko enemy ke najdhik jane ka khatra kam ho jata hain. CP par
kaam karne mein sakendhran technical kathinaye kam se kam utpan karte
hain.

(iii) By Massed Fire Distribution Technique. Is mein intersection ko

engage kiya jayega jo diya hain. Aur jis mein sirf ek target number
concentration kiya jayega.

(b) Standard Linear Concentrations. Recce sankedhran target kshetron ko

apandh ke liye upayogi hoti hain, joki shatru ke ditch cun bundh defences joki
linear shape mein hoti hain. CP mein sharekan ke karan adhyadhik technical work
hota hain, lekin jis ko samay ke barbadi hoti hain jab shataran sakendhran samaan
roop se brabhavi hoti hain to aise sthithi mein sharekan ka istemal karne ke rai
nahin dena chahiye.

(c) Smoke Screens. Bahut bade kshetr ko neutralised karna hota hain aur
fire unit jyada nahin hoti hain aur HE ammunition ko santosh janak kam karna
hota hain tab in smoke screen ka istemal kiya jata hain. Smoke shell istemal

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
372
karne ke (Para 6 mein bathaingaye hain) mausam target par boomi ko kism thata
ammunition ko upalabdh dwara smoke screen ki prabavit karte hain.

12. Alternative to Smoke Screen. Yadi fire plan mein smoke screen bhi hota hain
tab is ke liye dusri tarika apanana jaruri hota hain chahiye us samay se pahle mausam
badaltha ho jis par screen fire ki jane chahiye. Yeh khrab sthithi mein chahiye fire karne
par screen ho prabari sabit hoti ho is samasya ko hal karne mein nimnlikhit baton par
vichar ki jayen.

(a) HE ke apeksha smoke badi matra mein jamin ko mis prabavi kardeta hain.
last dhumdale kshetra par fire HE ke smoke screen ko apandhit gunon ke karan
mein rakhna bada muskhil hoga.

(b) Smoke screen hamesha puri tarah se mahatwa purne nahin hoti hain. HE
dushman ke sabhi activity ke khilaph bahut kam rak bata hain. Isiliye us smoke
screen ke liye yeh firing upayabth ko sakta hain. Jo laksh fire ko poori tarah se
nahin ruk pathi kintu use kabhi kam karta hain. Kuch mouken par anukul mausami
prasthithiyon ko manna aur weh dusre plan ke bina kaam chalana badega.

(c) Agar smoke screen ke apekshit hain tab ueh nimnlikhit mein se ek ho
sakta hain :-

(i) Ek alternative complete fire plan udarnarth hathiyar aur ammunition

ka dwara vitran jismein artillery ko chodkar baki sena bhi samil ho taki
dungle kshetra pe HE ki pariyabth par se doosre target par kam prabhatha
fire kiya jasake.

(ii) Sankriya ke liye upayukt fire plan sahiyak ek fire plan hain.

The Warning Order

13. Ek sadaran FOOs fire plan jis mein sabhi adhesh mukhya roop se beja jate hain
unko chorkar sabhi mamlon mein chetavani adesh bhag lene wale fire uniton ko beja
jayen. Chetavani adesh mein nimnlilhit samil hain :-

(a) Fire plan ka nickname.

(b) Likely H Hour Yeh aise samay hota hain jab sankriya shuru hoti hain aur
samanyata woh samay hain jis par start line cross hojati hain. Shuraksha ke
karan usse H Hour se poorv 30 minutes se nikshit roop se nahin beja jana
chahiye. Is mamlo mein warning order ko “H Hour bad ka” diya jayen aur H Hour
ko ek alag sandesh ke roop mein code mein beja jana chahiye. Isse niche diye
ke anusar bhi beja sakta hain :-

(i) Nikshit samay. eg, “H hour 1400'.

(ii) Yeh anishchit samay jaise, “H hour 1400H se pahele nahin.

(c) Samay jis par task tables issue kiya jata hain.

(d) Sankya yeh round prati gun mein ammunition ke thainyar ke adesh.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
373

(e) Miscellaneous Details. Yadi fire ko H hour se kafi pahele shuru kiya jata
hain, jaise, “Support from minus 15 minutes”.

14. Radio par diye jane wale visist chetavani adesh ka udharan niche diya jata hain.

" 21 for 21 and all stations 3. Fire plan MOTA HATHI.

Hotel hour not before 1030.
MACHLI in one hour. Prepare HE 20 rounds, smoke 10 rounds, over”.

Time Guarantee

15. Woh prakhyachit vilambo ko chorkar sabhi prakar ke samay ke liye guarantee di
jani chahiye. Jis samay guns support dene ke liye tayar hogi us samay ke bare mein
nishchit karne ke liye vichar kiye jaane wale karya page No 651 ke footnote mein pahele
se hi bataye gaye hain.

16. Jin mein se kuch prakriya unke kam sath ki hogi aur fire plan ke visthar tatha
insab se har ek kafi matra mein alag alag honge. Phir bhi registration mein hamesha
jaldi se jaldi shuru ki jani chahiye.

17. Quick fire plan mein, registration ke liye small scale ops ke jaruri same depend
karta hain :-

(a) Experience of the OP officer.

(b) Command from the OP.
(c) Ground around the target.
(d) Visibility.
(e) State of communications.
(f) Zone of the gun.
(g) Apex angle.
(h) Nature of equipment and time of flight.
(j) State of training.
(k) Availability of TI-IOE and LORROS.
18. Isiliye anukul praistihiyon mein low angle fire mein pahele target ke registration ke
liye 20 minutes tatha pratyek gramik target ke liye 10 minutes paryapt hain. Yadi kewal
ek radio set hain to aisi stithi mein fire plan adeshon ke liye adhik samay apekshit ho
sakta hain.

19. Ek quick fire plan ke liye samay guarantee nishchit roop se tab tak nahin diye
jane chahiye jab tak ke sabhi guns ya unmein se kuch guns sankriya na ho aur isse yeh
samickshit kiya jasakta hain ke sesh guns ke na hone ka sankriya ko koi nuksan nahin
hoga.
20. Delibrate fire plan mein apekshit samay plan ke vistar aur jettilatha nirbhar
karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
374
Summary of the Process of Fire Planning

21. Fire planning ki prakriya niche diye gaye ke anusar choti ki ja sakti hain :-
(a) Supported arm aur artillery commanders dwara tactical plan aur
availability of resources par vichar karke.

(b) Warning orders Issue karke.

(c) Identification, numbering aur grouping of targets se.

(d) Allotment of priority to targets se.

(e) Infantry, armour aur anya supporting hathiyar se targets uniton ka

allotment karke.

(f) Timings se.

(g) Allotment of ammunition aur rates of fire se.

(h) Method of engagement aur distribution of fire se.

(j) Registration policy se.

(k) Availability of OP officers aur communications se.

(m) Preparation aur passage of fire plan orders se.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
375
SECTION 91 - REGISTRATION IN A FIRE PLAN

1. Jab dono commander dwara nirnayak bare par sahmati ho chuke ho tab artillery
commander registration shuru karega. Yadi paryapt jankari OP officer ko pata hain tab
planning ke nirnay avastha ke poora hone se poorva kuch targeton ka registration shuru
karna sambhav ho sakta hain.

2. Jis hadh tak ka technical pehlu, apekshit regitration ke kism aur banaye gaye
yojna se mulyankan kiya jana chahiye. Registration plan ko prabhavit karne wale
technical karan niche diye gaye hain :-

(a) Reliability of map and met data.

(b) The time between completion of registration and the execution of fire plan.

(c) The state of survey of the guns.

3. Jis ke bad yeh nirnay liye jane ke liye kon kon se target jaruri hain. Registered
karne ke liye adhar bindu chahiye apekshit ho aur targets ko “as fired” chahiye record
kiya jano ho.

4. Yadi target achche map par sahi tarah se marked hain aur agale do ghante mein
engage nahin kiya jana hain aur theatre grid survey poora ho gaya hain tab eight figure
coords ke saman hua firing dwara registration roop mein abandh tatha prabhav se pata
chal jayega ki yadi map ke sahi hone mein koi sankya ho aur map par sthan malum
karrne mein muskhil ho tab firing dwara targets ka registration karna chahiye.

5. Us target ke liye santosh janak se eight figure grid reference liya ja sakta hain
jisse ek inch se ek mile tak ek scale se kam wala achche map mein ya grided air photo
par ya jiske liye sthal nirdeshak yukthiyon locoating device se jiska accuracy uske
barabar ho.

Use of Fired Data

6. Jab fire karne wale dusri fire units ko “as fired” record ke grid reference ko
circulation karne ki avashakta hoti hain to unko iske baremein order dena chahiye. Yeh
tab jaruri hoga jab :-

(a) Fire unit target ko registered ya engage karte hain aur bad mein anya units
jo target ko engage karne ke liye jaruri hoti hain aur woh upalabdh nahin hoti hain.

(b) Jab artillery brigade ya uchitar sthar par sakendran ka registration kiya jata
hain aur battery firing ranging karke regiment ke dusre batteries se checking karne
ke liye fired data kiya jana jaruri hain.

(c) Battery targets ko registrered ya engage karte hain aur witness point
thatha usi grid par dusri fire units ne 2 gante ke bad une target ko enagage karne
ke liye jaruri hota hain, jab witness point dwara engage hoga aur jab witness point
correction ranging battries se anya fire units mein kiya jayenge.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
376
Recording “As Fired"

7. Recording target “as fired” ke suvidha ek aisa suvidha hain jisse observer us
registred battery ke bare mein batha sakta hain jis ke gati target reference ka un dusri
batteries mein karne ke liye jaruri hoti hain, jinone un par fire karna hain. Gathi ko
dhyan mein rakte hue target par kuch jyada fire bikrav kiya jata hain. GPO ki drill
chapter VI mein diya gaye hain.

8. “As fired” grid refeference ke engage ke safal hone ke umid ki jasakti hain
basarthe ki nimnlikhit semavoun ka palan kiya jaye :-

(a) Target engage karne wale guns use ki kism ki ho aur regsitering gun ke
roop mein use grid par ho.

(b) Ek jaise ammunition, charge aur nature of propellant ka prayog kiya gaya
ho..

(c) Target ke engage karne wale guns registering gun with in 2000 meters
mein aur 300 meters HT mein ho.

(d) Regsitration ke 2 gante ke engage ho thatha mausam mein koi bari badlav
naho.

9. Para 8 (c) mein digaye boundry ke liye ek karan jo sabhi guns ke liye use C of M
ki prakriya par nirbhar karna hain jo un limits se bari bahut adhik manne nahi hain aur
iske karan figure No 33 mein diya gaya hain.

T(F)

T B(F)

A B

Figure 33

10. Registering gun A par aur target ke sahi sthithi T par hain. C of M a”ADD” hota
hain aur isliliye grid reference “As fired” T(F) par hota hain. Jab bhi dusri gun ko T(F)
par kar diya jata hain. Jab mausam ki parasthithion ek jaise hain ki B par gun ke liye
waisa ke C of M utpann hota hain jaise ki A par tab is karan round B(F) par ghir jati hain.

Conduct of Registration

11. Fire plan ki arranging karne wale officer ko jaha tak sambhav ho khud registration
nahin karna chahiye. Use registration plan ke niyantaran ke aur dhyan rakhna chahiye

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
377
aur yadi kam niyamith samay se nahi ho raha ho to us karwai karne ke liye taiyar rehna
chahiye. Udharan ke liye yadi weh jaruri samje to observer ke registration sambandhi
adesh bhadal sakta hain taki kisi khas target ke registration ko sabhi guns ke MPI ko
mul roop se adesh anusar adjust karne ki wajah short bracket par rokha jasaken. Usse
dekhna chahiye ki fire plan ke bare mein passing ke liye us ke pass pariyapth sanchar
vivastha to hain.

12. Kisi bhi fire plan jismein registration shamil hain, registration kiye jane wale har ek
target ke bare mein registration adesh jari karne wale officer dwara nimnlikhit baton par
vichar karna chahiye:-

(a) The method of registration, jaisa ki :-

(i) Registration of a point ya registration of a concentration.

(ii) For engagements within two hours whether to record “ as fired".

(b) Shoot ko konse OP officer carry out ka rraha hain .

(c) Kis kism ke gun aur communications prayog kiya jaraha hain .

(d) Time schedule.

13. Method to Use. Alag alag uchit method ek dusre se nimnlikhit ki tarah
comparision kiya jata hain :-

(a) Target ko engage karne ke liye ek battery ka istemal karega, registration

point sufficient time mein use karega. Jyada concentration ko produce karega,
superimposed units ko is mein istemal nahin karega.

(b) Registration of a point ko “as fired” ka record karega, paragraph 8 ki

mutabik.

(c) Ek battery ko engage karte samay registration of concentration ko use

karega. Lekin kum rate of fire har ek gun fully effective karega.

(d) Ek battery target ko engage karega, registration of a concentration se

target ko engage karne ke liye guns ko ready karega, target ko jaldi registration of
a point karega. Lekin all guns aur concerned CPs is mein involve hain, aur ek
target se jyada hain aur ek OP party se shoot ko conduct karna ho, samay ko
bachane ke liye ek samay mein do targets ko registering karega. Isi tarah agar
teen targets hain to bhi ek sath teeno ko registration karega samay bachane ke
liye.

14. Priority for Registration. Jahan tak ho sake to niche diye gaye priority for
registration ko istemal karna chahiye:-

(a) Jaldi se registration of a point carried out karega.

(b) When there is a conflict of priorities for registration of targets, a target

where fire support requires greater degree of guarantee is registered first.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
378
(c) Under normal circumstances, it may be preferable to register last the target
or group of targets which are to be engaged in the first serial (s) of the fire plan.

(d) Registration for smoke screen should be carried out as near the time of
engagement as possible.

15. Guns, Observers and Communications. Jab samay kam hain to guns ko
allocation karne waqat dhyan dena, observers aur registration karne ke communication
mein mudhe hoga. Registering har target engage karne ke liye guns kiska hoga. Tab
problem hoga jab bada observer aur communication is ko use karne ke liye radio nets
available hain.

16. Orders for Registration. OP officer ko target ko registration karte samay niche
diye gaye points ko shamil karna chahiye :-

(a) Target ka Indication, jismein area ka limits ya jis point ko defined karna hain
uska location.

(b) The Target Number. Target letter jis artillery level ka fire plan hain us ko
present karta hain. Udharan ke liye ek battery commander regiment ke sath agar
ek quick fire plan banatha hain to apne disposal ke targets ko M prefix ka letters
dega. Isse plan ko koi modification karna hain to flexibility milti hain.

(c) Fire units, radio net aur anya communications jo ki prayog mein hain.

(d) The Degree of Registration. Yeh jis officer ne target ko select karta hain
us ki responsibility banti hain ki is tactical aim ko achieve karne ke liye kitna
degree of accuracy ki jarurat padthi hain.

(e) Whether to record “as fired”.

(f) Time Limits and Progress Reports. OP officer registration complete

karte samay aur is ke sath agar progress kam hain to uske baremein bhi dhyan
mein rakhta hain.

(g) Subsequent Action. OP officer ko yeh patha hona chahiye ki ek work

katham hone ke bad kis mein kya karna chahiye, eg, to report for briefing as a
FOO, or to observe the fire on one or more targets.

17. Registration of Several Targets by an OP Officer. Agar OP officer ko ek se

jyada targets ko registered karne ki jarurat parthi hain to first target ko registeration
completion hote hi shoot ko terminate nahin karega. Jaise hi GPO “Target ___
recorded” kq report deta hain, us samay OP officer ko dwara wahin se shhot ko jari
rakhkar agale target ko appropriate target grid corredtion dekar registration karna
chhainye. Is procedure se jo sequence of initial orders dene ki jarurat nahin.

18 Re-recording a Target. Fire plan ke duaran OP officer ko target ka registration

karna chahta hain to initial order ke sath jo pahle se record kiya tha us ke reference ke
sath shuru kar sakta hain. Aur registration khatam hone ke bad “Re-record as
target.............." order ke sath same target number ka istemal kar sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
379
Registration of Various Types of Targets

19. Registration of targets ko aamtour par ke procedure Chapter IV samjaya gaya.

Nimnlikhit baten fire plan ke registration mein diya jana bahut jaruri hain : -

20. Concentrations.

(a) Agar kisi target ko registration karna hain to OP officer ka aim yeh hona
chahiye thaki woh target ki grid reference target area ki center mein ho, jis se
observer ko jitne bhi uske pass fire units available unke fire ko target ke center
mein hi MPI ko adjust karsaken.

(b) Agar target ke shape irregular mein hain to individual batteries ko fire
karwakar adjust karna chahiye.

21. Standard Linear Concentrations.

(a) Is ka aim hain shooting se center point ke location ko find out karna.

(b) Registration of point ke liye shoot normal tarike se conduct kiya jayega.
Jab observer ko center point ka sahi adjusted ho gaya hain to target ko record
karne ke liye order dega, eg, “Record as target M 3647. Centre point, linear
400,bearing 230”.

(c) Artillery Commander jo fire plan ko banata hain weh IAFB 930 mein linear
bearing aur length ko record karega ya weh ground par linear layout ko indicate
karega aur bearing ko calculate karne ke liye batayaga.

(d) Jab OPs gun data ko calculate karta hain yeh jaruri hain ki flank gun se fire
karke bearing ko confirm karta hain, yeh tab ho sakta hain jab time aur tactical
surprise permit hon.

22. Smoke Screens. Iski baremein chapter IV mein explain kiya gaya hain. Agar
smoke fire karni hain to register karne ki jarurat nahin. Niche likhe gaye procedure ko
follow kiya jayega :-

(a) Task table table ke andar target number aur time for screen ke bare mein
remarks column likha rahega “Details later” .

(b) Jaise hi firing ka time nazdik aata hain to smoke point one ka bearing,
distance, number of points, lay outs aur rate of fire ka order gun ko karega. Yeh us
time par ke met condition ke upar depend hoga.

(c) Jis samay par smk fired karna hain gun posn mein fuze length predict kiya
jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
380
SECTION 92 - FIRE PLAN ORDERS

Verbal Orders

1. Artillery commander detailed fire plan ko fire plan order mein convert karega.
Quick fire plan mein FOO sabse lowest level l banata, udharan ke liye registration ke liye
fire order de sakta hain. Is ke liye koi set form nahin. Yeh order officer to officer diya
jata hain jis ka meaning perfectly clear hona chahiye. Verbal order dena suggested
procedure is prakar hain :-

"Mike target, fire plan".

“Target P 7543, 124468, ht 350 m, oscar 260, fetch officer".
(To GPO) target P 7542, platoon locality, H to plus 5, rapid".
“Target P 7543, En Guns, on call, 5 RGF”.
“H hour not before 1030. Synchronise. Time Signal.............. (watches are
synchronised).
“Any questions”.
“Fire” (officers hand set ko radio operators ko deta hain).
(Ranging continues).
“Record as target P 7543”.
(When P 7543 has been recorded the observer continues with P 7542).

2. Jab quick fire plan ke liye ek regiment available hain to FOO fire plan banayega,
Para 1 mein diye gaye procedure ko badli karna ho to target ko register karne ke liye,
time available, availability of guns, communication aur OPs available par nirbhar hain. Is
procedure ko decide karte samay Para 13 of section 87 ko dhyan mein rakhen.

Task Table (IAFB 930)

3. Quick fire plan aur delibrate fire plan jo task table (IAFB-930) mein use karte hain
easy reference ke liye MACHHLI ke naam se jante hain jo radio aur telephone set mein
standard name ko always use karte hain.

4. Har artillery officer fire planning ko, apne equipment ke sath carry karta hain.
Jarurat ke anusar task table ke copies prepare karke aur concerned unit ko issue karta
hain.

5. Quick fire plan keliye task table mein jo example diya gaya usmein ek field
regiment aur ek medium battery jo ki S battery ko refered karti hain. Jis ko table LIII mein
dikhaya gaya hain. Battery commander apne concerned field regiment ko 90 rounds per
gun aur medium battery ke liye 20 rounds per gun covering firing ke liye allot karta hain.

6. Method of Completion. Nimn likhe points ko task table mein nichay tour se
compile kiya jana chhainye:-

(a) Headings :-

(i) Originator. Yeh heading us person ko dharsatha hain jo ki

particular serial mein doubt hone se jisse refer kar sakte hain. Radio dwara
beja jaraha hain to call ko jarur istemal kiya jayega.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
381
(ii) Fire Plan. Fire plan ke liye agar chahye to allot kiya jayega aur
entry kiya jayage.

(iii) Task in Support of. Unit ya formation jisne fire plan ko tayar
kiya hain us ko opertation ke code word ke sath dikhaya jayega.

(iv) “H” hr. IAFB-930 ko radio se transmitted kiya jaraha hain to H Hr

ko seperately beja jayega.

(v) Date, Time of Origin. Yeh “Staff Duties in the Field” Chapter V
mein diya gaya hain, eg, 030630.

(vi) Authority to Modify. Jo fire plan banaya hain usko authority hain
ki fire plan ko modification ka. Commanding officer ya battery commander
ko delegating kar sakta hain.

(vii) Anchor OP at. Anchor OP ke baremein sabko khas kar CPs ko

malum hona chahiye. Is ke grid reference ko encoding karke radio pass
kiya jayega.

(b) Serial [Column (a)].

(i) Is column ko dene ka matlab hain agar kisi particular target ko

modification kar saken. Yeh sirf target number dene se sufficient nahin
hoga.

(ii) Alag alag types of engagement, alag alag samay aur ammunition
ke liye alag alag serial number dena jaruri hain. Yeh Remarks Column ke
compication ko avoid karne ke liye aur gun position mein speedy work ke
liye madad milta hain.

(c) Timings [Columns (b) and (c)]. Yeh sab proper chronological order
mein dena chahiye jo is prakar ke sequence mein hain:-

(i) Jahan tak timed fire plan ko start karne ka jis mein start chahiye. Jo
time start hota hain woh timing pahle enter hona chahiye. Rate “normal”
aur usse upar diya gaya aur har ek fire unit ek minute ka pause dena
chahiye closed serial ke beech mein.

(ii) Concentrations on call.

(iii) DF task, yeh sab se last mein hona chahiye.

(d) Target Numbers [Column (d)]. Target ka number haphazard order mein
hona chahiye. Sabhi target ko number mile hue hote hain, jo target ek line mein
hota hain unko grouping kiya jata hain aur har ek grouping ko ek nick name diya
jata hain jo remarks column mein entry kiya jata hain.

(e) Grid Reference and Height and/or Description [Column (e)]. Predicted
fire ke llye data eight figure grid reference aur height hona jaruri hain . Yeh data
dena jaruri hain nahin hain to target ko registration karna jaruri hain agar pahle se

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
382
recorded target hain woh six grid reference aur description kafi hain. Yeh six
figure grid reference radio dwara CP ko pass karna jaruri nahin hain. Yeh IAFB
930 mein shamil hona chhaye jo ki supported arm commander ko diya jata hain.

(f) Units to Engage [Column (f)].

(i) Simple quick fire plan jo regt level hota hain us samay Column (Unit
to engage) mein Sub unit jo target ko engage kar raha hain us ko entry
karna chahiye.

(ii) Deliberate fire plan mein out sources se mile hue unit ka ideal size
aur type woh unit mention hona chahiye. Lekin unit ka naam originator
dwara IAFB 930 mein mentione nahin hoga. Originator type of unit mention
karega. Example Field, Medium, Yeh information timed rate of fire ke liye
malum hona jaruri hain. Isse malum padta hain ki konsi type ke artillery
target ko engage kar raha hain.

(g) Ammunition [ Column (g)] . Jab hum verbal orders , HE dete hain is
ka matlab hain HE DA Fuze ka istemal kiya jayega. Agar fuze mein change karna
hain to fuze ka naam shell ke sath diya jayega., eg, ‘VT”, ‘Airburst”, “Delay”, “Cap
on”.

(h) Rate [Column (h)] . Rate ammunition ki availability par nirbhar karti hain.
Yeh ammunition ke expenditure par calculate kiya jata hain. Ammunition nimn
likhit baton ko dhyan rakhte hue allot kiya jata hain :-

(i) Timed programme.

(ii) Concentrations “on call’, including DF and DF (SOS) tasks.

In dono ki anupath enemy ki information par depend karti hain. Normally yeh
25% of On call target se kam nahin ho sakta hain.

(j) Remarks [Column (J)]. Is column mein pahle registrated target nick
name koi special instructions Sweep aur search entry kiya jata hain.

(k) Ammunition Expenditure. Ammunition expenditure calculation kle liye

teen column diya gaya hain. Yeh officers ko correct rate of fire dene mein madad
milta hain. Aur aummunition availability se jyada exceed nahin hoga. Ammunition
calculation officer karta hain (eg, total rounds, rounds per gun, per battery,
regiment). Figure 37 mein is method ko istemla kiya gaya hain :-

(i) Ammunition expenditure column ke andar jo figure likhata hain is

formula ke upar nirbahr hain :-

Time X Number of batteries to engage X Rate of fire/Total number of

batteries of that equipment.

(ii) In figures ko total karke number of batteries ke sath divided karen,

ie. Field 3, Medium 1, rounds per gun milega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
383
7. Transmission of the Task Table. Deliberate fire plan ke andar artillery
commander coordination karane ki responsible hota hain, Quick fire mein transmission
bhi time work out karne ka ek factor hain.

8. Har fire unit ke andar two quick fire plan copies ko DR ke hath mein bajta hain aur
column F ko HQ control karta hain.

9. Task table ko radio set ke jariye bhi bhej sakte hain. Yeh tab hosakta hain jab
hamara pass transmission available ho is ke baremein STAA, 6/69 mein diya gaya hain.

10. Koi bhi ek method se task table jitna jaldi hosake CPs mein pahunch jana
chahiye. Agar pahle se hi CP mein fire plan milgaya to uske baremein preparation
karna chahiye. Duplicate orders pass karke drill ko coordinate yani tej karna hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
384

TABLE NO L III : TASK TABLE

FIRE PLAN : MOTA HATHI TASK IN SP OF 1 SIKH H HR

ORIGINATOR : BC 193 FD BTY ANCHOR OP ATGR 653784 DATE, TIME OF ORIGIN 020630
AUTHORITY TO MODIFY CO 1 SIKH

SER TIME (MINUS) TGT NO GR & HT DESC UNITS TO AMN RATE REMARKS AMN EXP
NO ENGAGE (NOT FOR
TRANSMISSION)
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (j) FD MED MOR
1 Minus6 6 M5313 73102396 210m X rds P&Q BTY HE N P Superimposed 16 - -
2 Minus3 9 M5510 73318527 245m Farm R BTY HE N One Gun Smk 8 - -
3 Minus3 9 M5312 73418888 256m Wood S BTY HE N - 12 -
4 7 15 M5314 73458790 245m Hedge Q BTY HE R Conc 8 - -
5 10 15 M5312 73418888 256m Wood Q&R BTY HE N P Superimposed 7 - -
(AB)
6 16 25 M5316 734863 ALL HE N 45 register with 12 - -
AB linear 400 Bg
1250
7 26 35 M5317 73588614 250m Jungle P,Q,R BTY HE N, MED, 18 3 -
V
SLOW
8 ON CALL M5318 P,Q,R BTY HE 5RGF DF - - -
NIMBUPANI
9 ON CALL M5319 73588641 260m Truck S BTY HE Scale 5 RPG 69 15 -
Reserve 21 05
Allocation 90 35 -

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
385
SECTION 93 - BRIEFING OF ANCHOR OBSERVATION POST OFFICERS,
FORWARD OBSERVATION OFFICERS AND COMMAND POSTS

1. Tactical plan banate samay supported arm commander yeh discuss karta hain ki
attack ke liye kitne FOOs aur Anchor OPs ka jarurat hain. Artillery commander allot karte
samay niche diye gaye baton ka dhyan rakhte hain :-

(a) Ab fire plan ke observation ke liye Anchor OP jarurat is task ko anchor OP

se FOOs achha hain ya done OPs ka milkar jarurat hain.

(b) Attack ke duaran observed fire keliye kitna arrangement kiya gaya.

(c) Kitna jarurat observer ko chahiye dushman ko capture karne ke liye. Kitne
jarurat hain artillery support ka re-organisation ke dauran.

(d) Kis type ka ilaqa.

Anchor OPs

2. Anchor OP woh OP hain ek hi jagah aur is ka jarurati ilake ke upar nirbhar karta
hain. Lagatar observation ke liye aur FOOs assaulting troops ke sath move hota hain
niche diye gaye points anchor OP ka kaam hain :-

(a) Observe karna aur jarurat padne par fire plan ke duaran fire ko correct
karna.

(b) Jo chalne wala aur samachar ka operation ke progress ke bare mein

batana.

(c) Jarurat padne par unforeseen targets ko engage karta hain.

(d) Jarurat padne par modificagtions ke liye artillery commander madad karta
hain.

3. Anchor OPs tactical aur fire plan ka pura details aur OT bearing nikalna aur CP
mein pass karega. Agar jarurat padne par correction dena. Jarurat p[adne par jaldi
action hoga.

FOOs

4. FOOs assaulting troops ke sath move karte hain. Woh assaulting troops ke saath
objective par jaate samay dushman ka khas dhyan akarshit karte hain aur dog fight mein
shamil hone se artillery fire ko call ya adjust nahin kar paate hain. Kai baar yeh jyada
upyogi hoga ki FOO objective se pehle suitable site par rahe jahan se woh dushman ko
tatha assaulting troops ka progresss dekh sake aur fire la sake. Yeh ek exception hain
aur yeh rule nahi hona chahiye. FOO party ne objective ke capture par assaulting troops
ke saath turant milna chahiye. Woh nimn likhit task karte hain :-

(a) Assaulting troops ko artillery ke bare mein batayega.

(b) Preplanned targets ko jarurat padne par fire ko correct karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
386
(c) Impromptu targets ko engage karne ke liye superimposed fire unit(s) ko
istemal karega.

(d) Jarurat padne par modification ka request karega. .

(e) Tactical information ko pass karega.

(f) Asaulting troops apne objective par hain to artillery support karega.

5. Agar ho sake to FOO sub unit commander ke sath jiske sath woh attack ke
samay supported arm commander ke order ko attend karega. Kuch bhi ho ya kisi karan
se jab samay kam hain woh apane order radio ya sub unit commander ke through de
sakte hain. Artillery commander ensure karega ki FOO jis sub unit ke sath sufficient
time de raha hain our apane ko us task ke sath organize karliya hain. Observer, FOO
jab nahi hain registration keliye karwai karega. Observer ke briefing is prakar hain :-

(a). Tactical plan ke bare mein.

(b) Fire plan ke bare mein aur khas kar :-

(i) IAFB 930 ko receive karega.
(ii) Aur record rakhega fire plan aur unke map main.
(iii) Konse fire units superimposed hain us ke bare mein jankari hasil
karega.

(c) Fire plan ko modify karne ki authority kis ke pass hain.

(d) Impromptu targets ke liye fire calling karne keliye koi restriction to nahin.
(e) Jab objective ke pass pahunch jata hain us samay registration of DFs aur
koi tasks hain to carried out karega.
(f) Kab aur kahan assaulting troops ke sath milna hain.
(g) Supported arm ke sath communication .
(h) Restrictions agar vehicles ko istemal karne main.
(j) Relief.
(k) Jrurat padne par special signal instructions khas kar artillery nets ko
istemal karega .
(l) Administrative arrangements.
CPs

6. Artillery commander Adjutant our GPO ko out line tactical plan ke bare mein brief
karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
387
SECTION 94 - DF PLANNING

Introduction

1. Defensive fire ka aim enemy ke attack ka sabhi phases recce ke final assualt tak
fire karna hota hain. DF tasks ka nimn likhit bant hain :-

(a) DF in Depth. DFs ka selection enemy ki attack preparation ko disorganise

karna aur casualty karna hain aur uski reserves ya follow-up echelons ki harkaton
ko rokhna hota hain.

(b) Close DFs. DFs ka selection enemy attack ko break karna hota hain, jab
forming up hota hain, start line ya actual assault mein.

DFs in Depth

2. Brigade ya divisional level par planned kiya jata hain. Brigade commander
suggest kar sakta hain jo bhi suitable targets hain apne direct support battery
commander ke through.

Close DFs

3. Battalion commander plan karta hain direct support battery commander ke advise
par. In mein se kuch friendly forces ki nazdik hote hain our artillery commander ki duties
hain ki woh iski implication battalion commander ko bateyen jo ki friendly forces ki safety
se related hain. Factors jo ki consider karna chahiye close DF advice karne ke liye.

(a) Weapon ka Calibre .

(b) Weapon ka Zone aur line of fire.
(c) Map aur survey ki accuracy .
(d) Predicted fire ki accuracy.
(e) Meteorological data ki accuracy aur availability.
(f) Friendly forces ki degree of protection.
4. Close DFs jo ki map se selct kiye jate hain unke jariye jaldi register karna chahiye
jaise ki friendly forces ko kam se kam possible danger ho Jaruri nahin ki close DFs apne
position par plan kiye jayen, halaki generally task in depth forward position ke biche hota
hain.

5. DFs aur close DF tasks itana limited hona chahiye ki jab bhi possible ho, ek
battery CP apane current CP equipment se effectively handle kar saken. Approx 10
targets hamesha upto date predicted data aur 30 map data halaki automated FCI se
number of DFs jo ki ready hote hain jyada kiya ja sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
388
6. DF (SOS).

(a) Supported arm commander woh close DFs select karne jo ki most
dangerous line of approach ko cover karte hain. Inhein DF (SOS) kehte hain.

(b) Ek fire unit ko ek close DF as a DF (SOS) task allot hota hain. Isiliye aisa
task ko direct support mein available artillery fire unit par depend rehta hain.

(c) Jab engage na kar rahen hoti hain tab DF(SOS) ko allotted gun load karke
SOS par lay kiya jata hain.

Grouping DFs

7. Jab DF tasks tactically inter-related hoti hain tab une group karke simultaneous
engagement ke liye ek nickname diya jata hain.

Passage of DF Target Lists

8. Direct support battery commander isse complete karke CO, the battery CP aur
adjutant ko inki copy bhejta hain.

9. Agar emergency na ho to is target list ko kabhi bhi clear mein radio par pass
nahin karna chahiye. Agar intercept hojayen to aise DF plan own troops ke likely
position ke pata lag sakta hain.

10. Co-ordination. Direct support BC jo DF task bhejta hain unhe CO baki

battalion ke sath coordinate karta hain. CO DFs ko group karta hain, DF task in depth
enter karta hain (brigade commander ke request par) aur regiment ka DF task table
banata hain jo ki BC ke dwara banaya gaye task table ko supersede karta hain, Isse jald
se jaldi HQ Artillery Brigade mein bheja jata hain. Taki isse Divisional DF plan mein
include kiya ja saken.

Calling for Fire on DF Tasks

11. DF par fire call karne ki authority standing order main laid down karni chahiye. DF
(SOS) par fire karwane ki authority generally battalion commander apne company
commande ko deta hain, jo ki affected ho. DF ko kitne bhar repeat kiya ja sakta hain
yeh bhi limit karna chahiye, bine artillery commander ki reference ke. DF ke liye call ka
response bhi laid down hona chahiye. Standing orders mein taki number of round gun
fire fixed ho.

12. Jaruri nahin hain ki DF aur DF(SOS) aur fire unit ke liye IAFB 548 mein entry kiya
jane per, DF list mein hona chahiye (GPO ki asani ke liye observer target number ke bad
DF mention karega, eg. Battery target. Target M 1234 (DF), Fire]

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
389
SECTION 95 - DUTIES AT THE REGIMENTAL HEADQUARTERS

Orders

1 . Fire plans ke liye orders aise receive kiya ja sakta hain :-

(a) Deliberate Fire Plans Originating at Divisional Level. Jis prakar

operation ka order map traces task tables aur target lists se diya jata hain. Task
table regimental timings rate or fire etc ke allotment ko show karta hain. Map,
traces, target list aur task tables gun area mein receive kiya jata hain, two per RHQ
two per Bty CPs.

(b) Deliberate and Quick Fire Plans at Regimental Level. IAB 930 aur DF
lists, despatch rider ya radio par bheja jati hain. Adjutant ko yadi battery ke liye
jaruri copies na mili hain to woh une photocopy karwake bhejta hain.

2. Jab fire plan ke orders mile hain to adjutant battery ko warning order bhejta hain
taki sight test aur preparation of ammunition shuru ho sake.

3. Adjutant phir batteries ko task allot karta hain, task table prepare karta hain aur
target list ke sath bhejta hain.

Control of Fire

4. Adjutant regiment ka fire control karta hain:-

(a) Programme ke start aur end ke milap aur alag-alag phases ka milap.

(b) Modifications ka order pass karna (Section 96).

5. Fire Plan ke shuru hone se pahle Battery’s ko time signal bheja jata hain phir
adjutant fire ko control karta hain.-

(a) Simple fire plan GPO control karta hain.

(b) Kisi bhi important serial ke liye aur opening serial ke liye fire ko control
karta hain jaise ki beginning of phase, Adjutant time remaining ke issara karta
hain count down procedure se karta hain . GPO appropriate time per fire ka order
deta hain.

(c) Kisi bhi programme ke end mein ya kisi bhi serial ke accurate talmel ke liye
ensure karta hain ki firing correct time par bandh ho. Adjutant ke liye jaruri hain ki
woh pahle se GPO ki indicate Karen ki woh kis level tak control exercise karna
chahte hain. Agar communication fail ho jata hain to tal mel ki ki zimmedari GPO
par aati hain, jo ki is tal mel ko ghadi mila kar karta hain.

6. Aadhesh milne par, Adjutant divisional artillery headquarters ko report karta hain
ya apne representative ko jo ki attacking troops ke sath hota hain jaise fire plan ka last
round fire ho jata hain fire plan ka koi bhi phase fire kar diya jata hain. Report.............
(nickname or serial) all gone di jati hain. Isi tarah ki report GPO aur adjutant ke beech
bhi use hoti hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
390
SECTION 96 - DUTIES AT BATTERY COMMAND POSTS

Preparation

1. GPO ko Fire Plan ke orders milne ke bad nimnlikhit taiyarian gun position pe
karwata hain :-

(a) Fire plan ke serial ke mutabiq ammunition preparation.

(b) Sight testing.

(c) Checking of parallelism.

(d) Reserve CP ko alert karwana aur gun data prepare karne ka data dena.

2. GPO kisi bhi troop leader ko regisration shoot ka firing ki jimmevari de sakta hain.
Jiski wo taiyari ki dekhrekh kar saken.

Organisation of Work

3. Command post ke andar organization hone chahiye. Jisse ki gun programme

banane ke kaam bina galti ka aur teji se hon. Yeh plan ke liye is chapter ke Section 94
mein diya gaya hain.

4. Har ek kam alag se check hona chahiye. Buniyadi checks Section 94 mein diya
gaya hain.

5. Simple fire plan ke liye GPO reserve CP ka istemal karta hain. GPO firing CP
ka staff bada sakta hain, jo GPO ka fire plan banata hain.

6. Deliberate aur complex quick fire plans ke duaran agar GPO chahte hain to
reserve CP ka istemal kar sakta hain,dhyan rahe ki firing CP ne jo target register kiya
unka data reserve command post mein turant de.

Control of Fire

7. Simple quick fire plans ke duaran GPO guns ko order fire plan form table IV aur
fire by order ka istemal karke deta hain.

8. Complex fire plans aur har tarah ke Deliberate fire plans ke duaran gun
programmes (IAFB 1042) banaya jayega. Yeh gun programme form Nos 1 ko firing se
pahle 15 minutes diya jata hain. Detailed order jab tak Nos 1 ko gun programme nahin
milta tab tak dete nahin. Preparation of ammunition ka order badmein diya jata hain.

9. Quick fire plan ke duaran mouka milne par aur delibrate fire plan ke duaran har
bar Nos 1 ko CP mein bhulakar GPO brief karta hain.

10. Opening serial aur mahatvapurva shoot ko GPO control karta hain. GPO akhri
serial ko bhi control karta hain, jis mein ki synchronisation ki avasyakta hoti hain. Nos 1
must be warned of such serials.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
391
Conduct of the Shoot

11. Timings. Task table mein diya gaya waqt guns ko fire karne ka hota hain. Jab
TOT order mila hain tab TOT par gola target par girna chahiye. Dhyan rahe aakri shoot
task table mein diye time se late nahin hona chahiye.

12. Agar battery superimposed hain tab GPO ko dusre target engage karne ke liye
taiyar rehna hoga.

Adjustment of MV During a Fire Plan

13. Medium ya heavy equipments ke liye yeh jaruri hain ki GPO MV ko firing ke
duaran no of fired EFCs ka basis per adjust Karen. GPO ko dhyan rakhna hoga jab MV
ke badlav ki wajah se range mein 50 meters ke diff padne wala gun programme mein
isko badli kiya jayega.

Resting Guns During a Programme

14. Agar weather jyada garam ho aur rate of fire jyada ho tab guns ko rest dena jaruri
hain.

15. Long firing ke duaran har ek guns ko rest dena jaruri hota hain nimnlikhit baton ko
dhyan rakhen :-

(a) The length of the programme.

(b) The rate of fire.

(c) The climate.

(d) Frequency aur important serials ke lambai jismein sare guns ko fire karna
jaruri hota hain.

16. Nimn likhit table ek standard format hain jo ki hamen gun ko rest dene ki jankari
deta hain :-

P Q R S
Time in minutes Battery Battery Battery Battery
(if applicable)

0-20 - - No guns -
20-30 Number 1 Number 2 Number 3 Number 4
30-40 2 3 4 5
40-50 3 4 5 6
50-60 4 5 6 1
60-70 5 6 1 2
70-80 6 1 2 3
80-90 1 2 3 4

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
392
17. Yeh system 80 minutes ke karyakram ke liye suitable hain thatha rate of fire
normal ho.

18. Duties at the Originating Headquarters. Originating headquarters ke liye jari

aadhesh mein is standard system ke programme mein modification kiya ja sakta hain,
e.g,

" Serials 1, 7, 10 mein koi gun rest nahin karegi", yeh sab very important serials
hain.
or
" 0 to 10 tak koi gun rest nahin karegi. Uske bad one gun in each battery har 5
minutes ke liye ek gun rest karegi, jab ki rate of fire yada ho.

19. Duties at the Battery Command Post. GPO nimnlikhit ke liye responsible
hain :-
(a) Rest ke time gun programme ke remarks column mein entre hona
chahiye.

(b) Yeh ensure karna ki guns jo time diya hain uske mutabiq rest karaha hain
aur vapis suru horaha hain .

(c) Agar kisi karan se programme mein koi gun out of action ho gaya to rested
guns ko resume karwana.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
393

TABLE IV : GPOs FIRE PLAN

TIME AMN CH BG LINE CORRECTION A/S DISPLACEMENT OR GUN CORRN FZ OR ELVE METHOD DESCP
CORR OF FIRE
FROM TO CONC DISP TOTAL
CORR POSN DISP TOTAL
N CORRN CORRN
MINUS 6 MIKE HE 3 2100 1 L10’ M1030’ M1020’ 1 +65 -70 -10
3 117 2 L35’ M50’ M15’ 2 +10 -45 -35
3 L20’ M15’ L5’ 3 -60 -15 -75 F 27 RGF 20”
4 M15’ L20’ L5’ 30’E 4 -60 +10 -50 B 7200 M1530
5 M35’ L55’ L20’ 5 -30 +40 +10 0
6 M20’ L1025’ L105’ 6 +60 +65 +125
7 15 BTY HE 2 2080 +70 +70
117 20’ +10 +10
-60 -60 F
30’E -65 -65 B 6025 16 RGF 20” M1536
-5 -5 0
-55 -55
16 25 BTY HE 3 2160
117
F
105’ B 6325 27 RGF 20” M2416
E 0

ON CALL MIKE HE 3 2000 1 L10’ M10 M50’ 1 +60 +80 +140

117 15’ 2 L15’ M45’ M30’ 2 +35 +60 +95
3 L30’ M20’ L10’ 1010 3 -20 +30 +10 F
4 L10’ L20’ L30’ ’D 4 -50 -30 -80 B 8000 9 RGF 20” M2416
5 M20’ L45’ L25’ 5 +60 -60 - 0
6 M35’ L10 L25’ 6 +80 -80 -

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
394

SECTION 97 - DUTIES AT GUN PLATFORMS

Preparation of Ammunition
1. Kyun ki programme ke samay time ki kami hoti hain, is liye ho sake to sabhi
ammunition ko programme start hone se pahle prepare karna hain.
Sight Testing
2. Time programme fire karne se pahle Sight test jarur kiya hona chahiye.
3. Programme ke dauran, har ek gun ke elevation ko periodically check karna
chahiye jisse ki sight ki adjustment ko sahi ensure kiya ja sake. Shoot ke kisi bhi stage
mein Troop Leader gun ke elevation ko field clinometer ki madad se check kar sakte
hain kyun ki har serial ki QE gun programme mein diya hui hoti hain.
4. Sabhi guns shoot start hone se pahle elevation ie range per lay hona chahiye.
Sabhi guns sahi elevation par selected serial per lay hone se elevation ko field
clinometer se measure kiye jayega aur gun programme mein remarks column mein entry
kiye jayega. Troop leader check karega field clinometer se serial ka sahi elevation laga
hua hain.
Guns Provided with Gun Rules and Fuze Indicators
5. Gun Rules. Gun programmes issue karne se pahle GPO sabhi Nos 1 ko gun
rule ke sath command post mein call karega. Sabhi serial ka QE/TE read karke check
karega, aur column No 10 mein entry karega. Nos 1 ke reading ko check karega, kyon
ki shoot ke dauran gun rule istemal hone ki jarurat nahin pade.
6. Fuze Indicators. Agar jab time fuze istemal hona hain to fuze indicator se fuze
setting nikalega aur firing se pahle gun programmes mein entry karega.
Duties of the No1
7. Number 1 ki zimmewari hain ki woh apni gun ka fire, GPO ke method of fire
control ke mutabik, control kare. No 1 ka duties is prakar hain :-
(a) Ammunition preparation karega.
(b) Sight test carry out karega.
(c) GPO dwara gun rule aur fuze indicators ko istemal karke gun programme
mein entry kiya hua entries ko check karega.
(d) Sabhi serial ke bearing, A of S, fuze setting aur elevation mein agar koi
change hain to usko order karega.
(e) Shoot ke duaran sight setting ko check karega.
(f) Gun ko rest, resume ke programme ke samay ke anusar order karega.
(g) Jab rest order hota hain, No 1 ensure karega ki uski sight current data par
correctly laid hain jisse ki order milne par programme ko at once resume kiya jo
sake.
(h) Jab gun rest mein hain to “Servicing when the gun is rested in action” ki
drill ko carryout karega.
(j) Calibrating sight ya gun rule ka order milne par MV indicator ko adjust
karega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
395
SECTION 98 - SIMPLE CONCENTRATIONS AND STANDARD LINEAR
CONCENTRATIONS

Simple Concentrations
1. Target kisi specified fire units se firing se engagement kiya jata hain to simple
concentration kehte hain. Line of fire parallel hogi agar concentration se sambhadid koi
order pass nahi nahi kiya ho. Line and range corrections individual gun ke liye ordered
kiya jayega agar OP officer each gun ko fire karke registration ki duaran adjust karega.
2. Agar conc ka regn planned nahin hua hain, fire plan banane wala officer apne
orders (verbal ya IAFB 930) mein 8 fig GR & Ht metion karega. Yeh eight fig GR GPO ko
indicate karta hain ki gun data ko predict kiya jayega.
3. Fire plan ke duaran concentrations istarah order kiya ja sakta hain :-
(a) Time programme ki part mein details of location, time aur duration of
engagement, ammunition, aur rates of fire.
(b) As concentrations “on call” giving location, duration of engagement, amn
aur rate of fire. Time engagement nahin diya jata kyonki on call tgt ko kabhi bhi
fire ke liye call kiya ja sakta hain.
(c) DF or DF (SOS) tasks ko alag se information ke sath tabulated hain jaise ki
serial (b) mein hain.
CP Drills for Deduction of Gun Data :-
4. Yeh drill is prakar carryout karenge :-
(a) Jo target firing se register kiya gaya hain :-
(i) Battery mein.
(ii) Dusre battery se.
(b) Jo targets jisko grid reference se predict kiya.
(c) Alag alag drill jaise method of control of fire ko hum neeche har ek heading
mein will discussed karenge.
Targets to be Registered by the Battery.

5. Jab simple quick fire plan GPO ke us fire plan ki madad se control kiya jatha
hain : -
(a) Normal registration procedures carry out kiya jata hain aur target ko record
kiya jata hain.
(b) Serial ke against GPO fire plan mein Tgt ka fired data aur line aur range
correction individual gun keliye enter kiya jayega.
(c) Agar fire plan 2 hours ke ander fire nahi hone par gun data ko reduce kia
jatha hain aur predict data ko programme ke execution ke time hone se pahle
calculate kiya jayega. Reduction aur prediction processes firing CP mein carry out
kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
396
(d) Deliberate/Complex Quick Fire Plan ko fire kiya jata hain to gun ko
gun programme issue kiya jata hain : -
(i) Normal registration aur target record procedures firing CP mein
kiya jata hain.
(ii) Target record data ko reserve CP mein gun programmes ko
banane keliye diya jata hain.
(e) As in (a) above, Agar two hours tak fire plan fire nahi huva to gun data
reduce kiya jayega aur fresh predict data ko calculate karke programme shoot
form mein enter kiya jayega. Reduction aur prediction process reserve CP mein
kiya jayega.
6. Agar registering Bty ne Mike and higher target ko register kiya hain to us
registering battery ki jimmmevari hain ki adjudent aur other CP ko target record ka data
circulate karega. Agar target as fired record huva hain to as fired grid reference jitna
jaldi hosake adjudent aur other CP ko circulate karega.
7. Targets Registered by Another Battery. Jaise hi reduced gird reference
aur as fired grid reference ka data CP mein ata hain, us ki drill is prakar ki jayegi :-
(a) Reduced grid reference milne par IAB 548 mein record kiya jayega aur
predict gun data ko GPO’s fire plan form aur gun programmes form mein entry
kiya jayega.
(b) "As fired” grid reference ko IAB 548 mein record kiya jayega aur gun data
work out kiya jayega. Jis keliye koi prediction karne ki koi jarurat nahi hain. Do
ghante ke bad yah data lapse ho jata hain. Iske bad koi karwai CP mein tab tak
nahin ki jayegi jab tak naya reduced GR registering bty se nahin mil jata.
8. Har ek case mein GPO reserve CP ko activate kar sakta hain, time ko bachane ke
liye. Yeh fire plan ke saraltha par nirbhar karti hain.

9. Targets for Which Data is Predicted from Grid References. Is prakar ka

Target fire plan ka kis hissa ho sakta hain aur GPO duara chune gaye method of fire ke
anusar circulation hota hain. Is data ko predict normal tariqe se kiya jata hain.

Completion of the GPO’s Fire Plan Form

10. Targets for Which Fired Data May be Used. Fired data ke entries directly IAB
548 mein kiya jata hain..
11. Targets to be Predicted from Target Records or an Eight Figure Grid
Reference. Normal process se prediction ko entry kiya jata hain aur fire plan form mein
predicted entry kiya jata hain.
Standard Linear Concentration
12. Fire plan banane wale officer firing dwara center point ko register karne ka order
de sakta hain, jis mein shoot ko normal register ke roop mein karai jayegi aur target data
ke lambai aur bearing aur linear target ke roop mein entry kiya jata hain. Yadi center
point eight figure grid reference diya gaya hain tab prediction ke method simple
concenration ki tarah hote hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
397
13. Chahe kisi bhi method se linear concentration ke center point nikala gaya hain,
target aur shooting corrections ka pura record taiyar kiya jayega. Yeh data directly
GPO’s fire plan aur gun pgme form mein entry kiya jata hain.

SECTION 99 - PROGRAMME SHOOT FORM AND GUN PROGRAMMES

Programme Shoot Forms

1. General. Is form mein six sections hain aur har ek form ka istemal kiya jata
hain (See Table LVII). Details is prakar hain :-
(a) Columns 1- 3. IAFB 930 se complete kiya jata hain.
(b) Columns 4-7. Deduction of A of S ke liye.
(c) Columns 8-14. Predicting centre point data ke liye.
(d) Columns 15-21. Predicting centre point data ke liye
(e) Columns 22-27. Jab gun rule ya calibrating sight ka istemal horaha ho
to tab final data ko deduce karne ke liye..
(f) Columns 28-34. Jab gun rule ya calibrating sight ka istemal nahin ho
raha hain tab, final gun data ko deduce karne ke liye.

2. Simple Concentrations. Agar fire plan orders mein specify nahin hain, guns
centre to centre data par “line of fire parallel” ki tarah fire karegi. Aisa karne se coln no
23 mein koi entry nahin ki jayegi.

3. Linear Targets. Column 24 aur 27 mein bearing aur range workout karne ke
liye column 23 aur 26 mein gun ka indl displacement corrn entry ki jayega.

4. Programme shoot form aur gun programme ko pura karne ke liye Table(LV)
mein drill, do artillery board aur ek officer, ek TA Havildar / JCOs aur do TAs par adharit
hoti hain. Is mamle mein yeh mana jata hain sabhi kam reserve CP mein kiya jata hain.
Local conditions ke anukul is drill ko parivartan kiya ja sakta hain. Yadi samay hain to
firing CP staff dwara check kiya ja sakta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
398
TABLE LV-DRILL FOR COMPLETION OF PROGRAMME SHOOT FORMS AND GUN
PROGRAMMES
GPO / Troop Leader Two TAs independently TA Hav / JCO
1.Distribute Task table form
1.Obtain a programme 1.Prepare one gun pro-
IAFB 930 one each to TA 3 shoot form for each serial gramme for each gun
and TA Hav. of IAFB 930 Complete completing Columns 1,
Columns 1 to 7, 10 and 15 2,3,4,11, 12 and if
for each target. necessary 13.
2.(a) Check Columns 7, 10 2.(a) Enter one accepted 2.Enter charge for each
and 15 ( tolerance 5 data as given out by GPO. target in Colunm 5.Check
minutes,10 minutes, and 25 Predict as far as Columns crest clearance aspect.
meters respectively). 14 and 21 (if meteor
telegram is available) and
check tolerance 5 minutes
and 25 meters.

(b) Order one accepted (b) In case of simple

data and charge for each concentration deduce
target position corrections for all
guns and enter at
columns.

(c) Carry out visual check (c) For linears deduce line
and supervise work and range corrections and
displacement corrections
for respective guns and
enter them at Columns
23 and 26. (TAI for Nos. 1,
2, 3 and 6 guns and TA 2
for Nos. 4, 5, 6 and 1
guns)
(d) Dono TA’s column No
24 aur 27 complete karte
hain aur apne programme
shoot forms GPO ya
Troop Leader ko dete
hain.
3. Complete gun programme
3. Gross error keliye check form programme shoot to
karta hain aur simple GPO or Troop Leader
concentratuion mein ek (Columns7, 9 and10 to be
form aur linear mein dono rounded off to 5 minutes and
form ko handover karta 25 meters).
hain
4. Gun program check
karta hain aur gun per
dene se pahle final check
ke liye CP mein deta hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
399
Notes :-
1. Yeh sabhi drill sirf simple aur standard linear concentrations ke liye applicable
hain.
2. Agar do aur jyada TAs available hain to per troop ek TA,TA HAV/ TA JCO ki
duty karega.
3. Columns 11 to 14 aur 22 to 24 nearest 1 minute mein bhara jayega.
4. Columns 16 to 21 aur 25 to 27 nearest 1 metre mein bhara jayega.
5. Columns 10 aur 16 nearest 5 minutes aur 25 meters mein bhara jayega.
6. Agar observed shoot mein target as fired record hain to column 24 aur 27
nearest 5 minutes aur 25 meter bharenge.
The Gun Programme
5. Task table form se (IAFB-930) data directly gun programme form aur programme
shoot form mein entry kiya jata hain.
6. Table LVII show karta hain ki gun programme completed for concentrations hain.

7. DF tasks [DF (SOS) tasks ke alawa] aur concentrations aam taur par gun
programme mein enter nahin karte hain. Is ka record Target Record Books (IAB 548)
mein maintain kiya jata hain ya target lists mein aur jab koi jaruri order hain to verbally
guns ko pass kiya jata hain.
8. DF (SOS) tasks ke liye Separate gun programmes issue kiya jata hain. Yeh gun
programe naya gun programe issue hone tak purane gun programme ko Cof M lagakar
upto date rakha jatha hain.
9. QE gun programme ke remarks column mein bhari jati hain. Jo QE diya hain us
ko field clinometer se troop leader check karta hain aur har ek serial mein ensure karta
hain ki sights hamesha usi prakar adjusted hona chahiye.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
400

TABLE VI : PROGRAMME SHOOT FORM

1 SER NO 2 8 15 MAP RANGE 6675
2 TGT NO M 3402 9 16 C OF M -120
3 AMN HE 117 CH3 10 MAP LINE 216015’ 17 SPHR(15+16) 6555
4 TGT HT 575m 11 COF M L5’ 18 PROJ CORRN -
5 BTY HT 450m 12 SPL(10+11) 216010’ 19 PHR(17+18) 6555
6 DIFF HT +125 13 DRIFT L21’ 20 NR +30
7 A/S 105’E 14 PRED LINE 215049’ 21 PRED RG 6585
1 2 3 4 5 6
22 PRED LINE 215050’ 215050’ 215050’ 215050’ 215050’ 215050’
23 (a) Concentration L20’ L20’ L5’ M5’ M10’ M30’
(b) Disp Corrn M30’ M20’ M5’ L5’ L20’ L30’
(c) Total (a+b) M10’ - - - L10’ -
24 Bearing (22+23c) 2160 0
215 50’ 0
215 50’ 215050’ 215040’ 215050’
25 PREDRG 6585 6585 6585 6585 6585 6585
26 (a) Posn Corrn +35 -10 +5 +20 -15 +40
(b) Disp Corrn -55 -35 -15 +15 +35 +55
(c) Total (a+b) -20 -45 -10 +35 +20 +95
27 Gun Rg (25+26c) 6565(6575) 6540(6550) 6575 6620(6625) 6605(6600) 6680(6675)
28 TE
29 MV Corrn
30 A of P
31 A of S(7)
32 A of D(30+31)
33 Jump
34 QE (32-33)

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
401

TABLE L VII : GUN PROGRAMME

IAFS-1042
DATE 20 SEP 07 BTY P GUN 1 NATURE OF PROP N
INTERPOLATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Time (Mins) Ammunition Switch A of S No Interval Remarks
from of (Secs)
Srl From To Shell Ch Fz
BG ELEV Bearing last line Elevation Rds
And Fz Setting
1 H 3 HE 117 3 2160 105’E 6400 23010 6 30
’

2 4 8 HE 117 3 L5’ 6600 12 20 Sweep 30’

BLANK 3 9 11 HE 213 3 22.1 L5’ 6200 4 30

4 11 15 HE 213 3 22.1 6200 12 20

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
402

TABLE LVIII : GUN PROGRAMME

IAFS-1042
DATE 20 SEP 07 BTY P GUN 1 NATURE OF PROP N
INTERPOLATION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Time (Mins) Ammunition Switch A of S No Interval Remarks
from of (Secs)
Srl From To Shell Ch Fz
BG ELEV Bearing last line Elevation Rds
And Fz Setting
a H 5 HE 117 3 211020’ M10’ 30’E 7175 230 15 20
b 5 7 HE 117 3 211030’ M15’ 35’E 7275 23035’ 4 30
c 7 9 HE 117 3 211045’ M15’ 35’E 7375 24010’ 4 30
d 9 11 HE 117 3 2120 M15’ 40’E 7475 24045’ 4 30
BLANK e 11 13 HE 117 3 212015’ M15’ 45’E 7575 25025’ 4 30
f 13 15 HE 117 3 212030’ M15’ 45’E 7650 25050’ 4 30
g 15 17 HE 117 3 212045’ M15’ 40’E 7775 26025’ 4 30
h 17 19 HE 117 3 2130 M15’ 40’E 7875 270 4 30
i 19 21 HE 117 3 213015’ M15’ 35’E 7975 27035’ 4 30
j 21 24 HE 117 3 213030’ M15’ 30’E 8075 27050’ 9 20

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
403
SECTION 100 - MODIFICATIONS TO FIRE PLANS

1. Supported arm commander hi aam tour par aisa person hain jo modification karne
ke liye authority de sakta hain. Phir bhi yahi authority kabhi kabhi artillery commander
ya fire plan orders mein offr nominate kiya jata hain.
2. Kabhi bhi concerned officer modification ke liye request kar sakta hain.
3. Modification ka order dene se pahle authorising officer ensure karen ki order ke
liye sufficient samay diya gaya hain, Jis par kam kiya jana hain. Har radio net par one
minute aur per battery position main three se five minutes ki jarurat hoti hain.
Terms Used
4. Fire plan mein modification aage ke pragraph mein diya gaya ek ya ek se adhik
terms aur fire plan ka nick name sahit nimnlikhit orders ka istemal karte hain. Unmein
modification karne ka request kiya jata hain.
(a) "Request Modify (fire plan nickname) ............... ". Is term ka upyog
fire plan mein modification chahta hain us officer dwara kiya jata hain. Jo bhi
ismein concerned hain, warning order ke tour par note karenge.
(b) “Modify (fire plan nickname) ...............". Yeh order fire plan ko change
karne ka executive order hain aur sabhi CPs is par amal karenge.
5. “Amend to Read”. Task table ke simple modifications ke liye istemal kiya jata
hain, eg :-
“Modify HOT DOG. Serials 4, 5 and 6. Amend to read Serial 4 from 10 to 20
minutes, 23 and 43 engage, rate normal. Serial 5 ................... and so on”.
“Modify HOT DOG (Nickname of fire plan). Amend to read H hour 1537 hrs”.
6. “ADD (or substract) ....................minutes to (or from) all timings”. Jab jyada
serial numbers involved hain to is terms ka istemal kiya jata hain. eg , “Modify Serials 10
to 20. ADD 10 minutes to all timings”.
7. “Stop”. Aam tour par istemal karte hain aur yeh shabd “Modify” ko nikalne
keliye istemal kiya jata hain, eg, "Request stop on HOT DOG” and "Stop on HOT DOG”.
8. “Restart” ka order dene par STOP ka order apane aap hi cancel ho jata hain aur
Koi ‘Go on’ ka order dene ki jarurat nahin hain, sivay GPO aur gun ke bich.
9. “Dwell at ......(time)”. Iska prayog tab kiya jata hain jab vishesh serial ya
serial ka awwadhi niyojit rate of fire par fire karna hain ya new rate of fire ko jari rakhna
hota hain. E.g, “Request modify HOT DOG. Dweell at 11 minutes. Rate very slow”. Is
order ka matlab hain ki jis rate par fire kar raha the woh cancel ho jata hain. Very slow
ka rate of fire lagoo hota hain. Yeh tab tak lagoo rahega jab tak order “Restart ____”
nahi mil jata.
10. “Restart at.... (time)”. Yadi programme jari rakhna hota hain to Stop aur
Dwell ko cancel karne ke liye istemal kiya jata hain, e.g, "Modify HOT DOG, ADD..........
minutes to all timings, Re-start at............ (time)”.
11. Is order se pata chalta hain ki nirdharit samay se programme ka yadi yehi jari
rakhna ki shuru mein aadesh diya gaya hain shivay iska sabhi samay mein nischaint
matra mein hi modify kiya jana hain.
12. “Cancel”. Yeh order indicate kata hain ki vicharadhin fire plan ya fire plan ka ek
bhag ko chod diya gaya hain. Jaise, “Modify HOT DOG. Cancel Serial 15”.
RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
404
Timings
13. Samay ke anusar modification order hamesha H Hour ke relation mein diya jana
chahiye, eg, “50 minutes, or minus 10 minutes’, and so on and not in terms of clock
hours.
Adjutant’s Duties
14. CP mein hone wali kisi bhi galti se bachne keliye adjutant modification of fire plan
sammandhi order milne par jarurat padne par vicharadhin order ko batteries ko bhejne
se pahle us mein target number ko jode , eg
"Modify HOT DOG, Dwell on U6506. Rate Very slow.
"Modify HOT DOG, ADD 30 minutes to all timings. Re-start on U7507 at 105
minutes".
"Modify HOT DOG, Dwell on U 7720 at 31 minutes. Rate slow".
15. Jab bhi battery yeh report kar rahi hain ki modification kar diya hain nahin hain to
adjutant modifoication order dene wale adhikari ko report karega (nick name or serial
number) modification kar diya gaya hain.
GPO’s Duties
16. Fire plan mein kisi bhi tarah se modify karne ki order milne par aur yadi samay
nahin hain to GPO available TA ya troop leader ko gun programme mein modify karne
ke liye bhejta hain. Yadi samay nahin hain to GPO modify verbally roop se gun ko deta
hain. Yeh CP se shoot ke tarah age ke bhag ko control karta hain.
17. Yadi niyukth samay tak “Dwell at .. “ ka order hota hain to GPO us niyukth samay
tak wait karta rehta hain aur iske bad order deta hain ‘Lift to line (or serial ) tak Gun fire
..... seconds” tak rakhen. Jab tak aage aadesh nahin diya jata hain tab tak gun
vicharadhin line ya serial par hi fire continue rahega.
18. Modification sammandhi kisi order ka pura hone par GPO adjutant ko report karta
hain (nick name or serial number) modified kar diya hain’.
Method of Correcting Fire in Fire Plans
19. Yadi sambhav hain to sabhi fire ko observed kiya jana chahiye. Yadi predicted
fire galat sthan mein aajata hain tab usse turant thik kardena chahiye.
20. Jyada serial wala fire plan mein khas serial par nigrani rakhne keliye vishesh roop
se observer tayanath kiya jata hain. Woh H hour se kafi pahle target ki OT bearing GPO
ko pass karega, taki GPO artillery board par bearing ko plot kar saken aur ek target se
dusre target par fire karne ke liye template ko shift kar sakeh. Aisa karne se jab kabhi
bhi correctionn ka order diya jata hain tab gun se reaction tej ho saken.
21. Fire ko nimn likhit tarike se corrected kiya jata hain :-
Example

“ 25 for all stations 3, Target M 1230 Oscar 45 ( if not already sent) Drop 100
over”.
or
"Hello 25 HOT DOG, Serial 3. Right 200 over”.
"25 HOT DOG , Serial 3 Right 200 over"

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
405
SECTION 101 - ALLOWANCES FOR ERRORS IN PREDICTION

Need for Allowances

1. Met telegram mein paye jane wale C of M mein galti hone ka aasanka rehta hain,
survey, calibration target ka grid reference mein bhi galti hosakti hain jiska karan MPI
target se hatkar hota hain. Line error kam hota hain.

2. Yeh galtian kam hoti hain. Isko istemal kar sakte hain agar nimnlikhit condition ho
:-

(a) Agar target ko registered aur engaged within two hours mein kiya jaye.

(b) Map 1 /25,000 ka ho C of M engagement ke liye datum datum point /

Microcora / Digicora methods mila ho.

3. Agar kisi karan yeh dono uppar wali condition nahin milti hain to kuch aise kadam
udhane chahiye jisse ki in errors ko dur kiya ja saken.

Factors

4. Nimnllikhit factor predicted fire mein allowance ko lagana chahiye ya nahin ke

decision ko affect karta hain :-

(a) Kya fire ko correct karne ke liye observation available hain ya nahin.

(b) Method of obtaining C of M.

(c) Accuracy of location of target.

(d) Kis hadh tak guaranteed aur effective hain.

(e) Target engage karne ke liye kitni guns hissa le raha hain.

General Principle

5. Predicted fire mein agar koi observation available nahin hain aur fire ka MPI
target par nahin hain tab is problem ko ek hi tariqa se thik kiya ja sakta hain. Aur woh
tariqa yeh hain ki guns ke fire dispersion itna ho ki woh pure target ko cover kar sake
chahe MPI target par ho ya na ho. Iska matlab yeh hain ki probable error of dispersion
yani PeC, probable error of accuracy i.e, PeA se jyada ho. Isi ka pura detail AT Vol III
pamphlet 5/76 mein varnan hain.

6. FU ka size jyada hone se PeC jyada hota hain aur PeA kam hota hain. Yani ki
agar koi FUs divisional artillery se choti hain to uska PeA hamesha jyada hoga PeC se.
Sirf artificial dispersion se hi PeC, PeA se jyada ho sakta un choti FUs ke liye. Yeh janna
jaruri hain ki agar PeA, PeC se jyada hain, to aisa ho sakta hain ki target ka kuch hissa
fire concentration ke natural dispersion ke bahar ho. Is liye predicted fire mein agar
inaccuracies ko observation ki madad se correct nahin kiya ja sakta tab nimanlikhit steps
liye jayege :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
406
(a) Target area ko Table LV ke hisab se bada karke jo ki unit ko size karta
hain, surevy ke accuracy aur met prapt karne ka tariqa par nirbhar karta hain.

(b) Jo fire unit lagaya gaya hain woh target ka pura frontage aur depth, apne
fire ke natural dispersion se engage karti hain. Agar target ka frontage ya depth
cover nahin kiya hain to jaruri hain ki isse artificial dispersion jo ki Para 11 se 18
ke tariae se cover kiya jaye.

Methods of Allowing for Prediction Errors

7. Do tariqe se prediction mein error ka allowance laga sakte hain :-

(a) Observation ke dauran correction dekar.

(b) Jab observation nahin hain, tab dispersion of fire ki madad se.

8. OP fire ko observation se correct kar sakta hain. Is ke kuch factors hain jo ki

sahi fire ko guaranteed nahin de sakte hain. Woh is prakar hain :-

(a) Survival of the OP party.

(b) State of communications.

(c) Difficulty in observation due to dust and smoke of battle.

(d) Depth ke target OP ko na dikhai de.

(e) Targets to be engaged at night, and so on.

Natural Dispersion

9. Ek concentration ka natural dispersion sufficient hota hain prediction mein error

ko cover karne ke liye. Natural dispersion field guns ka is prakar hain :-

(a) Battery : 150 meters by 150 meters.

(b) Regiment :-250 meters by 250 meters.

(c) Artillery Brigades :- 400 meters by 400 meters (Three regiments).

Artificial Dispersion

10. Jab natural dispersion kafi nahi hain to prediction mein error ko cover karne ke liye
fire ko artificially disperse kiya jata hain. Yeh artificial dispersion target location ke
accuracy par nirbhar karta hain ya C of M ya guns kitne hain par nirbhar karta hain. Yeh
Table LVIX ke anusar hain.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
407
Application of Allowances for Line
11. Dispersion of fire ke liye allowances apply karne ka line ke liye siddhant hain ke
MPsI ki line target par overlap hona chahiye kam se kam jaruri dispersion se, dono end
ke liye.

12. Do method se hum overlap ko achieve karte hain :-

(a) Sweeping. Koi bhi sweep ka order battery frontage se kam hona chahiye.

(b) Standard linear ka order karen jab ki target ka frontage battery ka frontage
se jyada ho dispersion factor apply karne ke bad.

TABLE LVIX - REQUIREMENT OF ARTIFICIAL DISPERSION FOR

UNCORRECTED PREDICTED FIRE

Artificial dispersion required on

either side for effective
engagement

Location of target Correction of moment one one Two or more

obtained from for predicted fire Battery Regiment Regiments

1 :25,000 Map Microcora Digicora Nil Nil Nil

Air Photo - Radial plot
Survey - SATA Bty / Regt Datum Correction Nil Nil Nil
(Theatre grid)
CB Location - J or Meteor telegram Line 100 Line 100 Line 100
W accuracy Range 200 Range 200 Range 200

1 Inch to 1 mile Map Microcora / Digicora Nil Nil Nil

Air Photo - Gridded vertical
Location of target Correction of moment one one Two or more
obtained from for predicted fire Battery Regiment Regiments

Survey -Regiments Survey Datum Correction Line 50 Line 50 Line 50

CB Location - Z or A Range 100 Range 100 Range 100
accuracy Reduced grid
reference Obtained by Meteor telegram Line 100 Line 100 Line 100
using meteor telegram Range 200 Range200 Range 200

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
408
13. Upper diye gaye ke udharan niche diya gaya hain :-

Example 1 Example 2
Figure 34 (a) Figure 34 (b)

(a) Target frontage 150 meters 150 meters

(b) Accuracy standard 1: 25,000 1 inch : 1 mile
(c) C of M By met telegram By met telegram
(d) Fire units One fd bty One fd regt
(e) Line dispersion required 50 meters either side 100 meters either side
(f) Frontage of artificially enlarged target :250 meters 350 meters
(g) Natural dispersion of fire unit :150 meters 250 meters
(h) Balance after deducting natural :100 meters 100 meters
dispersion for line of the battery
(j) Sweep required 100/2=50 meters 100/2=50 meters
(k) Order given “sweep 50" "Sweep 50" or
Linear 400"

LINE OF FIRE LINE OF FIRE

50M 50M 100M 100M

150M 150M

350M

SWEEP 50/ LINEAR 400

FIGURE 34

(b) Example 1 ke anusar agar C of M datum correction se prapth hain to

artificial dispersion ke jarurat nahin hain. Proof keliye Table LV dekhen.

(c) Usi tarah agar target ke frontage example 1 ke anusar 50 meter hain to
target ka frontage target artificially enlarge ya target 150 meter ke barabar honge.

Application of Allowances for Range

14. Iska maksad hain ki target ke depth ko cover karna jo prediction mein error hain
unko milakar (target ke depth line of fire se liya jata hain).

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
409
Dispersion Is effected by one of the following methods :-

(a) By Searching.

(i) As a Single Concentration. Figure 35

(aa) Target depth : 200 meters.

(ab) Accuracy standard : 1`/ 1 mile.
(ac) C of M : Datum Correction.
(ad) Fire unit : Regiment.
(ae) Range dispersion required : 100 m either side.
(af) Depth of artificially enlarged target : 400 meters.
(ag) Natural dispersion : 250 meters.
(ah) Balance (af-ag) : 150 meters.
(aj) Search required : 150
(ak) Order "Search 100"

LINE OF FIRE
100M

200M

100M

FIGURE 35

(ii) In Separate Concentrations.

(aa) Target depth : 450 meters.

(ab) Accuracy standard : 1125,000
(ac) C of M : Met telegram.
(ad) Fire unit : Regt
(ae) Dispersion required : 100
(af) Size of enlarged target : 650 meters.
(ag) Solution. Figure 41 mein , regiment ke teeno batteries ko 150
meters mein place karna hain aur "Search 100" ordered kiya jayega.

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
410

100M

150M 450M

100M
FIGURE 36

(b) By Directing Concentration of Different Fire Units at Locations in

Depth.
(i) By Increasing the Number of Fire Units.

(aa) Target depth 350 meters.

(ab) Accuracy standard : 1 inch: 1 mile
(ac) C of M : Datum Corrections
(ad) Fire unit : Regt.
(ae) Range dispersion required : 100 m
(af) Initial depth between MPsI : 100 M.
(ag) Size of enlarged target : 550 M.
(ah) Solution. Three fire unit ke bajai five fire units istemal hogi aur
har alag alag point par direct kiya jayega 100 meters ke distance par jo ki
figure 37 mein diya gaya hain .

100M LINE OF FIRE

2
INITIAL DEPTH
BETWEEN MPIs 1 350M
100M 3
5

100M
FIGURE 37

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
411
(ii) By Varying Depth. 15 (b) ke sabhi conditions same rehga aur
agar additional fire units available nahin hone par MPIs ka distance 200
meters tak increased kiya sakta hain.

15. Allowance for range error ke liye nimn likhit rules apply kiya jata hain :-

(a) Dispersion aisa hona chihiye ki range ke liye fire kuch hadh tak target ke
upar girna chahiye. Target agar jyada deep faila hain to use chote chote alag
concentrations se cover kiya jata hain, par dispersion hona chahiye har bhag par
direct kiye gaye fire unit ke size ke hisab se.

(b) Do MPI mein antar 200 m se jyada nahin hona chahiye, use searching se
cover karen ya separate concentrations se. Is ko figure 38 mein darshaya gaya
hain.

105/ 37 IFG
Mean fighting range - 11400
Charge -5
50% Length zone - 75 m

FIGURE 38

16. Dekha ja sakta hain ki agar MPsI jyada dur dur rakhe jayenge to distribution ek
jaisa nahin hoga. Isliye, Para 15 (b) mein dikhaya gaya problem ke liye limited fire units
ke beech distance increase karne ke bajay, jyada fire units istemal karna chahiye.

17. Agar ek se jyada concentrations target ke alag alag bhag par fire kar rahe hain to
unko alag alag grid reference ke sath indicate karne ke liye alag alag target number diye
jane chahiye lekin unko sabhi ko ek hi nickname ke sath group karna chahiye.

Application to Linears

18. Accuracy ke liye jo dispersion chahiye woh linear/barrage ke liye bhi simple
concentration ke barabar hain. Yeh mante hain ke target ke upar jitne guns
(superimposed guns ko chod kar) fire kar rahen hain, utne sabhi ka weight aa raha hain,
aur dispersion is hisab se calculate karte hain. Usually ek regiment ke liye hota hain.

19. Linears. Agar target area ko linear concentration se cover karna hain to
nimnlikhit points ko dhyan mein rakhen :-

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
412
(a) Target ke area ko side mein badaye jitna dispersion ke amount ka jarurat
hain.

(b) Yeh yakin karne keliye target rear ya front ko punishment karna hain to is
ke liye fire ki anter line short rakhen aur rear ke amount ismein plus Karen, jitne
dispersion ki jarurat hain.

(c) Fire ka depth ke liye ek saman distribution fire karne ke liye target area
200 meters ke antar par lines banaye jayenge. Figure 39 mein line 1 se 5 ke
beech 400 meter ke regimental tasks hain aur unke beech separation 100 meter
ka hain. 2 aur 4 no ki lines ko nikala ja sakta hain par agar kafi sankya mein guns
available hon to in lines ko bhi include karne se behtar distribution milega.

(d) Jab bhi yeh lines engage ki jayegi, sweep aur search ka order kiya jayega
target area ko cover karne keliye

DISPERSION REQUIRED
FOR LINE

5
4

3
DISPERSION
2 300M REQD FOR
RANGE
1

LINEAR 400

FIGURE 39

20. Large Area Concentration Agar OP officer planning karta hain large area ko
engage karne keliye massed fire distribution technique (MFDT) ko istemal karke table
LIX ke parameters ko dhyan mein rakhkar target ko artificially enlarge karke aur uske
bad engagement ke intersection ko read kiya jayega.

The Implications of Dispersing the Fire

21. The Rate of Fire. Fire ko disperse karne se density kam ho jati hain. For
example, agar ek battery small target ke upar simple concentration fire karke 200
meters ka search karegi to target ke upar pure fire ka kewal one third shells girenge. Is
liye agar one round per gun per minute shuru mein chahiye tha to ab rate of fire ko three

RESTRICTED
 RESTRICTED
413
rounds per minute karna chahiye. Agar search ke sath, sweep bhi order kiya hain to
rate of fire nine rounds per minute chahiye hoga target ko punish karne ke liye. Aise
maukon par asardar fire target ke upar observation ke bina dalna mushkil hain.

22. Lekin jab bade target ke upar jyada number of fire units fire karte hain to rate of
fire is tarike se increase karne ki jarurat nahin hain. For example, on a target of 200
meters frontage and 200 meters depth, jisko line ke liye 50 m aur range ke liye 100 m
dispersion chahiye aur two field regiments available hain to, three parallel linear
concentrations 300 meters lambe use kar sakte hain, 200 meters apart dur dur aur har
line ke upar two batteries ke sath. Is situation mein mana ja sakta hain ke target ko
substantial punishment ek se jyada linear concentration se milega, aur rate of fire double
ho jayega.

23. Is se pata chalta hain ke prediction ke errors ke liye fire ko failane se weight of fire
kafi kam ho jata hain, agar ammunition paryapt matra mein na ho. Is ka matlab ho sakta
hain ke kam targets ko engage kar sakenge; hamesha dhyan rakhen ke kam targets ko
behtar tariqe se engagekarna jyada faidemand rahta hain na ki jyada targets ko kam
asardar tariqe se.

24. Magar sabse jyada faida hota hain agar inaccuracy ko kam kiya jaye. Ise is
prakar kar sakte hain:-

(a) Location of Target. Agar map ki accuracy kafi nahin hain to air photos ya
sound ranging wagehra se ise behtar karna chahiye.If the standard of accuracy of
the map is not high, air photos, and if possible, facilities for obtaining locations by
the radial plot method, should be demanded in good time. Agar registration shoot
karna hain to ek ya ek se jyada datum point engage karne chahiye.

(b) C of M. Ek ya ek se jyada datum shoot lene se effective fire ki density

par kafi asar padta hain, aur guns aur ammunition ka istemal karne se jo hamein
faida hota hain uspar.

Validity of Making Allowances for Errors in Prediction

25. Battle field meinn artillery ke ahem role nibhane ke liye predicted fire mein
inherent inaccuracies ko cater karna fire planning ke dauran artificial despersion karna
OP officer ka jimmedari hain. Usi tarah kai halat hain jaise ki engagement of HF tasks,
DF tasks our CB tasks, jab fire ko correct karne keliye obsrervation nahi ho. Aise mein,
target ko hit karne keliye allowance for error in prediction nahi karne par ammunition
waste hosakta hainkyon ki inaccurate fire karne par woh ineffective fire rehegausse
enemy ka koi nukshan nahi karega.

RESTRICTED